AN GLE TE RRE ^^ A*>*i OCEAN ATLANTIQUE LA FRANCE sous L'AIMCIEN REGIME Kilometres t I 1 ■ 50 rOO ISO 200 CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 3 1924 076 024 615 Co/re du- The original of tliis book is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924076024615 La Republique FRANgAisE FRASER AND SQUAIR GRAMMAR SERIES NEW COMPLETE FRENCH GRAMMAR BY W. H. FRASER J. SQUAIR AUTHORS OF A SERIES OF FRENCH GRAMMARS AND A. COLEMAN UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO D. C. HEATH AND COMPANY BOSTON NEW YORK CHICAGO LONDON ATLANTA DALLAS SAN FRANCISCO OOPYRIGHT, I92I, BY D. C. Heath & Co. 3/5 PRINTED IN V. S. A. PREFACE TO THE REVISED EDITION The first American edition of this Grammar was published March 26, 1901. It was received with favor, and since that date numerous reimpressions have been made to meet the demands of the pubhc. The present revision has been undertaken for the purpose of introducing such changes as time and experience have suggested as likely to be useful, without however disturbing the original character of the book, or changing the paragraph nmnbers. The use of the phonetic symbols adopted by the Association Phon6tique Internationale has been retained throughout the book, wherever needed to aid in the teaching of pronunciation. The pronuncia- tion of aU French words in the French-EngUsh portion of the Vocabulary is given by phonetic transcription based upon the Dictionnaire Phonetiqite of MichaeUs and Passy. The most considerable changes have been made in the Exercises I-XXXIX of Part I, which have been rewritten by Professor A. Coleman of the Romance Department of the University of Chicago, who, with great unselfishness and in a spirit of admiration for the Grammar, has cooperated with the authors and pubhshers in their effort to make the book more useful to teachers and students. The grammatical part of each lesson remains substantially as it was in the original edition. In the Exercises an attempt* has been made, in accordance with advanced methods of teaching, to provide an abundant and varied apparatus for oral practice and for train- ing in accuracy of pronunciation, in writing from dictation, and in composition; also a section of useful Classroom Expressions has been introduced for the convenience of both teachers and stu- dents. In fact, it is everyTv^here emphasized throughout the book that learning to speak the language is of prime importance. The Vocabulary of Part I has been revised; words which are not of IV PREFACE common use have been excluded, and liberal provision has been made for drill on the uses and meanings of the words given. Attention is called to the following important new features of Parti: 1. In the Lesson vocabularies and in the text of the Exer- cises great emphasis is laid on Verb Forms, particularly on the learning of the forms and the use of a number of common irregular verbs. 2. The difficult topic of Tense Usage is especially dealt with, particularly the functions of the present, the imperfect, and the past indefinite forms in past narration. 3. A great variety of drill work and abundant opportunity for Oral Practice, based on continuous reading passages, have been provided. 4. Much stress is laid on the acquisition of a Working Vocabu- lary: (a) by abundant repetition and review of the vocabulary in the Exercises; (b) by pointing out differences in usage between words nearly alhed in meaning; (c) by the introduction of many common idioms; (d) by formal Review Exercises. T^ongst the new features to which special attention is directed are also the photographic reproductions of important buildings, parks, paintings, sculpture, etc., as well as the Map of France, the appearance of which here is due to the courtesy of the Literary Digest. The first thirty-nine lessons of Part I contain enough grammatical material for four semesters with younger pupils beginning in the Secondary School and for two semesters with beginning classes of High School seniors or of College freshmen. As a rule the A sec- tions are composed of passages for reading, which can also be used for dictation and oral practice, and the B sections of various types of grammar drill. These are followed by composition and trans- lation exercises, as well as by special exercises in pronunciation and dictation. In regard to the Exercises in Pronunciation in which phonetic transcription is employed, teachers must use their discretion. They may be omitted by those who regard them as unnecessary. There is httle doubt that it is sound pedagogy to spend enough time on the essentials of French grammar contained in these Les- PREFACE V sons of Part I to go tiirough them, or most of them, twice with great care; for it is only by such repetition, with abundant illustra- tive exercises, that beginners can acquire that trained sense for the correct fcmn of expression and the proper grammatical con- struction which is essential to a real knowledge of a foreign tongue. In Part I, Exercises XL -LI have been retained. They have been found useful as furnishing easy reading material in French as well as driU in elementary grammar, particularly in the regular and irregular verb forms. They may, like Exercises I-XXXIX, also be used in teaching by the direct method. Part II contains a comprehensive statement of the grammatical phenomena of the French language adapted for later study and general reference. The Exercises la-LXXVa in this Part have been retained with such changes and additions as seemed necessary or likely to be useful. The Exercises are of two kinds. Exercises la-La consist of detached EngUsh sentences for translation into French, based directly upon definite sections of the Grammar referred to in the headings and providing a thorough driU on all important points of grammar. Exercises Lla-LXXVa are pieces of continuous EngUsh prose of an easy character, to be translated into French, and are fuUy provided with references to the sections of the Grammar where the particxilar grammatical points are dealt with. The French Reader has been dropped from the present edition. A complete Index has been provided at the end of the book. By virtue of a decree of the French Minister of PubUc Instruction, dated February 26, 1901, certain deviations from commonly ac- cepted rules of grammar were permitted as optional at all official examinations. In the Appendix, on the last page, will be found a reference hst explaining the bearing of these deviations upon the various sections of the grammar affected thereby. As a matter of fact, it does not appear that careful users of the language, outside examination halls in France, have availed themselves to any extent of these permissions, and hence for Enghsh-speaking students they toay be regarded as practically non-existent. It will readily be seen that the aim has been to furnish students with a manual on French grammar so comprehensive in its theo- retical treatment and so varied and abundant in the exercises VI PREFACE offered, that it will be useful to all, whether ia the elementary or advanced stages of the study of modern or classical French. Special acknowledgements for suggestions regarding various parts of the book are due to Professor J. Home Cameron of the University of Toronto and to Professor G. D. Morris of Indiana University. The manuscript of the new Exercises to Part I was read by Messrs. Antony Constans and James Kessler of the Univer- sity of Chicago, by Miss Edna C. Dunlap of Parker High School, Chicago, and by Professor E. C. HiQs of Indiana University. To Professor Hills are due particularly thanks for excellent suggestions in regard to the order of the material. The authors are indebted also to Professor H. C. Lancaster of Johns Hopkins University and to Professor D. H. Carnahan of the University of Illinois for reading the proofs of Part I; to the Pubhshers for their hberal policy which made available all this invaluable assistance; and to Dr. Alexander Green of the Editorial Office, whose zealous efforts have contributed toward rendering the volume more accurate in contents and more attractive in appearance. October, 1920 CONTENTS PAGE Phonetic Introduction 1 Table of Spelling and Phonetic Symbols 13 Useful Classroom Expressions 14 PART I LESSON I. Definite Article. Gender. Case. Agreements ... 17 II. Indefinite Article 20 III. Possessives. Negation. Interrogation 23 IV. Pronoun Objects 26 V. Plural Forms. Possessive Adjective (continv^d) . . 28 VI. Present Indicative of avoir. Partitive Noun and Pro- noun. En 32 VII. Avoir (ccmtinued) . Interrogation {continued) .... 30 VIII. Present Indicative of etre 39 IX. Regular Conjugations: Present Indicative of donner. Interrogation {continued). Demonstrative ad- jective 43 X. Plural Forms. Contractions. Use of il y a .... 47 Review of Vocabulary and Pronunciation No. 1 . . 50 XI. Indefinite Pronoun on. Interrogation {continued). Present Indicative of fairs 52 XII. Feminine of Adjectives. Position of Adjectives. Interrogative Adjectives. Y 56 XIII. Present Indicative of donner, finir, vendre. General Noun. Tout 60 XIV. Partitives {contmmed). Avoir + Undeterminate Noun (besoin, etc.) 64 XV. Past Participles. Past Indefinite. Word-order. Idiomatic Present Indicative 68 XVI. Comparatives. Superlatives. Comparison of Ad- verbs. Present Indicative of aller 72 XVII. Agreement of Past Participle. Relatives 76 vii VIU CONTENTS LESSON PAGE XVIII. Tenses with Stre 80 Vocabulary Review No. 2 84 XIX. Pronoun Objects. Orthographical Peculiarities: commencer, manger, and mener 86 XX. Personal Pronoun Objects. Pronominal Adverbs: y, en. Reflexive Verb. Possessive Force of Article 90 XXI. Imperfect Indicative. Use of the Imperfect. Im- perfect of faire 94 XXII. Future Indicative. Use of the Future 100 XXIII. Disjunctive Personal Pronouns. Ce + etre .... 104 XXIV. Impersonal Verbs 107 Vocabulary Review No. 3 Ill XXV. Infinitive. Present Participle. Present Indicative of pouvoir. II faut 113 XXVI. Present Subjunctive. Use of the Subjunctive. Tense Sequence. Present Indicative of vouloir . . 119 XXVII. Imperative {contvKaed) . Position of Objects {continued) 124 XXVIII. Conditional Mood. Conditional Sentences .... 128 XXIX. Use of Article. Present Indicative of savoir .... 133 Vocabulary Review No. 4 137 XXX. Possessive Pronoims. Present Indicative of dire . . 139 XXXI. Demonstrative Pronouns 144 XXXII. Relative Pronouns. Present Indicative of connaitre. 148 XXXIII. Interrogative Pronouns 153 XXXIV. Indefinite Pronouns 158 Vocabulary Review No. 5 164 XXXV. Numerals: Cardinal, Ordinal. Fractions 166 XXXVI. Dates, Titles. Seasons, Months 171 XXXVII. Time of Day 176 XXXVIII. Past Definite. Use of the Past Definite 180 XXXIX. Imperfect Subjunctive. Tense Sequence. Meanings of devoir and vouloir 184 Vocabulary Review No. 6 188 AFrECDOTES XL. La Th^ifire du Matelot 190 XLI. L'Arabe et les Perles 191 XLII. Le Paysan et les fipis de B16 192 XLIII. Le Tr6sor du Laboureur . 194 CONTENTS IX LESSON PAGE XLIV. Louis XIV et Jean Bart 195 XLV. La Fourmi et le Brin d'Herbe 197 XLVI. Le Bon Samaritain 198 XLVIL M. Laffitte et I'fepingle ] 200 XL VIII. Le Siiflet de Benjamin Franklin 201 XLIX. Henri IV et le Paysan 203 L. Thomas et les Cerises 205 LI. Fr6d6ric le Grand et son Page 207 PART n The Verb 209 The Noun 300 The Article 313 The Adjective 327 The Pronoun 342 The Adverb 382 The Numeral 394 The Preposition 401 The Conjunction 411 The Interjection 414 Abbreviations 416 Exercises on Part II (Detaclied Sentences), la-La 417 Exercises on Part II {Continuous Prose), Lla-LXXVa 467 VoCABtTLARIES : French-English 481 English-French 515 Index 551 Appendix: Tolirances 564 A FRENCH GEAMMAR PHONETIC INTRODUCTION 1. General Distinctions. The pronunciation will be explained, as far as possible, by comparison with English sounds, but it must never be forgotten that the sounds of two languages rarely correspond. Important general distinc- tions between English and French are the following : 1. Englist lias strong stress (§7) and comparatively weak action of the organs in articulation. 2. French has weak stress, while the action of the organs in articula- tion is very energetic. 3. Hence, French sounds, both vowels and consonants, are almost all 'narrow,' i.e., uttered with tenseness of the organs concerned in their articulation. (To rmderstand 'narrow' and 'wide,' compare the narrow sound of i in 'machine' with its wide sound in 'sit.') 4. Tongue and lip positions for French vowels are more definite, and more promptly taken, than in English. Lip-rounding (as in 'who,' 'no,' 'law') and lip-retraction (as in 'let,' 'hat') are much more definite and energetic in forming French vowels. 5. The tongue, both for vowels and consonants, is, in general, either further advanced or further retracted than in forming Enghsh sounds requiring tongue action. 6. English long vowels (like a in 'lody') shade off into other vowels (especially in the South of England), while aU French vowels are free from this off-glide, and are uniform throughout their utterance. 7. The nasal vowels of French are foreign to standard English. They are formed by allowing the soft palate to hang freely, as in ordi- nary breathing, thus causing the air to escape through both nose and mouth at once. If, for example, the a of 'fother' be uttered with the 1 FRENCH GRAMMAR 2-3 soft palate hanging freely, the resulting sound will be approximately that of the nasal [a3 in tante [tait]. The position of the soft palate in forming this sound may be readily observed with a mirror. It must be carefully noted that there is absolutely no sound of n, m, or ng, in French nasal vowels, and hence that great care must be taken neither to raise the tongue nor close the lips until the sound is complete. 2. Sounds. The French language has thirty-seven sounds, exclusive of minor distinctions. French spelling, like that of English, is irregular and inconsistent. Hence, to avoid confusion in indicating the pronunciation, we shall employ a phonetic alphabet (that of the Association Phonetique Internationale), in which each sound is represented by its own symbol, and each symbol has but one sound. 3. Table of S3anbols. In the following table, the ex- amples are in ordinary orthography, the heavy type indi- cates the sounds which correspond to the sjTiibols, and the phonetic transcription is given within brackets: Symbols Examples Stmb DLS Examples i ni, vive [m, viiv] b beau, robe [bo, rob] y pu, muse [py, my:z] d dame, fade [dam, fad] e gt6 [ete] £ fort, neuf [foir, noef] creux, creuse [kr0, kr0;z] g gant, dogue [ga, dog] 9 leDa] h aha! [a(h)a] t pres, pere [pre, psir] k car, roc [kar, rok] g fin, prince [fe, prsis] 1 long, seul Qg, soel] oe neuf, neuve [ncef, noeiv] m mot, dame [mo, dam] & un, humble [de, ce:bl] n ni, dne [ni, a;n] a patte, part [pat, pair] Ji agneau, digne [ajio, diji] a pas, passe [pa, pais] P pas, tape [pa, tap] a tant, tante [ta, to it] r drap, par [dra, par] 3 note, tort [not, toir] s si, pense [si, pa;s] 3 rond, ronde [rS, roid] S chou, lache [Ju, laij] sot, chose [so, Joiz] t tas, patte [ta, pat] u tout, tour [tu, tuir] V vin, cave [ve, ka:v] j viande [vjaid] z zone, rose [zom, roiz] 1 lui [Iqi] 3 je, rouge [so, ruis] w oui [wi] ; sign of length 4r-6 PHONETIC INTBODUCTION 4. The Alphabet. The letters of the alphabet, with their French names, are as follows: a a [a] J ji Csi] s esse [es] b b^Dae] k ka[ka] t t6[te] c c6 [se] 1 eUe [el] u u[y] d d6 [de] m emme [em] V v6 [ve] e ne] n enne [en] w double v6 [dublave] f effe [sf] o[o] z iks [iks] g g6 Cse] P p6 [pe] y i greo [i grek] h ache [aj] q ku[ky] z z6de [zed] i iH r erre [er] Note. — These names are often all treated as masculines (un a, un h, etc.)> but some treat f, h, 1, m, n, r, s, as feminines (une h, une r, etc.). 6. Other Orthographic Signs. In addition to the letters of the alphabet, the following signs are used: 1. The acute accent ' Fr. accent aigu [aksategy], e.g., I'ete, I'Ecosse. Note. — The word ' accent' does not denote stress; see § 7. 2. The grave accent *■ Fr. accent grave [aksagraiv], e.g., voil4, p6re, oa. 3. The circumflex accent * Fr. accent circonflexe [aksasirksfleks], e.g., ane, tete, He, h6te, flflte. 4. The cedilla ^ Fr. cedille [sediij], used under c to give it the sound of [s], before a, o, u (§ 17, 13), e.g., fafade, lefon, commenfait. 5. The diaeresis " Fr. trema [trema], shows that the vowel bearing it is divided in pronunciation from the preceding vowel, e.g., Noel, naif. 6. The apostrophe ' Fr. apostrophe [apostrof], shows omission of final vowel before initial vowel sound, e.g., I'amie (= la amie), rami (= le ami), I'homme (= le homme), s'il (= si il), § 19. 7. The hyphen - Fr. trait d'union [tredynj 3], used as in English. 6. Syllabication. 1. A single consonant sound between vowel sounds, including the four nasalized vowels, always belongs to the following syllable. Ex.: Ma/-rie, in-di-vi-si-bi-li-t6, bon-t6, con-scien-cieu-s(e)-ment. 2. When the second of two consonant sounds is 1 or r, both usually belong to the following syllable, except Ir, rl and a few more. Ex.: tarbleau, 6-cri-vain, ap-pli-quer. 4 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §§ 7-8 3. Other combinations of consonants representing two or more sounds are divided. Ex.: par-ler, per-dre, es-ca-lier, sep-tem-bre. N.B. — Great care should be taken to avoid the consonantal end-, ing of syllables, so frequent in English. Compare French ci-te, ta-bleau, with English 'cit-y,' 'ta6-leau.' Parallel rules hold in script and print where division occurs. 7. Stress. 'Stress' is the force with which a syllable is uttered as compared with other syllables in the same group. In French, the syllables are uttered with almost equal force, a very slight stress falling on the last syllable of a word of two or more syllables, or, on the last but one, if the last vowel of the word is [a]. Ex.: Che-val, par-ler, par-lai, per-dre, cr^-di-bi-li-te (compare the strong stress of English ' CTed-i-bil-it-y'). Note. — In connected discourse the rule above stated varies consider- ably, but a full treatment of the subject would exceed the limits of an ele- mentary work. The safest practice for the beginner is to pronounce all syllables with almost equal force. All vowels except [3], see § 19, whether stressed or unstressed, are carefully soimded and not slurred over as in English. 8. Vowel Quantity. The most important general rules are : 1. Final vowel sounds (including nasals) are usually short, e.g., fini [fini], vie [vi], loue [lu], parle [parte], rideau Crido], mais [ms], donner [done], enfant [afa], parlerons [parl(9)r3]. 2. Stressed vowels are long before the soimds [v], [z], [3], [j], [r final], e.g., rive [risv], ruse [ryiz], rouge [ru!5], feiiiEe [foeij], faire [feir]. 3. Of stressed vowels standing before other consonant sounds, nasals are long, e.g., prince [preis]; [o], [0], long, e.g., faute [foit], meule [m0!l]; [a], long (almost always), e.g., passe [pais]; [e], long or short, e.g., reine [rem], renne [ren]; other vowels regularly short, e.g., cap [kap], poche [poj], coupe [kup], pipe [pip], seul [seel], lune [lyn]. Note. — It is possible to distinguish also between 'long' and 'half long' vowels, but it has been thought best to omit, in an elementary work, the rules relating to this distinction, and to indicate only 'long' vowels in the transcriptions. 9-il PHONETIC INTKODUCTION Vowels 9. Tongue Position. The relative position of the tongue for the various vowels may be seen from the following dia- gram. Rounded vowels are enclosed in parentheses: i (y) (u) ' — leasf ^ e (0) (9) (o) I e 8 (oe) (de) 0) (3) ■ o ^9 a a a . . .<—areatest 1 o o o iz; o I N.B. — In the following descriptions of sounds, the word 'like' means, of course, only 'resembling,' or 'approximately hke' (§ 1). The examples given after the word 'also' show the less common orthographical equivalents. 10. i, y 1. i — Like i in 'machine'; the comers of the mouth are sUghtly drawn back (§1, 4); avoid the sound of i ia 'sit'; avoid 'off-glide' (§1,6); narrow (§ 1, 3). Ex.: ni [ni], vive [vi:v]; also, ile [iil], lyre [liir], 2. y — Has no counterpart in English. The tongue position is practically the same as for [i] above; very tense lip-roimding (§ 1, 4); narrow (§ 1, 3). The sound may be best acquired either by prolonging p], and at the same time effecting the rounding, or by holding the lips roimded and taking the tongue position of [i]. Ex.: pu [pyl, muse [myiz]; also fflt Hfyll, il cut [U y], nous eflmes [nuzym], j'ai eu [se y]. 11. e, 0, 3 1. e — Like the first part of the sound of a in 'day,' but with the lips more retracted (§ 1, 4); avoid 'off-ghde' (§ 1, 6); narrow (§ 1, 3). Ex.: StS [ete]; also, parler [parle], donnai [done]. 6 A FRENCH GRAMMAK §§ 12-13 2. — Has no counterpart in English. The tongue position is prac- tically the same as for [e], with rounding of the hps for o (§ 1, 4); narrow (§1, 3); best acquired by combining, as explained for [y] above, the lip-rounding with the [e] position. Ex.: creux Ckr0], creuse Ckr0:z]; also, boeufs Cb0], yeux [j0]. 3. a — Like English e in 'the man,' or a in 'Louiso,' but slightly rounded; best acquired by relaxing the tension of the organs required for the production of the [0j soimd. Ex.: le Qal premier Qjramje]; also, monsieur [m8sj0]], faisant [faza]. 12. e, g, OB, oe 1. e — Like the sound of e in 'let,' with the mouth more definitely open and the Ups more retracted (§ 1, 4); narrow (§ 1, 3). Ex.: prSs [pre], pere Qjsir]; also, fete Psit], terre [teiT^, secret [sakre], parlais [parls], paix [ps], reine [rem]. Note. — The e of a stressed syllable followed by a syllable con- taining e mute has almost always this sound (orthographicaUy denoted by e, 6, or e + double consonant), e.g., je m6ne [men], tete Cte:t], chere CSeir], j'appelle [apd], ancienne [asJEn]. This principle ac- counts for the apparent irregularities of certain verbs and adjectives. 2. E — The [e] sound nasalized ( § 1, 7), but slightly more open. Ex.: fin [fe], prince [preis]; also, faim [fs], sainte [seit], Reims [reis], plein [pie], simple [seipl], symbole [sebol], syntaxe [setaks], viendrai [vjedre], soin [swe]. 3. oe — Has no counterpart in English. It has practically the tongue position of [e], combined with definite rounding of the lips for [o]; narrow (§1, 3); best acquired by combining, with the [e] posi- tion, the rounding described. Ex.: neuf [noef], neuve [noeiv]; also, cceur [koeir], oeil [oeij], orgueU [orgceij]. 4. oe — The [oe] sound nasalized (§ 1, 7), but slightly more open. Ex.: un [re], humble [(5e:bl]; also, k jeun [a5(£], parfum [parfde]. 13. a, a, a 1- a — This sound is similar to but requires wider mouth opening than a of 'pat,' and lowering of the tongue, though with the point still §§ 14-15 PHONETIC INTRODUCTION 7 twuching the lower teeth; narrow (§ 1, 3). It is generally short, resembling English 'madam.' Ex.: patte [pat], part [pair]; also, la [la], femme [fam], moi [mwa], boite [bwait]; and, by exception, parMmes [parlam], parlates [parlat], parlftt [park]. 2. a — Like a in 'father'; the mouth well open, the tongue lying flat, and so far retracted that it no longer touches the lower teeth; lips absolutely neutral, i.e., neither rounded nor retracted; avoid especially rounding, as of a in 'foil.' Ex.: pas [pa], passe [pais]; also, pite [pa it], roi [rwa], poMe [pwail]. 3. a — The [a] sound nasalized (§ 1, 7). (Written an, am, en, em.) Ex.: tant [to], tante [tait]; also, lampe Daip], enfant [aifa], entre [aitr], membre [maibr]. 14. 0, 3, o 1. — Like the vowel in 'law,' but with definite bell-like rounding (§ 1, 4), avoid 'off-glide' to u (§ 1, 6); narrow (§ 1, 3). Ex.: note [not], tort [torr]; also Paul [pol], album [albom]. 2. 5 — The [o] sound nasalized (§ 1, 7), but slightly more close. Ex.: rond [r3], ronde [raid]; also tomber [tobe], comte [k5:t]. 3. o — Like o in 'omen,' but with more protrusion and much tenser rounding of the lips (§1, 4); avoid 'off-gMe' to u (§ 1, 6); narrow (§ 1, 3). Ex.: sot [so], chose Boiz], fosse [fois]; also, c6t6 [kote], c6te [ko;t], faute [foit], beauts [bojte]. 15. u 1. u — Like 00 in 'pool' but with more protrusion and much tenser rounding of the Ups (§1, 4); avoid 'off-gHde' to w (§1, 6); narrow (§ 1, 3). Ex.: tout [tu], tour [tu:r]; also, goiit [gu], aoiit [u]. g A FBEXCH GRA^r\fAB §§ 16-17 Coxso^■A^^re 16. ji lb w When the sounds Dl Cyl Lul- § 10 and § 15, come before a vowd of stronger stress, they are pronounced with the tongue slightly dosei to the palate, and hence assume a consonantal value, indicated by 03, [ql L^l respectively. They are sometimes called semi-vovrds. 1. j — Like very brief and narrow y in ' ^/'es.' Ex.: viande rvjdidl: also, yens jo^ aieul [ajoer. fille [&:js tiavailler [travaje], travail [travajT the last three being examples of I moTiillee. 2. q — Has no counterpart in V-n ^h-ih but is similar to a w pro- nounced with the tongue pressed close to the lower teeth; may also be acquired by at first substitutins jr" for it, and afterward iacreasing tie speed of the utterance and the elevation of lie tongue until it can be pronounced ia the same sellable with the vowel which always follows. Es.: lui Qqil huit [qitj: also, nuage ^ni;a:;2- Quelle [ekqd^. 3. w — Like very brief and narrow w iu 'tre,' '^^est.' It is best, however, to proceed from the sound of [[u] in the maimer described for Cql above. Ex.: oui L^]: also, poids Cpwo], tramway Ctramwe]. 17. The remaining consonantal sounds can be sufficiently described by noting the differences between their mode of formation and that of the nearest English sounds (see § 1"). 1. b — Like b in 'bart.' Ex.: beau [boT robe [robj. abbe fabe]. 2. d — Like d in 'did,' but with the tongue so far advanced that its point, or upper surface, forms a closure with the inner surface of the upper teeth and gums: or the point of the tongue may be thrust Eigainst the lower teeth, the upper surface forming a closure with the upper teeth and gums. It must be remembered that in forming KTigliRh d (also 1, n, r, s, t, z' the tongue touches at some little distance above the teeth (§1, 51. Ex.: dame [dam], fade [fad], addition [adisjs]. 3. f — Like f in '/at.' Ex.: fort [fDir], neuf [noef], difificile [difisDJ. § 17 PHONETIC INTRODUCTION 9 4. g — Like g in 'go.' Ex.: gant [ga], dogue [dog], guerre [gsir]; also, second [sagS]. 5. h — In orthography the letter h is known as 'h mute' (Fr. h muet or h muette), or 'h aspirate' (Fr. h aspire or h aspiree), according as it does, or does not, cause elision (§19). The learner may regard it, in either case, as absolutely silent. Ex.: h mute in I'homme [bml I'histoire [listwair], Th^rolne Qeroin]; h aspirate in le h^ros Qla ero], le hetre [la eitr], la haine [la E:n], la hate [la ait], je hais [53 e]. In hiatus, however, a sound resembling, but much weaker than h in 'ha.t,' is permissible, and is actually used by many Frenchmen. Ex.: aha! [aha], lehlros [la hero], fl6au [fleho]. 6. k — Like k in 'tate'; avoid the slight aspiration which generally follows the English sound. Ex.: car [kar], roc [rok], accorder [akorde]; also, Chretien [kretjs], cinq [sEik], bouquet [buks], acqu6rir [akeriir], kilo [kilo], maxime [maksim]. 7. I — Like 1 in 'tew,' but with the tongue advanced as for [d] above. Ex.: long D3], seul [seel], aller [ale], mUle [mU], village [vilaisj. For soft I see § 16, 1. 8. m — -Like m. in 'man,' 'dumb.' Ex.: mot [mo], dame [dam], homme [om]. 9. n — Like n in 'not,' 'man,' but with the tongue advanced as for [d] above. Ex.: ni [ni], 4ne [a:n], donner [done]. 10. ji — Somewhat like ny in 'ban-yan,' except that [ji] is a single, not a double, sound, and is formed by pressing the middle of the tongue against the hard palate, the tip being usually thrust against the lower teeth. Ex.: agneau [ajio], digne [diji]. 11. p — Like p in 'pan,' 'top'; avoid the slight aspiration wbiob generally follows the English sound. Ex.: pas [pa], tape [tap], appUquer [aplike]. 10 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 17 12. r — Haa no English counterpart. It is formed by trilling the tip of the tongue against the upper gums, or even against the upper teeth. This r is called in French r linguale. The tongue must, of course, be well advanced towards the teeth, and not retracted and turned upward, as in our r sound (§1, 5). The sound may be advan- tageously practised at first in combination with d, e.g., 'dry,' 'drip,' 'drop,' 'drum' (as in Scotch or Irish dialect), and afterwards in com- binations in which it is less easily pronounced. Ex.: drap [dra], par [par], torrent [tora], rond [r3]. Note. — Another r sound (called in French r uvulaire) , used especially in Paris and in the large cities and towns, is formed by withdrawing and elevating the root of the tongue so as to cause a trilling of the uvula. Thia r is usually more diflSoult for English-speaking people to acquire. 13. s — Like s in 'sea,' 'cease,' but with the tongue advanced as for [d] above. Ex.: si [si], pense [pais], casser [kaise]; also scfne [ssin], place [plas], fasade [fasad], lefon [las3], refu [rasy], commenfait [komass], commenfons [komas5], rejiimes [rasym], portion [pars j 3], soixante [swasait]. 14. S — Like sh in 's^oe,' but with the tongue more advanced (§1,5). Ex.: chou [Ju], lfi,che [laij], also, schisme [Jism]. 15. t — ^Like t in 'iall,' but with the tongue advanced as for [d] above; avoid the slight aspiration which generally follows the English soiind. Ex.: tas [to], patte [pat]. 16. V — Like v in 'tiine,' 'cane.' Ex.: vin [ve], cave [ka:v]; also, wagon [vag3], neuf heures [noev oeir]. 17. z — Like z in 'zone,' or s in 'rose,' but with the tongue advanced as for [d] above. Ex.: zone [zo:n], rose [roiz]; also, deux heures [d0zoe:r], exact [egzakt]. 18. 3 — Like z in 'azure' or s in 'pleasure,' but with the tongue more advanced (§ 1, 5). Ex.: je [ssa], rouge [ruis]; also mangeant [masa], Jean [3a]. §§ 18-19 PHONETIC INTKODUCTION 11 19. A doubled consonant has usually the same sound as a single consonant, e.g., aller [alej, ville [vil], tranquille [trakil], donnei [done], terra [tsjrj. Exceptions are, however: (1) The Hquid 1, Fr. I mouiUee [muje], i.e., double 1 after i [j] (§16, 1), e.g., fille [fiij], bUlet [bijs], bataUle [batasj], veiller [veje], feuille [fceij]. N.B. — Note also that liquid I may be spelled -ail, etc., e.g., travaU ftrava:]], soleil [soIe:]], etc. (2) The verb forms acquerrai [akerre], couirai [kurre], mourrai Qmurre]. (3) The doubled consonant in such words as illegal, intellectuel, intelligence, litterature, connexe, immoral, etc., is pronounced double, i.e., given double its usual length, by many people. But foreigners be- ginniag French may neglect this manner, regarded by many as an affectation. 18. Liaison. Final consonants are usually silent, but in oral speech, within a group of words closely connected logically, a final consonant (whether usually sounded or not) is regularly sounded, and forms a syllable with the initial vowel sound of the next word. This is called in French liaison Qjezo] = linking, joining. Ex.: C'est^_,un petit_^omme [ss-toe-pa-ti-tom]. 1. A few of the consonants change their sound in liaison, thus, final s or x = z, d = t, g = k, f = v, e.g., nos.^amis [no-za-mi], quand^on parle Dia-t3-parl]; the t of et is silent; for examples see Exercise in Phonetic Transcription. 2. The n of a nasal is carried on, and the nasal vowel loses its nasal- ity ia part, or even wholly, e.g., un boh^^ami Coe-b3-na-mi, or de-bo-na- mi]. 19. Elision. The letters a, e, i, are entirely silent in cer- tain cases: 1. The a and e are silent and replaced by apostrophe in le, la, je, me, te, se, de, ne, que (and some of its compounds) before initial vowel or h mute (not, however, je, ce, le, la after a verb); so also i of si be- fore il(s). Ex.: L'arbre (= le arbre), I'encre (= la encre), j'ai (= ie ai), qu'a-t-il (= que a-t-il), jusqu'S, (= jusque k), s'il (= siU). 12 A FRENCH GEAMMAB H 20-21 2. In prose the letter e is sUent at the end of all words (except when e is itseK the only vowel in the word), silent in the verbal endings -es, -ent, silent within words after a vowel sound, and in the combinar tion ge or je [s]. In verbs which have stem g [s], g becomes ge Is] before a or o of an ending, to preserve the [3] sound. Ex.: rue [ry], donn6e [done], rare [rair], place [plas], ai-je [sis], table [tabl], sabre [sasbr], prendre [praidr], tu paries [ty pari], ils parlent [ilparl], gaiete [gete], mangeons [mas 3], Jean [30]. Note. — In ordinary discourse, this sound is usually slighted or whoUy omitted in most cases in which consonantal combinations produced by its weakening or elision can be readily pronounced, but beginners will do well to sound it fully, except in the cases above specified. The treatment of the ta] in verse is beyond the scope of this work. 20. Punctuation. The same punctuation marks are used in French as in English, but not with identical values. 1. Their French names are: , point - trait d'lmion [ ] crochets , virgule — tiret, or tiret de T ^^^^i^^g ; point et virgule separation \ : deux points . . . points suspensif s * asterisque ? point d'interrogation " " guillemets t croix de renvoi I point d'exclamation ( ) parenthese 2. They are not used exactly as in English, especially the colon and the dash, the latter being very useful in showing a change of speaker in dialogue. Ex.: « Qui est IS,? dis-je. — Personne. — Quoi ! personne ! — Per- sonne, dit-U. » 21. Capitals. Some of the differences between French and English in the use of capital letters (Fr. lettres ma- juscules, capitales) may be seen from the following examples: Un livre canadien 6cnt en frangais par un Canadien. Toronto, le liindi 3 Janvier. Je lui ai dit ce que je pensais. phonetic introduction 13 Table of Spelling and Equivalent Phonetic Symbols Spelling Sound Spelling Sound a a; a i i; i i a i 1 k a iem; ien je ai e;e -il; -iU j (usually); il aim; ain e im, in e am; an & k k ay ej 1;U 1 au o; m m (or nasalized) b b mm m c k; s n n (or nasalized) e s nn n d d o; e 9-, e; e 6 (desc-) e og wa (dess-) e oeu oe, (eff-) e oi; oy wa; wa (after r) (ess-) e oim; oin we 6 6 om, on 5 e 8 ou u e e p; PP P eau o qu k ei e r; rr r eim; ein e s s; z em; en a ss s een ee t; tt t eu ce; u y; q ey ej um, un oe f; ff f V V g g; 3 w w ge 3 X ks; gz; z; s gn P y j; i gu g;gy;gq yen je h (silent) z z 14 A FRENCH GRAMMAB USEFUL CLASSROOM EXPRESSIONS Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela? Ckeskasek8sla?J W^hat is that? C'est ua (una) . • . [s6tde(yn)3 It is a. . . Que veut dire (Que signifie) cela? [k8v0di;r (kasijiifi) sala?!] What does that mean? Comment dit-on en fran^ais (en anglais)? [kDmaditS afrass (anagle)?] How do you say in French (in English)? On dit — en franf ais [odi — afrass] You (People) say — in French. Commencez . . . Prononcez . . . Ecrivez . . . PiDmase . . . pronSse . . . ekrive . . J Begin . . . Pro- nounce . . . Write . . . Comment ecrivez-vous? Com- ment ecrit-on? Pcomate- krivevu? komatekrits?] How do you (people) write (spell) . . .? Comment? Plait-il? Vous dites? [koma? pistil? vudit?] What did you say? Merci bien. Merci mille fois. [msrsibJE. msrsi milfwa.] Thank you very much (a thou- sand times). n n'y a pas de quoi. plnjapadkwa3 De rien. [darje] You are wel- come. Don't mention it. 7oulez-vous bien . . .? [vulevubje ...?3 Will you...? Quelle lefon avons-nous aujour- d'hui? [ksllasS av3nu ojuirdqi?] What lesson have we to-day? A quelle page (lefon) en sommes- nous? nakelpa;3 (las3) afjomnu?1 What page (lesson) are we on? Au haut, au milieu, au bas de la page, [o o, oniilj0, obadlapais] At the top, middle, bottom of the page. Commencez. Continuez. Celasuf- fit. QkDmase. kstinqe. sala syfi] Begin. Continue. That will do. Le suivant. La suivante. Pasqiva. la sqiva!t] Next (boy, girl). Lisez la phrase suivante, s'il vous plait.[Uzelafra;zsqiva;t,silvupls] Read the next sentence, please. Prononcez distinctement toutes les syllabes. [pronSse distsikta- ma tutlesilab] Pronounce all the syllables distinctly. Comprenez-vous? [kopranevu?] Do you understand? Je comprends. Je ne comprends pas. [sakSpra. 3ank3prapa] I understand, I do not understand. Comprenez-vous ce que j'ai dit? ce que vous avez lu? [kspranevu ska^edi? skavtizavely?;] Do you understand what I said? what you read? USEFUL CLASSROOM EXPRESSIONS 15 Traduisez le passage que vous avez lu. [[tradqize bpasaij kavuzavely] Translate the pas- sage that you have read. C'est tres bien fait, Robert. Felicitations! [sstrebjsfe, robsir. felisitasja Q Well done, Kobert. Congratulations ! Expliquez. Repondez en franf ais, en anglais, [eksplike. repode afrass, anagle] Explain. An- swer in French, in English. Faites attention. Je vous prie de faire attention. Qfstzatasjo. 39vupridaf£!ratasi3] Pay atten- tion. I beg you to pay atten- tion. AUez au tableau. iEcrivez la phrase au tableau, [alezotablo. ekrivelafraizotablo] Go to the board. Write the sentence on the board. Quelle est la faute? Quelles sont les fautes? [ksl 8 la foit? kslssle fo!t?J What is (are) the mis- take(s)? Quel changement faut-il faire? [kdSaisma fotilfsir?] What change must be made? Maintenant c'est bien (c'est 5a). Ce n'est pas bien de dire . . . ; il ne faut pas dire; on ne devrait pas dire; on ne dit pas . . . [metna sebje, se sa. sanepa- bjedadiir; U na fo pa di;r; 3n- davrspadiir; ondipa] It (that) is right now, (that's it). It (that) is not right to say . . . Vous avez raison. Vous avez tort. [yuzarverezo. vuzavetoir] You are right (wrong). Commencez k la page — . £tudiez jusqu'a la page — . [kamuse alapa;5 — . etydje syskala pais — 3 Begin on page — . Study as far as page — . Est-ce Clair? C'est clair, n'est-ce pas? [Eskleir? sekleir nespa? J Is that clear? That is clear, isn't it? Savez-vous? Je ne sais pas. [savevu? sansepaj Do you know? I do not know. N'oubliez pas. Avez-vous oublie? [nubUjepa.avevuzublije?]Don't forget. Have you forgotten? Dites-moi. Repetez. [ditmwa. repete] Tell me. Repeat. Qu'avez-vous? Je n'ai rien. [kavevu? sanerje] What is the matter with you? Nothing. Qu'y a-t-il de nouveau? [kjatilda- nuvo?] What is the news? J'en suis bien content (fache), [sasqibjekota (faje)] I am very glad (sorry) about it. Je pense (crois) que oui (non). [sa pais (krwa) kawi(n3)] I think so (not). C'est dommage. Tant mieux. Tant pis. [ssdomaiii. tamjd. tapi] It's a pity. So much the better. So much the worse. Ce n'est pas la peine de . . . [sans- polapendal It isn't worth while to . . . Je ne suis pas d'accord avec vous [sansqipadakoir avekvu] I do not agree with you. Ni moi (lui, elle) non plus, [nimwa (Iqi, el) nSply] I (he, she) either. 16 A FRENCH GBAMMAB Y a-t-a quelque chose 4 corriger? CjatilkelkaSoiz akorise?] Is there anything to correct? U faut ajouter. [ilfotasute] You must add. Asseyez-vous. [assjevu] Sit down. Ecoutez bien. Je vais vous in- diquer la leson pour demain. QekutebJE. savevuzsdike lals5 puirdamg] Listen attentively. I am going to assign the lesson for to-morrow. Preparez pour demain. [prepare puirdamgj Prepare for to- morrow. Bon jour, mesdames (messieurs). C'est fini. A demain. CbSsuir medam (mesj0). se fini. adme] Good-by, Ladies, (Gentlemen). Class is over. I shall see you to-morrow. Courtesy of U. S. Army Air Service L'Arc de Triomphe, Paris ^Vol d'Oiseau PART I LESSON I 22. Definite Article. 1. The definite article has the following forms in the singular: Ile [la], before a masculine noun beginning with a consonant, la Qal before a feminine noun beginning with a consonant. 1' Q], before any noun beginning with a vowel or h mute. Le pere, la mere. The father, the mother, t'enfant {m. orf.), 2'homme. The child, the man. 2. The definite article must be repeated before each noun to which it refers: L'oncle et la tante. The imcle and (the) aunt. 23. Gender. 1. All French nouns are either masculine or feminine: Le papier (m.), la plume (/.). The paper, the pen. 2. Names of male beings are masculine, and names of female beings feminine, as in English. 24. Case. French notms have no case endings. The direct object (accusative) is expressed by verb + noun; the indirect object (dative) by the proposition a + noun; the possessive (genitive) by de + noun, and these prepositions must be repeated before each noun to which they refer: La mere aime Venfant. The mother loves the child. J'ai la plume de Robert. I have Robert's pen (the pen of Robert). Je donne I'argent a Marie et a I give the money to Mary and (to) Jean. John. 17 18 A FRENCH GEAMMAB § 25 25. Agreements. French has the following agreements, and they are usually expressed by change of form: (1) Verb and subject, in number and person; (2) adjective and noun, in gender and number; (3) pronoun and antecedent, in gender and number. EXERCISE I' bonjour ! [bosuir] good day 1 j'ai [se] I have I'argent m. Qarsa] money j'aime [3s;m] I love, like I'enfant m.J. [lofa] child; Marie aime [mariEin3 Mary likes, boy, girl loves I'homme [bm] man je donne [sadon] I give le livre [Uivr] book Jean donne [sadon] John gives la mere [msir] mother est [e] is Toncle [bikl] uncle fennez ! [ferme] close ! le papier [papje] paper montrez-moi ! QmStremwa] le pere [psir] father show me ! la plume [plym] pen ouvrez ! [uvre] open ! la porte [port] door voici [vwasi] here is (are) la table [tabl] table voiia [vwala] there is (are) la tante [tait] aunt Jean [3a] John oti? [u] where? Louise [Iwiiz] Louise 4 M tO) at, in Marie [man] Mary de [da] of, from Robert [robsir] Robert sur [sjrr] on et [e] and A. 1. Bonjour! Bonjour, Robert! 2. Oil est le livre? 3. Le livre est sur la table. 4. Ouvrez le livre, Jean. 5. Fer- mez le livre, Marie. 6. Ouvrez la porte, Robert. 7. Fermez la porte, Jean. 8. Montrez-moi la porte, Marie. 9. Voila la porte. 10. Montrez-moi le papier, Marie. 11. VoilS, le papier sur la table. 12. Oil est la plume de Robert (§ 24, example 2) ? 13. VoilS, la plume de Robert sur la table. 14. Et oh est le papier de Marie? 15. Voici le papier de Marie sur la table. 16. L'enfant aime I'oncle Jean. 17. L'homme aime I'enfant. 18. L'oncle Jean aime l'enfant. 19. J'aime I'oncle Jean et tante ' Marie. 20. Je donne la plume h I'oncle Robert. ' Linking will be indicated by ^^ in the reading passages of Lessons I-X • Note the idiomatic omission of the article before tante in 19 and 21. § 25 LESSON I 19 21. Je donne le papier k tante Marie. 22. L'homme h la porte est le pere de Marie. 23. La mfere de Jean est la tante de Louise. 24. Le pere de Jean donne le papier k Marie. 25. La mere de Marie donne le papier a Robert. 26. Oil est I'argent de Louise? 27. J'ai I'argent de Louise. 28. Montrez- moi I'argent de Robert. 29. Voila I'argent de Robert sur la table. 30. J'ai le livre de Louise. 31. Louise aime le livre. 32. Je donne le livre a Louise. 33. Ou est le livre, Marie? 34. Voila le livre, Louise. ExEKcisE IN Pronunciation (1) Read aloud the series: [i], [e], [e], [a], [a], [o], [o], [u] (see §§9-15). Write in phonetic characters all the words of the vocabulary in which any of these sounds occur. (2) Read aloud: [a], [yj, [5], [a] (see § 11, 3; § 10, 2; § 14, 2; § 13, 3). Write in phonetic characters all the words of the vocabulary in which these sounds occur. (3) List the ways in which the following sounds in the vocabu- lary are spelled in the standard orthography: [i], [e], [e], [a], [o], [u], [9], [y], [5], [aj. (4) What kind of vowels are [_o] and [a]? Does the tongue go to the position for the letter n in the pronunciation of the spellings an, en, on (see §1,7)? Is this true in the word donne? (5) In Robert, papier, Marie, are the syllables divided as in English? What is the difference (see §6, 1, 3)? Is this dif- ference important? (6) What happens to the article when we write l'homme, I'enfant (see § 19)? Is the article pronounced as a separate word or as a part of the following word? Write in phonetic characters: I'oncle, I'argent. (7) In le papier, I'enfant, ouvrez, fermez, on what syllable does the stress seem to fall (see § 7 and note) ? How does this differ from the English paper, infant, open ? In which language is the syllable stress the stronger? Pronounce difficile Cdifisil], president [prezida], important [eporta], appartement Capartama], Clemenceau Qklemaso], and compare the syllable stress with the corresponding English words. 20 A FRENCH GRAMMAR S 2t) (8) What two pronunciations does the spelUng ai have in this vocabulary? Mention the words. (9) What ways are there of spelling the sound [a]? (10) What is the pronunciation of the speUing oi? of the spelling ou? LESSON II 26. Indefinite Article. It has the following forms, which must be repeated before each noun to which they refer: _ r un [oe(n)], before any masculine noun. A or on — ^ une [yn], before any feminine noun. Un liyre et une plume. A book and (a) pen. Un homme [oenom], une ecole. A man, a school. EXERCISE n le crayon [kr£J3] pencil il a [ila] he (it) has la fenetre Dafnsitr] window eUe a [da] she (it) has madame [^madam] Madam vous avez ^vuzave] you have mademoiselle [madmwazel] avez-vous?[avevu]haveyou? Miss il ecrit [ilekri] he writes monsieur Cm3sj0] sir, Mr. eUe ecrit [dekri] she writes le morceau [morso] piece vous ecrivez [vuzekrive] you le mot [mo] word write le professeui [prafgacBir] teacher, gcrivez-vous [ekrivevu] are professor {used Jar both men you writing? do you write? and women) ecrivez 1 [ekrive] write ! le tableau noir [tablonwairl black- _ ^ board non[n3]no cm [wi] yes; un Coe(n)] a, an; one avec [avek] with deux [d0] two derriere [derjeir] behind trois [trwa] three devant [dgva] in front of, quatre [katr] four before A. 1. Bonjour, mes^enfants [mezafa] {lit., my children)! 2. Bonjour, monsieur (madame, mademoiselle)! 3. Oil est la porte? 4. Voiia, la porte. 5. Voici une fenetre [ynfanestr]. 6. Voici une table. 7. Yoilk un tableau noir. 8. La table est de- vant le professeur; elle est devant le professeur. 9. Le tableau § 26 LESSON II 21 noir est derrifere le professeur; il est derriire le professeur. 10. Le professeur 6crit sur le tableau noir. 11. II 6crit un mot, deux mots, trois mots, quatre mots [katr9mo].i 12. Marie ecrit sur un morceau de papier avec un crayon. 13. Robert ^crit avec ime plume. 14. II ^crit sur un morceau de papier. 15. II 6crit le mot « derriere ». 16. Marie 6cnt le mot « devant ». 17. Marie, 6crivez le mot « bonjour ». — Oui, monsieur (madame, mademoiselle). 18. ficrivez-vous, Louise? — Non, monsieur. 19. ficrivez-vous sur le tableau noir, Jean? — Non, monsieur. 20. ficrivez-vous avec un crayon? — Oui, monsieur. 21. Sur un morceau de papier? — Oui, monsieur. 22. Avez-vous^un crayon, Jean? 23. Oui, monsieur, j'ai un crayon et une plume. 24. Voil^ un livre. II est sur la table, devant le professeur. 25. Marie a un, deux, trois, quatre crayons [krejS]. 26. Voila une enfant. 27. Elle a deux, trois, quatre plumes [plym]. 28. Avec la plume elle 6crit un, deux, trois, quatre mots. B. (1) Write the proper forms of: le, la, un, une, before tableau noir, professeur, mot, morceau, papier, fen^tre, crayon. (2) Make all reasonable combinations of: avec, devant, der- riere, sur, with la plume, le crayon, le tableau noir, I'enfant, I'oncle, la fenetre, Louise, le professeur. (3) Supply proper forms of ' have ': 1. J un crayon. 2. Vous un morceau de papier. 3. Elle - — - deux plumes. 4. Robert trois tantes. Supply suitable forms of ' write ': 5. le mot, Marie. 6. vous, Jean? 7. Robert, le mot avec une plume. 8. II trois mots avec le crayon. 9. Elle quatre mots avec la plume. C. Translate into French: 1. I have the book. 2. Have you a book, John? 3. Yes, sir, here is the book on the table. 4. Open the book, John, and show me the word "pen." 5. There is Robert's pencil. 6. Louise writes on the blackboard. 7. The blackboard is behind the teacher. 8. He writes on a piece of paper. 9. Marie, are you writing a word? 10. Yes, sir, she writes one, two, three, four words. > See § 19, note. 22 a french grammah § 26 Exercise in Peonunciation (1) Pronounce: un livre, une table, une porte, une fenetre, un crayon, une plume, un pere, une mere, un^oncle, une tante, un^enfant, un,^omme. (2) Substitute for un, ime, before each noun above, the proper form of le, la. How many cases of elision (see § 19) are there? (3) Why do we write phonetically and pronounce: (Speir, but (Snoikl, (Snom; celiivr, but oendfa; leUivresyirlatabl, but ja etdenafa? What do we call this carrying over of a sound to the next word (see § 18) ? (4) Note in A the spelling mots, crayons, plumes, pronounced [mo], [krejo], [plym]. Does the addition of the -s in speUing change the pronunciation? (5) Pronounce the last syllable of: fermez, ouvrez, ecrivez, avez. What is the ending of the second person of French verbs in spelUng? Make the phonetic symbol for this speUing. (6) Pronounce |Id0]. How must the Ups and the tip of the tongue be placed to make [0] (see § 11, 2) ? It is very important to hold the tongue and lips in the right position for this sound. Pronounce bleu Cbl0]], feu [f0], peu |Ip0l|. How does position for this sound differ from that for words like le Pa], de [da] (see § 11, 3), professeur [profesceir] (see § 12, 3)? If we add these vowels to those found in Lesson I (Exercise in Pro- nunciation), how many does it give us thus far? (7) What new way of spelling the sound [o] in this vocabu- lary? (8) Write and indicate by a hyphen the syllable division, tableau (see § 6, 2), devant, professeur, morceau, madame^ Marie, avec, fenetre. (9) Write in phonetic characters and read aloud: un livre, une table, un pSre, ime mere, xm homme, un enfant, une enfant, un oncle, une tante, une fenetre. How many cases of linking are there in these examples? (10) Observe by the phonetic transcription of monsieur that the spelling indicates the pronunciation only in part. From the pronunciation how would you expect the word to be spelled? 5§ 27-29 LESSON III 23 LESSON in 27. Some Possessives. Observe the following, and re- member that possessive adjectives must be repeated before each norm to which they refer (for pronunciation, see § 32). Mon (m.) livre et ma (/.) plume. My book and (my) pen. Ton (w.) livre et ta (/.) plume. Thy(your)bookand (thy, your) pen. Son (to.) livre et sa (/.) plume. His or her book and pen. Voire (to.) livre et votre (/.) plume. Your book and (your) pen. 28. Negation. With verbs, not or no = ne .. . pas, with the verb placed between them, ne becoming n' before a vowel (§19, 1): Je n'ai pas, vous n'avez pas. I have not, you have not. 29. Interrogation. In questions, the personal pronoun subject comes after the verb, as in English, and is joined to it by a hyphen, or by -t- if the verb ends in a vowel: Avez-vous? a-t-il? est-elle ici? Have you? has he? is she here? EXERCISE in le cahier Ckaje] notebook, ex- il (elle) ecrit nil(El)ekri] he (she) ercise book la classe pdais] classroom, class la craie [Tcte] chalk le frere [frsir] brother la lefon [lalso] lesson la maison QmezS] house; k la maison at home, at the house merci [msrsi] thanks, thank you la place [plas] seat, place la soeur [soe:r] sister que? Cka] what? allez! [ale] go! j'ecris [sekri] I write, am writing, do write vous ecrivez [vuzekrive] you write, are writing, do write writes, is writing, does write je suis Csasiji] I am vous etes [vuzet] you are 6tes-vous? [stvu] are you? vous faites [vufet] you do, are doing faites-vous? [fstvu] are you doing? aussi [osi] also, too bien CbJE] well, comforta- ble comment Oioma] how ici [isi] here maintenant [metnS] now tres [trs] very dans [da] in, into ou [u] or 24 A FRENCH GRAJWMAK § 29 A. (1) 1. Bonjour, mes^enfants! 2. Bonjour, monsieur (madame, mademoiselle)! 3. Comment^allez-vous {are you)1 4. Bien, merci. Et vous? 5. Tr6s bien, merci. 6. Alle^4 la porte, Jean. 7. Ouvrez la porte! 8. Fermez la porte! 9. Merci. AUez^a, votre place. 10. Allez^S, la f entire, Louise. 11. Merci. Allez^S, votre place. (2) 1. Je ne suis pas^l, la maison. 2. Je suis dans la classe. 3. Mon professeur est dans la classe aussi. 4. J'ecris la legon dans mon cahier. 6. Mon fr^re 6crit sa legon dans son cahier. 6. Que faites-vous, Robert? 7. ficrivez-vous dans votre cahier? 8. Oui, monsieur (madame, mademoiselle), je suis^S, ma place et j'ecris dans mon cahier. 9. Jean n'est pas^S, sa place maintenant. 10. II n'6crit pas dans son cahier. Oil est-^il? 11. II a un morceau de craie. 12. II 6crit sur le tableau noir. 13. Que faites-vous, Louise? 14. Je suis^a ma place. 15. J'ai une plume, mais je n'6cris pas. 16. Avez-vous votre cahier? 17. Non, monsieur, je n'ai pas mon cahier dans la classe. 18. II n'est pas^ici. II es%^k la maison. B. (1) Use four possessive adjectives with each of the follow- ing nouns: crayon, plume, enfant, fr^re, soeur, oncle. (2) In what two ways may each of the following possessives be translated: sa mSre, son enfant, sa tante, son frSre? (3) What is, therefore, the difference between the agreement of the possessive adjective in French and in English as indicated by combinations like: 1. Marie a son crayon. 2. Robert a sa plume. 3. Louise a son papier. 4. Jean est-il devant sa table? (4) Change to negative (taking as model for the negative ques- tions: n'a-t-elle pas son crayon? 'hasn't she her pencil?'): 1. Henri [an] 6crit. 2. Louise a trois fr^res. 3. Vous avez quatre crayons. 4. Avez-vous deux fr^res? 5. Louise est la soeur de Robert. 6. Est-elle la tante de I'enfant? 7. Est-il votre professeur? 8. A-t-il le morceau de papier? 9. ficrit-il h sa m6re? 10. Allez k la fenStre. 11. ficrivez-vous sur un morceau de papier? 12. Aime-t-elle, son frftre? 13. II aime sa soeur. § 29 LESSON III & (5) Prepare complete sentences, some affirmative and some nega^ live, in answer to the following questions: 1. Ou 6tes-vous? 2. Que faites-vous? 3. Jean est-il dans la classe maintenant? 4. A-t-il sa plume? 5. Ou est-il maintenant? 6. A-t-il deux plumes? 7. fieri t-il dans son cahier ou sur le tableau noir? 8. fieri t-il avee son crayon ou avee un moreeau de craie? C. Translate into French: 1. How are you, (my) boys? 2. Are you in your seat, Robert? 3. What are you doing? 4. Mary, are you writing your lesson? 5. Is John writing with a pieee of chalk? 6. Am I at home or in the classroom ? 7. Where is my brother now? 8. Is his sister here? Exercise in Pronunciation (1) Pronounce suis [sqi], being careful to project the Ups tensely and hold the tongue tip well forward as for [y] and [i] (see § 16, 2). It is well to pronounce in succession [y-i], [y-i], and then try to combine them in one sound. This sound is not hke that of oui [wi] (see § 16, 3), in which the Ups and tongue are less tensely advanced. Practise with nuit [nxp], huit Cqit], lui [Iqi]. Contrast the sound of Louis [Iwi] with that of lui [Iqi]. (2) Pronounce: soeur [sceir] (see § 12, 3), classe [kkis] (see § 13, 2), maintenant [mgtna] (see § 12, 2). Note the difference in the soimd value of the letter a in la, voilS, papier, mademoiselle, argent, aUez, place, and in classe, pas. (3) What new way of spelling the sound [oj is there in this vocabulary? What sound has the spelling -ain in maintenant? -ien in bien? -ier final in papier, cahier? What new way of spelling the sound [e] have we in this vocabulary? We have had now three ways of spelling this sound: find an example of each. (4) All cases of linking are indicated in the sentences in part A of the Exercise given above. Which consonant sounds seem to be oftenest linked thus far? (5) Divide and pronounce by syllables: ecris (see §6, 2), 6crivez, maison, maintenant, aussi, ouvrez, fennez, cahier, papier, moreeau. mademoiselle. 26 A FRENCH GRAJMMAB §30 LESSON IV 30. Some Pronoun Objects. Him or it = le (m.), and her or it = la (/.) both becoming 1' before a vowel or h mute (§ 19, 1). They come next before the verb, or before voici and voila: Oa est la plume? Je /'ai. Ofi est le livre? Le voici. Oa est Marie? La voila. Where is the pen? I have it. Where is the book? Here it is. Where is Mary? There she is. Note. — Voici and VoiI4 are derived from vois = see + ici = here and vols = see + la = there (literally, see here, see there), and, owing to their verbal force, govern words directly like transitive verbs. EXERCISE IV unCune) apres-midi Cdenaprsmidi] afternoon une ecole [ynekoQ school une legon [bso] de franf ais, a French lesson la lettre [ktr] letter un livre de fran^ais, a French book, a book for learning French la main [mg] hand le matin [mate] morning le monsieur [m3sj0] gentleman le soir [swair] evening anglais [agls] EngHsh franfais [frase] French j'etudie [etydi] I am stud3ring, do study il etudie [etydi] he is studying, studies je ferme [ferm] I am closing il fait [fe] he does, is doing j'ouvre Cuivr] I am opening, do open je teste Crest] I stay, am staying il reste [rest] he stays, is stay- ing reste-t-il? [restatil] does he stay? is he stajdng? je retoume Cssrtum] I go back,, return il retoume [ratum] he back, returns je vais [ve] I go, am going goes ^ la main, in my (his, her, your, our, their) hand le matin (le soir, rapres-midi),, in the morning (evening, afternoon) pardon! [pards] I beg your pardon! Excuse me! A. 1. Le matin je vais^a, l'6cole. 2. L'apr&s-midi je retoume- h. la maison. 3. Le soir je reste ^ la maison et j'6tudie ma. leyon de franQais. 4. —Que faites-vous le matin, Louise? 5. — Je vais^5, I'^cole. 6. — Et Henri, que fait-U I'apres- i 30 LESSON IV 2? midi? 7. — II retourne k la maison. 8. — Reste-t-il h. la maison le soir? 9. — Oui, il reste k la maison le soir et D 6tudie sa legon d' anglais. 10. — Montrez-moi votre legon de frangais, Jeanne CSQuIl- H- — La voici; j'ai la legon quatre. 12. — Et vous, Robert, vous n'avez pas votre livre de franQais. 13. — Pardon, mademoiselle, je I'ai k la main; le voici. 14. Mais je n'ai pas mon Uvre d'anglais; il est^^a la maison. 15. — Vous etes^S, votre place, Louise. 16. — Pardon, made- moiselle, je ne suis pas^a ma place; Marie esi^k ma place. 17. Je suis^a la place de Jeanne et j'6cris dans son cahier. 18. — Et Henri? 19. — Le voilS, a sa place derriSre Louise. 20. II 6crit sa legon dans mon cahier avec sa plume. B. Substitute for each direct object the proper pronoun: 1. Je ne ferme pas la porte. 2. J'ouvre la porte. 3. Je ferme la porte. 4. J'6cris la lettre maintenant. 5. Je ne donne pas le morceau de craie k Louise. 6. J'ai la plume k la main. 7. Voila la maison. 8. Voici le cahier. 9. Voici ma place. 10. Voila mademoiselle Louise. 11. Voici madame Dupont [^dypo]. 12. VoilSi monsieur Dupont. 13. VoilS, un monsieur k la porte. 14. Vous^^crivez la legon de frangais. C. Translate into French: 1. I have your pen; I have it, I haven't it. 2. You have my notebook; you have it, you haven't it. 3. The teacher has a piece of chalk; he has it, he hasn't it. 4. I am studying my French lesson; I study it, I don't study it. 5. He is giving John the book; he gives it to John. 6. I beg your pardon, sir; he doesn't give it to John. 7. I open his door; I open it. 8. He is in his house. 9. He has his pen in his (la) hand. 10. He is not studying his French lesson. 11. He is studying it. D. Translate into French: 1. Do you go (AUez-vous) to (the) school in the afternoon? 2. No, I go to school in the morn- ing. I return home in the afternoon. 3. What do you do in the evening? 4. I stay at home and study my French les- son. I am studying (the) Lesson IV now. 5. You haven't your notebook. 6. I beg your pardon, sir; there it is behind my French book. 28 A FRENCH GEAMMAB §§ 31-32 ExEECisE IX Peonuxciation (1) Pronounce slowly by syllables, with attention to sj'l- lable stress: matin, apres-midi, etudie, franfais, anglaiS; montrez, pardon, monsieur, retoume. (2) What is the difference in pronunciation between et and est? Is there any difference between them in regard to link- ing (see §18, D? (3) In what words so far has the speUing combination ai been pronounced [e]? What sound value does this combina- tion seem to stand for oftenest? LESSON V 31. Plural Fonns. 1. The plural of a noun or an adjec- tive is regularly formed by adding -s to the singular: Le grand roi, la grande reine. The great king, the great queen. Les grands lois, les grandes reines. The great kings, the great queens. 2. The plural of the definite article le, la, 1' is les: Les De] livres, les Qez] enfants. The books, the children. 3. The plural of the personal pronoun le, la, I' is also les: Je les,_M- I have them (books, pens, etc.). 32. The Possessive Adjective. 1. The following are its forms in full (for agreement and repetition, see §27): MAScrxnTE F-EMitn^rE Pltirai, mon [m5] ma [ma] mes [me], my 'oil CtS] ta [ta] tes [te], thy, your son [s5] sa [sa] ses [se], his, her, ite notre [notr] notre [notr] nos [no! our votre [votr] votre [votr] vos [vo], your leur DcEir] leur Doe:r] leurs Doe: r], their 2. The forms mon, ton, son, are used mstead of ma, ta, sa before feminines beginning with a vowel or h mute: Mon [m5n] amie (/.). My friend. Son [sSn] histoire (/.). His story. Son [s5n] autre plume (/.). His other pen. §32 LESSON V 29 3. Since son (sa, ses) means his, her, or its, it can be known only from the context which is meant. EXERCISE V un aTtii []oenami] friend une amie [ynami] friend le doigt [dwa] finger cinq [sek] five six [sis] six sept [set] seven huit [qit] eight neuf [noef] nine dix [dis] ten j'ecris [sekri] I am writing il ecrit [ekri] he is writing nous ecrivons [nuzekrivo] we are writing vous ecrivez [vuzekrive] you are writing ecrivez! [ekrive] write! {im- perative) i'etudie [etydi] I am studying il etudie [etydi] he is studying nous etudions [nuzetydj 5] we are studying vous etudiez [vuzetydje] you are studying etudiez! [etydje] study! (im- perative) je ferme [ferm] I am closing, do close elle ferme [ferm] she ia closing nous fennons [fermo] we close ^'ous fermez [ferme] you close feimez! [ferme] close! shut! (imperative) i'ouvre [uivr] I am opening elle ouvre [u!vr] she opens nous ouvrons [nuzuvrS] we open vous ouvrez [vuzuvre] you open ouvrez! [uvre] open! (im- perative) je reste [rest] I stay, am stay- ing il reste [rest] he stays nous restons [rests] we are stay- ing vous restez [reste] you stay restez! [reste] stay! (impera- tive) je retourne [sarturn] I go back elle retourne [ratum] she goes back nous retoumons [nurtumS] we return vous retournez [vurtume] you return retournez! [ratume] go backl return! (imperative) je suis [sqi] I am il est [ile] he (it) is elle est [ele], she (it) is nous sommes [som] we are vous Stes [vuzet] you are je vais [ve] I am going il va [va] he is going aujourd'hui [osurdqi] to-day combien de? [ksbjeda] how many ? how much? (followed by a noun naming the object of inquiry) 30 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 32 A. (1) 1. Ouvrez vos livres, mes^amis. 2. Que faites-vous? 3. — Nous^ouvrons nos livres. 4. — Fermez vos livres. 5. — Nous les fermons. 6. — Nous^avons^aujourd'hui la legon cinq [sekj. 7. Ouvrez vos livres k la legon cinq. 8. — Nous les^ouvrons. 9. — ficrivez dans vos cahiers: je ferme, il ferme, nous fermons, vous fermez. 10. J'ouvre, il ouvre, nous^ouvrons, vous,^ouvrez. 11. Je reste, il reste, nous restons, vous restez. 12. Je retourne, il retourne, nous re- tournons, vous retournez. 13. J'6tudie, il 6tudie, nous^4tudions, vous^6tudiez. 14. J'ai, il a, nous^avons, vous^avez. 15. Je suis, il est, le mot est sur le tableau, il est sur le tableau; ou est votre plume? EUe est^a la maison, nous sommes, vous^etes. 16. J'6cris, il ^crit, nous^6crivons, vous^^crivez. 17. Je vais, 11 va, nous^_,allons, vous,^allez. (2) 1. — Maintenant fermez vos cahiers. 2. — Nous les fermons. 3. — Merci, mes^amis. 4. Allez^S, la porte, Louise et Marie. 5. Que faites-vous? 6. — Nous^allons^^ la porte. 7. — Retournez^a votre place. 8 — Je vais^a ma place. 9. • — Ou etes-vous maintenant, mes^amies? 10. — Nous sommes^^ nos places. 11. • — Combien de mains avez-vous, mes^enfants? 12. — Nous^avons deux mains. 13. — Montrez-moi vos mains. 14. — Les voici. 15. Et rous^avons dix [di] doigts. B. (1) What seems to be the ending of the verb that corresponds to nous? Find one exception in A. What ending seems to cor- respond to vous? Find two exceptions in A. (2) Substitute the possessive adjective for the article-and-de phrase: 1. La plume de Jean; les plumes de Jean. 2. Le p6re de Jeanne; les freres de Jeanne. 3. La m6re de Marie et de Pierre; les frSres de Marie et de Pierre. 4. La maison de Robert; les maisons de Robert. 5. L'4cole de Louise; I'l^cole de Louise et de Marie. 6. La legon de I'enfant; les legons de I'enfant. 7. La le^on de deux enfants; les leyons de trois enfants. 8. Devant la maison de Marie. Derri^re la maisot? de Pierre. (3) Make the nouns plural: notre ami, votre doigt sa main teur cahier, votre enfant, son professeur, sa place, notre soeur. La Sorbonne, Paris § 32 LESSON V 3S C. Translate into French: 1. Our friend, our friends; youi finger, your fingers; his (her) hand, his (her) hands; theii hands; her (his) letters, their letters. 2. What are you doing, Robert? 3. I am writing a letter to my mother. John is writing a letter to his sister. 4. Louise is writing to her father. She is writing her letter; he is writing his letter. 5. Write your letters, (my) children! 6. Do you open their letters? No, sir, we do not open their letters. 7. Henry's father does not open his letters; he does not open them. 8. Do you open your children's letters? No, sir, we do not open them. 9. I am at my place in the classroom. I have my books, my notebook, and my pen. 10. My friend John is at his seat, too. He has his pen in his hand. He is writing his French lesson in his notebook. 11. There he is in front of the window. He goes to school in the morning, but he does not stay at school. He returns home in the afternoon. 12. Show me your French book, John. Here it is on my table. — Excuse me, sir; I haven't it at (the) school. It is not here; it is at home. Exercise in Pronunciation (1) Pronounce after the teacher: depeir, cefreir, cenom, oenoikl, sopeir, sSfreir, sonoikl; samezo, sonekol; lopeir, lamesr, lezafa; latait, Mreir, lezoikl; lamate, laswair, lezapremidi; Setydi melso, salezetydi; 3ekri, solezekri; sadonvoliivr arobeir, Seledon arobeir. Observe the elision of the [g] in the pronunciation of mes lefons [melso]. The sound [a], which is called often " mute e," disappears when the preceding syllable ends in a vowel sound followed by a single consonant sound, as in: les lejons QelsS], ses lejons [selso]. (2) In how many different ways are un, son, les pronounced ? What decides this? What name do we give to the joining of words as in mezafa, salezekri, sonoikl? Do we say (Snekol or ynekol? (3) Write phonetically and pronounce: le doigt, les doigts; I'ami, les amis; mon amis, mes amies. Do these nouns change in sound in the plural, or only in spelling? 32 A FRENCH GBAAIMAR §§ 33-34 (4) Pronounce: dedwa, oenDm; d0me, d0zafa; trwaplas, trwazekol; katrakrejo, katrami; selso, sekami; sifreir, siizafa; semezo, setom; ipkaje, T^itapremidi; ncsmorso, ncBvami; diswair, diizafa. In how many ways is each numeral pronounced? On what does the change depend? (5) Write phonetically and read aloud: un doigt, deux doigts, etc., up to 10; un enfant, deux enfants, etc., to 10. (6) Write phonetically the answers to: 1. Combien de doigts avez-vous? 2. Combien de tantes avez-vous? 3. Combien de professeurs de francais avez-vous? 4. Combien de crayons avez-vous k Pecole? 5. Combien de crayons avez-vous k la maison? 6. Combien d'oncles avez-vous (ou Combien avez- vous d'oncles)? (7) What have you to say about linking between: (a) Pro- noun subject and verb? (6) Article and noun? (c) Posses- sive adjective and noun? (d) Forms of verb ' to be ' and their complements? Look for cases of each in A above. LESSON VI 33. Present Indicative of avoir, to have 1. Affirmative 2. Negative / have, etc. I have not, etc. j'ai Cse] {e n'ai pas [sanepa] tuas [tya] ' tu n'as pas [tynapa] Ua Cila] il n'a pas [ihiapa] nous avons [nuzav3] nous n'avons pas [nunavSpa] 70US avez [vuzave] vous n'avez pas [vunavepa] ils ont Cilz5] ils n'ont pas [ilnDpa] 34. Pronouns in Address. You is regularly voiis; the form tu = thou or you is used in familiar address: Avez-uous ma plume, monsieur? Have you my pen, sir? ks-tu ta plume, mon enfant? Have you youi pen, my child? N.B. — Translate you by vous in the exercises, unless the use of tu is required by the context. §§ 35-36 LESSON VI 33 35. Contractions. De + le and de + les are always con- tracted into du and des; the remaining forms are not con- tracted, thus, de la, de 1' in full: La plume du [dy] frere. The brother's pen. Les plumes des [de] soeurs. The sisters' pens. But: La plume de I'eleve. The pupil's pen. 36. The Partitive Noun and Pronoun. 1. Some or any, whether expressed or implied before a noun in English, is reguJarly expressed in French by de + the definite article: Avez-vous de la craie? Have you (some) chalk (Ut., 'of the chalk')? A-t-elle du pain? Has she (any) bread? J'ai de I'encre. I have (some) ink. A-t-il des freres? Has he (any) brothers? 2. In a general negation the partitive is expressed by de alone: II n'a pas de pain. He has no bread. n n'a pas d'amis. He has no friends. 3. Some or any as a pronoun = en, which must be ex- pressed in French, even when omitted in English (cf . § 80) : A-t-il de I'encre? — H en a. Has he (any) ink? — He haa (some). A-t-il une plume? — n en a une. Has he a pen? — He has one. N.B. — En, Uke the other partitive expressions, is often equal to Eng- lish of it, of them, especially when the object of the verb is a numeral not followed by its noun. A-t-il une plume? — • H en a une. Has he a pen? — He has one. Combien de lettres ecrivez-vous? — How many letters do you write? — I J' en ecris quatre aujourd'hui. am writing four (of them) to-day. 4. The position of the pronoun en in the sentence is dif- ferent from the usage of English: en always comes directly before the verb, except in one instance (cf. § 113): Avez-vous des crayons? Have you (any) pencils? Oui, monsieur, j'en at. Yes, sir, I 34 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §36 un eleve [(Snekiv] pupil une eleve [ynelsiv] pupil le mur [my!r] wall le plafond [plaf 3] ceiling le plancher [plaje] floor le pupitre [pypitr] desk (jntpiJ's) aller [ale] to go je vais [ve] I am going, go, do go il va [va] he is going, goes nous aliens [nuzals] we go, are going vous allez [vuzale] you are going, go il commence Piomais] he is beginning ecoutez! [ekute] listen! (imr- perative) nous entrons (dans) [nuzatrS da] we enter, go in EXERCISE VI il marche [marQ he walks, is walking, does walk parler [parle] speak {infinir je sors [soir] I go out, am going out il sort [soir] he goes out nous sortons [sorts] we go out vous sortez [sorte] you go out nous voulons [vul3] we wish, want, are willing vous voulez [vule] you wish, want, are wiUing en [a] of it, of them (iproTumn) en [a] in (preposition; to he used by pupils only in ex- pressions found in text) apres [aprs] after par [par] by j'en suis [sasqi] I belong to it, am of it, of them. n'est-ce pas?[n£spa] don't you? don't we? isn't it true? A. 1. ficoutez, mes^amis. Nous sommes^en classe de frangais. En ^tes-vous, Robert? 2. — Oui, monsieur (made- moiselle), j'en suis, et mon^amie Marie en^^est^aussi. 3. Nous sommes dix^^l^ves et le professexir. 4. Nous^avons des livres, des crayons et du papier. 5. Le professeur en^a aussi. II a aussi de la craie. 6. Nous^6tudions le frangais. 7. — Vous voulez parler frangais, n'est-ce pas? 8. — Oui, monsieur, nous voulons parler frangais. 9. — Eh bien (Well then), Ecoutez: La classe a quatre murs. 10. VoUS, les murs de la classe. 11. Voil&, le plafond, et vous marchez sur le plancher. 12. Combien de portes la classe a-t-elle (has the classroom)? — Elle en^_,a une. 13. — Combien de fen^tres? — Elle en^_,a trois. 14. — Les^^l^ves ont des pupitres et le professeiu- a une table. 15. Elle est devant le professeur, et le professeur §36 LESSON VI 35 est devant les^61dves. 16. Nous^entrons dans la classe par la porte, iious^_,aUons,_,a nos places, nous,_,ouvrons les livres et la legon commence. 17. Apr^s la classe, nous fermons les livres et nous sortons par la porte. 18. Nous sortons par la fenStre, Pierre [pjeir]. 19. — Pardon, mademoiselle, nous ne sortons pas par la fenMre. B. (1) Using in turn as subjects je, il, eUe, vous in place of nous, rewrite affirmatively and negatively, the sentences 16-19 of A: Nous entrons dans la classe, etc., to the end. (2) Substitute the partitive expression for the article and read aloud: les doigts, les mains, le papier, les amis, les amies, les apres-midi, la craie, les mots. (3) Supply the partitive expression and read aloud: 1. lis ont frSres et soeurs. 2. Nous ouvrons portes et fenStres. 3. lis ont doigts et mains. 4. Donnez-moi papier et plumes. 5. Mademoiselle a craie. 6. EUe 6crit mots dans son caiiier. 7. Nous 6crivons mots dans nos cahiers. 8. Vous donnez papier S, Robert. 9. II a craie k la main. (4) a. Write affirmative and negative answers, using the parti- tive pronoun: 1. Avez-vous des frferes? 2. A-t-il du papier? 3. Avons-nous des doigts? 4. fites-vous de notre classe? 5. Etudions-nous desleQons? 6. Ont-ils des sceurs? 7. Avez- vous de la craie h. la main? h. Write negative answers to the questions under a, first keeping the noun objects, and then substituting the partitive pronoun for the noun objects. (5) Conjugate: 1. Je n'ai pas d'amis. 2. Je n'en ai pas. C. Translate into French: 1. You are in the classroom, (my) children. 2. You have paper, pens, pencils, and notebooks. 3. The classroom has doors, windows, and walls. 4. Listen, Louise, you are not writing your lesson. 5. I have no paper, sir. 6. You haven't any? Excuse me, you have some. There it is in front of Robert. 7. I have no chalk. Pierre has some chalk in his hand, and Jeanne has some too. 8. How many fingers have you? I have ten. 9. There are ten of us (we are ten) pupils in the classroom with our teacher. 10. Do you 36 A FRENCH GKAMMAR §§ 37-38 belong to (Are you of) the French class, Marie? 11. Yes, sir, I belong to it, and Henri belongs to it too. 12. What do you want? We want to speak French. D. (1) After several readings aloud, first by the teacher, then by the class in concert, the pupils should be asked to retell orally and in writing the facts about the classroom in A. (2) Dictation: Lesson V, A. Exercise in Peonunciation Write phonetically and pronounce: un oncle, des oncles; un eleve, des eleves; un mot, des mots; una tante, des tantes; un pupitre, des pupitres; un plancher, des planchers; un mur, des murs. What is the plural of un, una? LESSON VII 37. Present Indicative of avoir (continued) 1. Interrogative 2. Negative Interrogative Have I? etc. Have I not? etc. fti-je? [eis] n'ai-jepas? [ne.-spa] as-tu? [aty] n'as-tu pas? [natypa] a-t-U? [atil] n'a-t-ilpas? [natilpa] avons-nous? [avSnu] n'avons-nous pas? [navSnupa] avez-vous? [avevu] n'avez-vous pas? [navevupa] ont-Us? [3til] n'ont-nspas? [notHpa] 38. Interrogation. 1. When the subject of an inter- rogative sentence is a noun, the word order is noun-verb- pronoun : L'homme est-il la? Is the man there? 2. This form of question may be combined with an inter- rogative word: Mais Jean ot est-il? But where is John? Combien de plumes Jean a-t-il? How many pens has John? 3. What? (as direct object or predicate of a verbl = aue? See also § 19, 1 : gu'avez-vous la? What have you there? I 38 LESSON VII 37 EXERCISE Vn le beiure [Taoeir] butter la bouche [buij] mouth la dent [da] tooth la langue [laig] tongue, lan- guage une oreille [oreij] ear le pain [pe] bread, loaf of bread la tete [teit] head les yeux m. [Iezj0] eyes onze [5:z] eleven douze [du:z] twelve treize [treiz] thirteen quatorze P^atorz] fourteen quinze [Tigiz] fifteen il donne [don] he is giving, gives nous donnons [donS] we are giving, we give vous donnez [dane] you are giving uous ecoutons [nuzekuts]] we lis- ten vous ecoutez [vuzekute] you are listening j'entends [ata] I hear, do hear il entend [ata] he hears nous entendons [nuzatado] we do hear vous entendez [vuzatade] you are hearing je mange [ma; 5] I am eating elle mange [ma: 5] she is eating nous mangeons [ma 15 5] we do eat vous mangez [maise] you eat je parle [pari] I am speaking elle parle [pari] she talks, speaks nous parlons [pari 3] we talk vous parlez [parle] you speak je vols [vwa] I see, do see elle voit [vwa] she sees, is seeing nous voyons [vwajo] we do see vous voyez [vwaje] you are seeing mais [me] but, why {not in a question) ; mais non! Why no! A. (1) 1. ficoutea, Jean! ficoutez, mes^amis! Que faites-vous? 2. — Nous^6coutons. 3. — ficrivez dans votre cahier, Marie! 4. Marie oii 6crit-^elle? 5. ■ — Elle €cni dans son cahier. 6. — Donnez votre plume h. Robert. 7. — Que donnez- vous k Robert, Henri? 8. Je donne ma plume h. Robert. 9. • — Qu'avez-vous h, la main, Louise? 10. — J'ai a la main men livre de frangais. 11. — N'avez-vous pas^^aussi votre crayon h la main? 12. — Oui, mademoiselle; et j'ai aussi des livres et du papier, mais Pierre n'en^a pas. (2) 1. — Combien de t^tes avez-vous, Maurice [moris]? 2. — J'en^ai une, et Henri en^a une et le professeur en^a une aussi. 3. — N'avez-vous pas deux mains, Pierre? 4. — Oui, mademoiselle, j'en^ai deux. 5. — Et combien de doigts Louise 38 A FKENCH GRAMMAR § 38 a-t-elle? 6. — EUe en^a dix Cdis] et Marie a dix doigts [didwa] aussi. 7. — Combien de mains Robert a-t-il? II en^a deux. 8. Nous^avons des^oreilles, des^yeux et une boucba. 9. Dans la bouche nous^avons une langue et des dents. 10. — Le professeur a-t-il des^oreiUes aussi? — Oui, il en,_^a deux. 11. — Que faites-vous avec vos^oreilles, mes^amis (mon^ami) ? 12. — Nous^entendons (j'entends) avec les^oreilles, nous voyons (je vols) avec les^_j'eux, nous parlous (je parle) avec la langue et la bouche, et nous mangeons (je mange) avec les dents. 13. — Que mangez-vous? — Nous mangeons du pain avec du beurre. 14. — Qu'avez-vous dans la bouche? — J'ai un morceau de pain dans la bouche. B. (1) Say in French: I (we, you) open; I (we, you) close; I (we, you) go in; I (we, you) go out; I (we, you) stay; I (we, you) study; I (we, you) write; I (we, you) listen; I (we, you) hear; I (we, you) see; I (we, you) talk; I (we, you) eat; Usten, eat, speak, stay, go out, come in, write; I (we, you) go; I am, we (you) are. (2) Complete: 1. Vous voyez avec . 2. J'entends avec . 3. Nous mangeons avec . 4. Vous parlez avec . 5. - — - mangez-vous? 6. Je pain avec beurre. 7. Combien doigts avez-vous? 8. J' ai dix (5ee A, (2), 6). 9. Et combien yeux [j0] {•preceding La] elided) le professeur a-t-il? 10. II a deux. (3) Study the examples of the use of en in A, (2) and try to make a rule for the use of en with numerals. C. Translate into French: 1. Do you want some butter with your bread? 2. I have no bread. 3. But you have some butter. 4. I beg your pardon, I have none (haven't any). 5. Has the man ears and eyes and teeth? 6. He has ears and eyes, but he has no teeth. 7. How many ears has he? 8. He has two. 9. I hear with my (the) ears and see with my (the) eyes. 10. Have you no teeth? 11. I have teeth and I am eating some bread, but I have no butter. 12. Do you want some? Why (Mais) yes, sir (miss). 13. I have ten fingers; he has ten. 14. There are fifteen of us pupils (We are fifteen pupils) in the classroom. 15. I see fifteen in the classroom. $ 39 LESSON VIII 39 ExEBCISE IN PeONUNCIATION (1) Read: siliivr, siizami, elanasis; noeda, ncevami, vuzana- vencef; didwa, navSnupadiizami? laprofesceiranadis. In how many ways are the words for 6, 9 and 10 pronounced? Explain. In how many ways are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8 pronounced (see Lesson V, Exercise in Pronunciation, 4) ? Explain. Count: 5;z, duiz, treiz, katorz, keiz. Count 1-15, putting after each numeral a noun beginning with a consonant, and then one beginning with a vowel. For example: 5 crayons, 5 eleves. Write out the combinations in phonetic characters. (2) What two ways do you know of spelling the sound [§]? What three ways of spelling the sound [o[]? What sound does the letter o (not in combination or nasal) usually represent? One exception so far: what is it? What sound does the letter a (not in combination or nasal) usually represent? Name the two exceptions up to this point. What sound does the combina- tion ai (not nasal) usually represent? Name the two exceptions. What is the position of your Ups in pronouncing [o2 as in porte, creille, so as to get the French quality (see § 14, 1)? Note how the -eille of oreille gives [e;j]. Pronounce le soleil [sDleg], sun. What is the name of this soimd? (See § 16, 1). LESSON vm 39, Present Indicative of Mre, to be 1. Affirmative 2. Negative I am, etc. I am not, etc. je suis [sasqi] je ne suis pas [sansqipa] tu es [ty e] tu n'es pas [tynepa] il est [ile] U n'est pas [ilnepa] nous sommes [nusom] nous ne sonunes pas [nunsompa] ffous etes [vuzst] vous n'etes pas [vunstpa] ils sent [ilsD] ils ne sont pas [UnasSpaD 40 A FBENCH GBAMMAR §40 3. Interrogative Am I? etc. suis-je? [suiis] es-tu? [Ety] est-a? [EtU] sommes-nous? [somnu] etes-vous [etvu] sont-lls? [sotil] 4. Negative Interrogative Am I not? etc. ne suis-je pas? [nasqi ; spa] n'es-tu pas? [netypa^ n'est-U pas? Cnstilpa] ne sommes-nous pas? [nasomnupa] n'etes-vous pas? [^netvupa] ne sont-ils pas? CnssStilpaJ 40. Observe that il and elle mean not only he and she, but also it, since there are but two genders of nouns in French: Oa est la plume? Elle est ici. Where is the pen? It is here. Oft sont les plumes? Elles sent ici. Where are the pens ? They are here. EXERCISE Vm la carte [kart] map, card le contraire [kstreir] opposite la France [frais] France le jour [suir] day la nuit [nqi] night autre [otr] other bon [Tjd] good ierme [ferme] closed ouvert Cuvesr] open petit [pati] small, little tout [tuj all; (as a pronoun) everything quinze [kesz] fifteen seize [seiz] sixteen dix-sept [dissst] seventeen dix-huit [dizqit] eighteen dix-neuf [diznoef] nineteen vingt [vs] twenty comprendre Osopraidr] un- derstand (infin.) Je comprends [k3pra] I under- stand, do understand il comprend [kSpral he does understand nous comprenons [TcSpranS] we understand vous comprenez [TiSprone] you understand compter [k5te] coimt (infin.) comptez! [kote] count! (im- perative) dormjr [domii:r] sleep (infin.), be asleep entendre [ataidr] hear (infin.) manger [maise] eat (infin.) ilsrestent, elles restent [rsstj they stay, remain noustichons (de) [taiSs] we are trying (to), etc. voustachez (de) [taiSe] you are trying (to), etc. bien [bjg] well, very well pour [pur] for, in order to c'est [ss] it is, that is voulez-vous bien? [vulevubje] wiU you (please)? are you willing to? 8 40 LESSON VIII 41 A.. (1)1. — Oil Ites-vous, mes^amis? 2. — Nous sommes,3 I'^cole, dans la classe. 3. — Que voyez-vous, Louise? 4. — Je vois une porte, des fenetres, des murs, un plafond, un plancher, un tableau noir, et notre professeur. 5. — C'est tout, Pierre? 6. — Non, monsieur (mademoiselle); je vois aussi des livres, des plumes, des cahiers, vingt^616ves, des crayons, des pupitres. 7. Sur le mur je vois une carte de France. 8. — C'est bon, Pierre. Vous voyez tout. 9. Voulez-vous bien compter les 616ves? 10. Jeanne: — un^^lfeve, deux^^lSves ving1i_^616ves. 11. — Bien! combien d'616ves ^tes-vous7 12. — Nous sommes vingii_,616ves. 13. — Et la porte, est;_elle ouverte [uvert]? 14. Non, mademoiselle, elle est fermee Perme]. 15. — Et les fenetres, sont-^elles ouvertes? 16. — Une des fenetres est^ouverte et les deux^autres sont fer- mees. (2) 1. — Que faites-vous en classe? 2. — Nous^^tudions le franQais. 3. Le professeur parle frangais, nous^6coutons et nous tachons de comprendre. 4. — Comprenez-vous les mots « ouverte » et « fermee » ? 5. — Oui, mademoiselle. Nous^ouvrons la porte, elle est^ouverte. 6. Nous^entrons dans la classe et nous fermons la porte. Elle est fermie maintenant. 7. — Bon! Votre bouche est-^elle ouverte? 8. — Oui, mademoiselle. Je I'ouvre pour parler et pour man- ger. 9. — Et vos^oreilles? — Elles sont^ouvertes. Elles restent [rest] ouvertes pour entendre. 10. — Et vos^yeux, restent-ils [restatil] ouverts [uve:r]? 11. — Non, made- moiselle, je les^ouvre le matin; le jour ils restent ouverts. La nuit je les ferme pour dormir. 12. — Bien! « Porte ouverte » est le contraire de « porte fermee. » 13. ficoutez bien: mes^_jreux sont^ouverts [uveir], les deux portes son^ouvertes [uvert]. 14. Henri est-Jl petit [pati]? Louise est-_elle petite [patit]? B. (1) Where reasonably possible, make every verb in A negative. (2) Substitute the proper personal pronoun for (he noun object in: 1. Je vois une porte. 2. Nous ^coutons le professeur. 3. II compte les 616ves. 4. Ouvrez-vous la fenStre? 5. Com' 42 A FRENCH GRAMMAB § 40 prenez-vous le mot? 6. Vous ne voyez pas mes dents. 7. Ne voyez-vous pas mes dents? 8. Ne fermez-vous pas les yeux pour dormir? 9. Je vols une carte de France. 10. Je ne comprends pas le mot. 11. Avez-vous des amis? 12. Nous avons des dents. 13. Nous entendons des mots. 14. Nous voyons nos amies. 15. J'entends le mot. (3) Make sentences of the groups of words, supplying lacking words and using as many partitives as possible: 1. J'ai, ne pas, en. 2. II, dents, a. 3. Soeurs, avez-vous? 4. J'ai, quatre. 5. Vous tachez, la nuit, de dormir. 6. II voit, portes, et fenMres. 7. Nous, en, voyons, ne pas. 8. Entendez- vous? ne pas. 9. Porte ouverte, porte fermee, le contraire. 10. Portes, ouvertes, mais, fenStres, fermdes. 11. Pierre, petit et Louise, petite. C. Translate into French: 1. Are your books open? Are the windows open? 2. Has the classroom windows and doors? 3. It has windows, doors, walls, desks, a ceiling, and a floor. 4. Have the pupils books? Yes. There are the pupils' books. 5. They have notebooks too, and pens, and paper, and pencils, but they have no chalk. 6. The teacher has some in his hand. 7. What are you doing? We are listening to the teacher. 8. She is speaking French and we are trying to understand her. 9. Do you understand her, Marie? Yes, I understand her. 10. That's good. D. The differences of spelling and pronunciation of ouvert, ouverte; petit, petite are du^ to a difference in what? To judge hy f erme, fermee, do these same differences appear in every case f Would the addition of an s for the plural make any difference in the pronunciation of any of these words? Exercise in Pronunciation ficrivez en caract^res phon^tiques et prononcez: 1. Je vois vingt Aleves. 2. Ou etes-vous, mes amis? 3. Vous voyez leslivres. 4. Nous entrons dans la classe. 5. Vos yeux restent ouverts. 6. Nous ^tudions le frangais. 7. Vous ou\Tez la porte. 8. II compte les 61^ves. 5 §41-43 LESSON rx 43 LESSON IX 41. The Regtilar Conjugations. French verbs are con- veniently divided, according to the infinitive endings -er, -ir, -re, into three conjugations: I II III Donner [done] to give Finir [finiir] to finish Vendre [va: dr] to sell Like these are conjugated all regular verbs with corre- sponding infinitive endings. 42. Present Indicative of donner, to give 1. AiErmative 2. Negative / give, am giving, etc. I do not give, am not giving, etc. je donn e [sadon] je ne donn e pas [sandonpa] tu donn es [tydon] tu ne donn es pas [tyndonpa] il donn e [ildon] U ne donn e pas [ilnsdonpa] aous donn ons [nudona] nous ne donn ons pas [nundonSpa] vous donn ez [vudane] vous ne donn ez pas [vundonepa] ils donn eni [ildon] ils ne donn ent pas [ilnadonpa] 3. Interrogative 4. Negative Interrogative Am I giving f do I give ? etc. Am I not giving f do I not give ? etc. donne-je? [done: 5] ne donne-je pas? [[nadoneispa] donnes-tu? [donty] ne donnes-tu pas? [nadontsTja] donne-t-U? [dontil] ne donne-t-il pas? [nadontilpa] donnons-nous? [donSnu] ne donnons-nous pas? [nadonSnupa] donnez-vous? [donevu] ne donnez-vous pas? [nadonevupa] donnent-ils? Cdontil] ne donnent-ils pas? [nadontilpa] 43. Interrogation. By prefixing the words est-ce que? literally, is it that? any statement may be turned into a question: Vous avez mon canif . You have my penknife. Est-ce que vous avez mon canif? Have you my penknife? Est-ce que vous n'aimez pas la Don't you like walkingr marche? Note. — The first singular interrogative form {e.g., donne-je? suis-je? etc.) is avoided in most verbs, and must be avoided in some, by using est-ce que? In the exercises, use est-ce que? everywhere with the 1st singular a A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 44 44. The Demonstrative Adjective. 1. The following are its forms, and they must be repeated before each noun to which they refer: f ce [sa], before a masculine beginning with a consonant. This, that = j cet [sst], before a m. beginning with a vowel or h mute. [ cette [sstl before any feminine. These, those = ces nse^, before any plural. 2. To distinguish this from that, or for emphasis, add -ci (= ici) and -la respectively to the noun: Ce livre, cet homme, ceiie amie. This (or that) book, man, friend. Ce crayoa-ci et ces plumes-Za. This pencil and those pens. a. In the combinations c'est and ce sent the demonstrative pronoun ce is often equal to English it (standing for and pointing to the real subject that follows), he, she, they. C'est mon ami Pierre. It (he) is my friend Pierre. Ce sont les enfants de ma tante. They are my aunt's children. Est-ce [es] vous? C'est vous. Is it (that) you? It is you. EXERCISE IX un age [denais] age nous nous appelons [nunuzaplS] un an [cena] year we are named, etc. le cousin [kuze] cousin vous vous appelez Cvuvuzaple] la cousine Pcuzin] cousin you are named la fille ffiii"! daughter, girl * , _ , ^, , lefflsCfis]son / regarder [ragarde] look (at) le garson [gars5] boy ^.^ '^^^f .^^^'^^J,^^ I l°°k at la marche [marS] walking '^ '"^"^^ ^'^^'^'^^ ^' ^ l°°king le sport Cspo:r] sport °°"^ regardons [nurgardo] vous regardez [vurgarde] fort [foir] strong dites [dit] say, tell {impera- grand [gra] large, taU ^,-j,g „f ^ire) quel? TO. [ktl] what? attentivement [atativma] aimer [eme] like, love attentively i'aime [em] I (do) like, love comment? [koma] how? lentement [lat(e)ma] slowly je m appelle [mapel] I am plus [ply] more named, my name is vite [vit] rapidly, quickly il s appeUe [sapsl] he is named parce que [parska] because §44 LESSON ES 45 EXERCISE IX (Continued) quel age avez-vous [kdaisavevu] how old are you? j'ai trois ans [setrwaza] I am three; il a quinze ans, he is fifteen. s'il vous plait [silvupls] please. * Endings like donner, but observe the pronunciation of the pres. indica- tive. See Lesson V, Exercise in Pronunciation, (1). A. (1) 1. Comment vous^appelez-vous [vuzaplevu ^], mon ami? 2. — Je m'appelle Maurice, monsieur (mademoi- selle). 3. — Quel &ge avez-vous? 4. — J'ai quinze ans. 5. — Vous^^tes grand [gra]! Est-ce que votre pere est grand aussi? 6. — Oui, monsieur (mademoiselle), il est grand, mais ma m^re est petite; elle n'est pas grande [graid]. 7. — Est-ce que vous^avez des frSres et des scsurs? 8. — Oui, monsieur (mademoiselle), j'ai un frere et trois soeurs. 9. Mon fr^re s'appelle Edouard [edwair], et mes scEurs s'appellent Germaine [sermen], Jeanne et Adfele [adel]. 10. Edouard a treize ans; il est petit; mais tres fort (foir). 11. Germaine a huil^ans, Jeanne a dix-sept^ans, et Ad^e en^a dix-neuf. 12. EUes sont grandes [gra:d] et fortes [fort]. 13. Moi, je suis tr^s fort aussi et j'aime les sports. 14. J' aims le tennis [tenis], le baseball [besbal] et la marche. 15. Mes soeurs aiment le tennis; mais^eUes n' aiment pas la marche. (2) 1. — Est-ce que cette petite fille-ci est^une de vos sceurs? 2. — Non, mademoiselle, c'est (she is) la scEur de ce petit garQon-lsi. 3. — Et ces trois petites filles-lS,? 4. — Non, mes soeurs ne sont pas^S, I'^cole; elles sont^S, la maison. 5. Ces grandes fiUes-lS, sont les^enfants de mon^oncle. 6. Ce sont {They are) mes cousines, et cet^^l&ve-ci est son fils. 7. C'est (He is) mon cousin. 8. — Est-ce que cet^616ve-15, 6coute le professeur? 9. — Oui, il I'^coute attentivement, mais^l ne comprend pas tr&s bien, parce que le professeur parle trfes vite. 10. Parlez plus lentement, monsieur, s'il vous plait. 11. Nous^6coutons trfes^attentivement mais nous ne vous comprenons pas. * Observe the disappearance of the [a] in the pronunciation of appelez Caple]. See Lesson V, Exercise in Pronunciation, (1). i6 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 44 B. Write, supplying the proper form: ce, cet, cette, or ces; enfant (/.), 61&ve (m. and /.), fiUe, gargon, apres-midi, carte, cartes, yeux, jour, nuit. C. (1) Translate into French: 1. I count the pupils. 2. He studies his lesson. 3. She enters (in) the classroom. 4. We eat bread and butter. 5. You look at the map. 6, They begin the lesson. 7. Don't I speak French? (see § 43, note) 8. Doesn't he listen to the teacher? (two ways) 9. Don't we look at the map? (two ways) 10. Don't they study? 11. I do not close the door. 12. She does not eat butter. 13. We do not eat any. 14. You do not return home in the morning; you return home in the afternoon. 15. They do not come in. (2) 1. I count the pupils; he counts them; they count the windows; we count them. 2. We do not stay at home in the morning; they stay at home in the evening. 3. He opens the door; they open it; it is open. 4. Look at the map! What do you see? 5. They look at it; they study it. 6. Come in! They enter (in) the classroom by the door. 7. They eat bread; they eat some. 8. Do you want (Voulez-vous) some bread? 9. Do you want some? Don't you want any? We eat none. (3) Dites en frangais: 1. My name is Robert. 2. Her name is Ad^le. 3. His name is Joffre [sofr]. 4. What is your name? 5. Their (/.) name is Hugo [ygo^. D. Dictation: Lesson VII, A, (2). Exercise in Pronunciation (1) ficrivez en caract^res phon6tiques et prononcez: 1. Ce garQon est petit. 2. Cette fille est petite. 3. Cette maison est grande. 4. Cet^omme est grand. 5. Cet^enfant est fort. 6. Mademoiselle est forte. 7. Le cahier est^^ouvert 8. La porte est^ouverte. (2) Pronounce the feminine of grand, ouvert, petit. §§45-47 LESSON X 47 LESSON X 46. Plural Forms. Note the following exceptions to the rule (§ 31) that the plural of noxms and adjectives is formed by adding -s to the singular: 1. Nouns in -s, -x, -z, and adjectives in -s, -x, remain unchanged in the plural, e.g., bras, bras, orm(s); voix, voix, voice{s); nez, nez, nose{s); bas, bas, low; vieux, vieux, old. 2. Nouns and adjectives in -au, noims in -eu, and a few nouns in -ou, add -X instead of -s, e.g., coutecu, couteaux, knife, knives; beau, beaux, fine; jeu, jeux, game(s) ; bijou, bijoux, jewel{s) ; caillou, cail- loux, pebble(s), and a few rarer noims in -ou. 3. Nouns, and the commoner adjectives, in -al change -al to -au and add -x (as above), e.g., general, generawx, general{s) ; rivaJ, rivoux, rival(s), except bal, bals, ball(s), and a few rarer noims. 4. (Eil, yeux, eye{s); ciel, cieux, sky, skies, heaven(s). 46. Contractions. The forms a + le and a + les are always contracted into au and axix respectively; the remain- ing forms are not contracted, thus, a la, a 1' in full: Je parle au [o] frere. I speak to the brother. Aux [o] soeurs, aux [oz] honunes. To the sisters, to the men But: Je parle a la scEur, a Z'homme. 47. Use of il y a [ilja]. 1. There is and there are are not only translated by voila, but also by il y a: Voila des plumes sur la table. There are some pens on the table. II y a des plumes sur la table. There are some pens on the table. 2. Observe, however, that voila answers the question 'where is?' 'where are?' and makes a specific statement about an object to which attention is directed by pointing or the like, whUe il y a does not answer the question 'where is?' 'where are?' but makes a general statement. Voila is stressed, il y a is tmstressed, just as in English there is (are) is usually stressed or unstressed according as it points out or merely makes a general statement. 48 A FRENCH GRAJMMAB §47 3. n y a governs nouns just as other transitive verbs do: Je donne des plumes a Marie. U y a des plumes sur la table. I give (some) pens to Mary. There are (some) pens on the table. EXERCISE X le bas Q)a] stocking le bijou [bisu] jewel le bout [bu] tip, end le bras [bra] arm le cheval [leSval] horse le corps [ko!r] body le couteau [kuto] (table-)knife la difference [diferais] difference le general [seneral] general la jambe [saib] leg le nez [ne] nose un oeil [oenceij] eye le pied [pje] foot le pluriel [pljnrjsl] plural la voix [vwa] voice beau [bo3 fine, handsome, beautiful vieux [vi0] old vingt et un [vEteoe] 21 vingt-deux [v£td0] 22 vingt-trois [vsttrwa] 23 vingt-quatre [vgtkatr] 24 vingt-cinq [vetssk] 25 vingt-six [vetsisH 26 vingt-sept [vetsEt] 27 vingt-huit [vstqit] 28 vingt-neuf [vstnoef] 29 trente [trait] 30 quelle?/, [kel] what? qui? [ki] who? whom? desirer [deziire] wish, want lire [li:r] read porter [parte] wear, carry prononcer [pronSise] pro- nounce distinctement [distEkt(9)ma] distinctly en fransais [frase] in French entre [aitr] between pourquoi? [purkwa] why? quand? [ka] when? A. (1) 1. II y a vingt^l un ou vingt-deux^616ves dans cette classe de fran9ais. 2. Ils^^tudient le fran9ais parce qu'ils d^sirent le lire, le comprendre et le parler. 3. Pourquoi 6tudiez-vous le fran9ais? 4. D6sirez (voulez)-vous lire des livres frang'ais, mes^amis? 5. — Oui, monsieur, nous voulons (desirous) lire les livres de Victor Hugo, de Maupassant Fmopasa], de Balzac [balzak], d'Anatole France [anatolfrais], de Dumas [dyma], de Voltaire [volts ir], de Beaumarchais [bomarje], de Lesage [bsais], de Moliere []molJEir], et nous d6sirons (voulons) comprendre le frangais et le parler aussi. 6. — Eh bien, mes^amis, ^coutez-moi trSs^attentivement parce que je vais vous parler en frangais. MOLIERE -1 0^ .^ ^l^^^^j^^^^^H W#^L^ |l jH^^^^I^^^^^^^I F l^^i ^^^j^^^^^^^^v '-<> ' H Hk ^1 >r^ Victor Hugo jeuiste § 47 LESSON X 49 (2) 1. Entendez-vous ma voix? — Oui, monsieur. 2. — Com- prenez-vous les mots quand je parle lentement? 3. ■ — Oui, monsieur, mais nous ne comprenons pas quand vous parlez vite. 4. — Eh, bien, 6coutez. Je vais parler lentement et prononcer distinctement. 5. J'ai un corps. Voici mon corps. 6. Voici mes deux bras. Au bout de mes deux bras, j'ai deux mains. 7. II y a cinq doigts k cette main et cinq doigts k cette main; combien de doigts est-ce que j'ai? 8. Voici mon nez. Est-ce que j'ai un nez ou deux nez? 9. Et Louise, combien de nez a-t-elle? 10. A-t-elle trois,_j'eux? Et un clieval combien d'yeux Cdj0] a-t-il? 11. Et combien d'yeux []dj0] ont douze chevaux? 12. Et vous^avez deux jambes [3a:b] et deux pieds Cd0pje], Henri, n'est-ce pas? 13. Et les chevaux combien de jambes ont-Jls? — Ils^en^ont quatre 14. — Combien de jambes ont sept chevaux? 15. — Qu'avez- vous aux pieds? — J'ai des bas aux pieds. 16. — Ou portez- vous les bas, aux mains? 17. — Non, monsieur, je les jiorte aux pieds et aux jambes. 18. — Qu'avez-vous au bout dea jambes? 19. —J'ai mes deux pieds au bout de mes jambes. B. 1. Allez^au tableau (noir), Jean. 2. Ecrivez^auplurij:le bras, la voix, im g6n6ral, un couteau. 3. Maintenant 6crivez_au singulier: les yeux, les chevaux. 4. Dit^n {Do we, people, say) : « II y a vingt-trois^616ves dans cette classe, » ou « Voil^ vingt-trois_616ves dans <;ette classe? » 5. Dit^n: « II y a mes deux brasT, ou « Voila mes deux bras »? 6. Dit^n: « II y a notre professeur de frangais », ou « Voila notre professeur de franeais »? 7. Quelle est la difference entre: « Voil^ deux_61Sves qui n'^coutent pas! » et « II y a deux_616ves qui n'^coutent pas »? C Translate into French: 1. There are twenty-nine pupils in this French class. 2. The teacher speaks to the pupils in French 3. He speaks slowly and the pupils try (tSchent de) to understand him. 4. He says (dit): " What is your name? How old are you? Why do you study French? " 5. My name is Edward. I am sixteen. 6. I am studying because I wish to read, understand, speak, and write ^(the) French. 7. Will you CVoulez-vous bien) speak slowly?" 50 A FBENCH GRAMMAK §47 ExEBCisE IN Pronunciation (1) Write phonetically and pronounce: men bras, mes bras; sa voix leurs voix; un bas, vos bas; son pere est vieux; ses amis sont vieux; voici leurs couteaux; ces enfants sent beaux; les bijoux de cette dame sont tres beaux. (2) Compare the pronunciation of the singular and plural of the new words. Do they differ as to pronunciation from words that make their plural according to §31? What will usually indicate to the ear the plural of such words? (3) Write phonetically and read aloud: un general, des generaux; un cheval, des chevaux; i I'cEil, aux yeux; au ciel, aux cieux. (4) Is this a mere spelling change as in livres, bijoux? (5) Count aloud 1-30, putting after each numeral, first a noun beginning with a consonant and then one beginning with a vowel: e.g., vingt-cinq couteaux, vingt-cinq amis. Note that the final letter of vingt is heard as t in 21-29. (6) Note the pronunciation of bras, tu as (§ 33), as compared with bas, pas. What is the usual pronunciation of the letter a (alone and not nasal)? Is this true of Sge? of nous tSchons? (7) Contrast the pronunciation of le soir, pourquoi, je vois, la voix, voici, voiia with that of trois. What seems to be the usual sound value of the spelling oi? REVIEW OF VOCABULARY AND PRONUNCIATION No. 1 (1) Nommez (Name) les parties (parts) du corps (12) dont (of which) vous savez (know) le nom (name). (2) Quels sont les memhres (members) d'une famille (family) ? (3) Nommez tons (pluriel de tout) les ohjets (objects) dans la classe dont vous savez le nom. (4) Donnez les contraires de: nous ouvrons; le jour; petit; vite; nous sortons; ils ouvrent. (5) What words or expressions do you think of in connection with the following? le gargon; le corps; I'oncle; le crayon; !e plafond; I'aprfes-midi; en anglais; devant; voilS,; le cahier; §47 LESSON X 51 d&irez-voiis? pourquoi; j'^coute; la nuit; la fille; la famille; le matin; de. (6) Fill in blanks with appropriate words: 1. Oil sont vos mains? Les voila au de mes . 2. J' votre voix, mais je ne vous pas. Pourquoi? Parce que vous parlez tres . 3. J'6tudie le fran9ais je desire les livres de Balzac. 4. Les hommes ont deux ; les en ont quatre. 5. II vingt-trois dans cette classe. 6. Nous avecles dents; nous aveclesoreilles; nous avec les yeux. 7. Nous de la salle de classe par la porte. 8. Donnez-moi un de pain avec du . 9. Sur le mur il y a une de France. 10. Nous tachons de vous , mais vous trds vite; vous parler plus ? 11. Je ferme les yeux pour . 12. Quel 4ge a-t-il? II vingt . 13. J' avec ma plume dans mon . 14. Com- ment vous vous? Je m' Henri; ma sceur s' Louise. 15. Montrez votre professeur de fran9ais, s'il . Le , monsieur. (7) What verbs do you know {seven or eight) that indicate the activities (a) of the brain, the eyes, or the ears, or (b) of the limbs f Use each in a sentence. Peonunciation (1) To judge from words like papier, pied, what sound value does the spelling ie usually have? Indicate in phonetic characters. (2) What is the sound value of the combination ien, as in bien, combien? Of the combinations in, ain? Of the combina- tion un as in un, Verdun? (3) What two sounds has the letter c? Compare morceau, ciel, c'est, garfon, franjais with carte, crayon, compter, and make a rule (see § 5, 4). (4) What two sounds has the letter s? Compare soir, soeur, professeur with maison, vous avez, and make a rule (see, in part, § 18, 1). (5) Pronounce: avec, voir, par, soeur, anglais, est, doigt, nuit, huit, fermez, les yeux, cousin, aimer (Lesson I), cbevsl 52 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §§ 48-49 [Seval], general, grand, fils. Are final consonants usually sounded in French? How does fils compare in sound with other words ending in s as far as we have gone? (6) What are the usual sound values for the spellings -on, -en, -an, -in, -ain, -un, -ien? For the spelling -eu? Contrast beurre with vieux, yeux. For the spelling -ai? Contrast j'ai, maison, with franfais, s'il vous plait, vous faites. (7) Compare the French sound 1 with English 1 (§ 17, 7). Where is the tip of the tongue for French 1? (8) Compare French r with English r (§ 17, 12). Is the tongue brought farther forward in French? In French avoid using the English r. The French lingual r is sharper. (9) Pronounce slowly and distinctly with attention to syl- lable division: gSneral, desirer, regarder, attentivement, vous comprenez, apres-midi, nous ecrivons, porter, vous vous ap- pelez, bonjour, merci, monsieur, mademoiselle. LESSON XI 48. An Indefinite Pronoun. 1. One, some one, we, you. they, people, used indefinitely, are represented in French by on, with the verb always in the singular: On [5] parle de Jean. We (you, they, etc.) speak of John. 2. When following a verb with a final vowel, on is joined to it by -t- (cf. § 29) : Par oii commence-t-on? Where do we (etc.) begin? 3. An on construction often corresponds to an English passive, especially when the agent is not mentioned: Ensuite on apporte le potage. Next the soup is brought. 49. Interrogation. Observe the frequently used inter- rogative phrase qu'est-ce que? = whatf which is made up of que? (§ 38, 3) -|- est-ce que? (§ 43): Qu'a-t-U? or Qu'est-ce gu'il a? What has he? J 50 LESSON XI 53 50. Present Indicative of faire, to do, make (irreg.). I do, am doing, etc. We do, ere doing, etc. je fais [safe] nous faisons [nufaza] tu fais [tyf e] vous faites [vuf et] a fait [ilfe] ils font [ilfo] EXERCISE XI I'algebre /. [lalseibr] algebra I'arithmetique /. [laritmetik] arithmetic une assiette [asjst] plate la bonne [bon] maid, nurse la cuiller [kqijsir] spoon le dessert [dessir] dessert le diner [dine] dinner la fourchette [f urjet] fork le fnjit [frqi] fruit une histoire [istwair] history, story le journal [surnal] newspaper le latin [latg] Latin le legume [legym] vegetable les mathematiques /. [mate- matik] mathematics le potage [potais] soup la question [ksstjo] question la salle [sal] large room, haU la salle 3. manger [salamase] dining room les sciences naturelles /. [sjais- natyrel] natural science la tasse [ta:s] cup la viande [vjaid] meat age [aise] old, aged s'amuser [samyze] enjoy one- self, have a good time apporter [aporte] carry (to), bring commencer (a) [komase] be- gin diner [dine] dine jouer [swe] play nous lisons [liz3] we are reading il prend [pra] he takes, is tak- ing preparer [prepare] prepare repondezi [rep3de] reply 1 je me sers de [samseirda] I use, make use of il se sert de [seir] he makes use of nous nous servons de [servo] we use soimer [sone] ring traduisez [tradqize] trans- late (imperative) travailler [travaje] work comme [kom] as, like que [ko] than d'abord [daboir] lq the first place, first puis [pqi] then, in the next place A. (1) 1. Que fait-on (Qu'est-ce qu'on fait) k I'^cole? 2. On 6tudie ses legons k I'^cole; on fait du frangais, de 54 A PBENCH GRAMMAE $ 50 I'anglais, du latin. 3. On 6tudie aussi I'histoire, les math^- matiques et les sciences naturelles. 4. Je fais de rarithm^tique et du fran^ais; mon frere, qui est plus ig6, 6tudie aussi I'algebre et le latin. 5. On travaille mais on joue aussi; on s'amuse bien. 6. On joue au tennis et au football [futbal]. (2) Ripondez aux questions: 1. Qu'est-ce qu'on fait h. I'^cole? 2. Est-ce qu'on va h. I'ecole pour s'amuser? 3. Pourquoi va-t-on h. I'^cole? 4-6. Faites-vous du latin a I'^cole? de I'histoire? de I'anglais? 7. Aimez-vous les sports? 8-9. Fait- on du tennis h. votre ecole? du baseball? 10. Jouez-vous au football? 11. Avez-vous un frSre? 12. Est-il plus age que vous? 13. Est-il plus grand? 14. Aimez-vous les langues ou les sciences naturelles? 15. Faites-vous de l'arithm6tique ou de I'algebre? 16. Aimez-vous I'histoire? (3) 1. L'apres-midi nous retournons de I'^cole et nous aUons k la maison. 2. La porte est fermee. Nous sonnons et on ouvre. 3. Nous entrons dans la maison, et nous commen^ons k lire le journal avant le diner. 4. On sonne et nous entrons dans la salle a manger. 5. On commence h diner. D'abord nous avons du potage. 6. Nous le mangeons avec une cuiller. 7. Puis la bonne apporte la viande et les legumes. 8. Pour les manger nous nous servons d'un couteau et d'une fourchette. 9. Mon petit fr6re se sert d'une cuiUer pour manger tout son diner. 10. Moi, je suis grand; je me sers d'une fourchette et d'un couteau comme mon pere et ma mere. 11. On mange dans une assiette. 12. Puis au dessert, on mange du fruit et on prend du caf6 dans une tasse. 13. Mon petit fr^re ne prend pas de caf6 parce qu'il est petit. 14. Apres le diner nous lisons les journaux du soir. 15. Puis nous t^chons de preparer nos legons. B. (1) Rewrite A (3) above, substituting for the first -plural, when possible (a) the first person singular, (b) the third person singular. (2) a. What do you notice in A (3) about the verb entrer wlien followed by a noun? About commencer when followed by an infinitive ? §50 LESSON XI 55 6 What have you already noted about ttcher, desirer, vous vovAez, when followed by an infinitive? Translate: 1. We try to understand and to speak French. 2. I learn French because I want (desirer) to read the works of Balzac. 3. Will you, please, speak slowly? (3) Insert the proper subject pronoun: 1. me sers. 2. (m. and /.) se sert. 3. nous servons. 4. vous servez. 5. se servent. Insert the object pronouns: 6. Je appeUe. 7. II appelle. 8. Nous appelons. 9. Vous appelez. 10. lis appellent. (Note the shifts in pronunciation and spelling in the present tense of s'appeler [saple]. These will be discussed in Lesson XIX.) (4) Supply the missing preposition: 1. Je me sers ma plume pour 6crire. 2. lis se servent leur cuiller pour manger le potage. 3. On prend le caf6 une tasse. 4. II a une assiette la main. 5. A I'^cole on joue tennis. 6. Nous ^tudions le diner. 7._ Nous entrons la salle k manger. 8. On prend le caf6 le diner. 9. Mon petit frere se sert une cuiller manger son diner. C. Traduisez en frangais: 1. What have you (two ways) in your plate? 2. I have meat, vegetables, and bread and butter. I have no fork to (pour) eat my dinner [with]. 3. What is the maid doing? She is bringing spoons, knives, and forks. 4. We have no fruit for (the) dessert. Look! The maid is bringing some into the dining-room now. 5. You are fond of (aimer) (the) fruit (plural), aren't you? Yes, I am fond of (the) soup to (pour) begin [with] and I like (the) fruit for dessert. 6. What do you do before (the) dinner? We read the evening paper. In the morning we read the morning paper. 7. What do people (on) do after (the) dinner? They (On) work or they (on) nave a good time. 8. First I prepare my lessons, then I enjoy myself. 9. Does your small sister work (arrange the question in two ways)! 10. No, she has a good time. She looks at her books, but she doesn't work. D. Dictation. Lesson IX, Exercise A, 15 sentences. 56 A FRENCH GKAMMAB Exercise in Peonunciation i 51-52 (1) Pronounce slowly and distinctly with especial attention to syllable division and stress: mathematiques, naturelles, arithmetique, cuiller, couteau, nous etudions, nous nous ap- pelons, vous vous servez. Try to stress all syllables alike. (2) a. What do you notice about the spelling of nous com- mengons in A, (3), 3 ? See § 5, 4. Would this spelling occur in any other form of the present tense of commencer? Com- pare §78, 1. b. Is there anything of the same sort in the spelUng of nous mangeons [nu masS]? See § 17, 18 and compare § 78, 2. (3) Note the pronunciation of the first plural of faire. What sound value does the spelling ai oftenest have? What next? Compare faire, je fais, j'aime, anglais, la craie, la maison, j'al. (4) Write in phonetic characters and read aloud in singular and plural, putting in the definite article: cuiller, couteau, fourchette, viande, fruit, legume, tasse, dessert. LESSON XII 51. Feminine of Adjectives. It is regularly formed by adding -e to the masculine singular, but adjectives ending in -e remain unchanged. Grand, m., grande,/., tall; facile, m. or/., easy. 52. Irregularities. Change of stem takes place in certain adjectives on adding -e. The following list shows the com- moner types: M. F. M. F. acti/, heureux, flatteur, active, active heureuse, happy flatteuse, flatter- cmel, genti?, ancien. crue?ie, cruel gentiHe, nice ancienne, ancient blanc, long, faux, ing blanche, white longue, long fausse, false gros, maet, Cher, sec. grosse, big mue«e, dumb chere, dear seche, dry §§53-54 LESSON XII 57 Observe ako: m. beau or be/, /. be22e, fine; m. nouveau or nouvej, /. nouveHe, new; m. viexix or vieiZ, /. vieiHe, old, with two forms for the mascuUne, one of which gives the feminine. The masculine forms in -1 are used before a vowel or h mute: Le bel arbre, le bel homme. The fine tree, the handsome man. But: L'arbre est beau; le beau livre; les beaux arbres; les arbres sent beaux. 53. Position. 1. An attributive adjective more usually follows its noun: Un homme riche, une pomme mure. A rich man, a ripe apple. 2. Adjectives from proper nouns, adjectives of physical quality, participles as adjectives, almost always follow: La langue anglaise. The English language. Du cafe chaud, une lampe cassee. Hot coffee, a broken lamp. 3. The following of very common occurrence nearly always precede: Bon, good, mauvais, bad; beau, fine, handsome, joli, pretty, vilain, ugly; jeune, young, vieux, old; grand, tall, great, gros, big, petit, small; long, long, court, short. 4. A number of common adjectives have different mean- ings according as they precede or follow the noun. Two examples are: Men ancien eleve. My old L'histoire ancienne. Ancient his- (former) pupil. tory. Mon Cher ami. My dear friend. Un diner cher. An expensive dinner. 54. Interrogative Adjective. Which? what? what (a)f = m. quel?/, quelle? m. pi. quels?/, pi. quell es? Quel [ksl] livre? Which (what) book? Quelle Peel] plume? Which (what) pen? A quelle heure? At what time? Quelle belle vue! Quels herosi What a fine viewt What heroes! [kdero] (see § 17, 6) 58 A FEENCH GRAMMAR § 5S 55. There, in that place = y. It stands for a place al- ready referred to, is put before the verb like a pronoun object, and is less emphatic than la = there: Est-il a I'ecoie? II y [i] est. Is he at school? He is (there). EXERCISE Xn ia dictee [dikte]] dictation exercise joli [solij pretty I'eau /. [lo] water long [15] long ancien [asjs] former, old, an- mauvais [movs] bad, poor (in cient quality) beau, bel [bo] [bsl] fine, hand- ni^et [mqs] dumb, silent some mwr [my:r] ripe blanc [bla] white nouveau [nuvo] new chaud [So] warm, hot riche [rij] rich Cher [Seir] dear, expensive vUain [vile] ugly, naughty court [ku.r] short asseyez-vous! [asEJevu] sit cruel [kryd] cruel ^^^, (i^^^^^^^) W ffol falsHeceitful '' "^'^'^ ^^' ^^^°^°^^^ ^ ^° ^^"^ faux [toj talse, deceittul jj ^,^^ ^^ [iisava] he goes away gentil [sati] nice, pretty, well- behaved beaucoup [boku] much, many, grand [gra] large, taU a great deal, a great many gros [gro] big peu [p0] little (quantity), few heureux [oer0] glad, happy y [i] there, to it, to them; at, jeune [seen] young in it, them A. (1) Write with each of the following nouns two or more of the adjectives in §§51, 52, 53, that may be reasonably used with them, being careful about the position and form: un homme, una soeur, ces journaux, una salle a manger, das bijoux, quelle voix! una jambe, catte boucha, les yaux, una t^te, cet oncla, men ami, quel jour! notre professeur, la monsieur, un mur, una maison, un gargon, un cheval, des fruits, ces livras. (2) Supply the proper form of a suitable adjective in each case: 1. Le potage est trds . 2. Men oaf 6 n'ast pas . 3. Assayez-vous, men ami. 4. Le professeur nous donne de * legons. 6. La dame a de * bijoux. 6. Elle a de * yeux. 7. J'aime les enfants quand ib sent . * This use of de will be treated iB § 59, 2. §55 LESSON XII 59 8- Louise parle beaucoup; elle n'est pas ■ . 9. Le fruit est bon quand il est . 10. VoilS. des enfants . (3) Donnez le contraire de: longue, vieille, jolie, bonne, petite, S,g6e, noire. B. Traduisez en frangais: 1. This hot soup. That dumb woman. A nice woman. Their pretty little boy. Her white stockings. 2. Some false stories. Two big (gros) spoons. Her long knife. Happy men (note two cases of linking in this phrase). 3. What a nice boy! What a short lesson! What a big foot! 4. An English newspaper. An old Frenchman (see § 21). A tall (grand) Enghshman. 5. Their new teacher. A poor (bad) teacher. Our old (= former) teacher. Ancient history. 6. Do you want any hot water? There is no hot water. 7. Are we in the classroom? We are (there). 8. What do you do in the dining-room? We eat (in it). What do you eat (there)? We eat bread, meat, vegetables and fruit (there). 9. Do you have a good time at school? Yes, we have a very good time (nous nous amusons beaucoup [boku]) there. 10. Do you work or (do you) play at school? We work a great deal (there) and play a httle (there). 11. I am going [away] this evening. What is your sister doing? She is going away this evening. C Dict^e, Lesson X, B. Exercise in Pronunciation (1) Prononcez et 6crivez en caract^res phon^tiques: men ancienne {old = former) place, notre chere amie, un bel homme, una grosse cuiller, une histoire fausse, ma nouveUe maison, une vieiUe maison, les beaux enfants, un vilain enfant, une courte lefon, une gentille petite fille, des enfants heureux. (2) As regards pronunciation, is the effect of adding the -e for the feminine the same with all adjectives? Compare, for example, jolie and grande. On this basis group the adjectives in §§51, 52, 53. (3) Pronounce slowly, with special attention to syllable division and stress: salle k manger, je m'en vais, nous commensons, les sciences naturelles. 60 A FRENCH GKAMMAB §§ 5(i-5S LESSON xin 56. Present Indicative of donner, finir, vendre I give, am giving, I finish, am finishing, I sell, am selling^ etc. etc. etc. donn e [don] fini s [finQ vend s [va] donn es [don] fini s [fini] vend s [va] donn e [don] fini i [fini] vend * [va] donn ons [dono] finiss ons [finiso] vend ons [vado] donn ez [done] fin/ss ez [finise] vend ez [vade] donn ent [don] Gniss ent [finis] vend ent [va:d] * Vendre is irregular in this one form. The regular verb rompre has romp^, but vendre is here given as being more useful for practice. Note. — The pronouns je, tu, 11, etc., have been omitted in this paradigm and in some others to economize space in printing. They should be sun- plied in learning or reciting the paradigms. 57. The General Noun. A noun used in a general sense takes the definite article in French, though not commonly in English: I.'homme est mortel. Man is mortal. Les hommes sont mortels. Men are mortal. Le miel est tres doux. Honey is very sweet. Le cheval est un animal utile. The horse is a useful animal. 58. Tout. All, the whole, every = tout, with the follow- ing forms, which precede the article, when it is present: M. F. M. F. S. tout [tu] touts [tut] PI. tous [tu] toutes [tut] Toute ma vie. All my Ufe. Tout le monde. Everybody ( = the whole world)„ Tous les mois. Every month. Toute la semaine. The whole week. Tout homme, toute femme. Every man, every woman. Tous les hommes. All the men. Toute la journee. The whole day. §58 LESSON XIII 61 EXERCISE Xin la baUe [bal] ball le bois [bwa3 wood, woods la campagne [kflpaji] country {in contrast with town) ; k la campagne to or in the country le champ [Ja] field im ete [ete] summer; en ete, I'ete in summer la famille [famij] family la f emme [fam] woman, wife la fieur [floe:r] flower la gare [gair] station le grand-pere [grapEirJ grand- father la grand'mere [grams ir] grand- mother une heure [ce;rj hour; deux heures [d^zceir] two o'clock un hiver [renivEir] winter; en hiver [anivsir], I'hiver QivEir] in winter le lit Di] bed le parent [para] kinsman, parent la poupee [pupe] doU le train [trs] train les vacances /. [vakais] vacation la ville [vil] city, town; en ville in town la voiture [vwatyir] carriage, vehicle; en voiture in a carriage {as distinguished from other ways of traveling) content (de) [kota] glad (to) fatigue [fatige] tired tranquille [trakil] quiet, alone {in the expression: leave alone) utile [ytil] useful arriver [arive] arrive, come attendre [ata:dr3 wait for, expect chercher [Serje] hunt for; aller chercher, go and get se coucher [sakuje] go to bed, lie down; nous nous cou- chons we go to bed, lie down il fait chaud [ilf eJo] it is warm, hot habiter [abite] live in, inhabit inviter (a) [evite] invite marcher [marje] walk, go {of train, watch, etc.) monter [mote] get {in), climb; monter a cheval ride horse- back passer [pase] spend {of time), pass prendre [praidr] take, get se preparer [ssprepare] get ready voir [vwair] see comme! [kom] how! comme [kom] as, like k pied [apje] on foot si [si] so A. (1) 1. Nous habitons la ville de X {ihs), mais nous aimons la campagne. 2. J'y vais avec ma famille tous les 6t6s. 3. Nous y passons les vacances. 4. J'ai des parents a la campagne, mon grand-pSre, ma grand'mire, deux oncles et une tante. 5. lis nous invitent k passer I'^t^ dans leur maison. 62 A FKENCH GRAMMAR §58 6. Quand Fhiver est fini, il fait tres chaud en villa et nous nous pr^parons k aller k la campagne. 7. Je prends ma poup^e, mon petit hhre prend sa balle. 8. A une heure de I'aprds-midi nous allons a la gare. 9. Le train arrive a deux heures et nous montons dans une voiture. 10. Le train marche vite et au bout de trois heures nous arrivons a la petite gare. 11. Notre grand'm^re et tous nos cousins nous attendent a la gare avec leur voiture. 12. Nous montons dans la voiture. 13. Les deux chevaux marchent lentement et nous avons le temps de voir les jolis champs et les beaux bois. 14. Tout est en fleurs. 15. II y a des hommes et des chevaux qui travaillent dans les champs. 16. Notre grand-p^re nous attend k la maison. 17. II est content de nous voir et nous sommes tres contents de le voir aussi. 18. Nous nous couchons (Je me couche) k neuf heures du soir parce que nous sommes fatigufe, et nous dormons bien. 19. Les lits sont si bons et tout est tranquille. 20. Comme j'aime la campagne! Les enfants s'amusent beau- coup k la campagne en 6t6. 21. Les gargons montent k cheval, les petites fiUes jouent avec leurs poupees et cherchent des fleurs dans les champs et dans les bois. (2) Imagine that the passage above [A (1)] refers to you. Answer the questions in complete sentences: 1. Habitez-vous la ville ou la campagne? 2. Aimez-vous la viUe en hiver ou en 6t6? 3. OCi passez-vous les vacances? 4. Quels parents avez-vous k la campagne? 5. Est-ce que vous prenez [prone] (pres. of prendre) le train pour aller k la campagne? 6. A quelle heure montez-vous dans le train? 7. Combien d' heures restez-vous dans la voiture? 8., Le train marche-t-il vite ou lentement? 9. Qui vous attend a la petite gare de campagne? 10. Est-ce que votre grand-pSre y est aussi? 11. AUez-vous k la maison de vos parents k pied ou en voiture? 12. Est-ce que votre grand'mere est contente de vous voir? 13. Etes- vous fatigue? 14. A quelle heure vous couchez-vous? 15. Dormez-vous bien? 16. Mangez-vous bien? 17. Est- ce que les enfants aiment la campagne? 18. Que font les gar9ons? 19. Que font les petites filles? 20. Est-ce que les grandes filles montent k cheval aussi? 21. Est-ce que la §58 LESSON XIII 63 campagne est tranquille? 22. Plus tranquille que la ville? 23. Fait-il chaud en ville en 6t6 {or V6t6)? 24. Fait-il plus chaud qu'a la campagne? 25. Fait-il chaud k Saint-Louis [selwi] en et6? 26. Fait-il plus chaud en 6te k Chicago ou a Paris [pari]? B. (1) Add the proper present endings and read aloud: J'at- tend-, nous attend-, ils attend-; nous entend-; ils entend-; je travaiU-; je comprend-; vous fini-; ils s'amus-; vous jou-; nous commen?-; nous nous appelQapl]-; U fini-; ils fini-; nous comprenCkopran]- {observe the absence of the d); comprenQkopran]- vous? Je pren[pra]-, il pren[pra]-, nous pren[pr9n]-, vous pren[pran]-, ils prenn[pren]-. {Note the absence of the d in the plural. Note also that the letter e stands for three different sounds in these five forms.) (2) a. Write in parallel columns the present of: finir, ouvrir, dormir {sing, je dors, tu dors, il dort; nous dormons, vous dormez, ils dorment), sortir, se servir {sing, je me sers, tj te sers, il se sert). b. Some verbs in -ir are not conjugated in the present like finir. Make a list of those you know that are not, and point out the differences. C. Dites en frangais: 1. We open; he is opening; I am sleep- ing (asleep); are you asleep? Go out! Go to sleep! He is asleep. 2. We go out; we finish; we (make) use (of) these pens; he is finishing his lesson; they are finishing their les- son. 3. They are leaving (going out of) the classroom; they are sleeping; men (on) use (make use of) horses; we sell fruit (plural). 4. The whole house; all night (the whole night); all women, all horses. 5. Animals are useful to men; I am very fond of (aimer beaucoup) animals. 6. Do you like flowers? Very-much-indeed (beaucoup). 7. Little girls like dolls and little boys like horses, but my uncle's son, my little cous'^ Pierre, likes horses and dolls too. D. Dict6e: Lesson XI, A (3). 64 A FKENCH GRAMMAR §§ 59-6i Exercise in Pronunciation (1) Note the pronunciation of villa, tranqiiille. Compare fills, travaille, gentille, oreille. Write all six in phonetic characters. (2) Write B (1), in phonetic characters, after adding the proper endings, and read aloud. LESSON XIV 59. Partitives. In partitive constructions (§ 36), de alone is used: 1. In a general negation (§ 36, 2): D n'a pas de plumes. . He has no pens. 2. When an adjective precedes the noun: Marie a dejoUes fleurs. Mary has (some) pretty flowers. J'ai de voire argent. I have some of your money. But: J'ai des pommes mures. I have (some) ripe apples. 3. Similarly when a noun after an adjective is understood; De bons rois et de mauvais. Good kings and bad (kings). 4. After words of quantity in such expressions as these: Beaucoup de the. A great deal of tea (much tea). Une livre de viande. A poimd of meat. Assez de viande. Enough (of) meat. Trop de pain. Too much bread. n n'a plus d'argent. He has no more money. 60. The preposition de + a noun forms adjectival phrases. Une robe de sole. A silk dress. La feuille d'erable The maple leaf. 61. Observe the following expressions of frequent use, formed from avoir + an undetermined noun: avoir besoin [bazwe] de, be in avoir soif [swaf], be thirsty. need of, need. avoir sommeil [someij], be sleepy, avoir chaud [Jo], be warm. avoir raison [rezo], be (in the) avoir /roid [frwa], be cold. right. avoir /aim [fe], be hungry. avoir tort [tair], be (in the) wrong O SI $61 LESSON XIV 65 EXERCISE XIV le chemin [kSmg] road (in aimer mieux [£memj0] like general); le chemin de fer better, prefer QaSmgdfEir] railroad avoir envie de [avwairavi] la joiirnee [surne] day (when wish, want duration is emphasized) boire Qjwair] drink la narration [narasjo] composi- je bois [bwa] I drink tion, theme vous buvez [byve] you drink la pontme [pom] apple porter [portej wear, have on, la robe [rob] dress carry la soie [swa] silk repondre [repSidr] answer, le sommeil [someij] sleep reply to le verre [vs:r] glass {tumbler) trouver [truve] find, con- le voyage [vwajais] voyage, sider, think trip assez [ase] enough, rather malheureux nmalcEr0] unfor- bien CbJE] well, very tunate, unhappy juste [syst] exactly, just suivant [sipva] following trop Htro] too much, too many quelque chose OislksSosz] something de bonne heure [[dabonceir] early tout de suite Qtutsqit] at once A. 1. II fait chaud dans les champs en ^t6. 2. Quand on a chaud, on a soif at on a envie de boire de I'eau froide. 3. Voici un verre d'eau que je vais boire. 4. Quand on travaille dans les champs, on a aussi tr^s faim avant I'heure du diner. 5. On a besoin de manger quelque chose. 6. Le soir on a bien som- meil. 7. On a envie de se coucher de bonne heure. 8. On est content de voir arriver la nuit. 9. On a besoin de six heures de sommeil. 10. — Pardon, monsieur, vous avez tort. Moi, j'ai besoin de huit heures de sommeil toutes les nuits. 11. — Vous dormez beaucoup. Avez-vous sommeil, maintenant? 12. — Oui, madame, j'ai sommeil. J'ai grand besoin de dormir. J'ai froid aussi, et faim. 13. — Vous avez sommeil et froid et faim! Vous etes trSs malheureux. Allez vous coucher tout de suite. 14. — Vous avez raison. Je vais me coucher, mais d'abord j'ai grand besoin de manger quelque chose parce que j'ai trfes faim. 15. Donnez-moi, s'il vous plait, une tasse 66 A FRENCH GRAMMAR I 61 de th6, beaucoup de viande, et des Mgumes. 16. Nous avons assez de pain, mais il n'y a pas trop de beurre dans cette assiette. 17. J'ai besoin aussi de plus de ca,U; je n'en ai pas assez. 18. — Buvez-vous du caf6? — Oui, j'en bois beaucoup. 19. — Eh bien, mon ami, vous avez tort. Ne buvez pas trop de caf6. 20. — Merci. Je n'en bois pas trop; j'en bois juste assez. B. Supply the proper form of expression for some, any, no, as demanded by the sentences: 1. J'attenda aujourd'hui parents de la campagne. 2. Eldouard n'a pas parents k la campagne. 3. II n'y a pas fruit cet 6ti. 4. Mon grand-pere me donne bonnes pommes. 5. Nous cberchons pommes pour le dessert. 6. Ma scEur a jolies poup6es; elle a beaucoup poup6es. 7. Les petits gargons n'ont pas poup^es; ils ont bonnes balles. 8. Je vols fleurs; il ne voit pas fleurs; nous voyons jolies fleurs et vilaines; voyez-vous assez fleurs k la campagne? lis voient []vwa] {third plural) —— fleurs blanches dans les champs. C. (1) Traduisez: 1. When a man (use on) works in the fields in summer, he (on) gets (avoir) hungry and thirsty and he (on) wants some cold water. But do not drink too much cold water. 2. What do you want for your dinner? Some hot soup, some vegetables, meat and fruit. I am very hungry and I need a good dinner. 3. There is no water in her glass. There is no tea in his cup. They need cold water and hot tea. 4. Are there any pupils in the classroom? Yes, there are some small boys and some pretty little girls. They are play- ing and are having a very good time. 5. These little girls have-on (porter) pretty silk dresses. Boys do not wear silk dresses. 6. These children play all day Dong] (the whole day: " day " = joumee). They are hungry and sleepy at dinner time (k I'heure du diner). They need a great deal of sleep. 7. I need more sleep. You sleep too much. I invite you to go to bed (vous coucher) at once. (2) Fermez le livre et icrivez comme narration un voyage h la campagne. §61 LESSON XIV 67 D. BSpondez en frangais aux questions suivantes: 1. Habitez- vous la campagne? 2. Restez-vous en ville en hiver? 3. Ot passez-vous l'6t6? 4. Y avez-vous des parents? 5. Quels parents avez-vous a la campagne? 6. Est-ce qu'ils vous in- vitent k aller les voir? 7. Quels parents avez-vous dans la ville? 8. Comment allez-vous k la campagne, k pied, k che- val ou en chemin de fer? 9. Oil va-t-on {do you go, doi\ one go) pour prendre le train? 10. Est-ce qu'on prend le train k la maison? 11. Est-ce que le train marche vite? 12. Est- ce qu'on vous attend a la petite gare de campagne? 13. Qui est-ce qui vous attend a la gare? 14. Allez-vous a pied de la gare k la maison de vos parents? 15. Qui trouvez-vous k la maison? 16. Sont-ils contents de vous voir? 17. Et vous, etes-vous content de les voir? 18. A quelle heure vous couchez-vous? 19. Les enfants aiment-ils la campagne? 20. Que font les gargons? 21. Et les petites filles, montent- elles k cheval aussi? 22. Que voyez-vous a la campagne? 23. Aimez-vous mieux la campagne en hiver ou en €i€'i Exercise in Peonunciation (1) Pronounce: quand on, grand homme, neuf heures, dix heures, les eaux. See § 18, 1. (2) Pronounce sommeil. With what does it rhyme? (3) Pronounce: faim, pain, bien, ancien, besoin, latin, main. (4) Pronounce: eau, chaud, trop, quelque chose. Be care- ful about lip position. (5) a. Pronounce; sceur, leur, heure, beurre, ceil, fleur, jetine. Write each in phonetic characters. Pronounce: deux, bleu, yetix, veut, monsieur, vieux, peu. Write each in phonetic characters. h. In the first group, is the vowel (spelled eu, ceu, oe) followed by a consonant sound? What is true of the vowel of the second group? Try to make a rule as to when these spelUngs give [oe], and when they give [0]. c. For which of these sounds is the mouth more open? For which are the lips more tense? In trying to make these sounds many English-speaking people fail to project the lips enough 68 A FRENCH GRAMMAR 5§62-6«i Too often also they allow the tongue to move, giving a dis- agreeable r sound. Avoid this fault by all means. In view of the above (6), how do you explain the pronun- ciation of the second and third vowels of malheureux [maloer0]? LESSON XV 62. Past Participles donner finir vendre avoir itre given finished sold had hem donne [done] 6ai [fini] vendu [vady] eu[y] ete [ete] 63. Compound Tenses. They are formed from the past participle along with an auxiliary (usually avoir, sometimes etre, see § 155), as in the following section. 64. / have given, or / gave, etc. j'ai donne [sedane] tu as donne [tyadone] etc. The Past Indefinite I have finished, or / finished, etc. j'ai fini [sefini] tu as flni [tyafini] etc. I have sold, or / sold, etc. j'ai vendu [^sevady] tu as vendu [tyavady] etc. / have had, or / had, etc. j'ai eu [sey] tu as eu [tyazy3 il a eu [ilay] etc. / have been, or / was, etc. j'ai ete [seete] tu as ete [tyazete] il a ete [ilaete] etc. 65. Word Order. The auxiliary is the verb in a com- pound tense, and all rules of word order apply to it: Nous ne I'avons pas fini. We have not finished it. K'a-t-elle pas ete ici? Has she not been here? 66. Use of Past Indefinite. It denotes not only what has happened or has been happening, as in English, but also what happened (= English past tense): $67 LESSON XV 69 J'ai fini mon ouvrage. Elle a chaute toute la matinee. n a ete longtemps ici. J'ai quitte Paris I'hiver passe. N.B. — The past indefinite is the ordinary past tense of French. For the past tense of narrative in the literary style, see § 148. I have finished my work. She has been singing all morning. He was here for a long time. I left Paris last winter. 67. Idiomatic Present Indicative. Besides its use in general, as in English, the present indicative is used idiomat- ically, in certain phrases, to denote what has been and still continues to be: Depuis quand etes-vous ici? Je suis ici depuis trois jours. How long have you been here? I have been here for three days {or for three days past, or for the last three days). EXERCISE XV une annee ^ane] year {when dura- tion is emphasized) un arbre Hdenarbr^ tree le ble [ble] wheat le dejeuner [desoene] Iim^ch la feuille [foerjj leaf, sheet {of paper) la foret [fore] forest la matinee [matine] morning le mois [mwa] month un oiseau [wazo] bird le pays [pei] country, land le pommier [pomje] apple tree le raisin [rsze] grapes la vigne [viji] grape vine le vin [ve] wine agricole [agrikol] agricultural celebre [sekbr] famous excellent [eksela] excellent industriel [sdystrislj manu- facturing passe [pase] past, last sec [sEk] dry (§ 52) vert [veir] green chanter [Sate] sing couper [kupe] cut mflrir [myriir] get ripe, ripen vu [vy] seen {past participle) visiter [vizite] go to see (in detail), inspect aujourd'hui [osurdqi] to-day hier [jsir] yesterday huit jours [qisuir] a week longtemps [lota] long (time) quinze jours [keizsuir] two weeks depuis [dapqi] since pendant [pSda] during depuis quand [dapqika] since when, how long {conj.) Si [si] if 70 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §67 A. 1. Depuis quand ^tes-vous ici h la campagne? 2. — Nous Bommes ici depuis deux mois. 3. — Que faites-vous? — Oh. nous nous amusons bien. 4. Hier j'ai pass6 toute la matinee k cheval et j'ai eu tr^s faim avant I'heure du dejeuner. 5. J'ai 6t6 content de voir arriver le dejeuner. 6. Apres le dejeuner j'ai visits les bois et les champs avec mon oncle. 7. Nous avons regard6 le bl6, qui est beau cette annee. 8. II a mdri pendant V6te; on va le couper. 9. Nous avons besoin de bl6 pour faire le pain. 10. Le pain fran9ais est excellent. J'ai mang^ du pain aujourd'hui k mon d6jeuner. 11. Puis nous avons visite les pommiers et les vignes. 12. Les pommes ne 8ont pas beUes cette annee, mais le raisin est excellent. 13. On va en faire de bon vin. On n'a pas fait de trfes bon vin I'ann^e passee. 14. II a fait trop froid en 6t6 et le raisin n'a pas bien mliri. 15. Les vins fran5ais sont c616bres. On en voit tr&s peu en Am^rique maintenant. 16. La France est un pays agricole. La Belgique [belsik] est un pays indus- triel. 17. Dans les bois nous avons regard^ les beaux arbres. 18. Leurs feuilles sont vertes et dans les arbres on entend chan- ter des oiseaux. 19. II y a de johs bois en France. 20. Si vous allez en France, allez voir les for^ts de Chantilly D&tiji] et de Fontainebleau pstenblo]. 21. On ne coupe pas beau- coup d'arbres dans ces forSts-lS, et il y en a qui sont tres vieux. B. (1) With what French words is the Idiomatic Present generally found? What verb form in English conveys the sarm meaning as the Idiomatic Present? (2) Traduisez: 1. We have been here for a week. 2. The piece of bread is too dry; it has been on the table for a fortnight (quinze iours). 3. How long have you been studying French? 4. We have been studying French for three months. 5. How long have you been hungry? 6. I have been hungry since five o'clock. 7. Aren't you mistaken (wrong) ? No, I am right. 8. Wheat ripens in summer. I saw a great deal in the fields in France. 9. We need wheat to make bread. 10. They (On) make a great deal of wine in France. 11. Very little is made {use on) in America. 12. You (On) hear many birds sing in (the) French forests (de la Francel. §67 LESSON XV 71 (3) What word do we find after content before an infinitive f After inviter? Does the pure infinitive follow entendre or is it preceded by a preposition? Notice in A, 18 the word order in French after entendre. In what two ways may the infinitive after entendre be translated into English? Translate: Pourquoi n'entend-on pas chanter les oiseauz en hiver? C. Traduisez: 1. We invited him (see § 65 for word order). They did not wait for him. She hunted for Pierre and Louise. 2. The pupils finished their lessons. 3. We did not sell the bread. 4. We were (wse pasiinde/.) in the country last summer. Our cousins were not at the station yesterday. 5. I was hungry for a long time (see § 66, example 3). They were cold all the morning (la matinee). 6. It was (II a fait) cold last winter. Were you not thirsty yesterday? 7. We worked all summer. Did you wait for the train? Did you need the car- riage yesterday? D. Repondez aux questions: 1. 0^ passez-vous les vacances? 2. Depuis quand etes-vous k la campagne? 3. Aimez-vous d monter a, cheval? 4. Avez-vous visits les champs? 5. Qu'avez- vous vu dans les champs? 6. Le bl6 est-il beau cette ann6e7 7. A-t-il miiri pendant I'hiver ou pendant I'^t^? 8. Est-ce qu'on va couper le bl6? 9. Que fait-on avec le bl6? 10. Avez- vous vu des arbres? 11. Quel fruit les pommiers donnent-ils (bear)? 12. Et les vignes quel fruit donnent-elles? 13. Est-ce que les pommes sont bonnes cette ann6e? 14. Ont-elles mAri? 15. Que fait-on avec le raisin? 16. Fait-on beaucoup de vin en France? 17. Fait-on beaucoup de vin en Am6rique? 18. Est-ce que la France est un pays industriel? 19. Oh est-ce qu'on trouve de grands arbres? 20. Avez-vous visits une forSt? 21. Est-elle grande ou petite? 22. Donnez les noms de deux for^ts c61ebres en France. 23. Qu'est-ce qu'on voit dans une for^t en €ti? 24. Qu'est-ce qu'on y entend? 25. Voit-on des feuilles vertes en hiver? 26. Est-ce qu'on entend chanter les oiseaux en hiver? E. Dict^e: Lesson XIII, A (i). 72 a french ghammab §§ 68-70 Exercise in Pronunciation (1) Write phonetically and read aloud: nous avons eu, il a eu, vous avez ete, depuis, depuis quand, ils ont vendu. (2) Is the word eu pronounced as you would expect? Note that this spelling combination is pronounced thus only in forms of avoir. What two other sounds does it stand for? Is there any way of knowing which sound value it should have in a given word? Compare Lesson XIV, Exercise in Pronuncia- tion, (5), b. LESSON XVI 68. Comparatives. Place plus = more, moins = less, or aussi = as, before the adjective, and que = than or as after it, to form the comparative: n est plus grand que Jean. He is taller than John. II est moins grand que Jean. He is less tail than (not so tall as) John, n est aussi grand que Jean. He is as tall as John. 69. Superlatives. 1. Place the definite article or a pos- sessive adjective before plus or moins to form the superla- tive: Marie est la p^us jeune de toutes. Mary is the yoimgesi of all. Obs.: La plus jeune des deux. The younger of the two. Note. — In, after a superlative, is translated by de : le meilleur eleve de la classe, the best student in the class. 2. Do not omit the definite article when the superlative follows the noun: La le?on la plus difficile. The most difficult lesson. Mes livres les plus utiles. My most useful books. 70. Irregular Comparison. Observe the irregular forms: bon [b5], good meilleur [msjoeir], better le meilleur [la msjceir] the best §§ 71-73 LESSON XVI 73 71. Comparison of Adverbs. 1. They are compared by plus and moins like adjectives, but le in the superlative is invariable. 2. Observe the irregular forms: bien [bje], well mieux [mj0], better le mieui [l9 mi0], (the) best peu [p0], little moins [mwe], less le moins [la mwe], (the) leasA 72. Present Indicative of alter, to go (irreg.) / go, am going, etc. We go, are going, etc. je vais [save] nous aliens [nuzalo] tu vas [tyva] vous allez [vuzale] il va [ilva] Us vont [ilvo] 73. Imperative of aller, to go [va], go alloTjs [alo], let us go allez [ale], go EXERCISE XVI P air m. [sir] air ]a rose [rosz] rose la cerise [lasriiz] cherry la route [rut] highway, main le cerisier [lasrizje] cherry tree road, route le chou [Su] cabbage la rue [ry] street les haricots verts Qe ariko vsir] la tulipe [tylip] tulip string beans (see § 17, 5) r herbe /. [erb] grass difficile [difisil] hard, difficult le jardin [sarde] yard, lawn, fruitier [frqitje] fruit bearing park, garden meilleur [mEJoeir] better le lapin [lap?] rabbit quelque [kslka] some; in pi la partie [parti] part, game, party (usually) few la peche [psiS] peach utile [ytU] useful les petits pois Qeptipwa] green peas mieux [mj0] better la poire [pwair] pear moins [mwe] less, fewer Je poirier [pwarje] pear tree toujours [tusuir] always, still le poimnier [pomje] apple tree la pomme de terre [pomdatsir] aussi . . . que [osi ka] as . . . aSi (Irish) potato (see § 68^ 7i A FRENCH GRAMMAK § 7^ A. (1) 1. Nous sommes toujours k la campagne. 2. II fait moins chaud k la campagne et Fair y est meilleur que dans la ville. 3. Les grandes routes et les chemins sont plus joUs que les rues, et j'aime mieux les fleurs des champs et les feuilles vertes des grands arbres que les petits jardins des maisons de ville. 4. Dans la ville les jardins sont tres petits et beaucoup de maisons n'en ont pas. 5. Dans ces peti+3 jardins on voit un peu d'herbe et quelques arbres. 6. A la campagne les jardins sont plus grands. 7. On y trouve des fleurs, des arbres fruitiers, des 16gumes, de I'herbe. 8. Nous aimons mieux les Jardins de campagne que les jardins de viUe. (2) 1. Allons voir le jardin de mon grand-p6re. Voila les legumes. 2. Dans cette partie du jardin il y a des pommes de terre, des choux, des petits pois et des haricots verts. 3. Aimez-vous les choux? J'aime mieux les pommes de terre, les petits pois et les haricots verts que les choux. 4. Le chou est le 16gume le plus utile pour les lapins. lis aiment beaucoup les choux. 5. Dans cette autre partie du jardin il y a des plusieurs [plyzjoeir] several §78 LESSON XES 87 EXERCISE XIX (Continued) accompagner [akopajie] go rentrer [ratre] return (home), with, accompany come in again appeler [aple] call courir [kuriir] run, run about; bon marche [bomarjej cheap cotiru Dcury] {past participle (invariable) of courir) enfin [of e] finally, at length demander [dgmade] ask, askfor souvent [suva] often A. 1. Que nous sommes fatigufe! 2. Nous avons beau- coup couru aujourd'hui. 3. Mes cousins sent all& h plusieurs magasins et je les ai accompagn6s. 4. Nous sommes entr^s d'abord chez un marchand de chapeaux. 5. Un de mes cousins a demande un chapeau. 6. Le marchand lui montre un joii chapeau. 7. Mon cousin lui dit: Combien, monsieur? 8. Trois dollars [dolar], r^pond le marchand, et mon cousin I'achete. 9. J'en ai pris un aussi au meme prix. 10. Ensuite nous sommes all^s chez un marchand de chaussures oii Ton * nous a montr6 des bottines et des souUers. 11. Nous avons achet^ une paire de bottines pour notre cousine et deux paires de souliers. 12. Les chaussures ne sont pas tres bon march6 maintenant. 13. Nous les avons payees bien cher. 14. Puis nous sommes entr^s dans un grand magasin. 16. Un de mes cousins a demand^ des chemises, des mouchoirs, des faux-cols et des cravates. 16. Le marchand lui en a montr^ de tr^s jolis. 17. n en a achet6. II a achet6 aussi des mouchoirs pour son p6re. 18. J'ai achet6 une tr^s jolie cravate en soie. 19. Je I'ai pay^e treize francs. 20. Enfin nous avons achet^ des bonbons pour ma tante et mes cousines et nous sommes rentr6s chez nous. B. (1) Run rapidly through A, changing the number or the person (or both) of each subject. (2) Beginning with Nous sommes entr^s (A, 4) change all the verbs to the present form. Such a passage would be quite normal in French.. Would it be so in English? * The I' of I'on has no significance. It merely makes the sound more agreeable when coming between ofi and on. 88 A FRENCH GEAMMAB § 78 (3) Give two translations for courir. What is the past participle ? What auxiliary does it take? Contrast with aller, partir, sortir, s'en aller, etc. Say: he ran, he did not run, you have run about a lot to-day, haven't you? (4) Substitute a personal pronoun for the indirect object: 1. Nous parlous au marchand. 2. Nous avons pay6 cette cravate au marchand. 3. Je I'ai pay^e au marchand douze francs. 4. II a parl6 de la pi^ce k sa tante. 5. Les petites fiUes ont donne leurs poup6es k ces pauvres enfants. 6. La bonne a apport6 du cafe k nos amis. 7. EUe a dcrit une courte lettre k sa soeur. 8. Louise ne r^pond pas k son p6re. 9. Je vais porter des fiieurs k mon amie. 10. Robert demande un faux-col et une cravate au marchand. (5) Substitute personal pronouns for the direct and indirect objects: 1. Le g6n^ral a donnd le cheval k son fils. 2. Les g6n6raux ont donn6 les chevaux k leurs fils. 3. Elle a ^crit cette longue lettre a son oncle. 4. Vous 6crivez la lettre au professeur en fran5ais, n'est-ce pas? 6. Voulez-vous donner une baUe au petit gar5on? 6. Le marchand a montr^ lea chapeaux k mon oncle. 7. II a vendu les bottes k mon cousin. 8. Le petit gargon a demand6 la balle k son pere. (6) Make these revised sentences negative. (7) Supply a suitable personal pronoun of the third person, direct or indirect object, according to the verb: 1. Nous (le? lui? les? leur?) ^coutons. 2. Nous parlous. 3. Lea hommes • regardant. 4. Je attends. 5. II paie trois francs. 6. Pierre ■ demande une chemise et un tnouchoir. (8) What is to be noted about the objects of 6couter, regarder, attendre, payer, demander, as compared with the English equivalents? Note that payer may have three objects: the thing paid for (direct object), the amount paid (adverbial object), and, the person paid (indirect object). C. (1) Scrivez en frangais: 1. I waited for him; we waited for her. 2. John is listening to them; we are talking to them. 3. I paid ten francs for them. 4. We begin dinner (to dine); first we take soup. 5. He takes his friends to the § 78 LESSON XIX 89 theater. Let's take (like first plural present indicative but no subject pronoun) our cousins to the park. 6. I took my place. We take our friends to the station where they are going to take the train. 7. Our relatives often take us to the concert. 8. I ask my father for money. I ask my father for some. 9. Let's ask the merchant for a blue cravat and six collars. 10. We paid for the dinner. We paid five francs for it. 11. We paid the merchant ten francs for the shirt. We paid him ten francs for it. (2) Re-read the reading passages (A) in Lessons XII, XIV, XV, XVI, and write in French an account of a visit to the country. D. Dictle: Lesson XVII, A. EXEKCISE IN PkONUNCIATION Note the pronunciation and spelling of the various forms of the present of acheter, to buy and appeler, to call: acheter HaSte] appeler Qaple] 1. achate [ajet] 1. appelle [apel] 2. achetes [aSet] 2. appelles [apel] 3. achete [ajet] 3. appelle [apelj 4. achetons [ajto] 4. appelons [aplo] 5. achetez Qa^te] 5. appelez [aple] 6. achetent [ajet] 6. appellant [apel] Where does the syllable stress fall in forms 1, 2, 3, 6? Where in 4 and 5? What difference does this make in the sound of the [9] of the stem of the infinitive? Note that this [a] dis- appears entirely in the pronunciation of the infinitive of acheter, appeler, devenir, and in the forms nous menons, vous menez, appelons, appelez, achetons, achetez, but that it is sounded in the infinitive of a word of only two syllables like mener [mane], venir [vaniir]. Compare Lesson V, Exercise in Pronunciation, (1). Observe that we say similarly [Javal], but [lajval, (3eSval]. Are these changes of speUing in mener, appeler, etc., due to any phonetic principle? Contrast them with the changes in words like manger, commencer. 90 A FRENCH GEAMMAK §§ 79-82 LESSON XX 79. Personal Pronoun Objects. The remaining forms serve both as direct and indirect object of verbs (for eUsion, see §19): me [ma], me, to (for) me. nous [nu], us, to (for) us. te [ta], thee, to (for) thee, you vous [vu], you, to (for) you. se [sa], himself, herself, itself, one- se [sa], themselves, to (for) them- self, to (for) himself, etc. selves. 80. Pronominal Adverbs. They are used with verbs, and are equivalent to a preposition + a pronoun, standing usually for things: y = a (dans, sur, etc.) + a pronoun, means to {at, on, in, into, etc.) it or th^m; there. en = de + a pronoun, means oj (from, etc.) it or them, some of it, some of them, smne, any, thence; from, there. Je vais a la campagne. I am going to the country. J'y vais demaia. I shall go there to-morrow. Venez-vous de Paris? Do you come from Paris? Oui, i'en arrive. Yes, I am coining from there. 81. Position. Personal pronoun objects and pronominal adverbs, coming before the verb, are arranged thus: me te se nous vous before f le 1 before f lui \ before y} before en. la \ leur J les n me donne les plumes. He gives me the pens. D me les donne. He gives them to me. D les leur donne. He gives them to them. II nous en donne. He gives us some of it, n 1/ en a. There is (are) some. 82. Reflexive Verb. The compound tenses of reflexive verbs, e.g., se flatter, to flatter oneself, are formed with etre: S§ 83-84 LESSON XX 9] Pkbsent Indicative / flatter myself, etc. ie me flatte [samflat] tu te flattes [tytflat] a (eUe) se flatte [ilsaflat] nous nous flattons [nunuflatS] vous vous flattez [vuvuflate] Us (elles) se flattent [ilsaflat] Past Indefinite / (have) flaitered myself, etc. ]fiatte(,e) J [flate] je me suis tu t' es il (elle) s' est nous nous sommes vous vous etes ils (elles) se sont flaite{e)s [flate] 83. Agreement. The past participle agrees with the preceding direct object, as in the case of verbs compounded with avoir: Elles se sont flattees. But: Us se sont lave les mains. They have flattered themselves. They have washed their hands. 84. Observe the possessive force of the article, or of the article with an indirect object, when there is no ambiguity as to the possessor, especially when referring to parts of the body, clothing, etc. Je vous donne la main. I give you my hand. La bonne leitr lave les mains. The maid is washing their hands. EXERCISE XX la brosse [bros] brush la chambre [Saibr] bedroom (usu- ally) les cheveux m. [Ie5v0] hair la figitte [figyir] face, figure (statue, etc.) les nouvelles /. [nuvel] news le pe^e [pEji] comb le Savon [savo] soap !a serviette [ssrvjstj towel, nap- kin la tete [tsit] head interessant [Eteresa] interest- ing brosser [brose] brush se coucher [sakuje] go to bed, lie down se laver [salave] wash oneself, wash se lever [salve] get up penser (a) [pSse] think (of, have in mind) perdre [psrdr] lose, waste se promener [promne] take a walk, ride se servir de [saserviirda] make use of, use avant de [avada] before (ivith infinitive) d€ja [desa] already 92 A FRENCH GBAMMAR § 84 A. (1) Supply the object pronoun of the person indicated, both singular and plural: 1. Le marchand (1st pers.) r^pond. 2. Je ne (3d) ai pas r^pondu. 3. Vous (Sd) demandez des cigares? 4. lis (1st) ^coutent. 5. Nous ■ (3d) 6coutons. 6. lis (1st) (3d) donnent. 7. Je (3d) ai pay6 un diner. (2) Rewrite, using where possible direct and indirect object pronouns instead of the object nouns: 1. Mon cousin a demands des chapeaux (see § 36, 3) au marchand. 2. Le marchand a montr6 des souliers k mon oncle. 3. La bonne a apport^ les lettres k mon pSre. 4. EUe m'a apport6 les lettres. 5. Elle m'a apport6 des lettres. 6. Elle nous a servi du potage. 7. Elle nous a servi le potage. 8. II vend des pommes k ma eoeur. (3) Substitute en or y for the prepositional phrases with de and k according to the sense: 1. Nous parlons du lapin. 2. II a parl6 de ses vacances. 3. Elle est sortie de la salle k manger. 4. Nous sommes sorties du salon. 5. Lui avez-vous parl6 de ses legons de latin? 6. II se sert d'une fourchette. 7. Nous avons besoin de serviettes. 8. Mes cousins se sont servis de mes cravates. 9. Je vais avoir besoin d'un mouchoir. 10. Nous pensons k notre voyage. 11. Elle pense a son nou- veau chapeau. 12. Avez-vous pens6 k chercher des bonbons? 13. Ce lapin pense k manger vos choux, n'est-ee pas? 14. Nous aliens k la campagne. 15. Voyez-vous les Aleves dans le pare? 16. Avez-vous quelque chose k la main? 17. II a couru k r^cole. 18. II sort de sa chambre de bonne heure. 19. Nous sommes descendus du train k midi. 20. Nous sommes des- cendus k cet hotel et nous y sommes rest6s pendant I'hiver. 21. lis sont restes quinze jours k Paris. 22. Nos amis lea ont accompagn^s k la gare. 23. Ces messieurs sont arrives k Chicago hier. 24. lis sont de vos amis, n'est-ce pas? B. (1) Answer, using, instead of the nouns, personal pronouns and en or J when suitable: 1. Sortez-vous du th^Atre? 2. Avez- vous 6t6 au theatre? 3. Allez-vous encore au th64tre? 4. Avez-vous ri de la com^die? 5. Dtnez-vous avant d'aller au th^dtre? 6. Vos cousins sont-ils all^s au concert hier? § 84 LESSON XX 93 7. Avez-vous peiis6 k votre voyage? 8. Avez-vous pensS k m'accompagner chez Wanamaker? 9. Vous a-t-on servi du vin, monsieur? 10. La bonne a-t-elle apport6 du caf4 au salon? 11. En a-t-elle donn6 k Madame Perrin [perg]? 12. Qui a accompagn6 vos cousins au theatre? 13. Avez-vous demand^ le journal k cette vieille femme? 14. Avez-vous donn6 k la vieille femme le prix du journal? 15. Lisez-vous les journaux tous les jours avant de quitter la maison? 16. Avez-vous trouv6 des nouvelles int^ressantes dans le journal? 17. L'616ve a-t-il r6pondu aux questions? 18. Avez-vous r^pondu k sa lettre? 19. A-t-il r^pondu k ces dames? * (2) Write out the present and past indefinite indicative of: se promener {see §78, 3); se eoucher; se servir d'une fourchette; s'en aller. C. Traduisez en frangais: 1. He gets up early; lie takes a drive {use se promener en voiture, en automobile [otomobil]); he goes to bed. 2. The cook uses lettuce to make salad. 3. She washes her (§ 84) hands before preparing dinner. 4. I wash my hands and face every evening (§ 58) before going to bed. 5. I have already washed my hands once. 6. These children washed their hands with (avec) (some) soap. Now they need a towel. 7. They ride horseback {iise se promener d cheval) every day. 8. When they are tired, they go to bed early. 9. It is time to (II est temps de) get up now; we get up; we got up early this morning; the girls (bonnes) got up; they are getting up now. 10. I have eyes in my (§ 84) head. He has pencils in (i) his hands, a hat on (sur) his head, shoes on {k) his feet. 11. We used soap and a towel to (pour) wash our hands. 12. They need a brush and a comb to brush their hair. 13. He lost his hair. If you do not wash your hair, you are going to lose it {numberf). 14. We are washing our hair. She washed her hair yesterday. 15. Do you wash your hair often? 16. How many times (Combien de fois) a day (par jour) do you wash your hands? Your face? 17. How * Note that y may not be substituted in the reply to the last question, Gau you suggest a reason? 94 A FRENCH GEAMMAR §§ 85-86 many times a day do you get up? 18. How often (= How many times) do you eat daily? 19. The whole family has gone away (two ways) and it is time to study my history lessoi) now. D. a. Count from ISO, putting in each case a different noun after each numeral, as: un franc, deux serviettes, trois brosses, etc. 6. Pronounce and learn the following numerals: trente et un Aleves [trSiteffineleivJ, trente-deux enfants ntra!td0zafa3, trente- trois marchands. Continue through 39, putting a noun after each numeral. c. 40 = quarante [karast], 41 = quarante et un [[karaiteffi], 42 = quarante-deux [karaitd0]. Count through Jfi, putting a different noun after each numeral. d. 50 = cinquante [sekait], 51 = cinquante et un Cseka;tede], 52 = cinquante-deux |^seka!td0]. Count through 69, using in each case a noun beginning with a vowel. LESSON XXI 85. Imperfect Indicative of donner, finir, vendre I was setting, etc. I was giving, etc. dorin ais [done] donn ais [done] donn ait [done] donn ions [donjS] donn iez [donje] donn aient [done] I was finishing, etc. Sniss ais [finise] Sniss ais [finise] Sniss ait [finise] Sniss ions [finisjo] finiss iez [finisje] Sniss aient [finise] vend ais vend ais vend ait vend ions vend iez [vade] [vade] [vade] [vadjo] [vodje] vend aient [vade] 86. Imperfect Indicative of avoir, etre I had, used to have, etc. av ais [ave] av ions [avjo] av ais [ave] av iez [avje] av ait [ave] av aient [ave] I was, used to be, etc. et ais [ets] et ions [etj5] et ais [ate] et iez [etje] et ait [ete] et aien< [ete] To form the Pluperfect tense, add a past participle; see §63. §87 LESSON XXI 95 87. Use of the Imperfect. The name 'Past Descriptive' is often given to this tense-form. In general, it serves to indicate the situation, the setting, the state of affairs at a time in the past, without regard to the beginning or the end of the action, or to the length of its duration. In past narra- tive, the past indefinite is used to record the successive events one after the other; the imperfect form is used to give the background and the descriptive elements of the situation. Since the English language has no such special tense form, except the progressive past (was walking, etc.), it is highly- important to understand clearly the meaning of the sen- tence before deciding whether to translate a given English past into the French imperfect or into the past indefinite. Often both translations are possible, but with different meanings. Study the following passage: Vous etiez (avez ete) absent hier, You were absent yesterday, Pierre. Pierre. Oui, monsieur, j'etais (ai ite) Yes, sir, I was ill. malade. Je suis reste au lit toute la journee. I stayed in bed all day. J'avais {ai eu) la fievre. I had fever. Ma gorge m'afait (mefaisait) tres My throat hurt me very badly. mal. he medecin est venu deux fois k The doctor came to the house la maison, et m'a si bien soigne twice and took such good care que mon rhume a disparu. of me that my cold disappeared. J'ai eli (Stais) malade comme I was ill like that last winter too. cela I'hiver passe aussi. Notre medecin etait en France Our physician was in France with avec nos soldats, et j'ai kit our soldiers, and I was in bed toute une semaine au lit. for a whole week. In only one case above (Notre medecin etait en France . . .) would the past indefinite be quite out of place, but wherever it is used it stresses the narrative element of the story, the 96 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §§88-89 fact that the incident was completed at a time in the past, whereas the imperfect form directs attention to the incident as it occurred, or to the state of affairs as it existed. In certain cases, where the descriptive element is all im- portant, the imperfect form is regularly used and corre- sponds to an EngUsh progressive past, or to a past modified by 'used to.' 1. It denotes what used to or continued to take place in the past. Nous parlions souvent de vous. We often spoke (used to speak) of you. Tous les ans j'aHazs a la campagne I used to go to the country in en ete. summer every year. 2. It is used for an action that was happening when something else happened or was happening. Quand le medecin est arrive. When the doctor came I was in j'etais au lit. bed. Pendant que je parlais, men ami While I was talking, my friend was fumait un gros cigare. smoking (smoked) a large cigar. Note. — In the first example under 1 above we could just as correctly say; Nous avons souvent parle de vous. The meaning, however, would be somewhat different. The notion of an habitual action would have dis- appeared. 88. Imperfect of faire (irreg.) / was doing, etc. je fais ais [sofoze] nous fais ions [nufazjo] tu fais ais [tyfaze] vous fais iez Cvufazje] 11 fais ait [ilfoze] lis fais aient [ilfazs] 89. For imperfect of commencer, manger, of. §§ 78, 156: je commenfais [sakomaiss] je manyeais [maise] tu commeufais [tykomaise] tu mant^eais [maise] il commenfait [ilkama: se], etc. il manp'eait [maiss], etc. 189 LESSON XXI 97 EXERCISE XXI [oer0!zmQj un appetit [apeti] appetite le bain [be] bath la branche [braij] branch (0/ tree) une epoque [epok] time, period le mal [mal] evil, harm la minute [minyt] minute le petit dejeuner Q9ptide50ne] breakfast la peiu: [pcEir] fear le rSve Crs'.v] dream la terre [tsir] earth, ground la toilette [twalst] toilet (dress- ing) malade [malad] ill souffrant [sufra] not well avoir peur [avwair poe:r] be afraid, get frightened cesser (de) [sese] stop A. (1) 1. Je me suis couch6 bier soir de bonne heure, mais je n'ai pas bien dormi parce que j'^tais un peu souffrant. 2. Mon bras me faisait mal. J'ai eu aussi de mauvais r^ves. 3. J'ai rev6 que mon cheval courait k travers les champs et dans les bois. 4. Les branches des arbres me frappaient partout et j'a- vais peur de tomber et de me faire tres mal. 5. J'ai eu si peur dans mon sommeil que j'ai cri6 tr&s fort et je me suis r6veill6. 6. Mais il faisait toujours trha noir quand je me suis r6veill6 et je ne me suis pas lev^ tout de suite. 7. J'ai dormi encore un peu avant de me lever. 8. A six heures il a fait jour et je me suis lev6. 9. J'ai fait ma toilette. 10. J'ai pris mon bain dans de I'eau froide et je me suis habill6. 11. La bonne com- men5ait h. preparer le petit dejeuner. 12. J'avais si faim que j'^tais content quand elle a dit « C'est servi! » 13. Je suis descendu. Ma sceur 6tait d^jsl, h table. 14. Elle m'a dit « Bonjour! bon appltit! » 15. Ma mSre n'^tait pas encore descendue. 16. J'ai mang6 de {with) bon appetit, et puis aous sommes partis pour I'^cole. crier [krie] shout, cry out dit [di] said impost part.) faire jour [feirsuir] get light, be light; faire noir [fssr nwa;r] be dark se faire mal [mal] hurt oneself frapper [frape] strike, im- press s'hebiller [sabije] dress reveiller [reveje] wake; se reveiller wake up rever [rsve] dream fort [foir] loudly heuieusement luckily tard [tair] late par terre [partsir] on the ground si [si] so 3, travers [atraveir] across, through 98 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §89 (2) Try to explain in each case the use of the tenses: (a) 1. Nous avons fait visite hier a un de nos amis. 2. II eommengait a diner quand nous sommes arrives. 3. II mangeait le potage. Nous sommes rest^s deux heures. 4. II nous a invites k diner et apres nous avons fume plusieurs bons cigares. 5. Mon ami n'a pas fum6. 6. II fumait quand il 6tait jeune, mais il a cess6 de fumer I'ann^e pass^e parce qu'il 6tait malade. 7. J'ai €t6 souvent malade mais je n'ai pas cess^ de fumer. 8. Je ne fumais pas quand j'^tais petit. 9. J'ai commence quand j'avais vingt ans. (&) 1. Nous avons 6t6 souvent k la campagne. 2. Nous y alliens tous les 6tes. 3. II faisait moins chaud qu'en viUe. 4. Nos parents nous accompagnaient. 5. A cette 6poque-l^ mon grand-pere habitait la vieille maison de famille. 6. II 6tait tr^s ag6 mais il 6tait encore assez fort. 7. II se promenait 4 cheval tous les jours. 8. Souvent je raccompagnais sur un petit cheval qu'il m'avait donn6. 9. AprSs ces promenades j'6tais fatigu6 et j'avais un excellent app6tit. 10. Une fois le cheval a eu peur. 11. II a couru k travers les champs et je suis tomb6 par terre. 12. J'avais tres peur, et je me suis fait mal au bras. 13. Heureusement il y avait de I'herbe et je suis tomb6 sur I'herbe, mais le bras m'a fait mal pendant deux ou trois jours. B. (1) In nous sommes restes deux heures and nous avons ete souvent k la campagne (A, 2), is the emphasis on the con- tinuousness, the repetition of the action, the situation, or on the event itself? Contrast the verb forms used in le cheval a eu peur (got frightened) and in j'avais tres peur (was very much fright- ened). What seems to be the difference in the effect of the two? Note that verbs like rester, adverbs like souvent, longtemps, and expressions of time like deux heures, deux ans, do not neces- sarily call for an imperfect tense, which, although it denotes ' what continued to happen,' is used only when the writer wishes to stress that element. Compare § 66, examples 2 and 3. (2) Use the proper form of the verbs in parenthesis. Choose the past indefinite or the imperfect according to the sense of the 5 89 LESSON XXI 99 sentence: 1. (etre) Quand je petit je ' de bonne heure. 2. (dormir) Je bien. 3. (se lever) Je de bonne heure aussi et je ^ avec raes parents. 4. (avoir) Je toujours bon appetit. 5. (rever) Une nuit je que mon cheval ^ avec moi a travers la foret. 6. (frapper) Une branche me dans la figure et je ■* tres peur. 7. (crier) Je si fort que je .* 8. (dormir) Mais je encore deux heures avant de .* 9. (r^ver) Je beaucoup. 10. (r^ver) Je plusieurs fois que je ' de mon cheval. (3) Vary the person and number of the subject in A. (4) The imperfect of dormir is je dormais, etc. Conjugate il throughout. Contrast it with je finissais. Conjugate in the imperfect on this model: sortir, partir, servir. C. Traduisez: 1. I used to go to bed early and I slept well. 2. But once when I was iU I slept very badly and I dreamed a great deal. 3. .1 got very much frightened and shouted so loudly that my father came into my room and wakened me. 4. He said that I was shouting so loudly that I was waking the whole family. 5. When he saw that I was very much frightened, he stayed in my room [for] some minutes. 6. I slept some hours stiU before waking. 7. When I got up, the maid was preparing breakfast. 8. I was hungry and was glad to eat something. 9. When the maid said " Breakfast is ready," I went down stairs. 10. The family was at table already. We ate with a good appetite. 11. My sister kft for school, but I looked at (j'ai parcouru) the morning paper before leaving. 12. It was Monday and I got (arriver) to school late that morning. Note. — In 6 put encore (still) before 'some hours.' Be careful about the position of deja in 10 (see A, (1), 13). Note the absence of any article in a table and de bon appetit. Note the different French forms in 1 and i for 'I slept '; why? In 12 put tard before & I'ecole. D. Dict^e: Lesson XIX, A. ' (se coucher). ^ (dSjeuner). ' (courir). ' (avoir). ' (se reTeiller). ' (se lever). ' (tomber> 100 A FRENCH GKAMMAB §§90-«4 / shall finish, etc. / shall sell, etc. finir ai [finire] vendr ai [vadre] finir as [finira] vendr as [vadra] finir a [finira] vendr a [vadra] finir ons [finiro] vendr ons [vadro] finir ez [finire] vendr ez [vadre] finir on< [finiro] vendr on< [vadrS] LESSON XXII 90. Future Indicative of donner, finir, vendre I shall give, etc. donner ai [don (a) re] donner OS [don(8)ra] donner a [don (9) ra] donner ons [don(8)r5] donner ez [don(a)re] donner ont [don (0)10] Note. — In the future of verbs of the donner type, we print the symbol 9 in parenthesis to indicate that it is pronounced very lightly. In fact it usually disappears in rapid speech. This symbol is printed ia the same way in the future of Stre and faire in §§ 91, 92 to indicate that it is pronourced very lightly, and that it disap- pears if the preceding syllable ends in a vowel sound. Compare with this la fenetre [lafnsitr], ses lefons [selso], deux chevaux [d0Svo], je me leve [ssmlsiv], je serai [sasre], nous ferons [nufro]. See Lesson V, Exercise in Pronunciation, (1); XIX, Exercise in Pronunciation. 91, Future Indicative of avoir, etre I shall have, etc. I shall be, etc. atirai[ore] aur ons [oro] ser of [s(8)re] ser ons [s(8)r3] aur as [ora] aur ez [ore] aur a [ora] aur ont [oro] ser OS [s(s)ra] ser ez [s(3)re] sera [s(9)ra] ser ow< [s(9)r5] 92. Future Indicative of aller (irreg.), and faire (irreg.) I shall go, etc. I shall do, etc. ir 01 [ire] ir ons [iro] fer 01 [f (3)re] fer ons [f (9)10] ir as [ira'J ir ez [ire] fer as [f (9)ra] fer ez [f (9)re] iro [ira] ir on< [iro] fero [f(9)ra] fer onf [f (a)ro] 93. For the future of lever and acheter, cf . § 78, 3 : je Icverai O^'^TeJ, etc. j'achSterai [ajetre], etc. 94. Use of Future. It is used in general as in English but observe its use in a subordinate sentence, when futuritj is implied (but for 'if clause see § 116, 3): Te lui parlerai quand il arrivera. I shall speak to him when he coines 194 IxESSON XXII 101 EXERCISE XXn un autobus [otobys] motor bus la couturiere [Tfutyrjejr] dresa- maker le devoir Qgdvwair] exercise le gant [ga] glove la modiste [modist] milliner le projet [prose] plan la promenade [promnad] walk, ride, excursion la semaine QasmEn] week le travail [trava:]] work dernier [dernje] last fatigant [fatiga] tiring pret [pre] ready prochain [pro^S] next sale [salj dirty blanchir [blaSiir] launder essayer [eseje] try on faire beau [bo] be good weather; faire mauvais [move] be bad weather; faire nuit [nip] get dark, be dark mettre [metr] put, put on demain [dome] to-morrow en retard [artair] behind time, late rapidement [rapidma] rapidly, fast A. 1. II est d6}k tard. Nous aUons nous coucher tout de suite. 2. Demain nous nous ISverons de bonne heure parce que nous avons des projets de promenade. 3. Le petit dejeuner sera pret quand nous descendrons. 4. Nous sor- tirons tout de suite parce que nous ne voulons pas ^tre en retard. 5. S'il fait beau (temps) nous irons k pied; s'il fait mauvais (si le temps est mauvais), nous prendrons un autobus ou le tramway. 6. Nous passerons chez la modiste. Si nos chapeaux ne sont pas prets, nous attendrons un peu. 7. Avant onze heures nous serons chez la couturi&re pour essayer nos robes. 8. Nous les payerons [pejrS] quand elles seront prates. 9. Quand nous serons fatigu6es, nous irons dejeuner au restau- rant du Caf6 Voltaire. 10. Notre pSre nous y attendra k midi. 11. AprSs le dejeuner nous entrerons dans un magasin pour acheter des mouchoirs et des gants et puis nous rentrerons chez nous. 12. Nous attendons k diner des amis qui nous mfeneront au theatre ce soir. 13. Si nos nouvelles robes sont pretes, nous les mettrons. 14. On sort trSs tard du th^Atre k Paris. 15. II est fatigant de courir nuit et jour et nous serons bien oontentes quand nous serons au Ut. 102 A FKENCH GRAMMAR 5 94 B. (1) Make a list from A of the instances of the special use of the future (§94). (2) Complete the future forms, and reply to the questioins: 1. Je me fer- mal. 2. lis se fer- mai. 3. Nous ir- chez nous. 4. lis ir- au mus6e. 5. II r^pondr- h vos questions. 6. On vous entendr-. 7. Vous vous r6veil-. 8. II fer- jour £b six heures. 9. Si j'ai peur, je cri-. 10. Aur--vous peur si je crie? 11. Crie— vous si vous avez peur? 12. A quelle heure descendr--vous ? 13. Vous servir — vous de cette brosse? 14. Vous amus — vous au theatre ce soir? 15. Cette pi^ce de Moli&re vous amus- beaucoup. (3) Use in the future the verbs in parenthesis: 1. (se lever) A quelle heure vous ? 2. (se lever) Je • k sept heures. 3. (se lever) Vous tard, mon ami. 4. (r^pondre) Mon fr^re aux questions du professeur. 5. (entrer) Nous dans le theatre avant huit heures. 6. (sortir) Nous du theatre apr^s minuit. 7. (6tre) vous a I'^cole la semaine proohaine? 8. (mener) Je vous ■ au march6 demain matin. 9. (acheter) Nous des haricots verts, des petits pois, et un chou pour mon lapin. 10. (6tre) Nous chez nous avant midi. 11. (avoir) La cuisiniere besoin des I6gumes avant onze heures. 12. (perdre) Si vous arrivez si tard vous ■ votre temps. (4) Supply the correct form of the verb in parenthesis and trans- late: 1. (avoir) Je vous apporterai la chemise quand vous en besoin. 2. (avoir) Vous la mettrez quand vous la . 3. (^tre) Vous la ferez blanchir quand elle sale. 4. (^tre) Vous vous laverez les mains quand elles sales. 5. (etre) Nous dinerons quand le diner ■ pret. 6. (etre) Nous descendrons quand vous habill6. 7. (avoir) Nous d^jeunerons quand nous faim. 8. (faire) Nous sor- tirons tons les jours cet hiver quand il beau temps. 9. (faire) Nous nous l^verons quand il jour. 10. (faire) Nous resterons dans la maison quand il mauvais temps. 11. (entendre) J'ouvrirai la porte quand je vous venir. 12. (entendre) Je fermerai la fenStre quand je chanter 5 94 LESSON xxn 103 votre amie. 13. (aller) Je prendrai un taxi quand je k la gare. 14. (finir) J'irai me coucher quand je mon devoir. 15. (se r^veiller) Serez-vous pr^t quand je ? (5) What do you observe to be the written stem of the future of donner, finir, vendre? What familiar part of the verb does it seem to be ? What do the future endings remind you of? Observe that for Stre, avoir, faire, aUer these same endings are added to a new stem: ser-, aur-, far-, ir-. Note the pronunciation of the future of donner. C. (1) Beginning with A, 2, substitute hier for demain and shift the rest of the passage to the past. Look out for the imperfect and past indefinite forms. The si clauses must be converted into affirmative statements, as (A, 5) : II a fait (or il faisait) beau temps et nous sommes all6s a pied; il a fait mauvais et nous avons pris . . . The slight confusion of sense here may be ig- nored. The two present forms in A, 14 and 15, contain general statements, and therefore remain unchanged. (2) Traduisez en frangais: 1. We used to finish our work early. 2. Did you finish it? 3. The grapes (use singular) were ripening when I was in the country last (translate two ways) week. 4. Did they get ripe rapidly? 5. Were you (past indef.) at the concert yesterday? 6. Were they (on) singing when you got (arriver) there? 7. Had they (on) begun? 8. Did you hke the music? 9. How long did you stay? 10. Did the merchant sell (two ways, with different senses) shoes? 11. Did you dream when you were httle? 12. Did you dream last (cette) night? 13. Did you get scared? 14. Did you hurt yourself when your horse fell? 15. Did you get frightened when your horse ran through the woods? 16. You didn't come yesterday; were you ill? 17. Did you see her often in France? 18. Did you stay long in France? 19. I worked two hours yesterday evening. 20. I worked a great deal (beaucoup) when I was younger. 21. It got light very late yesterday morning. 22. I was late for (the) school. 23. It was dark when I left. D. Dict^e: Lesson XXI, A. 104 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §5 9^-97 LESSON XXIII 95. Disjunctive Personal Pronouns. The personal pro- nouns already given are used as subject or object with the verb, and are hence called 'conjunctive.' The following forms, not being immediately connected with a verb, are called 'disjunctive': moi [mwa], I, me nous [nu], we, us toi [twa], thou, thee, you vous [vu], you lui [Iqi], he, him eux [0], they (m.), them (m.) elle [el], she, her elles [el], they (/.), them (/.) 96. The following are some of their uses: 1. Absolutely, a verb being imphed, but not expressed: Qui est la? — Moi {eux, elles). Who is there? — I (they). 2. After a preposition: Pour eHes; avec moi; sans eux. For them; with me; without them. 3. As logical subject after ce + etre: C'est moi, c'est toi. It is I, it is thou (you). Cast lui, c'est elle. It is he, it is she. C'est nous, c'est vous. It is we, it is you. Ce sont eux, ce sent elles. It is they (m.), it is they (J.). 97. When the real subject follows the verb etre, ce is used to represent or point to this logical subject, whereas the Enghsh would often seem to demand a personal pro- noun (see § 44, 2, a), as in the 3rd and 4th examples below: C'est Marie et sa mere. It is Mary and her mother. C'est nous, ce sont eux. It is we, it is they. C'est un homme celebre. He is a celebrated man. Ce sont mes meilleures amies. They are my best friends. C'est aujourd'hui lundi. It is Monday to-day (To-day is). C'est a nous qu'il parle. It is to us that he is speaking. Note. — When the logical subject is a noun, ce is used in case the noun ia modified by an article or a possessive adjective; il (elle) is used when the noun has no modifier, as when it denotes nationality or profession: Cest un soldat But II est soldat Cest un Americain /{ est Americain i97 LESSON XXIII 105 EXERCISE XXm un autobus [otobys] motor bus s'arreter [sarste] halt, come to le coin [kwe] corner a stop le conducteur D'odyktceir] con- demeurer [damoere] live, ductor dwell, reside le c6te [kote] side, direction saluer [salqe] speak to, greet la dame [dam] lady la destination [dEstinasjo] des- bientot [bjeto] soon, in a little tination '^^'^^ le militaire [militsir] soldier (of '^"^^s Daba] over there, down any rank) ^^^^^ le numero [nymero] number ^ <=°t^ ^^ be^^de, next to un ordre [ordr] order sans [sa] without, but for le voisin [vwazE] neighbor ^^^ _ _ ^.^^ ^^^^ _ _ _ ^..-j ^^^^^^^ levoyageurCvwajasceir] traveler, ^^^^ ^^ ^^^ ^.^^ [salanferjg] autre [otr] other de ce c6te [daskote] on this side, sage [sa!33 good, well-behaved in this direction A. 1. Nous sortirons ce matin, n'est-ce pas? 2. — Oui, voulez-vous aller S, pied ou prendrons-nous I'autobus au coin de la rue? 3. — Allons k pied. II fait trSs beau. 4. J'aime k marcher quand il fait froid. 5. Qui est ce monsieur la- bas de I'autre c6t6 de la rue? 6. — Cast un de nos anciens voisins, qui demeure maintenant dans une autre rue. 7. — Est-ce votre professeur de frangais? 8. — ■ Non, ce n'est pas lui. Le voil^ de ce c6t6 de la rue qui monte dans (getting into) le tramway. 9. Avez-vous vu ces trois messieurs qui nous ont salu6s? 10. — Oui, je les ai vu^. — Ce sont des amis de mon pfere. 11. Voyez-vous cette dame qui monte en voiture? C'est une amis de votre mfere, n'est-ce pas? 12. — Non, elle est trop petite. Ma mire n'a pas d'amie aussi petite qu'elle. 13. — Mais elle nous a saluls. 14. — Cela ne fait rien. Ce n'est pas une amie de ma m&re. 15. Elle a salu6 peut- ^tre ces messieurs qui sont derriSre nous. Les voyez-vous? 16. — Oui, vous avez raison. Ce sont eux qu'elle a salu6s. 17. Ce sont deux jeunes militaires, n'est-ce pas? 18. — C'est d. ce coin-II, que nous attendrons I'autobus. 19. II s'arrete 106 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 97 de I'autre c6t6 de la rue. Prenons des numeros. 20. Quand 1' autobus arrivera, le conducteur criera les numeros et les voyageurs monteront dans I'ordre de leurs numeros. 21. — Oh, je comprends! On ne fait pas comma cela chez nous. 22. — Non, mais cela ne fait rien; on fait comme cela en France. 23. — Eh bien, nous voila months! Nous avons de bonnes places, n'est-ce pas? 24. L' autobus marche vite et nous serons bient6t k notre destination. B. (1) a. Identify each case of ce and il (elle, etc.) in A. 6. Fill in the blank with ce or il (elle, lis, alias): 1. f ait chaud. 2. est quatre heures. 3. est aujourd'hui qu'il part. 4. est le conducteur qui a cri6 les numeros. 5. fera jour bientot. 6. est facteur; — est cuisiniere. 7. sera bientot midi. 8. est ici que I'autobus s'arrete. 9. s'arrete ici. 10. sont mes freres que vous avez vus. 11. sont arrives hier. 12. sont ici depuis huit jours. 13. demeurent a Saint-Louis. 14. est k Saint-Louis qu'ils demeurent. 15. A qui est- ' ? 16. est k eux. (2) Translate: with me, at my house, at his house, with her, before them (masc), behind them (fern.), for him, of them (masc), without her, without them (masc), by (beside) him, by me, after you, after her. (3) Give eight possible answers to each question, using dis- ju7ictive pronouns: 1. Qui est la? 2. Qui a cri6 pendant la nuit? 3. Qui a perdu ce mouchoir? C. (1) Re-read exercise A of Lesson XXII. Close the book and reproduce it in the future with the following as key words: se coucher ce soir des projets pour demain se lever dejeuner sortir ■ prendre tramway, autobus passer chez modiste aller chez couturi^re essayer robes dejeuner avec papa au restaurant au magasin des gants rentrer th^^tre ce soir content ■i'etre au Ut. (2) Translate and explain the cases of ce or il (elle, etc.): 1. She is here; she is my teacher. 2. They went (partir, see Lesson XVIII, B, 2) this morning; they are the ones (= it is § 98 LESSON xxrv 107 they) who went this morning. 3. I am the one (= It is I) who spoke (1st person) to you. 4. He is famous; he is a famous man. 5. She is very pretty; she is a very pretty lady. 6. He is good (sage); he is a good boy. 7. It (street car) stops here; it is here that it stops. 8. They are gone (partir); they are my friends. 9. She stops; she is a good child. 10. He is [a] postman; he is the postman who brought the letters. (3) Fill in each blank with the present, imperfect, past indefinite and future (four forms) of the verb in parenthesis: 1. (sortir) Notre voisin • de sa maison. 2. (monter) Les voyageurs dans la voiture. 3. (faire) Cela ne rien (rien as object has the same position as pas). 4. (crier) Le conducteur les num^ros. 5. (s'arreter) Les tramways de 1' autre c6t6 de la rue. 6. (se promener) Mon oncle k cheval. 7. (courir: 1st future, courrai) Ces jeunes filles nuit et jour. 8. (avoir besoin) Ces enfants d'un bon diner. 9. (avoir) II y une fois une belle dame. 10. (etre) II temps de partir. 11. (cesser) Mon pere de fumer. 12. (s'appeler) Le petit gargon Charles [Sarl]. 13. (com- mencer) Le professeur la leQon. LESSON XXIV 98. Impersonal Verbs. They are conjugated in the third person singular only, with the subject 11 = it, used indef- initely and absolutely. Among such are (a) verbs describing natural phenomena, as in English: Quel temps fait-il? What kind of weather is it? II fait beau temps. It is fine (weather). II pleut, il pleuvait. It is raining, it was raining. n a plu, il pleuvra. It has rained, it wiU rain. II neige, 11 a neigg. It is snowing, it has snowed. H fait chaud, il fait du vent It is hot, it is windy. (&) n faut: n faut saluer ses amis. It is necessary to (we must, you must, one must) speak to oui (your, one's) friends. 108 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §98 (c) The idiomatic expression il y a + an object noun. 11 y a des pltunes sur la table. There are pens on the table. II y a dix milles d'ici k la ville. It is ten miles from here to the city. (d) II est with expressions of time: II est trois heures, midi. It is three o'clock, twelve o'clock (noon). n est une heure (du matin). It is one o'clock (1 A.M.). EXERCISE XXIV une auto(mobile) [oto(mobil)] au- tomobile {often masc.) le bateau [bato] boat le bout [buj end le camarade [kamarad] school- mate, chum le ciel [sjd] sky le conge Okose] leave; jour de conge holiday le coucher du soleil [TiuSedyso- Ie!]] sunset un endroit [cenadrwa] spot, place sine excursion [EkskjTsjo] trip le lac Qak] lake le lever du soleil [lalvedysoleijj sunrise le monde [mSid] world le nuage [nqais] cloud les provisions /. [provizjo] food, things to eat le repas Qarpa] meal le vent [va] wind couvert [kuveir] overcast, covered propre [propr] clean le lundi [loedi] Monday le mardi [mardi] Tuesday le mercredi [msrkradi] Wednes- day le jeudi [50di] Thursday le vendredi [vaidradi] Friday le samedi [samdij Saturday le dimanche [dimaiS] Sunday appeler [aple] call s'appreter [saprste] get ready chasser [Sase] drive away neiger [nese] snow il neige [neis] it is snowing pleuvoir [plcEvwa:r] rain il pleut [pl03 it is raining se reposer [sarpoze] rest apresr-demain [aprsdme] day after to-morrow avant-hier [ava(t)JE!r] day before yesterday dehors [dao;r] outdoors pres de [prsdo] near sous [su] under, beneath pendant que [padaka] while §98 LESSON xxrv 109 A. (1) 1. C'estaujourd'huivendredi. 2. Mardi deiniei nous avons fait une jolie excursion. 3. Nous nous sommes \ev6s avant le lever du soleil et nous avons regard^ dehors pour voir quel temps il faisait. 4. Le ciel 6tait convert de nuages et il commeneait a, pleuvoir. 5. II a plu pendant une heure, mais apres le petit dejeuner il a cess6 de pleuvoir. 6. Le vent a cliass6 les nuages et bient^t il a fait tr^s beau. 7. A dix heures nous sommes partis en automobile pour passer la journ^e dans le pare de Versailles, un des plus beaux pares du monde. 8. Nous avons pris des choses k manger parce que nous voulions (wished) diner sous les arbres. 9. Nous 6tions huit dans notre automobile mais nous 6tions bien malgr6 cela. 10. II y avait plusieurs autres automobiles pour nos camarades. 11. En route nous avons chant6 et cri6, et nous avons beau- coup ri. 12. J'aime les excursions en auto, si on ne marche pas trop vite. 13. La grande route 6tait trfes belle, avec de beaux arbres des deux c6t6s. 14. Les petits chemins dans la forSt 6taient moins bons mais cela ne faisait rien. 15. Nous ne voulions pas aller trop vite. (2) 16. Au bout d'une heure nous nous sommes arr^t^s dans un joli endroit pres d'un petit lac. 17. II y avait de I'herbe et de beaux arbres. 18. Nos parents sont rest6s sous les arbres pour preparer le repas, pendant que les enfants s'amusaient. 19. Quelques-uns des gargons ont jou6 k la balle. 20. D'autres ont fait une promenade en bateau sur le petit lac. 21. II y avait plusieurs bateaux et quelques-unes des jeunes filles les ont accompagn^s. 22. Avant le repas ma mere m'a dit: « Tes mains ne sont pas propres; va les laver tout de suite. » 23. Apr6s le diner on s'est repos6 sur I'herbe parce qu'on 6tait fatigu6. 24. A cinq heures nous sommes partis et nous sommes arrives chez nous avant le coucher du soleil. 25. Quelle belle journ^e! En hiver on ne fait pas de si jolies excursions. 26. II fait froid, il neige et tr^s souvent il pleut toute la journ^e et on s'amuse mieux k la maison. 27. Les jours sont aussi tr6s courts. Le soleil se Itve tard et se couche de bonne heure J'aime mieux I'^t^. QO A FBENCH GRAMMAE 5*8 B. Memorise*: Eh, bonjour Lundi! Comment va Mardi? Tr&s bien, Mercredi; Je viens de la part de Jeudi, Dire k Vendredi, Qu'il s'appr^te Samedi, Pour aller k I'eglise Dimanche. C. (1) Transfer the story in A to the future, suhsiituting demain for aujourd'hui, prochain for dernier, futures for past indefinites, etc., and tell it first in the first person as above, and then of mes cousins, making the proper changes of verbs, pronouns, etc. The first person, future, of voulions is voudrons {or use aliens vouloir). (2) Traduisez: 1. It was raining when we got up this morning, but it did not rain long. 2. When it stopped raining we went out. Our friends were waiting for us. 3. They invited us to go with them to Versailles, where they were going to spend the day in the beautiful park. 4. There were eight of us Id their motor car, but in spite of that we were very comfortable. 5. On the way we laughed and sang. When we got to our destination we all got out (descendre). 6. While our parents prepared dinner on the grass, the boys played baU. 7. Some of the girls went for a boat ride on the small lake. 8. We asked them {indirect object) to (de) wait for us, but they would {imperf. of vouloir; 1st person, voulais) not. 9. Two of the girls fell into the water, but they did not hurt themselves. 10. At six o'clock my mother called us and we set out (= de- parted). 11. The car went rapidly and we got home before sunset. D. Repondez aux questions: 1. Quel jour de la semaine est-ce aujourd'hui? 2. Quel jour est-ce que ce sera demain? 3. Et * Translation: (Good morning, good day), How do you do Monday! How is Tuesday? — Very well, Wednesday; — I come from (= in behalf of) Thursday — To tell Friday — That he is to get ready Saturday, — To go to church Sunday. Observe the use of capital letters here, contrary, apparently, to § 21, In this jingle the days are personifienl. §98 LESSON XXIV 111 quel jour 6tait-ce hier? 4. Et apres-demain? 5. Et avant- hier? 6. Quels jours de la semaine avez-vous vos classes? 7. AUez-vous a I'^cole tous les jours? 8. Jeudi est jour de cong6 pour les petits Frangais; avez-vous cong6 le jeudi? 9. Est-ce que vous vous amusez le samedi? 10. Aimez-vous mieux les samedis ou les lundis? 11. Quand est-ce que aVen- dredi » s'apprete? 12. Pourquoi s'appr^te-t-il? 13. Vous apprMez-vous le samedi pour aller h I'^glise le dimanche? 14. Comment allez-vous aujourd'hui? 15. Comment v» votre p^re? 16. Quels sont les jours de la semaine? E. Dict6e: Lesson XXII, A. VOCABXJLARY REVIEW No. 3 (1) Give opposite or synonym: bon marcM, une bottine, une semaine, deux semaines, tard, faire beau, faire chaud, avoir raison, essayer, se lever, de bonne heure, le lever du soleil, jour, matin, pauvre, ensuite, quelque chose, sale, premier. (2) Supply the proper words: 1. La terre est de neige. 2. Le vent les nuages. 3. II k vos questions. 4. La couturiSre fait des ; la modiste fait des . 5. J'6tais fatigu6 et j'ai dormi ce matin. 6. Je suis arrive en k l'4cole. 7. Je me coucherai de bonne heure parce que j'ai ■ . 8. Je vais au concert parce que j'aime la . 9. Je vais voir une de Moli^re au ce soir. 10. AUez vite laver vos mains, elles sont ; elles ne sont pas . 11. Je me suis les cheveux; je me suis la figure. 12. J'ai mes aux pieds. 13. Pour me laver les mains j'ai besoin de et d'une . 14. Je n'aime pas cet enfant, il n'est pas . 15. Prenons 1' autobus qui k ce coin de la rue. 16. Les montent dans le tramway; le conducteur crie les et nous montons dans de nos num^ros. 17. Je n'aime pas les autos, j'aime mieux me promener k . 18. Quand il froid, je mettrai mes gants. 19. Nous avons achet6 deux de souliers. 20. Je marche avec les et les , je pense avec la . 112 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §98 (3) Supply past indefinite and future of cesser or s'aitetei according to the sense: 1. II de pleuvoir. 2. Le train . 3. II ne neige pas maintenant, la neige a de tomber. 4. Get enfant a d'6couter. 5. II k la porte. 6. Ne vous pas dans la rue; vous serez en retard pour la classe. Supply the infinitive of one of these verbs: 7. Voulez-vous ? 8. Voulez-vous de causer avec eux? (4) Supply fois or temps or heure: 1. II fait beau ; deux k la ; il est de partir ; quelle est-il? c'est du diner. 2. Combien de resterez-vous chez la couturi^re? 3. Combien de les avez-vous vus? 4. Le c'est de I'argent. 5. Je n'ai pas le d'y aller. 6. II a neig6 plusieurs vendredi dernier. 7. Depuis combien de demeurez-vous k New- York? 8. Notre auto [oto] s'est arret^e trois . 9. II y avait une une petite fiUe tr6s sage. (5) a. Supply de bonne heure or bient6t: 1. lis se ISveront demain. 2. II est un peu en retard mais il arrivera . 3. J'ai fait une promenade ce matin. 4, Je rentrerai pour le d6jeuner. 5. Attendez un peu, I'autobus arrivera . 6. Si le tramway n' arrive pas , j'irai k ma destina- tion k pied. 7. Aujourd'hui ils se sont r^veillfe . b. Supply tard or en retard: 1. J'aime k me lever en hiver. 2. Le soleil se couche en 6t6. 3. Je suis parti tres de chez moi. 4. Get 61eve est tou jours . 5. Vous etes pour prendre le train. 6. Le train est ar- rive k la gare. (6) Use in two sentences each the verbs conjugated with etre {see Lesson XVIII). (7) Supply suitable words: 1. Nous avons ^t6 au « Bon March6 » (magasin c^lebre de Paris). 2. Nous avons acliet6 une paire de , trois paires de , et deux pour ma grande sceur. 3. Et nous avons achet^ une jolie verte pour mon oncle, des , des , et des pour mon pfere et des pour ma petite sceur. 4. Tous les enfants aimenf lea . 599 LESSON XXV 113 (8) Enumirez (enumerate) les objets dont vous vous servez pour voire toilette {voyez aux Legons XX, XXI). (9) ComplStez: 1. Vous trop de cigares. 2. Quand les enfants ■ peur, ils . 3. Les enfants ne orient pas beaucoup. 4. Quand le ciel est couvert de en hiver, on dit qu'il va . 5. Si c'est en 6t6, on dit qu'il va . 6. On se promene sur I'eau dans un . 7. On se promSne k travers la foret h . 8. On se promene sur les grandes routes en ou k ou k . (10) Quels sont les jours de la semaine? (11) Dites en frangais: already, again, late, early, at length, through, beside, near, yell loudly, the same day, out-doors. LESSON XXV 99. The Infinitive. Some of the commoner uses of the infinitive are: 1. Without any preposition, (a) after such verbs as devoir, must, ought to, falloir, must, be necessary to, pouvoir, mn, be able to, savoir, can, know how to, vouloir, will, wish; (b) after verbs of motion such as aller, go, venir, come; (c) after verbs of perceiving such as ecouter, listen (to), entendre, hear, voir, see, regarder, look at; and after faire, make, cause to, laisser, let. Desire-t-il aller en vUle? Does he wish to go downtown? II faut travailler. He (we, you, they, etc.) must work. Je vais chercher des plumes. 1 am going to get some pens. Je vois venir des soldats. I see some soldiers coming. Je fais sonner la cloche. I make the bell ring. 2. Preceded by de, (a) after impersonal etre followed by an adjective; (6) after many verbs, such as cesser, stop, demander, ask, dire, tell, essayer, try, prier, beg, regretter, regret, be sorry, tacher, try; (c) after nouns to form ad- jective phrases; and after most adjectives. 114 A FRENCH GRAMMAR } 99 II est facile de parler. It is easy to talk. 11 a cesse de chanter. He has ceased singing. Le crime de voler. The crime of steahng. Vous etes libre de partir. You are free to go. Je vous prie de rester quelques I beg of you to stay a few min- minutes. utes. 3. Preceded by a, (a) after such verbs as aimer, like, s'amuser, have a good time, apprendre, learn, avoir, have to, chercher, seek, commencer, begin, continuer, continue, enseigner, teach, inviter, invite, se mettre, begin, reussir, succeed; and (6) after some adjectives denoting fitness, tendency, purpose, etc. J'aime a patiner. I like to skate (like skating). Je m'amuse a patiner. I amuse myself (by) skating. Commencez a lire. Begin to read. Nous avons a copier nos phrases. We have to copy our sentences. n se met a travailler. He begins to work. Ceci est bon a manger. This is good to eat. Cela est facile a faire. That is easy to do. N.B. — Aimer may also (colloquially) he followed by the pure infinitive; e.g., j'aime (a) marcher lentement, / like to walk . 4. Observe that the same adjective may take a or de, according to the construction in which it is used. When the infinitive depends upon the adjective and is not the logical subject of the sentence, the adjective and the infinitive are connected by means of a; when the infinitive is the real subject of the sentence, it is preceded by de. n est facile a contenter. He is easy to satisfy. II est facile de le contenter. It is easy to satisfy him. La chose est facile a faire. The thing is easy to do. n est diflacile de patiner. Skating is difficult. 5. A verb governed by a preposition must be in the infini- tive, except after en (cf. §101); the infinitive is usually translated into English by means of a present participle: Je I'ai fait sans penser. I did it without thinking. (1 est parti sans rien dire. He left without saying anything §§ 100-103 LESSON XXV 115 100. Present Participle of donner, finir, vendre, etc. Giving Finishing Selling donn ant [dona] finiss ant [finisa] vend ant [vada] Having Being ay ant [sja] et ant [eta] 101. Agreement. Used as an adjective, the present parti- ciple agrees like an adjective; otherwise it is invariable: Une scene charmante. A charming scene. Les enfants sont obeissants. The children are obedient. EUe tombait souvent en marchant. She often fell while walking. Ce professeur aime a s'amuser en This teacher likes to entertain lisant les pieces de Moliere. himself by reading Molifere's plays. En lisant on apprend k lire. By reading one learns to read. Tout en pleurant, elle continua. Still weeping, she went on. N.B. — The present participle, when preceded by en, strengthened some- times by tout, is often called the gerund. The preposition en is expressed in English by on, in, while, by or is left untranslated. 102. Present Indicative of pouvoir, he able, can, may (irreg.) / can, am able, etc. je peux or puis [38p0,pqi3 nous pouvons [nupuvo] tu peux [typ0] vous pouvez [vupuve] ilpeut [ilp0] ilspeuvent [ilpcBiv] 103. The impersonal il faut (imperfect il fallait, past indef . il a fallu, future il faudra) is often used with the pure infinitive to indicate a general obligation on the part of the speaker or the person spoken to or about: D faut faire son devoir. One must do one's duty. n faut partir. I (we, you, he, they) must leave. II ne fallait pas s'arreter. You (we, he, they, she) ought not to have stopped. n a fallu beaucoup travailler We (they, you, etc.) had to work hard. II ne faudra pas volar. We (one, people, etc.) must not steal. Observe the position of the negative words in the French examples. 116 A FRENCH GRAMMAR 5 103 EXERCISE XXV la carte [kart] card, map venir [vaniir] come; U vient la cloche [kloj] bell [vje] he comes, is coming la connaissance [kon£sa:s] ac- vouloir [vulwair] wish quaintance apprendre (a) [apraidr] learn, un effort [efoir] effort teach la glace [glas] ice, mirror enseigner (k) [asEpe] teach le roman [roma] novel reussir (a) [reysiir] succeed la soiree [sware] evening {when duration is stressed) essayer (de) [eseje] try, at- tempt charmant [Sarma] delightful prier (de) [prije] ask, beg, re- enchante [aSate^ delighted quest Ubre Qibr] free regretter (de) [ragrete] regret, be sorry falloir [falwair] be necessary; r t" 1 V t il faut [fo] it is necessary, pa ner Lpa in J J. M I J rr J n se porter be (of health) one must; il faudra [fodra] *^ .V • n ^i, i .^ .„ , .„ remercier rramersiel thank it wul be necessary, one wiJ _'--,.' , , , sonner Tsonel ring have to or must pouvoir [puvwa'.r] be able, can facilement Cfasihna] easily A. 1. Bonjour, monsieur; je suis enchants de faire votre con- naissance. 2. Comment allez-vous aujourd'hui? 3. — Tres bien, merci. Et vous? 4. — Qui? Moi? Toujours bien, je vous remercie. 5. Aimez-vous ce temps? — • Oh, beaueoup. 6. II a fait froid cette nuit (last night) mais maintenant on voit le soleil et il fait presque chaud. 7. J'ai fait una promenade charmante dans le pare ce matin. 8. II n'y a pas de fleurs, mais il y a des * petits oiseaux qui ne sent pas partis, et qui n'ont pas encore cess6 de chanter. 9. En passant j'ai regard^ le petit lac et j'ai vu qu'il y avait de la glace. 10. Nous pouvons bient6t patiner. 11. On peut s'amuser facilement en hiver, n'est-ce pas? 12. — Oui, il est tres facile de s'amuser dehors quand on se porte bien. 13. Et si on ne desire pas sortir, on peut rester k la maison h lire et k faire de la musique. 14. J'ai * Observe des petits oiseaux, like des petits pois. The adjective and noun are felt as a compound noun. Similarly we say regularly des jeunes filles, des petits pains (roUs) and, often, des petits garfons § 103 LESSON XXV ll7 commence hier un roman de Dumas Qdyma]. 15. Et souvent nous invitons nos amis k passer la soir6e chez nous. 16. On chante, on danse, on joue aux cartes. 17. Oui. II est facile de bien s'amuser quand on a des amis. B. (1) Use the indicated infinitive, directly or preceded by a preposition, according to §99: 1. Vous ne pouvez pas (parler). 2. II faut (se coucher) tout de suite. 3. Nous aUons (nous lover) maintenant. 4. II a d6jS, cess6 (pleuvoir). 5. Je regrette (quitter) mes amis. 6. Je vous prie (rdpondre) k ma question. 7. J'ai beaucoup k faire; nous avons trop (faire). 8. Ma soeur a entendu (chanter) Caruso. 9. Vous entendrez ('chanter) les oiseaux dans le pare. 10. Nous voulons (voir) le petit lac. 11. Je vois (tomber) la neige. 12. A quelle heure voulez-vous (diner)? 13. Le vent a r6ussi (chasser) les nuages. 14. Vous pouvez (r^ussir) (parler) fran(jais, si vous tsichez (bien prononcer). 15. Nous essayons (parler) fran- 5ais. 16. Je vais (me promener) pres de la foret. 17. II m' a enseign6 (monter) k cheval. 18. Vous 6tes libre (jouer) dans mon jardin. 19. Regrettez-vous (cesser) (fumer)? 20. Je vous prie (vous servir) de mon savon. 21. II fait jour; il faut (se lever)' tout de suite; il faudra (rentrer) avant minuit. 22. J'aimais (passer) les vacances a la campagne. 23. EUe avait r6ussi (trouver) son livre. 24. II n'est pas facile (bien prononcer) le fran9ais. 25. D6sirez-vous (vous arreter) ici? 26. lis voient (venir) leurs amis. 27. II ^coutait (sonner) les cloches. 28. II m'a pri6 (le mener) au concert. 29. II s'amuse (lire). 30. II m'apprendra (patiner). 31. Les 616ves demanderont au professeur (leui- enseigner) (lire) le franQais. (2) What do you observe about the position of the infinitive after entendre, voir, ecouter? Contrast it with the order in English. (3) a. Observe carefully: 1. La classe a appris k bien pro- noncer. 2. Apres avoir fait ma toilette, je suis descendu. 3. Je regrette de vous voir partir. 4. Mon p^re a fini par me chasser de la maison. 5. On se couche pour dormir. 6. On ne pent rien apprendre sans faire un effort. 118 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 103 6. These six prepositions take the infinitive. What form of the infinitive is found after apres ? Par with the infinitive is usually found only after commencer and finir. Observe that en does not take the infinitive. For by + verb form in other cases, compare §101, example 5. May we use avant alone before an infinitive? c. Translate: 1. After finishing my work; after eating too much. 2. We shall begin by reading aloud (k haute voix). 3. One learns to skate by skating. 4. Before leaving, I wish to thank you again (encore une fois). d. Note the usual position of bien with infinitives (before), and in compound tenses (before the past participle). Write: 1. We had a very good time. 2. She sang well yesterday. C. (1) Translate the participial phrases (be careful about the auxiliaries): 1. Having finished his lesson. 2. Having ar- rived before noon. 3. Having stopped eating. 4. Having gone to see her. 5. Having succeeded in teaching you to skate. 6. Having been to the theater yesterday evening (not soiree). 7. Having gone out early. 8. Having come in (rentrer) late. 9. Having waked {1st person: m'etant reveille. Third person f) before daylight (le jour). 10. Having got up (1st plural fern.: nous etant levees. Third plural fern. ?) at six o'clock. 11. Having begged (prier) my father to give me more money. 12. Having asked (demander) my chum to come to see me. (2) Traduisez: 1. He enters without knocking. 2. She left without looking at me; you cannot pronounce French without making an effort. 3. In winter we amuse ourselves by (a) skating. 4. He will not succeed in finding the right (bon) road. 5. Do you want to spend your time in (k) running- about (courir) the streets? 6. He speaks of going to France (the) next summer. 7. He cannot speak of going away without regretting to leave his friends. 8. While skating (set>. § 101, example 3) yesterday, I fell and hurt myself. 9. When I was small I used to fall and hurt myself while skating. 10. Appe- tite comes (vient) while one eats (= eating). 11. We (On) learn to speak French by speaking (see § 101, example 5). 12. We (On) succeed in stopping smoking by stopping smoking i§ 104r-106 LESSON XXVI 119 LESSON XXVI 104. Present Subjunctive of donner, finir, vendre I {may) give, etc. I (may) finish, etc. I (may) sell, etc. donn e [don] Saiss e [finis] vend e [va:d] donncs [don] finiss es [finis] vend es [vasd] donne [don] finiss e [finis] vend e [va:d] donn ions [don jo] finiss ions [finisjS] vend ions [vadjo] donnicz [donje] finiss lez [finisje] vend iez [vadje] donn ent [don] finiss ent [finis] vend ent [va:d] N.B. — The paradigm meanings / may give, etc., are only approxi-^ mate, as will be seen from the examples below. 105. Present Subjunctive of avoir, itre I (may) hate, etc. I (may) be, etc. aie [e] ayons [sjS] sois [swa] soyons [swajo] aies [e] ayez [sje] sois [swa] soyez [swaje] ait [e] aient [e] soit [swa] soient [swa] 106. Use of the Subjunctive. Some of the commoner uses of the subjunctive are: 1. In a subordinate noun clause introduced by que, thai, after expressions of imlling or desiring: Je desire que vous restiez. I desire you to remain ( = that you may or should remain). 2. Similarly, after expressions of joy or sorrow: Je suis content qu'il soit ici. I am glad he is here. 3. So also after expressions of necessity, like il faut: II faut que vous restiez. You must remain. II est necessaire que vous restiez. It is necessary for you to remain. N.B. — We learned in §§ 99, 103 that falloir is often followed by the pure infinitive. In B and C of the Exercise below the pupil will find examples that should help him to decide between the cases when the infinitive or subjunctive may be used indifferently, or when the subjunctive is required. It should be observed that the subjunctive construction is preferable in luch cases as example 1, when we have a definite person in mind. 120 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §§ 107-109 4. It is used in adverbial clauses after certain conjunc- tions, e.g., afin que, in order that, pour que, in order that, avant que, before, bien que, although, quoique, although, etc. Bien qu'il soit pauvre il est heureux. Although he is poor, he is happy. 5. Que is never omitted, as that often is in English: Je suis content gu'il soit ici. I am glad (that) he is here. 107. Tense Sequence. Present or Future in the principal clause is regularly followed by Present Subjunctive: Pees. II faut \ r / ^°" must speak. Ftit. II faudra J P • | You will have to speak. 108. Present Indicative of vouloir, will, wish, etc. (irreg.) I will, wish, etc. je veux [58V0] nous voulons [nuvulo] tu veux Ctyv0] vous voulez [vuvule] il veut Cilv0] lis veulent [ilvoel] 109. Present Subjunctive of faire (irreg.) I {may) do, etc. fasse [fas] fassions [fasjo] fasses [fas] fassiez [fasje] fasse [fas] fassent [fas] EXERCISE XXVI le billet [bijs] ticket le doute [dut] doubt un esprit [espri] wit, intelligence, spirit la fin [fe] end la guerre [geir] war une intention [gtasjo] intention le moyen [mwaje] means, way la vie [vi] life aimable [emabl] kind channe [Jarme] delighted mille [mil] a thousand possible [posibl] possible avoir 1 'intention de intend dire [di:r] say, tell envoyer [avwaje] send f eliciter [felisite] congratulate laisser [Igse] leave, allow permettre (de) [permstr] allow, permit voyager [vwajase] travel ne . . . que only sans doute [sadut] doubtless, certainly seulement [scelma] only § 109 LESSON XXVI 121 EXERCISE XXVI (Continued) flfin que [afeke] in order that, au revoir! [orvwair] good-bye, so that see you again! avant que [avaka] before c'est cela [sssla] that's right, bien que [bjeka] although that's it quoique [kwako] although peut-6tre [p0teitr] perhaps A. Use the infinitive in parenthesis with or without a prepo- sition according to usage: 1. Onne peut pas (bien marcher) sur la glace; 11 faut (apprendre) (patiner). 2. Je regrette (ne pas pouvoir) (patiner). 3. II a cess6 (neiger) maintenant; nous pouvons (sortir). 4. D6sirez-vous (faire) la connaii- sance de Monsieur Daudet Qdode]? 5. — Beaucoup. Je vous prie (me presenter) k Monsieur Daudet. 6. — Alors, per- mettez-moi (vous presenter) mon ami, Monsieur Dupin. 7. — Je suis charm6 (faire) votre connaissance, monsieur. 8. £ltes-vous depuis longtemps en Am^rique? 9. — Non, monsieur. Je ne suis en Am^rique que depuis trois mois. Je I'aime beaucoup, et je regretterai (partir) la semaine pro- chaine. 10. — Vous avez r6ussi (tr^s bien apprendre) I'anglais. Permettez-moi (vous feliciter). 11. — Je vous remercie, mon- sieur. Vous Stes mille fois aimable, mais je commence seule- ment (I'apprendre) . 12. Mais ou avez-vous appris (parler) fran§ais? 13. Comment avez-vous r^ussi (parler) et (com- prendre) si bien? Vous avez €ti sans doute en France! 14. — Non, monsieur, je regrette (n'avoir) pas encore vu la France. 15. J'avais I'intention (y aller) I'annle dernifere, mais la guerre ne permettait pas (voyager). 16. —Eh bien, il faut (venir) bient6t; et venez (me voir) a Paris, n'est-ce pas? 17. — Merci, monsieur. Je veux (le faire) et je le ferai F6t6 prochain, si je peux. — Au revoir, monsieur ! — Au revoir ! A (till) I'ann^e pro- chaine ! — C'est cela. A I'ann^e prochaine, k Paris ! B. Contrast the following sentences: 1. II desire r^ussir. II desire que nous r^ussis- sions. 2. Je veux le faire. • II veut que je le fasse. 3. Nous sommes contents de Nous sommes contents que vous voir si bien r^ussir. vous ayes si bien r^ussi. 122 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 109 4. Vous regrettez de I'avoir Je ne regrette pas que vous fait, n'est-ce pas? I'ayez fait. 5. II faut vous f^liciter de votre II f aut que le professeur vous prononciation. felicite de votre prononcia- tion. 3. II est n^cessaire de permettre II est n^cessaire que vous me cela aux enfants. permettiez de vous le dire. What is the essential difference in regard to the subject of the dependent verb that makes the subjunctive necessary in the sentences of the second column? Hence, what general statement can you formulate in the case of verbs that come under both § 99 and § 106; that is, when is the infinitive used and when the subjunctive? C. (1) Make two groups of sentences with desirer, vouloir, regretter, itre content, il faudra, in which you illustrate both constructions possible after these verbs. Observe that in cases like § 99, 1, example 2, § 103, and § 106, 3, example 1, the in- finitive and subjunctive constructions after il faut (faudra) are exactly equivalent. This is often the case when the subject in English is a personal pronoun; but il faut que cet eleve fasse son travail. (2) Supply the proper form of the verb in parenthesis, inserting any missing preposition: 1. (etre) Bien qu'il — ; — riche, il est heureux. 2. (avoir) Quoiqu'eUe beaucoup d'argent, elle a de I'esprit. 3. (faire) Bien qu'il beau aujourd'hui, ces enfants ne peuvent pas sortir. 4. (partir) Quoique nous de trfes bonne heure, nous n'arriverons qu'S. minuit. 5. (faire) Mon pere desire que je un voyage en France pour mieux (apprendre) (parler) frangais. 6. (entendre) Nous menerons mon cousin au concert ce soir afin qu'il de la ^ bonne musique. 7. (finir) Je le laisserai tranquille tout(e) I'apres-midi pour qu'il son travail avant le diner. 8. (finir) Nous ne partirona pas avant qu'il ses lemons pour demain. 9. (faire) II fermera la porte afin qu'il assez chaud dans sa chambre. 10. (arriver) Nous n'avons pas nos places et il ne faut pas que nous trop tard. 11. (Stre) Quoique nos places ne ' Compare XXV, A, footnote. § 109 LESSON XXVI 123 pas trop bonnes, j'entendrai bien. 12. (avoir) Mon cousin entendra bien aussi quoiqu'il ne pas de trop bonnes oreiLles. 13. (quitter) II faudra que nous la salle avant la fin du concert. 14. (avoir) II est n^cessaire que nous noa billets avant d'entrer dans la salle. 15. (^tre) II faut que nous a nos places avant qu'on ^ (chanter). (3) Traduisez: 1. We are delighted that you are having a good time in America. 2. Although you have been here only a few months, you speak English very well. 3. I must con- gratulate you on your pronunciation. 4. I wish to send my son to France, in order that he may learn (§ 202) to speak French. 5. He likes it very much, but he is just beginning (is beginning only) to learn to speak it. 6. When your son is in Paris, he must make the acquaintance of my old friend Mr. Dumas, who has several sons and three daughters. 7. One learns a language very quickly by talking with other young people (gens). 8. They are the best teachers. Your son must often spend the evening at his house. 9. He will have to (must) learn the language, in order to play cards and chat with the young ladies. 10. I shall be glad to have him do that (that he do ... ). 11. We wish him to become acquainted with (faire connaissance avec) the life of a French family. 12. It is the best way of becoming acquainted with France. D. Form questions to which the sentences in C, (2) could be considered as answers. E. (1) a. Observe the similarities between the stem of the present participles of verbs like donner, finir, vendre (§ 100) and that of the present and imperfect indicative and the present subjunctive: Pees. PART. regardant mlirissant attendant Pres. INDIC. re garde mftris attends Imp. INDIC. regardais mArissais attendais Pres. SUBJ. regarde mArisse attende 6, Complete orally or at the board the conjugation of these forma. 1 (commencer). 124 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §§ 110-11,3 (2) Tins similarity exists in all the so-called regular verbs, and is important for all others. For example: Pres. part. ayant 6tant faisant [faza] dormant Pres. indic. ai suis fais Qfe] dors Impepf. indic. avais 6tais faisais [faze] dormais Pees. subj. aie sois fasse [fas] dorme Complete orally or at the board the conjugation of these forms. Observe that the forms of the verb etre are derived from more than one stem. Compare am, was, been. LESSON XXVII 110. Imperative of donner, finir, vendre Give, etc. Finish, etc. Sell, etc. donn e [don] finjs [finil! vend s [va] qu'il donn e [don] qu'il finiss e [finis] qu'il vend e [vaid] donn ons [dono] finiss ons [finiso] vend ons[vado] donn ez [done] Gniss ez [finise] vend ez [vadel qu'ils donn ent [don] qu'ils Gniss ent [finis] qu'ils vend ent [va:d] 06?.; The 3rd sing, and 3rd pi. are subjunctive forms used as imperatives 111. Imperative of avoir, etre Have, etc. Be, etc. aie [e] sois [swa] qu'il ait [kils] qu'il soit [swa] ay ons [ejo] soy ons [swajo] ay ez [eje] soy ez [swaje] qu'ils aient [kilze] qu'ils soient [kilswa] 112. Imperative Negative ne donne pas qu'il ne donne pas ne donnons pas, et(i. 113. Position of Objects. 1. Personal pronoun objects follow the positive imperative (but not the subjunctive as imperative), and are joined to it and to one another by hyphens: 5 113 LESSON XXVII 125 Donnez-Zuj la plume. Give him the pen. Donnez-te-Zui. Give it to him. Donnons-Zeur-en. Let us give them some. But: Qu'il me la donne. Let him give it to me. 2. If the imperative is negative, the general rule of posi- tion (§ 81) holds good : Ne la lui donnez pas. Do not give it to him. 3. Moi and toi are used after an imperative instead of me and te (unless before y and en, in which case apostrophe replaces hyphen) : Donnez-TJioj des pommes. Give me some apples. Donnez- m' en. Give me some (of them). 4. When a verb has two objects, they are usually ar- ranged thus after it: te (la, les) before moi (toi, lui, nous, vous, leur). me (te, lui, nous, vous, letir) before y (en). y before en. EXERCISE XXVn un accord [cenakoir] agreement deranger [derase] disturb ane encre [a;kr] ink faire son possible ffeirsS im exercice [egzsrsis] exercise posibl] do one's (his, etc.) la, feuille Cfoeij] leaf, sheet {of best paper) prendre [praidr] take; prenez! un instant [esta] instant, mo- Qsrsne] take! ment remplir [[rapliir] fill le participe [partisip: participle d'accord in agreement la regie [reigl] nJe ^^^3 p^^ ^^^^ le stylo(graplie) [stilo] ^^ . . . plus Cno ply] no more, fountam pen ^^^ l^j^g^^ droit Cdrwa] right ne... que only malade [malad] ill fa [sa] contraction (familiar) aliens I [alo] come! {interjec- of cela tion) moi-meme [mwamjEsm] my- Bedepecher(de)[sadepeSe] hurry self mon cher [mojeir] old man, my dear fellow sapristil [sapristi] good fp-acious! 126 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 113 A. 1. On nous a dit de pr6parer nos le9ons et nous faisons notre possible pour les bien preparer. 2. Le professeur nous a laiss6s ici afin qu'on ne nous derange pas. 3. Nous avons pri^ nos camarades de nous laisser tranquilles. Nous avons peu de temps et il faut travailler ferme. 4. Quel est le livre que vous avez h la main droite ? Est-ce votre livre de f ran9ais ? 5. — Oui, c'est ma grammaire frangaise. — Donnez-la-moi un instant, s'il vous plait. 6. II faut que je tache de trouver la regie de I'ac- cord des participes. La voici. 7. — Moi aussi. Laissez-moi la regarder un instant, je vous prie. EUe n'est pas facile. 8. — Maintenant c'est de I'encre que je cherche. II n'y en a plus dans mon stylo [stilo]. En avez-vous? 9. — Oui, j'en ai. — Alors donnez-m'en, s'il vous plait: assez pour remplii mon stylo. 10. — Voilfi,. — Je vous remercie beaucoup. 11. Allons, d6p6chons-nous. Travaillons un peu plus vite. Ne causons plus. 12. Vous me faites perdre trop de temps. — Soyez tranquille, nous finirons avant que le professeur soit pr^t. 13. — Sapristi! J'ai perdu mon cahier. — Qa (Cela) ne fait rien! Prenez de ce papier-ci. 14. Prenez-en assez, je vous prie, mais n'en prenez pas trop, parce que j'ai besoin de quel- ques feuilles moi-mlme. 15. — Merci bien. Voulez-vous que j'en donne aussi &, mon camarade Henri? 16. — Oui, donnez-lui-en, mais ne lui en donnez pas trop. 17. — N'ayez pas peur, mon cher. Je prendrai seulement ces quelques feuilles {ou je ne prendrai que ces quelques feuilles). B. (1) Substitute personal pronouns for the direct and indirect object nouns: 1. Prenez du papier, je vous prie. 2. Ne prenez pas trop d'encre. 3. Chassez ces enfants du jardin. 4. Priez votre oncle de venir nous voir. 5. fieri vez-lui la lettre tout de suite. 6. N'6crivez pas la lettre k votre camarade cette semaine. 7. Nemettez pas la cuiller dans votre tasse. 8. Met- tez les cuillers k nos places, s'il vous plait. 9. Pr6sentez-moi votre ami. 10. Pr6sentez mon ami a votre pfere, je vous prie. 11. Donnez le roman a votre tante. 12. Ne donnez pas les romans aux enfants. 13. Finissons le devoir vendredi soir. 14. Ne finissons pas ces devoirs samedi matin. 15. Ne d6- rangeons pas nos camarades pendant qu'ils travaillent. 16. Ne § 113 LESSON XXVII 127 d^rangez pas le professeur. 17-18. Demandez la rSgle dea participes k votre voisin; — h votre voisine. (2) Give orally or write on the board the 1st and 2d -plural imperative, affirmative and negative, of commencer, se lever, se coucher, voir, aller, se depScher, prendre, remplir, partir {ob- serve that partir differs from finir in the imperative exactly as in the present indicative), sortir, attendre. (3) Complete the foUovnng by adding a noun object, and then re- peating the phrase with the proper pronoun: 1. Cherchez {Model: Cherchez le livre; cherchez-le) . 2. Ne cherchez pas . 3. Firdssez . 4. Ne finissez pas . 5. Vendez . 6. Ne vendez pas . 7. Qu'il 6coute . 8. Chante . 9. Ne chante pas . 10. Choisissez . 11. Ne choisissez pas . 12. Donnons . C. ^crivez en frangais: 1. I regret to tell (i) his mother that he is ill. 2. I regret that he is ill. 3. He will be delighted (enchante) to see you. 4. He will be delighted that you brought him some money. 5. We want to learn to skate and to ride horseback. 6. My father wants me to learn {pres. subj. 1st pers., apprenne) music. 7. Allow me to tell you my name {use s'appeler: see Lesson IX, A). 8. Must (Faut-il que) we begin to speak French immediately? 9. They wiU have to (II faudra qu'ils) let her alone (= leave her quiet). 10. She wants them to let her alone, but they don't want to let her alone. 11. Introduce me, please (s'il vous plait or je vous prie) to your friend. 12. I beg you to introduce me to him (a lui). 13. Introduce him to me, please. 14. Although he has a lot of money, he does not travel. 15. Although I thanked him, he did not answer me. 16. Leave me alone so that (pour que) I may finish my work before dinner. 17. We must (II faut que) go to bed early and I must get up to-morrow before sun- rise. 18. Although he does his best, he hasn't succeeded in learning to pronounce French * very well {after verb). D. Dict^e: Legon XXIV, A, (1). * We say parler fran; ais, but pionoacer le fran$ais, comprendre le fran- cais, appreadre le frassais. 128 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §§ 114-116 LESSON XXVIII 114. Conditional of donner, finir, vendre I should give, etc. J should finish, etc. I should sell, etc. donner ats [don(9)rE3 donner ais [don(a)r£] donner ait IjioniajiE] donner ions [donarjo] donner iez [donarje] donner oien< [don(a)r8] vendr ais [yadiE] vendr ais [vadre] vendr ait [vadre] vendr ions nvadrio] vendr iez [yadTie] vendr aient [vadrs] finir ais [fin ire] finir ais [finire] finir ait [finire] finir ions [finir jo] finir iez [finirje] finir aien< [finirs] Note. — For the pronunciation of the conditional of donner and of the future and conditional of etre (§ 115) and of faire (§ 117), see the note to § 90; but observe that the a is generally sounded in the first and second plural of the conditional tense. 115. Conditional of avoir, &tre I should have, etc. I should be, etc. aur ois [ore] aur ions [orjo] ser ais [s (a)rE] ser ions [sarja] aur ais [ore] aur iez [orje] aur ait [ore] aur aient [ore] ser ais [a (a)re] ser iez [sorje] ser art [s(9)re] ser aien< [s (8)r£] 116. Conditional Sentences. 1. The conditional is used to express what would happen (result) in case something else were to happen (condition): S'il avait le temps {condition), il If he had time (Had he time, etc.), finirait sa legon {resuU). he would finish his lesson. 2. A ' result ' clause in the conditional (English should or would) regularly has the 'if' clause in the imperfect indica- tive, whatever be the corresponding English form: Si j'etudiais bien (condition), le If I studied (or if I were to s., or maitre serait content (result). were I to s., or should I s.) well, the teacher would be glad. 3. A 'result' clause in the future requires the 'if clause in the present indicative, whatever be the corresponding English form: § 117 LESSON XXVIII 129 S'il est ici demain {condition), If he is {or be, or will be, or should je lui donnerai I'argent (resuU). be) here to-morrow, I shall give him the money. N.B. — Neither the future nor the conditional may be used after si in the clause that expresses the supposition. 117. Future and Conditional of faire (irreg.) and aller firreg.) fer ai [f (a)re] fer ais [f (3)rs] ir ai [ire] ir ais [irs] fer as [f (9)ra], etc. fer ais [f Ca)rs], etc. ir as [ira], etc. ir ais [ire], etc. EXERCISE XXVIII r Angleterre /. [laglate;r] Eng- land la bicyclette [bisikkt] bicycle la cathedrale Qcatedral] cathe- dral le chateau [Sato] chateau, coun- try mansion r Espagne /. Qespap] Spain le fleuve [floeiv] river {that flows into the sea) le garf on [garsS] waiter la langue [lajgll language, tongue le monument [monyma] build- ing, etc., of interest le paysage [peizais] landscape la riviere [rivJEir] river {thai flows into another stream) la vallee [vale] valley le vignoble [vipobl] vineyard ignorant [ipora] ignorant siir [syir] certain colter [kute] cost ezpliquer [sksplike] expIaiQ se mettre [sa metr] place oneself je pense bien! I should think so! revoir [ravwair] see again traverser [traverse] cross se trouver [sa truve] be, be situ- ated un jour some day & temps [a ta] in time tout le monde [tulmoid] every- body sans [sa] but for, without A. 1. Si vous alliez faire un grand voyage, oh iriez-vous? 2. — J'irais en France d'abord. Puis, si j'avais le temps et I'argent, j'irais voir I'ltalie, I'Espagne et I'Angleterre. 3. Ce sont les pays les plus int^ressants de I'Europe. 4. Sans la guerre, je serais d6ji all6 en Europe, mais k present, m^me (even) si j'avais le temps, je n'aurais pas assez d'argent. 5. Les voyages cofitent beaueoup plus char qu'avant la guerre. 6. Si 130 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 117 les billets coAtaient moins cher, j'irais passer les prochainea vacances en France. 7. — Si vous 6tiez en France, que feriez- vous? 8. — J'irais voir les plus jolies villes, comme Rouen, Chartres, Blois, Tours. 9. A Rouen et k Chartres, je visi- terais les belles cath6drales. 10. A Blois et a Tours j'irais voir les beaux chateaux et je me promenerais k bicyclette dans la jolie campagne. 11. Toute cette valine de la Loire est charmante. 12. Si vous aviez vu une fois les jolis paysages et les belles routes, vous regretteriez beaucoup de ne pas y passer vos vacances tous les ans. 13. — Y a-t-il d'autres villes int^ressantes a voir? 14. — Je pense Men. Si nous avions le temps je vous parlerais aussi de Marseille, la ville de Monte-Cristo, de Bordeaux, la ville du vin de Bordeaux, de Lyon, la grande ville industrieUe, de Nimes et d'Arles et d' Avignon [avijio], qui sont si riches en beaux monuments du pass6. 15. Et nous regarderions aussi les beaux champs de bl6, les vignobles, les arbres fruitiers, et les jolies rivieres qu'on traverse souvent en voyageant par le train ou en auto. 16. Enfin, j'aimerais beaucoup revoir les jolis paysages de la France. 17. Si je suis assez riche, j'irai en France I'^t^ prochain. Soyez-en slir. 18. — Bon, je vous accompagnerai. B. (1) a. Point out in A each illustration of § 116, 2. b. Change these conditions to the present when possible, and the other tenses correspondingly; for example: Si vous faites un grand voyage, oil irez-vous . . ., etc. (2) Supply the proper form (two when possible, see § 116, 2, 3) of each verb in parenthesis: 1. (dormir) Si vous pendant la classe le professeur ne ' pas trop content. 2. (aller) Si je en France, je ' la cath^drale de Notre-Dame a Paris. 3. (pleuvoir) S'il aujourd'hui nous ne ' pas notre excursion. 4. (marcher) Si notre automobile bien, nous * k Blois avant midi. 5. (etre) Si le chateau ne pas ferm6, on nous ^ d'y entrer. 6. (fetre) Si ce cha- teau en Am6rique, tout le monde ' le voir. 7. (faire) Que vous s'il ' trop froid pour sortir? ' («tre). ' (visiter). > (faire). « (arriver) • (permettre). • (aUer). ' ffairei. Chateau des Papes, Avignon La Maison carree, NImes § 117 LESSON xxvni 131 (3) Complete the following by an infinitive (vrith or without a preposition) or the subjunctive of the verb in parenthesis, as the case demands: 1. (vous voir) Je suis charm6 . 2. (faire) Je suis content qu'il enfin son travail. 3. (se d^p^cher) Dites-lui qu'il faut . 4. (se d6p^cher) II faut que nous si nous voulons ^ le train de deux heures. 5. (rem- plir) Voulez-vous mon verre d'eau? 6. (remplir) Vous ne voulez pas que le gargon votre verre? 7. (tacher) (le faire) lis peuvent avant midi. 8. (tacher) (le faire) Faudra-t-il que nous tout de suite? 9. (se d6- p^cher) Bien que nous , nous n'arriverons pas a temps. 10. (remplir) J'appeUerai le garQon pour qu'il votre verre. 11. (remplir) Donnez votre encre k Pierre afin qu'il son stylo. 12. (commencer) (6crire) II faudra que le professeur nous explique la le§on avant que nous le devoir. 13. (perdre) ficoutez bien, mes amis; il ne faut pas que voua votre temps a causer. 14. (entendre) Dites-lui de venir se mettre ici pour qu'U mieux. 15. (d^ranger) Nos camarades ont ferme la porte afin que nous ne les — — pas. 16. (se lever) II faudra que nous avant qu'il ^ jour. 17. (etre) Je vais me coucher tout de suite bien que mon devoir ne pas fini. C. Ecrivez en frangais: 1. If I went to (en) Europe, I should go to England, France, Spain and Italy. 2. I should spend more time in France than in England, because I wish to learn to understand and speak French. 3. If I had (the) time I should learn French before leaving America (I'Amerique). 4. You (On) enjoy yourself much more if you speak the language of the country. 5. When I get (arriver) to France, I shall have lessons every day if it is possible. 6. If I had a French lesson every day, (and if I heard French spoken (use present infinitive) all the time), I should quickly learn to speak (it le) and understand it, shouldn't I? 7. If you are going to travel you must (il faut) also read the history of the coun- tries you will visit. 8. The ignorant traveler doesn't ha v^^, very good time. 9. He sees only (ne • . . que) toi^ji-ns and hotela ind restaurants and, taxicabs. . . : » (prendre). ' (faire). 132 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 117 D. (1) Conjugate in the present indicative: faire, aller, pou- poir, vouloir, partir. (2) Conjugate in the past indefinite indicative: avoir, 6tre, roir, sortir, s'amuser, ouvrir. (3) Conjugate in the imperfect: murir, dormir (see Lessons XIII, B, 2 and XXVI, E, 2) faire, reussir. (4) Conjugate in the future and conditional: etre, avoir, faire, aller, entendre. (5) Conjugate in the present subjunctive: Stre, avoir, remplir, faire, entendre, partir. Note. — Sortir, partir, servir, dormir, differ from finir in the present subjunctive as in the present and imperfect indicative and imperative, i.e., by leaving out the -iss of the (participle) stem. See Lesson XXVI, E. E. Repondez aux questions suivantes: 1. Est-ce que vous avez voyag6 en Europe? 2. En Am^rique? 3. Comment? (Par le train? en auto? k bicyclette? etc.) 4. QueUes viUes am^ri- caines avez-vous vues? 5. Quelle ville aimez-vous le mieux? 6. A-t-elle des musles? 7. Y avez-vous entendu de la lx)nne musique? 8. Y etes-vous aU6 au theatre? 9. Est-ce que cette ville a de jolis pares? ' 10. Quels pays de I'Europe voulez- vous visiter? 11. Est-ce que tout le monde peut voyager maintenant? 12. Pourquoi pas? 13. Avez-vous I'intention de voyager un jour? 14. Oil irez-vous? 15. Que ferez- vous en France? 16. Comment sont les routes en France? 17. Ferez-vous des excursions &, bicyclette? 18. Dites-moi quels sont les noms des grandes villes de France. 19. Cherchez sur la carte comment s'appellent les grands fleuves. 20. QueUes villes se trouvent dans la valine de la Loire? 21. Est-elle agr^able, cette valine? 22. Sur quel fleuve la ville de Paris se trouve-t-eUe? 23. Est-ce que la France est un pays agri- cole? 24. Que voit-on dans les champs? 25. A-t-on raison d'appeler ce pays « la belle France »? 26. Oil trouve-t-on les belles cath^rftles? 27. Oil iriez-vous voir les beaux cMteaux? 28. Oil voit-on les beaux monuments du pasa6? 118-119 LESSON xxrx 133 LESSON XXIX 118. Use of Article. 1. Names of continents, countTies, provinces, and large European islands, regularly take th^ definite article: La France est im beau pays. France is a beautiful country. Nous partons pour le Canada. We are leaving for Canada. n demeure aux Etats-TJnis. He lives in the United States. La Sardaigne est une ile italienne. Sardinia is an Italian island. But non-European islands do not regularly take the article: Terre-Neuve est une grande lie. Newfoundland is a large island. Cuba est la plus grande des Cuba is the largest of the Antilles. Antilles. 2. The artioie is omitted after the preposition en = in, to; it is also omitted after de in certain constructions, notably when de means from (after verbs of motion) or denotes of in an adjectival phrase: Mon pere est en Angleterre. My father is in England. Nous aliens en France. We are going to France. II vient d'ltalie. He comes from Italy. Les vins d'Espagne. Spanish wines. 119. 1. Place 'where,' 'where to,' is usually denoted bj en before names of continents, European countries singular and feminine countries singular outside of Europe; other countries usually take the preposition k + the definite article: n est en (va en) Europe. He is in (goes to) Europe. n est au (va au) Canada. He is in (goes to) Canada. 2. Cities, towns, etc., usually take S, without any article, n est a (va a) Paris. He is in or at (goes to) Paris. But: A la Nouvelle-Orieaas. At New Orleans. 134 A FRENCH GRAMMAK 120. Present Indicative of savoir, to know (irreg.) I know, etc. S 120 je sais [se] tu sais [se] il sait [se] nous savons [savo3 vous savez [save] ils savent [saivj EXERCISE XXIX rAllemagne /. [lalinaji] Ger- many une a-aberge [obsrs] inn, country hotel I'Autriche /. [lotriS] Austria la chevre [jsivr] goat la chose [Joiz] thing la Corse Qcors] Corsica la cuisine Qcqizin] cooking I'est m. [Isst] east la montagne [[inataji] mountain le mouton [mutoH sheep le nord [noir] north I'ouest QwEst] west la prairie [preri] meadow la mine [rqin] ruin la Suisse [sqis] Switzerland le sol [sol] soil le sud [syd] south ia vache [vaj] cow chaque [Jak] each doux [du], douce [dus] sweet, gentle, soft etranger [etraje] etrangere [etrasEir] foreign haut [o] high, tall japonais [sapons] Japanese large [lars] broad, wide vrai [vrs] true savoir [savwair] know, know how, be able autrefois [otrofwa] formerly quelquefois [kdkafwa] some- times mal [mal] badly malheureusement [ m a 1 oe- r0!zma] unfortunately, un- luckily moins de [mwede] less than partout [partu] everywhere pas du tout [padytu] not at all surtout [syrtu] especially t6t [to] early, soon tandis que [tadi(s)k3] while, whereas A. (1) Supply the article or leave it out as the case may be, and put in the proper preposition when one is needed: 1. Savez- vous qu'en parlant de France, on I'appelle souvent « belle France))? 2. On I'appelle aussi « douce Frances. 3. On dit aussi: « Chaque homme a deux pays, le sien {his own) et France ». 4. Au sud de France, se trouve Espagne; k Test, AUemagne et Suisse; au nord Belgique (/.). et au nord-ouest ^ — Angleterre. 5. Pour § 120 LESSON xxrs 133 aller Italic il faut traverser les Alpes, qui sont de hautes montagnes. 6. En partant Paris le matin en chemin da fer, en moins de deux jours on est Rome. 7. Nous par» tons demain pour Italic; aux Alpcs nous quitterons le sol dc France et nous passerons Italia. 8. De Italic nous irons Sicilc ct dc la nous passerons Corse pour visiter la maison de Napoleon. 9. Voici un de nos amis qui vient dc Corse et d(c) Espagne. 10. Mal- heurcusement nous ne pouvons pas aUcr Europe tous lea ans. 11. Quelquefois nous passons les vacances fitats- Unis ou a fairc dcs voyages Canada. 12. Un jour nous irons peut-etre Mexiquc (m.), ct jc vcux voir aussi Asie, Japon et Chine. 13. Je voudrais {conditional of vouloir) passer le printemps Japon. 14. — Savez- vous Ic japonais? — Non, jc nc le sais pas du tout. 15. Je sais un peu de fran9ais, d'aUemand, et d'italicn parce que j'ai 6t6 plusicurs fois dans ces pays-la. 16. Mes parents savcnt asscz bien I'espagnol. 17. lis ont pass6 quelques ann^cs Mexique, mais Am6rique nous savons asscz mal les langues 6trangercs. 18. On apprend micux frangais France, aUcmand Allcmagne et italicn Italic. 19. On peut les apprendre aussi a l'6colc Am6rique si Ton * a dc bons profcsseurs. 20. En France tout le moude sait parler frangais, meme les pctits enfants. (2) Review of partitives (§§36, 59). Sup-ply what is lacking: 1. Faites-vous quelquefois excursions a bicyclctte? 2. — Oh, oui. Et je vols joUes choses, surtout France. 3. On trouvc partout bonnes routes et bons chcmins ct on s'arrSte pour dejeuner ou pour diner k pctitcs auberges oil I'on trouvc unc bonne cuisine. 4. De la route on volt beaux bois, champs verts et johcs prairies. 5. Dans les prairies il y a souvent vachcs, chevaux, moutons et chSvrcs. 6. Souvent on passe devant jolics maisons dc campagne et chateaux, et dc (from) temps en (to) temps on voit ruincs int6ressantcs. 7. Nous n'avons pas ruincs int^rcssantes en Am^rique, n'est-ce * Note. The I of I'on has the effect of making the sound more agreeable after si. It has no other significance here. 136 A FRENCH GRAMMAB § 120 pas! 8. — Non, c'est vrai, mais nous avons hautes et belles montagnes, beaux fleuves et larges plaines. 9. Dans le Far- West il y a aussi ruines tris int6ressantes. 10. — Oui, mais on ne peut pas aller voir tout cela k bicyclette. 11. Notre pays est trop grand. II faut plus de quatre jours de chemin de far pour le traverser. 12. Et on volt peu de bicy- clettes fitats-Unis, tandis qu'on voit beaucoup, beau- coup France. 13. avez-vous une? — Non, je ne ai pas main tenant. 14. Autrefois je faisais souvent excursions ^ bicyclette et je avals touj ours une. 15. Mais maintenant j'ai plus travail et moins temps. B. (1) Supply the preposition meaning 'to,' 'into': Europe [cerop], France, Am^rique [amerik], Angleterre [agloteir], Italie [itali], Allemagne [almaji], Autriche [otriS], (le) Japon [sapo], (la) Chine [Jin], Russie [rysi], (le) Danemark [dan- mark], les Eltats-Unis [etazyni], (le) Canada, (la) Pologne [poloji], Espagne [espap] (fern.), Afrique [afrik] (fern.), (la) Syrie [siri], (les) Indes [eid], (la) Normandie [normadi], (la) Provence [provais], (la) Touraine [turen], (la) Corse Qkors]. (2) Learn: A Paris, k Paris Sur un p'tit cheval gris, A Rouen, k Rouen, Sur un p'tit cheval blanc Au trot, au trot, au trot, Au galop, au galop, au galop! * C Traduisez rapidement: 1. If I had any. 2. If he were here. 3. If the postman should not take his letter. 4. If she were to put on her prettiest blue dress. 5. If the postman were to bring it to me. 6. If you should get up too late, what would you do? 7. Would you regret it (le) if you were to sleep too late? 8. If she were to put on her prettiest dress, she would be the prettiest girl (jeune fille) in (de) the world. 9. If you should run too fast you would arrive too soon (t6t). * To Paris, to Paris — On a little gray horse; — To Rouen, to Rouen — On a little white horse — Trot (at the trot), trot, trot, — Gallop, gallopr gallop I S 120 LESSON xxrx 137 10. You would like to (aimer) look at the interesting ruins if you took (faire) a bicycle trip in France. 11. If you will ( = are willing to, vouloir bien) go with me to Spain next summer, I shall pay for your ticket. 12. If you will pay for my ticket, I shall be dehghted to go with you. a. What two simple tense forms are possible in the ' if ' clause of a French sentence? Are we as rigidly limited in English? b. Does the English word ' will ' always call for a future form in French? {see last two sentences of C). Explain and give three examples in French. D. (1) The texts of A, (1) and (2) should be read aloud and understood and then worked over thoroughly by questions and answers. (2) Dict^e: Lesson XXVII, A. E. (1) Conjugate in the future and conditional forms: avoir, etre, faire (note the pronunciation of the conditional, singular: [sasre], Csafre]), prendre (regular), dire (regular), mettre (regu- lar), remplir, courir [see Lesson XXIII, C, (3), 7], remercier, appeler, se depecher, se lever. (2) How does the sound value of the spelling ai differ in the, endings of the future and conditional? Of what does the ending of the conditional form remind you? On the basis of XXII, B, (5), how would you say this form is made? VOCABULARY REVIEW No. 4 (1) Donnez les contraires de: facile, prochain, commencer trouver, mal, malheureusement, sud, est, la montagne, t6t, le commencement. (2) Donnez les synonymes de: charm6, ticher de, soir6e, vouloir, causer, demander. (3) Supply articles so as to show gender, and use in a sentence or a phrase: glace, roman, soiree, r^gle, feuille, valine, ohiteau, bieyclette, vache, mouton, ch^vre, montagne, prairie, terre, sol, guerre, fin, billet, fleuve, nord, carte, exercice, camarade, Bhemin de fer. 138 A FRENCH GBAMMAR § 120 (4) Supply the missing words: 1. Pour bien parler il faut savoir les de la grammaire. 2. Nous avons Fintention faire une a bicyclette dans la de la Loire. 3. Nous voyons des betes (farm animals) dans les champs; des et des et des et des . 4. Men stylo n'^crit pas; il faut que je le . 5. Je fais mon pour apprendre a bien prononcer. 6. Vous prononcez tres bien; je vous en . 7. Permettez-moi de mon ami, M. Du- pont. 8. de faire votre , monsieur. 9. II y a de la glace sur le ; nous pouvons . 10. Avez-vous besoin d'encre? 11. Merci (= No, thank you), j'ai un — •. 12. Avant de monter dans le train il faut prendre un . 13. Avant de prendre le train il faut payer son avec de 1' . 14. Le dessert vient a la d'un diner. (5) Fit the definitions to words: 1. Faire quelque chose tres vite. 2. La personne qui fait la cuisine. 3. La personne qui vient d'un autre pays. 4. Un petit hotel de campagne. 5. AUer h travers de. 6. La grande 6gUse. 7. Les champs pour les vignes. 8. Faire tout ce qu'on peut. 9. II ne se porte pas bien (se porter = to be [_of health'}). 10. Prier quelqu'un de venir chez vous. 11. Dire merci k quelqu'un. (6) Supply the proper preposition: essayer faire quelque chose permettre ■ quelqu'un r^ussir faire quelque chose faire une chose regretter avoir fait quelque prier quelqu'un faire quel- chose que chose tAcher faire quelque chose apprendre faire quelque se d^p^cher faire une chose chose dire quelqu'un — — faire s'amuser faire une chose une chose commencer faire une demander quelqu'un chose faire une chose penser faire une chose (7) Give the French equivalent: wit (intelligence), the land- scape, the doubt, the mountain, the ruin, the river (large); next, free, certain, each, ready; to ring the bell, to be named; especially, everywhere, formerly, whereas, only; everybody. §§ 121-123 LESSON XXX 139 121. SiNGTILAR le mien [mjs], m. la mienne [mJEn], /. le tien la tienne le sien la sienne le notre la notre le v6tre la v6tre le leur la leur LESSON XXX The Possessive Pronouns ?miiie [tJE], TO. [tjsn],/. [sjg], TO. [sjm], /. [no:tr], m. 1 [noitr],/. / [vo:tr], TO. \ [voitr],/. / [loe:r], to. \ Doe:r],/. / yours Plural les miens [mjg], m. \ les miennes [mjaill,/. J lestiens [tjg], m. \ lestiennes [tJEn],/. p^^"^^' les siens [sje], to. \ his, hers, les siennes [sJEn], /. / its, one's own les n6tres [noitrj, ours les v6tres [voitre], yours les leurs [Ice;r], theirs 122. Agreement. Possessive pronouns agree in gender and number with the object possessed, and in person with the possessor: J'ai mes livres; elle a les siens. I have my books; she has hers. 123. Use of Possessive Pronouns. 1. After etre, mere ownership is regularly expressed by a -(- a disjunctive personal pronoun, while the use of a possessive pronoun imphes distinction of ownership, as when a notion of com- parison is expressed or suggested. Cette montre est a moi. This watch is mine. Cette montre est la mienne. This watch is mine (not yours). 2. De and a + le mien, etc., contract as usual (cf. §§ 35, 46): Je parle de son ami et du mien. I speak of his friend and of mine. 3. Since le sien, la sienne, etc., mean his, hers, its, one's the context determines which sense is intended: U a ses livres; elle a les siens. He has his books; she has hers. 140 A FRENCH GHAMMAB 5124 4. Observe the idioms: Vn de mes amis, tin Paiisien de mes amis. A friend of mine. A Parisian, a friend of mine. 124. Present Indicative of dire, to say, tell (irreg.), and of voir, to see (irreg.) : I say, etc. 1 see, etc. je dis [di] nous disons [dizo] je vois [vwa] nous voyons [vwajS] tu dis [di] vous dites [dit] tu vois [vwa] vous voyez [vwaje] il dit [di] ils disent [diiz] il voit [vwa] ils voient [vwa] EXERCISE XXX le compagnon [kSpajio] com- panion la comparaison [k3parsz3] com- parison le compartiment [kSpartima] compartment le couloir [kulwair] corridor, pas- sageway la coutume [kutym] custom un ezemple [egzapl] example un individu [edividy] fellow, per- son, individual {often con- temptuous) le milieu [mili0] middle la montre [moitr] watch Tor m. [lo:r] gold la personne [person] person {man or woman) la poche [poj] pocket le revolver [revolveir] revolver la voiture [vwaty.-r] carriage le voleur [voice ;r] thief, robber canadien [kanadje] Canadian commode [komod] convenient dangereux [da3r0] dangerous desagreable [dezaflreabl] un- pleasant rare [rair] infrequent, rare approcher (de) [aproje] ap- proach fallait [fale] was necessary {imperf. of falloir) pouvait [puve] was able, could {imperf. of pouvoir) savait [save] knew {imperf. of savoir), sachiez [sajje] {pres. subj.) sauter [sote] jump tirer [tire] pull out actuellement [aktqelma] at present A. (1) 1. Un Canadien * de mes amis qui voyage actuellement en Europe, m'a 6crit une lettre int^ressante. 2. Dans cette lettre il fait les comparaisons les plus int^ressantes entre lea coutumes des Europ6ens [oeropeS] et les n6tres. 3. Par • For the use of capital letter here, see { 21. 5 124 LESSON XXX 141 exemple, les chemins de fer en Europe sont diff^rents des n6tres. i. Les voitures am^ricaines et canadiennes sont plus grandea et plus longues que les leurs, et les leurs ont plusieurs comparti- ments. 5. Dans ces compartiments il y a de la place pour six a huit personnes, et on peut passer d'un compartiment dans ['autre. 6. Les voitures am^ricaines ont un couloir au milieu. En Europe le couloir est sur un c6t6 de la voiture. 7. Dans les vieilles voitures il n'y avait pas de couloir. Une fois dans un compartiment, il fallait y rester. 8. Ces comparti- ments ^talent assez commodes, mais j'aime mieux les voitures modernes. 9. On pouvait s'y trouver avec un compagnon de voyage d^sagr^able ou mime dangereux. (2) 1. Un jour mon ami s'est trouv6 seul dans un comparti- ment avec un homme qui ne savait pas trop bien la difference entre le mien et le tien. 2. Mon ami avait une jolie montre en or. Son compagnon la voit. 3. Le train approche d'une petite ville et marche moins vite. 4. L'individu tire de sa poche un revolver et dit k mon ami: Votre montre est plus jolie que la mienne. Donnez-la-moi. Je vous donnerai la mienne afin que vous sachiez I'heure. 5. — Que dites-vous? demande mon ami. Voulez-vous me {from me) prendre ma montre? 6. — Oui, dit le voleur en approchant son revolver de la tite de mon ami. 7. Alors mon ami a peur. II lui donne sa montre. 8. Le voleur lui donne la sienne et saute du train. B. (1) Complete by a suitable possessive pronoun: 1. La montre de mon ami 6tait en or, 6tait en argent. 2. Leurs voitures sont moins grandes que . 3. II fait une comparaison entre nos chemins de fer et . 4. Leurs voitures k (with) compartiments sont plus commodes que . 5. Votre com- pagnon de voyage est moins dangereux que . 6. La montre du voleur est moins jolie que . 7. Vous 6criviez k votre mere et j'6crivais k . 8. Je saute de mon cheval et elle saute de . 9. Tout homme a deux pays, et la France. 10. Maintenant le voleur a ma montre et . (2) Supply in each case the usual expression of ownership (§ 123, 1): 1. A qui est cette montre? Elle est , 2. A 142 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 124 qui sont ces cMvres? EUes sont . 3. A qui 6tait cette vache? EUe 6tait . 4. A qui sont ces moutons lS,-bas dans la prairie? lis sont . (3) Supply all the possible tense forms in each case in the ' if ' clause or in the result clause: 1. (prendre) S'ils voient votre montre ils vous la . 2. (avoir) Si je trouve un voleur dans mon compartiment je peur. 3. (avoir) Si je voyais un voleur, je peur. 4. (sauter) Si le train approchait d'une gare, le voleur en . 5. (voyager) Vous aimeriez les paysages de France si vous y . 6. (faire) Que vous, si un voleur vous * votre montre en tirant un revolver de sa poche? 7. (vouloir) Si Ton passer d'une voiture dans une autre, on ^ dans le couloir. 8. (vouloir) J'entrerai dans le couloir si je passer dans un autre com- partiment. 9. (s'arreter) Si je faisais une excursion h la cam- pagne, je S, une auberge pour le d6jeuner. 10. (s'arreter) Si vous a une auberge, qu'est-ce que vous ' ? 11. (prendre) Je un potage, du poulet, des haricots verts et un dessert. 12. (traverser) Si vous les Alpes, vous ^ en Italic. (4) Supply below the proper tense forms (present, imperfect, future, past indefinite) and other missing words. The basic time of a is the present. a. 1. (^tre) Je dans le compartiment avec ce voleur- 1^ depuis plus de trois heures. 2. (approcher) Quand nous d'une gare, il me ^ ma montre. 3. (tirer) Quand il son revolver de sa poche, j'aurai peur. 4. (s'arreter) Quand le train , il sautera de la voiture. 5. Nous ° France depuis plus de quatre mois et nous faisons tous les jours des comparaisons entre • coutumes et les . b. 1. Dans nos voyages dans le midi de France nous ' plus de ch&vres que chez nous. 2. (traverser) Nous la Normandie la semaine pass^e; il y * beaucoup de vaches et de gros chevaux. 3. Les chevaux ' plus grands que les . 4. (causer) Je avec mes com- ■ Cdemander). ' (entrer). « (prendre). * (se trouver). ' (demander). • (voyager). ' (voir). » (avoir). « (6tre)c § 124 LESSON XXX 143 pagnons de voyage. 5. (aimer) II y avait quelques individus qui ne pas les Am6ricains, mais ce ^ rare- 6. (dire^ On me souvent que la France et l'Am6rique ^ de bonnes amies depuis plus de cent ans. 7. (r^pondre) Je que ce * vrai, et que les Frangais et les Am6ricains ne * pas ^tre de bons amis. C. (1) Shift A, (1), 7-9, into the present. Note that the verbs that move the story along fall naturally into this form, as do the descriptive imperfect forms. (2) Put A, (2), 3-6, into the past. The direct discourse must be made indirect preceded by que. Then the presents that tell the story take what form (the past participle of dire is dit)? What becomes of presents like approche, marche? What happens to est? (3) Change A, (2), 7-8, to the past. Does a peur take a different form from the other three verbs f See Lesson XXI, § 87. (4) a. Note in the vocabulary the imperfects of pouvoir, falloir, savoir: pouvait, fallait, savait. Conjugate pouvait and savait in the singular and plural. We cannot do this for fallait as this verb is used only in the Sd singular of all tense forms. It is called an impersonal verb. What is the present form f the future f the conditional ? b. The present participle of savoir is sachant. Conjugate savoir in the present subjunctive. Is the imperfect indicative formed as you would expect? Compare Lesson XXVI, E. D. Traduisez: 1. This fellow did not know the difference between mine and thine. 2. My friend could not jump from the train. 3. He was afraid of hurting himself. 4. He had to give his watch to the thief who gave him his, saying (en lui disant) : "I am giving you mine so that ( = in order that) you may know when you are hungry. 5. I-wish-you-a-good- appetite (Bon appetit)." 6. Although my friend knows that this fellow was a thief, he still thinks that he was rather (assez) interesting. ' Cetre). * (cesser). lU A FKENCH GRAMMAR §§ 125-129 125. LESSON XXXI The Demonstrative Pronouns ce [so], this, these, that, those, he, she, it, they ceci [sasi], this cela [sala], that celui [salqi], m. celle [seI]. /. this, that (one), the (one), he, she ceox [s0], m. celles [sel], /. ceux-ci [s0si], m. these, those, the ones, they ■) these, celles-ci [sslsi], /. / the latter celui-ci [salqisi], m. "I this (one), celle-ci [selsi], /. J the latter celui-ia [salqi la], m. \ that (one), the ceux-la [s0la], m. 1 those, celle-ia [sella], /. /former celles-la [sella],/. /the former 126. For the use of ce as distinguished from the persona! pronoun il (elle, etc.), see § 97. 127. Ceci = this, and cela = that, are used to denote something pointed out or indicated, but not named. Cela is often contracted into ga in famihar language: Cetoestjoli; je prefere cccj. That is pretty; I prefer this. Pouvez-vous faire cela ? Can you do that? J'aime fa. I like that. 128. Celui, that (one), the (one), he, is used of persons or things, and is regularly followed by a relative clause or a de clause: Celui que j'attendais est arrive. Ceux qui cherchent trouvent. Mes fleurs et celles de Marie. Celles que vous aimez. He whom I expected has arrived. Those who seek find. My flowers and Mary's. The ones (flowers) you Mke. 129. 1. Celui-ci, this, this one, he, and celui-la, that, that one, are used of persons or things already mentioned, to contrast the nearer and the more remote: Voici les deux chaines; gardez Here are the two chains; keep celle-ci et donnez-moi celle-l&. this (one) and give me that (one). 5 129 LESSON XXXI 145 2. The latter is celui-ci, and the former is celui-la, the order of ideas being inverted as compared with Enghsh: Ciceron et VirgUe etaient tous Cicero and Virgil were both cele- deux celebres; celui-ci etait brated; the former was an poete et celui-li orateur. orator and the latter a poet. EXERCISE XXXI un ane [fenain] ass, donkey courant [kura] present partici- le baton [bato] stick pie of courir la caresse [karss] caress ee demander [sadmade] wonder le chien [Sjg] dog lu [ly] read (pas< part, of lire) le coup [ku] blow rapporter[raporte]bring(back) le domestique [domsstik] servant renverser [raverse] upset un Stranger [oenetrase] foreigner voulu [vuly] past participle of le maitre [me:tr^ master vouloir la patte [pat] foot (of animal) la piece [pjes] room ^"*^* (^^^ ^°^^'i ^ ™^y' ^ la vaisselle [vsseI] dishes much loin Owe] far mecontent (de) [mekota] dis- par-ci par-li [parsiparla] here satisfied (with) and there miserable [mizerabl] wretched pxes [pre] near {adv.) avoir beau [avwair bo] in vain qu'est-ce? [kes] what is it? (JoUowed by infinitive) caresser [karsse] caress pres de [prsda] near (prep.) A. 1. II y avait una fois un homme qui avait un ane et un petit chien. 2. II caressait celui-ci et k celui-15, il donnait beaucoup de travail k faire. 3. Le chien s'amusait toute la journee. II courait par-ci par-l^. 4. A table il mangeait avec son maitre. 5. II donnait la patte k tout le monde et tout le monde le caressait. 6. Le pauvre ^ne voyait tout cela, et il en 6tait trSs mecontent. 7. Un jour il se demande: — « Pour- quoi ne me donne-t-on pas autant de bonnes choses qu'^ ce miserable petit chien? 8. Pourquoi donne-t-on toutes les caresses k celui qui ne travaille pas et tous les coups de bdton k celui qui travaille toujours? 9. Je cesserai de travailler. J'entrerai dans la salle k manger de men maitre quand il sera k table avec ses amis. 10. Je donnerai la patte k tous ceux qui 146 A FRENCH GBAMMAB § 129 y seront et ils me donneront des caresses ». 11. L© pauvre ane tAche de faire cela; il entre dans la salle k manger. 12. II salue ceux qui y sont; il chante de sa belle voix. 13. H veut donner la patte a son maitre et k ses amis. 14. Mais en levant la patte, il renverse la table, il fait tomber la vaisselle. 15. Les dames ont peur, elles orient. Le mattre se leve de table et appelle ses domestiques. 16. II leur dit de donner au pauvre ane, non pas des caresses, mais beaucoup de coups de baton. 17. On lui donne des coups de baton et des coups de pied aussi et le pauvre ane sort de la piece en courant. 18. Un ane a beau vouloir cesser d'etre ane; il a beau tacher d'etre chien; il reste toujours ane. (Adapted from La Fontaine, Fables, IV, 5). B. (1) Supply the demonstrative pronouns, suffixing -ci and -Ik when needed. 1. Cette chevre-ci est blanche, — — est noire. 2. J'ai dln6 hier dans une meilleure auberge que . 3. J'ai deux poches; dans j'ai mon argent et dans ma montre. 4. Get individu-ci s'appelle Dupin, s'appelle Durand. 5. Regardez ces deux enfants; ■ se d6peche de finir son tra- vail, ne fait rien. 6. Donnez-moi une autre feuille de papier; n'est pas propre. 7. que vous me donnez actuellement est sale aussi. 8. Voila mes deux compagnons de voyage; s'amuse a regarder le paysage, tslche de me faire parler frangais. 9. qui est dans le couloir est un stranger qui arrive d'Espagne. 10. Dites-moi qui sont ces individus-la. ci? Non, -Ik. 11. Voulez-vous m'ex- pliquer - — — ? 12. Oui, mais d'abord parlous un peu de . 13. Mon camarade a perdu son stylo. ne fait rien; nous sommes prets k lui donner ci. 14. Pendant que cet individu-ci me prend ma montre, ■ me prend mon argent. 15. Ils ont pris ma montre et du monsieur qui m'accom- pagnait. 16. A qui est cette montre maintenant? 17. Quelle montre? que I'individu a prise. 18. Je ne sais pas, mais que j'ai a la main est a moi. (2) Replace the dash by ce, or il (elle, ils, elles) : 1. Qu'est-ce? est un kne. 2. Et cela? est un chien. 3. sont les chiens de mon pere. 4. est I'ine qui a renvers6 la table. 5. Qui a chass6 I'^ne? 6taient les domestiques. § 129 LESSON XXXI 14.7 6. Que fait cet kne? fait tomber la vaisselle. 7. Oil est le cMen? est dans une autre piece. 8. Qui appelle las domestiques? est le maitre qui les appelle. 9. se l&ve de table pour les appeler. 10. Quel est ce monsieur? est le maitre de Fane et du chien. 11. Quels sont ces individus? sont nos amis. 12. Quel est cet animal? est notre cher ane. 13. est midi. 14. est huit heures. 15. fait beau. 16. pleut. 17. est temps de partir. 18. Quand on est ^ne, est n6cessaire de roster ane. 19. est vrai. (3) When is ' it' expressed by il (elle)? When is ce equivcdent to 'he,' 'she,' 'they'? C. (1) Shift A, 2-6, to the present. Does this harmonize with the forms used in the rest of the anecdote ? If you were to trans- late the whole passage into English in the present, would the ef- fect be satisfactory? What do you conclude about the use of the present form in French in narration as compared with English? This is often called the ' historical ' present, and is far more frequently used in French than in English. (2) Would it be satisfactory to shift to the past indefinite the im,perfects of A: donnait, s'amusait, courait, mangeait, donnait, etait? See Lesson XXI, § 87. Is this answer equally true of voyait (6)? Explain. (3) Beginning with A, 6, tell the story in the past (§ 66, N.B.) to the end of the paragraph. Does the direct discourse (7-10) change? (4) Translate, loith especial attention to demonstrative pro- nouns and participle agreement: 1. Explain this to him; explain that to her; explain this to them, please. 2. Don't think that. You must not (§ 106, 3) think that. 3. These novels are more interesting than those. 4. Which novels? The ones we bought in Canada. 5. Have you read (lu) them? Not (non pas) the ones that are in the drawing room, but I have read several times the one we brought from France. 6. When my father was younger he was very fond of (aimer beaucoup) those of Victor Hugo, but now he reads (lit) oftener Daudet's and Bal- 148 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §§ 130-132 zac's. 7. Whose motor car is that? 8. That one across (de I'autre cote de) the street? It is hers. 9. Mine is on the other side of the street too, a little farther [away]. 10. And those that are nearer belong to (XVII, Vocab.) our schoolmates. D. Conjugate courir {present participle in Vocab.) in the present and imperfect indicative, and the present subjunctive (see Lesson XXVI, E, dormir); and in the past indefinite, future, and conditional (see Lessons XIX, B, (3), XXIX, E). Is the auxiliary avoir or etre? How about marcher? LESSON XXXII 130. The Relative Pronouns qui [ki], who, which, that, whom {after a preposition) que [ka], whom, which, that dont Cdo], whose, of whom, of which o& [u], in which, into which at which, to which, etc. lequel [laksl], m. s., lesquels [leksl], m. pi. \ , , , . , , laquelle [lakel],/. s., lesquelles Cleksl],/. pi. /^^°' ^^°™' ^^"'^' ^^""^ quoi [kwa], what, which 131. Agreement. A relative pronoun, whether variable or invariable in form, is of the gender, number and person of its antecedent: Moi qui eiais (vous qui etiez) Ik. I who was (you who were) there. Les lettres que j'ai apportees. The letters which I have brought. 132. Use of the Relative. 1. The relative of most com- mon use is qui, as subject, and que, as direct object, of a verb (cf. § 75). 2. Qui = whom (of persons only) is also used after a preposition: L'oncle chez qui je demeurais. The uncle with whom I Uved. 3. The force of de + a relative is generally expressed by dont: Les amis dont nous parlions. The friends of whom we spoke. L'gglise dont je vois la tour. The church whose tower I see. § 133 LESSON XXXII 149 4. Ou = dans (or some other preposition of position) + a. relative : La ville ou {or dans laquelle) je The city in which I Uve. demeure. 5. Lequel is often used instead of qui (que, etc.), to avoid ambiguity, and must be used of things after a preposition: Les sceurs de nos amis, lesquelles The sisters of our friends, who sent chez nous a present. (i. e., the sisters) are with us now. 6. Quoi stands after a preposition, rarely otherwise: Voila de quoi je parlais. That is what I was speaking of. 7. The absolute what, which, that which as subject is ce qui, and, as object or predicate, ce que; of what, that of which, is ce dont: Je vois ce qui vous amuse. I see what amuses you. Je sais ce que je sals. I know what I know. Vous savez ce que je suis. You know what I am. Je n'ai pas ce dont j'ai besoin. I haven't what (that which) I need. 8. He who, the one who, etc. = celui qui, etc. J'aime ceux qui m'aiment. I love those who love me. Ma montre est plus jolie que celle My watch is prettier than the one que vous avez. you have. 9. The relative pronoun, often omitted in English, is never omitted in French: Le tableau que j'ai vu hier. The picture I saw yesterday. 133. Present Indicative of connaitre, to know, he ac^ guainted with, etc. (irreg.). / know, etc. je connais [sakons] nous connaissons [nukonEso] tu connais [tykons] vous connaissez Cvukonsse] il connait [ilkonsH ils connaissent [ilkoneis] 150 A FRENCH GRAMMAR (133 EXERCISE XXXn un agent (de police) [oenasa- dpolis] policeman un Allemand [oenalma] German un anniversaire [denanivsrssir] anniversary, birthday un arc [oenark] arch, bow une avenue [avny] avenue la banque Pjaik] bank le bassin [bass] basin le bout [bu] end le depute [depyte] congressman un edifice Qoenedifis] building une eglise [egliiz] church la facade [fasad] front, faQade la figure [figy:r] figure, face la loi [Iwa] law im obelisque [denobelisk3 obelisk la peinture Cpetyir] painting la pierre [pJEir] stone la portiere [portjeir] door, win- dow {of car) le roi [rwa] king la statue [staty] statue agreable Qagreabl] pleasant important Ceporta]] important magnifique [majufikj mag- nificent parisien Qiarizje] Parisian batir [batiir] build connaitre [koneitr] be ac- quainted with, know garder [garde] keep, guard menacer [manase] threaten representer [raprezate] repre- sent, stand for done Cd3(!k)] then, therefore iongtemps [lota] long meme [meim] even que! how! volontiers [volatje] gladly, with pleasure autour de [otuir da] around A. (1) Supply the proper relative word and the demonstra- tive, too, if one is lacking. Substitute suitable forms of the past 1. II y a ici un voleur. 2. Voici la montre 11 — il a 2. 4. On lui a participle for the infinitives in footnotes: Voilsl le voleur nous parlons. m'a \ 3. Voill, la fenetre par pris le revolver avec il m'a '. 5. II a quitt^ la voiture dans {or ) nous voyagions. 6. Nous sommes - — ■ * k la gare a {or ) j'allais descendre. 7. Je vous dirai il a fait apres. 8. II a ^ dans sa poche le revolver il s'^tait ^ pour me menacer. 9. II m'a dit: — Gardez ces quelques francs vous aurez besoin pour payer votre dejeuner. 10. II ne faut pas montrer votre argent et votre ment. montre k — 11. Alors (prendre), (arriver). qui voyagent dans le m^me comparti- ^ dans une ' (sauter). ' (mettre). poche ma montre, * (menacer). • (serrii). VlCTOIRE DE SaMOTHRACE au Louvre, Paris § 133 LESSON XXXII 151 mon pSre m'a * a mon anniversaire. 12. Dana I'autre il a mis mes billets de banque on m'avait * k la banque et j 'avais besoin pour mon voyage. 13. Comma il veut sortir par la portiere, 6tait ^, un agent de police le connait entre d'une autre voiture il voyageait. 14. Mon voleur, a peur, s'arrete un instant. 15. Voilil ce I'a »! (2) Fill in blanks with suitable words {demonstratives, relor- tives, verbs, etc.): ^ \ 1. Je me promene aujourd'hui S, Paris avec un de mes amis'^ Nous voila sur la Place de la Concorde [kSkord]. Connaissez- vous cette 6glise on voit la f agade au bout de la rue Royale- Qrwajal]? 2. — C'est I'^glise de la Madeleine je vous.^ ai parle. 3. Je vous y menerai un jour quand nous plus de temps. 4. Quel est cet autre Edifice de I'autre c6t6 de la Seine? — C'est la Chambre des d6put6s. 5. — Savez-voua on y fait? — Oui, on y fait les lois du pays. 6. — Con- naissez-vous des d^put^s? — Oui, je connais un m'a donn6 deux cartes je vais me servir demain. 7. Voulez- vous m'y accompagner? — Volontiers. Et savez-vous ce qu'est (ce que c'est que) ce grand monument en pierre se trouve au milieu de la Place? 8. ^I^., sur on voit ces figures amusantes? 9. — Oui, la. — C'est un ob^Iisque vient d'figypte [esipt]. 10. — Voil^ de grandes et beUes statues autour de la Place. Savez-vous elles representent? 11. II y a huit. — Elles repr^sentent les villes les plus importantes de la France. 12. Voyez-vous Ah, sur il y a tant de fleurs? 13. — Oui, je me demandais ce c'^tait. — C'est la statue de la belle ville de Strasbourg [strazbuir] en Alsace [alzas]. 14. Vous save3 que la France I'a perdue aprSs la guerre de soixante-dix. Les Parisiens sont si heureux que Strasbourg soit maintenant une ville fran<;aise! 15. Mais en voilS, une autre sur il y a beaucoup de fleurs. 16. — C'est la statue de Lille Qil] ■ a 6t6 longtemps aux mains des AUemands pendant la grande guerre. 17. Dites-moi maintenant quel est ce joli pare d 1 (donner). * (ottvrir). » (perdrel 152 A FRENCH GKAMMAH § 133 I'ouest de la Place, au bout de on voit cet arc magnifique? 18. sont les Champs-Elys^es [Sazelize] dans il y a de trSs Jolies promenades, et I'arc vous parlez est I'Arc de Triomphe [arkdatrioQ, a 6t6 bMi par Napoleon iftnapoleS]. 19. Regardez done (Just look)l Qu'elle est large F©t belle, I'avenue par on en approche! 20. — Oui, en leffet c'est magnifique. Et voilk h Test I'entr^e d'un autre pare. Qu'est-ce? 21. sont les jardins des Tuileries [tqilri] dans il y avait autrefois un beau palais des rois de France. 22. On y trouve arbres, fleurs, jjolies statues et agr^ables promenades. 23. II y a presque itoiijours enfants jouent avec leurs petits bateaux rautour du bassin des Tuileries. 24. Si nous ^ les Tuileries, mous nous trouverions devant le Louvre [lu:vr], dans {or " ) il y a un mus6e c616bre. 25. C'6tait autrefois un palais des rois de France. — Que tout cela est int^ressant! 26. Nous )irons un jour y voir les peintures, n'est-ce pas? — Oh, oui. vQuelle ville int6ressante que ^ Paris! '' IB. RSpondez aux questions suivantes: 1. Qu'est-ce qu'un ane? 2. Est-ce qu'on le caresse? 3. Que lui donne-t-on? 4. Que veut-il avoir? 5. A qui donne-t-on les caresses? 6. Oh. sont le mattre et ses amis? 7. Que fait I'dne? 8. Qu'est-ce qu'il t^che de faire? 9. Est-ce qu'il r^ussit h amuser son maitre? 10. Que fait celui-ci? 11. Et que iont les domestiques? O. (1) Racontez d'dbord oralement, puis icrivez « L'Histoire ■de I'^ne qui veut qu'on le caresse ». (2) Traduisez: 1. With whom are you going to go around (se promener) in (dans) Paris? 2. With my old friend; the «ne with whom I traveled in Italy last year (annee). 3. We (visited the Place de la Concorde yesterday (after past part.), around which are (se trouver) eight fine statues. 4. The ones ■that represent Strasbourg and Lille are covered (XXIV, Vocab.) -with (de) flowers. 5. What I liked best was (c'gtait) Napo- ' (traverser). -* This que is untranslatable. It is often found before nouns in apposition. §§ 134r-135 LESSON XXXIII 153 Icon's Arc de Triomphe which one sees at the end of that magnificent avenue. 6. We want to go to see the Madeleine, the f a5ade of which we could see at the end of (la) rue Royale. 7. We want to visit also the Louvre of which I have often heard (entendre parler), and the Tuileries gardens in which the children like to play with their httle boats. 8. What an interesting city Paris [is]! D. 1. Count from 50 to 59, putting a different noun after each numeral: Cinquante et un monuments, cinquante-deux ave- nues Qsgka!td0zavny], etc. 2. Count from 60 to 69 : soixante [swasait] d6put6s, soixante et un biUets de banque, etc. 3. Count from 70 to 79: soixante-dix agents [swasait diiz asa], soixante-onze figures, etc. E. Dict4e: Lesson XXVIII, A. LESSON xxxin 134. The Interrogative Pronouns qui? [ki], who? whom? que? [ka], what? quoi? [kwa], what? lequel? [bkel], m. s., lesquels? Deksl], m. pi. "I which? which one(s)? laquelle? [lakel], /. s., lesquelles? [leksl], /. pi. /what one(s)? 135. Use of Interrogatives. 1. Qui? = who? whom? is used of persons: Qui Sonne? Qid sont-elles? Who is ringing? Who are they? Dites-moi qui sonne. Tell me who is ringing. ^1 a-t-il frappe? Whom has he struck? De qui parlez-vous? Of whom are you speaking? 2. Whose? denoting ownership simply = a qui? otherwise generally de qui? but never dont: A qui est ce livre? Whose book is this? De qui Stes-vous (le) fils? Whose son are you? 154 A FRENCH GRAMMAB 135 3. Que? = what? stands always as the object or the predicate of a verb: Que vous a-t-il dit? ^'est-ce? What did he tell you? What is it? 4. What? as subject is usually qu'est-ce qui? and what in indirect question is usually ce qui (ce que, etc.) : Qu'est-ce qui vous a interesse? What has interested you? Je ne sais pas ce qui m'a frappe. I do not know what struck me. 0ites-moi ce que vous desirez. Tell me what you desire. 5. Quoi? = what? stands regularly after a preposition, or absolutely, the verb being understood: A quoi pensez-vous? What are you thinking of? Je cherche quelque chose. — Quoi? I am looking for something. — What? 6. Lequel? [laqueUe? etc.) = which? which or what one? agrees in gender with the noun referred to. Both parts of lequel (le and quel) are inflected, and the usual contractions with de and a (cf. §§ 35, 46) take place: LaqueUe des dames est I&? Which of the ladies is there? Auquel des homines parle-t-il? To which of the men does he speak? EXERCISE XXXm une architecture Harjitsktyir] ar- chitecture le banquier [hakje] banker la cite [site] oldest part of cer- tain cities un hdpital [opital] hospital une lie [il] island un interieur ngterjoeir] interior le mari [mari] husband le personnage [persona: s] char- acter (in book), personage la photographie [fotografi] pho- tograph le Pont-Neuf [p5ncef]Pon1rNeuf ('New Bridge') la question [ktatjo] question la scene [sen] scene le sommet [some] top la tour [tuir] tower la traduction [tradyksjo] trans- lation la vue [vy] view bete [be:t] stupid, foolish cent [sa] himdred droit [drwa] right gauche [goij] left gothique [gotik] gothic impossible [gposibl] impossi- ble § 135 LESSON xxxm 155 EXERCISE xxxm (Continued) terrible [tEribl] terrible toumer [tume] turn , r r J T venir de rvaniir da] to have s'approcher de [sapraSeda] ■ ,. r^ u j t. approacn „ ... , epouser [epuzej marry •' jeter [sate] throw ^^ gg^t [anefe] in fact poser [poize] put, ask (of ^^ ^^^ ^^^-j opposite questions) ensemble [osaibl] together ramasser [ramase] pick up pj^g ^g |-piy ^^-j ^^^g ^^^^ se rappeler [saraple] remember, ^^^ ^^g) j-^a] g^ j^^^^y^ g^ recaU mucli rencontrer [rakotre] meet repeter [repete] repeat car [kar] for ressembler (a) [rasable] re- semble, be Uke il y a [ilja] ago A. 1. Pendant notre promenade je pose a mon ami beau- coup de questions sur ce que nous voyons k Paris. 2. Je lui demande, par exemple: — Qu'est-ce que (or qu'est-ce que c'est que) rile de la Cit6 dont vous me parlez si souvent? 3. — L'ile de la Cite est une He de la Seine [sen] ou se trouve la partie la plus ancienne de Paris. 4. VoilS, le Pont-Neuf par lequel on entre dans la Cit6. Traversons-le et tournons k gauche et puis k droite. 5. — Quel est ce grand Edifice dont nous nous ap- prochons? — C'est le Palais de Justice. 6. — Mais il y en a une partie qui ressemble k une 6glise. Qu'est-ce que c'est? 7. — C'est en effet une 6glise qui s'appelle la Sainte-Chapelle et qui a 6t6 beltie par Saint Louis il y a plus de six cents ans. 8. C'est un des bijoux de Tarchitecture gothique. Son int^rieur est trSs, trSs joli. 9. Prenons maintenant la rue de LutSce, et tournons k droite. Voyez-vous ce grand Edifice k notre gauche? 10. C'est rH6tel-Dieu, un h6pital qui a iiA biti il y a tres, tr6s longtemps. 11. — Et en face de nous quelle est cette grande 6glise? 12. — C'est la cath^drale de Notre-Dame dont vous avez tant entendu parler. 13. — Oh oui, je me rappelle. Que je suis b^te! J'en ai vu souvent des photographies. x4. Voila en effet les deux grandes tours. C'est Ik que se trou- vent les cloches, n'est-ce pas? 15. — Oui. Avez-vous lu Notre- 156 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 13S Dame de Paris, ce grand roman de Victor Hugo? 16. — Oui. Je I'ai lu dans une traduction anglaise. 17. Je me rappelle qu'un des personnages de ce roman a' 6t& jet6 du sommet d'une de ces tours-l&., ce qui m'a beaucoup frapp6. 18. C'est une scene terrible. — Oui, terrible. Victor Hugo aimait les scenes terribles. 19. Aliens maintenant visiter I'interieur de r^glise qui est trSs beau. 20. La cath^drale est une des plus anciennes et des plus belles de la France. 21. EUe a 6t6 batie il y a plus de huit cents ans. 22. Du sommet des tours il y a une vue magnifique sur Paris. B. Supply the missing relative or interrogative words. Be on the look out especially for examples of § 132, 7. 1. Dites-moi vous avez k la main. 2. Demandez-lui il desire faire aujourd'hui. 3. Ne vous rappelez-vous pas votre cama- rade vous a dit? 4. Nous ne pouvons pas entendre vous dites, monsieur. 5. me frappe dans ce roman c'est la scSne de la tour. 6. vous me demandez est impossible. 7. Comprenez-vous me fait rire? 8. Savez-vous est cet objet-ci? C'est k moi. 9. Je vais vous dire je pense. 10. Voici me fait penser que vous aviez tort. 11. Tout vous dites est vrai. 12. II ne faut pas r^p^ter tout vous entendez dire. 13. Tout est sur la table est k Marie, n'est-ce pas? 14. Non, est k ce bout-ci est k moi, et est k I'autre bout est k elle. 15. Je crois vous me dites. 16. II vient de me demander j'avais I'intention de faire demain. 17. Mais j'ai beau lui expliquer; il ne peut pas comprendre je lui dis. 18. II faut que i'apprenne (pres. subj.) k parler frangais, sera tres difficile pour moi. C. (1) Some of the following sentences have " ragged " ends. Straighten them out, supply missing words (prepositions, relatives, and the correct forms of verbs). 1. Oil est 1' autobus que nous ' coin rue ? 2. S'arr^te-t-il au coin de la rue dans nous ^ ? 3. Les dames k I'^ne voulait donner la patte ' peur. 4. Yoilk I'ane k (qui? lequel?) les domestiques ont * coups. 5. Les domestiques ont > (prendre). ' Cdemeurer). ' (avoir). * (donner). BM hH^H Hi ^W ^Hl^ ■^^^^^E^^^fli ^^M .'*^:';:'-f'v 1 m 1 1 1^ 11 'K * -.Ml'^^'U ' ^;| &3 "■ ^-'^/"^ /'"■-v>>- r-; ,:;; j!-%^ ■ »-/7 ^"«>, ■ ''#*.A ,;4':-, MvCi^^'=^^-:l&fc ^/ 1 wmm »■ w s « 3 fci t- 3 (U Oo ^ 3 o a" -^ 0);^ C CO" CO gi^ f 'O'^'*) ■5-s S>. ■5g3 5«3aS-s2 -S 5 g.s 8.2 3.a.2^ S.2.S.S 0. s 0) o (!) o) oTs; .,fe «= cjMjj n 9 3 STi-o u s o B o B S ftm O Oi K a< m di D- o m (i< >^ 1^ Ph o di a< Ph Mil e<-(e § 135 LESSON XXXIII 157 ramass^ la vaisselle que l'4ne ^ fait ^ tomber eu ' patte amis son maitre. 6. Connaissez-vous les messieurs qui causent ensemble la-bas? — Oui, ce sont les mes- sieurs {two ways) votre femme vient de me presenter. 7. Ce sont des personnes mon pere m' 1 souvent .* 8. Je ne connais pas ces deux autres lS,-bas vous voyez les tStes. lis viennent d'entrer. 9. Quelle est cette 6glise vous voyez la fagade au bout de cette grande rue ? 10. C'est r^glise je viens de rencontrer le mari de ma soeur. 11. Ah oui! Celui qu'elle vient d'^pouser est un jeune militaire de mes amis. Je le {connaUre) bien depuis dix ans. (2) A good many idioms or expressions peculiar to the French language in the arrangement and choice of words have already occurred. Express in English: 1. Vous avez beau me repeter ce que vous avez entendu dire, je ne vous comprends pas. 2. Nous venons de rencontrer le mari de ma sceur. 3. Ma scEur I'a 6pous6 il y a plus de trois ans. 4. Monsieur I'agent, voulez-vous me dire o\i se trouve le Bon-Marcli6? 5. II a trouve que cette scene 6tait terrible. 6. Ne vous rap- pelez-vous pas que ce personnage a 6t6 jet6 du sommet de la tour? 7. Combien etes-vous? Nous sommes dix. 8. Quelle belle ville que Paris! (3) Make French sentences of your own on each of these models. (4) 1. We have just seen Notre-Dame. It is magnificent. 2. We climbed (in) one (I'une) of the towers and admired the view. 3. What a magnificent view of Paris! 4. I thought of (a) Victor Hugo's great novel, but I tried in vain to recall the name of the heroine (I'herolne), although I have just read the book for the second time. 5. Ah! I remember it! La Esmeralda! 6. The cathedral was built more than eight hundred years ago and is one of the most beautiful in the whole world. It is in the lie de la Cit6, which is the oldest part of Paris. 7. It is there that the first Parisians lived (invert order of subject and verb) a long time ago. Now it is a very 1 (avoir). ' Wlieii followed by an infiaitive, fait does not agree with a noun or pronoun object that precedes. ' (dormer). * (parler). 158 A FRENCH GRAMMAB § 136 quiet spot. 8. It is there that the traveler must go to see (the) old Paris, for Paris is now a modern (moderne) city, which makes it (le) less interesting for the foreigner (etranger), but more convenient for everybody. D. Supply questions for the following answers: 1. Ce chien noir est k mon frere. 2. Mon frere a un baton k la main. 3. II va donner un coup de baton au chien. 4. C'est le do- mestique qui a chass6 I'tine de la salle k manger. 5. Nous allons visiter les monuments de Paris aujourd'hui. 6. Nous allons dejeuner au restaurant du caf6 Voltaire. 7. Des hari- cots verts et des petits pois. 8. Nous allons payer notre de- jeuner avec ces billets de banque. 9. On nous les a donnas dans une banque qui s'appelle le Credit Lyonnais. 10. Mon banquier de New- York m'a dit d'y aller. 11. J'y ai rencontr6 un ancien camarade d'^cole. 12. Je lui ai parl6 de notre projet d' aller voir la cath6drale de Notre-Dame et la Sainte- Chapelle. 13. II m'a dit qu'il a eu beau essayer de se faire comprendre en frangais; personne ne le comprenait. 14. II est le fils d'un vieU ami de mon p^re. 15. II s'appelle Pierre Dupont. 16. Des deux 6glises, la Madeleine et Notre-Dame, nous trouvons Notre-Dame la plus int^ressante. 17. Notre- Dame est la plus ancienne des deux. E. Dict6e: Lesson XXXI, A. LESSON XXXIV 136. Indefinite Pronouns. The indefinite pronouns of most frequent occurrence are: 1. On [5], one, some one, we, you, they, people, etc. (cf. § 48). 2. Quelqu'un [kelkde], m., quelqu'une [kelkyn], f., some- body, some one, any one, plural quelques-uns [kelkazde], m., quelques-unes [kelkazyn], /., some, some people, any, a few. II y a quelqu'un a la porte. There is somebody at the door. J'ai vu quelques-unes de vos amies. I have seen some of your friends. Avez-vous des cerises, madame? Have you any cherries, madam? J'en ai quelques-unes. I have a few. § 137 LESSON XXXIV 159 3. Quelque chose [^kelkaSois], m., something, anything: Quelque chose est tombe. Something has fallen. J'ai quelque chose de bon. I have something good. 4. Along with ne + a verb, or when alone, a verb being un- derstood, personne [person], m., means nobody, not anybody, no one, and rien [rje]], m., nothing, not anything: Je n'ai parle a personne. I did not speak to anybody. Vous n'avez rien apporte. You have brought nothing. II n'a rien dit de mauvais. He said nothing bad. Qu'a-t-il dit? — Rien. What did he say? — Nothing. Personne ici! Nobody here! 137. Certain forms serve both as adjectives and as pro- nouns. Those of most frequent occurrence are: 1. Autre Cotr], other (adjective); un autre, another, I'autre, the other (pronoun) : Une autre fois; d'autres causes. Another time; other causes, Les autres iront aussi. The others wiU go too. 2. Distinguish tin autre from encore un: Une autre plume. Another (a different) pen. Encore une plume. Another {an additional) pen. 3. With autre are formed various locutions: L'une et I'autre occasion. Both occasions. Les uns et les autres partent. All are going away. Donnez-le a I'un on a I'autre. Give it to either. Ce n'est ni pour les uns ni pour les It is for none of them. autres. Elles se flattent les unes les autres. They flatter each other. lis ont peur les uns des autres. They are afraid of one another. 4. When used with ne + a verb, or when alone, the verb being understood, aucun [okde], nul [nyl], pas un [pazoe], as adjectives = no, not one, not any, and as pronouns = none, no one, not one: Aucun auteur ne dit cela. No author says that. A-t-on de I'espoir? — Aucun. Have they any hope? — None. 5. Tel [tel] = such, un tel = such a. Such as an adverb ie si [si] or tellement [telma]: 160 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §131 Telles sont mes douleurs. Qui raconte une telle histoire? Une SI belle maison. Un homme tellement cruel. II s'est couche tout de suite, telle- ment il etait fatigue. Such are my griefs. Who tells such a story? Such a beautiful house. Such a cruel man. He was so tired that he went to bed at once. Note. — Observe the idiomatic use of tel (telle) in the expressions Mon- sieur un tel, Mr. So-and-So; Madame une telle, Mrs. So-and-So. 6. Tout [tu], m., toute [tut], /., tous {jpronounced tu (as adj.), tus (as pron.)], m. pZ., toutes [tut], /. pZ., = all, every, any, whole, etc.: Tous les hommes. All (the) men. Toute ma vie. All my (My whole) life. Tous (toutes) sont arrive (e)s. All have come. 7. Meme [meiin], before a noun or as a pronoun = same; meme, following the noun or pronoun qualified = self, very, even, and agrees, but has no article; as adverb meme = even. La meme chose. Ce sont les m&mes. Dieu est la bonte mime. Les enfants memes le savent. Nous-memes; elles-mSmcs. lis nous ont meme battus. The same thing. They are the same. God is goodness itself. The very children know it. We ourselves; they themselves. They even beat us. EXERCISE XXXIV la beaute [Tiote] beauty le berger Pjerse] shepherd un endroit [oenadrwa] spot, place une entree [atre] entrance la grandeur [gradoeir] size, gran- deur le loup Qu] wolf la revolution [revolygjo] revolu- tion actif [aktif] lively, energetic intelligent [etsUsa] intelligent plein [pig] full yide [vid] empty aider (a) [ede] help devenir [dgvniir] become; qu'est-il devenu? what has become of him (it)? envoyer [avwaje] send incendier [gsadje] set fire to, bum ramener [ramne] bring back rendre [rajdr] give back, re- store tellement [tslma] so rarement Hrarma] rarely, not often § 137 LESSON XXXIV 161 A. Bring out the differences between the words in black type: 1. Nous venons de faire une promenade dans les champs qui 6taient pleins d'animaux. 2. Nous avons vu des vaches, des moutons, des chevres, et des chevaux qui mangeaient I'herbe dans des prairies varies. 3. II y avait 1&, quelques enfants qui les gardaient. 4. lis avaient des chiens de berger avec eux. 5. Quelques-ims des enfants nous ont arrM^s et ont demande quelle heure il ^tait. 6. Pendant que nous causions avec eux, quelques-unes des vaches ont voulu {wished) manger le hl6 d'un champ voisin. 7. On a envoy6 des chiens aprfes elles pour les chasser. 8. Les chiens jouaient en courant, mais quelques-uns, en entendant la voix des petits gargons, sont partis au galop pour ramener les vaches. 9. C'6tait quelque chose d'amusant de les voir chasser ces grosses b^tes dont quelques-unes ne voulaient pas quitter le champ de bl6. 10. Mais elles avaient beau vouloir y rester, elles ne le pouvaient pas, tellement les chiens ^taient actifs. 11. Aucune (Pas une) n'y est restfe. 12. Je n'ai rien vu de plus intelligent que ces chiens de berger, dont quelques-tins ressemblaient beaucoup k de gros loups. 13. lis orit fait tout ce que les enfants leur ont dit de faire. B. (1) Supply from §§ 136-137 the missing words: 1. Je n'ai ■ (two possibilities) mang6 aujourd'hui, et j'ai faim. 2. Don- nez-moi de bon pour mon diner, s'U vous platt. 3. Je crois que la salle est vide. Je n'y vols . 4. Ma tasse est vide; il n'y a dans ma tasse. 5. n'est dans la salle. 6. Voyez-vous quelqu'un dans la salle? Non, ; elle est vide. 7. S'il y avait une vache et un mouton dans le champ de bl6, les chiens iraient les chasser (= both). 8. Je ne peux pas dormir, (§ 137, 5) je suis fatigu6. 9. Nous serons fatigues que nous ne pourrons (fut. of pouvoir) pas dormir. 10. Dites-moi de nouveau. 11. Je ne sale de nouveau. (2) Translate in several ways: 1. On dit. 2. Que dit-on? 3. On apprend k parler en parlant. 4. On sert le potage avant la viande. C. (1) Scrivez en franqais: 1. Paris is a city of whicli people 162 A FKENCH GRAMMAR § 137 have often spoken to me. 2. My friend knows the city well and will show me everything that is interesting. 3. The place at which we begin our trip (promenade) is the Place de la Con- corde. 4. What do those statues represent? Which ones? The ones that are (se trouver) around the square. 5. They represent the most important cities in (de) France. The one on which you see so many flowers is the statue of the city of Strasbourg, which has just been restored to France. 6. What strikes me is (c'est) the size of the square, and the beauty of that broad avenue by which you approach the Arc de Triomphe. 7. But first let's visit those gardens the entrance of which we (on) see there, behind us. They are the Tuileries gardens in which {two ways) there was formerly a fine palace of the kings of France. 8. What has become of it? It was burned (On and active voice) during a revolution. 9. Wasn't the Louvre for- merly a palace too? What has become of it? 10. There it is on the other side of that square. It is now a famous museum. (2) 1. We like the very streets of Paris. 2. In France even the children spealv French. 3. Everything is interesting. 4. We (On) see something new at every street corner. 5. The sheep walk one in front of (devant) the other. 6. The cows and dogs were afraid of each other (§ 137, 3). 7. I never saw anything funnier. 8. Some of the goats got frightened. 9. Not one stayed in the neighboring wheat field. 10. Not one? Some of the sheep got frightened too, the dogs were so (tenement) energetic. (3) Rewrite A, 5-11, using the historical present as the basic tense. The 3d sing. pres. of envoyer is envoie. Why do not jouaient add c'etait shift to the present? D. (1) a. Conjugate in the present and in the past indefinite: Je me rappelle cette scene. Do the same, substituting a pronoun for the noun object. b. Conjugate in the present and translate: je viens {see § 178) de rencontrer un vieil ami. In the imperfect: je venais de ( = had just) rendre le journal k mon voisin. Repeat, substituting Ihe proper pronouns for the noun objects. § 137 LESSON XXXIV 163 c. Conjugate in the future and conditional, making the neces- sary changes in the possessive adjective: je ressemble a mon p^re- je ressemble k mes parents. d. Conjugate in the present and also in the past indefinite: je viens voir mon ancien professeur. e. Conjugate in the present and in the imperfect: je pars avant la fin de la piece; je finis un roman de Victor Hugo. /. Make a list of the verbs that resemble partir (see Lesson XVni, C, 2). (2) a. Study the forms of envoyer (§ 161). 6. Does the peculiarity of the present indicative and subjunc- tive, 1st, 3d, 3d, sing, and 3d pi., appear in the pronunciation or only in the spelling? Is the same thing true of the irregularity of the future and conditional f This peculiarity occurs in the forms of verbs in -oyer where the -y- would otherwise come before^^a]- c. Supply the forms of envoyer and then vary by changing the person or number of each subject: 1. Les enfants {present} les chiens apr^s les betes. 2. II faut que nous (present) des chiens pour chasser ces moutons. 3. Le berger (fut.) le chien pour chasser les vaches de cet endroit. 4. Si nous avions des chiens de berger nous les icond.) chercher nos moutons perdus. E. (1) Repondez aux questions: 1. Qui gardaient les bgtes? 2. Qui les aidait? 3. Est-ce que les enfants allaient chasser les betes des champs de bl6? 4. Est-ce que les chiens dor- maient ou jouaient? 5. Comment jouaient-ils? 6. Lesquels 6taient les plus grands, les vaches ou les chiens? 7. Est-ce que les chiens avaient peur des vaches? 8. A quels animaux les chiens ressemblaient-ils? 9. Est-ce que quelques vaches restaient dans les champs de h\6? 10. Que voulaient-elles y faire? 11. Pourquoi les chiens sont-ils partis au galop ? 12. Ont- jls fait tout ce que les enfants leur ont dit de faire? 13. Que venons-nous de faire dans les champs? 14. Qu'est-ce que les enfants nous ont demands? 15. Avez-vous jamais vu des chiens de berger? (2) Dict^e: Lesson XXXIII, A. 1-12. 164 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 337 VOCABULARY REVIEW No. 5 (1) Donnez le contraire de: loin de, actuellement, d^sagr^a- ble, rarement, content, possible, k droite, nouveau, bete (adj.), vide. (2) A quels autres mots pensez-vous quand on dit: le milieu, un individu, la soupe, le chien, des caresses, la journde, la soir6e, un b^ton, una pidce, une 6glise, une grande rue, le bout, un roi, un mus^e, mener, autrefois? (3) Fit words to the definitions: dire plus d'une fois; aller pr^s de quelqu'un; celui qui accompagne quelqu'un; les as- siettes, les tasses, les verres, etc. pour la table; le pied d'un animal; une figure en pierre, etc., qui repr6sente une personne, une ville, etc. ; porte d'une voiture; I'endroit ou I'on entre dans un pare, etc.; celui qui garde les moutons; animal qui mange les moutons. (4) Translate: 1. The policeman has arrested (arreter) this fellow. 2. He has just set fire to the palace. 3. The dogs tried in vain to bring back the sheep; they would not (= did not want to) come. 4. He cannot remember what you told (past part, of dire is dit) him ten minutes ago. 5. These statues are like each other. (5) Supply the missing words: 1. Les voitures de chemin de fer en France ont plusieurs . 2. D'un c6t6 elles ont un . 3. Pour sortir il faut ouvrir les . 4. L'dne a la table et fait la vaisselle. 5. Le maitre a les domestiques qui ont donn6 k I'^ne des de et Font de la salle. 6. L'ane veut chanter mais sa est -. 7. Les d6put6s font les du pays. 8. Presque (Almost) tons les Edifices en France sont b^tis en . 9. Louis XVI 6tait de France. 10. Son palais a 6t6 incendi6 pendant une . IL Le voleur a son revolver de sa — — . 12. Dans le mus6e du Louvre il y a de belles . 13. Nous traversons la Seine sur un qui s'appelle le . 14. La de Notre-Dame se trouve sur une de la . 15. EUe a iti bitie plus de huit ans. § 137 LESSON xxxrv 165 (6) Translate: over there, convenient, infrequent, wretched, so much (many), as much (many), together, in fact, opposite, threaten, a bank note, with pleasure (gladly), around, for, be- cause, why, spot (place), give back, full, empty, in former times, to become, to meet, to relate, to send. (7) Translate: 1. What has become of the kings of France (What have the kings . . . become)? 2. What became of you? 3. I shall send you news of myself (= of my news). 4. I begged him to send me news of them. 5. What [a] terrible scene (que) that one Qs]! 6. What do you think of* (two ways) that scene? (8) Translate: Everybody, nobody, somebody; everything, something, nothing; such a day, such a bad day; each other (two persons), each other (more than two persons), to each other. (9) Piece is the general word for ' room ' : what other meaning has it? What are the distinctive meanings of chambre and salle? Supply the missing words: 1. Ma maison a six , un salon, une cuisine, trois k coucher et une h manger. 2. Le jour je travaiUe k I'^cole dans notre de classe; je passe la nuit chez moi dans ma . 3. Nous avons cherch6 I'enfant dans toutes les de la maison. (10) Racontez d'abord oralement, puis ecrivez « La Montre de mon ami. » (Make use of the following words and expressions in LeQon XXX:) Un jour, se trouver, compartiment, homme, ne savoir pas, la difference, mien, tien. Ami, avoir, montre, or. Train, ap- procher de, petite ville, marcher, moins vite. L'individu, tirer, poche, revolver, dire. Votre montre, plus jolie, la mienne, donnez- la-moi. Je, donner, la mienne, afin que, vous, savoir I'heure. Le voleur, approcher, revolver, de la tite. Ami, avoir peur. II, donner, montre. Voleur, donner, la sienne, sauter du train. Com- partiment, frangais, etre, commode, mais, on, pouvoir, se trouver avec, compagnon de voyage, d6sagr6able, meme dangereux. * Penser de = think of, have an opinion of; penser il = think of, have in mind. Example: Au revoirl Pensez k moi quand vous serez en Fiancel — Je penserai souvent k vous et je vous enverrai des cartes postales. May penser a be used in (7), 6? 166 A FRENCH GRAMMAR §§ 138-139 138. LESSON XXXV Cardinal Numerals 1 un, une C<£, yn] 21 vingt et un [vetere] 2 deuz Cd0] 22 vingt-deux [vetd0] 3 trois [trwa] 30 trente [trait] 4 quatre [katr] 31 trente et un [traitede] 5 cinq [S€!k] 40 quaiante [karait] 6 six [sis] 50 cinqiiante [sEkait] 7 sept [sEt] 60 soixante [swasait] 8 huit [qit] 70 soixante-dix [swasaitdis] 9 neuf [noef] 71 soixante et onze [swasaiteSiz] 10 dix [dis] 80 qtiatre-vingts [katr9V£] 11 onze Co:z] 81 quatre- vingt-un [katravEoe] 12 douze [duiz] 90 quatre- vingt- dix [katravEdis] 13 treize [trsiz] 91 quatre-vingt-onze [katraveoiz] 14 quatorze [katorz] 100 cent [sa] 15 quinze [kEiz] 101 cent un [sa de] 16 seize [SEIZ] 200 deux cents [d0sa] 17 dix-sept [dissst] 201 deux cent un [d0sadej 18 dix-huit [dizqit] 1000 mille [mil] 19 dix-neuf [dizncef] 1001 mille un [milde] 20 vingt [ve] 2000 deux mille [d0mil] NoOTTS OF Number: 1,000,000 = un million [de miljo]; 2,000,000 = deux millions [d0 miljo]; 1,000,000,000 = un milliard [ce miljair]. Observe: 1. The hyphen imites the parts of compoimd numerals under 100, except where et occurs. 2. Et stands regularly in 21, 31, 41, 51, 61, 71, omitted in 81, and elsewhere. Notes on Pronunciation: 1. The final consonant of 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 17, 18, 19, is silent before initial consonant or h aspirate of a word multiplied by them, not elsewhere: Cinq livres [se liivr], but le cinq mai [b SEik ms]. 2. No elision or liaison occurs before huit, onze: le huit [la qit]; les huit livres [le qi liivr]; le onze [la o:z]; les cnze francs Qe 5;z fra]. 3. The t is sounded in vingt in 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, is sounded with the d in 22, is silent from 81 to 99, is silent in cent un, deux cent un, etc. 139. Million and milliard require de before the object enumerated; cent = a (or one) hundred; mille = a (or one) thousand: 5S 140-143 LESSON XXXV 167 D a paye un million de francs. He has paid a million (of) francs. Ceci vaut cent francs. This is worth a hundred francs. 140. Quatre-vingt and the multiples of cent take -s only when immediately preceding a noun, or when they themselves are used as nouns of number: Quatre-vingts francs. Eighty francs. Trois cents francs. Three hundred francs. Les cinq cents. The five hundreds. But: Trois cent un francs; quatre-vingt-un francs, etc. 06s.; They are not novma of number in dates, or when used as ordinals. 141. Multiplicatives. Once = una fois, tvnce = detix fois, three times = trois fois, etc.: Dixfois dix font cent. Ten times ten make a hundred. 142. Ordinal Numerals. They are formed from 'third' upwards by adding -ieme to the corresponding cardinal, 6nal e being dropped; cinq adds u, and neuf changes f to v before -ieme: 1st premier [pramje] \ deuxieme [d0zJEm] 3rd troisieme [trwozJEm] 4th quatrieme Pratriem] 5th cinquieme [sekJEm] 21st vingt et unieme [vetejTijem] 6th sudeme [sizjsm] 22nd vingt-deuxieme [vstd0ziemj 143. Fractions, The niunerator is expressed by a cardi- nal, the denominator by an ordinal, as in EngHsh. Half = moitie, /. (as noim), and demi (as adjective); \=^xa quart, I = un tiers [tje:r]. Before a noun, demi is invariable and joined by a hyphen, but agrees elsewhere. Use la moitie (not demi) where the half of is, or may be, used in English: (In huitieme; les trois dixiemes. One-eighth; the three tenths. La moitie de I'annSe. (The) half (of) the year. Une heure et demie. An hour and a half. IJne demi-henre. Half an hour. tiCs trois quarts de cette somme. Three-fourths of that sum. 7th septieme [SEtJEm] 8th huitieme [qitJEm] 9th neufieme [ncevjsm] 10th dixieme Cdizjem] 11th onzieme [ozJEm] 168 A FRENCH GRAMAIAB S 143 EXERCISE XXXV le centime [satim] centime en etre k [anestr a] be (at a point la faffon [fas5] manner, way in a book, etc.) la moitie [mwatje] half se ficher [safaje] get angry la monnaie [monE] change, indiquer [edike] assign, point money; monnaie franfaise, out French money (argent is nommer [nome] name more general) 6ter [ote] take off, remove le nom [n5] name il vaut [vo] is worth {pres. of un objet [objE] object, article, valoir) thing veuillez [vceje] please (impera- la page [pais] page tive of vouloir) le par-dessus [pardasy] overcoat ^ ^^^^^ ^^^ [aoitvwa] aloud le quart Pcairj fourth le sou [su] cent, penny, sou autant (de) [ota] as many, as le tiers [tjsir] third much jusqu'a [syska] until, as far demi [dami] half as, up to completer [koplete] fill out, par [par] by finish sur [syr] out of A. (1) Lisez A haute voix en frangais: 40, 41, 50, 51, 55, 60, 61, 66, 69, 70, 71, 75, 79, 80, 81, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 95, 99, 100, 101, 140, 175, 190, 200, 201, 250, 281, 500, 1000, 1001, 25,000 hommes, 1,000,000 de francs. (2) CompUtez: 2 fois 1 font ; 2 fois 2 font ; 2 fois 3 font . Continues jusqu'd, 2 fois 25. (3) Parlez-vous frangais le j du temps, ou Za § du temps, on les f du temps, ou les f du temps ou tout le temps en classe? Quelle partie du temps le professeur parle-t-il? Parle-t-il trap? (4) On indique la valeur des objets par francs, par sous et par centimes. II y a 20 sous dans un franc. Un sou vaut un cent amSricain. Cinq centimes font un sou. 1. Combien de centimes y a-t-il dans un franc? 2. Combien de sous un dollar am^ricain vaut-il? 3. Quelle partie d'un franc un sou est-il? 4. Quelle partie d'un franc un centime est-il? 5. Quelle partie d'un dollar am^ricain un franc est-il? 6. Quelle est la valeur en monnaie am^ricaine de cinq francs? Si 143 LESSON XXXV 169 7. De dix francs? 8. De cent francs? 9. De cinq centimes? 10. De vingt-cinq centimes? 11. De cinquante centimes? 12. De soixante-quinze centimes? Note. — If the teacher can secure some French coins and bank notes or facsimiles of them, it will be helpful at this point. The teacher may also exhibit a number of articles with the prices marked in francs and centimes. This will stimulate interest in converting the sums into dollars and cents. Much driU is needed for teaching the numerals thoroughly, more than can be provided in Exercises in the text. In addition to seizing every occasion to make the students coimt, have them teU the page of each lesson, answer questions involving dates, and tell the prices in French money of real and imaginary articles and meals. The teacher wiU find it profitable to cut up several pages of a calendar that has the numerals printed in large type and to paste the numbers in order on sheets of paper. These may be manipulated before the class like flash- cards so as to show any desired combination, and are very useful in rapid daily practice. B. (1) Study (a), the future, and conditional forms of voii (§224); and (b), the present indicative and subjunctive, the im- perfect indicative, and the imperative. Refer each of these forms to the " principal parts " according to the grouping in § 159, 1, 2, 3, 4. (2) Study the present, imperfect, and future o/ mettre (§ 198). Tabulate according to § 159. C. (1) Dites en frangais: 1. You must get a ticket before taking the train. 2. We got enough bread for two days. 3. This fellow gets angry too easily. 4. Please go and get my hat. 5. His horse got frightened. (2) ^crivez en frangais: 1. If the cows were in our neigh- bor's wheat field, the dogs would see them. 2. If they were to see the cows, they would go and bring them back. 3. Please go [and] get the animals (bete) when you see them in your neighbor's yard. 4. If no one went and got them, they would eat Cup] the grass in our neighbor's yard. 5. If he saw them, he would get angry. 6. He will get angry when he sees them in his field. 7. If our neighbors were to see these goats in their fields, there would be no use (avoir beau in ist pi.: which tense ') 170 A FRENCH GHAMMAK § 143 in our trying to run them out, for (car) our neighbors would go and get them first (les premiers). (3) 1. No one puts on his hat in the house. 2. I shall put on my hat before (avant de) going out (see § 99, 5). 3. When it is cold, you (indef.) put on your {which possessive adjJ) overcoat before going out and take it off before coming in. 4. Half the time he would put on his overcoat in the house, because his mother had told him to do it (le), but once outside he would take it off. 5. Nine times out of ten he would get angry. D. R4pondez en frangais: (1) a. 1. Combien de jours y a-t-il dans une semaine? 2. Combien de semaines dans un mois? 3. Combien de jours y a-t-il dans les mois de sep- tembre [[septaibr], avril [avril], juin C3r[e], novembre [[novaibr]? 4. Combien de jours dans les mois de Janvier Il3avje], mars [mars], mai [ms], juillet [sqije], aolit []u], octobre [oktobr], d^cembre [desaibr]? 5. Quels sont les mois qui ont trente et un jours? 6. Nommez ceux qxii ont trente jours. 7. Combien de jours le mois de f6vrier [fevrie] a-t-il? 8. Combien de jours y a-t-il dans une ann6e? 6. 1. Combien d'fleves etes-vous dans cette classe? 2. Comp- tez: un 61eve, deux 61§ves, etc. 3. Comptez les places dans la salle de classe: une place, deux places, etc. 4. Y a-t-il assez de places pour les ^l^ves? 5. Y a-t-il autant d'^leves qu'il y a de places? 6. Y a-t-il autant de places qu'il y a d'616ves? 7. Y a-t-il plus de places ou moins de places que d'61eves? c. 1. Combien de pages votre livre de frangais ar-t-il? 2. A quelle page est-ce que nous en sommes? 3. A quelle page en 6tions-nous hier? 4. Avant-hier? 5. Lundi dernier? 6. A quelle page en serons-nous demain? 7. A quelle page en sommes-nous rest6s hier? 8. A quelle page en Ites-vous rest6 avant-hier? (2) 1. Quel est le premier jour de la semaine? 2-7. Quel est le deuxieme jour de la semaine, etc. 8. Quel est le premier mois de rann6e? 9-19. Quel est le deuxieme mois de Tannic? etc. 20. Quelle legon^tudions-nous aujourd'hui? 21. Quelle § 144 LESSON XXXVI 171 Ie5oii aurons-nous pour demain? 22. A quelle legon en 6tioiis- nous hier? 23. A quelle page nous sommes-nous arr^tfe hier? 24. A quelle page en sommes-nous restes avant-hier? E. Dictee: Lesson XXXIII, A, 13-22. F. Lisez & haute voix (compare Lessons V, VII) : un billet, un dne, une banque, un; deux deputes, deux Edifices, deux; trois monuments, trois ob61isques, trois; quatre statues, quatre arcs de triomphe, quatre; cinq rois, cinq avenues, cinq; six lois, six 6glises, six; sept promenades, sept objets, sept; huit personnages, huit endroits, huit; neuf ponts, neuf ans, neuf; dix repas, dix avenues, dix. a. Which, of these numerals have two pronunciations? Make examples illustrative of each, using other nouns than those above. See § 138, Notes on Pronunciation. b. Which of these numerals have three pronunciations? Illus- trate as in a. LESSON XXXVI 144. Dates, Titles, etc. 1. The form mil is used in dates of the Christian era, from 1001 to 1999; from 1100 onward, dates are often expressed by hundreds, as so fre- quently in English: (En) I'an mil six. (In) the year 1006. En mil neuf cent vingt In nineteen hundred and twenty. En dix-neuf cent vingt at un. In 1921. 2. Days of the month and numerical titles of rulers are indicated by cardinals, except first = premier: Le premier mai. Charles premier. The first of May. Charles I. Paris, le deux mai. Paris, on the 2nd of May. Louis quatorze (XIV). Louis XIV. Observe: — The English word tfie in titles is not translated in French. 172 A FRENCH GKAMMAK § 1*4 3. Observe the following date idioms : Quel jour du mois est-ce aujotu:- What day of the month in this? d'hui? Quel jour du mois sommes-nous " " " " aujourd'hui? Quel quantieme [katJEm] du mois " " " " " est-ce aujoitfd'hui? C'est aujourd'hui le quinze. To-day is the fifteenth. Ce sera demain le seize. To-morrow will be the sixteenth. Le six Janvier. On the sixth of January, lis sont arrives lundi. They came on Monday. D'aujourd'hui en huit. A week from to-day (juture). II y a quinze jours. A fortnight ago. Observe: — The English words on and of in dates are not trans- lated. Before days of the week on is likewise omitted. 4. The names of the seasons are: I'ete, summer, I'au- tomne, autumn, I'hiver, winter, le printemps, spring. The names of the months may be conveniently learned from the following rhyme; they are all masculine: Trente jours ont septembre, Avril, juin, novembre; Trente et un ont mars et mai, Aofit, octobre, puis juillet, Et decembre et janvier; De vingt-huit est fevrier. 5. Observe the following idioms referrmg to age: Quel age avez-vous? How old are you? J'ai vingt ans. I a™ twenty (years old). Une fillette (dgee) de six ans. A girl six years old {or of age). A l'4ge de vingt-cinq ans. At the age of twenty-five (years). EXERCISE XXXVI le cadeau [kado] present k foyer [fwaje] hearth la date [dat] date une importance [eportais] impor- une encyclopedic [asiklopedi] en- tance cyclopedia la naissance [nssais] birth la fSte [fe:t] festival, holiday le Noel [nod] Christmas 1 rzi:m r. fe| /!»• f (iji W 1 i *■£■ ill I '*^|''-' ■^■9'M^ -fi- -si::-' ■ ■■• if» ■. -f'. r ' ^^:^ >^ i. /: 'VV V 4 #fi.^ — ,,t--; ft.;- Ah i4 PL, ■< 1^ {144 LESSON XXXVI 173 EXERCISE XXXVI (Continued) line oiigine [orisin] origin la plupart (de) [plypair] ma- jority, most la prise Qprisz] capture la prison [prizoj prison le regne Crsji] reign le souvenir [suvniir] memory catholique Dtatolik] Catholic historique [istorik] historical national [nasjonal] national protestant [protests] Protes- tant religieux CraIi3J0]] religious croire [krwair] believe, think durer [dyre] last faire froid [feir frwa] be, get cold {of weather) regner [repe] reign revenir Cravniir] come back couramment [kurama] flu- ently, generally environ [avira] about non plus [noply] either, neither davantage [davatais] more k cause de [akoiz da] on ac- count of jusqu'a [syska] until, up to, as far as parmi [parmi] among A. (1) 1. Dans tous les pays il y a des jours de fete oil on ne travaille pas. 2. Quelques-uns de ces jours de fite ont une origins religieuse, comme les dimanches et le jour de Noel, le 25 d^cembre. 3. D'autres ont une origine historique, comme le 14 juillet. 4. La plupart des f^tes ont une origine religieuse, surtout dans les pays catholiques, comme la France. 5. Combien de dimanches y a-t-il dans une ann6e? — II y en a (?). 6. On appeUe le premier jour de l'ann6e le « jour de I'an ». 7. Ce jour-lS, on fait des visites, on envoie des cartes et des lettres &, ses amis. 8. La fSte du jour de I'an a plus d'importance en France que chez nous. (2) 1. Le 14 juillet on c616bre la f^te nationale fran9aise en souvenir de la prise de la BastiUe, le 14 juillet, 1789. 2. La BastiUe 6tait une prison oil le roi mettait les individus dont il avait peur. 3. Ce jour-1^ la Revolution frangaise a com- mence. 4. EUe a dur^ dix ans environ, jusqu'^ Napoleon. 5. Quelle est la date de la fSte nationale am6ricaine? 6. Quand est-ce qu'on I'a cei6br6e la premiere fois? (3) 1. Le 25 decembre nous c^l^brons le jour de Noel, en souve- nir de la naissance de J^sus-Christ [sezykri]. 2. On e^lebre ce jour-ll, dans les pays protestants aussi bien que dans les pays 174 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 144 catholiques. 3. Le soir du 24 d^cembre, avant de se coucher, les petits Frangais laissent leurs souliers autour du foyer, et le petit Noel (ou le petit J6sus CsezyJ) vient y mettre des cadeaux pendant la nuit. 4. Dans trois semaines nous aUons c416brer la fete de No6l. B. (1) 1. Parmi les rois de France les plus c^lSbres se trouvent Charlemagne, Saint Louis (Louis IX), Fran5ois I", Henri IV, Louis XIV et Louis XVI, sous lequel la Revolu- tion a commence. 2. Trouvez dans une encyclopidie ou un livre d'histoire, les dates de leurs rhgnes et lisez-les A haute voix dans la classe. Pa,r exemple, Frangois I^ a regne de 1616 a 1547. 3. Trouvez les dates de trois presidents de la B&puhlique frangaise et lisez-les devant la classe. (2) a. Study the present, imperfect, and future indicative, the present subjunctive, the conditional and compound forms of aUer (§160); of venir (§ 178). Tenir is conjugated like venir except that it takes a different auxiliary in the compound tenses. Which f b. Tabulate the forms of these verbs under the principal parts (§ 159). C. (1) j&iMdie2?a § (section [seksj 3]) 106. ^crivez en frangais: 1. Will winter come soon? I do not want it to come this month. 2. I am glad that it is not cold yet, but I am afraid that winter will come soon. 3. Last year it got very cold in November. 4. Old people (Les vieux) do not like the cold, and I do not like it either, although I am young. 5. I want my family to go south (dans le sud) before winter comes, be- cause when January and Februaiy and March come there will be much snow and ice. 6. It will be necessary for us to wear our gloves and overcoats when we go out, in order not to be cold (in order that we, etc.). 7. When spring and summer come, I shaU prefer that we come back (suhjunct.) (to the) north before it gets too warm. 8. We went south last year in December and we came back in April. 9. My mother wants the family to go to Canada for May, June, July, August, and September. 10. I think ( Je crois) that we shall have to come back before the middle of September, on account of the cold. § 144 LESSON XXXVI 175 (2) a. 1. He is coming, to-morrow. 2. He used to come every day. 3. They will come on Friday. 4. Our sisters came back on June 1st. 5. They would come back at once if you asked them to do it (le). 6. 1. We shall go to the country on June 2nd. 2. We used to go (y) on June 15. 3. We should go to France in July if we had 3500 francs. 4. Did those ladies go to England in July or in August? c. 1. How old is he? He is ten. 2. What is his name? His name is Pierre. 3. He has a sister 15 years old. 4. He wants to go to Europe when he is sixteen and stay two years. 5. He thinks that in (au bout de) two years he will be able to speak French fluently. D. (1) Void le participe present du verbe lire: lisant. Completez par la forme convenable (proper) de lire: 1. Je (present) un roman de Dumas. 2. Nous ne (present) pas beaucoup de romans frangais. 3. II faut que vous (pres- ent) I'histoire de France avant de visiter ce pays. 4. Quoique cet enfant ne (present) pas trop facilement le frangais, il aime les Miserables de Victor Hugo. 5. Si tous les voyageurs (imperfect) plus d'histoire, ils s'amuseraient davantage. 6. Quand nous aurons le temps, nous (future) des ro- mans de Balzac. 7. J'ai d^jS. (past participle) son Eugenie Grandet. (2) Repondez aux questions: 1. Quel kge avez-vous? 2. Quel 4ge aurez-vous dans cinq ans? 3. Quelle est la date de I'anniversaire de votre naissance? 4. Quel jour du mois sommes-nous aujourd'hui? 5. Quel jour du mois serons-nous d'aujourd'hui en huit? 6. D'aujourd'hui en quinze? 7. Quel jour du mois 6tions-nous il y a huit jours? 8. II y a trois jours? 9. Quel ige aviez-vous il y a trois ans? 10. II y a cinq ans? 11. Quel jour de la semaine Noel tombe-t-il cette ann^e? 12. Et le 14 juillet quel jour de la semaine tombe-t-il? 13. Quels sent les mois qui n'ont que trente jours? 14. Le mois de f^vrier combien de jours a-t-il? 15. R6p6tez-moi les noms des six premiers mois de l'ann6e. 16. Dans quel mois ^tes-vous n^ ? 176 A FRENCH GBAMMAR § 145 LESSON XXXVII 145. The Time of Day. The hours and fractions of hours are indicated as follows: Quelle heure est-il? What time (o'clock) is it? II est deux heures. It is two o'clock. Trois heures et demie. Half-past three. Trois heures (et) un quart. A quarter past three. Quatre heures moins un (le) quart. A quarter to four. Trois heures dix (minutes). Ten minutes past three. Quatre heures moins cinq (minutes). Five minutes to four. Trois heures cinquante-cinq. Three fifty-five. II est midi et demi. It is half-past twelve (noon). II est minuit. It is twelve o'clock (midnight). A sept heures du soir. At seven o'clock in the evening. k quelle heure? At what time? A trois heures precises. At three o'clock precisely. Vers (les) trois heures. About three o'clock. It will be noted that: 1. The time of day is expressed by etre combined with the impersonal subject il. 2. Contrary to English usage, in French the hour is given first and then the minutes are added or subtracted. The word heure (s) is always mentioned, but the word minute (s) is frequently omitted. 3. Le midi [midi] means noon, midday; le minuit [minqi] means midnight. 4. Demi when preceding a noun, is regarded as part of the noun and is joined to it by means of a hyphen and does not agree with it in gender; as an adjective, following the noun, demi(e) observes the usual rules of agreement; e.g. une demi-heure, a half-hour, but une heure et demie, half past one or, one and a half hours. 5. In the French time tables and in the usage of some I 145 LESSON XXXVII 177 diz Frenchmen, time is counted from 1 to 24 hours; e.g. heures (du soir) = vingt-deux heures. N.B. — Distinguish carefvilly between telling tfie time of day (il + etre) and describing the coTidition of weather, temperature and natural phenomena (U + faire), §98. EXERCISE XXXVn im avis [renavi] opinion, mind un employe [^oenaplwaje] clerk, agent le lendemain padme] next day, morrow la mefiance [mefjais] distrust la part [pair] portion, share; pour ma part for my part; de ma part, from me la partie [parti] part, game la poste [post] post office le repos [larpo] rest Je veston [vesta] (sack) coat fou [fu], (/. folle) mad, crazy precis [presi] exact, precise agir [asiir] act, have an effect avancer [avase] be fast, ad- vance changer [Jase] change discuter [diskyte] argue, dis- cuss se fier a [saf jea] trust, have faith in se mefier de [samefjeda] distrust, beware of oublier [ublie] forget plaisanter [pkzate] joke raconter [rakSte] relate, re- count recommencer [rakomase] be- gin again, do again remonter [ramote]- wind {of a watch or clock) retarder [ratarde] be behind, be late, delay tromper [trSpe] deceive, fool varier [varje] vary d'ailleurs [dajoeir] besides fur- thermore d'autant [dots] so much more, all the more Sa va it's all right, it will do, that works ne . . . jamais [na same] never pourtant [purta] however tiens ! [tj e] Is that so ! Indeed ! (imperative of tenir, hold) A. (1) 1. Avez-vous une montre, Louise? — Oui, made- moiselle, j'en ai une. 2. C'est un cadeau de mon p&re. II me I'a donn^e pour mon anniversaire. 3. — Est-elle en or ou en argent? — En or, mais elle marche mal. A present elle retarde d'un (by) quart d'heure. 4. — Alors 5a ne va pas. On ne pent pas se fier k votre montre. 5. Et la v6tre, fidouard, marche- 178 A FRENCH GRAMMAR § 145 t-elle mieux que celle de Louise? 6. — Oui, mademoiselle, la mienne marche trfes bien. Vous savez que les montres des gargons marchent toujours mieux que celles des jeunes fiUes. 7. — Tiens! Comment expliquez-vous cela, fidouard? — Mais, c'est facile! 8. Les jeunes filles changent si souvent d'avis, elles varient tant elles-mSmes, qu'on ne peut pas se fier k elles, et cela agit sur leurs montres. 9. D'ailleurs elles ne les re- montent jamais. EUes oublient toujours de les remonter. 10. — Tiens, fidouard! Vous commencez trfes jeune k vous m6fier des femmes. 11. Vous avez entendu chanter sans doute: « Souvent femme varie, Bien (very) fou qui s'y fie ». 12. Pourtant vous avez beau parler de cette fagon, vous ferez comme les autres. 13. Vous payerez bien cher cette m^fiance. On vous trompera d'autant plus facilement. Vous allez voir! 14. Mais ne discutons pas cette question. Quelle heure est-U k votre montre? — II est midi moins le quart. 15. — Et ^ la vdtre, Pierre? — II est midi moins treize, mademoiselle. 16. — Alors vous avancez de deux minutes? — Non, made- moiselle; je ne crois pas. 17. C'est que la montre d'fidouard retarde de deux minutes. On ne peut pas s'y fier. 18. — Ah? Alors vous n'^tes pas de I'avis d'fidouard sur les jeunes filles et les gargons et leurs montres? 19. Mais je crois qu'il plai- santait. Pourtant nous ne pouvons pas passer I'heure k discuter sur les femmes et leurs montres. 20. Nous ne serious jamais d'accord. Nous n'arriverions jamais a rien. (2) 1. Racontez-moi votre journ6e, Pierre. — Les jours de classe je me 16ve k sept heures moins vingt. 2. II me faut vingt-cinq minutes pour faire ma toilette, et k sept heures cinq je suis pr^t k travailler une demi-heure avant le dejeuner, 3. Le dejeuner est prSt k huit heures moins vingt-cinq et k huit heures dix je pars pour I'^cole. 4. J' arrive k I'^cole k huit heures vingt-cinq. La premiere classe commence k huit heures et demie et dure quarante-cinq minutes. 5. La deuxi^me classe commence k neuf heures et quart, . . . etc. (Cori- tinuez). 6. A midi nous avons un peu de repos. Nous pre- nons notre d6jeuner et k une heure les classes recommencent. ?. J'arrive chez moi k quatre heures de I'apres-midi, nous dlnons k six heures et demie, et aprSs le diner je travaiUe ou je m'amuse § 145 IiESSON XXXVII 179 k lire jusqu'S. dix heures. 8. Alors je me couche et je dors jusqu'au lendemain matin. 9. — Tres bien, Pierre. Voua 6tes un jeune homme sage. 10. Je comprends pourquoi votre montre marche mieux que celle de Louise, — et meme que celle d'fidouard! B. (1) Substitute pronouns for the italicized object nouns: I. Voici une lettre. 2. J'ai 6crit la lettre hier soir. 3. J'ai demand^ k mon fr^re de mettre la lettre k la poste, mais il a mis la lettre dans sa poche. 4. II a mis la lettre dans sa poche il y a cinq jours. 5. II y a trouv6 la,- lettre ce matin quand il changeait de veston. 6. II n'avait pas ouvert la lettre. 7. En- fin il a donn6 la lettre au facteur le 4 juillet. 8. Donnez la lettre au facteur. 9. Ne mettez pas la lettre k la poste. 10. Prenez vos billets avant de monter dans une voiture. II. II faut donner les billets k V employe avant de sortir de la gare de destination. (2) Study the present indicative and subjunctive, the imperfect, future, and conditional forms, and the compound forms of dire (§ 193) and of prendre (§ 202). Group these forms according to § 159. C. (1) Traduisez en franqais: 1. People say so (le). 2. Some one said so. 3. No one will say so. 4. Your father doesn't want him to say so. 5. Tell me at once. 6. I regret that he told {perf. subj.; see § 155) you that. 7. You never say anything (rien). 8. What would you say if I told him what you said yesterday? 9. She takes sugar in her coffee. 10. They take the 8:28 train (le train de . . .) every morning. 11. Your father must get (prendre) the tickets before taking the train. 12. The apples we took were yours, weren't they? 13. Somebody has just taken all my apples. 14. It is 5:45 exactly; I shall put on my overcoat at once and take the street car at the corner. 15. If you took the car at 6:15 exactly, you would get (6tre) to my house before a quarter to seven. 16. Tell him to take the 7:36 train. 17. Don't let's take it. (2) For les jours de classe in A, (2), 1 substitute hier and re-, write te the end of the eighth sentence, making the necessary changes in the tense form. 180 A FRENCH GRAMMAR 146-14? (3) Svbstitute demain for les jours de classe, and rewri,te oa indicated in (2). D. (1) The teacher dictates the English of the examples in § 145 and the class gives the French, orally or in writing. (2) a. Note the idiomatic expressions: 1. Cette dame a change de robe. 2. Vous pouvez vous fier k cette jeune fiUe, car elle ne ressemble pas aux autres. 3. Si vous vous mefiez trop des hommes, ils vous tromperont d'autant plus sou vent. 4. II passe son temps k penser aux (compare Lesson XX, A, (3), 11, 12, 13 and (7) of Vocabulary Review No. 5) parties de base- ball. 5. Elle ne pense jamais a remonter sa montre. 6. Get enfant ne pense k rien d'utile. b. Write sentences in French after the model of those in (2) a. E. Dict^e: Lesson XXXIV, A. LESSON XXXVIII 146. Past Definite of donner, finir, vendre I gam, etc. I finished, etc. I sold, etc. donn 01 [done] donn as [dana] donn a [dona] donn &mes [donam] donn &tes [donat] donn erent [doneir] fin IS [fini] fin IS [fini] fin it [fini] fin imes [finim] fini § 160. * § 177. • § 202. • § 166. '» § 158. » § 224. ' § 158. ' § 195. • § 210. " § 223. » § 154. B. Complete the following, as above: 1. II alia visiter ses champs. 2. lis arrivSrent k un champ. 3. lis se tenaient droits. 4. II s'6cria. 5. Quel dommage qu'ils soient si courb^s! 6. Je pr6f6re ceux-l&,. 7. II en prit deux. 8. II fait pencher leur t^te. 9. lis ne valent rien. Give the present indicative in full of: 1. Alia. 2. Se tenaient. 3. Prit. 4. Fait. 5. Valent. Relate the story, substituting the past indefinite for the past definite, thus: « Un paysan ... est all6 visiter, » etc. C. {Oral.) 1. Qu'est-ce que c'est qu'un paysan? 2. Oil ce paysan est-il all6? 3. Est-ce qu'il 6tait seul? 4. Qui est alI6 avec lui? 5. Pourquoi sont-ils all6s aux champs? 6. Com- ment se tenaient certains 6pis dans les champs qu'ils ont visit6s? 7. Tons les 6pis se tenaient-ils droits? 8. Comment les autres se tenaient-ils? 9. Quels 6pis pr^f^rait le petit Auguste? 10. Qu'est-ce qu'il s'est ^cri6? 11. Lesquels pr6- f6rez-vous? 12. Pourquoi les pr6f6rez-vous? 13. Lesquels des 6pis 6taient courbis? 14. Qu'est-ce qui leur faisait pen- LESSON XUI 193 cher la t^te? 15. Pourquoi les autres se tenaient-ils si droits? 16. Lesquels valent le plus? 17. Comment le p6re a-t-il d&- montr^ cela a son fils? 18. Les personnes fibres valent-elles ordinairement grand'chose? 19. Pr6f6rez-vous les personnes modestes? D. 1. I am going to see the fields. 2. If you were to go and visit the fields, in what condition would you find the wheat? 3. We reach the field where the wheat is standing upright. 4. Some of the ears of wheat are heavily weighted. 5. Why do you exclaim: " What a pity they are so bent down?" 6. You prefer those that are standing upright, do you? 7. Hold yourseH upright. 8. Take two ears of wheat. 9. Rub the grain out. 10. The best wheat is not in the upright ears. 11. The full ears are bent, while the empty ears are upright. 12. Just look, my boy, the upright ears are empty. 13. Full heads are worth a great deal, but empty heads are worth nothing. 14. Do you not observe the same thing amongst men as among the ears of wheat? Use either the past definite or the past indefinite for the nar- rative tenses of the following: E. Little Augustus went one day to the fields. He went with his father who was going to see whether his wheat was ripe. They arrived at a wheat field. Augustus observed that certain ears of wheat were bent down towards the earth. He observed also that others held themselves upright. He said to his father: " Look at those ears of wheat. What a pity they are so bent down! I prefer those which hold them- selves upright." His father wished to teach him a lesson. He took two of the ears of wheat and rolled them between his fingers. The one was empty and was worth nothing. The other was full of good wheat. Then he said: " Look, my boy, this ear which raised its head so proudly was almost empty. On the contrary, this other which was so bent down was fuU of the best grain. We observe the same thing amongst men. Those who are proud have an (the) empty head. They are worth nothing. On the contrary, those who are modest and humble are generally the best." 194 A FRENCH GRAMMAR XLm. Le Tresor du Laboureur A. Un laboureur 6tant sur le point de mourir ^, et voulant * donner k ses enfants une derniSre preuve de sa tendresse, les fit ' venir * auprds de lui, et leur dit ^: « Mes enfants, aprfes moi vous aurez le champ que mon p6re a poss6d6^ le champ qui m'a servi '' k Clever ' et S. nourrir ma f amiUe. Cherchez bien dans ce champ, et vous trouverez un tresor. » Les enfants, aprSs la mort de leur pfire, se mirent' k retour- ner le champ en tous sens, bSchant, labourant la terre. lis n'y trouvSrent ni or ni argent; mais la terre bien remu^e, bien labour^e, produisit ^^ une moisson abondante. Le sage vieillard ne les avait pas tromp^s; il leur avait enseign^ que le travail est un tresor. ' § 174. > § 195. ' § 193. ' § 166. • § 198. s § 225. « § 178. • § 158. • § 158. "> § 186. B. Complete the following, as above: 1. II les fit venir auprSs de lui. 2. lis se mirent k retourner le champ. 3. II produisit une moisson. 4. II ne les avait pas tromp6s. Give the future and the past definite in full of: 1. Mourir. 2. Voulant. 3. Fit. 4. Venir. 5. Dit. 6. Servir. C. (Oral.) 1. De quelles personnes parle I'histoire? 2. Qu'est-ce (que c'est) qu'un laboureur? 3. Ce laboureur-ci ^tait-il un jeune homme? 4. Dans quel 6tat se trouvait-il? 5. Qu'est-ce qu'il allait laisser k ses enfants? 6. Avait-il achet^ ce champ? 7. fitait-ce un bon champ? 8. Quel con- eeil le laboureur a-t-il donn6 k ses enfants? 9. Ont-ils bien cherch6? 10. Est-ce qu'ils y ont trouv6 de I'or? 11. Leur pere les avait-il trompfe, alors? 12. Quel tr6sor ont-Os trouv6? 13. Quelle est la morale de I'histoire? D. 1. The father gave his children a proof of his love. 2. He called his children into his presence. 3. The children will own the field after the father. 4. The children dug up and plowed the field. 5. Stir the land, and it will produce a harvest. 6. If you plow this field, you will find a treasure. 7. It will not be silver or gold, but it will be a good harvest. LESSON XLrV 195 8. Your father is not deceiving you, he is teaching you a good lesson. E. A husbandman, who was at the point of death, wished to teach his children that labor is a treasure. Calling his chil- dren into his presence, he told them that they would have the field which his father had owned. It was a good field, and it had fed his father and his father's family. If they would seek in it, they would find a treasure there. After the old man's death, the children dug everywhere in the field, but they found no treasure. There was no gold or silver, but they stirred the land so well that they had an abundant harvest. They had not been deceived. Their father had taught them a good lesson. XLIV. Louis XIV et Jean Bart A. Louis XIV, traversant avec sa cour la galerie de Ver- sailles, aper^oit ' Jean Bart fumant sa pipe dans I'embrasure d'une fenfetre ouverte 2; il le fait' appeler^, et lui dit * d'un ton affeetueux: « Jean Bart, je viens ' de vous nommer chef d'escadre. — Vous avez bien fait ', sire, r^pondH ' le marin en continuant de fumer tranquillement sa pipe. » Cette brusque r^ponse ayant excite parmi les sots courtisans un grand 6clat de rire : « Vous vous trompez, messieurs, leur dit ^ gravement le roi, cette r^ponse est ceUe d'un homme qui sent ^ ee qu'il vaut ', et qui compte m'en donner bient6t de nouvelles preuves. Sans doute, Jean Bart ne parle pas comme vous; mais qui de vous pent '" faire ' ce que fait ' Jean Bart? » « § 213. » § 195. » § 193. ' § 210. • § 223. > § 176. * § 1S8. • § 178. ' 1 166. " § 221. B. Complete the following, as above: 1. II apergoit Jean Bart. 2. II le fait appeler. 3. Je viens de le nommer. 4. Vous avez bien fait. 5. Vous vous trompez. 6. II sent ce qu'il vaut. 7. II ne parle pas comme les autres. 8. Je ne peux faire ce que fait Jean Bart. 9. II continue de fumer tranquiUement. 10. II leur dit gravement. 11. Comptez-vous donner de nouvelles preuves ? 196 A FRENCH GRAMMAR Give the imperfect indicative and the imperfect subjunctive of: 1. Apergoit. 2. Fait. 3. Dit. 4. Viens. 5. Sent. 6. Nomme. 7. R6pondit. 8. Vaut. 9. Appelle. 10. Permit. 11. Montre. 12. Continuant. C. (Oral.) 1. Qui 6tait Louis XIV? 2. Oil est Versailles? 3. Qu'est-ce que c'^tait autrefois? 4. Quel est I'autre person- nage de notre histoire? 5. Quelle 6tait sa profession? 6. fitait- il, ce jour-lS,, k bord de son vaisseau? 7. Qu'est-ce qu'il faisait qui montrait qu'il n'6tait pas courtisan? 8. De quelle fagon le roi a-t-il montr6 qu'il n'en 6tait pas m6content? 9. Quelle sorte de r6ponse Jean Bart a-t-il faite au roi? 10. Quelle im- pression a-t-elle faite sur les courtisans? 11. Quelle en 6tait I'opinion du roi? 12. Pourquoi 6tait-il permis k Jean Bart, et non pas aux courtisans, de faire une brusque r^ponse? D. 1. The king sends for Jean Bart. 2. I shall call him. 3. We have just called Jean Bart. 4. The king had just appointed him rear admiral. 5. A great outburst of laughter was excited by Jean Bart's blunt answer. 6. The king did not appoint the silly courtiers rear admirals. 7. We are mis- taken; it is not a blunt answer. 8. Do not make a mistake. 9. The siUy courtiers did not make blunt answers, because they did not feel their own worth. 10. Jean Bart hopes soon to give the king new proofs of his worth. 11. We cannot do what Jean Bart did. E. Jean Bart was coolly smoking his pipe in the embrasure of a window in the palace (chateau) of Versailles, as the king, accompanied by his courtiers, was passing through the great gallery. The king sent for the brave sailor, and told Mm that he had just been appointed rear admiral. The sailor's blunt reply: " You have done well, sire," caused a burst of laughter among those who were with the king. But Louis knew that it was the reply of a man who would soon give proofs of his worth. Jean Bart did not talk like a courtier, but he did what courtiers could not do. At that time Jean Bart was already forty-one years old and it was late for him (pour qu'il) to change the habits of his youth. LESSON XLV 197 XLV. La Fourmi et le Brin d'Herbe A. J'ai vu ^ une petite fourmi qui allait ^ qk et 1^ cherchant fortune. Elle a rencontr6 sur son chemin un brin d'herbe qu'elle voudrait ' bien emporter; mais comment faire *? II est si gros, et elle est si faible. Alors eUe est mont^e sur un caillou, du haut duquel elle regarde la campagne, comme du haut d'une tour. Elle regarde, elle regarde; enfin elle a apergu ^ deux de ses compagnes qui passent par \k, et elle court ° k elles. EUe se frotte le nez contre leur nez pour leur dire^: « Venez ^ vite avec moi; il y a par \k quelque chose de bon! » Les trois fourmis se precipitant vers le brin d'herbe et le saisissent. Ce que I'une ne pouvait ' faire *, les trois le font * aisement, et elles emportent en triomphe le brin devenu ^ 16ger pour elles. « § 224. 3 § 225. ' § 213. ' § 193. • § 221. 2 § 160. ■• § 195. • § 164. ' § 178. " § 178. B. Complete the following, as above: 1. Elle allait gk et 1^. 2. EUe voudrait bien Temporter. 3. EUe est mont^e. 4. EUe court k eUes. 5. EUe se frotte le nez. 6. Venez. 7. EUes se pr6cipitent. 8. EUes le saisissent. 9. Elle ne pouvait pas le faire. 10. Elles le font ais6ment. Give in full tfie past definite of : 1. Vu. 2. Rencontr6. 3. Re- gard6. 4. Aper5U. 5. Court. 6. Se pr6cipitent. 7. Font. Beginning at the second sentence, relate the story in the past definite, thus: « Elle rencontra, » etc. C. {Oral.) 1. De quel insecte parle-t-on ici? 2. Qu'est-ce qu'elle faisait? 3. Qu'est-ce qu'elle a rencontr^ sur son chemin? 4. Le brin d'herbe 6tait-il gros ou petit? 5. Et la fourmi dtait-eUe forte ou faible? 6. Qu'est-ce que la fourmi aurait voulu faire? 7. Est-ce qu'elle pouvait le faire toute seule? 8. Oil est-eUe mont^e? 9. Qu'est-ce qu'elle a regard^ du haut du caillou? 10. Pour la fourmi le caillou 6tait comme une tour, n'est-ce pas? 11. Qu'est-ce qu'elle apergoit enfin? 12. Que faisaient les deux compagnes de la fourmi? 13. Et la fourmi qu'est-ce qu'elle a fait? 14. Est-ce qu'elle leur a parl6? 15. Comment leur a-t-elleparl6? 16. Qu'est-ce qu'eUe 198 A FRENCH GRAMMAR leur a dit? 17. Quelle est la premiere chose qu'ont faite lea trois fourmis? 18. Et ensuite qu'ont-elles fait? 19. Une fourmi pouvait-elle emporter le brin d'herbe? 20. Les trois fourmis ensemble pouvaient-elles le faire ais^ment? 21. Pour- quoi le brin d'herbe est-il devenu l^ger? D. A little ant was going hither and thither one day. She found a blade of grass on the road. " This blade of grass is very big," thought the ant. " I am too weak to carry it off alone. I know what I shall do. I shall climb upon a pebble. From the top of the pebble I shall look around. The pebble will be for me like a taU tower." She did so. She looked about her a long time. At last she saw two of her compan- ions. They were passing along (par) the same road. She called them, and they ran to her. She said to them: " Come here, for I have found something good." She said this by rubbing her nose against theirs. Ants, as you know, cannot speak hke men. After that the three ants rushed towards the blade of grass. They seized it quickly. It had been very heavy for one ant. But the three together carried it off easily. XLVI. Le Bon Samaritain A. Un homme descendit ^ de Jerusalem a Jericho, et tomba parmi des brigands, qui le d6pouill6rent. Aprfes I'avoir bless6 de plusieurs coups, ils s'en allerent ^, le laissant a demi mort.' Un prStre, qui par hasard descendait ' par ce chemin-la, I'ayant vu '', passa outre. Un 16vite, venant * aussi dans le meme endroit, et le voyant ■•, passa outre. Mais un Samaritain, qui voyageait *, vint ' vers cet homme, et le voyant *, fut touch6 de compassion. S'approchant de lui, il banda ses plaies, et il y versa de I'huile et du vin; puis il le mit ' sur sa monture, le mena * k une auberge, et prit ' soin de lui. Le lendemain, en partant", il tira de sa poche deux deniers d'ar- gent, et les donnant k I'aubergiste, lui diti': « Aie soin de lui, et tout ce que tu d^penseras de plus je te le rendrai * k mon retour. » §210. * 5 224. • § 156. • § 158. " § 166. 5160. « § 178. ' § 198. • §202. " § 193. 5174 LESSON XLVI i99 B. Complete the following, as above: 1. II desceadit. 2. lis le d6pouill6rent. 3. lis s'en all^rent. 4. II descendit par ce chemin. 5. II passa outre. 6. II viat vers cet homme. 7. II y versa de I'liiiile. 8. II le mit sur sa monture. 9. II prit soin de lui. Give the present indicative and present subjunctive of: 1. S'en all^rent. 2. Mort. 3. Venant. 4. Voyant. 5. Mit. C. {Oral.) 1. D'ou a-t-oa tir6 cette Mstoire? 2. Com- ment s'appelle I'histoire? 3. Ou sont Jerusalem et J6rieho? 4. Est-ce que la terre salute est un grand ou un petit pays? 5. Qu'ont fait les brigands au voyageur? 6. En quel 6tat se trouvait-il apres leur d6part? 7. Quelles personnes sont venues ensuite? 8. Qu'est-ce qu'elles out fait? 9. Qui est venu apr&s le prStre et le 16vite? 10. Est-ce que les Samaritains 6taient bien aimfe des Juifs? 11. Est-ce que cela a emp^clifi le Samaritain de faire le bien? 12. Qu'est-ce qu'il a fait au Juif? 13. Aprfis I'avoir soign6 qu'a-t-il fait? 14. Qu'a-t-il donn6 S, I'aubergiste? 15. En quittant I'auberge, qu'a-t-il dit? D. 1. If we fall among thieves, they will strip us. 2. After having wounded us they wiU depart. 3. If you should see a poor traveler half dead, would you pass by on the other side? 4. If the priest had been touched with compassion, he would have bound up the wounds. 5. Let us pour oil and wine into his wounds. 6. Let us put the poor man on our own beast. 7. Let us take him to the inn. 8. Let us take care of him there. 9. The next day we shall give money to the inn- keeper. 10. On our return we shall give him back whatever he shall have spent for our friend. E. A man, who was going down from Jerusalem to Jericho, fell among thieves. They stripped him and wounded him, and left him half dead. Then a priest and a Levite came by chance to the same place, and they saw him and passed by on the other side. But a Samaritan, who was going down by that road, saw him, and was touched with compassion. Then, after having bound up his wounds, he put him on his beast and took him to an inn. On the morrow he gave money to 200 A FRENCH GRAMMAR the innkeeper, and said that on his return he would give the innkeeper whatever he should spend if he took care of the poor man. XLVn. M. Laffitte et rfipingle A. Lorsque M. Laffitte, le fameux banquier, vint' k Paris, en 1788, h I'^ge de 21 ans, toute son ambition se bornait k ob- tenir ^ une petite place dans une maison de banque. II se pr^senta chez un riche banquier. « Impossible de vous ad- mettre ^ chez moi, du moins pour le moment, lui dit * le banquier; mes bureaux sont au complet. » Le jeune homme salue et se retire. En traversant la cour, il apergoit ^ k terre une 6pingle, et la ramasse. Debout devant la fen^tre de son cabinet le riche banquier avait suivi ^ des yeux la retraite du jeune homme. II lui vit ' ramasser l'6pingle et ce trait lui fit ' plaisir. Le soil mSme le jeune homme regut ' un billet du banquier, qui lui disait *: « Vous avez une place dans mes bureaux; vous pou- vez ' venir^ I'occuper d6s demain. » Le jeune homme devint' bientdt caissier, puis associ6, puis mattre, de la premiere maison de banque de Paris, et enfin homme d'fltat trSs influent sous Louis-Philippe. > § 178. » I 198. 6 I 213. ' § 224. • § 221. ' § 177. * § 193. • § 206. » § 195. B. Complete the following, as above: 1. II vint k Paris. 2. Elle se bornait k cela. 3. II se pr6senta chez le banquier. 4. II se retire. 5. II apergoit k terre une 6pingle. 6. II I'avait suivi des yeux. 7. II vit ramasser l'6pingle. 8. II regut un billet. 9. II lui disait. 10. Vous pouvez venir. 11. II de- vint mattre. Give in full the future and conditional of: 1. Tenir. 2. Ad- mettre. 3. Apergoit. 4. Suivi. 5. Vit. C. (Oral.) 1. Quel kge avait M. Laffitte k son arriv6e k Paris? 2. Qu'est-ce qu'il cherchait? 3. R6ussit-il d'abord k trouver une place? 4. Oil se pr6senta-t-il? 5. Que lui a-t-on dit? 6. En se retirant oil va-t-il? 7. Qu'est-ce qu'il trouve? 8. Qui I'a vu? 9. En 6tait-il content? 10. De queUe fagon LESSON XLVm 201 Sr-t-il montr^ son contentement? 11. Qu'est devenu le jeune homme par la suite? 12. Quelle est la morale de I'histoire? D. 1. If your ambition is only to get a humble position, you wiU get it. 2. Present yourself at the ofi&ce of the rich banker. 3. He wiU admit you into his employ. 4. His offices are not full. 5. Do you see that pin on the ground? 6. Pick it up. 7. There is the rich banker standing at his office window. 8. The banker is watching the young man as he retires. 9. If we see him pick up a pin, it (cela) will please us. 10. Did you receive a note from the banker? 11. You shall have a position in his banking-house. 12. You wiU soon become his partner, will you not? 13. Those who pick up pins may become statesmen. E. When M. Laffitte was twenty-one years of age he came to Paris. He wished to get a humble position with a rich banker. But when he presented himself, the rich banker told him that his offices were fuU, and that he could not admit him. He withdrew. The rich banker watched him from his office window, and saw him pick up a pin which he noticed on the ground as he was crossing the yard. This action pleased the banker. That very evening he sent a note to the young man, which said that he could have a position in his offices the very next day. The young man became head of a great banking-house, and at last an influential statesman. XLVin. Le SMet de Benjamin Franklin A. Benjamin Franklin raconte I'anecdote suivante *: « Quand j'6tais un enfant de cinq ou six ans, mes amis, un jour de fSte, rempUrent ma petite poche de sous. Je partis ^ tout de suite pour une boutique ou I'on vendait ' des jouets. Chemin faisant *, je vis ^ dans les mains d'un p,utre petit gar^on un sifflet, dont le son me charma. Je lui donnai en ^change tout mon argent. Revenu ^ chez moi, fort content de mon achat, sifflant par toute la maison, je fatiguai les oreilles de toute la famiUe. • § 206. • § 210. » § 224. ' § 166. * § 195, « S 178. 202 A FBENCH GRAMMAR Mes Mres et mes sceurs apprenant* que j'avais tout donnfi pour un mauvais instrument, me dirent ^ que je I'avais pay6 ' dix fois plus cher qu'il ne valait^. Alors ils 6num6rerent8 toutes les jolies choses que j'aurais pu * acheter ' avec mon argent si j'avais 6t6 plus prudent. lis me tournerent tellement en ridicule que j'en pleural. Cependant, cet accident fut de quelque utility pour moi. Lorsque plus tard i'6tais tent^ d'acheter ^ quelque chose qui ne m'^tait pas n^cessaire, je disais^ en moi-meme: Ne donnons pas trop pour le sifflet, et j'6pargnais mon argent. » 1 §202. 3 gi57. 6 J 158. 2 § 193. * § 223. « § 221. B. Complete the following, as above: 1. Quand j'dtais un enfant. 2. lis remplirent ma poche. 3. Je partis tout de suite. 4. Je vis un sifflet. 5. Je fatiguai tous mes amis. 6. Je remplis mes poches, tu remplis tes poches, etc. 7. lis me dirent, ils te dirent, etc. 8. Je disais en moi-meme, tu disais en toi-m^me, etc. C. {Oral.) 1. Qui 6tait Benjamin Franklin? 2. A quelle 6poque vivait-il? 3. Quel dge avait-il k I'^poque de I'anecdote? 4. Qu'est-ce qu'il avait dans sa poche? 5. Qui le lui avait donn6? 6. Pour quel endroit est-il parti ensuite? 7. Y est-il jamais arriv^? 8. Quel 6tait I'obstacle? 9. Qu'est-ce qu'il a fait de son argent? 10. A son retour chez lui, qu'est-ce qu'il a fait? 11. A-t-il charm6 ses f reres et ses sceurs? 12. Est-ce qu'il avait pay6 assez cher son sifflet? 13. Est-ce que la famille 6tait contente de son achat? 14. De quelle fagon la famille a-t-elle fait voir son m6contentement? 15. Le pauvre Franklin 6tait-il content k la fin? 16. Quelle legon Franklin a-t-il regue par cet accident? D. 1. You have paid twice as much for that apple as it is worth. 2. If you pay ten cents for that pencil, that will be three times as much as it is worth. 3. Never pay more for things than they are worth. 4. We could have bought many pretty things with our money, if we had been prudent. 5. If our friend had been less prudent, he could not have bought so many pretty things. 6, That accident will be of some use to LESSON XLIX 203 our friends. 7. When we are ifut.) tempted to buy some- thing which is not necessary for us, we shall say to ourselves: " We are not going to give too much for the whistle." E. When Benjamin Frankhn was five years old, his brother, on a holiday, fiUed his pockets with coppers. Starting off at once for a shop where toys were sold, he met on the way another little boy who had a whistle. The sound of the in- strument charmed him, and he gave all his money to have it. He was much pleased with his purchase, but he whistled so much aU over the house that he tired the whole family. His brothers and sisters asked him where he had bought his whistle and how much he had paid for it. He told them he had given aU his money to the Uttle boy. Then they told him he had paid too much for it. They said too that if he had been more prudent, he could have bought ten times as many pretty things, and he cried on account of it. But the affair was of some use to him later on. Whenever he was tempted to buy things which he did not need, he would always say to himself: " I will not give too much for the whistle." XLIX. Henri IV at le Paysan A. Henri IV, dans une chasse, s'^tant 6cart6, suivant ' sa coutume, de ses gardes et de sa cour, rencontra un paysan assis ^ sous un arbre. « Que fais-tu ^ Ik? lui dit * le prince. — J'6tais venu ^ ici des le point du jour, pour voir ^ passer le roi, r^pondit' le paysan; sans ce d^sir, je serais k labourer mon champ, qui n'est pas fort 61oign6. — Si tu veux * monter sur la croupe de mon cheval, lui r^pliqua Henri, je te conduirai ' oil est le roi, et tu le verras ^ k ton aise. » Le paysan, enchants, profite de la rencontre, monte k c6tl du roi, et demande, chemin faisant ', comment il pourra '" recon- naltre " le roi. « Tu n' auras qu'k regarder celui qui sera con- vert" pendant que tons les autres auront la t^te nue. » Enfin le moment arrive oil le roi rejoint '^ une partie de sa cour et se trouve parmi ses courtisans; tons se d6couvrent", • I 206. * § 193. ' I 210. '» § 221. « § 176. • § 215. 8 § 178. » § 225. " § 188. « } 19a • § 195. • § 224. • § 185. 204 A FBENCH GRAMMAR excepts lui. Alors il demande au paysan: « Eh bien, quel est le roi? — Ma foi, monsieur, lui r^pondit-iF, c'est vous ou moi, car il n'y a que nous deux qui ayons le chapeau sur la t^te. » 1 § 210. B. Complete the follomng, as above: 1. J'6tais venu. 2. Tu veux voir le roi. 3. Tu le verras k ton aise. 4. II pourra reconnaitre le roi. 5. II sera couvert. 6. II rejoint les courtisans. 7. lis se d6couvrent. 8. II n'y a que nous qui ayons. C. (Oral.) 1. Qui 6tait Henri IV? 2. A quelle 6poque vivait-il? 3. Quelle 6tait sa coutume quand il 6tait k la chasse? 4. Qui a-t-il rencontr6 un jour? 5. Qu'est-ce que c'est qu'un paysan? 6. Que faisait le paysan? 7. Depuis combien de temps y 6tait-il? 8. Pourquoi y 6tait-il venu? 9. S'il n'^tait pas venu ou aurait-il 6t6? 10. Qu'est-ce que le roi a propos6 au paysan? 11. Le paysan a-t-il accepts? 12. Qu'est-ce que le paysan a demand^ au roi en chemin? 13. Quel 6tait le signe par lequel on reconnaitrait le roi? 14. Oil le roi et le paysan arrivent-ils bient6t? 15. Qu'est-ce que les courtisans ont fait k leur approche? 16. Combien de personnes restaient couvertes? 17. Et combien de rois y avait-il dans la compagnie? D. 1. We have wandered from the court. 2. If the king had not wandered from the court, he would not have met the peasant. 3. We came here at the very peep of day. 4. I have not seen the king go by. 5. The peasants are busy plowing the field. 6. If you get up beside me, you will see the king. 7. As they went along, the peasant said to the king: " Take me where the king is." 8. Everybody had his hat on, and we could not recognize the king. 9. If the courtiers had taken off their hats, we could have recognized the king. E. One day Henry IV had wandered from his courtiers. Meeting a peasant who was sitting under a tree, he asked the latter what he was doing there. The peasant replied that ho had been there since daybreak, and that he wished to see mssoN L 205 the king, and that if he had not come, he would be busy plowing his field. The king said to him: " Get up behind me, and I shall take you where you can see the king." The peasant was deUghted, and got up beside the king. As they went along, he asked how he should recognize the king, and the king told him to look at the one who should have his hat on, while the others should be bareheaded. When they ar- rived where the courtiers were, the latter took off their hats. Then the king asked the peasant which was the king. He replied: " We two have our hats on, the others are bare- headed: it is you or I." L. Thomas et les Cerises A. Un paysan traversait la campagne avec son fils Thomas. « Regarde! lui dit-il ^ en chemin, voilS, par terre un fer k cheval perdu '', ramasse-le! » « Bah! r6pondit ^ Thomas, il ne vaut ' pas la peine de se baisser pour si peu de chose! » Le pfere ne dit ^ rien, ramassa le fer et le mit * dans sa poche. Arriv6 au village voisin, il le vendit ^ pour quelques centimes au mar^chal ferrant, et acheta * des cerises avec cet argent. Cela fait °, ils se remirent ^ en route. Le soleil 6tait brdlant. Thomas mourait ' de soif, et avait de la peine k poursuivre ' son chemin. Le p6re, qui marchait le premier, laissa, comme par hasard, tomber une cerise. Thomas la ramassa avec em- pressement, et la mangea '. Quelques pas plus loin, une seconde cerise s'6chappa des mains du pfire, et Thomas la saisit avec le mSme empressement. Le p&re fit * de m^me avec toutes les cerises. Lorsque I'enfant eut port6 k la bouche la derniSre cerise, le p^re se retourna et lui dit *: « Vols *", mon ami, tu n'as pas voulu " te baisser une fois pour ramasser le fer k cheval, et tu as it& oblig6 '^ de te baisser plus de vingt fois pour ramasser les cerises. » > § 193. * § 198. ' § 174. • § 156. " § 225. » § 210. » I 158. a § 206. «> § 224. " § 156. • § 223. « § 195. B. Complete the following, as above: 1. II ne dit rien. 2. II 206 A FRENCH GRAMMAR vendit le fer. 3. II mourait de soif. 4. II mangea une cerise. 5. 11 la saisit. 6. II fit de mSme. 7. lis se remirent en route. 8. II s'6chappa de ses mains. 9. II se retourna. 10. Tu t'es hsLissi. C. {Oral.) 1. De quelles personnes parle-t-on dans cette Ms- fcoire? 2. Qu'est-ce que c'est qu'un paysan? 3. fitait-il seul? 4. Qu'est-ce qu'ils ont vu en chemin? 5. Qu'est-ce que c'est qu'un fer k cheval? 6. Qu'est-ce que le p6re a dit au fils? 7. Qu'est-ce que le fils a repondu? 8. Lequel des deux 6tait le plus prudent? 9. Par quelle action a-t-il montr^ sa pru- dence? 10. A qui a-t-on vendu le fer k cheval? 11. Pour- quoi I'a-t-on vendu k un mar^chal ferrant? 12. Qu'est-ce qu'on a achet6 avec I'argent? 13. Quel temps faisait-il? 14. Quel 6tait I'effet de la chaleur sur le petit Thomas? 15. Est-ce que le p6re n'avait rien pour la soif? 16. Est-ce que les cerises sont bonnes pour la soif? 17. Qu'est-ce que le p6re a fait des cerises? 18. Et qu'est-ce que son fils en a fait? 19. Combien en a-t-il mangles? 20. Pourquoi aurait-il mieux fait de se baisser pour le fer k cheval? D. 1. It was not worth the trouble. 2. It will not be worth the trouble. 3. If it is worth the trouble, we shall pick up the horseshoe. 4. Put the horseshoe into your pocket and buy cherries. 5. We shall set out again on our journey. 6. If the sun is hot, they will not set out again. 7. I am very thirsty (dying with thirst) ; give me some cherries. 8. We have difficulty in picking up the cherries. 9. If you are dying with thirst, I shall drop a cherry. 10. The cherries are on the ground; pick them up. 11. If you walk ahead, will you pick up the cherries? 12. A few steps farther on, I stooped to pick up the horseshoe. 13. Why did you seize the horseshoe so eagerly? 14. We did not seize it eagerly. 15. If you had been wilhng to turn around, we should have given you the cherries. 16. Stoop, if you wish to pick them up. E. As a peasant and his son were crossing the country, they saw a horseshoe on the ground. The father told his son to pick it up and put it into his pocket. The son replied that it was not worth while to stoop for a horseshoe. Then the LESSON LI 207 father stooped and picked it up. They sold it to the black- smith of the neighboring village, and bought some cherries, which the father put into his pocket. They pursued their way, the father walking ahead. The sun was hot and Thomas was very thirsty, and, as if by chance, a cherry fell from his father's pocket. The son seizing it, ate it, and also a second one, which sUpped from his father's pocket. Soon the last cherry was carried to his mouth, and his father, turning round, told him that if he had been willing to stoop once for the horse- shoe, he would not have been obliged to stoop twenty times foi the cherries. LI. Frederic le Grand et son Page A. Un jour Fr6d6ric le Grand, roi de Prusse, ayant sonn6 sans que personne r6pondlt * k cet appel, ouvrit ^ la porte de son antichambre et trouva son page endormi ^ sur une chaise. Au moment oil il allait * le r^veiller, il aper9ut ^ un papier 6crit ° sortant ' de la poche du page. La curiosity du roi fut excit6e, il prit * le papier et le lut '. C'^tait une lettre de la mfere du jeune homme, dans laquelle eUe remerciait son fils de ce qu'il lui envoyait " une partie de ses gages pour la soulager " dans sa misere. Le roi, ayant lu ' la lettre, prit * un rouleau de ducats et le ghssa avec la lettre dans la poche du page. Un ins- tant aprSs il sonna si fort que le page se r^veilla et accourut •* auprls de lui. « Vous avez dormi ' » lui dit ^' le roi. Le jeune homme, ayant honte, t&cha de s'excuser. Dans son embarras il mit " la main dans sa poche, et y trouva le rouleau de ducats. II le prit *, palit, trembla, et ne put ^^ articuler un seul mot. « Qu'avez-vous ? dit ^ le roi. — H61as! sire, dit " le page, quel- qu'un veut ^^ me perdre ^; je ne sais " pas d'oil m'est venu " cet or. — La fortune ne vient-elle " pas sou vent en dormant '? reprit ' Fr6d6ric. Envoie " cette somme k ta mSre, en lui fai- sant " mes compliments et assure-la bien que j'aurai soin d'elle et de toi. » > § 210. 5 I 213. « I 197. " § 193. " § 222. » § 176. • § 194. " § 157. " § 198. " § 178. » § 166. ' § 166. n § 156. " § 221. " § 196, ♦ i 160. • § 202. 12 § 164. « § 225. 208 A FRENCH GBAMMAR B. Complete the following, as above: 1. Sans qu'il r^pondit. 2. II ouvrit la porte. 3. II lut le billet. 4. II allait le r6veiller. 5. II apergut un papier. 6. II remerciait le roi. 7. II envoyait I'argent. 8. II prit le rouleau. C. {Oral.) 1. Quel est le sujet de cette anecdote? 2. A quelle 6poque vivait Fr6d6ric le Grand? 3. Ou est la Prusse? 4. Qu'est-ce que c'est qu'un page? 5. O^ 4tait le page dont parle Fhistoire? 6. Qu'est-ce qu'il y faisait? 7. Qu'est-ce que les pages devraient faire dans les antiohambres des rois? 8. Est-ce que le roi s'est mis en colere contre le page? 9. Qu'est-ce qu'il a fait? 10. En lisant la lettre qu'est-ce que le roi a d^couvert? 11. Est-ce que la m6re du page 6tait riche? 12. Qu'est-ce que le page faisait pour elle? 13. Le roi en 6tait-il content? 14. De quelle fa9on a-t-il montr6 son contentement? 15. Comment le jeune homme a-t-il d6couvert ce que le roi avait fait ? 16. Qu'est-ce que c'est qu'un ducat? 17. Que pensait-il en sentant les ducats dans sa poche? 18. De quelle fapon le roi a-t-il calm6 le jeune homme? 19. Est-ce que le proverbe est toujours vrai: « La fortune nous vient en dormant? » D. One day Frederick the Great rang, and nobody answered him. Opening the door of the antechamber, he finds his page asleep. A letter, which was sticking out of the page's pocket, aroused the king's curiosity. The young man used to send his mother a part of his wages, and in this letter she was thanking him for it. The king read the letter, and, taking a roll of ducats, slipped it, with the letter, into the young man's pocket. Then ringing very loud, he waked the page, who hastened into his presence. He asked the young man if he had been asleep. The young man was ashamed, and tried to excuse himself. Putting his hand into his pocket he finds the ducats. He trembles, and cannot utter a word. The king asked him what was the matter with him, and he replied that somebody wished no ruin him, for he did not know where the ducats came from. The king replies that good luck comes to us often while we sleep. He tells the page that he will take care of his mother. •5 S ^ -'1 W \l "%- s si tL. Mil «Li/^____^ 1 „ Jus h A {Mi 2- §153 REGULAR VERBS 209 PART II THE VERB REGULAR VERBS 153. Regular Conjugations. Regular verbs are conven- iently divided into three classes or conjugations, according as the present infinitive ends in -er, -ir, -re, and are inflected in their simple tenses as follows: Present donn er, to give II Infinitive Mood Present fin ir, to finish III Present romp re, to break Present donn ant, giving Past donn e, given Participles Present fin iss ant, finishing Past fin i, finished Present romp ant, breaking Past romp u, broken Present / give, am giving, etc. je donn e tu donn es il donn e nous donn ons vous donn ez ils donn ent Indicative Mood Present I finish, am finishing, etc. je fini s tu fin i s ilfinit nous fin iss ons vous fin iss ez ils fin iss ent Present I break, am breaking, etc. je romp s tu romp s il romp t nous romp ons vous romp ez ils romp ent 210 THE VERB S isa Imperfect I was giving, used to give, etc. je donn ais tu donn ais il dorm ait nous donn ions vous donn iez lis donn aient Impeefect / was finishing, tised to finish, etc. je fin iss ais tu fin iss ais il fin iss ait nous fin iss ions vous fin iss iez lis fin iss aient Imperfect / was breaking, itsed to break, etc. je romp ais tu romp ais il romp ait nous romp ions vous romp iez lis romp aient Past Definite / gave, etc. je donn ai tu donn as il donn a nous donn Smes vous donn &tes Us donn erent Past Definite I finished, etc. je finis tu finis il finit nous fin imes vous fin ites ils fin irent Past Definite I broke, etc. je romp is tu romp is il romp it nous romp imes vous romp ites ils romp irent Future / shall give, etc. je donner ai tu donner as il donner a nous donner ons vous donner ez ils donner ont Future / shaR finish, etc. je finir ai tu finir as U finir a nous finir ons vous finir ez Us finir ont Future / shaU break, etc. je rompr ai tu rompr as il rompr a nous rompr ons vous rompr ez ils rompr ont Conditional / should give, etc. je donner ais tu donner ais il donner ait nous donner ions vous donner iez Us donner aient CONDITIONAI, / should finish, etc. je finir ais tu finir ais U finir ait nous finir ions vous finir iez ils finir aient Conditional / should break, etc, je rompr ais tu rompr ais U rompr ait nous rompr ions vous rompr iez Us rompr aient S154 AUXILIABY VERBS 2n Present Give, etc. donne* (qu'il donn e) donn ons donn ez (qu'ik donn ent) * This form becomes 068. 3, 4). Imperative Mood Present finish, etc. finis (qu'il fin iss e) fin iss ons fin iss ez (qu'ils fin iss ent) donn es when followed by -y or -en (cf. § 370, 3, Present Break, etc. romps (qu'il romp e) romp ons romp ez (qu'ils romp ent) Present (That) I (may) give, etc. (que) je donn e (que) tu donn es (qu') il donn e (que) nous donn ions (que) vous doim iez (qu') Us donn ent Imperfect (That) I (might) give, etc. (que) je donn asse (que) tu donn asses (qu') n donn kt (que) nous donn assions (que) vous donn assiez (qu') lis donn assent Subjunctive Mood Present (That) I (may) finish, etc. (que) je fin iss e (que) tu fin iss es (qu') il fin iss e (que) nous fin iss ions (que) vous fin iss iez (qu') ils fin iss ent Imperfect (That) I (might) finish, etc. (que) je fin isse (que) tu fin isses (qu') n fin it (que) nous fin issions (que) vous fin issiez (qu') lis fin issent Present (That) I (may) break, etc. (que) je romp e (que) tu romp es (qu') il romp e (que) nous romp ions (que) vous romp iez (qu') lis romp ent Imperfect (That) I (might) break, etc. (que) je romp isse (que) tu romp isses (qu') il romp it (que) nous romp issions (que) vous romp issiez (qu') ils romp issent AUXILIARY VERBS 154. The auxiliary verbs avoir, to have, and etre, to are conjugated in their simple tenses as follows: Infinitive Pres. avoir, to have Pres. fetre, to be 212 THE VERB Participles 154 Pbes. ayant, having Past, eu, had Present / have, am having, etc. j'ai nous avons Pres. 6tant, being Past. 6t6, been tu as il a vous avez ils ont Indicative Present I am, am being, etc. je suis nous sommes tues vous Stes il est ilssont Imperfect / had, was having, etc. i 'avals nous aviona tu avals vous avlez il avait Us avaient Past Definite I had, etc. j'eus nous eHmes tu eus vous e ailles, aUle, aUions, alliez, aillent. 3. Past Part, alle ; past indef. je suis aU^, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, vais [ve], vas, va, allons, allez, vont; impve. va (vas-y), allons, allez. 5. Past Def. allai, alias, alia, allamea, allAtes, allSrent; impf. subj. allasse, aJlasses, alldt, allassions, allassiez, allassent. * The stem of the future is from the Latin infinitive ire. Like aller: B'en aller, go away. 161. Envoyer, to send 1. Infinitive, envoyer; fut. enverr ai, etc.; condl. enverrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, envoyant; impf. indie, envoyais, envoyais, envoyait, envoyions [avwaijs], envoyiez, envoyaient; pres. subj. envoie, envoies, envoie, envoyions [avwaij3j, envoyiez, envoient. 218 THE VERB §§ 162-164 3. Past PaH. envoye; past indef. j'ai envoys, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, envoie, envoies, envoie, envoyons, envoyez, envoient; impve. envoie, envoyons, envoyez. 5. Past Def. envoyai, envoyas, envoya, envoyames, envoyates, envoySrent; impf. svbj. envoyaase, envoyasses, envoyAt, envoyassions. envoyassiez, envoyassent. Like envoy er: renvoyer, send away, dismiss IRKEGULAR VERBS IN -IT 162. Acquerir, to acquire 1. Infinitive, acquerir; fut. acquerrai, acquerraa, etc.; condl. acquer- rais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, acqueraat; impf. indie, acqu&ais, etc.; pres. sitbj. acquiSre, acquiferea, acqui^re, acqu6rions, acqufoiez, acquiferent. 3. Past Pari, acquis ; past indef. j'ai acquis, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, acgniers, acquiers, acquiert, acqu^rons, acqu6rez, acquiferent; impve. acquiers, acqu6rons, acqu^rez. 5. Past Def. acquis, acquis, acquit, acqulmes, acquttes, acquirent; impf. suhj. acquisse, acquisses, acquit, acquissions, acquissiez, acquissent. Like acquerir: conquMr, conquer * querir or quferir, seek requferir, require, claim e'enquerir, inquire reconqu^rir, reconquer * Has only the infinitive. 163. Benir, to bless Is regular, but has also an irregular past participle benit, used only as adjective: De I'eau benite; du pain benit Holy water; consecrated bread 164. Courir, to run 1. Infinitive, courir; fut. courrai, courraa, etc.; condl. courrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, courant; impf. indie, courais, etc.; pres. subj. coure, ooures, couie, courions, com-iez, courent. 3. Past Part, couru; past indef. j'ai couru, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, cours, cours, court, courons, coure,T, courent; impve. 30urs, courons, courez. 5. Past Def. courus, courus, courut, courftmes, courAtes, couru- §§ 165-166 lEKEGUIiAR VERBS IN -IB 219 rent; impf. svhj. courusse, courusses, courtit, courusaiona, courussiez, courusaent. Like courir are its compounds: accourir, run up, hasten discourir, discourse recourir, run again, apply concourir, cooperate, con- encourir, incur secourir, succor, help cur, compete parcourir, run over Note. — Courre, chase (a hunting term), sometimes replaces courir in the infinitive. 165. Cueillir, to gather, pick 1. Infinitive, cueillir; ftU. c ueillerai, etc.; condl. cueiUerais, etc. 2. Pres. Part. cueiUant; impf. indie, cueillais, etc.; pres. svhj. cueille, cueDles, cueille, cueiUions, cueiUiez, cueillent. 3. Past Part, cueilli; past indef. j'ai cueilli, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, cueille, cueUles, cueille, cueOlons, cueUlez, cueiUent; impve. cueille, cueilloiis, cueillez. 5. Past Def. cueillis, cueiUis, cueillit, cueilllmes, cueOlites, cueilli- rent; impf. svbj. cueiUisse, cueiUisses, cueiUlt, cueUlissions, cueillissiez, cueillissent. 06s.; The present indicative, future, and conditional are like those oi donner. Like cueillir: accueillir, welcome * assaillir, assail * tressaillir, start recueillir, gather, collect t saiUir, jut out * Regular ia future and conditional: assaillirai, etc. t Saillir, gush out, rush forth, is regular, like finir. 166. Dormir, to sleep 1. Infinitive, dormir; fut. dormirai, etc.; condl. dormirais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, dorma nt: impf. indie, dormais, etc.; pres. subj. dorme, dormes, dorme, dormions, dormiez, dorment. 3. Past Part, dormi; past indef. j'ai dormi, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, dors, dors, dort, dormons, dormez, dorment; impve. dors, dormons, dormez^ ~'" ~ 5. Past Def. dormis, dormis, dormit, donnlmes, dormttes, dormirent; impf. subj. dormisse, dormisses, dormit, dormissions, dormissiez, dormissent. Like dormir: endormir, put to sleep se rendormir, go to sleep ^bouiUir, hail away s'endormir, fall asleep again rebouillir, boil again rendormir, p%it to sleep redormir, sleep again mentir, lie again bouillir, bail d^mentir. cordradiU, belit 220 THE VEKB §§ 167-168 partir, set out se repentir, repent Bervir, serve dfepartir, distribute sentir, feel se servir, make uae Be d^partir, desist consentir, consent desservir, clear the table repartir, set out again, pressentir, forebode sortir, go out reply ressentir, resent ressortir, go out again Note. — Asservir, enslave, assortir, sort, match, ressoitir, depend (on, 4), repartir, distribute, are like finir. Observe the Present Indicative of the following types, which are represented in the above Ust: bouillir: bous, bous, bout, bouillons, bomllez, bouiUent mentir: mens, mens, ment, mentons, mentez, mentent y^' partir: pars, pars, part, partons, partez, partent se repentir: repens, repens, repent, repentons, repentez, repentent sentir: sens, sens, sent, sentons, sentez, sentent servir: sers, sers, sert, servons, servez, servent sortir: sors, sors, sort, sortons, sortez, sortent 167. Faillir, to fail 1. Infinitive, faillir; fut. faudrai , faudras, etc.; condl. faudrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, faillant; impf. indie, faillais, etc.; pres. subj. faille, failles, faille, faillions, faiUiez, faiUent. 3. Past Part, failli; past indef. j'ai faiUi, etc. 4. Pres. Indie. faugi_faux, fa ut, faiU onSi_fail lez. faillen t: impve. y » • 5. Past De/. faillis, faillis, faillit, failltmes, faiUttes, faillirent; imp/. svitj. faillisse, faillisses, faillit, faiHissions, faUlissiez, faillissent. Note. — The irreg. forms of pres. indie, fut., and condi. are usually replaced by the regular forms (cf. finir). Like faiUir: d^faHlir, faint, fail (pres. indio. usually defaus, defaus, defaut) Note. — Faillir, fail in business, is usually like finir. 168. Ferir, to strike Used only in Sans coup ferir, Without striking a blow, and in the past part, tint, wounded (a veterinary term). 169. Fleurir, to flourish, etc. Pres. Part, florissant; impf. indie, florissais, etc., when used of per sons or a collection of persons, or fleurissais, etc., when used of things, otherwise like finir. Note. — Fleurir, blossom, bloom (in a Uteral sense) is like finir. g§ 170-174 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -IR 22J 170. Fuir, to flee, fly 1. Infinitive, fuir; /irf. fuirai, etc.; condl. fuirais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, fuyantj impf. indie, fuyais, etc.; pres. siibj. fuie, fuiea, fuie, fuyions, fuyiez, fuient. 3. Past Part, fm; past indef. j'ai fui, etc. 4. Pres. India, fuis, fuis, fuit, fuyons, fuyez , fuient; impve. fuis, fuyons, fuyez. 5. Past De/. fuis, fuis, fuit, fulmes, fuites, fuirent; impf. svhj. fuiaae, fuissea, futt, fuissiona, fuissiez, fuissent. Like fuir: B'enfuir, flee, escape 171. Gesir, to lie, lie buried 1. Infinitive, gesir; fvi. ; amdl. . 2. Pres. Part, gisant; impf. indie, gisais, etc.; pres. subj. . 3. Past Part. . 4. Pres. Indie. , , g^t, gisons, gisez, giaent; impve. , 5. Past Def. ; impf. svhj . Note. — Its most frequent use is in epitaphs: Ci-git, Here lies, Ci- gisent, Here lie. 172. Hair, to hate 1. Infinitive, hair; fvi. hairai, etc.; conSl. hairais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, haissant; imp/. tJidic. haissais, etc.; pres. stifej. haaase, haosses, haasse, iiaissions, haissiez, hajfesent. 3. Past Part. haJ; past indef. j'ai hai, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, hais, hais, halt, haJissonB, haiss ez, haissent; impve. hais, haissons, haissez. 5. Past Def. hais, hais, halt, haimes, ha ites, hairent; impf. svhj. haisse, hatsses, halt , haissions, haissiez, haissent. 06s..' Hair loses its diaeresis in the present indicative and imperative singiilar, and takes no circumflex accent; otherwise like finir. 173. Issir, to spring (from, de), etc. Used only in the past part, issu; past indef. je suis issu, etc. 174. Mourir, to die 1. Infinitive, mourir; ftU. mourrai, mourras, etc, ; condl. mourraiS) ate. 222 THE VBHB §§ 175-177 2. Pres. Part, mourant; impf. indie, mourais, etc.; pres. svhj. meure, meures, meure, mourions, mouriez, meurent. 3. Past Part, mort; past indef. je suis mort, etc. ' 4. Pres. Indie, meurs, meurs, meurt, mo urons , mourez, meiu;entj impve. meurs, mourons, mourez. 5. Past Def. moiirus, mourus, mourut, mourlimes, mounites, mou- rurent; impf. svhj. mourusse, mourusaes, mouriit, mourussions, mou- russiez, mounissent. 06s.: The stem-vowel becomes eu wherever it bears the stress. Like mourir: Be mourir, be dying (used only in infin., pres. indie, impf. indie.) 175. Ouiir, to hear Is haxdly used beyond the infinitive and past participle: J'ai oul dire, / have heard said, etc. 176. Ouvrir, to open 1. Infinitive, ouvrir; fut. ouvrirai, etc.; eondl. ouvrirais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, quvrant; impf. indie, ouvrais, etc.; pres. subj. ouvre, ouvres, ouvre, ouvrions, ouvriez, ouvrent. 3. Past Part, ouvert; past indef. j'ai ouvert, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, ouvre, ouvres, ouvre, ouvTmas,_ouYiea, ouvrent; impve. ouvre, ouvrons, ouvrez. 5. Past Def. ouviis, ouvris, ouvrit, ouvrimes, ouvrites, ouvrirent; impf. svhj. ouvrisse, ouvrisses, ouvrtt, ouvrissions, ouvrissiez, ouvrissect, Ohs.: The present indicative is like that of donner. Like ouvrir: entr 'ouvrir, o-pen slighUj/ d^couvrir, discover offrir, offer rouvrir, open again recouvrir, cover again eoufirir, suffer couvrir, cover 177. Tenir, to hold 1. Infinitive, temi; fut. tiendra i, tiendras, etc.; condl. tiendrais, etc, 2. Pres. Part, t^ant; impf. indie, tenais, etc.; pres. svhj. tienne, tiennes, tienne, tenions, teniez, tiennent. 3. Past Part, tenu; past indef. j'ai tenu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, tiens, tiens, tient, tenons, tenez, tiennent; impve. tiens, tenons, tenez. §§ 178-179 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -IR 223 5. Past Def. tins, tins, tint, ttnmes [teim], ttntes [teilQ, tinrent [tEjr]; impf. svbj. tinsse, [teisj, tinsses, ttnt, tinssions, tinssiez, tinssent. Oba.: The stem-vowel becomes ie wherever it bears the stress. Like tenir are its compounds: s'abstenir, abstain dStenir, detain obtenir, obtain appartenir, belong entretenir, entertain retenir, retain coutenir, contain mainteuir, maintain soutenir, sustain 178. Venir, to come 1. Infinitive, venir; fut. viendrai, viendras, etc.; condl. viendrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, venant; impf. indie, venais, etc.; pres. subj. vienne, viennes, vienne, veniona, veniez, viennent. 3. Past Part, venu; past indef. je suis venu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, viens, viens, vient, venons, venez, viennent; impve. viens, venons, venez. 5. Past Def. vins, vins, vint, vlnmes Qveim], vlntes [veit], vinrent [veirj; impf. svhj. vinsse Cveis], vinsses, vint, vinssions, vinssiez, vinssent. 06s..' 1. The stem-vowel becomes ie wherever it bears the stress. 2. Venir is precisely Uke tenir in its irregularities, but owing to its diflS- culty it is given in fuU. Like venir axe its compounds: avenir, happen disconvenir, he discordant redevenir, become again advenir, happen intervenir, intervene se souvenir, recollect couvenir, agree, suit parvenir, attain subvenir, aid contrevenir, violate prevenir, prevent, anticipate survenir, occur circonvenir, circumvent provenir, proceed {from, de) se ressouvenir, recollect devenir, become revenir, come back 179. Vetir, to clothe 1. Infinitive, vetir; fvt. v^tirai, etc.; condl. v^tirais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, vetant; impf. indie, v^tais, etc.; pres. subj. vSte, veteE( v6te, vetions, v^tiez, vStent. 3. Past Part, vetu ; past indef. j'ai v^tu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, vets, vSts, v6t, v^tons, vStez, vStent; impve. vSts, vitons, vetez. 5. Past Def. vStis, vgtis, v§tit, vSttmes, vfitites, v^tirent; impf. subj v^tisse, vetisses, vStlt, vitissions, vfitissiez, vStissent. Like vStir: dfevStir, divest revfetir, clothe, invest ee rev6tir, put on dething se d^ygtir, take off dothina 224 THE VERB §§ 180-183 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -re 180. Battre, to heat Loses one t in the present indicative singular: bats , bats, ba t; other- wise like rompre. Like battre: abattre, fell dSbattre, debate rabattre, beat down combattre, fight, oppose se debattre, struggle 181. Boire, to drink 1. Infinitive, boire; fut. boirai, etc.; candl. boirais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, buvant; impf. indie, buvais, etc.; pres. subj. boive, boives, boive, buvions, buviez, boivent. 3. Past Part, bu; past indef. j'ai bu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, bois, bois, boit, buvons, buvez, boivent; impve. bois, buvons, buvez. 5. Past Def. bus, bus, but, bef. conduisis, conduisis, conduisit, conduistmes, condui- sites, conduisirent; impf. subj. conduisisse, conduisisses, conduisit, conduisissions, conduisissiez, conduisissent. Like conduire: Be conduire, conduct oneself induire, induce reproduire, reproduce econduire, show out, dismiss introduire, introduce sSduire, seduce reconduire, lead back produire, produce traduire, translate d^duire, deduct rSduire, reduce construire, construct enduire, coat (with plaster) 22t5 THE VERB §§ 186-188 dfeooustruire, take apart d^truire, destroy * luire, shine instruire, instruct cuire, cook * reloire, glisten teconstruire, reconstruct recuire, cook again t nuire, injure * Past part, lui and relui respectively. No past def. or impf. subj. t Past part. nui. 186. ttte, to be See § 154 for the full conjugation. 187. Confire, to preserve, etc. 1. Infinitive, confire; fut. confirai, etc.; condl. confirais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, confisant; impf. indie, confisaia, etc.; pres. svbj. con- fise, confises, confise, confisions, confisiez, confisent. 3. Past Part, confit; past indef. j'ai confit, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, confis, confis, confit, confisons, confisez, confisent; impve. confis, confisons, confisez. 5. Past Def. confis, confis, confit, confimes, confltes, confirent; impf. svbj. confisse, confisses, confit, confissions, confissiez, confissent. Like confire: d^confire, discomfit; circoncire (p.p. -cis), drcumdse: suflBre (p.p. suffi), suffice 188. Connaitre, to know, etc. 1. Infinitive, connaitre; fut. connaitrai, etc.; condl. connaitrais, etc 2. Pres. Part, connaissant; impf. indie, connaissais, etc.; pres subj. connaisse, connaisses, connaisse, connaissions, connaissiez, con- naissent. 3. Past Part, connu; j'ai connu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, connais, connais, connatt, connaissons, connaissez, eonnaissent; impve. connais, connaissons, connaissez. 5. Past Def. connus, connus, connut, conntimes, connAtes, connu- rent; impf. subj. connusse, connusses, connlit, connussions, connussiez, eonnussent. ^Oba.: Stem-vowel i has circumflex (i) everywhere before t. Like connaitre: mfeconnaltre, not to know comparattre, appear (law * paltre, graze reconnaltre, recognize term) repattre, feed, feast paraltre, appear disparaltre, disappear se repattre, feed, feast apparaltre, appear reparaltre, reappear * Lacks the past part., past def., and impf. subj. Note. — Apparoir (also used in third singular il appert, it appears) a,nd comparoir are archaic variants of apparattre and comparaitre. §§ 189-191 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -RE 227 189. Coudre, to sew 1. Infinitive, coudre; fvi. coudrai, etc.; condl. coudrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, cousant ; impf. indie, cousais, etc.; pres. subj. couae, couses, couse, cousions, cousiez, cousent. 3. Past Part, cousu; past indef. j'ai cousu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, couds, couda. co ud. CQU30)aa..cau3ez, cousent: impve. couds, cousons, cousez. 5. Past Def. couas, cousis, couait, couslmes, cousltes, cousirent; impf. subj. cousisse, cousisaes, couatt, cousiaaiona, cousiaaiez, cousiasent. Like coudre: d^coudre, rip, unsew recoudre, sew again 190. Craindre, to fear 1. Infinitive, craindre ; Jut. craindrai, etc.; condl. oraindraia, etc. 2. Pres. Part, craignant; impf. indie, craignais, etc.; pres. subj, craigne, craignea, craigne, craigniona, craigniez, craignent. 3. Past Part, craint ; past ind^. j'ai oraint, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, crains, craina, crai nt;^cr aignon B,craignez, craignent; impm. crains, craignons, craignez. 5. Past Def. cr aignis , craignia, craignit, craigntmes, craignites, craignirent; impf. subj. craigniase, craignisses, craignit, craignissions, craignissiez, craigniasent. Like craindre: in -aindre : contraindre, constrairi plaindre, pity se plaindre, complain in -eindre : Bstreindre, abstract atteindre, attain ceindre, enclose, gird, gird on (a sword, etc.) dfepeindre, depict empreindre, imprint enceindre, gird enfreindre, infringe 6preindre, squeeze out fiteindre, extinguish etreindre, draw tight feindre, feign geindre, groan peindre, paint ratteindre, overtake repeindre, paint again restreindre, restrain teindre, dye d^teindre, fade reteindre, dye again in -oindre : joindre, join adj oindre, adjoin conjoindre, conjoin dSjoindre, disjoin disjoindre, disjoin enjoindre, enjoin rej oindre, rejoin oindre, anoint * poindre, dawn * Hardly used beyond the infinitive and future. 191. Croire, to believe L Infinitive, croire: fut. croirai, etc.; condl. croiraia, etc. 228 THE VERB §§ 192-193 2. Pres. Part, cjojant; impf. indie, croyais, etc.; jyres. subj. croie, croies, croie, croyions, croyiez, croient. 3. Past Part, cru; past indef. j'ai cru, etc. 4. Pres. Iridic, crois, crois, croit, croyons, croyez, croient; impve. crois, croyons, croyez. 5. Past Def. crus, crus, crut, crtimes, crAtes, crurent; impf. subj. crusse, crosses, crAt, crussions, crussiez, crussent. Like croire: * accroire, believe (an untruth) t dfecroire, disbelieve * Found only in faire accroire, to cause to believe (an untruth). t Used only in je ne crois ni ne decrois, I neither belieoe nor disbelieve. 192. Croitre, to grow 1. Infinitive, croitre; fvt. crottrai, etc.; ccmdl. croltrais, etc. 2. Prea. Part, ^oissant; impf. indie, croissais, etc.; pres. svbj. croisse, croisses, croisse, croissions, croissiez, croissent. 3. Past Part, crii (f. crue); past indef. j'ai crA, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, crois, crois, crott, croissons, croissez, croissent: impve. crois, croissons, croissez. 5. Past Def. criis, crds, crdt, crimes, crdtes, criirent; impf. subj. crusse, crosses, crtlt, crussions, crussiez, crussent. Ohs. : The circumflex accent distinguishes several otherwise similar forms of croitre and croire. 193. Dire, to say, tell 1. Infinitive, dire; fut. dirai, etc.; condl. dirais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, disant; impf. indie, disais, etc.; pres. stiZ*/. dise, dises, dise, disions, disiez, disent. 3. Past Part, dit; past indef. j'ai dit, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, dis, dis, dit, disons, dit^ disent; impve. dis, disons, dites. 5. Past Def. dis, dis, dit, dimes, dttes, dirent; impf. subj. disse. disses, dit, dissions, dissiez, dissent. Like dire: • contredire, contradict * interdire, interdict * pr§dire, predict » dfedire, retract, deny * m^dire (de), slander redire, aay again * The 2nd pi. pres. indie, and impve. is: Contredisez, dgdisez, inter- disez, etc. Note. — Maudire is like dire only in infinitive, past participle (maudit)i future, and conditional; otherwise like finir. §§ 194^198 IRREGULAK VERBS IN -RE 229 194. £crire, to write 1. Infinitive, ecrire; fut. toirai, etc., condl. toirais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, ecrivant; impf. indie, ^crivaia, etc.; pres. siibj. derive, derives, derive, ^crivions, 6criviez, 6orivent. 3. Past Part, ecrit; past indef. j'ai 6crit, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, ecris, 6cris, 6crit, 6crivons, 6crivez, ^crivent; mptw. feis, ficrivons, ^crivez. 5. Past Def. ecrivis, toivis, 6crivit, 6crivimes, ^crivltes, 6crivi- rent; impf. subj. 6crivisse, ^crivissea, 6crivit, ^crivissions, 6crivissiez, feivissent. Like ecrire are all verbs in -(s)crire: circonscrire, Hrcwmscribe presorire, prescribe souscnre, subscribe dSorire, describe proscnre, proscribe transcrire, transcribe inscrire, inscribe rficrire, rewrite 195. Faire, to do, make 1. Infinitive, faire; fvi. ferai [f(a)re], etc.; condl. ferais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, faisant [fgza]; impf. indie, faisais Pazsl etc.; pre» subj. fasse, fasses, fasse, fassions, fassiez, fassent. 3. Past Part, fait; past indef. j'ai fait, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, fais, fais, fait, faisons p3z5], faites, font; impve fais, faisons, faites. 5. Past Def. fls, fis, fit, flmes, fites, firent; impf. subj. fisse, fisaea, fit, fissions, fissiez, fissent. Like faire: contrefaire, imitate mfefaire, harm refaire, do again dfefaire, undo parfaire, complete satisfaire, satisfy foifaire, forfeit redfefaire, undo again surfaire, overcharge 196. Frire, to fry (intr.) 1. Infinitive, frire; fid. frirai, etc.;- condl. frirais, etc. 2. Pres. Part. ; impf. indie. ; pres. subj. . 3. Past Part, frit; past indef. j'ai frit, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, fris, fris, frit, , , ; impve. fris, — 6. Pnitt Def. ; impf. subj. . 230 T2B VERB §§ 197-19fe 197. Lire, to read 1. Infinitive, lire; fiU. lirai, etc.; condl. lirais, etc. 2. Pr-es. PaH. Usant; imp/, indie, lisais, etc.; pres. sirf>/. lise, Uses, Use, lisions, lisiez, lisent. 3. Past Part, lu; past indef. j'ai lu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie. Us, lis, lit, lisons, Usez, lisent; impee. lis, lisons, lisez, 5. Past Def. lus, lus, lut, Itimes, Itites, lurent; impf. subj. lusse, lusses, lAt, lussiona, lussiez, lussent. Like lire: glire, elect r6§lire, r-eeiect relire, read again 198. Mettre, to place, put 1. Infinitive, mettre; fut. mettrai, etc.; cmdl. mettrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, mettant; impf. indie, mettais, etc.; pres. subj. mette, mattes, mette, mettions, mettiez, mettent. 3. Past Part, mis; past indef. j'ai mis, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, mets, mats, met, mettons, mettez, mettent; impve. mets, mettons, mettez. 5. Past Def. mis, mis, mit, mimes, mitea, mirent; impf. subj. misse, misses, mit, missions, missiaz, missent. Like mettre: 86 mettre, begin d^mettre, dismiss promettre, promise admettre, admit 6mettre, emit remettre, put back, hand to oommettre, commit s'entremettre, interpose repromettre, promise again compromettre, compro- omettre, omit soumettre, submit mise permettre, permit transmettre, transm.it 199. Moudre, to grind 1. Infinitive, moudre; fut. moudrai, etc.; condl. moudrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, moulant; impf. indie, moulais, etc.; pres. subj. moule, monies, moule, moulions, mouliez, moulant. 3. Past Part, moulu; past indef. j'ai moulu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, nibuds, mouds, moud, moulons, moulez, moulent; impve. mouds, moulons, moulez. 5. Past Def. moulus, moulus, moulut, mouKimes, moulAtes, moulu- rent; impf. subj. moulusse, moulussas, moul'&t, moulussions, moulussiez, moulussent. Like moudre: moudre, whet remoudre, grind again rfemoudre, sharpen {§200-202 IRREGULAR VERBS IN -RE 231 200. Naitre, to be born, arise, etc. 1. Infinitive, ntdtre; fiU. naltrai, etc.; condl. nattrais, etc. 2. Pres. f art. naissant; imp/, iridic, naissais, etc.; pres. subj. na'iBse, naisses, naisse, naissions, naissiez, naissent. 3. Past Part. ,ne ; past indef. je suis n4 etc. 4. Pres. Indie, nais, nais, nalt, naissons, naissez, naissent; impve. nais, naissons, naissez. 5. Past Def. naquis, naquis, naquit, naqufmes, naquites, naqui- rent; impf. srubj. naquisse, naquisses, naqiilt, naquissions, naquissiez, naquissent. 06s.; Stem-vowel i has the circumflex (i) everywhere before t. Like naitre : renattre, revive 201. Plaire, to please 1. Infinitive, plaire; fut. plairai, etc.; condl. plairais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, plaisa^; impf. indie, plaisais, etc.; pres. svbj. plaise, plaises, plaise, plaisions, plaisiez, plaisent. 3. Past Part, plu; pasi indef. j'ai plu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, plais, plais, platt, plaisons, plaisez, plaisent; impve. plais, plaisons, plaisez. " ~" 5. Past Def. plus, plus, plut, plftmes, plfttes, plurent; impf. subj. plusse, plusses, plUt, plussions, plussiez, plussent. Like plaire: complaire, humor deplaire, displease * taire, say nothing about * n tait has no circumflex. 202. Prendre, to take X. Infinitive, prendre; fvi. prendrai, etc.; condl. prendrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, prenant; impf. indie, prenais, etc.; pres. svbj. prenne prennes, prenne, prenions, preniez, prennent. 3. Past Part, pris; past indef. j'ai pris, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, prends, prends, prend, prenons, prenez, prennent; impve. prends, prenons, prenez. 5. Past Def. pris, pris, prit, primes, prites, prirent; impf. sutrj. prisse, prisses, prit, prissions, prissiez, prissent. Like prendre are its compounds: apprendre, learn entreprendre, undertake rapprendre, learn a^ain dfeprendre, port s'6prendre, he taken reprendre, take hack dfisapprendre, unlearn se m6prendre. be mistaken surprendre, surprise comprendre, understand 232 THE VERB §§ 203-206 203. Resoudre, to resolve 1. Infinitive, resoudre; fut. r&oi'drai, etc.; condl. r&oudrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part. rSsolvant; impf. indie, r^solvais, etc.; pres. subj. re- solve, resolves, resolve, r^solvions, r^aolviez, r&olvent. 3. Past Part, resolu and * resous; past indef. j'ai r^solu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, resous, resous, r^sout, r6solvoiis, rfeolvez, resolvent; irnpve. resous, r^solvons, resolvez. 5. Past Def. resolus, r^solus, rdsolut, r&oltimes, risoltites, r6solu- rent; impf. subj. r&olusse, rdsolusses, r^oMt, rdsolussions, r^solussiez, r&olussent. * Of restricted usage. Like resoudre : * absoudre, absolve * dissoudre, dissolve * Past part, absous (f. absoute), dissous (f. dissoute), respectively ■ lack the past definite and imperfect subjunctive. 204. Rire, to laugh 1. Infinitive, rire; fut. rirai, etc.; condl. rirais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, riant; impf. indie, riaisj etc.; pres. subj. rie, ries, rie, riions, riiez, rient. 3. Past Part, ti; past indef. j'ai ri, etc. 4. Pres. Indie. lis, ria, rit, rions, riez, rient; impve. ris, rions, riez. 5. Past Def. ris, ris, rit, rimes, rites, rirent; impf. subj. risse, risses, .lit, rissions, rissiez, rissent. Like rire: se rire, make sport (of, de) sourire, smile 205. Sotirdre, to rise, spring up, etc. 1. Infinitive, sourdre; fut. H sourdra; condX. H. sourdrait. 2. Pres. Part, sourdant; impf. indie. U sourdait; pres. subj. U sourde, 3. Fast Part. ; past indef. . 4. Pres. Indie. , , sourd, , , sourdent; impve. . 5. Past Def. il sourdit; impf. subj. H sourdlt. Note. — Little used beyond the infin. and third sing. pres. indio. 206. Suivre, to follow 1. Infinitive, suivre; fui. suivrai, etc.; ernidl. suivrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, suivant; impf. indie, suivais, etc.; pres. sttbj. suive, suives, suive, suivions, suiviez, suivent. §1 207-209 IKBEGULAB VERBS IN -RE 233 3. Past Part, suivi; past indef. j'ai suivi, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, suis, suis, suit, suivons, suivez, suivent; itnTpoe. suis, suivons, suivez. 5. Past Def. suivis, suivis, suivit, suivimes, suivltes, suivirent; impf. subj. suivisse, suivisses, suivtt, suivissions, suivissiez, suivissent. like suivre: s'ensuivre (impers.), it follows poursuivre, pursue 207. Tistre, to weave Used only in the past part, tissu, and compound tenses. 208. Traire, to milk 1. Infinitive, traire; fvi. trairai, etc.; condl. trairais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, trayant; impf. indie, trayais, etc.; pres. fuhj. traie, traies, traie, trayions, tra5dez, traient. 3. Past Part, trait; past indef. j'ai trait, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, trais, trais, trait, trayons, trayez, traient; impve. trais, trayons, trayez. 5. Past Def. ; impf. siibj. . Like traire: abstraire, abstract extraire, extract soustraire, subtract attraire, attract rentraire, dam * braire, bray diatraire, distract retraire, redeem (legal) * Commonly used only in the infin. and the third pers. pres. indie. , f ut, and cond. 209. Vaincre, to conquer 1. Infinitive, vaincre; fut. vaincrai, etc.; condl. vaincrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, vainquant; impf. indie, vainquais, etc.; pres. svhj, vainque, vainques, vainque, vainquions, vainquiez, vainquent. 3. Past Part, vaincu; past indef. j'ai vaincu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, vaincs [ye] , vaincs, vainc, vainquons, vainquez, vainquent; impve. vamcs, vamquons, vainquez. 5. Past Def. vainquis, vainquis, vainquit, vainqutmes, vainquttes, vainquirent; impf. subj. vainquisse, vainquisses, vainquit, vainquissions, vaiuquissiez, vainquissent. '^bs.: Stem c Dc] becomes qu Dc] before any vowel except u. Like vaincre: COnvaincro, connrtce, convict •234 THE VERB §§ 210-213 210. Vendre, to sell Irregular only in third singulax present indicative: D vend (t omitted). Like vendre: AU verbs in -andre, -endre,* -erdre, -ondre, -ordre * Except prendre, reprendre, surprendre, etc. 211. Vivre, to live 1. Infinitive, jivie; fut. vivrai, etc.; condl. vivrais, etc. 2. Pres. Part, ^ijant; impf. indie, vivais, etc.; pres. svbj. vive, vives, vive, vivions, viviez, vivent. 3. Past Part, vecu; past indef. j'ai v^cu, etc. 4. Pres. Indie, vis, via, vit, vivons, vivez, vivent; impve. vis, vivoDs, vivez. 5. Past Def. vecus, v^cus, v6cut, v6c^evenir, coine back rentrer, go in again Tester, remain ^etoumer, go back sortir, go owl tomber, fall venir, come survenir, supervene 229. 1. Avoir or etre + the past participle forms the com- pound tenses of a number of intransitive verbs, the general distinction being that avoir, when so used, denotes action, while etre denotes state or condition resulting from action: D a passe par Lyon. C'est passe de mode. Elle a grandi bien vita. EUe est grandie. He went by way of Lyons. It is out of fashion. She grew up very fast. She is grown up, 2. Reference list of verbs with avoir or etre: aborder, land accourir, run to apparaltre, appear baisser, fall, decline cesser, cease changer, change croltre, grow d^border, overflow d^choir, decay d^crottre, decrease d6g6n§rer, degenerate demeurer, remain disparattre, disappear 6ohapper, escape Schouer, be stranded, fail embellir, grow handsomer empirer, grow worse expirer, expire grandir, grow up passer, pass rechapper, escape a^ain repasser, pass again Bonner, strike, toll vieillir, grow old 3230 USE OF VERB PHRASES 243 a. Any verb in the list, used transitively, must, of course, take avoir (§227): D m'a passe la plume. He handed me the pen. Avez-vous rentre votre ble ? Have you taken in your wheat? Ds ont descendu le tableau. They have taken down the picture. b. The meaning also determines the auxUiary in a few other cases: Avoir £tre "l'?T1Y''°'^i ■'""^ hi'j-.nmj'. convenir, ag ree disconvenix, not to suit, be dis* disconvenir, deny cordant repartir, reply repartir, go away again Nous sommes convenus du prix. We are (have) agreed on the price. Le prix ne m'a pas convenu. The price did not suit me. USE OF VERB PHRASES 230. Auxiliary Function. Several verbs, when followed by an infinitive, have a sort of auxiliary function, and serve to form verb phrases of various values, modal, temporal, etc.; 1. Vouloir= will, wish to, want to, desire to, etc.: Je ne veux pas rester. I wiU not remain. n voudrait (bien) le savoir. He would like to know it. Ella n'a pas voulu m'ecouter. She would not hsten to me. n aurait voulu le faire. He would have hked to do so Veuillez le faire. Be so good as to do so. a. Distinguish from 'will' of simple futurity: EUe vous Scoutera. She will listen to you. 2. Devoir = ought, should, must, he to, have to, he ohliged to, intend to, etc., varies in force in different -^nses: / A.ji-.,{1> ^ . ,-r_. Present: je dois rester. I am to (have to, intend to, must) remain. Imperfect: je devais parler. I was to (had-to, etc.) speak. Future: je devrai revenir. I shall have to (be obliged to) come back. Conditional: je devrais ecrire. I ought to (should) write. Past Indefinite: j'oi du m'arreter. I have had to (been obUged to) stop, must have stopped. 244 THE VERB § 230 Past Definite: je dus revenir. I had to come back. Conditional Anterior: j'aurais dH I ought to have (should have) savoir. known. 3. Pouvoir = can, he able to, be permitted to, may, etc. : n ne pouvait pas porter le sac. He could not carry the sack. Puis-je aller i la ville? May I go to town? lis auraient pu le faire. They could (might) have done it. Je pourrais le faire, si je voulais. I could do it if I would. Pouvaient-ils en trouver? Could they find any? Pourrais-je vous demander? Might I ask you? 4. Savoir = know how to, can, etc. : jSlle salt chanter et danser. She can sing and dance. II ne sait pas lire. He can't read. a. Distinguish savoir in this sense from pouvoir: Elle est enrouee et ne peut pas She is hoarse and cannot sing this chanter ce soir. evening. 6. The conditional with ne has pecuhar idiomatic force: Je ne saurais le croire. I cannot believe it. 5. Oser = dare : Je n'ose pas le lui dire. I dare not teU him so. Note. — The above five verbs are sometimes called ' Modal Auxiliaries. 6. Faire = make, cause to, cause to be, have, order, order to be, etc. : J'ai fait etudier les enfants. I have made the children study. D les fera ecouter. He will make them listen. n s'est fait faire un habit. He had a coat made for himself. a. A governed substantive follows the infinitive, but a governed con- junctive personal pronoun (not reflexive) goes with faire: Faites venir le domestique. Have the servant come. Faites-/e venir. Have him come. b. If the infini tive with faire have a direct object, the personal object of faire must be indirect (cf . § 293, 2, a) : Je fis ecrire mon fils. I had my son write. Je fis ecrire un devoir i mon fils. I made my son write an exercise. Faites-le-?ui ecrire. Make him write it. Je le leur fis voir. I showed them it. §§ 231-232 AGREEMENT OF VERB AND SUBJECT 245 c. Possible ambiguity is sometimes avoided by par: II fit porter le sac par le guide. He had the sack carried by the guide. d. Note the (seeming) passive force of a transitive infinitive after faire: Je feral ecrire une lettre. I shall have a letter written. 7. Laisser = let, is in construction somewhat like faire : Laissez ecrire les enfants. Let the children write. Laissez-Zeur (or -les) ecrire xm Let them write an exercise. devoir. 8. The present and imperfect of aller + an infinitive give a kind of immediate future, as also in English: n va I'acheter. He is going to (is about to) buy it. Nous allions nous arreter. We were about to stop. n aUait se noyer. He was on the point of drowning. 9. Similarly the present and imperfect of venir de + an infinitive give a kind of immediate past: Je viens de le voir. I have just seen him. n venait de I'entendre. He had just heard it. AGREEMENT OF VERB AND SUBJECT 231. General Rule. The verb agrees with its subject in number and person: Les hommes sont mortels. Men are mortal. Tout le monde est ici. Everybody is here. Toi et moi (nous) ne faisons qu'un. You and I are but one. 232. Simple Subject. Special rules for the agreement of a verb with one subject are: 1. A collective subject singular, when not followed by de, or when followed by de + the singular, has regularly a singu- lar verb: Le peuple franf ais est brave. The French people are brave. Le s€nat I'a decide. The senate has {or have) decided it. La plupart du monde le croit. Most people believe it. 2. A collective subject singular + de + a plural takes a plural verb, unless the sense of the collective be dominant: 246 THE VERB §232 A host of savages attacked him. A cloud of arrows hid him. A part of the soldiers remain. A part of the citizens protested. This sort of pears is dear. Dne nuee de sauvages I'attaque- rent. Une nuee de traits I'obscurcit. Une partie des soldats restent. Una partie des bourgeois protesta. Cette sorte de poires est chere. a. When so used, adverbs of quantity, e.g., beaucoup, peu, etc., the nouns nombre, quantite, without article, and la plupart, are regularly plural in sense; so also, force: Beaucoup de gens pensent alnsi. Peu de gens le savent. Que d'ennemis m'attaquent ! Nombre d'Atheniens avaient fui. La plupart des soldats perirent. Force sots le tenteront. Many people think so. Few people know it. How many enemies attack me ! Many Athenians had fled. Most of the soldiers perished. Many a fool wiU try it. 6. Beaucoup, peu, combien, used absolutely, are singular or plural according to the sense of the de clause imphed; la plupart when so used is generally plural: Beaucoup {sc. de gens) le croient. Many (sc. people) beUeve it. Peu (sc. de ceci) me sufflra. Little (sc. of this) wiU suffice me. La plupart voterent contre. The majority voted nay. c. Plus d'un is singular, unless reciprocal or repeated, and moins de deux is plural: Plus d'un temoin a depose. Moins de deux ne valent rien. Plus d'un fripon se dupent I'lm I'autre. Plus d'un officier, plus d'lm ge- neral furent tues. More than one witness has sworn. Less than two is no use. More rogues than one cheat each other. More than one officer, more than one general was killed. 3. Ce requires a plural verb only when the predicate is a plural noun, a plural pronoun of the third person, or when ce refers to a preceding plural: Sont-ce vos amis? — Ce sont eux. Is it your friends? It is they. Ce doivent etre les siens. Those must be his. Ce sont nos semblables. They are our fellow-creatures. Ses desirs, ce sont sa loi. His desires are his law. But: C'estmoi; c'esttoi; c'estlui; c'es flatt(5(e) il (elle) s'est J nous nous sommes 1 vous vous ^tes { flatty (e)s ils (elles) se sent J etc., etc. Present / flatter myself, etc. je me flatte tu te flattes il(elle) se flatte nous nous flattons vous vous flattez ils (elles) se flattent 254 THE VERB §§ 243-245 Imperative Flaiter thyself, etc. Do not flatter thyself, etc. flatte-toi ^^ ^ flatte pas (qu'U se flatte) (qu'U ne se flatte pas) flattons-nous ne nous flattens pas flattez-vous ne vous flattez pas (qu'ils se flattent) (qu'ils ne se flattent pas) Notes. — 1. Se flatter, se flattant, etc., are the infinitive and participial forms found in dictionaries, but se must be replaced by me, te, etc., accord- ing to the sense. 2. Except in the use of etre as aujdliary, reflexive verbs have no pecu- liarities of conjugation on account of being reflexive. 243. Reflexive or Reciprocal. A reflexive verb often has reciprocal force, especially in the plural. Ambiguity is generally avoided by some modifying expression: / They flatter themselves. EUes se flattent. | ,pj^gy f^^^^^^ ^^^1^ ^^her. Elles se flattent I'une I'autre. They flatter one another. On se dupe mutuellement. They cheat each other. ^ 244. Agreement of Past Participle. 1. In compound tenses, the past participle of a reflexive agrees in gender and number with the direct object, as in the case of verbs compounded with avoir: Elle s'est ecriee. She cried out. Elle s'est dit a elle-mSme. She said to herself. Us se sont &crit. They wrote to each other. EUes se sont acheii des robes. They bought themselves dresses. 2. Besides the reflexive object, a direct object may pre- cede the verb, and with this object the participle agrees: Las plumes gu'ils se sont achetees. The pens they bought themselves. Notes. — 1. The auxiliary etre is considered as replacing avoir, and the above agreements are explained by the general principle (§291). 2. The agreement with vous is according to the sense: Vous vous etes trompee, madame. You were Tnistaken, madam. 245. Omission of Reflexive Object. 1. It is always omitted with the past participle used as attributive adjective: Le t«nps €coule. The time past. §§ 246-247 THE REFLEXIVE VERB 255 2. The infinitives of certain verbs, such as s'asseoir, se souvenir, se taire, regularly omit se when preceded by faire ; but modern French has many exceptions. Faites asseoir vos amis. Make your friends sit down. Je vous enjgaijouYenir. I ahaJl remind_ you of itj_ But also: II la fit se souvenir de . . . He reminded her of . . . a. A similar omission of se sometimes occurs after laisser, entendre, voir, etc. 246. Remarks. The reflexive construction is much com- moner in French than ia English: 1. It often translates the EngUsh passive, especially when the agent is not specified: La bourse s'est retrouvee. The purse has been recovered. Cela se raconte partout. That is being told everywhere. 2. Or it is expressed by an English non-reflexive verb, generally intransitive: S'arrSter; s'ecrier; se porter. Stop; exclaim; be (of health). S'asseoir; seMter; se tromper. Sit down; hasten; be mistaken. V 3. Or the French reflexive + a preposition has the value of an Enghsh transitive: S'approcher de; se douter de. Approach; suspect. S'attendre a; se fier a. Expect; trust. Se passer de; se souvenir de. Do without; recollect. 247. S'en Aller. The conjugation of s'en aller, to go away, presents special difiiculty: Present Indicative Past Indefinite Indicative I go away, etc. I have gone (7 went) away, etc. je m'en vais je m'en suis 1 tu t'en vas tu t'en es J- aU6(e) il s'en va U (elle) s'en est J nous nous en allons nous nous en sommes vous vous en allez vous vous en i^tes \ all§(e)B lis s'en vont ils (eUes) s'en sont J 256 THE VERB §§ 248-249 Imperative Imperative Negative Go away, etc. Do not go away, etc. va-t'en ne t'en va pas (qu'il s'en aille) (qu'il ne s'en aille pas) allons-nous-en ne nous en allons pas allez-vous-en ne vous en allez pas (qu'ils s'en aillent) (qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas) Further examples: Est-ce que je m'en vais? lis ne s'en sont pas alles. Vous en allez-vous? Ne nous en sommes-nous pas el- s' en sont-elles allees? le(e)s? IMPERSONAL VERBS 248. Conjugation. An impersonal verb, or a verb used as such, is one conjugated, in the third singular only, with the subject il = it, there, used indefinitely and absolutely, e.g., tenner, to thunder: Indicative Pbbs. II tonne, it thunders Past Indf. II a tonnS, it has thundered Impf. II tomiait, it thundered. Plupp. II avait tonn^, it had thundered Past Def. II tonna, it thundered Past Ant. II eut tonni5, it had thundered etc., etc., like the third singular of donner Note. — Apart from being limited to the third singular, their conjuga- tion does not differ from that of ordinary verbs. Some are regular, others irregular. 249. Use of Impersonals. 1. Verbs denoting natural phenomena and time are impersonal, as in English: n tonne; il a plu; il pleuvra. It thunders; it rained; it will rain, n a gele hier; il degele. It froze yesterday; it is thawing. II est une hettfe; il est tard. It is one o'clock; it is late. Such verbs are: pleuvoir, rain gr&ler, hail geler, freeze neiger, snow 6clairer, lighten degeler, thaw \ 2. Faire = make, is also much used impersonally to de- scribe weather, temperature, etc.: §§ 250-251 IMPERSONAL VERBS 257 Quel temps fait-il? What kind of weather is it? D fait beau (temps) ce matin. It is fine (weather) this morning. II a fait bien froid hier. It was very cold yesterday. II faisait du vent aussi. It was windy too. Est-ce qu'il fera obscur ce soir? WOl it be dark this evening? II fait des eclairs. Itjshg htnin g. 06s.: Distinguish these from constructions with a personal subject: Le temps est beau. The weather is fine; L'eau est froide, The water is cold. 250. Impersonal avoir and etre. 1. The verb avoir, preceded by y, used impersonally = there is, there are, there was, there were, etc.: n y a. n y a eu. Y a-t-il? There is. There has been. Is there? n n'y a pas. H n'y a pas eu. There is not. There has not been. Y a-t-il eu? N'y a-t-il pas eu? Has there been? Has there not been? Y aiu-a-t-il? H peut y avoir. WUl there be? There may be. 2. n est is sometimes used for 11 y a in this sense: II est des hommes qui le croient. There are men who think so. 3. II y a = there is, there are, is distinguished from voili = there is, there are. Voila answers the question 'where is?' 'where are?' and makes a specific statement about an object to which attention is directed by pointing or the like, while il y a does not answer the question 'where is?' 'where are?' and makes a general statement. H y a des plumes sur la table. There are pens on the table. Voila les plumes sxir la table. There are the pens on the table. y^4. Y avoir also forms idiomatic expressions of time, reckoned backwards, and of distance: lis sont arrives il y a trois jours. They came three days ago. II y avait trois jours que j'etais la. I had been there three days. Combien y a-t-il d'ici a la viUe? How far is it to the city? II y a dix milles d'ici k la vUle. It is ten miles from here to the city. 251. Falloir = he necessary, expresses the various mean- ings of must, be obliged to, have to, need, as follows: 1. Miist -h infinitive = falloir + que and subjunctive: 258 THE VERB §252 H faut que je parte. I must go. II faudra que vous restiez. You will have to (be obliged to) stay. 2. Or the subject of must, etc., if a personal pronoun, may become indirect object of falloir + an infinitive: n me faudrait rester. I should be obhged to remain. n leur faut faire cela. They must do that. Hlvii a fallu parler. He was forced (obhged) to speak. jy/3. The infinitive construction without indirect object is used in general or indefinite statement: n faut faire son devoir. One must do one's duty. II ne faut pas voler. We must not steal. 4. Falloir + an indirect object and a substantive signifies lack, need: D faut une ardoise a Jean. John needs a slate. n leur faudra cent francs. They wiU need a hundred franca. 5. S'en falloir = lack: fU s'en faut de beaucoup que I'lm The one is not nearly so good as the vaille I'autre. other. 252. Other Impersonals. 1. Besides fadie and avoir, already noted, many other verbs take a special meaning as impersonals: De quoi s'agit-il? What is the matter? D est souvent arrive que, etc. It has often happened that, etc. II vaudra mieux ne rien dire . It wiU be better to say nothing. D^ y va de ses jours. His hfe is at stake. II se pent que je me trompe. It may be that I am mistaken. Obs.: Compare the literal meanings: agir, act, arriver, arrive, valoir, bt worth, aller, go, pouvoir, be able. 2. Many verbs may stand in the third singular with im- personal il representing a logical subject, singular or plural, following the verb: n viendra un meilleur temps. There will come a happier time, n en reste trois livres. There remain three pounds of it. II est arrive des messagers. Messengers have arrived. J§ 253-256 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE 259 253. OmissioQ of il. U is understood in certain phrases, such as: Reste a savoir. It remains to be seen. N'importe. No matter (it matters not). Mieux vaut tard que jamais. Better late than never. THE INDICATIVE MOOD 254. Use of Indicative. The indicative is the mood of direct or iadirect assertion, and of direct or indirect inter- rogation. It stands both in principal and in subordinate clauses, both affirmative and negative: Dieu crea le monde. God created the world. Moise dit que Dieu crea le monde. Moses says that God created the world. 0& allez-vous? Where are you going? Dites-moi o& vous allez. Tell me where you are going. Je le ferais, si je pouvais. I should do so if I could. Notes. — 1. It should be noted especially that the indicative is regu- larly the mood of indirect discourse and of 'if clauses. 2. When the verb of a subordinate clause is subjunctive, the mood is determined by the contert, and not simply by the fact that the clause is eubordinate. TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE 255. Periphrastic Forms. Such forms, so common in English, are not used in French: Je parle. I speak (am speaking, do speak). II a ecrit. He has written (has been writing). n disait. He was saying (used to say, etc.). 256. Elliptical Forms. Ellipsis of part of a verb form is common in English; in French the form is either fully given or entirely avoided: J'irai. — Moi, je n'irai pas. I shall go. — I shall not (go). n a promis de venir, mais il n'est He promised to come, but he did pas venu. not (come). 260 THE VERB §§ 257-258 Ilestvenu. — Vraimentl He has come. — Has he! (Indeed I) Vous viendrez, n'est-ce pas? You will come, will you not? n etait sorti, n'est-ce pas? He had gone out, had he not? 257. Present Indicative. The present tense is used: 1. To denote what is happening, including the habitual and the universally true: Je crois qu'il pleut. I think it is raining. II se leve toujours de bon matin. He always rises early. L'honune propose et Dieu dispose. Man proposes and God disposes. X 2. To denote what has happened and stiU continues, after 11 y a . . . que, voici (voila) . . . que, depuis, depuis quand? depuis . . . que : Depuis quand aHcndez-vous? How long have you been waiting? U y a (or voici, voili) trois jours I have waited (I have been wait- que i'aitends, or j'attends de- ing) for three days. puis trois jours. 3. Instead of a past tense in animated narrative: La nuit approche, I'instant arrive, Night draws on, the moment comes, Cesar se presente, etc. Caesar appears, etc. a. This use is much commoner than in English, especially side by side with past tenses. It is called the 'Historical Present.' 6. C'est . . . que + a past tense = was . . . thai ; C'esi Ik que je I'ai vu. It was there that I saw him. 4. Instead of a future in familiar style: Nous partons demain matin. We go to-morrow morning. 5. As a virtual future after si = if: Jejerai^ontent, si vous venez. I shall be glad if you (will) come. 258. Imperfect Indicative. The action or state denoted by the imperfect is in general viewed as being in progress, i.e., as contemporaneous, customary, continued, etc, and it is employed as follows: 1. To denote what was happening, when something else happened or was happening: § 259 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE 261 n etait nuit, quand je sortis. It was night when I went out. n pailait, pendant que je chantais. He was talking while I sang. 2. To denote what used to happen: D se levait de bon matin. He used to rise early. Je parlais souvent de cela. I often spoke (used to speak, would speak) of that. Las Remains briilaient leuTS morts. The Romans were accustomed to burn their dead. 3. To denote what continued to happen: Son pere etait nSgociant et de- " Has father was a merchant anA meurait dans cette rue. Kved in this street. 4. To denote what had happened and still continued, after 11 y a . . . que, volci (voUa) . . . que, depuls, depuis quand? depuls . . . que (of. § 257, 2) : Je le disais depuis longtemps. I had long been sajong so. Voilk un an que je le disais. I had been saying so for a year. 5. Injndjrect^sCQUrie, after a past tense, instead of the present : Je croyais qu'il revenait. I thought he was coming back. Je demandai oft il etait. I asked where he was. But: Oft est-iX? demandai-je. "Where is he?" I asked. 6. Regularly in an 'if' clause when the 'result' clause is conditional: S'il v enaii, je serais co ntent. If he came, I should be glad. 7. Occasionally, instead of the conditional anterior in conditional sentences: Si je ne I'avais pas arrgte, U torn- Had I not stopped him he would bait ( = serait tombe) du train. have fallen from the train. 8. Sometimes instead of the past definite (§^60) : Un moment aises, le p6re Alphee A momeiit "afterwards, Father Al- se dressait, marchait k grands pheus rose, walked about with pas, voil4, s'gcriait-il, etc. great strides, " There," cried he, etc. 259. Past Indefinite. The past indefinite is used: 262 THE VEHB §260 1. To denote what has happened or has been happening, equivalent to an English tense with 'have/ reference to the present being implied: J'ai fini mon ouvrage. I have finished my work. L'avez-vous vu demierement? Have you seen him lately? Je I'ai souvent rencontre. I have often met him. J'ai chante toute la matinee. I have been singing all morning. 2. In familiar style, spoken or written, to denote a past event, without implied reference to the present, or a succes- sion of such past events as mark the progress of a narrative, answering the question 'What happened?' or 'What hap- pened next?' For narrative in the literary style, see § 260: Ds sent arrives ce soir. They arrived this evening. Je I'ai vu il y a dlx ans. I saw him ten years ago. De quoi est-il mort? What did he die of? J'ai quitte Rome le dix. Puis je I left Rome on the tenth. Then suis alle voir des amis a Lyon, I visited some friends at Lyons, j'ai passe quelques jours a I spent some days in Paris, and I Paris, et je suis revenu a Lon- came back to London yesterday, dres hier. 3. Occasionally instead of a future anterior: Attendez, j'ai bientot fini. Wait, I shall have finished soon. 260. Past Definite. The past definite denotes a past event, or a succession of such past events as mark the progress of the narrative, answering the question 'What happened?' or 'What happened next?' Its use is largely confined to literary or "book" French, and formal public address. It is not much used in conversation or in easy, correspondence: Dieu crea le monde. God created the world. La guerre dura sept ans. The war lasted seven years. On forga le palais, les scelerats They broke into the palace, the n'osirent pas resister long- villains did not dare to resist temps et ne songerent qu'a long, and only thought of fleeing, fuir. Astarbe voulut se sauver Astarb^ tried to escape in the dans la foule, mais im soldat crowd, but a soldier recognized la reconnut; elle fut prise. her; she was captured. I 261 TENSES OP THE INDICATIVE 263 a. Some verbs have a special force in the past definite: Etre: je fus. To be: I became. Avoir: j'ews. To have: I received. Savoir: je sus. To know: I found out (learned). Connaitre: je connus. To know: I reaUzed. In this force fus and sus are common, the other two less so. 261. Examples of Narrative. 1. The following exam- ples illustrate the principal uses of the past definite, imperfect, past indefinite, and historical present, in the literary narrative style : Les Turcs, qui cependant entouraient cette maison tout embras^, voyaient avec une admiration melfe d'^pouvante que les Suidois n'en sortaient point; mais leur 6tonnement fut encore plus grand lorsqu'ils virent ouvrir les portes, et le roi et les siens fondre sur eux en d6ses- p6r6s. Charles et ses priacipaux ofRciers etaient armes d'6f)^es et de pistolets: chacun tira deux coups k la fois k I'iiistant que la porte s'ouvrit; et dans le meme cUn d'oeil, jetant leurs pistolets et s'armant de leurs 6p6es, Us firent reculer les Turcs pliis de cinquante pas; mais le moment d'aprfes cette petite troupe fut entourfe: le roi, qui etait en bottes selon sa coutume, s'embarrassa dans ses 6perons, et tomba; vingt et un janissaires se jettent aussit6t sur lui: il jette en I'air son 6p6e pour s'^pargner la douleur de la rendre; les Turcs I'emmenent au quartier du bacha. — Voltaire. Stanislas se deroba un jour h dix heures du soir de I'armSe suMoise qu'U commandait en Pom&anie, et partit avec le baron Sparre, qui a ete depuis ambassadeur en Angleterre et en France, et avec \m autre colonel: il prend le nom d'un Frangais, nomm6 Haran, alors major au service de Su6de, et qui est mort depuis commandant de Dantzick. ■ — • Voltaire. 2. So nearly identical may be the force of the past definite and the past indefinite, as narrative tenses, that they are often used interchangeably, as in the following extract, taken from a newspaper: LoNDBES, 5 aoilt. — Hier soir, k onze heures et demie, un incendie a eclate dans I'atelier de composition de la National Press Agency. Plusieurs pompes k vapeur arriverent immddiatement sur le heu du sinistre, et I'incendie s'etendit avec tme telle rapidity, que toute la niaison a ete complStement d^truite. — Le Matin. 264 THE VERB §§262-263 262. Pluperfect and Past Anterior. 1. Both denote what 'had happened,' hke the English pluperfect: Lorsque je I'avais (eus) fini. When I had finished it. 2. The pluperfect is of much conunoner occurrence than the past anterior, and is used after si = if, in conditional clauses, or when custom, continuance, etc., is imphed (but cf. §§258, 275, 6): Si je I'avais vu, je I'aurais dit. Had I seen it, I should have said so. J'avais toujours flni avant midi. I always had finished before noon. 3. The past anterior denotes what had happened imme- diately before another past event. It is rarely used except after conjunctions of time, such as lorsque, quand, apres que, aussitot que, ne . . . pas plus tot . . . que, etc. : Aprfesji'il eiit A'ix\e., il partit After he had dined, he set out. 263. Futiure. The future is used: 1. To denote what will happen: lis viendront demain. They will come to-morrow. Je les verrai bientSt. I shall see them soon. Je ne sais pas s'il viendra. I know not whether he will come. a. Distinguish English 'will' of futurity from 'will' of volition, and from 'will' of habitual action: n ne restera pas. He wiU not stay. n ne veut pas tester. He will not stay. Ce chasseur teste souvent dans That hunter will often remain les bois pendant des mois whole months in the woods. entiers. 6. Observe the following commonly occurring forms: Ne voulez-vous pas tester? Will you not stay? Voulez-vous que je reste? Shall I stay? Je ne resterai pas. I shall not stay. 2. Regularly in a subordinate clause of implied futurity: Payez-le quand il viendra. Pay him when he comes. Faites comme vous voudrez. Do as you please. Tant que je vivrai. As long as I Hve. 3. To denote probability, conjecture, or possibility, etc.'; §§264^265 TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE 265 La nef appartient au XII® siecle, The nave belongs to the 12th cen- mais le choeur sera du XV®. tury, but the choir ^grobably of the 15th. 4. Sometimes with imperative force: Tu ne tue r^ point. Thou shalt not kill. Vous voudrez bien m'ecouter. Be good enough to hear me. a. This use is common in official style (edicts, etc.). 264. Future Anterior. The futurfe anterior is used: 1. To denote what will have happened: n aura bient6t fini. He will soon have done. 2. To denote implied futurity (cf. § 263, 2), probability, conjecture, or possibility, etc. (cf. §263, 3): Quand vous serez rentre je When you have come home, I sortirai. shall go out. Je me sCTaiJr^igg. I must have made a mistake. 265. Conditional. 1. The main use of the conditional is to denote result dependent on condition, i.e., what would happen in case something else were to happen: Je serais content, s'il venait. I should be glad if he came. a. The condition on which the result would depend is often merely imphed, but not formally stated: Hesiter serait une faiblesse. To hesitate would be weakness. b. Distinguish English 'should' of duty, etc., 'would' of volition, and 'would' of past habit, from conditional 'should' and 'would'; Je devrais partir. I should (ought to) set out. n ne voulait pas ecouter. He would not listen. J'allais souvent le voir. I would often go to see him. 2. It corresponds to an English past in a subordinate clause of imphed futurity (cf. § 263, 2) : Je prendrais ce qui resterait. I should take what remained. 3. In indirect discourse, it denotes what was once future and is now regarded as past, i.e., the original future of the 266 THE VERB §§ 266-267 assertion or question becomes a conditional when in a clause subordinate to a verb ia a past tense: Je croyais qu'il pleuvrait. I thought it would rain. A-t-U dit s'U. le f erait? Did he say whether he would do sol But: Je le ferai, dit-il. " I shall do so," said he. 4. It is used in statement or request expressed with defer- ence or reserve: Je le croirais au moins. . I should think so, at least. Auriez-vous la bonte d'y aller? Would you have the kindness to go? Cela ne serait jamais vrai. That never could (can) be true Je ne saurais vous le dire. I cannot tell you. Je voudrais qu'il fiit (soit) ici. I wish he were here. ^ 5. It sometimes denotes probabihty, conjecture, or possi- bility, etc., ia exclamations and questions (cf. § 263, 3): Serait-il vrai qu'il I'ait dit? Can it be true that he said so? Serait-il possible? Can (could) it be possible? y6. It sometimes denotes concession after quand, qtmnd meme, or with que: Quand (meme) il me tuerait, etc. Even if he should kiU me, etc. Vous me le jureriez que je ne Even if you swore it to me, I vous croirais pas. should not beheve you. V^ 7. It is used to give the substance of hearsay information: A ce qu'on dit, le roi serait malade. By what they say, the Hng is ill. 266. Conditional Anterior. Its uses are precisely parallel with those of the conditional (§ 265) ; it denotes what would have happened, etc., etc.: Je serais parti, s'il etait venu. I should have gone had he come. Selon les joimiaux, la guerre se According to the newspapers, war serait declaree hier soir. was declared last evening. 267. Imperative Mood. It is used in general as in English: Xisez-le. Ne le lisez pas. Read it. Do not read it. Allons-nous-en & present. Let us go away now. Veuillez m'ecouter. Be good enough to hear me. §§268-269 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 267 a. The first plural sometimes serves instead of the lacking first singular: Soyons digne de ma naissance. Let me be worthy of my birth. Pensons un moment. Let me think a moment. 6. The imperatives va, aliens, aUez, voyons, often have special idiomatic force: AUons done! Allans, du courage ! Nonsense ! Come, courage ! J' en suis content, allez! I am glad of it, I can assure you I Voyons, que pensez-vous? Come now, what do you think? c. An imperative perfect is rare: Ayez flni votre tache ce soir. Have your task done to-night. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 268. General Function. The subjiinctive denotes, in general, what is viewed as being desirable or undesirable, uncertain, contingent, or the hke, and usually stands in a subordinate clause. 269. Subjunctive in Noun Clause. The subjunctive is used in a clause introduced by que and serving as logical subject or as object of a verb: 1. After expressions of desiring (including willing, wish- ing, preferring) and avoiding: Je desire (veux) qu'il parte. I desire (wish) him to go. Voulez-vous que je teste? Do you wish me to (shall I) stay? Je souhaite qu'il ait du succes. I wish that he may have success. H prefere que vous restiez. He prefers that you should stay. Evitez qu'il (ne) vous vole. Avoid his seeing you. Such are: aimer, like ^viter, avoid souhaiter, wish aimer mieux, prefer prfeferer, prefer il me tarde, / long avoir envie, he desirous prendre garde, lake vouloir, mil, wish, d^sirer, desire, wish care Qest) etc. a. Prendre garde requires ne in the subjunctive clause; so also, eviter generally. Prends garde que cela ne se fasse. Take care lest that happen. 268 THE VERB 269 2. After expressions of cominanding (including request- ing, exhorting), forbidding, consenting: You order me to go. I ask that you should pay me. Tell them to be ready. The doctor forbids me to go out. I consent that that be done. pennettre, permit prier, heg, ask souffrir, suffer supplier, beg, pray trouver nature!, find natural veiller, take care etc. Vous ordonnez que je m'en aille. Je demands que vous me payiez. Dis-leur qu'ils soient prets. Le medecin defend que je sorte. Je consens que cela se fasse. Such are: admettre, admit demander, ask agr6er, permit empScher, hinder avoir soin, take care exhorter, exhort conjurer, implore exiger, exact consentir, consent laisser, allow convenir, a^ree s'opposer, oppose dfefendre, forbid ordonner, order So also, dire, tell, ecrire, write, entendre, mean, pretendre, intend, when denoting command. a. The future or conditional often stands after arreter, commander, decider, decreter, etc., especially when the subject is a word denoting final authority, such as cour, roi, etc.: Le roi decrete qu'il sera pendu. The king decrees that he shall be hanged. h. The subjunctive after empecher usually has ne: Empechez qu'il ne sorte. Prevent his going out. >i 3. After expressions of judgment or opinion involving approval or disapproval: J'approuve qu'il revienne. H merite qu'on le craigne. II vaut mieux que vous restiez. Je tiensJ)eaucoup k ce qu'il y soit. Such are: approuver, approve bl^mer, blame dSsapprouver, disapprove 6tre digne; be worthy fetre indigne, be unworthy juger k propos, think fit I approve of his coming back. He deserves to be feared. It is better for j'ou to stay. I am very anxious that he should be there. louer, praise m^riter, deserve tenir (k ce que), insist trouver bon, approve trouver mauvais, dis- approve trouver juste, think just trouver injuste, think unjust valoir, be worthy etc. So also, a large number of impersonals of like force: 1269 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 269 U convient, it is fitting il est, it ia . . . . + k propos, proper + bien, well + bon, good + convenable, fitting + essentiel, essential + k d&irer, to be desired + facile, easy -f" important, important il faut, it is necessarj/^ + indispensable, india- + juste, just + natural, natural + nfecessaire, necessary + & souhaiter, to be wished + temps, time must il importe, it is important il peut se faire, it may be a suffit, it suffices U vaut mieux, it is better etc., and their oppo- sites 4. After expressions of emotion or sentiment, such as joy, sorrow, anger, shame, wonder, fear: Etes-vous content qu'il soit ici? Are you glad he is here? Je regrette qu'il soit parti. II est f&che que vous le blamiez. II a honte que vous le sachiez. Je m'etonne qu'il n'ait gas honte. J'ai peur qu'il n|ait trop dit. Such are: I regret that he has gone. He is angry at your blaming him, He is ashamed that you know it. I wonder he is qot ashamed. I fear he has said too much. admirer, be astonished s'afBiger, grieve avoir honte, be asham^ avoir crainte, fear avoir peur, fear craindre, fear deplorer, deplore c'est, it is ... . + un bonheur, fortunate + dommage, a pity + une honte, o shame + honteux, a shame + piti6, a pity il est, it is ... . + curieux, strange + ^tonnant, astonishing + joyeux, glad + ikcheux, annoying + heureux, fortunate enrager, be enraged s'^tonner, be astonished fetre, be ... . + affligfe, grieved + bien aise, very glad + charmfe, delighted + content, glad + desol6, very sorry + 6tonn§, astonished + f^ehe, sorry, angry + heureux, happy + indignfe, indignant )( a. When it is feared something will happen the subjunctive has ne; when it is feared something will not happen the subjunctive has ne . . . pas; when the expression of fearing is negative, or interrogative, or conditional, ne is usually omitted; with double negation ne . . . pas stands in both (see also § 419 and Appendix referring to § 419) : Je Grains qu'il ne vienne. I fear he will come. Je Grains qu'U ne vienne pas. I fear he will not come. Je ne Grains pas qu'U vienne. [ do not fear ho will come. Craignez-vous qu'il vienne? Do you fear he will come? + m6content, displeased + satisfait, satisfied + surpris, surprised + triste, sad 66 ikchei, be sorry, angry se plaindre, complain redouter, fear regretter, regret se rfejouir, rejoice se repentir, repent soupirer, sigh trembler, tremble etc. 270 THE VERB § 269 Ne craignez-vous pas qu'il ne vienne? Do you not fear he will come? Si je craignais qu'il vint. If I feared he would come. Je ne crains pas qu'il ne vienne pas. I do not fear he wiU not come. 6. After expressions of emotion or sentiment (except fear), which admit de after them, de ce que + indicative may be used: J'ai honte de ce qu'H a echoue. I am ashamed that he failed. ,\ 5. After expressions of doubt, denial, despair, ignorance, or very slight probability: n doute que je sois loyal. He doubts that (whether) I am honest. Je nie que cela soit vrai. I deny that that is true. n est rare que vous ayez tort. You are rarely in the wrong. Such are: contester, dispute 1+ faux, false ^de (k) quoi sert-il7 of desesperer, despair + impossible, impossible what vse is it ? disoonvenir, deny + possible, possible il ne sert de (i) rien, dissimuler, not confess + rare, rare it is of no vse se diasimiiler, be hidden il s'en faut, the^e is want- il se peut, it may he douter, doubt ing il ne se peut pas, it il est, it is . . . ignorer, not know cannot be + douteux, doubtful nier, deny ■■ il semble, it seems, etc. a. Douter si ( = if, whether) requires the indicative: H doute si je suis loyal. He doubts if (whether) I am honest. )( b. II semble regularly has the subjunctive, since it indicates shght probabihty as distinguished from il parait = it appears, is emderd, and il me semble = it appears to me (personal conviction; but cf. 6, c): D semble que vous me craigniez. It seems that you fear me. n me semble (il parait) que vous It seems to me (it appears) that you me craignez. fear me. X c. Verbs of doubt and denial used negatively or interrogatively regu- larly require ne in the subjunctive clause: Je ne nie pas que je ne le sois. I do not deny that I am such. d. Ignorer + negative = know well, and hence takes indicative: Je n'ignore pas qu'il a menti. I know well he has lied. Note . — Peut-etre que, perhaps, and sans doute que, doubtless, require the indicative. 6. Note, however, that after positivo and affirmative ex- pressions of perceiving, thinking, knovi'ing, declaring, result- 269 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 271 ing, the indicative is used, the subjunctive being used only when negation, interrogation, or condition imply uncer- tainty or doubt: Je crois que c'est lui. J'espere qu'il reussira. But: Je ne crois pas que ce soit lui. EspSrez-vous qu'il reussisse? Je ne suis pas sflr qu'il vieime. Si je pretendais qu'il efit tort. Such are: I think it is he. I hope he will succeed, I do not think that it is he. Do you hope he will succeed ? I am not sure he will come. If I claimed he was wrong. affirmer, affirm ►'espfirer, hope prevoir, foresee s'apercevoir, perceive §tre certain, he certain promettre. vromise apprendre, learn, hear etre persuade, be persuaded se rappeler, recollect assurer, assure 6tre s 3. After conjunctions of condition (en cas que, au cas que, a jnoins que . . . ne, pourvu que, suppose que, en supposant que): Je viendrai au cas que je sois I shall come in case I am free to- libre demain, ou a moins que morrow, or unless I am detained je ne sois retenu. a. After si = if, the pluperfect subjunctive stands exceptionally (§275,6). 6. The present subjunctive sometimes expresses condition: Vienae I'ennemi, il s'enfuit. If the enemy comes, he flees. c. A (la) condition que takes indicative, conditional, or subjunctive: Je lui donne I'argent i (la) condi- I give him the money on condition tion qu'il />or ■dire,* say ■6couter, listen to «ntendre, hear, intend ' Sometimes takes de. parattre, appear penser,' intend, be near pouvoir, can, may prMSrer, prefer pr^tendre, assert, claim ^ Sometimes takes S or 6tre suppos6, be supposed t6moigner, testify se trouver, be valoir autant, be as good valoir mieux, be belter venir, 3 ^ come voir, see voler, fly vouloir, will, wish de. ' See also list o{ ■Irerbs requiring il (§ 279, 6). » See also list of verbs requiring de (§ 280, 6). § 279 THE INFINITIVE MOOD 281 a. Devoir = owe, he indebted, with indirect object takes de: Je lui dois d'etre encore en vie. I owe to him that I am still alive. h. Faire takes de in ne faire que de : nnefaitque_d«LSortir. He has just gone out. c. Ne pas laisser = not to cease, etc., takes de: n ne laisse pas (que) de le dire. He is always saying so (says so for all that), 279. Infinitive with the Preposition a. The infinitive preceded by a = to, in, at, by, etc., is used: 1. As direct object of a few transitives (see list below): T'aime a chanter . I like to sing. Continuez k lire. Continue to read. n m'enseigne a chanter. He teaches me to sing (singing). J'ai k etudier domain. I have to study to-morrow. n n'y a pas k se plaindre. There is nothing to complain of. ,.V2. As a complement, after many verbs, to denote the object to which the action tends (answering the question 'to do what?') or the object in, at, on, about which the action takes place (answering the question 'in doing what?' 'at doing what?' etc.): n aspire a devenir riche. He aspires to become rich. Poussez-les k agir. Urge them to act. Jejes ad invit es Avogjr. I have invited them to come. Aidez-moi k porter cette malle. Help me to carry this trunk. D leussit k me trouver. He succeeded in finding me. Je suis k ecrire une letbre. I am (busy) writing a letter. n s'amuse k me taquiner. He amuses himseK teasing me. J'ai gagne k vendre ma maison. I gained by selling my house. n joue k take le malade. He plays at being ill. 3. As the complement of certain adjectives (cf. § 280, 2) and nouns denoting fitness, tendency, purposej__et.c. : Ceci est bon a manger. This is good to eat. Je suis prSt k vous ecouter. I am ready to hear you. Quelque chose d'utile k savoir. Something useful to know. Cela est facile k faife. That is easy to do. 282 THE VERB §279 La tendance k se croire grand. The tendency to think oneself great. ^£_bonne^outimre. ^^^ydof all work. a. So also, le premier, le dernier, le seul: D n'est pas le seul k le dire. He is not the only one to say so. }<4. To form adjectival phrases denotingj use, fitnes s. quality, etc.: Une salle a manger. A dining-room. Une chose a voir. A thing worth seeing. Des contes k dormir debout. Very tiresome stories. Un spectacle a faire peur. A terrible sight. De maniere k rgussir. In such a way as to succeed. Vous 6tes k plaindre. You are to be pitied. C'est k en mourir. It is enough to kill one. ~)<5. To form adverbial phrases: Elle chante k ravir. She sings charmingly. Elle pleurait ajakejitie. She wept gitifullx. A vrai dire, je le plains. To tell the truth, I pity him. Elle est laide k faire peur. She is frightfully ugly. 6. Reference list of verbs requiring infinitive with a: s'abaisser, sloop s'arrSter, stop condamner (se), condemn abandonner (s'), gi^e up aspirer, aspire condescendre, condescertd aboutir, end (in), tend assujettir (s'), svly'ect * conduire, lead a' abuser, be mistaken (in) aatreindre, compel consacrer (se), devote B'accorder,^ agree (in) s'astreindre, bind o. s. consentir, coTisent w^tre d'accord, agree (in) attacher, attach kconsister, consist (in) accoutujneT(3') ,' accustom, s'attaoher, be intent (on) conspirer, conspire s'acharner, be bent (on) attendre (s'), expect consumer (se) , consi/me (in) i-^dmettre, admit autoriser, authorize "^ontinuer.^ continue a'adonner, addict o. s. s'avilir, stoop eontraindre, ' constrain aguerrir (s'), inure K^voir, have, must contribuer, contribute aider, h^dp avoir (de la) peine, have convier,' invite aimer,' like difficulty (in) coOter, cost amener, lead balancer, hesitate decider,' induce a,V[mseT(a'),amuse (in,by)se borner, limit o. s. se decider, resolve Z'mer (a'), excite i/chercher, seek, try dfefier,' challenge, incite . peler, caH commencer,' fecffin i" demander,' as^*<"v i ': ' appliquer (s'), apply se complaire, take j)Ze«(pprendre, ham, teach ure (in) depenser, spend (in) appr&ter (s'), get reckij/ conco\iiii,co6perate(in) dfesapprendre, /orffet §279 THE INFINITIVE MOOD 283 desoendre,* stoop, abase finir (neg.) ,' have done destiner, destine [^o.s. forcer,' force determiner,' induce se determiner, resolve dSvouer (se), devote porter, induce pousser, vrge, incite gagner, gain (by) prendre garde,' take care habituer,2 accustom preudreplaisir,dcKffW(in) s'habituer, accustom o. s. se prendre, begin hair, hate se hasarder,^ venture . hesiter,^ hesitate inciter, incite incliner, incline induire, induce instruire, instruct employer (s')> employ (in) interesser(s'),*»'eresJ(in) se r^duire, confine a. s. s'empresser,' ' be eager t^viter, invite "Refuser,' refuse to give ^encourager, encourage jouer, play (at) se refuser, refuse enga,gei(s'),'erigage,adviselaisser,' * leave lenoncer, renounce enhardir,^ embolden se lasser,' tire o. s. (in) r^pugner, be reluctant s'enliardir,^ veTiiure manquer,' he remiss (in) se r&igner, resign o. s. differer,^ delay disposer (se), dispose divertir (se), amuse donner, give dresser, train s'efforcer,' try s'fegayer, divert o. s. (by) preparer (se), prepare prfetendre,* aspire accuse {of) achever, finish admirer, wonder {at) affecter, affect s'aSliger, grieve (at, over) s'apercevoir, perceive B'applaudir, congratulate 0. s. (on) apprehender, fear arrSter, prevent (from) , determine L(at) B'attrister, become sad avertir, notify, warn e'aviser, think (of) bia,mer, blame (for) brOler, long censurer, censure (for) cesser, cease [_over) se chagriner, grieve (at, charger, charge se charger, undertake choisir, choose commander, com/mand commencer,^ begin conjurer, beseech conseiller, advise consoler, console (for) Be contenter, be satisfied continuer,' continue contraindre,' constrain convaincre, convict (of) «r6nvenir, agree craindre, fear crier, cry dfoider,' decide, resolve dlcourager (se), discour- age (from) d^daigner, diidain def endre, forbid se d^fendre, forbear, ex- cuse 0. s. d^fier,' defy se dSfier, distrust dSgodter, disgust (with) d^Iiberer, deliberate (about) •^emander,^ ask se depScher, make haste ^6viter, avoid excuser (s') , excuse (from) exempter, exempt (from) faire bien, do well se f atiguer,' be tired (of) feindre, feign i/feliciter (se) , congratulate finir,' finish [(ora) se flatter, flatter o. s. forcer,' force d&accoutumer (se), dis- fr^mir, shudder accustom (from) d&esp6rer, despair (of) dfehabituer (se), disac- custom (from) d6terminer,^ resolve dfetester, detest \_(from) dStoumer, dissuade dire,^ bid discontinuer, cease gager, wager garder (se), forbear gSmir, groan gSner, incommode se glorifier, boast (of) gronder, scold (for) hasarder, venture se ha,ter, hasten imaginer, imagine disoonvenir, deny [.(for) s'impatienter, be impo- se disculper, excuse o. s. tient dispen3er,dispe«se (from) imputer, impute disauader, dissuade(from) s'indigner, be indignant douter, hesitate se douter, suspect tScrire, write s'efforcer,' try s'effrayer, be afraid empScher, prevent s'empficher, abstain (from) s'empresser,' hasten enjoindre, enjoin s'ennuyer,^ ^ be tired (of) s'enorgueillir, be proud enrager, be enraged (at) entreprendre, undertake 6pargner, spare essayer,' try s'fitonner, be astonished Stre 4,^' be duty or office n^gliger, neglect (of) notifier, notify s'ingerer, meddle (with) inspirer, inspire interdire, interdict (from) jouir, enjoy juger bon, think fit jurer,^ promise (on oath) ne pas laisser,^* not to cease se lasser,' be weary (of) louer, praise (for) mander, bid [point cf manquer,' fail, be on mMiter, meditate se m&ler, meddle (mth) menacer, threaten mferiter; deserve [(of) se moquer, make sport mourir, die, long 286 THE VERB 281 obliger,' oblige, force presser, urge obliger,' do favour se presser, hasten obtenir, obtain presumer, presume s'ocouper,' be intent {on) prier,' beg, pray priver (se), deprive {of) projeter, intend promettre (se), promise proposer, propose se proposer, intend protester, protest punir, punish (for) reoommander, recommend sourire, smile recommencer,^ begin again se souvenir, recollect reprocher (se), reproach {with) rfeoudre,' resolve se ressouvenir, remember /iiie (se), laugh risquer, risk rougir, blitsh sommer, summon se soucier, care souffrir,^ suffer soupQomier, suspect refuser,' refuse suggferer, suggest supplier, beseech t&cher,^ try tenter,^ attempt trembler,' tremble, fear trouver bon, think fit se vanter, boast {of) venir,' offrir, offer omettre, omit ordonner, order oublier,^ forget pardonner, forgive parier, bet -parler, speak se passer, do without permettre (se), permit persuader, persuade se piquer, pride o. s. (on)c^egretter, regret plaindre, pity [.{of) se r^jouir, rejoice se plaindre, complain remercier, thank {for) (prendre garde,' take care se repentir, repent {of) not, beware {of) reprendre, reprove {for) prendre soin, take care rfeprimander, reprimand prescrire, prescribe {for) 1 Or a. 2 Sometimes a. ' See also list of verbs requiring k (§ 279, 6). ' See also list of verba requiring direct infinitive (§ 278, 6). 281. Distinctions. As appears from the list, the same verb sometimes requires a, de, or the direct infinitive. The following are examples of cases in which the sense varies with the construction: ^1. Aimer: J'aimerais bien le connaitre. J'aime mieux vous dire tout. Aimez-vous a demeurer ici? /, 2. Decider: D m'a decide d entrer. Nous decidames de partir. 3. Defier: On le defia a boire. Je vous defie de prouver cela. ^4. Descendre : Descends chercher ton chapeau. II descendit m€me a voler. I should like to know him. I prefer to tell you all. Do you like to live here? He induced me to go in. We decided to set out. They challenged him to drink, I defy you to prove that. Go down and get your hat. He even descended to theft. I 281 THE INFINITIVE MOOD 287 5. Determiner: Je I'ai determine a rester. II avait determine de le rebatir. 6. Dire: n dit I'avoir vu. Je lui ai dit de venir. ^7. S' empresser : n s'empressait a lui plaire. TL s'empressa de repondre. 8. fitre: Je suis a ecrire des lettres. C'est a vous de parler. C'est a vous a parler. '-^ Se f atiguer : II se fatigua a jouer au billard. n est fatigue de jouer. 10. Finir: II ne finissait pas a me le dire. J'ai fini de travaiUer. 11. Jurer: Je jure I'avoir vu. Je jure de le faire. i-i2. Laisser : Je I'ai laisse dire. Je vous laisse a penser. It ne laissa pas de parler. 13. Se lasser: n s'est lasse a courir. H se lasse de courir. 14. Manquer: Ne manquez pas d'y etre. Je manquai de tomber. n ne manque jamais a faire son devoir. 15. Obliger: Je I'ai oblige a (.de) le faire. I induced him to stay. He had determined to rebuild it. He says he saw it. I told him to come. He was eager to please her. He hastened to reply. I am (busy) siting letters. It is your plaoe {or turn) to speak. It is your turn to speak. He fatigued himself playing biUiarda He is tired playing. He was never done ti llin g me so. I have finished working. I swear I saw it. I swear I wUI do it. I let him talk. I leave you to think. He did not stop talking. He tired himself out (by) rvuming. He is tired of running. Don't fan to be there. I was on the point of falling. He never fails to do his duty. I obliged him to do it. 288 THE VERB §282 Je suis oblige de partir. Vous m'obligerez beaucoup de le faire. i^fe. S'occuper: D s'occupe a lire. II s'occupe de detruire les abus. 17. Penser: Que pensez-vous faire ? Je pensai tomber. Je pense a repliquer a cela. 18. Prendre garde: Prenez garde a ne pas le faire. Prenez garde de (ne pas) tomber. 19. Pretendre: D pretend vous connaitre. D pretend a devenir savant. 20. Prier: II m'a prie a diner. Je vous prie de m'aider. 21. Refuser: Me refusez-vous a manger ? Je refuserai d'y aller. 22. Resoudre : D m'a rSsolu a I'acheter. Pai resolu de I'acheter. 23. Trembler: n tremble a me voir. n tremble de me rencontrer. 24. Venir: Venez nous voir. Si vous veniez a le voir. Je viens de le voir. I am obliged to go. You will greatly oblige me by doing it. He is b_usy^ reading. He is intent on destroying abuses. What do you intend to do ? I nearly fell. I think of replying to that. Take care not to do it. Take care not to fall. He asserts that he knows you. He aspires to become learned. He invited me to dine. I pray (ask) you to help me. Do you refuse to give me food ? I shall refuse to go. He induced me to buy it. I have determined to buy it. He trembles when he sees me. He fears to meet me. Come to see us. If you should happen to see him. I have just seen him. 282. Infinitive with other Prepositions. The infinitive stands also after par, pour, sans, apres, entre, and after locu- tions ending in de or k, such as afin de, avant de, jusqu'a, etc.: §§ 283-284 THE INFINITIVE MOOD 289 1. Par = by usually only after commencer and finir: D finit par m'in sulter. He ended by insulting me (or He finally insulted me). 2. Pour usually translates in order to, for the purpose of; sometimes also for, from, because, though, etc., and to after assez, trop, etc.: n faut manger pour vivre. We must eat (in order) to Hve, n est mort pour avoir trop bu. He died from over-drinking. D fut pimi pour avoir ri. He was punished for laughing. „ Pour etre pauvre, il n'est pas Though poor, he is no thief. larron. II est trop franc pour se taire. He is too frank to keep quiet. a. Pour after a verb of motion (§ 278, 4) emphasizes the purpose: Pirai pour le voir. I shall go to see him. 3. Sans = withovi: Ne partez pas sans manger. Do not go without eating. 4. Apres = after requires the perfect infinitive: Apres avoir dine, je partis. After having dined, I set out, 283. Infinitive for Subordinate Clause. 1. An infini- tive construction usually replaces a que clause of which the subject is the same with that of the subject or object (direct or indirect) of the principal clause: n croit vous avoir vu. He thinks that he has seen you. Dites-leur de s'en aller. Tell them to be gone. 2. Similarly afin de, a moins de, apres, avant de, de crainte de, de peur de, de fa^on a, de maniere k, pour, sans, etc. + the infinitive stand for afin que, etc. + the subjunc- tive, but only when the subject of both verbs is the same: H partit sans me voir. He went without seeing me. But : n partit sans que je le visse. He went without my seeing him. 284. Infinitive with Passive Force. A transitive infini- tive has (seeming) passive force after verbs of perceiving 290 THE VERB §§285-286 (voir, etc.), after faire, laisser, and when a + an infinitive is used adjectively (cf. § 241, 3): JTai vu batir cette maison. I saw this house being built. Je me fais faire un habit. I am having a coat made for myself. Vous etes k plaindre. You are to be pitied. Une faute k eviter. A mistake to be avoided. Note. — This construction may be explained by supplying some such ellipsis as the following: J'ai vu bStir une maison a or par quelqt/un, I have seen somebody building a house. 285. Infinitive for English -ing. The infinitive must be used to translate many such forms (see § 287, 2, 3, 4) . THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE 286. Functions. The participial form in -ant serves as a verbal adjective, as a present participle (without en), and as a gertmd (with en): 1. As a verbal adjective, it denotes quality or state, and agrees hke an adjective: Elle parait bien portante. She seems well. Les enfants doivent etre obeissants. Children must be obedient. Les vivants, et les mourants. The living and the dying. Des paroles consolantes. Comforting words. •^Obs.: The verbal adjective, attributively, regularly follows the noun, as in the last example. a. Some verbs have a special form for the verbal adjective: Adj. Pakt. Adj. Pakt. different, different diflerant negligent, careless nfegUgeant convaincant , convincing convainquant puissant, powerful pouvant fatigant , fatiguing f atigu ant Bavant, learned s achant 2. As_a present participle, it is used, in general, hke the English present participle, to denote simultaneous action, manner, cause, motive, etc., and is invariable: Pleurant, elle continua le recit. Weeping, she continued the story. Je le trouvai riant comme un fou. I found him laughing like mad. Elle ne sortit pas, etant malade. She did not go out, being ill. §287 THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE 291 Ayant parle ainsi, il sortit. Having thus spoken, he went out. Jl n'entrera pas, moi vivant. He shall not enter while I hve. Notes. — 1. It is often difficult to determine whether the form in -ant is partiniple (invariable) or adjective (variable) . As a participle, the action (generally transitory) is prominent, but as an adjective, quaUty or else continued action (state) is denoted. It is nearly always a participle when it has a complement or a construction peculiar to the verb, such as object, negative, adverb foUowing: line femme mourante, A dying woman; Des gens mourant de faim. People dying of hunger; Les ennemis se retirerent, brulant les villes partout, The enemy retired, burning the tovms everywhere; Une femme ne craignant rien, A woman fearing nothing; Des dames par- lant doucement, Ladies, speaking softly; De soi-disant amis, So-called friends. 2. In the last example, soi-disant, though adjective in force, remains invariable in view of the Uteral meaning, coiling themselves. 3. Ayant and eta nt^r e also al ways invariable, except in les ayants- droit (-cause). 3. As a gerund, it denotes either simultaneous action or 'means by which,' and is invariable; en = while, in, on, when, as, by, etc., or is untranslated: En jouaat, j'ai perdu ma montre. While playing, I lost my watch. En rentrant, j'ai trouve la lettre. On returning, I found the letter. Vous perdrez, en agissant ainsi. You will lose if you act thus. En lisant on apprend a lire. By reading one learna to read. a. Both participle and gerund denote simultaneous action, but the use of en, strengthened sometimes by tout, usually emphasizes the continuity of the actionw+ '•.•^■'^■2ii^i^,'t..:--z^ re^encontrer, meet with souhaiter, wish for etc. ('4.;De and a frequently have, as compared with EngUsh, a special idiomatic force with certain verbs: Cela depend de vous. That depends on you. Pensez a votre devoir. Think of your duty. Such verbs are: e'afBiger de, grieve at \ blS,mer de, blame for consoler de, console for .approcher(s') de. draw , complimenter de, com- dejeuner de, breakfast on near tt pliment on , dfipendre de. depend on §296 GOVERNMENT OF VERBS 299 se d^aoler de, grieve over se nourrir de, live on remercier de, thank far diner de, dine on profiter de, profit by Tire de, laugh at fSliciter de, congratvlate on vpunir de, punish for triompher de, triumph over "^mir de, lament oner r§compenser de, re- »/Vivre de, live on t^ouer de, praise for ward for etc, se mller de, meddle with se rejouir de, rejoice at oter qqch. k qqu., take away from, k^ardonner qqch. k qqu., pardon for i^ayer qqch. k qqu., pay for penser k qqch. or k qqu., think of prendre qqch. k qqu., take from ^/i)ourvoir k qqch., provide for procurer qqch. k qqu., procure for prodiguer qqch. k qqu., lavish on reprocher qqch. k qqu., reproach with i/^ouhaiter qqch. k qqu., wish voler qqch. k qqu., steal from, 'acheter qqch. k qqu., buy something from (or for) some one arracher qqch. k qqu., snatch from cacher qqch. k qqu., hide from conferer qqch. k qqu., confer on demander qqch. k qqu., ask for (of) v.fourmi, ant glu, bird lime polka, polka merci, mercy tribu, tribe razzia,, raid foi, faith vertu, virtue tombola, charity lottery loi, law eau, water veranda, veranda parol, waU peau, skin cit6, cUy virago, virago etc. Further, most abstracts in -te, -tie : amiti6, friendship liberty, liberty santfe, health charity, charity piti6, pity etc. (2) In a consonant: Le sac (pied, joug, sol, nez, temps). The sack (foot, yoke, soil, nose, time). 302 THE NOUN I 303 a. Feminine exceptions are: clef, key nef, ship, nave 3oif, thirst faim, hunger fagon, fashion fin, end lejon, lesson main, hand rancon, ransom chair, flesh oour, court kiuiller, spoon mer, sea tour, tower L-l&ebis, sheep fois, time oasis, oasis souris, mouse ■^^s, screw ^dent, toott dot, dower forSt, /ore«< gent, iribe mort, death nuit, niisA< part, part, share chaux, lime croLS, cross faux, scythe noix, walnut paix, peace perdrix, partridge poix, pitch ><^oux, cough voix, ?)oice etc. fureur, /urj/ peur, /ear etc. Further, nouns in -son, -ion and most abstracts in -eur (cf . § 301, o) : chanson, song nation, nation faveur, favor maison, house occasion, occasion raison, reason possession, possession trahison, treason oouleur, color (3) In -acle, -age, -asme, -ege, -erne, -isme, -tere: Le spectacle (voyage, sarcasme. The spectacle (journey, sarcasm, college, diademe, magnetisme, college, diadem, magnetism, mystere). mystery). a. The following feminines in -age should be noted: cage, cage nage, swimming plage, beach image, image page, page (of a book) rage, rage 2. Feminine are most nouns ending as follows: (1) In -e preceded by a vowel or double consonant: Une annee (vie, vue, raie, soie, A year (life, sight, streak, sUk, roue, pluie, famille, flamme, wheel, couronne, tristesse, botte). crown. family, boot). flame. (2) In -ace, -ade, -ance, -ence, -ense, -iere, -oire, -ude, -ure: La preface (salade, Constance, The preface (salad, constancy, presence, defense, lumiSre, presence, defence, light, his- histoire, habitude, culture). tory, habit, culture). 303. Gender by Meaning. 1. Names of male beings are usually masculine, and names of female beings feminine: Un homme; une fenune. A man; a woman. Dii boeuf ; une vache. An ox; a cow. § 303 GENDER OF NOUNS 303 a. Most nouns denoting professions, e.g., auteur, author, ecrivain, writer, impiimeur, printer, etc., and a few nouns lacking a feminine form, e.g., ange, angel, temoin, witness, etc., remain masculine when applied to females: Cette dame est un auteui dis- That lady is a celebrated author- tingue. ess. Marie est un ange. Mary is an angel. 6. Some names of lower animals are masculine only, e.g., elephant, elephant, hibou, owl; others are feminine only, e.g., fourmi, ant, souris, mouse; ambiguity may be avoided by adding male or femelle: Un elephant male (femelle). A bull (cow) elephant. c. Some nouns are feminine only, whether applied to males or females: caution, surety personne, person vedette, scout "^onnaissance, acguairUance pratique, customer 'Retime, mctim dupe, dupe recrue, recruit vigie, look-out man '^ganache, blockhead sentinelle, sentinel etc. X.2. ^Thg^ oUowing are mascu lijiej- (1) Names of cardinal points and winds: Le nord; le sud; le zephyr. The north; the south; the zephyr. a. Feminine exceptions are: %ae, north vnnd mousson, monsoon tramontane, north wind brise, breeze (2) Names of seasons, months, days of the week: Le printemps; octobre; lundi. Spring; October; Monday. (3) Names of countries not ending ia -e: Le Canada; leDauphine; le Chili. Canada; Dauphiny; Chile. (4) Most names of moimtains not ending in -es, and most names of rivers: Le Hartz ; le Jura. The Harz mts. ; the Jura mts. Les Apennins. The Apennines. Le Volga; le_Rh6ne; le Rhin. The Volga; the Rhone; the Rhme. But fern.: Les Alpcs (Pyrenees, Vosges, etc.). a. The rivers of France in -e are nearly all feminine: La Seine, la Loire, etc. The Seine, the Loire, etc. (5) Names of trees and shrubs: Le chene; le bouleau; le pommier. The oak; the birch; the apple tree. 304 THE NOUN $ 303 a. Feminine exceptions are: aubSpine, hawthorn fepine, thorn vigne, vine bourdaine, buckthorn hi&ble, dwarf elder viorue, wild clematis bruy^re, heath - ronce, bramble etc. (6) Names of weights and measures of the metrical system: Un metre (gramme, litre, etc.). A meter (gramme, liter, etc.). (7) Names of metals and chemicals: Le fer (or, cuivre, argent, sul- Iron (gold, copper, silver, sul- fate), phate). a. Feminine exceptions are: fonte, cast iron tola, sheet iron X(8) Words and phrases not nouns when used as nouns: Le beau; le Wane; le fransais. The beautiful; white; French. Un a; un mais; un oui-dire. An 'a'; a ' but '; a rumor. Le derriere de la tete. The back of the head. a. Adjectives referring to concrete objects have the gender of the noun understood: Une belle {sc. dame, femme, etc.). A beauty. Une capitale (sc. ville, lettre). A capital. &. The names of the letters of the alphabet, as given in § 4, are all masculine, but f, h, 1, m, n, r, s are often treated as feminine. Una; un b; une (or un) f. An ' a'; a ' b '; an 'f.' 3. The following are feminine: (1) Names of countries in -e: La France (Asie, Normandie). France (Asia, Normandy). a. Some masculine exceptions are: le Bengale, Bengal Ig^Jexjciue, Mexico le Maine, Maine (in Fr.) (2) Most names of cities and towns, especially in -e, -es: Rome; Athenes; Tyr; nion. Rome; Athens; Tyre; Ilium. o. Masculine exceptions are: le Caire, Cairo Londres, London Paris, Paris le Havre, Havre Versailles, Versailles etc. X Notes. — 1. Any name of a town or city is masculine as a collective: Tout Rome le salt, All Rome knows it. 2. In case of doubt as to the gender, the name may always be preceded by la ville de = the town (city) of. 304 GENDER OF NOUNS 305 (3) Names of holidays, fete de being understood: La Saint-Martin; la mi-juin. Martinmas; mid-June. o. Observe: Noel, m. (la Noel, la f €te de Noel). Christmas. (4) Names of arts, sciences, trades: La peinture (chimie, librairie). Painting (chemistry, book-trade). a. Principal exception: le dessin, drawing 304. Nouns of Double Gender. 1. Some nouns denot- ing persons, mostly in -e, and adjectives in -e, when so used, are either masculine or feminine: Un (une) artiste; un (ime) eleve. An artist; a pupil. Un (une) malade; un (une) rebelle. A patient; a rebel. Such nouns are: aide, assistant * enfant, child propri6taire, ovmer camarade, comrade esolave, slave pupille, ward compatriote, compatriot locataire, tenant etc. * Regularly masculine in the plural. But: belles enf ants, j)re<<|/K/7/e;7tr/s. V^2. The meaning of some noims varies with the gender: Un criti que; une critique. A critic; a criticism. Le modiy /a mode. The mode, mood {gram.); the fashion. Other such nouns are: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fbm. 'aide assistant assistartt, hdp page page poffe(of a book) aune alder ell -pendule pendulum clock cripe crape pancake poSle stove, pall frying-pan garde guard (mil.), keeper, body of politique politician politics keeper troops, waich,hiU poste position post office guide guide rein somme sleep, nap sum "^livre book pound i/^ouris smile mouse ''manche handle sleeve statuaire sculptor sculpture '^m^tnohe memorandum memory 'tour turn, trick tower I merci thanks mercy, pity i/tiompette trumpeter trumpet moule mould mussel vapeur steamer steam mousse cabin-boy moss •'vase vase slime, mud ^office service larder ^roile veil cail 306 THE NOUN § 304 3. The following nouns are either masculine or feminine, with identical or closely related meaning: a. Apres-midi = aftemocm and autonme = autumn are usually mas- culine, sometimes feminine. 5. Amour (m.) = love, loved object, passion, amour; amour (f. s. poet.) = passion, amour; amours (f. pi.) = passion, amours. c. Automobile (m. or f.), more commonly feminine. \/d. Delice = delight and orgue = organ (music) are masculine in singular and feminine in plural. e. Hymne (m.) = hymn, song of praise; hymne (f.) = {church) hymn. (Commonly cantique is used.) /. Couple (m.) = couple, pair (joined by affection, sentiment, etc.); couple (f.) = couple, two (two like objects taken together): '.„ ,, , -IV-. '..JV t f VJilJlJJ Un couple d'amoureux. -^'^ # ■ 'A pan- of lovers. Une couple d'oeufs. Two (a couple of) eggs. Note: Vnepaire de gants, etc. A pair of gloves, etc. ^g. PSque or paques (m. s.) = Easter; paques fleuries (f. pi.) = Palm Sunday (so also in other phrases); pique (f.) = Passover. h. Orge (f.) = barley is masculine in orge monde (perle) = pot- (pearl-) barley. i. Foudre (f.) = thunderbolt is sometimes masculine in poetry or elevated prose; foudre (m.) in le foudre de Jupiter = Jove's thunder- bolt and in figurative expressions, e.g., un grand foudre de guerre = o great warrior. j. CEuvre (f.) = work, works, is sometimes masculine in elevated style; oeuvre (m. a.) = works (collectively of an engraver or musician); le grand oeuvre = the philosopher's stone. k. Gens (pi. m. or {.) = people, persons, etc. Attributive adjec- tives are fem in i n e when preceding, and masculine when following gens, but predicatives, before or after, are masculine. All is translated by toutes only when attributive and separated from gens by an adjective variable for the feminine; otherwise by tous: De bonnes gens. Good people. Las vieilles gens sont malheureux. Old people are unhappy. §§ 305-306 GENDER OF NOUNS 307 Les petites gens et les grands. Merci, bonnes gens, merci. Ces gens sont heureux. Toutes les vieilles gens. Tous les gens. But: Tous les habiles gens. Tous ces gens-ci. Tous sont de bonnes gens. Les gens sont tous ici. The small people and the great. Thanks, good people, thanks. Those people are happy. All (the) old people. All the people. AH the clever people. All these people. AH are good people. The people are all here. Notes. — 1. A pronouii to which gens is antecedent is masculine: Les gens gui sont verms. The people who have come. 2. Gens in expressions like gens de robe = lawyers and in jeunes gens = young men is always mas- culine. A 305. Gender of Compound Nouns. 1. Compound nouns made up of a verb + a governed noun are regularly masculine: Un cure-dents; un porte-plume. A toothpick; a penholder. Un tire-bouchon ; un portefeuille. A corkscrew; a portfolio. a. Occasionally they are feminine: .lUne perce-neige. A snowdrop. 2. The gender of other compounds is regularly that of the noun when only one noim is present, or of the principal noun in case there are two: 0ne eau-forte. Une mappe-monde. ' La f ete-dieu. An etching. A map of the world. Corpus Christi day. 306. Formation of the Feminine. Most nouns denot- ing living beings distinguish the masculine and feminine as follows: 1. Some by a different word: Masc. Fbm. Masc. Fbm. boeuf, ox vache mari, husband femme bouc, he-goat chfivre oncle, uncle tante coq, cock poule parrain, godfather marraine bire, brother soeur pore, pig truie horn me, man femme etc. etc. 308 THE NOUN §306 a. The feminine form is often obviously cognate: Masc. Fem. ambassadeur, ambassador ambassadrice ( canard, drake 1 * chanteur, singer cochon, hog i---bal(s), ball (for dancing) M(5xnaval(s), carnival r6gal(s), treat ^4:. The foUom ng in -ail have the plural in -aux: bail (-aux), lease travail (-aux), work vitrail (-aux), stained corail (-aux), coral vantail (-ava), folding-door glass window soupirail (-aux), ventaU (-aux), ventail air-hole But: d6taji.(s), detail; dventail(s), /on, etc., are regular. Note. — Bestiauz (pi.) , cattle, is often given as the plural of betail, catUe; it is from an obsolete form bestiail, parallel to betail. 5. Gent = race, tribe, has the plural gens = people, etc. 310 THE NOUN §§ 309-311 309. Double Plurals. The following have two plural forms, mostly with varying meaning: /aieul (aieux), ancestor cbU (yeux), eye ^_aieul (aieuls), grandfather ceil (ceils-) in compounds, e.g., ail (aulx), garlic oeils-de-bcEuf, oval mndowe ail (ails), garlic pal (paux), pale, stake ^biel (cieux), sky, heaven, climate pal (pals), pale, stake ". ciel (eiels), bed-tester, sky {in paint- /{ravail (travaux), work ing), roof (of a quarry) Itravail (travails), report (of a minis- ter, etc.), brake (for horseshoeing) Obs.; The -x plural regularly has the literal meaning of the word. 310. Foreign Nouns. Nouns of foreign origin- take -s, usually only when fully natiu-alized, but usage varies greatly (see a dictionary): a. Partial list of variable foreign nouns: aecessit(s), honorable hi]l(s), bill toast(s), toast mention duo(s), duo tramway(s), street-raUwat album (s), aZftttm iMTyis), jury \iv3X{s) , hurrah alibi(s), alibi opera(s), opera etc. bLfteck(s), beefsteak pensum(s), task b. Partial list of invariable foreign nouns: amen in-foHo magnificat requiem veto facsimile in-octavo nota bene Te Deum etc. item interim post-scriptum vade mecum c. A few Italian nouns retain their plural in i: dilettante (-1), dilettante soprano (-i), soprano quintette (-i), quiniMe libretto(-i), libretto lazzarone(-i), beggar etc. 311. Compound Nouns. The only components which take a plural sign are nouns and adjectives. The following are special rules: 1. Compounds without hyphen are treated as one word, and follow the general rules: Portemanteau(x); grand'mere(s). Valise(s); grandmother(s). a. Exceptions are: bon(s)homme(s), goodman, etc. madame (mesdames), madam, Mrs. n gentil(s)homme(s), nobleman mademoiselle (mesdemoiselles) , Mies monsieur (messieurs), Mr., sir, etc. monseigneur (messeigneurs), my lord § 311 NUMBER OF NOUNS 311 2. When placed in juxtaposition and connected by a hyphen, nouns ajid. adjectives are variable: Chef(s)-Ueu(x); chou(x;)-fleur(s) ; County-town(s); cauliflower(s); grand(s)-pere(s). grandfather (s). a. Demi- is invariable in compounds. Des demi-hexaes. Half hours. 6. Further exceptions are: blane-seiiig(s), signature in blank terre-plein(s), platform chevau-leger(s), light-horseman etc. X^- Of two nouns joiaed by preposition and hyphens, the first only is variable: Arc(s)-en-ciel; chef(s)-d'oeuvre. Rainbow; masterpiece. a. The preposition de is sometimes tmderstood: — bain(s)-marie, water bath, double boi ler timbre(s)-poste, postage-stamp i h6tel(s)-dieu, hospital etc. / 6. The following are invariable, since the idea conveyed by their plural does not properly belong to the first component simply: cog;Jcl!aBei_cocfc^^a?M^--&uZZ story pot-au-feu, beef wnd soup pied -k-terre, tempor ary, lodging t^te^tSte, private interview 4. A noim with preceding invariable component is usually variable : Anglo-Saxon (s); ^vant-garde(s) Anglo-Saxon; vanguard tire-bouchon(s) ; vice-roi(s) corkscrew; viceroy bouche-trou(s) stop-gap a. But the final noun remains invariable when the plural idea does not properly belong to it: abat-jour, lamp shade gagne-pain, means of living rev eille-ma tin, alarm coupe-zoTge, cutr-throat place perce-neige, snowdrop doclf, crfeve-cceur, hea rtbrea k prie-dieu, praying-stool serre-t^te, headband contre-poiso n, antid ote boute-en-tiain, folly fellow etc. b. On the other hand, a final noun of clearly plural sense retains -a in the singular: on (d es) casse-noisettes, nutcracker im (des) j)orte-cIef s, turnkey un_ (de3) cure-dent s, toothpick etc. 5. Invariable words, such as verb, adverb, preposition, etc., are invariable in compounds: Oes on dit; des passe-partout. Rmnors; master-keys. 312 THE NOUN §§ 312-313 '-a. Garde- is usually variable in compoundt denoting persons, and invariable in those denoting things: Des gardes-malades. Sick-nurses. But: Des garde-robes. Wardrobes. 312. Plural of Proper Nouns. 1. Names of persons or families are usually invariable in the plural: Les deux Racine. The two Racines. Les Comeille et les Racine de la The Comeilles and Racines of the scene. stage (i.e., Comeille, Racine, and others like them). Les Duval sont arrives. (The) Duvals have come. ^a. A few Latin names, originally plural in form, and certain well- known historical names of families and dynasties, take -s : Les Bourbons Les Gracques Les Pharaons Les Tudors Les CSaaxs Les Guises Les Scipions etc. Les Condfes Les Horaces Les Stuarts ^b. Names of persons used as common nouns to denote ' persons like ' or 'works by' those named are often variable, but usage is not fixed: Les Comeilles sont rares. ComeOles are rare. J'ai vu deiix Raphaels. I saw two Raphaels. But: Les Hamlet; les La Fontaine; les Goethe; les Washington, etc. 2. Names of places take -s when the idea is plural: Les Indes; les Vosges. The Indies; the Vosges. Les deux Romes. The two Romes (i.e., the ancient and modern). CASE RELATION AND AGREEMENT OF NOUNS 313. Case Relations. The noun in French does not vary in form to denote case; it is used hs follows: 1. With verbs, as subject, object, predicate: Le p6re aime son fils. The father loves his son. Jean est devenu soldat. John has become a soldier. §§314^316 CASE RELATION AND AGBEEMENT 313 2. In appositions, and with adjectival force: Henri IV, roi de France. Henry IV, King of France. Un roi enfant. A child long. 3. After prepositions: Pai parle k son pere. I have spoken to his father. 4. Absolutely, generally with adverbial force: Le diner fini, il partit. The dinner ended, he set out. n etait la, le chapeau k la main. He was there, (with) his hat in hi hand. Je suis venu samedi. I came on Saturday. n est reste trois heures. He stayed three hours. J'ai marche dix milles. I walked ten miles. Nous I'avons achete dix francs. We bought it for ten francs. 5. Vocatively: Bonjour, mes amis. Good morning, my friends. 314. Agreement. A predicate noun, or a noun used adjectivally, usually agrees like an adjective with the word referred to (see Agreement of the Adjective): lis (elles) sont Allemand(e)s. They are Germans. La reine mere. The queen mother. THE ARTICLE 315. The Indefinite Article Masc. Fem. un, a (an) une, a (an) 316. The Definite Article Sing. Pi'- Masc. le (l')Uhe Masc. or Fem. les, the Fem. la (1') J 05«.: For the forms in parenthesis, see § 19, 1. 314 THE AETICLE §§ 317-318 317. Contractions. The prepositions de and a + le and les, are always contracted as follows: de + le = du 6, + le = au de + les = des S, + les = aux Notes. — 1. No contraction takes place with la, 1'. 2. Formerly en + les was contracted to es, a form still used in academical titles, e.g., Bachelier es lettres, Bachelor of AHs^ 318. Agreement and Repetition. The article agrees in gender and number with its noun, and is regularly repeated (as also de, a) before each noun or adjective denoting a distinctive object: 0ne maison et tm jardin. A house and garden. Le flixx et le reflux. High and low tide. An bon et au mauvais c6t6. On the good and bad side. Les bons et les mauvais. The good and the bad. Des homines ou des femmes. Men or women. But: Le bon et pietix pretre. The kind and pious priest. Le delta ou basse figypte. The Delta or Lower Egypt. '^. The definite article is not repeated when a single adjective pre- cedes nouns joined by et: Les principales villes et provinces The principal towns and provinces de la France. of France. 6. Singular adjectives in apposition to a plural noun omit the article; Les langues frangaise et anglaise. The French and Enghsh languages. Or: La langue franfaise et la langue anglaise. La langue franfaise et I'anglaise. e. A few expressions of collective force, like the following, are per- missible, but are either not obKgatory or are confined to set expressions; Les pere et mere. The parents. Les lundi et mardi. (On) Mondays and Tuesdays. Les trois et quatre avril. The third and fourth of^SpfU. Les officiers et soldats. The officers and soldiers. ficole descents et chaussees. School of bridges and roads. d. For the repetition of le, la, les with the superlative, see Com- parison of Adjectives. §§ 319-321 USE OF ARTICLE WITH NOUNS 315 USE OF THE ARTICLE WITH NOUNS 319. Use in General. French and English agree to a considerable extent in the use of the article; differences are noted below. 320. The Indefinite Article. 1. Its use corresponds ia general with that of EngKsh a, an; its plural is the partitive des (§323): Unhomme; unefemme; des gens. A man; a woman; people. ^. Contrary to English usage, the indefinite article also commonly stands before an abstract noun used partitively with an adjective or an adjectival adjunct: n montra un soin extreme. He showed extreme care. n a mie patience a toute epreuve. He has patience equal to anything. Elle jotiit d'mie bonne sante. She enjoys good health. C'est une triste nouvelle. It is sad news. a. The adjective or complementary clause depending on such a noun may be understood: Voiia ime patience ! There is patience for you ! J'gtais d'une humeur ... I was in a temper . . . Un gargon d'une raison ... A young fellow of (splendid) in- tellect ! Note. — For several cases in which the English indefinite article is re- placed by the French definite article, or vice versa, or is omitted, see below. 321. The General Noun. A noun used in a general sense, i.e., 'in general,' 'all,' 'every,' etc., being implied with it, regularly has the definite article in French, though not usually in English: La vie est courte. Life is short. Le fer et le cuivre sont utiles. Iron and copper are useful. J'etudie la musique. I am studjring music. Les Fransais aiment la gloire. The French love glory. Le cheval est /'ami de I'homme. The horse is the friend of man. Le noir vous sied bien. Black becomes you. J'aime les ponames et les poires. I like apples and pears. Le beau et /'utile. The beautiful and the useful. Le boire et le manger. Eating and drinking. 316 THE ARTICLE §§ 322-324 a. So als«, names of languages, except after en; but not, however, after parler: Sait-il le fran; ais ? Does he know French ? II parle bien (le) franfais. He speaks French well. But:/l)ites cela en franfais. Say that in French. IParlez-vous franf ais ? Do you speak French ? 322. The Partitive Noun. A noun implying 'an unde- termined quantity or number of ' is said to be used par- titively or in a partitive sense.- 323. Partitive with Article. The partitive sense, ex- pressed in English by the noun simply, or else the noun preceded by 'some' or 'any,' is regularly expressed in French by the noun preceded by de + the definite article: Du pain trempe dans du vin. (Some) bread dipped in wine. A-t-il des amis ? Has he (any) friends ? Des enfants poussaient des oris Some children were uttering ter- desesperes. rible cries. n est des gens qui le croient. There are people who believe it. C'est du Carlyle pur. That is pure Carlyleism. Note. — This use of de + the definite article, or even of de alone (see Dext section), is often called the ' partitive article '; it is entirely identical in form with de + the article in other senses, e.g., Je vends du ble, I sell wheat; Quel est le prix du ble? What is the price of the wheat ? 324. Omission of Article. The partitive sense is ex- pressed by de alone + the noun as follows: 1. When an adjective precedes the noun; so also, when a noun is understood after an adjective: Avez-vous de bon papier ? Have you any good paper 7 Donnez-moi de ces plumes-ia. Give me some of those pens. J'ai devos Uvres. I have somexjf your bo_(^. De^bon vin et de mauvais {sc. vin). Good wine and bad. De gros livres et de petits (sc. Big books and little ones. livres). But: Des soldats franfais. French soldiers. J'ai du pain blanc. I have white bread. a. The article is not omitted when the noun has a distinctive adjunct: Du bon papier qu'il a achete. Some of the good paper he bought. §325 USE OF AKTICLE WITH NOUNS 317 6. The article is not omitted when adjective and noun are indivisible in sense, i.e., when forming a real or a virtual compound: Des grands-peres; des petits-fils. Grandfathers; grandsons. Des petits pois; du bon sens. Green peas; Qommon sense. Des jeuaes gens; de la bonne foi. Young men; honesityT c. Familiarly, the article is often used contrary to the rule: Du bon vin; du vrai bonheur. Good wine; true happiness. 2. After a general negation, impl3dng non-existence of the object in question: n n'a pas de montre. He has no (not any) watch. Je n'ai point de livres. I have no (not any) books. Sans avoir d'argent. Without having (any) money. D ne fit pas de remarques. He made no remarks. Pas d'argent et pas d'amis. No money and no friends. 3. But the article is not omitted, the negation being no longer general: vgT When the noun has a distinctive adjunct: Je n'ai plus du vin de cette annee. I have no more of this year's wine. Je n'ai pas de Targent pour le I have no money to waste (= 1 gaspiller . have money, but not to waste). /--Cr In contrasts: Pas du lait, mais du the. Not milk, but tea. c. In negative interrogation implying affirmative answer: ITavez-vous pas des amis, de la Have you not friends, health, in- sante, de Tinfluence ? fluence? 325. Omission of the Partitive Sign. The partitive sense is expressed by the noun simply, when the preposition de forms an essential part of the governing expression, thus: 1. In expressions of quantity or number: Une livre de the (noix). A pound of tea (nuts). Un morceau de papier. A piece of paper. Une foide de gens. A crowd of people. Peu de temps; beaucoup d'amis. Little time; many friends. Assez de livres. Enough books (or books enough). 318 THE ABTICLE § 326 Trop de peine. Too much trouble. Que de gens assembles! What a number of people as- sembled ! o. Analogous to the above are expressions like the following: Trois jours de marche. Three days' march. Cent soldats de tues. A hunjbedjoldiCTs killed. QueIque"cEose"(rien) de bon. Something (nothing) good. 'b. Bien = beaucoup regularly has de + the definite article: Bien de /'argent ; biendumonde. Much money; many people. Bien des gens le croient. Many people think so. But: Bien d'aut res. Many others. Note. — Bien in other senses does not take de : J'ai bien faim, I am very hungry. '4,. La plupart = most, the greater part, etc., has de + the def. art.: La plupart des hommes. Most men. La plupart du temps. Most of the time. d. Expressions of qua,ntity or number with a distinctive adjimct have de + the definite article; so also, beaucoup, peu, etc., absolutely, One livre du the de ce marchand. A poimd of this tradesman's tea. Beaucoup des gens de ce pays. Many of the men of that country. / \' 2. After a verb requiring de before its complement, and in phrases, adjectival or adverbial, formed from de -f a noun: U vit de pain (not de du pain). He fives on bread. II manquait d'argent. He lacked money. J'ai besoin d'argent. I need money. Q se passe de vin. He does without wine. Un vase rempli d'eau. A vessel filled with water. n etait convert de plaies. He was covered with wounds (sores) . Une robe de soie. A sUk dress. Un honune de genie. A man of genius. One bourse pleine d'or. A purse full of gold. 326. General and Partitive Sense. The general sense of a noun (§ 321) is to be carefully distinguished from the partitive sense (§ 322) : Les oiseaux ont des ailes. Birds have wings. Kes hommes sont des animauz. Men are animals. §§327-328 USE OF AKTICLE WITH NOUNS 319 .>(327. Article with Titles. A title of dignity or profession, preceding a proper name, regularly takes the definite article, except in direct address : La reine Victoria fut aimee. Queen Victoria was beloved. Le docteur Ribot est arrive. Doctor Ribot has come. Qu'est-ce que le pere Daru dit? What does Father Daru say? But: Bon jour, docteur Ribot. Good morning, Doctor Ribot. *^. So also, when such title is preceded by a title of courtesy (mon- sieur, madame, etc.), whether in speaking to or in speaking of the person: Bonjour, monsieur le docteur. Good morning, doctor. Monsieur le president I'a dit. The president said so. \/o. A preceding attributive adjective may have the force of a title; La petite Claire; le gros Robert. Little Clara; big Robert. 328. Article for Possessive. The definite article is com- monly used with the force of a possessive adjective, when no ambiguity arises from its use: Donnez-moi la main. Give me yovs hand. II a perdu la vie. He has lost his life, n avait le chapeau sur la tete. He had his hat on his head. 14,- The use of an indirect pronoun object + the definite article often avoids ambiguity: Le courage hii manqua. His com'age failed (him). EUe lui a arrache les yeux. She tore out his eyes. II s'est fait mal 4 la tete. He hurt his head. 6. Possessive force appears also in avoir mal (froid, chaud, etc.) i + the definite article followed by a noim denoting part of the per- son; similarly, in phrases of personal description made up of avoir + the definite article + a noun -t- an adjective: J'ai mal S. la t§te. I have a headache (my head aches) D a mal aux yeux. He has sore eyes (his eyes, etc.). n a froid aux pieds. He has cold feet (his feet, etc.). D a la tete grosse {or ime grosse He has a large head. tete). II a les bras longs (or de longs bras). He has long arms. Le chene a I'ecorce rude. The oak has (a) rough bark. 320 THE ABTICLE §§329-330 \ 329. Article Distributively. 1. The definite article with distributive force replaces English a of weight, measure, niunber, when indicating price; Deux francs la livre (/e metre). Two francs a pound {& meter). Des oeufs (a) dix sous la douzaine. Eggs at ten cents a dozen. Des poires (4) un sou la piece. Pears at a cent apiece.- ^a. Otherwise par is generally used with price: Cinq francs par jour. Five francs a (per) day. Cent francs par tete. A hundred francs a (per) head. Trois francs par lejon. Three francs a (per) lesson. 2. The definite article is also used distributively with names of days: n vient le dimanche. He comes (on) Sundays. Le bateau part tous les lundis. The boat goes every Monday. 330. Omission of the Article. The article, whether defi- nite, indefinite, or partitive, is frequently omitted. This takes place: 1. In a large number of expressions made up of a verb + a noirn: J'ai sommeil; il a honte. I am sleepy; he is ashamed. Je vous demande pardon. I beg your pardon. Further examples are: avoir besoin, need donner^avis, notify faire place, make room avoir faim, be hungry donner-ordre, give orders grendrecong|, take leave avoir bonne mine, look well faire attention, pay at- prendre garde, take care avoir peur, be afraid tention rendre visite, pay a visit avoir tort, be (in the) wrong f aire cadeau , make a trouver moyen, find ^jCourir risque, run the risk present means t^emander conseil, ask ad- faire faillite, fail {in etc., etc. vice busvnesif~ 2. In many adjectival and adverbial phrases made up of a preposition + a noun: D'apres nature; devant temoins. After nature; before witnesses. Sans cause; a travers champs. Without cause; across the fields. Further examples are: I 330 USE OF ARTICLE WITH NOUNS 321 k bo rd, on board k cheval, on horseback k dessein, intentionally k geuoux, on one's knees h pied, on foot pot jt^eurs, flowerpot moulin k vent, mndmiU aprfea dtner , after dinner aveo inter&t, imth interest avec plaisir, iinth pleasure sortir de table, leave the table chien de berger, shepherd's dog homme de ccEur, man of feeling homme de genie, man of genius en bateau, in a boat en 6t6 , in summer en voiture, in a car- riage par an, by the year gar_chemiBL,de-.f?r, by rail- way par exemple, for example par experience, by experience par terre, by land sans crainte, without fear sans raison, unthout reason sous condition, o n cond ition sous presse, in the press sur papier, on paper etc., etc. K3. Before a predicate noun which qualifies in a general way the personal subject, or object, of certain verbs (cf. §295): lis sent Russes. Elle est modiste. Nous sommes medecins. H parait honnSte homme. Son frere se fit soldat. On I'a ordonne pretre. Soyons amis. They axe Russians. She is a milliner. We are doctors. He seems an honest man. His brother became a soldier. He was ordained a priest. Let us be friends. Note. — Nouns so used are cpnunonly those Qf-flatioaality, professioji, titl e. et"-i "" '^ their. function is adjectival. Whenever a predicate noun denotes an individual or a species, it must have the article: La rose est une fleur, The rose is a flower; Les rois sent des hommes, Kings are men. a. The article is not omitted when the predicate noun has a dis- tinctive adjunct: Son frere est un artiste de merite. Hia brother is an artist of merit. Us sont devenus des gen€raux They became distinguished gen- distingues. erals. 6. Observe the predicative force of a noun after traiter + de, quali- fier + de: D m'a traite de sot. He called me a fool. Je qualifie cela de fraude. I call that fraud. 'yc. After c'est, ce sont,_tte^oun is^logical subject, notjpredicate, and hence the a rticle o r some other dete rminative word m ust be used with it: C'est une Allemande. Ce sont les [mes) gants. She is (a) German. Those are the (my) gloves. 322 THE AKTICLE § 330 4. Before such an appositive noun as serves merely the , purpose of a parenthetical explanation: L'Avare, com edie de Jiloliere. L'Avare, a comedy b2_Moliere. Paris, fils de Priam, ravit Helene, Paris, the son of Priam, carried off femme de Menelas. Helen, (the) wife of Menelaus. a. Thus is explained the omission of the article in numerical titles: Jacques premier (deux). James the First (the Second). '^. An apposition which distinguishes, contrasts, compares, regularly has the article, as in English: Pierre le Grand. Peter the Great. Racine le fils et non Racine le Racine the son and not Racine the pere. father. Montreal, la plus grande ville du Montreal, the largest city in Canada. Canada. M. Cook, im ami de mon pere. Mr. Cook, a friend of my father. c. Colloquially, the article is often omitted in contrasts: Dumas pere et Dumas fils. Dumas the elder and Dumas the younger. Note. — Pseudo-apposition (really ellipsis of de or of a de clause) is found in many cases like L'eglise (sc. de) Saint-Pierre, St. Peter's Church, des meubles (sc. du temps de) Louis XV, Louis XV furniture; La rue («c de) Mirabeau, Mirabeau Street. \5. In condensed sentences, such as titles of books, enu- merations, addresses, advertisements, proverbs, antithet- ical expressions, etc., and usually after ni . . . ni, sans . . . ni, soit . . . soit, tant . . . que, jamais : Causes de la perte de Rome. Causes of the fall of Rome. Portrait de Napoleon m. (A) portrait of Napoleon III. Soldats, oflaciers, citoyens, tous Soldiers, officers, citizens, all has- accoururent. tened up. Beaute, talent, esprit, tout s'use Beauty, talent, wit, everything a la longue. wears out in the long run. n loge rue Richelieu. He lives in Richelieu street. Maison & ven dre. (A)Jiouse for salp . Chapeaux pour hommes. Men's hata Corps et Sme; nu it et jour. Body and soul; ni^ht and day. Soit peur, soit prudence, il evita Whether from feai or prudence, he le combat. avoided the combat. §331 USE OF ABTICLB WITH NOUNS 323 II j^a ni pere ni mere. Sans amis ni argent . Tant homin es que femmes. Jamais pere n'a tant aime. He ,tag_neither Jathgr_nor_mother. Without fr iends or mone y. As well men as women. Never did a father love so much. 331. Unclassified Examples. The following examples show idiomatic distinctions in the use of the article which, from the point of view of English, cannot conveniently be brought under general rules: ■^us etes le bienvenu. Demander (faire) Taimidne. "-fivoir le temps. Aller a Tecole (reglise). Commander le respect. *-Ce feu s'est declare. Faire la guerre. Jeter (lever) /'ancre. Garder le silence. iMettre le feu h. iSui (vers) Zes.trois heures. Au revoir ! L'annee demiere (prochaine). La semaine (rannSe) passee. k £e vendredi sain t. ^L e me rcredi des cendres. Le printemps, Tete, etc. Au printemps, en ete, etc. La (sc. fete de) Saint-l VIichel. La {sc. fete de) mi-juin. La moitie de I'aimSe. Les deux tiers du temps. Tous (les) deux; tous (les) trois. Tous les mois. LenuBJsfre^deJa guerre. Le meilleur des amis. HQ cria gj^ assassin . Je I'ai dit ouj iasard. Prendre le detiil de quelqu'un. '^Sentir la fumSe. ^ vou s souha ite la bo nne an nee. n n'apasie_sou. You are welcome. Ask (give) alms. To have time. To go to school (church). To command respect. Fire broke out. To make war. To cast (weigh) anchor. To keep silence. To set fire to. Towards three o'clock. Good-bye ! Last (next) year. Last week (year). GooiEciday. Ash Wednesday. Spring, summer, etc. Li spring, in summer, etc. Michaelmas. Mid-June. (The) half (of) the year. Two-thirds of the time. Both; all three. Every month. The minister of war. The best of friends. He cried murder. I said it at ra ndom . To go into mourning for somebody To smell of smoke. I wish jpu a happy new yeax. He is wretchedly poor. 324 THE ARTICLE § 332 n est plus grand que vous de ?a He is taller than you by a head, tete. Un homme a la barbe noire. A man with a black beard. La belle question ! What a (fine) question ! *■ Aiflisc-mode) fransaise. In the French style. ■•S'en aller a J'anglaise. To take French leave. aX1:sc. mode de) Henri IV. In the style of Henry IV. Cent (mille) ans. A hundred (a thousand) years. "^^ Les amis, oft allez-vous? (My) friends, where are you going? THE ARTICLE WITH PROPER NOUNS 332. Names of Persons. 1. As in English, names of per- sons usually take no article: Comeille; George Fox. ComeiUe; George Fox. a. The definite article is a constituent part of some surnames: Les romans de iesage. The novels of Lesage. Les fables de La Fontaine. The fables of La Fontaine. 2. The definite article is used according to Italian analogy in the French form of a few famous Italian surnames; so also sometimes in a very few names which are not Italian: Le Correge; le poeme du Tasse. Correggio; the poem of Tasso. Le Poussin; le Camoens. Poussin; Camoens. 3. The article is used when the name has a distinctive adjunct, when it is plural, or when used as a conamon noun: '^L^Chnst. Christ (= the 'Anointed'). Le Satan de Milton; le grand Milton's Satan; the Great Cond6. Conde. Les Comeille et les Racine. A ComeiUe, a Racine ( = Corneille, Racine and others like them). 'C^st un.Alexandre. He is an Alexander. C'est du Ciceron tout pur. It is pure Ciceronian. J'ai lu le Telemaque. I have read Tel&maque. 4. Famiharly, often in a depreciatory sense, the definite article is not uncommon, especially with names of females: Sans attendre la Barbette. Without waiting for Barbara. Le Duval me I'a dit. Duval told me so. § 333 THE ARTICLE WITH PROPER NOUNS 325 .^333. Names of Countries. 1. Names of continents, coun- tries, provinces, large European islands, take the definite ar- ticle, especially when standing as subject of object of a verb: L'Asie est un grand continent. Asia is a large continent. Nous aimons la France. We love France. La Normandie produit des cereales. Normandy produces cereals. La Corse est une ile fran^aise. Corsica is a French island. But non-Eiu-opean islands often do not take the article: Madagascar est une grande ile. Madagascar is a large island. Cabot decouvrit Terre-Neuve. Cabot discovered Newfoundland. Note also such forms as: L'lle de Cuba, les ties Bahama. 2. Before nam^ of _continen^, Euro pean countries and i ^nds sin gular, and feminine countries singular outside of Europe, enjwithout the article denotes '.where^'wiCTe to'; so also, after de den oting 'points of departurg. from '_and after de in mos t adjectiyaXi)hrases: D est en (va en) Europe. He is in (is going to) Europe. H voyage en France (Portugal). He travels in France (Portugal). n vient d'Espagne (Danemark). He comes from Spain (Denmark). terorae]Poaugar(Espagne). The King of Portugal (Spain). Le fer de Suede. Swedish iron. D va en Corse. He is going to Corsica. a. Exceptions are rare, e.g., au Maine, Le due du Maine, etc. Note. — In an adjectival phrase, de denoting titular distinction, origin, description, or mere apposition usually omits the article, e.g., le pays de France, Le Royaume Uni de Grande-Bretagne et d'Irlande. 3. But_the definite article is not omitted^ in answer to 'g rjiPrA?' 'wWp. to?' or after de as above, wbeo, the name isjjlmalj.or has a distinctive adjunct, or denotes a mascu- line na me of a country outside of Europe: n est aux Indes. He is in India. D va aux Etats-Unis. He goes to the United Staten. Aux Pays-Bas . In (to) the Netherlands. L'imperatrice des Indes. The Empress ofTndiar Venif des Indes (de I'Inde). To come from India. l5??il!^'55?«-iS?ridio^Qale.'l In Southern France. DansTe Midi de la France. I The Dominion of Canada. 326 THE AKTICLE §§334-335 Dans PAmerique du Nord. In North America. iLa reine ^e la Grande-Bretagne. The Queen of Great Britain. II revient de I'Afrique australe. He returns from South Africa. Au Mexique (Japon). In (to) Mexico (Japan). Le Dominion du Canada. La Puissance du Canada. J Chasse de la Chine. Expelled from China. Le consul du Perou. The consul of Peru. Le fer du Canada. Canadian iron. But note such as: Son pere est k Madagascar. a. In a few names Uke Asie Mineure, basse Bretagne, the adjec- tive is no longer felt to be distinctive: En A gie mineure. In Asia Minor. 4. Omission of the article in the predicate, in enumera- tions, titles, etc., sometimes occurs (cf. §330, 5): La Gaule est dev enue France. Gaul became France. Espagne, Italie, Belgique, tout Spain, Italy, Belgium, all would eiit pris feu. have caught fire. X334. Names of Cities. Names of cities and towns usu- ally have no article, imless used with a distinctive adjunct: Londres, Paris, Quebec. London, Paris, Quebec. A Boston (Montreal). To or in Boston (Montreal). Rut: fLa Rome de ce siecle. (The) Rome of this century. \La Nouvelle-Orleans. New Orleans. i/a. The definite article is an essential part of several names of cities: Le Caire; le Havre; la Havane. Cairo; Havre; Havana. X335. Names of Moxmtains and Rivers. Names of moun- tains always, and names of rivers regularly, have the defi- nite article: LesAlpes; le Nil; lemont Blanc. The Alps; the Nile; Mt. Blanc. a. For rivers, the usage after en, de, is parallel with that described in § 333, 2: De I'eau de Seine. Seine water. Dn abordage a eu lieu en Seine. A collision occurred on the Seine. i{ 336-337 THE FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES 327 THE ADJECTIVE THE FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES 336. General Rule. The feminine of an adjective is regularly formed by adding -e to the mascuhne singular, but adjectives ending in -e remain unchanged: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. grand, grande, tall tacUe, facile, easy joli, joKe, pretty jeune, jeune, young ruse. rus6e, cunning sincere, sincere, sincere mort. morte, dead cflebre, cflebre, celebrated a. Similarly, nouns of like termination (but see § 306, 2) : Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. marquis, marquis, marquise artiste, artist, artiste ami, friend, amie camarade, comrade, camarade cousin, cousin, cousine concierge, porter, concierge lapin, rabbit, lapine malade, patient, malade b. Adjective in -gu are regular, but require the diaeresis to indicate that u is sounded, e.g., aigu, sharp, aigue . c. Tlie circumflsx in dfl_(f;_due) distinguishes it from du = of the, and disappears in the fem. (§214); observe also nifljf^^mue, §219). d. Besides adjectives in -e, a very few others are invariable for the feminine, e.g., capot, in etre capot = have come to grief, grognon, grumr- bling, rococo, rococo, sterling, sterling, and rarer ones. Note. — Here also properly belongs grand in grand'mere, etc. In 0. F. grand was masculine or feminine, but grammarians at a later date gave it the apostrophe to denote the supposed elision of e. 337. Special Rules. 1. Irregularities consist chiefly of changes in the stem on adding the feminine sign -e; thus, when -e is added: (1) Finalf ^_v, x^^, c^_ch^ income, and qu in others, Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. actif , active, active * blanc, white, blanche /t5fef, brief, br6ve H'EJjblJSj_21«6?i?)... . publique heureux, happy, heureuse long, long, longue * So also: franc, frank, tranche; sec, dry, s^che. t So also: ammoniac f-que). ammoniac; turc (-qoe), Turkish. Masc. Fem. cruel, crud, craelle pareil, like, pareille ancien, old, ancienne bon, good. bonne bas, low. basse 328 THE ADJECTIVE §337 a. Similarly, nouns of like termination: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. veuf, vndower, veuve 6poux, spouse, epou se turc, Turk, turque Note. — Here also belongs bailli, bailiff (O. F. baillif), baillive. 6. The adjectives doux, douce, sweet, faux, fau sse, fa lse, roux, rousse, red (of hair, etc.), retain the {s] sound in the feminine, denoted by^~an3^ss respectively; ^ec, Greek, has femiiiine_grecc|ue] prefix, ■prefixed, is regular. ^(2) Final -elj -eil, -ien, -on, and usually -s, -t, double the final consonant: Masc. Fem. gros, hig, grosse 6pais, thick, ^paisse expres, express, expresse muet, dumb, muette sot, foolish, sotte But: ras, rase, flat; gris, grise, gray; mat, mate, dead, dvM; pr6t, prite, ready; d^vot, devote, devovl; bigot, bigote, bigoted; cagot, cagote, hypocritical; idiot, idiote, idiotic, and a few rarer ones. a. Similarly, nouns of like terrmnation, but see §306: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. mortel, mortal, mortelle lion, lion, lionne poulet, chicken, poulette chien, dog, chienne chat, cat, chatte linot, linnet, liQotte b. A very few adjectives and nouns of other endings follow this analogy: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. paysan, peasant, paysanne gentil, nice, gentiUe rouan, roan, rouanne nul, niiU, nuUe X (3) The following have two masculine forms, one of which doubles 1 for the feminine, like the above: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. beau or bel, fi,ne, belle mou or mol, soft, molle fou or fol, mad, folle nouveau or nouvd, new, nouvelle jum eau or ( O. F. vieux or vieil, old, vieille jumel), tvdn, jumelle Obs.: The -1 form is regularly used only before a vowel or h mute; vieui before a vowel is permissible, e.g.. un i/ieux ami (better: un vieil ami) §3a7 THE FEMININE OF ADJECTIVES 329 o. Analogous are a few nouns : Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. chameau, comeZ, chamelle jonveaceaM, young fellow, jouvencelle, etc. (4) Before final -r and -et of a few adjectives e becomes e (cf. § 12, 1); so also in bref, breve, sec, seche: Masc. Fem. cher, dear, chere I6ger, light, Mgere Masc. complet, complete, etc. Fem. complete etc. a. Similarly, nouns in -er. Masc. Fem. berger, shepherd, bergere Masc. Fem. Stranger, stranger, 6trangere, etc. 6. The complete list of adjectives in -et with fem. in -ete is: (in)oomplet, (in)complete (in)discret, (in)discreet replet, over-stout concret, concrete inqiiiet, uneasy secret, secret (5) The following feminine stems show etymological ele- ments which have disappeared in the masculine: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. coi (L. quietus), quiet, coite frais {li.L. fr escus), c ool, fraic he b^nin (L. benignus), benign, bdnigne tiers ( L. tertius), third, tierce ( avon {It. favoriio), favorite, favorite 2. Adjectives in -eur form their feminine as follows: (1) Majeur, mineux, meilleur and those in -erieur are regular: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. majeur, major, majeure extSrieur, exterior, ext6rieure meilleur, better, meiUeirre sup&ieur, superior, sup^rieure a. Similarly, nouns of like termination: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. mineur, minor, mineure ; prieur, prior, prieure ; infSrieur, inferior, infSrieure (2) Those in -eur with a cognate present participle in -ant change -r to -s and add -e: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. causeur, talkative, causeuse riveur, dreamy, rSveuse flatteur, flattering, flatteuse trompeur, deceitful, trompeuse menteur, lying, menteuse etc. etc. 330 THE ADJECTIVE §§ 338-339 a. Similarly, nouns of like termination, but see also § 306, 1, a, 2, a: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. danseur, dancer, danseuse buveur, drinker buveuse chanteur, singer, chanteuse vendeur, seller vendeuse flatteur, flatterer, flatteuse etc. etc. (3) Those in -teur, with no cognate present participle in -ant, have the feminine in -trice: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. aceusateur, demising, accusatrice directeiir, directive, directrice cr6ateur, creative, cr6atrice etc. etc. a. Similarly, nouns of like termination, but see § 306, 1, a, 2, a: Masc. Fem. Masc. Fem. aceusateur, accuser, accusatrice cr^ateur, creator, crfiatrice, acteur, actor, actrice etc. etc. THE PLURAL OF ADJECTIVES 338. General Rule. Most mascuhne adjectives and all feminines form their pliu-al by adding s to the singular ^(cf. §307): grand(s), grande(s) ieune(s), jeune(s) bas, bas8e(s} ioli(s), jolie(s) aigu(s), aigue(s) doux, douce(s) rus6(s), rus6e(s) oomplet(s), complete(s) etc. etc. 339. Special Rules. The following rules are parallel with those for the irregular plural of noims (cf . § 308) : 1. Masculine adjectives in -s, -x (none in -z) remain unchanged: SiNQ. Pl. Sing. Pl. Sing. Pl. bas bas gris gris faux faux 6pais 6pais soumis soumis vieux vieux frais frais, etc. doux doux, etc. heureux heureux, etc y^2. Mascuhne adjectives in -eau, and one in -eu take x: S^a. Pl. Smo. Pl. beau beaux jumeau jumeaux nouveau nouveaux -hfibreu Wbreux But: bleu, bleus; feu, feus S340 AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES 331 '\3. Masculine adjectives in -al regularly have the plural in -aux: Sing. Pl. Sing. Pl. Sing. Pl. amical araicaux 'g6n6ral g6n&aux moral moraux brutal brutaux l^gal I6gaux i^frincipal principalis <^pital capitaux Ub6ral lib&aux rural ruraux cardinal caxdinauz -^ocal locaux *^6cial sp^ciaux ^gal Sgauz "loyal loyatix trivial triviaux a. Fatal makes fatals; Littr6 gives also final(s). 6. According to the Didionnaire de I'Academie, the following have no masculine plural: * automnal frugal * jovial naval f pascal * colossal glacial natal * partial * LittrS gives a plural in -aux. t Littre admits a plural in -aux, and quotes authority for a plural in -s. Notes. — 1. There are upwards of a hundred and fifty adjectives in -al. The Dictionnaire de I'Academie is silent regarding the masculine plural of some sixty of these, to nearly fifty of which, however, Littrfe gives a plural in -aux. The following have not been pronounced upon by either authority: Brumal, dfeloyal, diagonal, instrumental, labial, mfedicinal, mental, monacal, paradoxal, quadragfeimal, total, virginal. 2. Regular plurals in -als were formerly much commoner, and usage is still unsettled for some words. When the plural is wanting or doubtful it is often avoided, e.g.. Tin repas frugal ; des repas simples. Plurals commonly so avoided are: Final, frugal, glacial, initial, matinal, natal, naval, thfe&tral. AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES 340. General Rule. An adjective, whether attributive or predicative, regularly agrees in gender and number with its substantive: Les saisons froides sont saines. Cold seasons are healthful. Ellas sont contentes. They are pleased. Ds se disaient malades. They said they were ill. Je les crois sinceres. I believe them sincere. a. When the substantive has a de clause, the agreement is parallel with that explained for subject and verb (cf. § 232, 2). vh. The agreement with vous is according to the sense: Madame, vous Stes bien bonne. M»dam, you are very kind. 332 THE ADJECTIVE §§ 341-343 341. Manifold Substantive. 1. One adjective qualify- ing two or more substantives is made plural, and agrees in gender with both, if of the same gender; if of different gender, the adjective is masculine. De la viande et des pommes de Cold meat and potatoes. terra froides. Sa soeur et lui sont contents. His sister and he are pleased. a. When substantives are joined by ou, ni . . . ni, or are synonymous, or form a climax, etc., the principles stated for agreement of subject and verb apply (cf. § 233). 6. When nouns differ in gender, the masculine one is usually placed nearest the adjective, especially when the feminine form is distinct from the mascuMne. La mar et la ciel blaus. The blue sea and sky. -2. When the noun is followed by a preposition + a noun, the agreement is, of course, according to the meaning: Une table de bois dur. A table of hard wood. Una table de bois carree. A square wooden table. 342. Manifold Adjective. When two or more adjectives, denoting different objects singular, refer to one noun, the noun is made plural, and the adjectives follow it in the singular, or the noun is made singular, and the article re- peated with each adjective. Las nations grecque et romaina. The Greek and Roman nations. La nation grecque et la romaine. The Greek nation and the Roman. Or: La nation grecque at la nation romaina. a. The agreement for a preceding ordinal is parallel to this: Las sixieme et saptieme rangs. The sixth and seventh ranks. La sizigme rang et le septieme. The sixth rank and the seventh. La sixieme et le septieme rang. The sixth and the seventh rank. 343. Special Cases. 1. Adjectives used as adverbs are regularly invariable: Cette ros e sent.btgi. "Efeatrrae smel ls sw eet. Les livras cofltent cher ici. Books coiriieax here. i 343 AGREEMENT OF ADJECTIVES 333 a. Possible, replacing a clause, and fort, in se taire fort = to ; oneself, are considered as adverbs: Pai fait le moins de fautes pos- I have made as few mistakes as sible. possible. Elle se fait fort de le payer. She pledges hersel f to pay it. 2. Compound adjectives, with or without hyphen, are treated as follows: X(l) Both components are variable when coordinate, except first components in -o: Des sovird(e)s-muet(ea rance) the adjective agreef with aur; but it^^ees with the subject QLthg-Yerb whra_fte_^pressioD mea ns seem, appear : Cette dame a I'air hautain. That lady has a haughty air. Elle a I'air malheureuse. She seems unhappy. xCette soupe a I'airbonne, This soup looks good. . 5. A very few adjectives are always invariable: Nous avons ete capot. We had come to grief. Vingt livres sterling. Twenty pounds sterling. 344. Nouns as Adjectives. By a sort of apposition, nouns are frequently used as adjectives; when so used, they usually agree like adjectives: Une maitresse cheminee. A main chimney. Des philosophes poetes. Poet philosophers. But: La race negre, etc. a. Temoin = witness, at the head of a phrase, is adverbial and invariable: J'ai bien combattu, temoin les I have fought well, witness the blessures que j'ai repues. wounds I received. b. For nouns as adjectives of color, see § 343, 3. i§ 345-346 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 335 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES 345. The Comparative. It is regularly denoted by plac- ing plus = more, moins = less, for inequality, and aussi = as, for equality, before each adjective compared; than or as = que: II est plus grand que Jean, n est moins grand que Jean. D est aussi grand que Jean . fl est plus diligent et plus attentif que Jean, n est plus faible que malade. He is taller than John. He is less tall than (not so tall as) John. He is as taU as John. He is more dUigent and (more) at- tentive than John. He is more weak than Ul. >^ Aussi, used negatively, may be replaced by si: n n'est pas aussi ( sf ) grand que J . He is not so tall as John. MtT When au ssi or si is omitted, , comme {not que) jajoggd: [Tn rni rirtie i;inTnme Cresus. A king as rich as Croesus. ^^T^ter plus, moins, affirmatively, than = que . . . ne when coming before a finite verb : n est pl u s grand ou'il ne (le) partdt. He is taller than he seems. ^-ttT More and more for -er fifi 4 -^) = d e plus en plii§i Jsss_an^Jess (or -er and -er) = de moit^ s en pinit^fi ; thf. mnre . . .the m ore _^ . plus__ . ^ . (et) plus; the less ... the less = moins . . . (et) moins; the mo re.. . . =_d'autant glus . T7: Vail devint de plus en plus froid. n devint de moins en moins actif . Plus il devient riche (et) moins il est genereux. n en sera d'autant plus riche. -V346. Irjefi;ular Compariso) vais, petit, have a special comparative form: Pes. CoMP. Pes. bon, good. meilleur or bon, X The air became colder and colder. He became less and less active. The richer he becomes the less generous is he. He will be the richer for it. The adjectives bon, mau- mauvais, bad. pire moindre or mauvais, or petit. CoMP. plus bon (rare) plus mauvais plus petit 336 THE ADJECTIVE §§347-348 a. Bon is hardly ever compared regularly: A bon marche, k meilleur maiche. Cheap, cheaper. Cela sent bon (meilleur). That smeUa good (better). But: Ce n'est niplus bon ni plus mauvais. Notes. — 1. In expressions like Ce vin est plus ou moins bon, bon is not really comparative. 2. Some grammarians admit plus bon = more good-natured. b. Pire is, in general, stronge r than plus mauyais, and may serve also as a comparative to mechant = bad, evil, wicked: Cet homme est mechant (pire). That man is bad (worse). i^ In general, moin dre = l ess, lesser, less _ijjL imP ffriance) and plus pet it = smaller, less Jinjizelx. Votre douleur en sera moindre. Yoiir sorrow wiU hence be less. Une plus petite pomme. A smaller apple. 347. The Superlative Relative. 1. It is denoted by placing the definite article (variable) or a possessive adjec- tive (variable) before the comparative of inequahty: Elle est la moins aimable. She is the least amiable. Mes meilleurs amis. My best friends. La moindre difficulte. The shghtest difficulty. o. When the superlative follows the noun, the definite article is not omitted: C'est r enfant le plus diligent et le He is the most diligent and atten- plus attentif de tous. tive boy of all. Mes amis les plus fideles. My most faithful friends. )( 2. Aiterj^upCTlative,^ri_=_de (not a, dans, etc.); among = entre ^ or d'entre; L'homme le plus riche de la villa. The richest man in the city. Le meilleur ecrivain des Etats-Unis. The best writer inthe United States. Le plus brave (d^mir^ les Grecs. The bravest a mong" the Greeks. 348. The SuBerla tive Absolut e. It is expressed by le (invariable) + plus or moins before the adjective, or else by an adverb, such as tres, bien, fort, extremement, etc., or some other modifying expression: ^'laie estle-plus heureuse (moins She is happiest (least happy) when heureuse) quand elle est seule. she is alone. §§ 349-360 POSITION OF ADJECTIVES 337 Vous Stes tris aimable. C'est tout ce qu'il y a de plus beau. Un brave des brave s. Un honune des plus dignes. Une dame on ne peut plus digne. Des tribus sauvages au possible. a. Occasionally it is denoted in adjective, or by -issime: Cet homme est ruse, ruse. Q est richissime. You are very (most) kind. It is most beautiful. One of the bravest. A most worthy man. A most worthy woman. Most savage tribes. familiar style by repetition ot the That man is very, very cunning. He is very wealthy. 349. Remarks. 1. Comparative and superlative are in- distinguishable in constructions requiring in English a definite article before the comparative: Le plus fort de mes deux freres. The stronger of my two brothers. 2. De denotes by how much after a comparative or superlat ive: Plus age de trois ans. ;
  • "'"' pur etc. ^ Note. — Distinctions of this kind depend, in the main, upon the general principles laid down above, but they are too numerous and too subtle to be given in detail here. Observation, and the use of a good dictionary will, in time, make the learner familiar with the most important of them. 353. Determinatives. Such adjectives, including numer- als, possessives, demonstratives, indefinites, precede: Trois plumes; mes plumes. Three pens; my pens. Ces plumes-ci; d'autres plumes. These pens; other pens. PREPOSITIONAL COMPLEMENT OF ADJECTIVES 354. An adjective is often followed by a complement con- nected with it by a preposition, such as a, de, en, envers, etc. The preposition to be used is determined by the mean- ing of the adjective, as explained in the following sections. 355. Adjective_J::j3. The preposition a = to, at, for, etc., is required afterjnost^ adjectives den oting; tendencv . fitness, and their opposites, comparison, etc. Cat homme est adonne a la boisson. n est favorable a mes projets. II est bien habi le aux affaires. Un homme superieur a tous. Ce n'est bon a rien. That man is addicted to drink. He is favorable to my projects. He is very clever in business. A man superior to all. That is good for nothing. Such adjectives are: ■^ccoutum^, accustomed (to) cher, dear (to) v-adroit, clever (at) agr^able, pleasant (to) ant^rieur, anterior (to) •^ardent, ardent (in) good, fit (for) hardi, bold (in) convenable, suitable (to) impropre, unfit (for) 6gal, egual (to) infSrieur, inferior (to) ■ exact, exact (in) infiddle, unfaithful (to) -fidMe, faithful (in) i^nutile, useless (to) fort, clever (at) lent, slow (in) §§ 356-357 PREPOSITIONAL COMPLEMENT 341 nuisible, hurtful (to) pr6t, ready (to) semblable, similar (,to) oppose, opposed (io) prompt, prompt (in) utile, useful (to) ^{(Sxeil, similar (to) propioe, propitious (to) etc. port6, inclined (to) t-propre, fit (for) a. Bon pou r = good for, beneficial to, kind to . 356. Adjective + de. The preposition de = of, from, with, etc., is required after most adjectives denoting source or origin (hence also, feeling, sentiment, abundance), sepa- ration (hence also, absence, distance, want, etc.), and after most past pa rticiples to denote the agent (cf. §240): Etes-vous natif de Paris? Are you a native of Paris? lis sont contents de mon succes. They are pleased at my success. Elle est pleine de vanite. Je suis Ubre de soucis. n est inconnu de tous. She is full of vanity. I am free from care. He is unknown to all. Such adjectives are: absent, absent (from) digne, worthy (of) jaloux, jealous (of) afflige, grieved (at) 6Ioign6, distant (from) lourd, heavy (with) aise, glad (of) enchants, delighted (with) offens§, offended (at) alarme, alarmed (at) ennuyS, weary (of) ambltieux, ambitious (off^ornie, astonished (at) avide, greedy (of) exempt, free (from,) ►^enl, blessed (by) '- fS,ch6. sorry (for) capable, capable (of) "^er, proud (of) charm^, delighted (with) glorieux, proud (of) cheri, beloved (by) herissfe, bristling (with) eonfus, confused (at) heureux, glad (of) contrarife, vexed (with) honteux, ashamed (of) d6nu6, destitute (of) d^pourvu, devoid (of) d^sireux, desirous (of) ^pauvre, poor (in) plein, full (of) ravi, delighted (with) t^tisfalt, satisfied (with) soucieux, anxious (about] souill^, soiled (with) stir, sure (of) surpris, surprised (at) triste, sad (at) vain, vain (of) vex6, vexed (at) vide, empty (of) etc. ignorant, ignorant (of) indigne, unworthy (of) inquiet, uneasy (about) different, different (fromyrvre, intoxicated (vnth) a. Fe lche contre = anarv at ot with (a person). 357. Adjective + en. En is required a fter a few adjec- tives denotin g^jjjundance, skill, etc. : Le Canada est fertile e nble. Canada is fertile in wheat. II est expert en chirurgie. He is expert in surgery. Such adjectives are: abondant, abounding (inftort, strong (in), learned (in) i^he^r^^ (*") f6cond, fruitful (in) ignorant, ignorant (in) i-eavant, learned (irt] 342 THE PHONOUN §§358-359 a. fort and ignorant sometimes have sur: n est fort sur I'histoire. He ia well versed (good) in history. Ignorant sur ces niatieres-14. Ignorant about those matters. 358. Adjective + envers. Envers is used after most adjectives denoting disposition or feeling towards: II est liberal envers totxs. He is liberal towards aU. Such adjectives are: affable, affable charitable, charitable civil, civil cruel, cruel dur, hard, harsh genereux, generous •dossier, rude HlonnSte, polite indulgent, indulgent ingrat, ungrateful insolent, insolent juste, just mfechaut, malicious misericordieux, merciful officieux, obliging "-pbli, polite prodigue, lavish ilCconnaissant, grateful respectueux, respectful responsable, responsible rigoureux, stem akvhTe, severe, stem etc. a. Bon, dur, very frequently take pour; indulgent may take pour or a: II est bon (dur) pour moi. He is kind (harsh) to me. Indulgent pour (&) ses enfants. Indulgent to his children. &. Observe that bien and mal are sometimes used adjectivally, asjn: il est bien, he is good-looking; elle n'est pas mal, she is not bad- lagking; nous sonunes bien ici, we are comfortable here, etc. THE PRONOUN THE PERSONAL PRONOUN 359. Personal Pronouns 1. Conjunctive forms: 1st Per. 2nd Peb. 3rd Pek. (m.) 3ed Peb. (£.) 3bd Ref. (m.f.) •;?N. je I tu thou 11 he, it elle she, it 3D. me (to) me te (to) thee lui (to) him lui (to) her se (to) -self ^A. me me te thee le him, it la her, it se -self ->N. nous we vous you ils they elles they (5^ D. nous (to) us vous (to) you leur (to) them leur (to) them se (to) -selves '"'A. nous us vous you les them les them se -selves 5 §360-361 THE PERSONAL PRONOUN 343 2. Disjunctive forms: 1st. Pek. 2nd Feb. 3kd Pes. (m.) 3kd Pes. (f.) 3rd Ref. (m.f.) moi I, me toi thou, lui he, him eUe she, her sol oneself, etc. thee g A. ^P. J ^ A. 'f nous we, us vous you eux they, them elles they, them [N. = nominative; D. = dative; A. = accusative; P. = object of a preposition.] Note. — A more scientific terminology would be 'unstressed' and 'stressed' instead of 'conjunctive' and 'disjunctive,' as indicating the real distinction between the two sets of forms, e.g., Je (unstressed) parle; Qui parle ? — Moi (stressed). As a matter of fact, the unstressed forms usually stand in immediate connection with the verb (as subject or object), hence the term 'conjunctive,' while the stressed forms are usually employed otherwise, hence the term ' disjunctive.' 360. Pronominal Adverbs Y = to {at, on, in, into, etc.) it or them; there, thither. en = of (from, etc.) it or them; soTne, any, some of it, soms of them; thence, from there. Note. — Y and en were originally adverbs ( y from L. ibi = there, and en from L. inde = thence) , but they are now usually pronominal in function, and are used precisely like the conjunctive forms. 361. Agreement. The personal pronoun regularly agrees with its antecedent ia gender, number, and person: Nous les avons frappe(e)s. We have struck them. Elle lit la lettre ; eUe la lit. She reads the letter; she reads it. a. The first person plural for the first person singular is used by sovereigns and authorities, and by writers, as in English: Nous (le roi) avons ordonne et We (the king) have ordained and ordoimons ce qui suit. ordain as follows. Comme nous avons dit deji. As we have said already. (^ Vous = you (singular or plural) has a plural verb; its othel agreements, as also those of nous above, are according to the sense: Nous (la reine) sommes contente. We (the queen) are satisfied. Madame, vous etes bien bonne. Madam, you are very kind. 344 THE PRONOUN 5 362 c. For imperative first plural instead of first singular, see § 267, a. ^. II and le are used as invariable neutral forms, when the antecedent is one to which gender cannot be ascribed: Y en a-t-i7 ? — Je Ze crois. Is there any (of it) ? I think so. 362. Case Relations of Conjunctives. 1. The nomi- native forms stand as subject and the accusative forms as direct object to a verb; their use is obvious: II nous a vus. He saw us. a. The conjunctive is optional when there are two accusatives; Je (les) blime lui et elle. I blame him and her. 2. The dative forms denote the person or thing for whose ' advantage ' or ' disadvantage ' the action is done, denoted by a = to, for, from, with nouns: Je leur pr^terai les Uvres. I shall lend them the books. On lui a vole son argent. His money has been stolen from him . Put a + a^ disjunctive form is used in the following cases: (1) Whe n two datives are joined by a _conj unction, or when in emphasis a second dative is imphed: J'en ai parle a lui et a elle. I spoke of it to him and to her. Je donne le livre a elle (pas a lui). I give the book to her (not to liim), "< (2)_When the conjunctive direct object is any nfhpr pronoun than le, la, les: Je vous presente a elle. I introduce you to her. II se presenta a moi. He introduced himself to me. But: Je le (la, les) leur presente, etc. (3) After v erbs j)f motion a,ndspmeathers, to denote the 'object towards which the action tends,' the relation, though expressed by a, not being really dative: Je courus a lui. I ran to him. Cette maison est k moi. That house belongs to me. n pense (songe, reve) 4 eux. He thinks (muses, dreams) of them §§ 363-365 THE PERSONAL PRONOUN 345 Such verbs are: accoutumer, accustom vfller, go appeler, call en appeler, appeal aspirer, aspire attirer, attract irvoir affaire, have to do avoir recours, have re- course comparer, compare courir, run 6tre {h), belong (to) faire attention, pay atten- tion, habituer, accustom marcher, march penser, think prendre garde, take heed prendre interet, take interest /^retendre, aspire recourir, have recourse renoncer, renounce revenir, come back r6ver, dream songer, m,use /^enir, come a. Certain verbs of this class, when not Uteral, take the conjunctive dative: II lui vint une idee. There occurred to him an idea. Vous nous reviendrez. You will come to see us again. Note. — The_eth ical dativ e, denoting the person 'interested jn_l_OT ' affected bv' an action, ra re in English, is common in French: Goiitez-moi na vin-l^. JiLst f/iMe thjii tiri.ru'.. 363. Impersonal il. For invariable il as the subject of an impersonal verb, see §§ 248-253. 364. Predicative le, la, les. As predicate the third per- son is either variable or invariable: 1. Le agrees when referring to a determinate noun or to an adjective used as such: fites-vous sa mere? — Je la suis. Are you his mother? — I am. Etes-vous la mariee? — Je la suis. Are you the bride? — I am. 2. Le, invariable, is used when referring to an adjective, Q T to a no un as adjectivel £tes-vous fatiguee? — Je le suis. Etes-vous mere? — Je le suis. Are you tired? — I am. Are you a mother? — I am. 365. Pleonastic le. The neutral form le (§ 361, d) is often pleonastic, as compared with English usage: fites-vous mere? — Je le suis. Are you a mother? — I am. Qu'ils soient venus, je le sals. That they have come, I know. Fais du bien, quand tu le peux. Do good when you can. Ce qu'il voulait, il le veut encore. What he wished, he still wishes. 346 THE PBONOUN §§366-367 Je suis prete, s'il le faut. I am ready if need be. Je m'en irai, si vous le desirez. I shall go if you wish (it). lis sent comme je (le) desirerais. They are as I should like. n est plus age que je ne (le) sviis. He is older than I am. 06s..- This le la optional in comparative clausea. a. Le i s also use d in a_ number of fixed expressions : II ne le cede a personne. He yields to nobody. Nous ravens emporte. We have carried the day. K JLCa-Schappe Jbelle. He had a narrow escape . b. Le may sometimes be translated by oree or so: II est soldat; je le suis aussi. He is a soldier; I am one too. Sols brave, et je le serai aussi. Be brave and I shall be so too. 366. Reflexives. 1. A special conjunctive refle^vejomi, se for dative or accusative of either gender or Jiumber^ required in the third person only; for the first and second person the ordinary forms are used (cf . § 242) : n (elle) se loue. He (she) praises him (her) -self. lis (elles) se le sent dit. They said so to each other. But: Je me loue; tu te loues; nous nous louons; vous vous louez. 2. The disjunctive soi js hardly used^ beyond the third singular in an indefinite or general sense: Chacim travaille pour soi. Every one works for himself. On doit parler rarement de soi. One should rarely speak of oneself. De soi le vice est odieux. In itself vice is hateful. But: Elle est contente d'elle-meme; ils ne songent qu'a eux-memes. a. The use of soi is rarer for the feminine than for the masculine: Un bienf ait porte sa recompense A good deed brings its reward avec soi Qui). with it. La guene entraine apres elle (soi) War brings after it countless evils. des maux sans nombre. '^NoTB. — Soi is no longer used ot persona denoted by a general noun, e.g., L'avare ne vit que pour lid-mkme (not pour soi) , nor is it used, as formerly, of persons to avoid ambiguity, e.g., Quoique son frere soit dans la misere, U ne pense qu'4 lui-rnkme (not a soi). 367. Uses of en. 1. En is in function an equivalent of de + a pronoun of the third person of either gender or number; it is used of things, and less commonly of persons: §367 THE PERSONAL PRONOUN 347 Je parle des plumes; j'en parle. Donnez-les-moi; j'en ai besoin. 11 est mon ami; j 'en reponds . II aime ses fils, at il en est alme. Vous voila; j'en sms content. Vient-iLde Chicago? — n en vient. I speak of the pens ; I speak of them. Give me them; I need them. He is my friend; I answe r for him. He loves his sons, and is loved by them. There you are; I am glad of it. Does h g co me from C? He does. a. The antecedent is often understood or indefinite: Voyons ! oft en etions-nous? lis en sont venus aux mains. II m'en veut. Tant s'en fan t. C'en est fait de lui. A vous en croire. Quoi qu'il en soit. Je n'en peux plus. n y en a qui le croient. Let me see, how far on were we? They came to blows. He has a grudge against me. Parfrom it. It is aU up with him. If one is to beheve you. However it (that) may be. I^jm_wram_out. There are some who think so. 2. Through a somewhat special appKcation of the general principle, it is further used: (1) In a partitive sense: Voici du papier; en voulez-vous? — Merci, j'en ai. Avez-vous une plume? — J'en ai une (j'en ai plusieurs). II me faut en acheter d'autres. Here is some paper; do you wish any? — Thank you, I have some. Have you a pen? — I have one (I have several). I must buy others. (2) En = thereof + the definite article replaces a possess- ive adjective referring to a possessor in the preceding clause, but only when the thing possessed is a direct object, a subject of etre, or a predicate noun: J'aime ce pays; j'en admire les institutions. £lamez les pech€s de ces gens, mais n'en blteiez pas les mal- heurs. Cette affaire est delicate; le suc- ces en est douteux. Ceci est la gloire du pays; cela en est la honte. But: Cette maison a ses defauts (the possessor not being in the pre- I hke this country; I admire its institutions. Blame the sins of those people, but do not blame their misfortunes. That affair is delicate; its success is doubtful. This is the country's glory; that is its disgrace. 348 THE PRONOUN §§ 368-369 vious sentence); J'aime ces vers; leur harmonie me ravit (the thing possessed being subject of another verb than etre) ; J'admire ce pays; il est fameux par ses bonnes lois (the thing possessed being governed by a preposition). 368. Use of y. X^ i^ function equivalen t to a (en, dans, etc.2 + a pronoun of the third person of ei ther gender or number; it is used of things, and rarely of persons: Je pense i mes peches ; j'y pense. I think of my sins; I think of them. II est en Europe; il y est, et moi He is in Europe; he is there, and I j'y vais aussi. am going there too. II se co imait en ces choses, mais Hejs an expert in th ose things, but moi je ne m^y_connais pas. I am^not, n aspire k cela; il y aspire. He aspires to that; he aspires to it. Vous fiez-vous a lui? — Je m'y fie. Do you trust him? — I trust him. a. The antecedent is often understood or indefinite: II y va de votre vie. Your hfe is at stake. J'y suis ! Qu'y a-t-il? •'^'^^- ^ it^.P) I have it ! What is the matter? II s'y prend adroitement. He goes about it cleverly. Est-ce que Monsieur B. y est? Is Mr. B. at home? Y pensez-vous? You don't mean it? 369. Position of Conjunctive Objects. 1. They stand immediately before their governing verb, except the impera- tive affirmative: Je leur en parleral. I shall speak to them of it. Je I'y ai envoye pour le leur dire. I sent him there to tell them it. II lui faut parler ; il faut lui parler. He must speak; one must speak to him. a. With negative infinitive, the object may stand between ne and pas (point, rien, etc.); similarly adverb + infinitive: Je suis etonne de ne point le voir I am astonished not to see him. {or ne le point voir). Pour les bien considerer. To consider them well. V h. The objects of an infinitive governed by faire, laisser (cf . § 230, 6, 7) or a verb of perceiving (entendre, etc.), accompany the finite verb: Je le lui ferai dire. I shall make him say it. II se le voit refuser. He sees himself being refused it. Faites-yous-la raconter. Have it related to you. § 370 THE PERSONAL PRONOUN 349 c. A similar arrangement is permissible with aller, venir, envoyer, etc. + an infinitive: je vais le chercher. I'll fetch it {or him) . T'enverrai le chercher or\ t , „ , ,. , ■ T „ • t t r -1 shall send for mm. Je j'enverrai chercher. J Note. — In the older language, objects of an infinitive often stood before the so-called modal auxiliaries, e.g., Je vous dols dire, but usage hardly permits this now, except for en, y, e.g., Ce qu'on en doit attendre. 2. Conjimctive objects stand immediately after an im- perative aflirmative: Regardez-les; ecoutez-nous. Look at them; listen to us. Donnez-le-lui; allons-nous-en. Give it to him; let us go away. But: Ne les regardez pas. Do not look at them. Ne les ecoutez point. Do not listen to them. Ne le lui donnez pas. Do not give it to him. a. The rule does not apply to the subjunctive as impve. (§ 272, 1, a): Qu'il les ecoute. Let him listen to them. )<(Notes. — 1. Formerly, but rarely now, an imperative affirmative when joined to another by et (ou, mais) might have an object before it: Achetez- les et les payez, etc. 2. Voici and voUa, which are imperatives by derivation, are always preceded by their conjunctive object: Les voici, en voilS, etc. 370. Relative Position of Objects. Personal pronoun objects and pronominal adverbs are arranged with reference to each other, as follows: 1. When coming before the verb : me 1 before f le 1 before f lui 1 before y — before en te ] la }• \ leur J se \ 1 les nous vous n me les donue. He gives them to me. 11 les lui donne. He gives them to him. n nous en donne. He gives us some of it. Je leur en parlerai. I shall speak to them of it. Ne leur en parlez pas. Do not speak of it to them. Je I'y at envoye pour le leur dire. I sent him there to teU them it. 350 THE PRONOUN §370 a. When there are two direct or two indirect objects, they become disjunctive and follow the verb: J'ai vu lui et elle. I have seen him and her. J'en ai parle a lui et a elle. I spoke of it to him and to her. "/ 2, When coming after the verb: fie (la les) me (te, lui, nous, vous, leur) y Donnez-les-moi. Doaaez-leur-en. Hotmez-m'en; ■va-t'en. Condxjisez-nous-y. A]lez-vo us-en. before moi (toi, lui, nous, vous, leur) before y (en) before en Give them to me. Give them some of it. Give me some; begone. Take us there. Go away. a. After an imperative, the indirect objects nous, vous, may precede the direct le, la, les in familiar language: Conservez-yous-Ze. Keep it for yourselves. Tenez-fot/s-Ze pour dit. Consider it as final. 3. Reference table showmg possible combinations of two pronouns : (Before the Verb) (After the Verb) me le tele se le le lui -le -moi -le -toi -le -lui me la te la se la la lui -la -moi -la -toi -la -lui me les te les se les les lui -les-moi -les-toi -les-lui nous le vous le se le le leur -le -nous -le -vous -le -leur nous la vous la se la la leur -la -nous -la -vous -la -leur nous les vous les se les les leur -les-nous -les-vous -les-leur m'en t'en s'en lui en -m'en -t'en -lui-en m'en t'en s'en I'en -m'en -t'en -I'en nous en vous en s'en leur en -nous-en -vous-en -leur-en nous en vous en s'en les en -nous-en -vous-en -les -en m'y t'y s'y Duiy] C-m'y] C-t'y] C-lui-y] m'y t'y B'y I'y c-m'y] C-t'y] -I'y nousy vous y s'y leur y -nous-y -vous-y -leur-y nousy vous y s'y les y -nous-y -vous-y -les -y y en y-en §§371-372 THE PERSONAL PRONOUN 351 06s.; 1. The disjunctive forms moi, toi are used instead of me, te aftei the verb, except before en. 2. After the verb, the forms are joined to it and to each other by hyphens, apostrophe instead of hyphen being used according to § 19. 3. Combinations of three forms are rare, e.g., II nous y en a donne; they are usually avoided, e.g., Honnes-y-en a moi for Donne-m'j-en. 4. The forms in f 3 are almost always avoided, either by transposition or by some other form of expression, e.g., Menes-j/-moi or Mene-moi la for Mene-m'j/, etc. See § 159, 4. 371. Omission of Object. The object of the second of two verbs in a compound tense joined by et or ou may be omitted alongjwith_the^uxiliary and the subject: n Pa. pris et tue. He caught and killed it. Or: n I'a. pris et I'sl tue. He caught it and killed it. n I'a. pris et il Pa tue. He has caught it and has kUled it. But: n Pa pris, Pa tue. He has caught it, has killed it. n le prend, et le tue. He catches it, and kills it. Note. — The verbs must be alike in government, must have the same auxiliary, must both be aflSrmative or negative, otherwise no omission is allowed. 372. Disjunctives. When, for any reason, the pronoun is stressed (§ 7), the disjvmctive form is usually employed (see §359, note); thus, the disjunctives are used: 1. Absolutely, a verb being implied, but not expressed: Qui est la? — Moi (eux, elle). Who is there? — I (they, she). Qui as-tu vu? — Lui (eux). Whom did you see? — Him (them). Toi absent, que ferai-je? You absent, what shall I do? a. So also, in comparisons, and analogously, after ne . . . que: Je suis plus grand que toi. I am taller than you. Faites comme etix. Do as they do. Je n'ai vu que lui. I have seen him only. 2. In appositions, often emphatic: Moi, je I'ai vu (moi-meme). (Why) I saw it myself. Toi qui I'as vu, tu me crois. You who saw it (you) believe me Lui aussi (il) le sait. He too knows it. Cela vous est facile k vous. That is easy for you. 352 THE PRONOUN §373 a. With M so used, and sometimes also with eux, the conjunctive subject may be omitted: Lui seul (il) ne le voulait pas. He alon e. did not wish it. Lui travaillait; eux jouaient. He worked; they played. Note. — Je soussigne = / the undersigned is a relic of the earlier language. 3. As logical subject after ce + etre: C'estmoi(toi,vous); ce sent eux. It is I (thou, you); it is they. 4. With an infinitive: Moi t'oublier ! jamais. I forget thee ! Never. Et eux de s'enfuir. And they made off. 5. When the subject or object is composite, see also § 362, iTVaSa: 2, (l): Son frere et lui sont venus. His brother and he have come. a. A composite subject or object is usually summed up by a pleo- nastic appositive conjunctive, especially when the components are unlike in person: Vous et lui (vous) I'avez vu. You and he saw it. Je vous envoie, toi et ton frere. I send you and your brother. 6. After a pr eposition: Je parle de toi et d'eux. I speak of you and of them, lis sont chez eux. They are at home. II se moque de nous. He makes sport of us. •^ Observe the peculiar use of a preposition + a disjunctive pronoun as a sort of emphatic appositive of pc^session. J'ai une maison a moi. I have a house of my own. Mon idee 4 moi, c'est, etc. My (own) idea is, etc. )^OTE. — Ajdiajuactiye for things after a preposition is usually avoided , either by means of en, y, or else by an adverb, such as dedans, dehors, dessus, devant, derriere, etc. : Je ne vols rien la dedans {in it) ; Vayez sur la table, cherchez dessus (on it) et dessous (vnder it). 7. For moi and toi after imperative, see § 370, 3, obs. 1. 373. Pronouns in Address. In addressing one person 'vous is, in general, the pronoun of formality and respect, whilst tu denotes famiUarity, affection, solemnitj'-, etc., as follows: §374 THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUN 353 1. Tu = you, of one person, is generally used between members of the same family (husband and wife, parents and children, brothers and sisters), between very intimate friends, bet ween children , bv grown per son s to child ren and sometimes to ser vants, by everybod y to a-nimals and inam- mate object s: Od es-tu, mon cher pere? Where are you, my dear father? Est-ce toi, mon enfant? Is that you, my child? Pauvre chien, tu as faim. Poor dog, you are hungry. 2. T u = thou is used in poetry and elevated prose, and by Protestants in addres sing God, Roman Catholics using v ous: Nous te (vous) louons, 6 Dieu ! We praise thee, O God ! 3. Vous, with the above hmitations, is used, both in the singular and plural, as 'you' is in Enghsh. THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUN 374. Possessives 1 . Adj ectival Forms : Sing. Pl. m. mon f. ma (mon) m. ton f. ta (ton) m. son f. sa (son) mes, my tes, thy, your ses his, her, its, one's m. f. m. f. m. ■ notre ■ votre vos, your ■ leur leurs, their Ohs.: 1. The forms in parenthe- sis, mon, ton, son, are used instead Pronominal Forms: Pl. . les miens \ > mme' les miennes J les tiens \ ,, . , ^ > thme, yours les tiennes J les siens 1 his, hers, its, les siennes J one's own les n6tres, ours les v6tres, yoiu-s ' les leurs, theirs 1. The feminine, except for formed as for adjectives of 354 THE PRONOUN §§375-376 of ma, ta, sa, before a vowel or h like ending. 2. De, a + le, les, mute: Mon amie, my friend (f.); contract as usual; thus, du mien Ion ftistoire (f.), your story; son (,= de -\- le mien), aux miennes aimable tante, his amiable aunt. (= a + les miennes), etc. 3. Note 2. Since son (sa, ses) = his, her, its, the accent mark in ndtre, votre, one's, the context determines which absent in notre, votre. 4. Since le sense is intended. sien (la sienne, etc.) = Ms, hers, its, one's, the context determines which sense is intended. Note. — The regular feminine forms, ma, ta, sa, were at one time used before a vowel sound; a trace of this usage survives in ma mie (for m'amie). 375. Agreement. The possessives agree in gender and number with the noun denoting the object possessed, and in person with the possessor: / EUe a son crayon et les miens. She has her pencil and mine. U a sa plume et les votres. He has his pen and yours. a. The possessive adjective must be repeated precisely like the definite article (cf . § 318) : Mes parents et mes amis. My relatives and friends. •^ JWlien_tlw pOTsessor Js ind^^^^ son (sa, etc.) ^nd^le sien (la sienne, etc.), are used: On doit tenir sa parole. One must keep one's word. Se charger des affaires d'autrui To undertake the business of others et negliger les siennes. and neglect one's own. 376. Use of Adjectival Forms. They are used, in general, like the corresponding Enghsh forms; idiomatic distinc- tions and special rules are: 1. The possessive adjective is commonly replaced by the definite article (cf . § 328) when no ambiguity arises from its use: II s'est casse la jambe. He broke his leg. Donnez-moi la main. Give me your hand. II m'a dechire le visage. He has scratched my face. But: II a dechire son habit. He has torn his coat. -a. If the sense is specific, emphatic, or distinctive, the possessive is MSed: ^ - Mon bras mej^mal. My arm pains me. Voiia ma migraine encore ! There is my sick-headache again ! §376 THE POSSESSIVE PBONOUN 355 Je I'ai vu de mes propres yeux. I saw it with my own eyes. Elle lui a donne sa main. She has given him her hand {sc. in marriage). 2. En + the definite article serves in certain cases as a substitute for son, leiir, see § 367, 2, (2) : a. This construction is more usual for things than for persons; for things personified, for names of places, or to avoid ambiguity, son, leur are not uncommon: La necessite parle; il faut suivre Necessity 8i)eaks; we must follow sa loi. her law. Vous rappelez-Tous cette villa? Do you remember that city? Its Ses promenades sent tres promenades are very fine. belles. La source de toutes las passions Sensation is the source of all the est la sensibilite, I'imagination passions, imagination determines determine leur pente. their tendency. Xi. The_ emghatic own is denoted by propre or by an apposition with a: Je I'ai ecrit de ma propre main. I wrote it with my own hand. C'est mon opinion k moL That is my own opinion. Cf. also: J'ai vm chaval i moi. I have a horse of my own. a. Along with son the k construction often avoids ambiguity: Son pere a lui. His (i.e., not her) father. Sa mere a elle. Her mother. X^- Mon (ma) is comm only used, in direct address, before the name of a relativ e (not before papa, maman) or the title of a superior oflScer : Bonjour mon pSra (mon colonel). Good morning, father (colonel). But: Est-ce toi papa (maman)? Is that you, papa (mamma)? 'CSoTE. — This usage explains the origin of monsieur (= mon + sieui) madame (= ma + dame), etc. 5. In speaking to a person of his or her relatives, votre (vos) is often preceded by monsieur, etc., for politeness: Madame votre mere y est-ella? Is your mother in? 356 THE PHONOUN § 377 /<6. When^ t here is plurali ty of possessor, t he object pos - sessed usually remains singular, if it is singular as regards the individual possessor: Les hommes songent moins a leur Men think less of their souls than ame qu'S. leur corps. of their bodies. Hs ont perdu la vie. They lost their JisgSj. o. Sometimes the sense demands a plural: Leurs tStes se ressemblent. Their heads are alike. 377. Use of Pronominal Forms. They are used, in general, like the corresponding English forms; idiomatic distinctions and special rules are the following: Xl. Mine, etc., af ter etre is regularly ex pressed by a + m ojj^ etc., when denoting ownership simply, while le mien,_etc, denotes a^distinctwn^of, ownership : Cette montre est a moi. 1 That watch is mine. Cette montre est la mienne. J That watch is mine (not yours;. ■ 2. ThB^ronominal form sometimes stands-without artielfi in the predicate afterrortain verbs: Ces opinions sont vStres. Those opinions are yours. Elle deviendra mienne. She shall become mine. Je les ai fait miens. I made them mine. Such verbs are: @tTe devenir dire faire regarder comme, etc. A; 3. The idiorn ^ a Jriend of mine, etc., is not literally translated : Un de mes amis. A friend of mine. One of my friends, (who is) a doctor. Un medecin de mes amis. i . j ^ , . , , . A doctor, a friend of mme. Un ami k moi. A friend of mine. Mon ami que voici. This friend of mine. Cf . : Un tour de sa fa;on. One of his tricks. a. The use of mien (tien, sien) attributively in this sense is familiar; Un mien parent. A relative of mine. Une sienne cousine. A cousin of his. §§ 378-379 THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN 357 4. Emphatic own is rendered by propre, or is, more usually, untranslated: Son avis et le mien (propre). His opinion and my own. 5. When used absolut ely, i.e., without antecedeiit, the singular deno tes property, what is mine, etc., and the plural relatives, friends, alli es, etc. : .l e ne demande qu e le mien. I ask jm^jorw^tjs mine. Les n6tres se sont bien battus. TPur"soldiers .(etc-^iouebijKell. a. Familiarly, the feminine means pranks, etc.: II fait encore des siennes. He is at his pranks again. Note. — Other absolute uses are not permissible, e.g., Votre lettre (not la votre) de la semaide demiere. THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN 378. Demonstratives 1. Adjectival forms: 2. Pronominal forms: Sing. Pi- Sing. Pl. m. ce (cet) 1 j^;^ ^j^^^ ces ™- "'f 1 that (one), etc. ""^ 1 f. cette J f. cellej cellesj m. ce feet) . . . -cil ., . • m. celui-cll .■. , , , ceux-ci \ ^ -' . y this ces . . . -ci , ,, . } this (one), etc. „ . > f . cette . . . -ci J f • celle-ci I celles-ci J m. ce (cet) . . . -la I .. . ■> ni. celui-lal ., . , ■, , ceux-la ) Lu. v,c i,^cv ■ • '» I ^jjg^t ces . . . -U , „ ,. } that (one), etc. „ ,. ^ f. cette... -la J f. celle-iaj celles-U / ^ce, this (these), that (those), he (she, Obs.: The form c et is used o3 it, they) before a vow el or h mute : Cet p ceci, this arbre; cet honaae; cet autre de; tJcela, that but: ce chSne; ce hetre. Obs.: The e of c e is elided before a vowel or h mute (519) I c* becomes s'^before a -ffS, 4Tr f 'a "eier 379. Agreement. The adjectival form agrees in gender and number with the noun before which it stands; the pro- nominal form agrees in gender and number with the noun instead of which it stands: Cette plume et celle de Jean. This pen and that of John. J'aime ces livres-ci, mais je I like these books, but I do not n'aime pas ceuz-1^. like those. 358 THE PRONOUN §§ 380-382 a. The demonstrative adjective miist be repeated like the definite article (cf. § 318). 380. Use of Adjectival ce. Ce (cette, etc.) = this or that; to distingiiish this from that -ci and -la are respec- tively added to tiie noiin: Lis ce livre-ri; lis ce livre-M. Read this book; read that book. J'aime ces tableauz-2a. I like those pictures. a. Ce (cette, etc.), referring to what has already been mentioned, sometimes has the force of that: Le telegraphe, cette grande de- The telegraph, that great discovery couverte de notre siecle. of our centm-y. •^6. The definite article replaces the demonstrative adjective in a few idioms : Ne parlez pas de la sorte. Doji ot speak in that wa y. Je r eviens a /'instant . I shall be back in a moment . 381. Celui. The pronoun celui (celle, etc.) = that, that one, the one, he, is regularly used only along with a relative clause or a de clause: Ceux qui rient pleureront. Those who laugh will weep. Celle dont je parle est venue. She of whom I speak has coW. Le devoir d'aimer Dieu at celui The duty of loving God and that of d'aimer son prochain. loving one's neighbor. Cette robe et celle que j'ai vue. This dress and the one I saw. Mes plumes et celles de mon frere. My pens and m y brot her's. Obs.: Note the use of celui = English possessive noun. a. The relative sentence is sometimes elUptically expressed by the past participle: Les decouvertes enumerees sent The discoveries enumerated are celles faites par Edison. those made by Edison. 6. Celui-la replaces celui when the predicate comes before the relative: Celui-la est riche qui est toujours He (that man) is rich who is always content. happy. 382. Celui-ci, celui-la. The pronouns celui-ci (celle-ci, etc.) = this, this one, he, the latter and celui-la (celle-la, §383 THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN 359 etc.) = that, that one, the former, are used to contrast the nearer with the more remote: Voici les dexix chaines; gardez Here are the two chains; keep this celle-ci, et renvoyez celle-la. (one), and send back that (one). Veut-a cetix-ci ou ceux-la? Does he wish these or those? Ciceron et Virgile etaient Ro- Cicero and VirgU were Romans; mains; celui-ci e tait poete, et jhe , former was an orator, and celui-la o rateiir. ~~— ^ — ! thejatter a poet. Obs.: The idiom in the last example is literally the latter . . ., the former. a. This or that for emphasis, not contrast, is celui-la : C'est line bonne loi (que) celle-li. This (that) is a good law. ^83. Ce as Representative Subject. Ce,_= Jhis, that , th^se^JhQsejJl^ she, it, they, according to the c ontext, is used with etre . jQr_with devoir, pouvoir,_savoir .iJjteej^asjrejpre- sentatrTOSubjectj^when the logical subject is: yi. A proper noun, or a determinate noup, including adiectises-aa.such: '^ ^-^^ ^jduJu^ C'est Marie et sa mere. It is Mary and her mother. Ce sera un beau spectacle. That (it) will be a fine sight. Ce sent nos pltunes. These (those) are our pens. Etait-ce le meiUeur? Was it the best? Ce sent des Allemands. They (those) are Germans. C'est men ami(e). He (she) is my friend. Ce peut etre Jean. That may be John. a. Before Stre + an indeterminate noun il (ils, elles) is the regular construction: // est temps de s'en aller. It is time to go. lis sent amis (Franjais). They are friends (French). Elle est couturiere. She is a seamstress. Note. — For a few expressions like c'est dommage, etc., in which c'est stands with an indeterminate noun, see 384, 1, note 3. ^. H est is always used to indicate hours of the day: n est midi (trois heures). It ia noon (tlu-ee o'clock). But: Quelle heure est-ce qui What hour has just struck? — It vient de sonner? — C'est cinq is five. heures. 360 THE PKONOXIN §384 -c. Observe the use of ce in the following date idioms: Cast aujourd'hui lundi. To-day is Monday. Ce.Sfiri demain le^ quatre. To-morrow will be the fourth. 2. A pronoun: Qui est-cc? — Ce sent eux. Who is it? — It is they. Ce sent les leurs. Those are theirs. C'est ceci; c'est cela. It is this; it is that. C'gtaient les memes. They (those) were the same. Ce doivent etre les miens. Those must be mine. 3. An infinitive, or an infinitive with de: Ce seraiiTtout perdre. That would be losing everything. Voir c'est croire. Seeing is believing. Ce que je crains c'est de Z'offenser. What I fear is to offend him. 4. A noun sentence: Est-ce que vous ne le ferez pas? Will you not do it? Oa est-ce qu'il est? Where is it that he is? Ce n'est pas qu'il ait peur. It is not that he is afraid. a. The noun sentence may be understood: Vous partirez, n'est-ce pas? ( = You wiU go, will you not? n'est-ce pas que vous partirez?) 5. An adverb of quantity: Combien est-ce? C'a ete trop. How much is it? It was too much. Note. — For agreement of the verb, see § 232, 3. ^384. Ce as Real Subject. Ce stands as real subject of etre, or of devoir, pouvoir, savoir + etre, when the com- plement of etre is: 1. A mas culine adjective,_an adjecti^taia jtslLinfinitive, an infinitive preceded by a, an adverb (in all these cases without 'further syntactical connection; see a, below): C'est beau (vrai, bien). That (it) is fine (true, well). Ce doit etre (ne saurait etre) vrai. That must be (cannot be) true. II est parti, c'est clair. He is gone, that is clear. C'est clair, il est parti. It is clear, he is gone. C'est I. desirer. That (it) is to be desired. La vue est belle I — Oui, c'est beau! The view is fine! — Yes, it is fine! §385 THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUN 361 Oa sera-cc? Where will it (that) be? C'etait bien mal k vous. That was very wrong of you. /fo. When follow ed by de_j;:_an infinitive or by a que clause, the regular congtruction for the above is impersonal il (not ce)j_ so_^o t^e_paxenthetK5^il est vrai and n'est-il pas vrai? (= n'est-ce_pas?), though _with out synt actical connection: n est facile de dire cela. It is easy to say that. II est triste de vous voir ainsi. It is sad to see you thus. It est Clair que j'ai raison. It is clear that I am right. n est k desirer que la guerre It is to be desired that the war will finisse bientSt. soon end. On rit, il est vrai, mais attendez. They laugh, to be sure, but wait. //est bien mal a vous deparler ainsi. It is very wrong of you to speak so. Note. — 1. Colloquially, c'est is pretty freely used instead of il est before de + infinitive or a que clause: C'est facile (je f aire cela; C'est clair gue j'ai raison, etc. 2. This use of ce is permissible in the literary style only in expressions of emotion, e.g., C'est heureux (malheureux, beau, triste, etonnant, etc.), c'est k presumer (craindre, regretter, etc.): C'est triste de vous voir; C'est k craindre gu'il ne soit noye. 3. The ce construction is obligatory after a few noun phrases of like value, e.g., C'est dommage (pitie, plaisir, justice), etc., C'est pitie de I'entendre. 2. A prepositional phrase, or a conjunction: Cest pour vous. It (that) is for you. C'est pourquoi je suis venu. That is why I came. C'est comme vous (le) dites. It is as you say. >^385. Ce + a Relative. As antecedent ce + a relative denotes that which, what, which, etc.: Ce qui m'amuse. What (that which) amuses me. Ce que je dis est vrai. What I say is true. Ce dont nous parlions. What we were speaking of. Ce a quoi je pense. What I am thinking of. n est age, ce qui est dommage. He is old, which is a pity. a. Ce, so used, either immediately precedes the relative, or is, for emphasis, divided from it by Stre + a predicate substantive: Ce qu'jl veut c'est la gloire. What he desires is glory. Cest la gloire gw'il veut. It is glory that he desires. Note. — This type of construction is widely used to render a predicate substantive emphatic, e.g., C'est ton frere qui le dit; C'est k vous que (= k qui) je parle; C'est mourir que de vivre ainsi; C'est une belle ville que Paris (cf. 397, 2, note 1). 362 THE PRONOUN §§ 386-388 386. Other uses of ce. Apart from its use with etre or with a relative, ce is found in a few phrases only, mostly archaic, famiUar or jocular: Ce devint vm. usage. This (that) became a custom. Tu crains, ce ltd dit-il. "You fear," said he to him. Sue ce, je vous quitte. And now, I leave you. De ce non content. Not satisfied with this. a. The parenthetical ce semble may be used only when uncon- nected (of. § 384, 1, a), otherwise il semble : C'est lui, ce me semble, au moins. It's he, it seems to me, at least. But: II me semble que c'est lui. 387. Pleonastic ce. As compared with EngUsh, ce is often pleonastic; thus, it is used with etre + a logical subject: 1. Regularly, after celui qui and ce qm: Celle qui I'a dit c'est vous. The one who said so is you. Ce que je crains, ce sent mes pre- What I fear is my would-be friends, tendus amis. Ce a quoi je pense c'est sa sante. What I think of is his health. 2. Regularly, between infinitives when no±.jttega±is£: Penser, c'est vivre. To think is to hve. But: Vegeter(ce)n' est pas vivre. To vegetate is not to live. X 3. Regularly, in inversion with que: ~ . V 11 •« -r. . (Paris is a beautiful city. Cest ime belle ville que Pans. que? what? ^ quoi? what? OBs.; 1. For the feminine and plural of quel, cf. §§ 337, 1 (2), and 338. 2. Lequel = le + quel, both parts being inflected (§§ 316, 389, 1); de, d contract with le, les (duquel, auquel, etc., cf. § 317). 3. Que = qu' before a vowel or h mute (§ 19). 36t THE PRONOUN §§ 390-391 390. Agreement. The adjectival forms agree like ordi- nary adjectives; the variable pronominal forms agree in gender, but not necessarily in nimiber, with the nouns for which they stand; the invariable qui? assumes the number of the noun or pronoun referred to: Quels livres avez-vous? Which (what) books have you? Quelle plume avez-vous prise ? Which pen did you take? Quelles sont vos raisons? What are your reasons? Laquelle des dames est venue? Which of the ladies has come? Qui Sonne? Qui sont-elles? Who rings? Who are they? /= 391. Quel? Lequel? The adjective quel? = which? what? and the pronoun lequel? = which (one)? what (one)? refer either to persons or things, and stand both in direct and indirect questions: Quels livres avez-vous? Which (what) books have you? Dites-moi quel livre il a. Tell me which (what) book he has. Desquels avez-vous besoin? Which (ones) do you need? Dites-moi lesquels vous avez. Tell me which (ones) you have. Quelle dame est arrivee? Which (what) lady has come? Je ne sais pas laquelle. I do not know which (one). Quelles sont vos raisons? What are your reasons? Quel homme est-ce Ik? What (what kind of) man is that? Auquel des hommes parle-t-il? To which of the men does he speak? a. Quel ! in exclamations sometimes = what aj what I : Quel heros ! Quels heros ! What a hero ! What heroes ! Quelle belle scene I — Oui, c'est What a beautiful scene ! — Yes, It beau! is fine. 6. Quel? as predicative adjective often replaces qui? = who? Quels sont ces gens-la? Who are those people? {or what kind of people are those?) Sais-tu quelle est cette dame? Do you know who that lady is? Note. — A pleonastic de is commonly used before alternatives after quel? lequel? and other interrogatives, probably caused'by'caie attraction" with des deuz, often present in such expressions: Lequel (des deuxy est le plus habile, de cet homme-ci ou de celui-U; Laquelle est la plus illustrei d'Athenes ou de Rome? §§392-393 THE INTERKOGATIVE PRONOUN 365 392. Qui? 1. The pronoun qtxi? = who? whoml is vegn- l arly u sed^of_ gersons only, and stands in both direct and indirecF questions : Qui frappe? Qm est la? Who is knocldng? Who is there? De qui (a qui) parle-t-il? Of whom (to whom) is he speaking? Qm avez-vous vu? Whom did you see? Qui gtes-vous? Who are you? Dites-moi qui est venu. Tell me who has come. a. Qui? is sometimes used, though rarely and not necessarily, as subject of a transitive verb in the sense of what f Qui vous amene de si bonne heixre? What brings you so early? &. Qui? predicatively, is often replaced, especially when feminine or plural, by quel? Quelle est cette dame? Who is that lady? (What 1. is that?) Quels sont-ils? Who are they? 2. ' ^hose? denoting sim ply ownership = a qui? other- wise generally d e c[ui? sonietimes^ quel ? J)ut_neYCT_dont : A qui est cette maison-la? Whose house is that? De qui Stes-vous fils? Whose son are you? Quelle maison a ete briilee? Whose (what) house was burnt? Note. — Compare with this the idiom c'est k qui: C'etait S qui finirait le premier, It vxis a strife as to who would finish first. ,\393. Que? Quoi? The form (^ej = what? is conjunc- tive, while quoi? = what? is disjunctive|^_their uses in detail are: 1. Que ? stands regularly as direct object or as predicate, and in direct question only: Que vous a-t-il dit? What did he say to you? Que cherchez-vous? What are you looking for? Que sont-ils devenus? What has become of them? '^i. Que? alternatively with quoi? may stand witJ}_an.,K£nitiTC ip jfldireot question : Jene_sais_aue_(guoi)^dire. I know not wha^ to say. 366 THE PRONOUN § 394 ^. Que? and que j sometimes have adverbial force : Que ne m^ajearvous dit cela? Why did you not tell me that? Que vous etes heureux ! How happy you iu^e ! Que d'argent perdu ! What a quantity of money lost I 2. What? as subject of a v erb is regul arly qu'est-ce qu i? Qu'est-ce qui fait ce bruit? What is making that noise? \ a. The form que? may stand as subject of a few intransitive verbs, mostly such as may also be impersonal, but never as subject of a transitive verb: Que sert de pleurer? What is the use of crying? Que vous en semble? What do you think of it? Qu'est-ce? What is it? 3. Quoi? is used absolu tely, i .e., with, ellipsis of, the verb, and after a preposition: n y a du nouveau. — ^uoi? There is news. — What? Quel de plus beau que cela? What finer than that? Quoi I vous I'admirez ! What ! You adimre him ! A quoi pensez-vous? What are you thinking of ? En quoi puis-je vous servir? In what can I help you? a. In cases of special emphasis quoi? may be direct object : Je resois quoi? — Des lettres. I receive what? — Letters. 6. With an infinitive, que? or more emphatically, quoi? is used- Que (quoi) faire? What is one to do? Je ne sais que (quoi) repondre. I know not what to answer. 394. Interrogative Locutions. The use of interrogative phrases formed with est-ce, etc., instead of the simple forms is very frequent (cf . §§ 392-3) : Qui est-ce qui chante? /or Qui chante? Qui est-ce que vous demandez? " Qui demandez-vous? A qui est-ce que vous parliez? " A qui parKez-vous? Qu'est-ce que cela prouve? " Que prouve cela? Qu'est-ce que c'est? ■' Qu'est-ce? Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela? " Qu'est-ce que cela? De quoi est-ce qu'il narie? " De quoi parle-t-il? §§395-397 THE RELATIVE PRONOUN 367 THE RELATIVE PRONOUN 395. Relative Pronouns qui, who, which, that; whom {after a preposition) que, whom, which, that dont, whose, of whom, of which, etc. o&, in which, into which, at which, to which, etc. lequel, m. s. lesquels, m. pi. 1 , , , . , , laqueUe, f . s. lesquelles. f. pi. / ^'^°' ^^°'"' ^^<'^' ^^^ quoi, what, which Ohs.: For qu', see § 19. 396. Agreement. A relative pronoun, whether variable or invariable in form, is of. thfii gender, number, and person of i ts ante cedent : Moi qu i etais (t ous qui etiez) la. I whQ.waa.Is21iJdlQ-H.erg) tlssS- Les lettres que j'ai apportees. The letters which I have brought. Moi qui suis son ami(e). I who am his friend (m. or I.). Dieuz (vous) qui m'exaucez ! (Ye) gods who hear me ! C'est nous qui I'avons dit. It is we who have said it. Je suis celui qui I'ai dit. I am the one who has said it. a. When the antecedent is a predicate noun, or an adjective as such, the relative may agree in person either with this noun or with the subject of the sentence: Nous sommes deux moines qui We are two monks who are trav- voyageons (voyagent). eling. Je suis le seul qui I'aie (ait) dit. ■ I am the only one who has said it. '^ The relative after un + a plural is either singular or plural, usually according to the sense: C'est un de mes (des) proems qui It is one of my (of the) lawsuits m'a (m'ont) ruine. which has (have) ruined me. 397. Qui, Que. Both qui and que refer to antecedents, of either gender or number, denoting persons or things; their uses in detail are: 368 THE PRONOUN I 397 1. Qui = who, which, that, serves as subject; qui = whom, of persons only, or things personified, may also be used after a preposition: La dame qui a chante. Les amis qui sont arrives. La vaclie qui beugle. Les livres qui ont ete perdus. Les oiseaux qui volant. Ce qui n^'amuse. Rien qui soit beau. La tante chez qui je demeure. Les amis a (de) qui je parlais. Rochers k qui je me plains The lady who (that) has sung. The friends who (that) have come. The cow which (that) lows. The books which have been lost. The birds which (that) fly. What (that which) amuses me. Nothing that is beautiful. The aunt with whom I Mve. The friends to (of) whom I spoke. Rocks to whom I complain. i a. Qui, without antecedent, sometimes = celui qui (ceux qui, etc.), 3r, when repeated, = les uns ... les autres : or, when repeated, = les uns Aimez qui vous aime. Jouera qui voudra. Pour qui connah. Qui d'un cote, qui de I'autre. les autres: Love him (the one) who loves you. Let those who will play. For any one who knows. Some on one side, some on the other. 6. Similarly, in a few phrases, mostly exclamatory or parenthetical, qui = ce qui: Voila qui est etrange ! That is strange ! Qui pis est {or ce qui est pis). What is worse. 2. Que = whom, which, that, serves regularly as direct object: Les ami(e)s que j'aime. Le livre (cheval) que j'ai. Les plumes que j'ai achetees. Ce que vous dites. Rien de ce que vous dites. The friends whom (that) I love. The book (horse) which I have. The pens which I have bought. That which you say. Nothing that you say. a. Que stands also as predicate nominative (cf. § 295, 1), and as logical subject of an impersonal verb: Malheureuse que je suis ! Qu'est-ce qu'elle est devenue? A I'heure qu'il est. L'homme qu'il vous faut. Prenez ce qu'il vous faut. Unhappy woman that I am ! What has become of her? At the present hotir. The man that you need. Take what you need. §§398-399 THE RELATIVE PRONOUN 369 Notes. — 1. The que of emphatic inversions (§ 385, a, n.) is best ex- plained as predicative que: C'est une belle ville que Paris = C'est une belle viUe que Paris (est) or C'est une belle ville (ce) que (c'est) Paris; Erreur que tout cela = (C'est) erreur que tout cela (est) or (C'est) erreui (ce) que (c'est) tout cela. 2. The form que is often a relative adverb, not to be confounded in function -with the relative proper: Dans le temps que cela arrivait; C'est i vous que je parte (or C'est vous k qui je parle). -^98. Dont. The form doat = whose, of whom, of which, etc., has the value of de i_a J^lative; it refers to anteced- ents, of either gender or number, denoting, persons or things L'homme dont le fils est mort. The man whose son is dead. Les gens dont je parle. The people of whom I speak. Les plumes dont je me sers. The pens which I make use of. La gloire dont il est avide. , The fame for which he is eager. Ce dont j e me plains. *"'- fh--^ That of which I complain. ^. A noun afterdont_= whose d o^ notomit_the article as in English, an d must f ollow ^its governing^ verb (cf . § 400, 2) : Le monsieur dont j'ai tro uve la T he gentleman who se purse I bourse. found. " ft. As compared with d'oti (cf. § 399, a), dont has figurative force in expressions referring to extraction, lineage, etc.: La maison dont il sort. The family from which he comes. c. Dont was originally an adverb (L. de -f unde), and is often best construed as such: Le pays dont il est venu. The country whence he came. /X399. Ou. The adverb ou = where is also__use^d as a rfilativ e with the value_of dans ja, su r, vers, etc^} -j^j . relative ; if preceded by a preposition, ou = which, where: La maison ofi je loge. The house in which I lodge. Le siecle o& nous vivons. The age in which we live. Le but ofi il tend. The end towards which he tends. Les villes par ofl je suis venu. The cities through which I came. L'endioit d'oft il vient. The place from which he comes. 370 THE PRONOUN §§ 400-401 'a. D'ofl = from which, whence, is usually literal in force: La maison d'oft 11 sort. The house out of which he comes. X 400. Lequel, The form lequel = who, wh om, whi ch, that , refers to persons or things, and varies in form to^agree with its antecedent; it is chiefly used where, qui, que, etc., may not be employed: /I. Leque l, being inflected, stands where quij^ que^ from want of inflection, would be ambiguous^ or it se rves, owing to its stress, to denote- the more remote of two possible ante- cedents: La soeur de men ami laquelle The sister of my friend who has vient d'arriver. just come. Le fils du redacteur lequel je The son of the editor whom {i.e., viens de voir. — ' the son) I have just seen. - a. Lequel may notbe used of persons after en, and it must bemused of persons after parmi, entre: Un homme en qui je crois. A man in whom I beMeve. Les amis panni (entre) lesquels. The friends among whom. 2. When depending on a noim governed by a preposition, whose must be turned by duquel, etc., which must follow the noun (cf . § 398, a): . , i- La dame au fils de laquelle {of The lady to whose son I give de qui) je donne des legons. lessons. yNoTE. — Lequel is used exceptionally as an adjective: J'espere partii demain, auquel cas, etc.; Je viens de toucher mille francs, de laquelle somme je payerai mes dettes. 401. Quoi. 1. The form quoi = what, which, is used without definite antecedent, and stands after a preposition, rarely otherwise: Voiia de quoi je parlais. That is what I was speaking of. Sur quoi il est parti. Whereupon he went away. Cast a quoi je pensais. That is what I was thinking of. II m'a payg, fefcAfluoi je ne m'at- He paid me, which I hardly ex- tendais gu6re. pected. § 402 THE HELATIVE PRONOUN 371 ■^ De qnoi + an infinitive , expressed^ o r implied, denotea the means or cause of th e action of the infinitive : II a jie quoi vivre. He has enough to live o n. D a de quoi {sc. vivre, etc.). He has means (is well off). Donnez-moi de quoi ecrire. Give me something to write with. D n'Y a pas de quoi. There is no occasion (don't men- tion itf etc.). ~ "~ b. Quoi stands without a preposition in a few expressions: Quoi faisant. (Ey) doing which. Un je ne sais quoi de c ruel. A certain indefinable cruelty. 2. What = that which is expressed by ce + a relative (cf.§385): Je vois ce qui se pass e. I see what is going on. Je sais £e..q!ifeje_sais. I know what I know. Ce_d2nt je me plains. That of which I complain. Ce k quoi je me fiais. What I was trusting to. n est sourd, ce qui est bien dom- He is deaf, which is a great pity, mage. 402. Remarks. 1. The relative pronoun, often omitted in English, is never omitted in French: Le tableau que j'ai vu Ik. The picture (which) I saw there Le livre dont je parle est k moi. The book (which) I speak of is 2. B ^iye and anteced ent shoxiM_stancLmJ.ear .together a s possib le: n y a de ce livre une edition qui There is an edition of that book se vend, etc. which is sold, etc. Not: Une edition de ce livre qui, etc. 3. A^prepositioiLJiover_ends_the_ reLativ^^ as sometimes in English: Ce k quoi je me fiais. What I was trusting to. 4. For English forms in -ing = relative clause, see .§ 287. 3 372 THE PKONOUN §§ 403-404 THE INDEFINITE PRONOUN 403. Indefinites 1. Adjectival forms: 1. certain, a certain; pi. certain 4. divers, m ijl. 1 ^^ ^^^_ 2. cliaque, each, every diverses , f. pL J 3. difEerent(e)s, pi., various, etc. .'5. maint, many a 6. quelque, some; pi., some, (few) 06s..- Except for divers, the feminine and plural are formed hke those of ordinary adjectives. 2. Pronominal forms: 1. autrui , others, other people, etc. ^. (}udqu^|ln, m. s. 1 somebody, 2. chacun, m. 1 each (one), every quelgulune, f. s. J etc. chacune,f. j (one) queLqueSdBa§,m.pl.l some(peo- 3. on ^'on), one, people, etc. quelqueSTJines, f. pi. / pie), etc. 4. personne . . . ne , ngbody, etc. '^Q. q uelque chose , something 7. rien . . . ne,_n(}tHng_ XObs.: 1. On often beco m es I'on after a vowel sound to avoid hiatus, especially after et, ou, oii, que, lorsque, etc., qui, quoi, pourquoi, si, ainsi, aussi, but not usually when a closely following word has initial 1; qu'on almost always becomes que I'on when a closely following word has initial Ds] sound. 2. For quelqu'un(e), see § 19. ^S. Note the hyphen of the plural of quelqu'un.' 3. Forms serving either as adjective or as pronoun: 1. aucun . . ..n_e,no; nobody, etc. 6. plusieurs, m. or f. pi., several 2. autre, other 7. tel, m. 1 o * i ^ ,[ r } such, etc. 3. meme, same, etc. telle, f . J ' 4. nul . . . ne, m. 1 no; nobody, 8. tout, m. tous, m. pl.l all, every, nuUe . . . ne, f . J etc. toute, f . toutes, f . pi. J etc. 5. pas un . . . ne, no; nobody, etc. 9. un, a; one, etc. Obs.: The feminine and plural are like those of adjectives of like ending, except the feminine of nul and the plural of tout. 404. Use of Adjectival Forms. 1. Certain = (a) cer- tain, pi. certain, some, precedes its noun; the use of un in the_ singular, and of partitive de in the_plural,^^|o£itionali_ (Un) certain roi de France. A certain French bng. (De) certaines gens. Certain (some) people. § 404 THE INDEFINITE PRONOUN 373 o. Certains is exceptionally used as a pronoun: Certains pretendent, etc. Some assert, etc. t-^foTE. — Certain, placed after the no un, is an ordinary adjfipjiye = sure, trustwort hy, pos itive, etc. (c£. §352,_4). 2. Chaque = each, every, is distributive and singular only: Chaque homme (femme). Each or every man (woman). AlT^ bistiixeMiah. chaque = every, each, which individualize s, from tou t = eijery, aK, which generalizes: Chaque honune a des passions. Every (each) man has passions. Tout homme a une passion do- Every man has (all men have) a minante. ruling passion. Chaque annge; tous les ans. Each year; every year. 3. ^i fferehts, Divers = various, several, sundry, divers, qrf! indpfinite. adjectiv es .only. whjeiL. .plural- .and. standing- before nouns: Difierentes choses m'ont retenu. Various things detained me. On a essaye divers moyens. Several methods have been tried. Note. — With the sense of different, diverse, they are used as ordinary adjectives. 4. Maint, whether sing ular or__plural, = many a; it is often repeated: Maint(s) danger(s). Many a danger. Mainte(s) fois. Many a time. En mainte et mainte occasion. On many an occasion. 5. Quelque = some; when used of quantity or number, quelque = some, but not much or many, a little, a few, and is of more limited force than the partitive some (§ 322) : Quelques amis sent pires que des Some friends are worse than ene- ennemis. mies. J'ai eu quelque difiSculte. I have had some (a little) diflficulty. II a quelques amis ici. He has some (a few) friends here. Voici les quelques francs qui nous Here are the few francs we have restent. left. a. Quelque has adverbial force, and is invariable, before numerals (not nouns of number) = about, some: 374 THE PRONOUN § 405 4.quelque dyc^milles^d^ci. About (some) te n miles from here , But: Quelques centaines de pas. A few hundred paces. A cent et quelques pas. At a httle more than 100 paces. I b. Similarly b eforejadj actives or adverbs = however (cf. § 271, 4, b): Quelque riches qu'ils soient. However rich they may be. Quelque bien que vous parliez. However well you may speak. Note. — Howeeer + adjective ia also expressed by tout . . . que (usually with the indicative), si... (que) (with the subjunctive), pour ... que (with the subjunctive), e.g., Toutes bonnes gu'elles sont, However good they are; Si bonnes gu'elles soient, However good they are; Si bonnes vos raisons soient-elles, However good your reasons are; Pour bonnes qu'eUes soient. However good they are. t-tsT For the use of guelque(s) . . . ^gug_= whatever . see§ 407. 405.' Use of Pronominal Forms. 1. Autrui = others, other people, our neighbor (in general), is r arely us ed except after a _gregosition: D ne faut pas convoiter les biens We must not covet the goods of d'autrui. others. La rigueur envers autrui. Severity towards others. Note. — Others is more usually les autres, d'autres (§406, 2, 6) ; regu- larly so, as subject or direct object. 2. Chacun = each, each one, every one is the pronoun corresponding to the adjective chaque (§ 404, 2) : Chacun d'eux a refuse. Each (every) one of them refused. Donnez a chacun(e) sa part. Give to each his (her) share. Des poires k detix sous chacime Pears at two cents each, (chaque). a. The possessive form to chacun is regularly son : Mettez-les chacun(e) a sa place. Put them each in his (her, its) place. 6. Chacun, inapposition to nous, vous, take^ as itsjjossessive, notre, votre : Paflez chacun(e) a votre tour. Speak each in your turn. c. Qbacun, inappositipn.tQ ils, elles, takes the possessive leur before the direct object; otherwise son or leur: S 405 THE INDEFINITE PRONOUN 375 Elles recitent chacnne leur verset They each recite their verse (each (chacune i son or leur tour). in turn). d^_T he reflexiv e to chacun = every one is se (soi) : Chacun pour soi. EvOTjr_ongJflEjjiaiself . 3. On = one, some one, we, you, they, people, etc., is used as subject of a verb in the third singular, without specif 5dng any person in particular: On dit que la reine est malade. They (people) say the queen is ill. A-t-on allume men feu? Has a ny one lighted my fire? On ne peut pas meler I'hufle avec One (we, you) cannot mix oil with I'eau. Water. o- The on construction often corresponds to an English passive, especially when the agent is not specified: On a attrape le larron. The thief has been caught. On croit que la guerre est finie. It is thought the war is over. On vous demande. You are wanted. ■^ On may not be replaced by a personal pronou n subject: On est triste quaa d on est sans A man is sad when he is without argent . money. A'gr^ Since on is s\ibji;ct onl y, tj^p, cpp-f^jwidiiTgdjrpnf Jn(fc'ect ob jects, when req uired, are borrowed from vous: Lorsqu'on presse trop un poisson When you squeeze a fish too much 11 vous echappe. it escapes you. ^. The reflexive to on is se (soi), and the corresponding possessive is son, whate ver be the Enghsh equivalent : ~" On se demande. People ask themselves (wonder). On perdrait son temps* You would lose your time. e. Although on is invariable, a feminine or plural noim or adjective may relate to it, when the sense is clearly feminine or plural: On est plus jolie a present. She is prettier now. On est si proches voisins. We are such near neighbors. /. On may replace a personal pronoun, often with depreciatory force: On y pensera. I (we) shall see about it. On se croit bien fin. You (he, etc.) think yourself very cunning. 376 THE PBONOUN §405 4. Personne and rien along with ne + a verb, or when alone, a verb being understood, = nobody, no one, not any- body, etc., and nothing, not anything, respectively: Personne n'est venu. Nobody (no one) has come. Je n'ai parle k personne. I have spoken to nobody (not spoken to anybody). Ne dites rien. Say nothing (do not say anything). Personne ici ! — Personne. No one here ! — NgjjJOe. Qu'a-t-il dit ? — Ken. What did he say? — N othing^ X'a. If the context contains or impUes negation, perso nne, rien, a s- sume affirmaliKe_foi.QS- ( = .quelqu'un, quelque jchose) : He said nothing to any one. Nobody has ever said anything . I forbi d you to sa y any thine . I fear to speak to anybody. Impossible to do anything ! He ceased giving anything. Where shall I find anything Uke itV Without speaking to anybody. K^. The abo ve rule,.doe8 _not ji.2EJy_to pleon astic n e, nor to double negaticgs: II n'a rien dit k personne. Perspnnen^sunais^aJit. Te vous defends _de rien direj . Je Grains de parler k personne. Impossible de rien faire ! n cessa de rien donner. Oft trouverai-je rien de pareil? Sans parler k personne. Je Grains qu'il ne fasse mal k quelqu'un. Ne revenez pas sans voir quel- qu'un. I fear he will hurt somebody. Do not come back without seeing somebody. Note. — The p ronoun personne ia maaculine (sometimes sylleptically feminine like on, 3, e, above) ; the noun personj^^e ia alwavs f eminine (cf . ^303, 1, c). 5. Quelqu'un (e) = somebody, some one, any one, etc., with its plural quelques-un(e)s = some, some people, any, a few, etc., is the pronoun corresponding to the adjective quelque (§ 404, 5) : II y a quelqu'un Ik. Y a-t-il quelqu'un IS.? A-t-il quelques-unes des fleurs? D en reste quelques-unes. Quelqu'une des dames viendra. Quelques-uns le Groient. There is somebody there. Is there any one there? Has he some (any) of the flowers? A few of them remain. Some one of the ladies will come Some (people) believe it. §406 THE INDEFINITE PRONOUN 377 \6. Quelque chose = something, anything, jmdjsrnai('n- line, though fo rmed from the feminine noun chose : (Juelque chose est promis. Something is promised. A-t-il dit quelque chose? Did he say anything? A-t-U quelque chose de bon? Has he anything good? 406. Adjectival or Pronominal Forms. 1. Aucim, nul, pas im, along with ne + a verb, or when alone, a verb being understood, = no, not any, not one, as adjective, and none_ nobody, no one, not one, as pronoun: Aucun No writer says so. No one believes it. I saw none of them. Not one of his friends remains. Has he any hope? — None. Nul Y ecrivain ne le dit. Pas un Aucun ne le croit. Je n'en ai vu aucun (e). Pas un de ses amis ne reste. A-t-il de I'espoir? — Aucun. \ ji. Aucun, but not nxil or_^g unj_becomes aflSrmative (= quelque or quelqu'un) when the context is negati ve (cf.J_405, 4, a): Sans aucune caus e. Without any cause. Rien pour aucu n de nous. Nothing for any of us. Gardez-vous de faire aucime faute. Take care not to make any mistake. b. The plural adjective aucun(e)s may be used, especially before nouns with no singular, or before such as are preferably plural; (d')au- cuns = quelques-uns is sometimes found: D ne me rend aucuns soins. He gives me no care. (D')aucuns le croiraient. Some would beheve it. 2 Autre = other, is usually preceded in the singular by un or 1': Une autre fois ; d'autres Uvres, En avez-vous un(e) autre? Un autre dit le contraire. Les autres m'aideront. Entre autres choses. Another time; other books. Have you another? Another says the contrary. The others will help me. Among other things. another (a different) frojga^ encore un . 1 Donnez-moi encore une plume. J Give me another pen. 378 THE PRONOUN §4Ub 6. Others, other people, = les autres or d'autres, sometimes autnii (cf. §405, 1): II se mefie toujours des autres. He always suspects others. D'autres pensent autrement. Others think otherwise. Bien d'autres. Many others. 068.; The d' of d'autres is a partitive sign (of. § 325, 1, 5). c. Autres is often added familiarly to nous, vous: Nous autres peintres. We painters. Vous autres Franjais parlez trSs You Frenchmen speak very fast. vite. i-^Observe theJoUasiBg. e?5)r£8siQns.mtLautte: Autre part; de part et d'autre, C^estun"(tout) autte^hafflffie. Parler de choses et d'autres. L'autre jour . 4utre__est promettre, autre doaaer. Tout ^Titre que lu i. De temps k autre. k d'autres (familiar). Elsewhere; reciprocally. He is aTvery different man . To speak of this and that. The othCT_^a y. est It is on e_thiiig to promis e, and another to give. Any o ne but Mm. From time to time. Tell that to the marines (familiar). e. For I'un l'autre, les uns les autres, see § 406, 7, (2). 3. Meme varies in meaning and form according to its position and function: '^ (1) Preceding its noun or as a pronoun, me me = sam e, and nearly always has the article: La (les) meme(s) chose(s). Les miens sont les memes. Donnez-moi des mSmes. Une meme affaire. Des plantes de la m€me espece. The same thing (s). Mine are the same. Give me some of the same. One and the same business. Plants of the same species. X (2) Following the noun or pronoun qualified, meme s self,venii_even, and agrees., but has no article : Dieu est la bonte mSme. God is goodness itself. Moi-meme; elles-mSmes. I myself; they themselves. Celfi meme; celui-li meme. That itself; that man himself. Les enfants mimes. The very (even the) children. §406 THE INDEFINITE PRONOUN 379 o. Mgme ia also used as an adverb (invariable) : D nous a meme insultSs. He even insulted us. Quand meme il le dirait. Even if he should say so. 6. Meme forms a number of highly idiomatic locutions: Cela revient au mSme. That ampunte to the same thing. £tes-vou s^ajngaLe,de fairecela? Are you in a position to do tlit? II en est de meme de . . . It is the same with . . . 4. P lusieuTS = severa l: it is sometimes used iq the sense of beaucoup = many: Plusieuis homines (femmes). Apporte plusieuTS des plumes. J'en ai plusleurs. Plusieurs I'ont cru. Several men (women). Bring several of the pens. I have several of them. Many (people) beUeved it. yK. 5. Tel, as adjective, = such, like; un tel = such a; tel, as pronoun, = many a one, he, some, etc. : Do not believe such a story. Such are my misfortunes. There are no such aaimals. On such and such conditions. Like (as) a tigress. Some (many a one, he) who laugh (s) on Friday will weep on Sunday. AtfTTExamples of more idiomatic u ses are: Ne crois pas une telle histoire. Tels sent mes maUieurs. II n'y a pas de tels animauz. A telles et telles conditions. Telle qti'^^Tip fiprr<»gsff. Tel qui rit vendredi dimanche pleurera (proverb). Tel pere, tel flls. Tel rit, tel pleure. <-- Monsieur un tel (Mme tme tell e). DelamusiqueteUejuelle. Votre argent tel quel. Like father, like son . One laughs, an other weegs. Mr. So-and-so (Mrs. So-and-so). Mi^£such as It IS. Your money intact. ^. ;< NoTE. — Such, as adverb, is si or tellement (not tel): Une si belle etoile; Un homi[ i^^ tellemi^ifl "^!^ 6. Tout (singular) = all, every, any, whole, etc.; tous (plural) = all: Toute ma vie; tous les hommes. Tout homme; toute creature. Tous (toutes) sont venu(e)s. All my (my whole) hfe; all (the) men. Every (any) man; every creature. All have come. 380 THE PRONOUN § 406 C'est tout; de tous c6tes. That is all; on all sides. Tout m'effraie. Everything frightens me. X^a. Tout is often adverb = quite, wh olly, very, ver y much, etc., a nd agrees lik e an adjec tive, when immediately preceding a feminine adjec- tivRwini initial consonant or h aspirate, but is elsewliere invariable : I Ellas etaient toutes piles et tout They were quite pale and very agitees. much excited. But: lis etaient tout pales et tout agites, etc. Note. — So also, in the compound tout-puissant, e.g., EUe est toute- puissante. 6. Observe the following idiomatic expressions: Toutlemonde (cf . le monde entier). Everybody (cf. the whole world). Tous les mois; pas du tout. Every month; not at all. Tous les deux iours . Everx _other (alternate) day . Tou s (les*) deux o r Iffs fjpii'^- Both. Tout a I'heure. Presently (or a httle while ago) Tout beau ; tout doux. Gently (slowly) ; softly. (Pour) tout de bon. Seriously. ** Tous deux (trois, etc.) — without les — usually denotes ' simultane- ousness ' ( = both together, etc.) ; les is obligatory above ten, and usual from five to ten. c. For the distinction between tout and chaque see § 404, 2, a; for tout . . . que = however, see § 404, 5, 6, note. 7. Un is used either alone or as correlative to autre: (1) Un, as adjective, = a, an (cf. § 320), one, a certain; vm, as pronoun, = one: La maison est d'un c5te. The house is on one side. Un monsieur A. I'a dit. A (certain) Mr. A. said so. Une des dames I'a dit. One of the ladies said so. Voici un crayon. — J'en ai im. Here is a pencil. — I have one. Les uns sont de cet avis, les au- Some are of this opinion, (the) tres n'en sont pas. others are not. a. Un as a pronoun is often preceded by 1', especially with a de clause: L'un des consuls est arrive. One of the consuls has come. (2) L'un I'autre, so also the feminine and plural, are combined into various correlative phrases, as follows: 407 THE INDEFINITE PRONOUN 381 run I'autre = each other, one another; pi. ditto I'un et I'autre = both; pi., both, all I'un ou I'autre = either; pi., ditto ni I'un ni i'autre (. . . ne) = neither; pi., neither, none Elles s g__flattentrune I'autre. Ds parlent les u ns des autres. Dssej(ailent.l!]Bn„|J!3jjtre. L'un e et I'a utre occasion. Les uns et les autres parlent. Dites ceci aux uns et axtx autres. Te prends l'un(e) ou I'autre . Parle a l'une ou I I'autre. Iii_les un(e)s nicies autres ne sent pour vous. Ni pour l'un(e) n i potu: I'autre. They flatter each other. They speak of one another Thej_speak to one another. Both occasion s. All of them speak. Say this to all. I_take_eijher. Speak to either. Neither (none of them) is for you. For neither.. 407. Indefinite Relatives 1. Adjectival: Quelconque, any (whatever, at all) Quel que (+ subjunctive of etre), whatever Quelque . . . que (+ subjimc- tive), whatever 2. Pronominal : Quiconque, whoever Qui que . . . ( + etre), whoever Quoi que ( + whatever subjunctive of subjunctive), a. Quelconq ue takes -s for the plural, and always follows its no un; quiconque is m varia ble; the other forms are made up from quel, quel- que, qui, quoi, + que: Un (deux) point (s) quelconque (s). /T Jne raison quelconque. >^-& pre3, afterwards assez, enough, rather aujourd'hui, to-day t^up aravant, before aussi, also, too, as t^ aussitbt, directly autant, as much autrefois, formerly beaucoup, mmh bien, well, very, much bieiit6t, soon cependant, however certes, indeed combieii(?) how much{t) comme, as, like comment(?) how{f) davantage, more dedans, inside dehors, outside de]k, already demain, to-morrow derriire, behind d&ormais, henceforth dessous, under dessus, above devant, before dor^navant, henceforth encore, stUl enfin, at last ensemble, together ensuite, then environ, about t ^xpres, on pur-B QSe irfort, very hier, yesterday ici, here jadig, formerly jamais, ever, never Ik, there loin, far {off), a long way longtemps, {while) lors, then maintenant, now mal, badly mgme, even mieux, better moins, less ne . . ., not n^anmoins, less non, no o{l(?) where{f) oui, yes •'pajfoig, sometimes (a) lartout, everywhere pas, not peu, litUe pis, worse plus, more plutot, rather point, not pourquoi(?) why{f) pourtant, however pres, near {by) presque, almost t/0roc he, near {by ) puis, then, there- upon quand(?) when{f) long que ! how{ !) i/quelguefoia, somMimet si, so; yes souvent, often surtout, especially tant, so much • tantot, snnn.^ recently tard, late t6t, soon neverthe- toujours, always, still tout, g^iite, entirely toutefois, however tres, very trop, too {much) vite, quickly volontiers, willingly 409. Adverbs from Adjectives. Most adjectives become adverbs by the addition of -ment to the feminine singular: §409 ADVERBS FROM ADJECTIVES 383 Adj. Adv. pur, purement, purely strict, strictement, strictly actif, activement, actively eec, sfechement, dryly Adj. Adv. doux, doucement, sweetly fou, follement, madly facile, facUement, easily autre, autrement, othervnse ^a. Ad jectives endiag i n a vowd, other than -e, drop the -e qf_the feminine on adding -ment: Adj. Adv. Adj. Adv. poli(e), poliment, p olitely d6cid6(e), dScidfement, decidedly aEsoIuCe), absolument, absolutely etc. etc. Note. — The omitted e is denoted by a circumflex accent in assidu- ment, continiiment, crfiment, (in)dB,TleTieiiQe, speak firmly etc. etc. V clearly i^. An adjective sometimes modifies another adjective: Des dames haut placees. Ladies of high rank. Un veritable grand homme. A truly great man. 3. Besides the above, a few adjectival forms serve also as adverbs: Je I'ai dit expres. I said it purposely. Soudain nous T^mes I'ennemi. Suddenly we saw the enemy. Such forms are: bref , 171 short mfeine, even tout beau, not so fail exprfts, purposely proche, near (by) tout doux, gently fort, very, hard, lovd, etc. soudain, suddenly t vite, quickly juste, exactly, etc. * tout, quite, very, etc. * For the inflection of tout as adverb, see § 406, 6, a. t The adverb vitement = quickly, is familiar. a. For certain adverbs used adjectivally, see § 358, b. ")( 411. Adverbial Locutions. Phrases with adverbial func- tion are numerous: Je viendrai tout 4 I'beure. I shall come presently. Venez de bonne heure. Come early. §412 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS 385 Further examples are: k bon marchfe, che ap h c6t6j yiear, near bu h, droite, to the right & jamais, foreeer k la fois, at once h, I'avenir, in future h, peine, hardly k peu prfes, nearly Ml juste, eTocav au morns, at least autre part, elsewhere d'abord, at first d'ailleurs, besides d^s lors, since i- ^'ordinaire, usuaV/y d'od, whence d'oti? whence ? du moins, at least en avant, forward e p bas, helow, down stairj Kr\ pfFpt., in fpM en haut, above, uv stairs Ik-has, yonder^ tn^ .At'to l^-dessu3. thereuvon nulle part, nowhere plus tot, sooner quelque part, somewhere tant mieux, so much the better tot ou tard, sooner or late r tour ^ tour, in turn tout k coup, suddenly tout de suite, at once tout d'un coup, all at once 412. Comparison of Adverbs. 1. Adverbs are regularly compared like adjectives (cf. § 345) by the use of plus, moins, aussi; que = than, as: Plus, moins facilement que Jean. Aussi facilement que Jean. More, less easily than John. As easily as John. a. Further examples, illustrating § 345, a, b, c, d, as appUed to adverbs: II ne marche pas aussi (si) vita. Vite comme un eclair. H marche plus vite que je ne pen- sais. De plus e n plus jrfte. Plus je le con nais (et) moinsJe_ I'estime. ' He does not walk as (so) fast. As quick as Ughtning. He walks faster than I thought. Faster and faster. rThe > more I know_him,.theJless I esteem him. "ftT More than, less t han , as adverbs of quantity = plus, de, jnoins be ..carefully distinguished from plus " elh'ptiical. sg"t,?Tic de, respectively: they must ( moins) que = more (less ) J'ai plus (moins) de dix francs. En moins d'une demi-heure. But: Un elephant mange plus que six chevaux (ne mangent). I have more (less) than ten francs. In less than half an hour. An elephant eats more than six horses (eat). 2. The following are irregularly compared: bien, well mieux, better beaucoup, much {pis, worse peu, little plus mal, worse mal, badly, ill plus, more moins, less 386 THE ADVEKB § 413 '^ Beaucoup = nvuch (many) or very much, (many), and is never modified by another advg;b]_except pas. 3. The superlative is formed by placing le, which is in- variable, before the comparative of inequality: Le plus souvent (moins souvent). (The) most frequently (least f.). Elle parle le plus (mieux, moins). She speaks (the) most (best, least). 413. Posi tion. 1. An adverb regularly stands Lmmedi- ately after its verb, rarely jbetweenjhe subject and the verb: Charles porta souvent ma canne. Charles often carries my cane. On devrait lire lentement. One should read slowly. Se levant tard, se couchant t6t. Rising late, going to bed early. lis I'ont bien regu. They have received him well. lOfts.; Hence the adverb regularly corne a between the^flnviliarv aju^ ***? p articiple in compound te nse^^^^cept jffhen itisin^a stresse d position: Je I'avais rencontre deja = I had met him already. <^ The adverbs aniourd'hui. hier. demain. autrefois. ^6t,, tard . ^ici. ISjailleurSj^jartout, never come between the aiiYJliHrv and ^■^''- P"-'"' ticiple: 11 est parti hier. He went away yesterday. Je I'ai cherche partout. I looked for it everywhere. b. Long adverbs ia_:flteirt^not^JfflQaiam,only stand- after the ptist, participle: 11 a parle eloquemment. He has spoken eloquently. V c. Most adverbs of quantity, such as peu, beaucoup. trop, etc.. and a few short adverbs hke bien, mal, mieux, etc., as also a dverbs of neg a- tion, regularly grecede the Jn&iitivej, Tu ne devrais pas trop lire. You should not read too much. II ne saurait mieux faire. He cannot do better. D parle de ne pas y aUer. He speaks of not going (there). d. Interrogative adverbs head the phrase, as in Enghsh; other adverbs are not uncommonly placed first for emphasis (cf . § 237, 3) : Quand allez-vous revenir? When are you going to come back? Aujourd'hui je vais me reposer. To-day I am going to rest. Malheureusement tout est perdu. Unfortunately all is lost. 2. Adverbs usually precede the nouns, adjectives, ad- verbs, and phrases modified by them: SI 414r415 NEGATION 387 Assez de livres, et assez chers. Books enough, and dear enough. Bien malapropos. Very uns easonably. a. For combien I conune ! que ! tant ! and plus . . . plus, moins . . , moins, with adjectives or adverbs, ef. § 350, a. 3. Adverbial phrases follow the same rules as adverbs, except that only the shorter ones may usually come between the auxiMary and the verb: Nous etions a peine partis. Hardly had we gone. NEGATION 414. Negation without Verb. Non = no, not, apart from a verb; it is often emphasized by pas, point: L'avez-vous dit? — Non. Did you say it? — No. Vous viendrez? — Non pas (point). You will come? — Certainly not. Non, non, je n'irai pas. No, no, I shall not go. Non content de dire.cela. Not Batisfied with saying that. Riche ou non, il ne I'aura pas. Rich or not, he shall not have it. A-t-il, oui ou non, du talent? Has he talent, yes or no? Des idees non moins vastes. Ideas not less vast. One maison non meublee. A house not furnished. Non seulement . . . mais encore. Not only . . . but al so. o. For the use of que non, see § 420, 1, a. 415. Negation with Verb. 1. Along with a verb, a negation consists regularly of two parts , ne (n', see § 19) together with some other word or words; the priacipal cor- relative expressions of this kind are: 'ne . . . pas, not ne . . ■ aucunemen t 1 not at ne . . . rien, noti ne . . . point, not ne . . . nuUement J all n e . . . nif . . . ni) neith er ne . . . gufere, har dly ne . ■ . au cun | ... nor ne . . . jamais, never ne . . . nul \ no, none ne . . . plus, no more , ne . . . pas un J ne . . . que, only ne . . . personne, nobody Notes. — 1. Point is usually more emphatic than pas, and is less com- mon in ordinary language. 2. Negation is often denoted by pas, without nc in familiar language: Ai-je pas dit cela? (= N'ai-je pas dit cela?) 388 THE ADVERB §416 2. Other forms of less frequent use are: a. Ne . . . quelconque = no . . . wfiatsoever {at all), ne . . . qui que ce soit = nobody whatsoever {at all), ne — quoi que ce soit = nothing whatsoever {at all). Je n'ai dit quoi que ce soit. I said nothing at all. b. Ne . . . brin (Ut. blade), or mie (lit. crumb), or goutte (lit. drop), or mot (lit. word) = ne . . . rien, in certain phrases: n n'y en a brin. There is none of it. Je n'y entends goutte. I understand nothing of it. c. Ne . . . ame vivante, or bomme qui vive, or kme qui vive, etc. = ne . . . personne : II n'y avait ame vivante dans la There was not a Hving soul in the maison. house. d. Ne . . . de + an expression of tim e, e.g., la (ma) vie, de huit jours, etc. Je ne I' oublierai de ma vie. I shall notjorget it while I live. 416. Position. Ne always precedes the verb, and its conjunctive objects, if any; pas, point and other adverbs immediately follow the verb, and its conjunctive pronoims, if any; indefinites have their usual place. Je ne le leur ai pas (point) dit. I did not tell them it. Je n'en ai guere. I have hardly any of it. Ne les a-t-il jamais vus? Did he never see them? Je n'y resterai plus. I shall stay there no longer. II ne le veut nullement. He does not wish it at all. n ne prend aucun soin. He takes no care. Personne ne peut le dire. Nobody can say (it). n n'a pas mal du tout. He has no pain at all. Je ne I'ai dit k qui que ce soit. I have told it to nobody at all. a. Pas, point, usually, and plus, often, precede the simple infinitive, and its conjunctive objects; they may precede or follow avoir, etre, either when alone or in a compound infinitive: II parte de ne pas vous voir. He speaks of not seeing you. fitre ou ne pas etre. To be or not to be. J'etais fache de ne vous avoir pas I was sorry not to have seen you. vu {or de ne pas vous avoir vu, or de ne vous pas avoir vw). §§ 417-418 NEGATION 389 6. Rien as object is treated as an adverb; it may also precede an infinitive like an adverb: IX promet de ne rien dire. He promises to say nothing. c. The que of ne . . . que immediately precedes the word it modi- fies: Je n'en ai vu que trois. I saw only three of them. D n'y a pas ^u'eux qui en aient. It is not they only who have some. yd. To denote _n egiter^_^ nor, ni_is placed j3s£Qr£L.£ach.-X!o6rdinate word, and , when verbs are expressed, ne stands before the auxiliary or other leading verb. When principal verbs are coordinated, ne stands before each of them, while ni also must stand with the last, but may not stand with the first, and is optional with others: Qui le sait? — Ni lui ni moi. Who knows it? — Neither he nor 1. H n'a ni parents ni amis. He has neither relatives nor friends. Je ne I'ai ni vu ni entendu. I neither saw nor heard it. H ne sait ni lire ni ecrire. He can neither read nor write. Je ne veux ni qu'il Use ni qu'il I neither wish him to read nor to ecrive. write. D ne le blame ni ne le loue. He neither blames nor praises it. Je ne pouvais, (ni) ne devais, ni I neither could, nor should, nor ne voulais ceder. would yield. 417. Ellipsis of the Verb. If the verb be omitted, but understood, ne is also omitted, and the correlative itself denotes negation: Est-il venu? — Pas en core ( = D Has he come? — Not yet ( = He n'est pas encore venu). has not yet come). Qj» est la.? — Personne. Who is there? — Nobody. /^ Tlus de larmes; plus de soucis. No more tears; no more^aregi. a. Pas, when so used, may not stand alone: Non (pas); pas encore; pas lui; No; not yet; not he (him); not pas du tout; pas ce soir, etc. at all; not this evening, etc. 418. Ne alone as Negative. Negation with verbs is expressed by ne alone in certain cases, as follows: 1. After que = pourquoi? and usually after que, qui in rhetorical question or exclamation: ^. 390 THE ADVERB §418 Que ne le disiez-vous plus t6t? Why did you not say so sooner? Que ne ferais-je pour lui? What would I not do for him? Qui ne voit cela? Who does not see that? 2. After condition expressed by inversion: Weflt etS la pluie. Had it not been for the rain. a. Sometimes also in conditions regularly expressed with si: Si je ne me trompe (m'abuse). If I am not mistaken. Qui, si ce n'est vous? Who, if not you? J/' 3. In dependent sentences after^ negation, either fully expressed or implied: Je n'ai pas (j'ai peu) d'amis qui ne soient les vdtres. II n'y a rien qu'il ne sache. Non que je ne le craigne. 'Impossible qu'il ne vienne ! Ai-je un ami qui ne soit fidele? — Non. I have no (I have few) friends who are not yours. There is nothing he does not know. Not that I do not fear him. Impossible that he will not come I Have I one friend who is not faith- ful? — No. a. More obscure cases of implied negation are prendre garde que = take care that not, etc., and such expressions as il tient = itds^endson^ used interrogatively: Prenez garde qu'il ne tombe. Gardez qu'il ne sorte. A quoi tient-il qu'on ne fasse cela? Take care he does not fall. Take care he does not go out. What is the cause of that not be- ing done? 4. Sometim es with savoir, bouger, and with pouvoir, oser, cesser + an infinitive, expressed or implied: I do not know. Do not stir from there. I cannot answer. He would not dare to say so. She does not cease weeping. Je ne sals (pas). Ne bougez (pas) de la. Je ne puis (pas) repondre. II n'oserait (pas) le dire. EUe ne cesse (pas) de pleurer. a. Always ne a lone in je ne saurais and je ne sais quoi: Je ne saurais vous le dire. I cannot tell you. Ne sauriez-vous m'aider? Can you not help me? .I Tn j ft npi s a is qwi dajenjble. Something indefinably terriUe, 5. In a few set expressions, such as: § 419 NEGATION 391 N'importe ; n'avoir garde. It does not matter; not to care. Jte vous en deplais e. Bx.y_ourJeave. g'aYoir que faire de. ToJaie. no use (whatever) isr. n n'est pire eau que I'eau qui Still waters run deep. dort (proverb). 419. HeonastLc-ne. In a que clause ne is often pleo- nastic, as compared with English; thus, ne stands: > 1. After empecher = prevent, eviter = avoid, k moins que = unless, or que so used: Empechez qu'il ne sorte. Prevent him from going out. J'evite qu'on ne me voie. I avoid being seen. A moins que je ne sois retenu. Unless I be detained. a. This ne is often omitted after empecher and eviter, after em- pecher mostly when negative or interrogative. 6. Ne may also stand after avant que : Avant qu'il (ne) parte. Before he goes away. ;■% After expressions of fearing, such as craindre, redouter, etc., avoir peur, etc., when not negative, or when negation / is not implied by interrogation expecting negative answer, or by condition: Je Grains qu'il ne vienne. I fear he will come. Craignez-vous qu'il ne vienne? Do you fear he will come? But: Je ne crains pas qu'il vienne. Sans craindre qu'il vienne. Crai- gnez-vous qu'il vienne? — Non. Si je craignais qu'il vlnt. a. What it is, or is not, feared will not happen, has the fuU negation De . . . pas in the que clause : Je crains qu'il ne vienne pas. I fear he will not come. Je ne crains pas qu'il ne vienne pas. I do not fear he will not come. 5. Negation and interrogation or condition neutraUze each other, and ne stands: Ne craignez-vous pas qu'il ne Do you not fear he will come? vienne? Si je necraignais (pas) qu'il ncvint. If I did not fear he would come. Quand meme je ne craindrais Even though I did not fear he pas qu'il ne vint. would come. %^ With a finite verb in the second member of a. compari- 392 THE ADVERB § 419 son of inequality, when the first member is not negative or does not imply negation as above: D est plus riche qu'il ne I'etait. He is richer than he was. Est-il plus riche qu'il ne I'etait? Is he richer than he was? D gagne moins qu'il n'esperait. He earns less than he hoped. But: II n'est pas plus riche qu'il I'etait; est-il plus liche qu'il I'etait? — Non. a. A negative interrogation impKes aflBrmation, and ne stands: N'est-il pas plus riche qu'il ne Is he not richer than he was? I'etait? -^ivToTE. — Autre, autrement, plutSt, plus t6t, similarly take ne : II est tout ^utre que je ne pensais. * " \ 4. Usually after expressions of doubt, denial, such as douter, nier, disconvenir, etc., often desesperer, when negative, or when negation is implied as above: Je ne doute pas qu'il ne vienne. I do not doubt that he will come. Doutez-vous qu'il ne vienne? — Do you doubt whether he will Non. come ? — No. But: Je doute qu'il vienne; doutez-vous qu'il vienne? ( — question foi information). After il s'en faut negatively, interrogatively, or with peu, guere, etc.: II ne s'en faUut pas (de) beaucoup He came very near being kiUed. qu'il ne ffit tue. II s'en faut de peu que ce vase ne This vessel is nearly full. soit plein. Peu s'en est faUu que je ne vinsse. I came very near coming. 6. With compound tenses after il y a, voila, depuis: II y a (voila) trois jours que je ne It is three days since I saw him (1 I'ai vu. have not seen him for, etc.). II avait grandi depuis que je ne He had grown since I saw him. I'avais vu. Depuis que je ne vous ai vu. Since I saw you. a. In a simple tense (§§ 257, 2; 258, 4) negatively, ne . . . pas, etc. must be used: Voiia un an qu'il ne buvait plus. He had drunk none for a year. §420 USE OF CEHTAIN ADVEEBS 393 USE OF CERTAIN ADVERBS 420. Distinctions. The following are especially liable to be confounded in use: 1. Oui, Si. yeg in_a ffirmation or jgsent is oui; yes ia usually si in contradiction, in correction, in dissent: L'avez-voiis dit? — Oui, monsieur. Did you say it? — Yes, sir. Venez. — Oui, oui, j'y vais. U ne s'en va pas. — ■ Si, monsieur, il s'en va. II ne s'en va pas? — MSJi-S* Je n'irai pas. — Si, si, venez. Come. — Yes, yes, I shall go. He is not going. — Yes, (sir), he is (going). He is not going? — Yes^ certainlj. I shall not go. — Yes, yes, come. Note. — The use of si, as also of the intensive si fait, etc., though very common, is classed as familiar by the AcadSmie; it is often avoided by pardon, etc., or other expressions: II ne va pas. — Pardon, monsieur (U va). a. Oui, si, and noa are often preceded by que, really with ellipsis of a whole que clause, and are then variously translated by yes, so, no, not, etc., or by a clause: Je dis que oui (non). Je crois que oui (non) . Vous ne I'avez pas? — Oh ! que si. Le fera-t-il? — Je crois que oui. Je dis que non. Peut-gtre que non. I say yes (no). I think so (n ot). You haven't it? — Oh yes ! Will he do it? — I think he will. I say it is not so. Perhaps not. 2. Autant, Tant. As much (many) = autant; so much (many) tant: Je gagne autant que vous. II but tant qu'il en mourut. J'ai tant d'amis; j'en ai autant que vous. I earn as much as you. He drank so much that he died from it. I have so many friends; I have as many as you. 3. Plus, Davantage. Plus is used in all senses of more, most (see below); davantage (strengthened sometimes by bien = much, encore = still) = more, is regularly used only absolutely, and usually stands at the end of its clause: N'en parte pas davantage. ) N'en parte plus. ) Say no more about it. 394 THE NXJMERAL § 421 Ne restez pas davantage. ) t~. ^ ■ i Nerestez^s."-- \ Do not remain ^ ny longer. Cela me plait encore davantage That pleases me still more. (plus). Je suis riche; il I'est bien davan- I am rich; he is much more bo. tage (plus). But only: J'en ai plus que lui; il est plus habile; plus de dix francs; c'est ce qui le flatte le plus, etc. y^ 4. Ne que, Seulement. Sig ulement mu st be used, (1) when no verbis pre§ent,..(2) jThenon/j/^ refers Jo the subjepf;. (3) or to the verb , (4) or to a que clause, and (5) it may be used to strengthen a ne . . . que; otherwise only = ne . . . que or seulement: Seulement les braves. Only the brave. Seulementjnonjrere le sait. Only my brother knows it. £coutez seulement. Only Msten. II dit seulement qu'il viendrait. He only said he should come. II n'a (seulement) qu'a venir. He has only to come. But: Nous ne serous que trois {or trois seulement); je ne veux que voir son pere (or je veux seulement voir son pere), etc. ]A. Only, referring to the subject, may be turned also by il n'y a que, il n'y a pas que : n n'y a que les morts qui ne re- The dead only do not come back. viennent pas. U n'y a pas qu'elles qui le sachent. It is not only they who know. THE NUMERAL 421. Cardinal Numerals 1 un, une [de, yn] 2 deux [d0] 3 trois [trwa] 4 quatre [katr] 5 cinq [s&k] 6 six [sis] 7 sept [set] 8 huit Cqit] 9 neuf [noef] 10 dix [dis] 11 onze [3:z] 12 douze [du!z] 13 treize [treizj 14 quatorze [katorz] §421 15 quinze 16 seize 17 dix-sept 18 dix-huit 19 dix-neuf 20 vingt 21 vingt et un 22 vingt-deux 30 trente 31 trente et un 40 quarante SO oinquante 60 soixante CAHDINAL NUMERALS EkEiz] CSEIZ] [disset] Cdizqit] [diznoefj Cvfl ' [^veteoe] [vEtd0] [trait] [traiteoe^ [kara:t] [sekaitj rswasa:t1 70 71 80 81 90 91 100 101 200 201 1000 1001 2000 soixante-dLx soixante et onze quatre-vingia, quatre-vingt-un quatre-vingt-dix quatre-vingt-onze cent cent un deux cents deux cent un mille mille un deux mille 395 [swasaitdis] Cswasa:te5!z] Ckatrave] CkafaravEffi] Diatravgdis] CkatravsSiz] I saa I [d0sa] I 3d0saoe] CmQ] [miloe] [d0mil] Nouns op Number: 1,000,000 = un miUion [& milJD]; 2,000,000 = deux miUions [d0 milj3]; 1,000,000,000 = un milliard [ce miljair]. Observe: 1. The hyphen unites together compound numerals under 100, except where et occurs. 2. Et stands regularly in 21, 31, 41, 51, 61, 71, omitted in 81, and elsewhere. N otes on Peonui^ctation : 1. Thefinaljconsonant of 5, 6, 7, 8, .9, lOi ^ '^) l^j 19, is„alent before, initial consonant or h aspirate of a word aiii l tip lied--by the m, not elsewhere; Cinq -li3n:-es_Cgg.Ji;jaQ,,^tuitJe_eisa ""*! rifl FF'k '"'^n 2. No elision o r liaison pccu£s^ bef ore_huit, onze : Le huit Da ''V^l', les huit livres CJe.t[,i.li!vr]; le onze [JaJiz]; les onze francs [le Siz fra]. 3. The t is so unded in vingt, in 21. 23, 24. 25. 26, 27, 28, 29, is sounded with the d in 22 . is_aileilLJrailL 81 to 9.9, is silent in cent un, deu x cent tm,..eta_j a. Un (f. una) is the only cardinal which varies for gender: Une (deux, trois, etc.) plume(s). One (two, three, etc.) pen(s). Vingt et une vaches. Twenty-on e cows. 6. Cardin als are invariable for number, except that -sis. added to quatre-vin gt and the multiples. oi, cent, .but only when immediately preced ing ji nojjii, or aiTlidjective +3 noun, or when they themselves serve a s noungat numjjer: Quatre-vingts francs. Trois cents (bonnes) plumes. Deux cents millions de francs. Trois cents hommes. Les cinq cents. Eighty francs. Three hundred (good) pens. Two hundred million francs. Three hundred men. The five hundreds. 396 THE NUMERAL § 422 But: Trois cent un francs; les cent h omines engages; qaatie-vingt- une plumes; deux cent mille; trois mille miUes (miles), etc. N.B. — They are not nouns of number in dates (c. below) or when use d %a_ordinala (Y527J^ I-'anTquitre cerff; page deux cent; page quatre-i;ins'<. c. The form mil (not^mille) is used in dates of jthe, Chdat^ii^ era from ITOl to^l999r En mil huit cent quatre-Tingt- In eighteen hundred and ninety- onze. one. (En) I'an mil six. (In) the year 1006. But: L'an mille (sometimes mil) ; I'andeux mille trois cent ; Van mille cent du monde , etc. d. From 1100 onwa rd dates are often expressed by hundreds, aa so frequently in English: Onze cent(s) ; treize cent(s). Eleven hundred; thirteen hundred. Quinze cent cinquante. Fifteen hundred and fifty. e. A (or one) hundred = cent; a (or one) thousand = mille: Mille soldats. A (one) thousand soldiers. Note. — Septante = 70, octante = 80, nonante = 90, six-Tingt(s) = 120, and qainze-vingt(s) = 300, are now obsolete in the literary language, although sometimes heard in certain French-speaking regions. 422. Ordinal Numerals. The ordinal numerals denote order or place in a series relatively to the first; they are formed, from 'third' up, by adding -ieme to the last conso- nant of the corresponding cardinal, cinq adding u, and f of neuf becoming v before -ieme: Ist premier [pramje] 7th septiSme [setJEm] 2nj/ second [sggj] 8th huitifeme [qitjem] \ deuxifeme [dgzJHn] 9th neuvifeme [noevjem] 3rd troisieme [jtrwazjem] 10th dixiSme Cdiziem] 4th quatrieme [katrimi] 11th onzifeme CSzjsm] 5th cinqui&me [sekJEm] 21st vingt et unigmenyEteynJEm] 6th sixiSme [sizJEm] 22nd vingFdeuxiSme [vEtd0zJEm] Notes. — 1. Besides the ordinary forms, tiers (f. tierce) = third, quart(e) = fourth, are used in a few expressions and in fractions: Le tiers ^etat, The commoners; En maison tierce, In the house of a third partyT^Une nevre guarte, A quartan ague. 2. Quint = fifth is used only in Charle s-Qmnf, Charles V (the Em- peror); ^xte-Qyiat, Sixtus V (the Pope). §§ 423-424 COLLECTIVES — FRACTIONS 397 a. Ordinals are like ordinary adjectives in inflection and agreement, and regularly precede the noun: La (les) preniiere(s) niaison(s). The first hQuse(a). Nous soniines arrives les premiers. We arrived first. 6. Deuxieme i nstead gf_ second is morejisually employed in a series ofmore than two, and always in compounds: Le second volume. The second volume (of two). Le deuxieme volume. The second volume (of three, etc.). La cent deuxieme fois. The hundred and second time. A;^423. Collectives. The foUowing nouns are used with collective force: un(e) couple, o couple (two) une quarantaine, about forty, une paire, o pair quarantine une huitaine, about eight une cinquantaine, about fifty une dixaine, about ten une soixantaine, about sixty une douzaine, o dozen une centaine, about a hundred une guinz aine. about fifteen, a, un cent, a hundred is/rtniah t mn millier. {about) a thousand une vingtaine, aboui twenh/jj^scprs. un millio n, a miM sffi une trentaine, about thirty i. un milliard, a billion, etc. a. They take -s^in the pli^al, and havejthe construction of ordinary nouns: n y a une centaine d'eleves. There are about 100 pupils. n y en a deux cents. There are two hundred of them. Des milliers de gens. Thousands of people. Deux millions de francs. Two million(s of) francs. 424. Fractions. The numerator is regularlj^;^ denoted by a cardinal and the denominator by an ordinal; Agi!/ = moitie, ^aOTnounj and demi as ah adjective or a noun: Jjuulemi \ un quart A trois seiziSmes une moiti6 | trois quarts tw sept centiSmes \ un cinquifeme tVt dix cent unifimes 1^ un septifeme t^^ onze millifimes ^ un onziSme etc. a. Demi, before its noun, is invariable and joined by a hyphen, but agrees elsewhere; as a noun, demi is hardly used, except in arithmetical calculations; see also §429: 398 THE NUMERAL §§425-426 Une deini-heure; une beuie et Half an hour; an hour and a demie. half or half past one. Trois quarts d'heure. Three quarters of an hour. Quatre demis = deux. Four halves = two. La moitie de la somme. Half the sum. I b. The definite article is required before fractions followed b y de + a noun when the_ noun is determined by the definite a rticle, a possessiye, or a , demgnstrative, and- similarly for pcoaajninaLauhaU- butes for such constructions: La moitie du temps. Half the time. ^esti5isj[uarts^ces^ses)JWens. Three-fourths of those (his) goods. J'en piends les cinq sixiemes. I take five-sixths of them. \425. Multiplicatives. 1. The following are used as adjec- tives, or absolutely as nouns: double;jioM6ie septuple, sevenfold triple,_ secondly deuxiemement J a. Substitutes for them, of very frequent use, are: d'abord.s oLfiEfii,- puis = then, after that, ensuite = then,next^i&n premier lieu = in t he,fir?!_ gface,.en second,lieu^.ei.e.-.s-in.<^6 sgccMJ)i.*iiacfi,,etc..; or theLatin-adKerh forms primo, secundpitertiojetc^ abbreviated to l°j..2^3^v.aie used. I 427-428 REMARKS ON USE OF NUMERALS 399 REMARKS ON THE USE OF NUMERALS 427. Cardinals and Ordinals. 1. Premier = first is the only ordinal used to denote the day of the month or the numerical title of a ruler; otherwise, cardinals are employed: Le premier (deux, dis) mai. The first (second, tenth) of May. Le onze de ce mois. The eleventh of this month. Napoleon (Gregoire) premier. Napoleon (Gregory) the First. Henri (Catherine) deux. Henry (Catherine) the Second 2. Observe the following date idioms: Quel jour du mois est-ce aujour- d'hui? Quel jour du mois sommes-nous aujourd'hui? Quel quantieme du mois est-ce aujourd'hui? C'est aujourd'hui le quinz e. MTe sera demain le seize. What day of the month is this? Le six Janvie r, li s sont arrives lun di. ^- D'aujourd'h ui enj^sit. D y a quin ze jffluts. To-day is the fif te enljtt. To-morrow will be the sixteenth. On the sixth of Januaiy. They_came,iaa-Moaday- A week from to-day Jjfuijjjfi). A, fortnight ago. Xs. Other mmaerical titles, book, chapter, sceD^, gage, etc., are^xpressed as in English, ordinals being u^gTefpre nouns, and either cardinals or ordinals after noims: Tome troisieme (trois). La dixieme scene du second acte. Volume third (three). The tenth scene of the second act. (a. The first of two ordinals joined by et or ou is not uncommonly ^ia quatre ou cinquieme^ page. The f ourth or fifth page . -. b. Cardinals must precede ordinals in Fren^: Les deux prem jl fes sc enes. The first two an gnea. 428. Dimension. The various methods of indicating dimension may be seen from the following; 400 THE NUMERAL I 428 (1) Xf ne table longue de deux metres . (2) Une table de~2 m. de longueurT (3) Unejtable de 2 m. de long. (4) Une table d'une longueur de 2 m. (5) La table est longu e^dej m. (6) La table a 2 m. de longueur. (7) La table a 2 m. de long. (8) La table a une longueur de 2 m. A table two meters long. The table is two meters long. 06s.; 1. Dimension after an adjective is denoted by de, cf. (1), (5). 2. Substitutes for the adjectival construction of (1) are seen in (2), (3), (4). 3. The verb io be is etre, as in (5), or avoir, as in (6), (7), (8). 4. Haut, large, long (but not epais, profond) may be used as n oune jnatoJoESiuJteur, Jargeur, longueur, cf. (3), (7). ^. Biij of r elatived imenMon =_sur; to. after a,co mParative = de: Cette table a deux metees de longueur sur un de largeur. Plus grand de cinq centimetres. This table is two meters long by one wide. Taller by 5 cm. (= 2 inches). V429. Time of Day. The method of indicating the time 01 day may be seen from the followiag: Quelle heure est-il? D est une (deux) heure([s). D est trois heures et.demie/.''"'«t, Trois heur eg^ (gt) un guart. Quatre hexu-es moins un (le) quart. "trois heures trois quarts. Trois heures dix (minutes). Six heures moins cinq (minutes). Cinc[_hguiie,s cinquante-cinq. XI est midi et denai. n est minu it (et) im quart. A hmt heur es du soif^ k guelle_heure? A trois heures precises. Vers (les) trois heures. What time (o'clock) is it? It is one (two) o'clock. It is half-past ihcee. A quarter past three. 4.(iuarter tojfour. A quarter to four. Ten iniriutes past three. Five minu tes to six. Five fifty-five. It is half -past twelve (noon). It is a quarter past twelve (night). At eight o'clock in the evening. At what o'clock ? At three o'clock precisely. Towards (at about) three o'clock. Obs.: 1. It is (was, etc.) = 11 est (etait, etc.). 2. Heure(s) is never omittedji-e. ■'- .^A' 3, Et is essential only at the half hour. i 430-432 PREPOSITIONAL LOCUTIONS 40] 4. Demi(e) agrees with heuxe (f.) or with midi (m.), minuit (m.). 5. Minutes is often omitted. 6. A quarter to, mvrmtea to is moins before the following hour. 7. Twelve o'clock is never douze heures. 430. Age. Idiomatic expressions denoting age are: Quel age avez-vous? r.aoingt ans. Je suis age de vingt ans. Une^Uette de six ans . Plus age de deux ans. How old are you? I am twenty (years old). I am twenty (years old). A little girl of six. Older by two years. 06s..* 1. The construction with avoir is the more common. 2. An(s) may be omitted in specifying age. 3. By = de, after a comparison. THE PREPOSITION 431. Simple Prepositions. The following list contains the commoner simple prepositions: &, to, at, in, on, etc. aprfis, after, next to avant, before avec, with chez, vrit h, at — 's centre, against dans, in{to) de, of, from, with, etc. depuis, since, from derriere, behind d|3, frprn^ a s early a s devant, before duraftt, during en, in, to entre, between, among envers, towards hormis, except jusque, till, until malgr6, in spite of moyennant, by m eans of nonobstant, ngtwith- slandiag outre, besides, par, by, through parnu, among pendant, during pour, for sans, without sauf, save, except '■•^iQajjKcmdingJiQ sous, under suivantj according to BUT, on, upon versj towards voici, here is {are) voilk, there is {are) 432. Prepositional Locutions. Phrases with preposi- tional function, mostly ending in de or a, are numerous: ^^c6te_.de X'^glise. Jusc[u!4_jELseinaine X tray^jsja f orlt. Sesidg-tba^hurdi.. Through the forest. 402 THE PBEPOSITION §§433-435 Such locutions are: 4 cause de, o n account of au-dessua de, above faute de, for want of i cote de, byWeside of au lieu de, msteaS of jusqu'Jl,, as far as, until 6, force de, hy dint o/ autour de, around par deli, beyond h. regard de, with regard to- JLM moyen de, hy me ans of par-dessous, under i, rexception de, except viwpiks de. near by par-dessus, over ^^ I'i nsu de, un known to au travers de, across, through pr^s de, near h traveiSjjKross, thtough d'aprfes, according to quant b., as for ail delJL de, beyon d en defk de, on this side (of) p^-k-vis de, oppose au-dessous^de,^ wirfer en d^pit de, in spite of etc., etc. 433. Position. Prepositions regularly precede the gov- erned word, as in English: Je parle de Jean (de lui). I speak of John (of him). *^. Conjunctive personal pronouns goyernedbj£_voici,TM ia, precede : Me voici; les voila. Here I am; there they are. En voici quelques-uns. Here are some of them. 6. Durant is sometimes placed after its noun: Durant sa vie {or sa vie durant). During his life. 434. Repetition. The prepositions a, de, en, ar e regu - larly repeated before each governed substantive; t he rep- etition of other prepositions is regula.r in contrast s, but i s elsewhere optional, as inJEngli^: II aime SJire et i earire. He Ukes to read and write. Le pere de Jean et de Marie, The father of John and Mary. En France ou en Italie. In France or Italy. Sur terre et sur mer. By land and sea. Par la persuasion ou par la force. By persuasion or force. But: Pour lui et (pour) son frere, etc. IDIOMATIC DISTINCTIONS 435. Prepositions vary greatly as to idiomatic force in different languages. In the following sections are given some of the various French equivalents of the conomonei English prepositions. §§436-438 IDIOMATIC DISTINCTIONS 403 436. About 1. In the sense of around = autour de: Regardez autour de vous. Look about you. Autour de la place. About the square. 2. In the sense of concerning, of = de, k : De quoi parlez-vous? What are you talking about? A quoi pensez-vous? What are you thinking about? 3. In the sense of with, abou t {the person) = sur: Avez-vous de I'argent sur vous? Have you any money about you? 4. Denoting approxim ation = environ, pres de, &peupreSj,vers: Environ (pres de , a peu prSsJ About two thousand francs; about deux mihe fran cs ;_vers .(sur ten o'clock; about 1830. les) dix h eures ; ver s 1830 . "' 437. After 1. Denoting time, rank, order, position = apres: Apres diner; le premier apres le After dinner; the first after the roi; on met I'adjectif apres le king; the adjective is placed nom; courez apres lui. after the noun; run after him. 2. In the sense of ai ihe end_ol_=_a.\i bout de: Au bout de trois siecleg. ^Afterthree centinies^ 3. Unclassified: De jour e n jour; dessine d'aprSs Day af ter day: drawn after Raph- jUphael ; le le nde main de jon ael; the day afterjiis return; he retour; il_ta ent de pa p^fre. takes after his mother. 438. Among 1. In the sense of in the mi dst of,surrouridscLby = parmi, some- times entre: TJne brebis parmi les loups. A sheep among wolves. II fut trouve entre les morts. He was found among the dead. 2. _Amnng (difit.rihntivfily or„r£ciprocallv) = entre: n lepartegea entre_ses amis. He divided it among his friends.. Ds parlaient entre eux. They spoke among themselves. 3. Unclassified: C'etait ainsi chez les Grecs. It was so among the Greeks. 404 THE PREPOSITION §§ 439-441 439. At 1. Denoting place, time, = I, sometimes en: AJ^ecole; aPouvres; a table; S, At school; at Dover; at table; at cinq_Jhie.ures; a I'ige de; en five o'clock; at the age of;_at tete^de; en (au) meme temps; the headLof; at the same time; & la fin (enfin). at last. 2. In the sense of at the house, etc., of,at—'s_= chez: J'ai ete cbez vous; il est chez Monsieur Ribot. 3. Unclassified: K mes depens; a_tout_^ix; d'abord; sous la main; entrer par la^enetre; eBJiaJit_(i>as) ; aumoins; surmer; en guerre. I was at your house; he is at Mr. Ribot's. M niy expense; at any price ; at first; at ha,nd; c ome (^o) Jn at the window; at the top (bottom)' at least; at sea; at war. 440. Before 1. Denoting place, in the sense of in front of, in the presence of = devant: Mettez cela devant le feu ; lejar- Put that before the fire; the gar- din est devant la maison; il den is before the house; he precba devant le roi. preached before the king. 2. Denoting time, order = avant: Avantmidi; jel'aivu avant vous; Before noon; I saw him before mettez I'article avant le nom. 3. Unclassified: Sous mes yeux; la veille de la ))ataille; comparaJtre par-de- vant le juge. you; put the article before the noun. Before my eyes; the da y before the battle; l;o appear before the judge. 441. By 1. Denoting the agent after the passive = par, de (cf. §240): EUe fut saisie par le voleur; ils She was seized by the robber; they sont aimes de tous. are loved by all. 2. Denoting means, way, etc. = par (usually) : Parlaposte; par chemin de fer; By post; by railway; by this par ce moyen; par un ami. means; by a friend. 5442 IDIOMATIC DISTINCTIONS 405 3. Denoting measure = de; relative dimension = sur: Plus grand de la tete; plus ige Taller by a head; older by ten de dix ans (de beaucoup) ; plus years (by far) ; heavier by a lourd d'une livre; mwndre-de pound; leg_^^alf; ten paetera lajnoLtie; dix nietrM_ sur ax. by six. 4. Unclassified: De jour Cnuit l ; a I'annee ; goutte k goutte; il est midi jl ma montre ; conn aitre de vue : 4s vive voix: u n tailleur de son etatj vendreaupoids; fait k la main. Bx.dax(nigbt); lllJ(hs.year; drop by drop; it is noon by my watch ; to know by^igbi; by word of inonU); a tailor by tra de: to sell by weight; made by hand. 442. For 1 . In the sense of for the sake of, instead of, (in exchange) for = pour : Mourir pour la patrie; je le fais To die for one's coimtry; I do it pour vous; pour cela. donnez-moi ceci for you; give me this for that. 2. Denoting destination: Je pars pour la France ; une let- tre pour vous. leave for France; you. a letter for 3. Denoting a period of time (future) = pour: Je resterai (pour) huit jours; I shall stay (for) a week; I have j'en ai pour dix ans. enough of it for ten years. Note. — For, of time not future, is variously rendered: J'etais huit jours absent or J'etais absent pendant hjiit jours, / was absent for a week; n y a (void, voila) deux heures que je lis or Je lis depuis deux heures, I have been reading for two hours. 4. Unclassified: Mot i mot or mot pour mot; un remede centre (pour); trem- bler de crainte; par exemple; quant imoi; vendre dix francs or lalsser (donner) pour dix francs; remercier (punir) de; ' changer pour (contre) ; c'est k vous de dire; malgr€ tout cela. Word for word; a remedy for; to tremble for fear; for example; as for me; to sell for ten francs or to give for ten francs; to thank (punish) for; to change for; it is for you to say; for all that. 406 THE PEEPOSITION §§ 443-444 443. From 1. Usually = de: D vient de Paris; de trois k He cornea from Paris; from three quatre heures; je I'ai appris to four o'clock; I heard it from de lui. h im . 2. In jhe sense of because of, out of , through = ■§a.t\ Celaamva par. negligence ; par That happened from carelessness; experience (amitie). from experience (friendship). XS. In the sense oi dating, from = d,es, depuis, k partir de: Des (depuis, ajiartir^de) ce jourj From.thg,t day; fromJLggO jgnj. 4. Unclassified: D'aujourd'hui en huit; dessine A week from to-day; drawn from d'apres nature; boire da ns un nature; to drink fro m a glas s; verre; 6tez cela 4 I'enfant. take that from the child. 444. In, into 1. Denoting place or time specifically, i.e., in the sense of within, inside of, in{to) the interior of = dans (cf. § 333, 3): Dans ce paquet (champ); dans In this parcel (field); in (to) the lamaison; dans I'Afrique aus- house; in South Africa; in the trale; dans toute la ville; whole city; in the same year, dans la meme annee. Note. — The governed noun usually has the definite article. 2. Denoting place or time generally = en, k (cf . § 333, 2, 3) : En Afrique; a la maison; aux In Africa; in the house (at home); champs; au Canada; a Lon- in the fields; in Canada; in Lon- dres; 4 la campagne (ville) ; en don; in the country (city); in hiyer; au printemps; en paix . winter; in spring; in peace. X Note. — The governed word after en has but rarely the definite article (mostly in fixed expressions before initial vowel sound): En I'aii; En I'honneur de, etc. A^. In the sense of at the end of (time) = dans; in the course of (.timeX_^ea: Le train part dans uneheure; on The train leaves in an hom-; one peut aller k L. en une heure. can go to L. in an hour. i 445-446 IDIOMATIC DISTINCTIONS 407 4. Denoting place, after a superlative = de: La plus grande ville du monde. The largest city Jn the world. 5. Unclassified: PM^lajMfij le mati nj, de nos jours; par le passe : ajjavenir,; d'avance ; entre les_ mains de; a mon avis; sous_Jle_regne de,; jous jiresse; de cette maniefiy un_sur dix. In the rain; in the morning|__in our day(s)r i^i the past; in the {utur e ; in advaii ce ; in thejiaiids of; inmy opinion; in the reign of; in (the)_pressj_ in this way; pne^in ten. 445. Of 1. Usually = de: Le toit de la maison; la ville de Paris; un homme d'iofluence ; une livre de the ; digne d'hon- neur; il parle d'aller a Paris. 2. DOT^ing_material__= en: Un pent enbpis.Cfer) ; les pieces de dix francs sent en or. 3. Unclassified: The roof of the house; the city of Paris; a man of influence; a pound of tea; worthy of honor; he speaks of going to Paris A bridge o f wood (iron) ; ten-franc pieces are (made) of gold. person nes fio sent echappee s; docteur en medecin e ; un_de mesams; majeur. It is kind o f, you; of 100 persons 50 es^pedh doctor of medicine: one of my friends ;_pf age. 446. 1. Usually = sur: On, upon Le livre est (je mets le livre) sur la table. The book is (I put the book) on the table. 2. Is omitted in dates before specified days: On the tenth of May; I shall come on Tuesday; he arrived on the morrow. Ledizmai; je viendraimardi; il arriva le lendemain. 408 THE PREPOSITION §§ 447-449 3. Unclassified; Par une belle joumee d'et6 ; met- tre au feu; pendre contr g le_ mur ;. dans la rue ; dans I'ile; dansilsaialifir; en (dans un) VQy?ig_e; en yisite (cpnge.).; en chemin (route) ; d'un cote ; tombe r par terr ej a genoux; da5i~cette occasion; 3. cheval (pied); ajro ite (gauch e); a son aniv6e; au contraire; pour affaires. On a fine summer day; to put on the fire; to hang on the wall ; on the street; on the island; on the stairs ; on^j^jfiijrney; on_a_ ■nsitja^oliday) ; on the way (the road); on one side; t8__fall on the groundj on one's knees; on that occasion; on horseback (foot) ; on the right (the le ft) ; on his arrival; on the contrary; on business. 447. Out of 1. Unclassified: Boire dans un verre ; copier dans jinjivre ; regarder par la f en§- tre; un sur diz. To drink out of a glass; to copy qut_ofj, book; t o look out of the window; one out of ten. 448. Over 1. In the sense of above = au-dessus de: Au-dessus de la porte etaient ecrits ces mots; les nombres au-dessus de miUe. 2. Denoting motion aiboye = Passez la main sur ce drap; par monts^^et par vaux; il sauta par-dessus la haie. 3. Unclassified: Au deljl de la riviere; J^emporter jur_ (triompher de) ; se rejouir de; veiller sur. Over the door were written these words; the numbers over one thousand. sur, par, par-dessus : Pass your hand over_thia_£lfltb; over hill and_dale; he_leaj)ed over the hedge. Over the river; to triumph over; to rejoice over; to watch over. 449. Through 1. Denoting mot ion across = a travers (au travers de), par: Je passai ^ travers (au travers de) la foret ; passer par Paris. I passed through the forest; to pass through Paris. §J 450-453 IDIOMATIC DISTINCTIONS 409 2. In the sense of because of, owing to = par: Par negligence. Through carelessnesa. 450. TiU, until 1. Unclassified: Jusgu^l-dSSiaiJi ; pas ava nt I'an- TiJlJtjfcBigrrow; ^not^ till next year; neejffochaine; i3isgu!ici; ilu till_^now; from morning till matin_aujstf- ^ht^^.^ ^XZ-,.^ ^ J»ii;X^' 451. To 1. Denoting the indirect object = k (cf. §362, 2): Je I'ai donne a un ami. I gave it to a friend. 2. Denoting motion to = jl, en (cf . § 333, 2, 3) ; in the sense of to the house, etc., of, to 's = chez: n va a Paris (a I'ecole ; aujapon; He goes to Paris (to school; to ^ vm bal; en France; en Per- Japan; to a ball; to France; to tugal; chez eux; chez men Portugal; to their house, etc.; ami). to my friend's). \i. In the sen se of f/nim.r.,cgriaient. Xbfi- WQCJen wfiBtr-(and^ scEeaE3§di, eJjgestjwlMent. snd gesticulated, 2. And^^^Sigrji, verb of motion is usually un translated: Allez leur parler. Go and speak to them. ^457. Ni. 1. A fini te verb with ni or ni . . . ni must be /preceded by ne; II n'a ni or ni argent. He has neither gold nor silver. n ne mange ni ne boit. He neither eats nor drinks, o. For the position of ni . . . ni . . . ne, see § 416, d. §§ 458-459 USB OF CERTAIN CONJUNCTIONS 413 2. In sentences of negat ive force, _and, or, are rendered by P li- Honneurs ni richesses ne font le Honors and wealth do not consti- bonheur. tute happiness. 3. Observe the following equivalents of neither, not either, nor either, nor, when not correlative: Je ne le ferai pas. — (Ni) moi I shall not do it. — Nor I eith er non plus . (or Neith er s hall I) . D ^ne le fera pas non phis. He will not do it either . II ne I'a pas fait," etll ne le fera He has not done it, nor will he pas. (do it). 458. Que. 1. Que = that is followed by the indicative or subjunctive according to the context: Je dis que vous avez raison. I say that you are right. Jesuisfichequevousayezraison. I am sorry that you are right. 2. Que often replaces another conjunction; when so- used, it takes the same construction as the conjunction for which it stands, except that que instead of s i = if always- regiiixea, the^subjunctive : Quand vous aurez finl, et que When you have finished, and (whem vous aurez le temps. you) have time. Venez que ( = a fin que, pour que) Come that I may see you. je vous vole. Si vous venez demain, et que K you come to-morrow, and (if vous ayez le temps. you) have time. 3. Que may not be omitted before a finite verb, as thai often is in English: Je crois qu'il viendra et qu'il I think (that) he wiU come and restera. (that he will) stay. 459. Distinctions. The following conjunctions are espe- cially liable to be confounded in use: 1. Quand, JLorsque. They are eq uivalents in the sense of when, b ut quand (not lprsque)_ serves also as anjnteirogative' adverb in direct or ind^ect questions: 414 THE INTERJECTION {460 Quand est-il arrive? Dis-moi quand il est arrive. Quand (or lorsque) je I'ai vu. Nous partirons lorsque (or quand) la lettre arrivera. When did he come? Tell me when he came. When I saw him. We shall leave when the letter comes. 2. Pendant que, Tandis ay^- P endant que = while, wMM, during the time that; tandis que = while, whilst, during the time that, and also, whilst, on the contrary, whereas: Read the newspaper while I write this note. Whilst you are here. Lisez le journal pendant que j'ecris ce billet. Pendant (Tandis) que vous etes ici. Le pere travaille, tandis que le fils ne fait rien. The father works, while the son does nothing. 3. Depuis que, Puis que. Depuis que denotes time; puisque denotes c ause assigned : Je suis bien seul depuis que men frere est parti. II me faut rester, puisqu'il n'y a pas de train ce soir. I am very lonely since my brother went away. I must remain, since there is no train this evening. THE INTERJECTION 460. Interjections. The commoner interjections and ex- pressions used as such are: 1. Joy, admiration, approval: ah! o/i/ h, la bonne heme! w eE fl.rm4f thpiJn ha, ha! or hi, hi! (to denote right ! laughter) bis! encore.' hon\ good I bravo! or bravissimo! well done! hiesi\good! bravo! a, merveill ei^coptta; / C^j, . r:^' ' / hourra ! or vivat ! hurrah I 2. Disgust, disapproval, indifference: ^^fie! f oin de ! a plague upon ! fi done ! for shame I pouah ! disgusting I faugh I fie delj^e on/ oh! oft/ §460 INTEEJECTIONS 415 ball! m ah! bah! nonsense! pooh- pooh I baste! enough! pooh! nonsense! 3. Grief, fear, pain: ah! ah! oh! oh! h61as! alas! aie! oh! oh dear! 4. Surprise: ah! ah! oh! oh! ehl ah! ha! ha! comment! what! 5. Encouragement, reproof: allons! come! par exemple! dear me! zest! pshaw! zut! pshaw! mis6ricorde! mercy! ouf ! (to express suffocation, or re and exhaustion) quoi! what! vraim en t! indeed! tiens! indeed! haUo! par exemple! you d on't say ml mis^ricorde! mercy! en avant ! forward ! f erme! steady ! preste! quick! attention! look out! take care! st! hi there! qui vive! who goes there! courag e! cheer up! voyons! come now! §4! or or qS,! or bus! or or sus! now then! 6. Warning: gare! look out! take care! 7. Calling: h6! or oh6! or holl,! Tio/ hoy! halloo! hem! ahem! X8. Calling for aid: l^oij or_aii^secours!JieZ2)/ au voleur! stop n) ? 2. I could do that if I wished. 3. I could do that when I was young. 4. Could you tell me where le Boulevard des Italiens is ? 5.1 could not teU you (it) ; I have not been long in Paris. 6. Can it be true that he has done that? 7. One would say that you are [a] Parisian, you speak French so well. 8. Even if that were true, I should not go. 9. Even if it should not rain, I shall not go for a drive. 10. According to the newspapers, a great quantity of money was stolen (use: on). 11. By what he says, his neighbors are poor. 12. When I was in Europe, I saw a horse as big as an elephant. 13. Non- sense! You are joking. 14. Come! Come! (my) children, you are making too much noise. 15. Let us go away. 16. Go away. 17. I did not think he would know it. 18. If you will not do it, we shall not do it. EXERCISES XXI a-xxii a 435 XXI a (§§ 254-267 continued) The two kings met (each other) on the 13th of July in a vast plain between Warsaw (Varsovie) and Cracow (Cracovie). Augustus had nearly twenty-four thousand men; Charles had only ten thousand. At the first volley, the Duke of Holstein, who commanded the Swedish cavalry, received a cannon-shot in the back. The king asked if he was dead ; he was told (use on) that he was (gwe oui); he made no reply; (some) tea,rs fell from his eyes; he (se) hid his (le) face [for3 a moment with his (les) hands; then he rushed into the midst of the enemy at the head of his guards. The king of Poland did aU that one should expect from a prince who was fighting for his crown; he himself brought back his troops three times to the charge; but he fought with his Saxons only; the Poles, who formed his right wing, fled at the beginning of the battle. Charles won a complete victory. He did not stay on the field of battle, but (et) marched direct to Cracow, pursuing the king of Poland, who kept fleeing before him. XXn a (§§ 268-273*) Je tiens a ce que vous appreniez I am (most) anxioua that you shaU le latin. learn Latin. Nous n'aimerions pas qu'on se We should not like to be made moquat de nous. sport of. D me tarda que cela soit fait. I am longing for that to be done. I wish you would do it. Te voudrais bien que vous le fassiez. , ,. i u i-i ^ j -^ ^ [I should like you to do it. 1. Our teacher said that he wished us to write our exercise. 2. If you wish to go to the city, you may (pouvoir) go (there), but if you wish us to go (there), we tell you plainly that we cannot. 3. I wish you to do your work before (the) breakfast. 4. Our friends wish us to stay with them this week. 5. My father is most anxious that I should learn Latin, but I don't like it. 6. Would you prefer that I should go to church this morning? 7. We should not like our friends to be made sport * The impf. subi. is of limited use in the language of everyday life. 436 EXERCISES XXII b-xxiii a of. 8. You say that you are going to buy a house from (d) that man; take care lest he deceive you. 9. I am longing for my house to be finished. 10. I am anxious that he should come to see us when he visits Boston. 11. My teacher told me that I should write my exercise. 12. My father told me that he had seen you. 13. The law forbids that to be done. 14. These children must stay in; their parents have forbidden them to go out. 15. I shall give orders not to admit them (use on). 16. I did not ask that I should be answered (use on) before the others. 17. I shall avoid her speaking to me about it. XXII b 1. The doctor ordered that he should be given no wine. 2. We do not ask that you should pay the money. 3. The rain hinders people (on) from going out to-day. 4. I wish you to know that he is my friend. 5. You approve of my coming back, do you not? 6. Yes, I did not wish you to go away. 7. It is better for the children to go to school. 8. What shall I say to that man? He has insulted me. 9. That makes no difference, he is not worthy of being answered (use on). 10. The doctor gave orders that my father should go out for a drive every day. 11. He has torn his book; he deserves to be punished (use on). 12. I should like you to go for a walk with me. 13. -Weakness often hinders good intentions from being fulfilled. 14. I long for his return. 15. There is no more bread; I should like you to go and get some. 16. That man is most anxious that his children should go to school, but he is too poor to (pour) buy them books. 17. Take care that the dog does not bite you; he is very cross. 18. That young man is not very amiable; we should not like him to treat us as he has treated his father. XXni a (§§ 268-273 continued) 1. It is fitting that children should obey their parents. 2. It is good that men should sometimes undergo misfortunes. 3. It may be that he has returned, but I have not seen him. i. It is natural that we should hate our enemies. 5. It is EXERCISES XXIII b-xxiv a 437 getting late; it is time that we should go home. 6. He had to learn French, for he Uved in France. 7. We are very glad that you have come. 8. We are very sorry that you did not come. 9. I am surprised that he said so, because he told me that he would not say so. 10. It is a pity that we cannot always be happy. 11. It is a shame for those young men to be so ignorant. 12. It is sad that a man hke him should be so poor. 13. I fear he will commit some crime. 14. I am glad you are so well. 15. I am afraid my father is not well enough to (pour) go with us. 16. I wonder he did not come last night. 17. I know why he did not come; he was afraid it would rain. xxni b 1. -He was not afraid it would rain; he was afraid a certain person would be there whom he did not wish to see. 2. I do not fear he wiU not go. 3. Are you not afraid he wiU be able to prevent your intentions from being fulfilled? 4. I doubt whether he wiU be able to come. 5. I do not deny that I am glad of your iU-fortune. 6. Do you doubt that he is an honest man? 7. Not at all; I know that he is an honest man; I have known him for twenty years. 8. I do not doubt that you will be able to fulfill all your intentions. 9. It seems he has not received [any] of my letters. 10. It cannot be that you are ignorant of his intentions. 11. How is your father? 12. He is very well; he is rarely ill. 13. It seems to me it will be dangerous if we do not follow his advice. 14. That child is afraid you will hurt him. 15. I am glad you did not hurt yourself when you fell. 16. We regret very much that we did not see you when you were in Paris. 17. Are you not afraid that you wiU tire of being in the country? 18. I am not afraid that I shaU tire of being in the country. XXIV a (§§ 268-273 continued) 1. Our neighbor is an honest man; I hope he will succeed. 2. I do not think he will succeed; he has not much abihty. 3. We thought he would come to-day. 4. You told me that 438 EXEKOisEs XXIV b-xxv a you did not think he would go away, did you not? 5. Dc you think we must behave what he says? 6. It is probable that we shall go away to-morrow. 7. It is not certain that our friends will come to-morrow. 8. Is it probable that you will go away to-day? 9. We are sure that we saw them yesterday. 10. Are you not sure that you saw them yester- day? 11. Do you think your father will go to France this summer? 12. It is probable he wiU go there. 13. It is certain that aU men will die. 14. Is it certain that our friends will be there this evening? 15. Is it not certain that your neighbor wiU buy your house? 16. Does he imagine we shall do that merely to (pour) please him? 17. We are not sure that will please him. XXIV b 1. Do you think you will go for a walk this evening ? 2. Yes, I think I shall go out with my brother. 3. Give me the book which contains that beautiful story of which you were speak- ing. 4. Give me a book which contains some beautiful stories. 5. I should like to buy a house which would suit me better than this one. 6. I am looking for a grammar in which I can find better exercises. 7. I have a grammar which has better exercises. 8. Send me some clothes which I can wear in the house. 9. Has he a single friend who is true to him? 10. He has not a single friend who is true to him. 11. There is nobody here who can speak French. 12. I have nothing which is of value. 13. There are no houses here which are as large as those in the city. 14. There are few people here who have learned French. 15. It is the finest thing one can see. 16. That is the largest ship I have ever seen. 17. What- ever you do, you will not be able to persuade me that you are right. 18. Whoever you are, you will have to obey the law, as long as you are in this country. XXV a (§§ 268-273 continued) Que veut-a dire? What does he mean? Onsefieaiui. f Men trust bin. I He is trusted. EXERCISE XXV b 439 Paites-moi savoir. Send me word (let me know). Je ne resois plus de ses nouvelles. I never hear from him now. U est tres occupe. He is very busy. II s'occupe de cela. He takes an interest in that. 1. I have told him nothing which could influence him. 2. I know no book which pleases me better. 3. I want a house which will suit me better. 4. M. Jonnart is the richest man I know. 6. However good men may be, they do not escape (d) misfortune. 6. Let us go out for a walk before your father returns. 7. We rose this morning before the sun rose. 8. Will you not stay here until the weather is warm? 9. Oh, no; we must leave before it begins to be warm. 10. We are going to work untU we go to bed. 11. You must always act so that men may respect you. 12. Tell the truth always, so that men may trust you. 13. He insulted me so that I put him out of doors. 14. That gentleman made a speech, but he spoke in such a way that one could not understand him. 15. I did not trust him, for fear that he might deceive me. 16. He passed our house before we had finished our breakfast. 17. I explained it to him, for fear he might not know what you meant. XXV b 1. I cannot trust you, unless you explain to me what you mean. 2. In case you cannot come, wiU you be kind enough to send me word. 3. We shall send you our carriage, in case you need it. 4. In case what he says is true, we shall send you word. 5. Although the children have gone to bed, they have not yet gone to sleep. 6. Although you may not like that man, you must confess that he is an honest man. 7. Although we used to be goo.d friends, I never hear from him now. 8. Not that he has forgotten me, but he is so much occupied with his business. 9. Far from his saying that he hates you, I assure you that he will say he loves you. 10. He gave her the money without my knowing it. 11. Even if he had told me that he liked me, I should not have believed it. 12. I cannot go out, without my dog following me. 13. If we are there and see him, we shall tell him what you say. 14. Although he is far 440 EXERCISES XXVI a-xxvi b away, I hear from him occasionally. 15. Not that we take no interest in your enterprise, but we are so busy with our own work that we can't think of anything else. 16. We are at the wrong door; would you be kind enough to tell us where we are, so that we can find where our friends live? 17. We shall rise early to-morrow morning, so as to be at the station before our friends start. XXVI a (§§ 268-273 continued) 1. Would to God he were here ' 2. Let her be silent if she cannot explain what she wishes. 3. The Frenchmen shout "Hurrah for France!" 4. He doubted whether there is a God. 5. I should like you to write me a letter when you are absent. 6. If his father should say so, he would have to do it. 7. I was most anxious that he should succeed in his enter- prise. 8. We were not willing that you should go away with- out our seeing you. 9. His father gave orders that he should be taken to school. 10. The doctor forbade that the patient should go for a walk. 11. I was longing for that to be done. 12. He would not permit it to be done. 13. The rain hin- dered us aU day from going out. 14. It was necessary that we should go away before the others came. 15. It was better that we should be here without their knowing it. 16. I was afraid that he had said too much. 17. I doubted whether he would be able to pay that price. 18. I was very sorry that we had not been able to go for a walk together; I am sure we should have enjoyed ourselves. XXVI b 1. Our friends were glad that you had visited them before they left for France. 2. He told me he would go away unless he succeeded better. 3. We did not say you should write the letter; you may do as you wish. 4. Did you fear he would go away without coming to see you ? 5. My father thought you would come, but my mother thought you would not come. 6. It was impossible that he should not be mistaken; he trusts those who are not worthy of confidence. 7. We are not sure EXERCISE XXVII a 441 they will come. 8. We waited until they came. 9. We have taken care that they should not see us. 10. No man has ever [ived who could equal him in prudence. 11. He was the noblest man I have ever known. 12. I left Russia when I was a boy; I sought a country where I might be more free. 13. Did he ever have a friend who was faithful to him? 14. Show me a house which will suit me better than this one. 15. I have never seen anything which suited me better. 16. Why did your father come? 17. He came in case I should be ill. 18. Although he was very Ul, he would not go home. XXVn a (§§ 274-275) Je lui ai dit son fait. I (have) told him what I thought of him. Nous nous plaisons a la ville. We like it (like to be) in the city. II se plait k la campagne. He likes it (likes to be) in the country. Qu'il fasse beau, ou qu'il pleuve. 1 Whether it is fine, or whether it S'il fait beau, ou qu'il pleuve. J rains. rt J - •!. • f Even if it were true. Quand meme ce serait vrai. < _ [ Eiven were it true. n s'en plaint. He complains of it. 1. If it does not rain, will you go for a walk to-morrow morning? 2. No, even if it should not rain, I must go down town to-morrow morning on business. 3. If it were to rain to-day, we should not go down town. 4. If I had known that you were in town, I should have gone to see you. 5. Had it not been so warm to-day, I should have gone away. 6. If the Germans had not taken Alsace, the French would not have hated them so much. 7. If I come here next year, I shall bring my brother with me. 8. If I were you, I should tell him what I think of him. 9. If I am present when he arrives, I shall tell him what I told you. 10. If it is cold in winter, we go to (en) Florida; if it is mild, we remain in (dans) the north. 11. If my father likes it in the country, he will stay there till (the) autumn. 12. If I should like it in the city, I shall stay there always. 13. I can never trust that boy; if he should tell me anything, I should not beheve him. 442 EXERCISES XXVII b-xxviii a 14. Whether it rains or is fine, we shall come. 15. He is a good (brave) man, if there ever was one. 16. If that man were as rich as Croesus, he would not be satisfied. 17. See what that man has done to me! He is a scoundrel, if there ever was one. XXVII b 1. If I should go to sleep before you come, be good enough to wake me. 2. WiU you not go down town with me ? 3.1 cannot go, I am not well; if I were better, I should go willingly. 4. If he had risen at six o'clock, he would not have missed the train. 5. Yes, he would (si! si!). He would have been late, even if he had risen at half-past five, for the train left at a quarter past five. 6. I have been told that your friend has offended you; is it true? 7. No, but even if it were true, I should pardon (it to) him. 8. Did our friend tell you last evening whether he was coming to-morrow? 9. Yes, he told me that he would come. 10. That man told me that he had a thousand dollars. 11. Were he to swear it on his honor, I should not believe it. 12. If you meet him, and he should ask you where I am, do not tell (it to) him. 13. Whether he comes or not, (that) makes no difference to me. 14. If I were he, I should tell that scoundrel what I thought of him. 15. If we liked it in the country, we should stay there. 16. If he had insulted me like that, I should have kicked him out. 17. Even were you to hate me, I should not complain (of it). 18. I should have liked it in the country if it had not rained without cease {sans cesse). XXVni a (§§ 276-285) . . t ■ f UJie pTomenade. 1 ,. . . „ Jevaisiaire< ' , , > i am gome for a walk. [ vin tour de promenade. J " ^ Je voudrais le faire. I should like to do it. T J • 1-1 1 i; /^A.N ) I should like him to do it. Je voudrais qu'illefasse (fit). w -, ,• I 1 wish him to do it. n fait beau marcher (se promener). I '^^ ^^^^^ jf .S°°d. 1 It IS good walking. Vous avez beau dire (parler). I ^^ ^' ^^'^^^^ ^""^ y°" *° «Pf«^- l^ You may say what you like. EXERCISE XXVIII b 443 Pai cru voir passer quelqu'un. I thought I saw some one go by. Je les ai ecoutes chanter. I hatened to them sing(mg). n a pense mourir. He was near dying. Je pense (songe) k le faire. I am thinking about doing it. D ne fait que de venir (airiver). He has just come. D veut faire a sa tete. He will have his own way. J'aimerais autant m'en aller. I would as soon go. Faites-le monter. Send (show) him up (stairs). 1. Let us go for a walk this morning; the walking is good, and it is cool. 2. Living is always dear in Paris. 3. Are the children coming? 4. Yes, I saw them coming when I was on the hiU. 5. I should like to speak to the doctor when he comes. 6. I should like you to speak to my father when you see him. 7. When do you expect to be there? 8. I expect to be there in a fortnight. 9. He might say what he hked, nobody would believe him. 10. It was useless for us to speak, nobody would listen to us. 11. I like better to live in the country than in the city. 12. My friends have left me, and I know not what to do. 13. I think it is going to be warm to-day. 14. My father thought he heard some one go by, but I think he was mistaken. 15 My father was very ill last year; he was near dying. 16. My brother's little boy fell into the water, and was near being drowned. 17. I was thinking about going to see you. xxvni b 1. I hope I shall see you when you come. 2. I hope he will come to see me when he is here. 3. Did you see my sister at the ball? 4. I thought I saw her, but I am not sure (of it). 5. I am thinking about writing him a letter, but I do not like writing letters, and so I delay (it) from week to week. 6. I should like better to go than to stay. 7. It would be better to go than to stay. 8. Come and see us whenever you wish. 9. My master has just come; after he has dined I shall tell him that you are here. 10. I hope I shall be able to go for a walk with you to-morrow. 11. I hope you will not go away before I have seen you. 12. We ought to go and see your father before he leaves. 13. It is useless for you to say any- 444 EXERCISES XXIX a-xxix b thing; he will have his own way. 14. You may say what you like; young people will have their own way. 15. I would aa soon go as stay. 16. I am not very well this morning; I am going to send for the doctor. 17. The doctor has just come; shall I send him up ? 18. We thought we heard some one go by, but we must have been mistaken. XXIX a (§§ 276-285 continued) II est a travailler. He is busy working. J'y suis accoutumS. I am used to it. II finira mat. He will come to a bad end. Se plaire a mal faire. To delight in evil- (wrong-) doing. D tarde a venir. He ia long in coming. Tenez-vous (beaucoup) a y aller? Are you (very) anxious to go there ? Je n'y tiens pas. I am not anxious (for it). 1. Continue reading until you are called. 2. We are busy writing our exercises. 3. I have my work to do. 4. Our teacher taught us to do that. 5. Will you help me to do my work? 6. I should like to help you, but I have work to dp also. 7. I have difficulty in believing that he has done that. 8. How old is that child? 9. He is two years old; he is be- ginning to talk. 10. The servant is busy washing dishes in the kitchen. 11. We are occupied to-day in writing to our friends. 12. He spends his time in reading novels. 13. He is not lazy; he sets about writing his lesson as soon as his teacher tells (it to) him. 14. Do you not get tired (in) read- ing those difficult works ? 15. A little, but I am rather used to it. 16. He lost a great deal in selling his house. 17. That boy persists in reading bad books; he will come to a bad end. 18. The wicked delight in evil-doing. XXIX b 1. Our friends invited us to stay with them. 2. I should like to know where my mother is; she is long in coming. 3. 1 Wish she would come; I long to see her. 4. Are you anxious to have it to-day? 5. Oh no, I am not anxious for that; but I must have it to-morrow. 6. Are those apples good to eat? EXERCISE XXX a 445 7. We are looking for a maid of all work. 8. That young lady sings and dances charmingly. 9. There are five bedrooms in that house. 10. That poor little girl has hurt her hand; she is crying pitifully. 11. Our neighbor has died; his family ia to be pitied. 12. That young man seems to delight in wrong- doing. 13. Are you not very anxious to see your friends? 14. Yes, I should like to see them; I have not seen them for a long time. 15. That is very difiicult to do; I should like you to help me. 16. I am always ready to help you. 17. 1 tim glad to know that you are not the only one to say so. 18. That scoundrel did not succeed in deceiving us. XXX a (§§ 276-285 continued) n fait semblant de dormir. He pretends to be asleep, Bien faire, mal faire. \ n ^ j ■, / n Fake le bien, faire le mal. / ^° ^° ^^^' ^° ^° ^^^^ (^°°S)- Attention! Look out 1 Be careful ! 1. Our teacher teUs us that it is easy to read that book. 2. I am ashamed to say that we are mistaken. 3. He pretends to be asleep. 4. She pretends to be reading. 5. It is difficult to say whether we are right or wrong. 6. He is wrong to beUeve that we are his enemies. 7. Will you permit me to go to bed? 8. Promise us not to go away without telling us (it). 9. I am very glad to say that I shall be able to come and see you at once. 10. We are sorry to tell you that we cannot come. 11. Cease to do evil; learn to do well. 12. Hasten to finish your work before leaving. 13. Let us hasten to leave, or we shall be late. 14. I am afraid to speak, although I know it is my place to tell them that they have done wrong. 15. He commenced by telling me that he was a rich man's son, and he finished by asking me to lend him five dollars. 16. Be careful ! Don't fall ! 17. If you should happen to see him, tell him that I shall not go away before seeing him. 18. I have just seen him, and he told me to tell you that he would come to-morrow. 19. Although he promised me to stop reading such books, be only deceived me. 20. He pretends to be good, but he knows (that) he is not (it). 446 EXERCISES XXX b-xxxi a XXX b 1. We {on) should not live to eat. 2. It is too cold to go for a walk. 3. It is not cool enough to go for a walk. 4. I rose early this morning in order to be able to do my work before going down town. 5. We learn French in order to be able to read French books. 6. After writing our exercises we went for a walk. 7. That little boy was punished for having hed. 8. That young girl is much to be pitied; her father and mother are dead. 9. Before going we should hke to see you. 10. We should like to see you before you go. 11. We saw those houses being built. 12. He did that without telling us (it). 13. We went away without his seeing us. 14. It was very windy, and we would not go out for a sail for fear of being drowned. 15. Although he made me many comphments at first, he finally insulted me. 16. Your father has just come; shall I tell him to wait here, or should you hke to see him at once ? 17. I have not time to see him now; I shall try to see him to-morrow. 18. We cannot hinder him from doing so. XXXI a (§§ 286-287) Cette femme me fait pitie. ■ I am sorry for that woman, n s'est fiche centre moi. He got angry with me. £tre bien portant. To be well. 1. Knowing so many things, those gentlemen must be very learned. 2. The field of battle was covered with the dead and dying. 3. I am sorry for that poor woman; she is always ill. 4. In neglecting her duties, she shows herself careless. 5. Their misfortunes went on increasing from day to day. 6. Don't you see them coming? 7. Yes; there they come! 8. Man is the only speaking creature. 9. Frenchmen will say (pres.) that, generally speaking. Frenchmen are better than Enghsh- men. 10. How happy those peasants are ! They are always singing their beautiful songs as they work. 11. One's appetite ■comes while eating; " but," said the Gascon, " I have been eating two hours, and it has not come yet." 12. I hke reading, but I prefer hunting and fishing. 13. Where are the children? EXERCISES XXXI b-xxxii a 447 X4. There they are, playing under the trees. 15. Our neigh- bor's son has made astonishing progress at (the) college. 16. The sewing-machine is an American invention, but there are many of them in Europe now. 17. Our friends were very much astonished at our coining; they thought we were in Europe. XXXI b 1. As we were taking a walk this morning, we met the old gentleman who used to hve next door. 2. Our neighbors are speaking of going away, but I do not think they will. 3. That young man went away without saying good-bye; he must have got angry with me. 4. That prince has powerful ene- mies. 5. That lady, being ill, has not come to-day. 6. Those children, having finished their work, have gone out. 7. Those so-called learned men, who really know nothing, are very tire- some. 8. Who is that man going past ? 9. That is the would- be nobleman. 10. That country has the most powerful fleet in the world. 11. That little girl, having been ill, cannot go to school. 12. Our friends, being tired, have gone to bed. 13. Seriously speaking, that young man is not worthy of being respected. 14. Those children appear to be well. 15. If the population of the towns goes on increasing, and that of the country diminishing, we shall probably have great misfortunes. 16. I saw him coming down the street before I met you, 17. While traveUng, I saw many astonishing things. 18. Did you not see my brothers going out ? XXXII a (§§ 288-292) Ella s'y est plu. She liked it there. Vous etes-vous bien amuse ? Did you have a good time ? Ellas se sont donna la main. They have shaken hands. Ellas se sont brouillees. They have fallen out. Las grandes chaleurs qu'il a fait. The great heat that there has been. 1. That is the old lady whom I saw fall in the street yester- day. 2. She fell in front of Mr. Simon's, but she did not hurt herself much. 3. Our friends have gone away, but they will 448 EXERCISE XXXII b come back to-morrow. 4. Your mother has been in the country; did she Uke it there? 5. She enjoyed herself (there) very much; she intends to go back again soon. 6. Your sister and mother have come. 7. You will find inclosed [a] copy of the contract which we have signed. 8. The ten hours that he has slept have not been enough to rest him. 9. The children had a good time to-day at the picnic. 10. Where is the servant? 11. I have let her go to see her friends. 12. Those are the three miles that I ran to (pour) fetch the doctor. 13. Those are the dangers we have incurred to save our country. 14. She remembered the dangers I had in- curred. 15. Did those two ladies shake hands? 16. No; they did not even look at each other. 17. Those ladies have written each other many letters. 18. There are the letters 1 wrote. x:^xn b 1. Those young ladies ^ave fallen out, and have burnt the letters they wrote to each other. 2. They have said good-bye to each other. 3. They have lost what they have given each other. 4. The great heat that there has been has killed the crops. 5. The person I asked (prier) to sing will not sing. 6. What djlfioulty/we have had to reipember what you told us! 7. The crops are poor this year; "ffie great heat has kiUed them. 8. That is the house, which ye had built. 9. How many houses they have biiilt! 10. Sow many beautiful houses they have had built! 11. That is the lady we heard sing at the concert last evening. 12. Those are the children we saw playing this morning. 13. Those are the beautiful songs we heard sung at the concert. 14. Do you remember the houses we saw being built last year ? 15. There is a letter which I forgot to put in the post. 16. He has read all the books he could. 17. There are the books we sent for. 18. We have told them to go out. 19. Those are the books which I thought he would read. 20. The doors were kept closed while the festivities were held. 21. What a fine day it was ! 22. The more people arrived, the better the king enjoyed himself. 23. The generals (that) he sent for were all there. EXERCISES XXXIII a-xxxiii b 449 XXXin a (§§ 293-299) n se croit honnete homme. He thinks he is an honest man. D ne s'en est pas aperfu. He did not notice it. Ce chapeau ne lui va pas. That hat does not fit him. n n' (ne nous) est pas pennis de . . . We are not permitted to . . . Je le lui ai paye. I paid him for it. Je I'en ai remercie. I thanked him for it. Je pense k vous. I am thinking of you. Que pensez-vous de cela ? What do you think of that 7 1. We shall make them do their work. 2. They (on) have made her suffer great ills. 3. Show them upstairs when they come. 4. I have seen the children play. 5. We have seen him play that part. 6. He was born [a] poet. 7. He has become [a] soldier. 8. Wfiat will become of us! 9. I believe he is an honest man. 10. He thinks he is [a] scholar. 11. I know he is [a] scholar. 12. We should not slander our neigh- bors. 13. I perceived their dejection as soon as I came in. 14. I did not notice it. 15. We cannot do without our books; we are going to use them to-morrow. 16. I remember the sorrows you made me undergo. 17. These gloves do not fit me. 18. That young lady's gloves do not fit her. 19. I shall look for a house which suits me better (see § 270, 1). 20. That house does not suit our friends. 21. I cannot trust him; he often lies. 22. The son resembles his father. 23. We are not permitted to leave the city. 24. The law does not per- mit children to marry. 25. The king pardons him his crime. XXXIII b 1. Did you pay the tailor for your coat ? 2. I have not paid him for it yet. 3. What are you looking at ? 4. I am look-r ing at those men working in the field. 5. Wait for me till ] come. 6. I think of my friends who have gone away. 7. Do you think of the money you have lost ? 8. I do not. 9. Shall you be at the ball this evening? 10. I do not know; that depends on you. 11. Did you thank him for having lent you his book ? 12. I did. 13. He stole that watch from hia father; what do you think of that? 14. He is laughing at us. 450 EXERCISES XXXIV a-xxxv a 15. Those men were playing cards. 16. Those young ladies play on the violin. 17. You believe me, do you not? 18. Yes, I believe you. 19. That old lady believes in ghosts. 20. He loves and obeys his parents. 21. He missed the train, did he not? 22. I am short of money this morning; I cannot pay you. 23. He fails in his duty when he does not pay his debts. 24. Have you asked your father for money? 25. I have not asked him for any. XXXrV a (§§ 300-306) 1. Tell the servant to put the frying-pan on the stove. 2. That man is a regular dupe. 3. He is not a friend; he is a mere acquaintance. 4. He was received with all the honors. 5. That poet is always singing of his first love. 6. The errors of men are numerous. 7. The old man has (faire) a nap after dinner. 8. He paid me a large sum of money. 9. My memory is not good; give me a memorandum of that affair. 10. Steam makes the steamer go. 11. That man and his wife make a happy couple. 12. I have Hugo's works at home. 13. The works of the sculptor Barye were exhibited in Paris in 1889. 14. Old people are generally less thoughtless than young people. 15. Those people are not all good. 16. All those people were present. 17. All good people are worthy of respect. 18. AH the clever people in (de) the town were present at the ball. 19. Happy ^are] the people who do not love vice. 20. All the young men of the village were present at the celebration. XXXV a (§§ 307-314) Tomber k genoui. To fall on one's knees. Cela ne vaut rien. That is xiseless. Le petit bonhomme. The brave httle fellow. 1. That man has broken his two arms. 2. The 'ifs' and the 'buts' are often convenient words. 3. The criminal fell on his knees before the king. 4. That little boy likes to pick up pebbles. 5. The generals have good horses. 6. We read the newspapers before going down town [in] the morning. EXERCISE XXXVI a 451 7. Frenchmen like carnivals and balls. 8. Our neighbor has some beautiful corals at home. 9. The Minister of Public Works ordered railways to be constructed. 10. His grand- fathers are dead. 11. Our ancestors were great men who left [behind them] many noble works. 12. The poor boy had tears in his (aux) eyes when he was told that his bird was dead. 13. That painter makes beautiful skies. 14. Several Te Deums were sung this year in that church. 15. Give me two postage stamps, if you please. 16. We had some delight- ful private interviews. 17. Those corkscrews are useless. 18. Those lamp shades are very pretty. 19. Give me a toothpick, if you please. 20. Do not condemn me on rumors. 21. The two Corneilles were dramatic authors. 22. All the Ribots were present. 23. I have two Molieres at home. 24. The Bourbons have been very unfortunate; I pity them. 25. I saw the school-boys marching yesterday; the brave little fellows were really fine-looking. 26. The noblemen of France have suffered much during this century. 27. There are two gentlemen and two ladies waiting for you. 28. Good morn- ing, ladies; how do you do ? 29. I have visited all the county towns of that part of France. 30. Many of Moli^re's works are masterpieces. XXXVI a (§§ 315-335) 1. He showed remarkable courage in struggling with his difficulties. 2. We used to enjoy good health when we Uved in France. 3. Do you not like music? 4. I do, when it is good. 5. Gold and silver are abundant in that country. 6. The rich have much gold and silver. 7. Does that young lady know Greek? 8. She does not, but she knows French and German well. 9. Does your mother speak French? 10. Yes, she speaks French and German well. 11. We have French and German books in our library. 12. Have you any good sugar for sale, sir ? 13. Have you any of my books in your library? 14. Have you any of the good wine you bought last year? 15. We have no pens and no paper. 16. They have no more money, and so they must stay at home. 17. That is not wine; it is water. 18. It is not 452 EXERCISES XXXVI b-xxxvii a money I ask you for, but friendship. 19. Why do you com- plain; have you not friends? 20. I should like to buy a pound of tea; have you any of the good tea which you ordered from China ? XXXVI b 1. I shall give you something good if you come to see me. 2. He promised me something very beautiful, but he never gave it to me. 3. Many people beUeve that he will come to a bad end. 4. Many others believe that he will succeed well. 5. Most people are ignorant of their true interests. 6. We were absent most of the time. 7. Silk dresses and gold watches are not always necessary. 8. Horses are animals which are useful to men. 9. Queen Victoria had then been reigning a long time. 10. The President of the French Republic has signed the treaty. 11. King Louis XIV is often called the Great. 12. That old man has a long beard. 13. Give me your hand, and I shall help you to rise. 14. We shook hands before we parted. 15. She has not taken off her hat and gloves; she says she cannot stay. 16. I have toothache and earache, so I cannot go out. 17. That little girl has blue eyes and blond hair. 18. I had my hair cut before starting. 19. What is the matter with you, my little boy? 20. My hands and feet are cold. XXXVII a (§§ 315-335 continued) Combien les avez-vous payes? How much did you pay for them ? Je les ai payes dix francs la dou- I paid ten francs a dozen for them. zaine. II part pour la France. He is starting for France. Dans le nord de la France. In the north of France. 1. You have some very fine pears; how much did you pay for them ? 2. I paid two cents apiece for them. 3. That is not dear; I thought that pears would not sell so cheap this year. 4. Carpenters are earning fifteen francs a day at present. 5. We do not go to school on Thursdays. 6. He will come on Saturday. 7. You were wrong to come on Wednesday; you EXERCISES xxxvii b-xxxviii a 453 should always come on Thursday. 8. Did I step on your toe? I ask your pardon. 9. Are you going on horseback or on foot? 10. How we love spring! 11. In spring nature awakes from its long repose. 12. In winter there is some- times much snow in France. 13. Those gentlemen are French- men. 14. Our neighbor is a carpenter. 15. His son has become a distinguished physician. 16. Charles the First, King of England, was beheaded. 17. She was born at Mar- seilles, a city of Southern France. XXXVII b 1. We were without friends and money. 2. Those children have neither father nor mother. 3. He will come home at Michaelmas. 4. Those ladies dress in French style. 5. Have you ever read Tasso's great poem? 6. Yes, and Ariosto's also. 7. We are to start for Europe to-morrow. 8. Nor- mandy is a province of France. • 9. Did you ever live in Paris ? 10. Yes, I hved a long time in France, and in England too. 11. My brother has lived in China, but he is living now in Japan. 12. The United States is the most important coun- try in North America. 13. Havre is an important seaport of the north of France. 14. New Orleans is a large city of the United States. 15. French wines are celebrated in all parts of the world. 16. That traveler comes from Africa, and is going to South America. 17. My cousin is in (A) Madagascar. 18. Ladies, you are welcome; we are always glad to receive you. 19. Our neighbor goes to the city every other day. XXXVm a (§§ 336-358) 1. That little boy's grandmother has given him a knife. 2. That Uttle girl is very fooUsh. 3. I know those old ladies well; they are our old neighbors. 4. What a fine-looking man! Do you know him? 5. There are some beautiful trees! 6. The prince addressed him most flattering words. 7. That statesman is celebrated for (par) his liberal principles. 8. There are, according to Catholic doctrine, seven capital sins. 9. The man and his wife were both old. 10. The 454 EXERCISES XXXVIII b-xxxix a French and Italian nations are often called Latin nations. 11. Those flowers smell sweet, do they not? 12. That large building is the school for (de) deaf-mutes. 13. He left the door wide open when he went out this morning, 14. The newly married couple had just left the church. 15. My mother had blue eyes and Ught auburn hair. 16. When I was young, I used to go barefoot to school. XXXVIII b 1. That lady looks kind. 2. A pound sterling is worth twenty-five francs. 3. He is getting richer and richer. 4. He is richer than people (on) believe. 5. The older one is, the wiser one should be. 6. My brother is older than I by (de) four years. 7. The richer one part of the population becomes, the poorer the rest often become. 8. Your house is small, but ours is smaller still. 9. That man is bad, but his brother is still worse. 10. The dearer, those articles are, the less of them we shall be able to buy. 11. Our house is good, but yours is better. 12. His most intimate friends knew nothing of his good fortune. 13. Men are often the most unhappy when they ought to be the most happy. 14. Is that not a splendid sight ? 15. Yes, it is most beautiful ! 16. The richest men in the world are not always the happiest. 17. She is shorter than I by three inches. XXXIX a (§§ 336-358 continued) 1. You are all welcome, ladies; how kind you are to (de) come to see me ! 2. What a pretty httle girl ! What is her name? 3. There were black horses and white ones in the procession. 4. Will you give me some cold water to (pour) drink? 5. Whose is that broken cane? 6. Our neighbor is not an educated man. 7. Our friends Uve in a beautiful white house behind the town. 8. The English language is spoken in all parts of the world. 9. I have just seen that pretended nobleman go by. 10. We have just been at a political meeting, where we listened to a very long speech. 11. My dear child, you are too young to (§ 282, 2) wear dear EXERCISES XL a-XL b 455 dresses ! 12. I love that gentleman; he is so kind to children. 13. Are you not ready to start ? You are very slow in dressing. 14. I am very glad to see you; when are you coming to see me ? 15. I am very sorry to say that I have no time to visit you before I go away. 16. We are charmed with the beautiful present you gave {Jaire) us. 17. You are not angry with me, are you ? 18. I do not like that man; he is too severe with his children. 19. That is a nice Uttle girl; she is so polite to every- body. 20. That little boy is very clever at history and arith- metic. 21. That army is weak in numbers {en nombre). 22. We must be charitable to everybody. 23. Living lan- guages are more useful than dead languages. 24. We must not confound the verbal adjectives with the present participles. 25. That young man is the living image of his father. 26. The more learned that man becomes, the less generous he becomes. XL a (§§ 359-373) 1. Are there any good pens in the box ? 2. There are none. 3. Do you know that old man? 4. I know him and his brother. 5. Do you know that man and his wife? 6. We know both him and her. 7. We know him only. 8. Did you see my father and mother? 9. We saw her only. 10. Are you going to give them some money? 11. I have already given them some. 12. Will you give me some apples ? 13. I shall give you and him some. 14. Have you spoken to my cousin of your plan? 15. I have spoken of it to her and her mother. 16. WiU you have the goodness to introduce us to your mother? 17. I shall have great pleasure in introducing you to her. 18. I was thinking of you when you came in. 19. Do you think of me when I am far away? 20. Yes, I always think of you. 21. Whose is that house? 22. It is mine. 23. As soon as the child saw his mother, he ran to her. 24. Are you that young man's sister? 25. I am. XL b 1. Are you satisfied, madam? 2. I am. 3. Are you an American, sir ? 4. I am. 5. Are you the gentlemen we met 456 EXERCISE XLI a yesterday ? 6. We are. 7. I shall go for the doctor if you wish. 8. I shall do the work if it is necessary. 9. That man is richer than we are. 10. Why do you teU me to be brave? I am so already. 11. He carried the day over all his rivals. 12. Tell me where he Uves, if you know. 13. He is a Frenchman, and I am one (le) too. 14. Do you know the Robinsons? 15. Yes, they are very fastidious people, and I do not like to have [anything] to do with them. 16. There is the box; put the pens into it. 17. Go there, my child; do not stay here. 18. Do not go there, my daughter; you will hurt yourself. 19. Give them some, myhttle boy. 20. He is a bad man; I cannot trust him. 21. The earth about those flowers is dry; throw some water there, my daughter. 22. Let us not go away; let them laugh at us, if they will. 23. The children wash to go to the celebration; let us take them there. 24. That boy has apples and pears; let us ask him for some. 25. The boy has your knife; take it away from him. XLI a (§§ 359-373 continued) 1. My father did not hurt himself, but he had a narrow escape. 2. Every one for himself is too often the maxim of men. 3. One should not always be thinking of oneself. 4. The selfish live only for themselves. 5. Do you need money? 6. I do. 7. Do you come from London? 8. We do. 9. I cannot understand why he has a grudge against me. 10. However that may be, it is all over with him. 11. Have you any money ? 12. I have, but I should like to have more. 13. How many apples have you ? 14. I have six. 15. Here are some fine pears; do you wish any? 16. Yes, I should hke some, for I have none. 17. Switzerland is my country; I love its blue sky and free institutions. 18. I planted this apple tree; I hope I shall eat its fruit. 19. Do you ever think of your country when you are in foreign countries? 20. When I am far away, I always think of it. 21. My brother has gone home, and I am going too. 22. I see a crowd of people in the street; what is the matter? 23. Were you ever in Europe? 24. I never was. EXERCISES XLI b-XLII a 457 XLI b 1. The doctor is at home; shall I send for him? 2. There they are; go and get them. 3. There is some water; give us Bome, for we are thirsty. 4. Do not give them any; they do not need any. 5. Where are the children? 6. They are coming up the street. 7. Do not Usten to them; they are making sport of you. 8. There is my hat; give it to me, if you please. 9. That is my hat; do not give it to him. 10. Let us go away; it is getting late. 11. If you have any money, give me some. 12. He gives himself some, but he will not give us any. 13. Take us there. 14. Give it to us; do not give it to them. 15. You bother me, naughty dog. Go away. 16. I saw him, and gave him the money. 17. They are worthy people; I love and admire them. 18. Our duty to our parents is to love and obey them. 19. It is I who was there. 20. My father and I were not there. 21. What were you and he doing ? 22. He was writing, and I was reading. 23. He has a house of his own. 24. You and he were there, were you not? 25. There is the box; I should like to know whether there is anything in it. XLH a (§§ 374-377) On lui a coupe un bras. They cut off one of his arms. Se couper a la main. To cut one's hand. Elle lui a ferme la porta au nez. She shut the door in his face. Cela lui a fait venir I'eau k la That made his mouth water. bouche. Cette nuit; de toute la nuit. Last night; all night. 1. My father and yours will soon be here. 2. I have your books and my own. 3. Our friends are coming by the rail- way; yours are coming by the steamer. 4. My brother and sister have gone away; they wiU not be back till (avant) Wednesday next. 5. One should not fail to (de) pay one's debts. 6. I had my hair cut this morning; I am afraid I shall catch a cold. 7. The duke was presented to the queen, and he kissed her hand. 8. She has cut her finger. 9. I shall love him as long as my heart beats. 10. It was so warm that I 458 KXERCISES XLII b-XLIII a could not close my eyes (de) all night. 11. Close your eyes, and open your mouth. 12. He shuts his eyes to the Ught. 13. He was walking fwith] his eyes closed; he fell and broke his arm. 14. I have my hands full; I cannot help you. 15. I went to see him, but he shut the door in my face. 16. It is a very cold morning; will you not warm your hands ? 17. Thank you; my hands are not cold. 18. That clumsy fellow stepped on my toe, and he hurt me very much. XLH b 1. My head aches this morning; I did not close my eyes last night. 2. The sight of those beautiful apples made my mouth Water. 3. He stood there [with] his arms folded, awaiting his fate Uke a brave soldier. 4. As long as my heart beats, I shall never forget you. 5. If they come here, we shall shut the door in their face. 6. Did you see those poor children? Those beautiful pears made their mouths water. 7. Let us hope that the law has not lost its force in this country. 8. He has a watch of his own. 9. Whom do you mean; his father or her father? 10. I mean her father. 11. This house is his, not yours. 12. They lost their hves fighting for their {la) country. 13. Negroes have dark skins and large mouths. 14. One of my friends who is a doctor told me the following story. 15. I am going to take away these books of yours. 16. The difference between mine and thine is not always easy to determine. 17. I love very much these books of mine. 18. They cut ofif my finger. XLin a (§§ 378-388) 1. I have never read that book, but I have read this one, and I hke it very much. 2. These houses are not so fine as those. 3. You should not eat in that way. 4. Have patience, I shall be (pres.) there this moment. 5. Those who do wrong will be punished. 6. He of whom you were speaking yester- day has arrived. 7. Which {Lequel) of those horses do you like best? 8. I like the one you bought better than your brother's, but I like my own best. 9. This house and the one EXEHCISES XLIII b-XLIV a 459 in which our neighbors live will be sold to-morrow. 10. Our house and our neighbor's are both (en) brick [houses]. 11. These facts, and those discovered since that time, prove that, although he was a great scholar, he was wrong. 12. I saw the man (celui) last evening who wanted to buy my horse. 13. Who are those two gentlemen ? 14. This is Mr. Perrichon, and that is Mr. Poirier. 15. You are looking for apples; very well, will you take these or those? 16. I will take these; those are too small. 17. How (Combien) is butter selling to-day ? XLin b 1. That sells at two francs a pound, and this, which is finer, at two francs fifty centimes. 2. Gambetta and Hugo were distinguished men; the former was an orator, the latter a poet. 3. That is a fine horse ! How much is he worth ? 4. Why do these people not reply when we speak to them? 5. They are Russians; they do not understand you. 6. Who did that? 7. It was John who did it. 8. What time is it? 9. It is half-past ten. 10. What day of the month is it ? 11. To-day is the tenth. 12. Is that the house of which you spoke to me ? 13. No, it is the next one. 14. Who is that lady ? 15. She is the lady who fives next door. 16. What I fear is that he will never come back. 17. It is not that he is losing (§ 271, 5) his money, but he is destroying his health also. 18. It is time to go home. XLIV a (§§ 378-388 continued) C'est une belle chose que de pro- It is a fine thing to protect the teger las faibles. weak. Ce sont des qtialites n€cessaires Mildness and firmness are neces- pour regner que la douceur et sary quaUties for ruling. la fermete. II a cela de bon. He has this good thing about him. 1. It is they who have done it. 2. It was kind of you to help (secourir) those poor people. 3. You can do it; it is easy. 4. That was not kind of you; you should have allowed me to do it. 5. You are rich; it is easy for you to say so. 460 EXERCISES XLIV b-XLV a 6. It is a pity that we did not know it sooner. 7. It is un- fortunate that he did not come yesterday. 8. My father told me you were here; that is why I came. 9. It is to be feared that the traveler has died of hunger. 10. It is to be desired that those misfortunes will never happen. 11. What we were speaking of has happened. 12. What I am thinking of is the way of preventing that misfortune. 13. What he says is true. 14. It's a fine thing, (is) money ! 15. It is not to you that I speak. 16. He has lost all his money, which is sad. XLIV b 1. What a beautiful thing is virtue! 2. It is money that he wishes. 3. He is a fine (brave) young man (is) John I 4. It would be a good thing to go away. 5. It is a fine thing to love virtue. 6. Health and good sense are qualities neces- sary for succeeding in the world. 7. You are the one who did that. 8. Love is the strongest of aU passions. 9. This does not belong to me, but that does. 10. Give me this; keep that for yourself. 11. He has this good thing about him, that he always tells the truth. 12. What a lazy beast; and yet he thinks that he works ! 13. Did he give you back your pencil? 14. No, but that does not matter; I have another here. 15. It is difficult to translate the word 'that' into French. 16. I am sure that that 'that' that that man uses is superfluous. XLV a (§§ 389-402) 1. Whom did you see yesterday? 2. I saw him who was with you the day before yesterday. 3. I told you already what my reasons are. 4. What sort of weather is it this morning? 5. I think it will be fine. 6. I do not know to which of those men we were speaking. 7. What fine weather ! I hope it will continue until we leave. 8. Who is that ? 9. It is the man I sold my house to. 10. What was the matter this morning? I heard a great noise in the street. 11. What were you speaking of to that man you met ? 12. I was speaking to him of what we were discussing yesterday. 13. Scoundrel EXERCISE XLV b 461 that you are, if I catch you, I'll give you what you deserve. 14. What I complain of is that you make no progress in youi studies. 15. I do not understand you; will you explain to me clearly what you mean? 16. What has become of that young gentleman with whom I saw you? 17. I don't know what has become of him; I have not seen him lately. 18. Which of those ladies did you see ? 19. I saw the one that was here yesterday. 20. What are you thinking of? 21. I am think- ing of what we are going to do to-morrow. 22. What did your father ask you to do? 23. I have done what he asked me to do. XLV b 1. The gentleman whose son was visiting us last year will come himself next year. 2. The lady whose daughter has just been married wiU spend some weeks with us next summer. 3. The people of whom I speak would never do such a thing. 4. I who am your friend tell you so, and you ought to believe it. 5. It was we who gave them their liberty, and yet to-day they are our enemies. 6. He has gone away and, what is worse, he has not paid his debts. 7. That is very strange ! I sent him a letter, and yet he says he never received it. S. To whom are you speaking, sir? 9. It is to you I am speaking, and I want (voudrais) you to pay attention to what I say, 10. The house they are coming out of belongs to my father. 11. The people of the viUage from which he came were very glad to be rid of him. 12. The gentleman for whose house I offered such a high price has bought another. 13. The cause for which those soldiers fought was the deliverance of their country. 14. The man in whom I trust wiU not deceive me. 15. That child is deaf and dumb, which is a great pity, for he seems very intelligent. 16. I thank you very much. 17. Don't mention it. 18. What I was expecting was that he would pay me. 19. That is not a poor man; he is well off. 20. Where is the pen I made use of yesterday? 21. Take what you need; there will be enough for all. 22. Which way did you come this morning? 23. I came the way you cam« yesterday. 462 EXERCISES XLVI a-XLVI b XLVI a (§§ 403-407) 1. Certain people say the criminal has escaped. 2. Each day brings (amener) its labor. 3. We rise every morning at six o'clock. 4. I have seen him many a time. 6. I have no apples, but I have some pears and peaches. 6. However great and rich we may be, we must die. 7. Whatever your intentions were, your actions were not good. 8. However good your intentions were, you did not succeed in doing us good. 9. We should respect the rights of others. 10. Every one for himself is, happily, not a maxim which everybody practises. 11. If we do not love others, others will not love us. 12. Those children will receive, each one at his majority, their portion of their father's estate. 13. Mother, will you come down? You are wanted. 14. It is said that the robber has been caught. 15. It is not known whether the ship was wrecked or not. 16. When one is pretty (§ 405, 3, e), one is rarely ignorant of it. 17. People wonder why that young man associates with {frequenter) those scoundrels. 18. When one seea a noble action, it {cela) always gives one pleasure. 19. I have never seen any one who had so many noble qualities. 20. I am afraid to say anything about it to any one. 21. No one has ever done anything like that. 22. What a beautiful viewl Did you ever see anything like it ? 23. He went away with- out visiting any one. 24. Did you find anything where you were looking yesterday? 25. I do not know any one of his friends. 26. I doubt whether any one of you will do so. XLVI b 1. If I can do it without any expense, I shall do it wiUingly. 2. I do not like this book; give me another. 3. That httle boy has had one apple, and now he wants another. 4. French- men often laugh at us (others), because we are less gay than they. 5. This man I have seen elsewhere, but that one I never saw anywhere. 6. These are the same people that were here yesterday morning. 7. That lady is goodness itself. 8. Even if you were to say so, I should not believe it. 9. That is a young man in whom I have confidence; I shall put him in EXERCISE XLVII a 463 a position to make his fortune. 10. Were there any children at the meeting? 11. Yes, there were several. 12. I shall never accept such conditions. 13. I never saw such a foolish man. 14. If he were to say such a thing to me, I should put him out of doors. 15. He spent his whole hfe in doing good. 16. Our neighbor's daughters have become quite tall. 17. He comes to town every other week. 18. Where are the children ? Both were here a little while ago. 19. I found two apples in the basket, but neither is good. 20. Any line being given, draw a straight line which shaU be equal to it. 21. There is no reason whatever which can persuade me. 22. Whoever has stolen that poor woman's money ought to be punished. 23. Whoever he is who told you that, he is mistaken. 24. Whatever that man may do, he will never succeed. 25. Whatever the reason may be, he never comes to see us. XLVn a (§§ 408-420) 1. I will not sell it, cheap or dear. 2. You did it on pur- pose, did you not? 3. Not at all, it was quite accidental. 4. A Christian ought to love not only his friends, but even his enemies. 5. Those poor people had scarcely any bread to eat when we found them. 6. We have said nothing at all about it. 7. That is a very complicated affair; I can under- stand nothing of it. 8. We did not see a Uving soul in the street when we rose that morning. 9. Whom did you see? I saw nobody at aU. 10. I shall be silent, so as not to hinder you from working. 11. He told me to do nothing until he returned. 12. I went away so as not to be punished. 13. What is the matter with that Uttle boy? 14. I do not know, sir; I neither did nor said anything to him. 15. Would you not be glad to see our old friend ? 16. No, I wish neither to see him nor to speak to him. 17. I have a headache this evening; I can neither sing nor play. 18. Neither he nor his father was there. 19. I saw neither him nor his brother. 20.* I have neither friend nor money, but I have strong arms and courage. 21. No more regrets; take courage, and forget the past. 22. Why did he not tell me so before leading ma ii64 EXERCISES XLVII b-XLVIII a into this peril ? 23. There is nobody here he does not Isnow. 24. Take care that you are not deceived. 25. There is noth« ing which does not please me better than that. XLVn b 1. Not one of those we invited has come. 2. Do you know where Dr. B. lives? 3. I cannot tell you. 4. If you have no use for this book, lend it to me. 5. Unless you do what you said, I shall not pay you. 6. Do you not fear he will go away ? 7. I do not fear he will go away. 8. I am afraid our friends will not be there. 9. If I were afraid he would do it, I should do something to hinder him (from it). 10. If I were not afraid he would hurt himself with the knife, I should let him have it. 11. That man writes better than he speaks. 12. We do not wish more money than we have now. 13. I do not doubt that that is true. 14. Not much is lacking for the number to be complete. 15. We have not seen each other for three years. 16. It is more than three years since we were there. 17. I cannot go with you; I have no time. 18. Yes, you have, you are not so busy. 19. You have stolen my apples. 20. I tell you I have not. 21. But I say yes, for I saw you. 22. He has as much money as you have, but he has not as much as I have. 23. Let us say no more about it. 24. We are in a hurry; let us not stay any longer. 25. I have moie than fifty francs, but he has more than I, and his brother has still more. XLVm a (§§ 421-430) II a line vingtaine d'annees. He is about twenty (years old). D a una trentaine de mille francs. He has about thirty thousand francs. 1. Columbus discovered America in the year 1492. 2. The French national /^te is celebrated on the fourteenth of July, because [on] that day the Bastille was taken. 3. My father left England on the first of May, 1824. 4. Napoleon the First was a greater man than Napoleon the Third. 5. Charles the First of England and Louis the Sixteenth of France were EXERCISES XLvm b-XLix a 465 both beheaded. 6. The first train leaves at a quarter to five in the morning, and the second at twenty minutes past two in the afternoon. 7. We went to bed last night at half-past twelve. 8. The first two houses in (de) the street belong to us. 9. We have only the last two chapters in the book to read. 10. The carriage arrived at half-past one in the morn- ing. 11. The father gave his son a fifth of his property when the son was twenty-one. 12. How old would you say (What age would you give) that man is? 13. I should say he is about forty. 14. It is twenty years since I saw him. 15. That man is weU off; he has an income of about twenty thousand francs a year. 16. The first volume of his works contains poetry, and the fourth two novels. XLvni b 1. This house cost three times as much as that one. 2. Ten times ten make a hundred. 3. We paid (Ex. XXXIII a) a hun- dred and twenty dollars for that horse. 4. That carriage cost one thousand one hundred doUars. 6. That old man is eighty- five years old. 6. COn^ what day of the month did that happen ? 7. It happened on the twelfth. 8. That table is two meters long by one meter wide. 9. We are going to have a house built twenty meters long by ten wide. 10. What time is it ? 11. It is just noon. 12. A boy ten years old was killed last evening by a carriage in the Boulevard des Italiens. 13. That girl is older than her brother by two years. 14. I am taller than my brother by two inches. 15. Will you come at two o'clock or at three? 16. I shall be there precisely at three. 17. Is that boy ten years old or eleven? 18. He is eleven. XLIX a (§§ 431-454) 1. I was thinking of what you were talking about this morn- ing. 2. He paid about twenty francs for that hat. 3. He will be here about six o'clock in the evening. 4. The day after our arrival we went to see the museum. 5. That cliild has black eyes; he takes after his father. 6. The money was divided amongst the children. 7. Amongst all those people 466 EXERCISE XLIX b there is not one sensible person. 8. Art arrived at Qa) per- fection among the Greeks. 9. He was at my house when I was at his. 10. They all laughed at my expense. 11. We all laughed at him. 12. The thief will have to appear before the court. 13. He will be here before a quarter past three. 14. That is greater by half than what we expected. 15. That box is six feet long by two wide. 16. It is a quarter to four by my watch. 17. I know that man by sight only. 18. He will leave for France in a week. 19. We Uved in that city for twenty years. 20. I have been here for two years. 21. I traded my black horse for this white one. 22. I thanked him for his kindness. 23. From the fifteenth of May I shaU hve in that house. 24. They drank their wine from golden cups. 25. That picture is painted from nature. XLIX b 1. In spring the weather is warm and the flowers open. 2. There is not so much misery in the United States as in Russia. 3. Let us live in peace with everybody. 4. There are several nations in North America. 5. Not one in a hun- dred was good. 6. Is your house (in) brick or stone ? 7. It was kind of you to aid me in my misfortune. 8. In rainy weather we stay at home. 9. We shall go away on Saturday. 10. He is now on the road for England. 11. Our house is on this side of the street, and his is on that side. 12. When you come to the next street, turn to the right. 13. Instead of studying he is always looking out of the window. 14. His gun was hanging above the chimney. 15. The dog jumped over the fence. 16. He watched over my interests. 17. In passing through the forest we saw many rare plants. 18. We work from morning till night. 19. We are going to our friends' house. 20. The train for Paris will be here immediately. 21. They sold those goods under their value. 22. Wicked men tread God's laws under foot. 23. If you will live with us, we shall treat you well. 24. Do you remember the man with the big nose whom we saw yesterday? 25. She told us her story with tears in her eyes. EXERCISES L a-Li a 467 L a (§§ 455-459) 1. For fear it should rain, we shall not go away to-day. 2. He did his work so that all were pleased with him. 3. Un- less you come to-morrow, we shall not wait for you. 4. Both he and his brother were there. 5. Go and get us some bread. 6. She neither laughs nor cries. 7. Those poor people are without bread or meat. 8. He does not beUeve what you say, nor I either. 9. We shall not be there, nor he either. 10. We have not gone away, nor shall we. 11. As soon as you are there and have the time, will you go and visit my brother? 12. If he is there and we see him, we shall tell him what you say. 13. When bread is dear and the weather is cold, the poor suffer. 14. I think we shall go away the day after to- morrow. 15. If your friend comes to the meeting and I am there, I shall speak to him. 16. Since you went away, I have been writing letters. 17. Since you cannot do it, you must let me try. 18. Since you went away yesterday, he has done nothing but play. 19. Since every action brings its recom- pense [with itj, we must pay attention to what we do. 20. While I was doing my exercise, she was writing her letters. 21. The good shall be rewarded, whilst the bad shall be pun- ished. 22. When I saw Mm, he was busy working in his field. 23. As long as the world lasts, justice shall prevail over in- justice. 24. He did his work so that he was praised by all. 25. He was kind to the poor so that he might be praised by aU. LI a The largest clock in the world will be the one * which soon » will adorn the city hall of P. The dial of this colossal clock will be 3 ten meters in diameter, and will be placed and illuminated so as to be visible night and day (de) every- where in the city. The hands will be, one ^ four meters and the other three meters long; the bell of the striking part will weigh forty-six thousand pounds, and in order to wind the clock, a steam engine placed in the tower will be used daily ( = one will use daily a steam-engine, etc.). » § 381. » S 413. • S 428, obs. 3. « S 406, 7 (1), a. 468 EXERCISES Lii a-Liv a LU a Horses/ birds,* and animals * of all (the) sorts speak a language as weU as men.i We cannot understand all ( = all that which) they say, but we understand enough of it to» know that they have thoughts ' and feeUngs.^ They are sad when they lose a companion, or when they are driven away « from home. They are pleased when they are well treated,' and angry when they are ill treated.* They have, so to speak, a conscience; they feel ashamed when they do what displeases as, and are very glad when they merit our approbation. Kind- ness 1 on our part towards them is as reasonable as love ^ and kindness ^ between brothers.* • § 321. ' § 282, 2. » § 322. * § 241, 2, o. Lm a A rich 1 man, it is said,=' once ' asked * a learned man what was ^ the reason that scientific men were ^ so often * seen at the doors of the rich, while ^ the rich were ' very rarely seen * at the doors of the learned. "It is," replied * the scholar, "be- cause the man of science knows the value of riches,' but the rich man does not always know the value of science. " ' • § 351. ' § 413. 6 I 258, 5. ' § 321. « § 241, 2, a. < § 260. « § 459, 2. LIV a Moliire, the great French * author, was born ^ in Paris in the year one thousand six hundred and twenty-two.* His father was the king's upholsterer, and was probably a rather rich* man. The son received ^ a good education, but not much is known ^ of his youth. When he was about twenty years old,'' he organized * a company of actors, which was ^ called L'lllustre TMdire. But in this enterprise he did not succeed * very well. He soon ' lost ^ all his money, and with his troupe was ^ forced to ' leave Paris and (to) make a tour in ^the] province[s]. This tour lasted ^ from sixteen hundred and forty-six to sixteeo hundred and fifty-eight. During these years he traveled* EXERCISES LV a-LVI a 469 over nearly the whole of France, and played ^ in many of the large cities. After his return to Paris he became ' the king's favorite, and produced ^ the masterpieces which have ren- dered him so celebrated. At last, after fifteen years of great success, he died ^ in sixteen hundred and seventy-three at the age of fifty-one. 1 § 352, 1 (2). 3 I 421, c. 6 § 260. ' § 430. > § 280, 6. 2 Past Def. * § 351. « § 241, 2, o. » § 413. LV a Speaking of the small world in which even the greatest live,' Lord Beaconsfield used to tell ^ that Napoleon I, a year after his accession to the throne, determined to ' find out if there was * anybody in the world who had never heard of him. Within a fortnight the police of Paris had ^ discovered a wood-chopper at Montmartre, in Paris itself, who had never heard of the Revolution, nor of the death of Louis XVI, nor of the Emperor Napoleon. 1 § 237, 6. 2 I 258, 2. ' § 280, 6. * § 258, 5. « § 232, 1. LVI a Napoleon, the greatest general of modern times, ^ was born' at Ajaccio on the 15th of August, 1769. At the age of ten ' he was sent to the mihtary^ school at Brienne, where he re- mained more than ^ five years. Then entering the French^ army, he was, in 1796, appointed general of the army of Italy,^ and soon succeeded in conquering' that country. He used so well the opportunities which were offered him by the weakness of the Republic that in less than ten years he was elected Emperor. The ten years' struggle, in which he engaged with the purpose of subduing « Europe,' ended with the battle of Waterloo in 1815. Banished to (a) St. Helena (no art.) he died 1" there on the 5th of May, 1821. Twenty years after his death, his remains were brought back to (em) France, and interred in the Hdtel des InvaKdes. • § 321. ' § 430, obs. 2. ' § 412, 1, b. ' § 279, 2. • § 333, 1. •Past Def. * §352,1(2). • § 333, 2, note. ' §280,2. " mourut oi est mort. 470 EXERCISES LVII a-LVIII a LVn a Great Britain ' and Ireland ^ are two large islands in (A) the west of Europe.^ Great Britain is the larger of the two and comprises England/ Scotland/ and Wales. ^ The monarch of the United I Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland ^ for {pen- dant) many years was Queen Victoria ' who was born * on the 24th of May, 1819. She was the daughter of the Duke of Kent, son of George III. She ascended the throne on (d) the death of William IV in 1837. When she appeared before (Ze) parlia- ment at Westminster for the first time, she declared that she would place her trust in the wisdom of her parliament and the love of her people, and she did not fail to {de) keep this promise. Having thus early won the hearts of all her subjects, she re- tained their affection during a long reign of more than sixty years. Queen Victoria married Prince ^ Albert in 1840. He died in 1861. She died forty years afterwards, on January 22""*, 1901. Her son Edward VII succeeded her {lui) and died in 1910. The present king, son ^ of Edward VII, is called George V. ' § 333, 1. ' § 333, 2, a, note. » § 327. < § 260. s § 330, 4. LVm a There was,^ in the city of Micon, a parrot which had learned to '^ say continually: "Who is there? Who is there?" This parrot escaped one day from its cage in the garden, and soon ' flew into a wood near by, where a peasant saw it, and began to ^ chase it. The peasant had never seen a parrot in {de) all his life. He approached * the tree where the bird was, and was going to * kiU the poor bird with his gun. At that moment the parrot began to ^ repeat the usual question: " Who is there ? Who is there?" The peasant, terrified at these words, let his gun fall « from his hands. Then taking his hat off, he said, very respectfully: " My dear sir, I pray you to ^ excuse me, I thought that it was a bird." ' § 250. » § 413. ' § 278, 6. « § 230, 6, a, and 7, ' § 280, 6. » § 279, 6. * § 296, 1. EXERCISES LIX a-LX a 471 LIX a The unknown ^ author of Beowulf was not a ' native ol England, and so the first of the long line of English ' poets ia reaUy Csedmon. Bseda tells us a pretty story of the way in which * Caedmon became a ^ poet. He was already almost an ^ old man before he knew anything ^ of the art of poetry. At the feasts, in those days, everybody used to sing ^ in turn to ' amuse the company, but Csedmon used to leave ^ the table before the harp was given ' to him. One evening, when he had done thus, he went to the stable and lay down, after hav- ing ' cared for the cattle, because, you must know, he was only a farm servant in the monastery at Whitby. As he slept,'" some one appeared to him, and said, "Caedmon, sing a song to me." "I cannot '^ sing," he replied, "and that is why I left the feast." "Nevertheless," was the answer, "you must sing to me." "Well, then," asked Csedmon, "what shall I sing?" The other replied, "Sing the beginning of created things."'^ Thereupon he made some verses, which he still remembered when he awoke. The Abbess Hilda, hearing of his dream, believed (that) the grace of God had been given him, and made him a ^ monk. ' § 352, 1 (3). ■• § 398. ' § 282, 2. • § 282, 4. " § 230, 4, ' § 330, 3. ' § 405, 4, o. « % 241, 2, a. >» § 258, 1. « § 321. ' §352, 1 (2). 8 §258, 2. LX a A miser went ' one day to market,^ and bought ' some ' fine apples. He carried ' them home, arranged ^ them carefully in his cupboard, and used to go * and look at them almost every day, but would ^ not eat any until they began to spoil. Every time he did eat one he regretted it. But he had a son, a young school-boy, who liked apples; and one day, with a comrade, he found the miser's treasure. I do not know how he found the key of the cupboard; but he did,^ and you may imagine how many apples they ate. When they had ^ finished the apples, the old father came and caught them. How angry ' he was ! How he shouted at them! "Wretches! where are my beauti- 472 EXERCISES Lxi a-Lxii a ful apples ? You shall both be hanged ! You have eaten them all!" His son replied: " Do not be angry, father ! ' You only eat the bad apples; we have not touched (d) those; we have eaten the good ones, and left you yours." 1 § 260. » 1 324, 1. ' § 265, 1, 6. ' § 262, 3. • § 376, 4. 2 § 331, ex. 4. < § 258, 2. « § 256. » § 350, o. LXI a A hungry ^ fox was one day looking for ^ a poultry yard. It was late in the afternoon, and, as he was passing ' a farm- house, he saw ^ a cock and some hens which had * gone up into a tree for the night. He drew near,^ and invited * them to ^ come down and' rejoice with him on account of a new treaty of peace which had been formed between the animals. The cock said he was * very glad of it, but that he did not intend ' to ^ come down before the next morning. "But," said he, "I see two dogs coming; '" I have no doubt they will be " glad to 1^ celebrate the peace with you." Just then the fox remem- bered that he had business i' elsewhere, and, bidding the cock good-bye, began ^ to run. "Why do you run?" said the cock, "if the animals have made a peace, the dogs won't hurt you. I know them, they are good, loyal " dogs, and would not harm any one." "Ah," said the fox, "I am afraid they have '^ not yet heard the news." ' § 352, 1 (3). < § 260. ' § 456, 2. " § 287, 3. " § 323. ' § 258, 1; § 296, 3. ' § 229; § 262, 2.' § 258, 5. " § 269, 5. " § 352. ' § 258, 1. « § 279, 6. » § 280, 2, a. " § 356. " § 269, 4, a. LXII a A woodman, who was cutting ^ wood on the bank of a river, let 2 his ax fall ' into the water. He at once * began ^ to ^ pray [to] the gods to « find it for him. Mercury appeared ^ and asked 2 him what was' the matter. "I have lost my ax," said 2 he. Having heard this, Mercury dived ^ into the water, and brought 'i up a golden ax. "Is this » yours?" "No," Baid the man. Next time Mercury brought up a silver one. "Is this one yours?" "No," said^ the chopper again. The EXERCISES Lxiii a-Lxiv a 473 third time Mercury brought up an iron one, which the man recognized, as soon as he saw^ it. "It is yours," said the god, "and for your honesty I shall give you the other two also." 1 § 258, 1. » § 230, 6, a, and 7. ' § 279, 6. ' § 258, 5. « § 236, 2 2 § 260. * § 413. • § 280, 6. LXm a Two men were traveling * together, when they saw ^ a bear coming out ' of the forest. The one climbed into a tree, and tried to * conceal himself in the branches. The other, when he saw that the bear would ( = was going to) attack him, threw himself upon the ground, and, when the bear came up, he ceased to * breathe, for it is said ^ that a bear will not touch ' a dead ' body. When the bear had * gone, his companion came down, and asked: "What was it that the bear was saying to you?" His friend replied: "He advised me not' to travel with a friend who runs away at the approach of danger, "i" ' § 258, 1. ' § 287, 3. ' § 241, 2, a. ' § 352, 1 (3). • § 416, a. * § 260. ■• § 280, 6. e § 296, 5. » § 262, 3. " § 321. LXIV a A well-known ^ English ^ actor, traveling to Birmingham by the Great Western ' railway the other day, on approaching * Banbury, began to feel hungry, and determined to have one of the buns for (par) which the town is famous. The train having stopped, he called a boy, gave him six- pence, and asked him to get "two Banburys," promising him one of the two for his trouble. Just as the train was about to start, the boy rushed up to the carriage in which the impatient actor was seated, and offering him three pence, exclaimed: "Here's your change, sir." "Bother the change; where's the bun?" roared the hungry actor. "There was only one left," replied the boy, "and I'm eating that!" • § 352, 1 (3). 2 § 352, 1 (2). » § 330, 4, c, note. * 5 296. 1. 474 EXERCISES LXV a-LXVI a LXV a Under a magnificent walnut tree near the village, two little boys found a walnut. "It belongs to me," said the one, "for it was 1 I ^ who was the first to see it ( = who have seen it the first)." "No, it belongs to me," exclaimed the other, "for it was 1 1 2 who picked it up." Thereupon there ^ arose between them a violent quarrel. "I am going to make peace * between you," said to them a third boy, who was passing at that mo- ment. The latter placed himself between the two claimants, opened the walnut, and pronounced this sentence: "One of the shells belongs to him ^ who was the first to see the walnut; the other to him ^ who picked it up; as to the kernel, I keep it for the costs of the court. That's how lawsuits * generally end," added he, laughing. » § 257, 3, 6. 2 I 372, 3. 3 § 252, 2. * § 321. ' § 381. LXVI a Many years ago ^ a celebrated ^ physician who was very fond of animals lived in the city of Paris. One day a friend of his ' brought to his house a favorite ^ dog, whose leg had been broken, and asked him if he could do anything for the poor creature. The kind doctor examined the wounded * animal, and, prescribing a treatment for him, soon cured him, and received the warm thanks of his friend, who set a very high value upon his dog. Not very long afterwards, the doctor was in his room busy studying.* He thought ^ he heard a noise at the door, as if some animal was scratching in order to be let ' in. For some time he paid no attention to the noise, but con- tinued studying.' At last, however, he rose and opened the door. To his great astonishment he saw enter the dog which he had cured, and with him another dog. The latter also had a broken ^ leg, and was able to move only with much difficulty. The dog which the surgeon had cured had brought his friend to his benefactor, in order that he, too, might be ^ healed; and he made the doctor " understand that this was what he wanted. » § 250, 4. ' § 377, 3. = § 279, 2. ' § 241, 2, a. » § 271, 2. 2 i 351. * § 352, 1 (3). « § 283, 1. « § 279, 6. '" § 230, 6, 6. LXVii a-LXViii a, 475 LXVII a There was once a cat who was a ^ great enemy of the rats. He had eaten a great many,'' and they were much afraid of him. So the chiefs of the rats called a meeting to ' discuss what they should do to ' rid themselves of him. A great many plans were proposed, but after a little discussion they were all abandoned. At last a young rat, who thought himself very clever, rose and said: "Do not despair, my friends, I have not yet proposed a plan. A splendid idea occurs to me ; I know what we can do. We can, if we are economical, soon save enough money to ' buy a httle bell. This we can attach to the neck of our old enemy, and, if he approaches, we can * flee to (dans) a place of safety." The young rats all applauded the idea, but one of the old [ones], who up to this time had said nothing, gravely * asked the one who had made the speech if he would promise to put the bell on the cat. The young rat blushed, and said he would think of it.^ The meeting broke up shortly after, and the rats dispersed without doing anything.' » § 330, 3. » § 282, 2. <■ § 413. « § 368. ' § 405, 4, a. • § 367, 2 (1). * § 263, 2. LXVIII a Long ago ^ the frogs, tired of having ^ a republic, resolved to ' ask Jupiter to send them a king. Jupiter did not receive their petition with much favor but, as they seemed really to * desire one, he thought (that) it would be better to please ' them. So, one fine day, when they were all expecting ^ their king, a great log fell from the sky into the pond where they were.* They were very much afraid of the noise ' it made, and they took refuge in holes and in the mud at the bottom of the pond. Little by little, however, they approached » their king to ' get a good look at him, and, seeing that he was so quiet, they became more bold, and finally leaped on him, a.nd treated him with great familiarity ( = very familiarly). Then they complained again to Jupiter saying that the king he had 476 LXix a-LXX a sent was not worthy of their respect, and that they desired another, who would show i° more vigor. In order to please them, Jupiter sent them this time a stork, who immediately began to devour them with much avidity. They complained again, but Jupiter told them that, since '■''■ they had desired a king, they would be forced to submit quietly to the one '^ he had sent. > § 250, 4. ' § 278, 6. ' § 402, 1. » § 282, 2. " § 459, 3. ! §280, 2. ' §296, 2. » §296, 1. i° §270, 1. " §381; 402, 1. ' § 280, 6. « § 258, 1. LXIX a The two youngest of my children were already in bed and asleep, the third had ^ gone out, but at my return I found him sitting beside my gate, weeping ^ very sore. I asked him the reason. "Father," ' said he, "I took this morning from ^ my mother, without her knowing ^ it, one of those three apples you brought her, and I kept ° it a long while; but, as I was playing some time ago ' with my little brother in the street, a slave that went ' by snatched it out of my hands, and carried it off; I ran after him asking for it, and, besides, told him that it belonged to my mother, who was iU, and that you had taken a fortnight's journey to fetch it; but all in vain, he would ' not give it back. And because I stiU followed him, crying out, he stopped and beat me, and then ran away as fast as he could, from one street to another, till at length I lost sight of him. I have since then been walking outside the town, expecting your return, to pray you, dear father, not to tell my mother [of] it, lest it (cela) should make her worse." And when he had i° said these words, he began weeping again more bitterly than ever. > § 229. = § 376, 4. 6 § 271, 5. ' § 250, 4. • § 265, 1, b. 2 § 286, 2. * § 296, 4. « § 259, 2. » § 258, 1. " § 262, 3. LXX a A celebrated Italian i painter had told his pupils to ^ ask the name of any (tout) person who might come ' to his housa Lxxi a-ucxii a 477 during ids absence in the city. One day three gentlemen came to * see the painter, and the latter was net at home. One of the pupils, whose name was John, opened the door foi them,^ said that his master was not in, and let them depart without asking their names. When the master returned and ^ heard of the three gentlemen, he asked ' John who they were. John could say nothing but, "I do not know, sir." The painter got angry, but John, with a few strokes of his pencil, drew (faire) the portrait of the three, and gave it to his master, who immediately ^ recognized them. The artist admired the skill of the young man so much that he took the drawing, and kept it afterwards among his most precious possessions. It is need- less to ' add that he pardoned the pupil. {II est may be omitted.) » § 352, 1 (2). 3 § 270, 1. ' § 362, 2. ' § 296, 2. • § 384, 1, a. s § 280, 6. * § 278, 6. • § 458, 2. » § 413. LXXI a A man (celui) who would ^ have friends must show himself friendly. A man (Jurnvme) was passing the night at {dans) an inn.. He had just left a town where he had spent several years. The landlord asked ^ him why he had left the (cei) place. He re- plied, "Because my neighbors were so disagreeable and dis- obliging that one could not live with them." The landlord repUed, "You will find exactly the same sort of neighbors where, you are going." The following day, another traveler came from the same place. He told the landlord that he was obliged to leave the place where he had been living, and that it caused him great pain to part with his neighbors, who had been so kind and obliging. The landlord encouraged him by telling ' him that he would find exactly the same sort of neighbors where he was going. » § 230, 1. » I 296, 2. » § 286, 3. LXXII a When I was * at school, I was ' often very idle. Even in [the] class I used to play * with boys as idle as myself. We 478 EXERCISE LXXIII a used to try*i to hide this from' our master, but one day he caught ' us cleverly. "You must not be idle," said he. "You must not raise your ^ eyes from your books. You do not know what you lose by idleness.5 Study while you are young; you will not be able to study when you are « old. If any one sees another boy who is not studying, let him tell me." ' "Now," said I to myself, "there is Fred Smith; I do not hke him. If I see that he is not studying, I shall tell." ' Soon after, I saw Fred Smith looking » out of the window, and I told the master what I had seen. "Indeed!" said he, "how do you know he was idle?" "If you please, sir," said I, "I saw^ him." "0 you saw' him, and where were your eyes when you saw ' him?" 1 saw the other boys laugh,* and I was ashamed, for the master smiled, and said it was a good lesson for me. > § 258. ' § 260. ' § 321. ' § 365. • § 259, 2. 2 § 296, 4. ■> § 328. . « § 263, 2. « § 287, 3. LXXIII a The princes of Europe ' have found out a manner of reward- ing ^ their subjects who have behaved well, by presenting ' them [with] about two yards of blue * ribbon, which is worn * on the shoulder. Those who are honored with this mark of distinction are called knights, and the king himself is always at the head of the order. This is a cheap method of recom- pensing ^ the most important services ; and it is very fortunate for kings ^ that their subjects are ^ satisfied with such ' trifling rewards. Should ' a nobleman lose his leg in a battle, the king presents him with two yards of ribbon, and he is recompensed for the loss of his leg. Should ' an ambassador spend all his fortune in '" supporting the honor of his country abroad, the king presents him with two yards of ribbon, which is con- sidered ^ the equivalent of his estate. In short, as long as a European king has a yard or two of blue or green ribbon, he will not lack statesmen, generals, and soldiers. 1 § 333, 2. ' § 286, 3. <■ § 241, 2. ? § 269, 4. • § 275. « § 280, 2. ' § 352, 1 (1). « § 321. » § 406, 5, a, note. " § 279, 2. Lxxiv a-LXXv a 479 LXXIV a At a time when ancient art was attracting so much atten- tion in Italy that modern art ^ was being neglected,^ Michael Angelo had resort to a stratagem in order to teach the critics the folly of judging such things according to fashion ^ or repu- tation. ' He made a statue which represented ' a beautiful girl {jeune fille) asleep/ and, breaking off an arm, buried the statue in a place where excavations were being made.^ It was soon found, and was lauded by critics ^ and by the pubhc as a valuable relic of antiquity, i When Michael Angelo thought the time opportune, he produced the broken arm, and, to the great mortification of the critics, revealed himself as the sculptor. 1 § 321. 2 § 241, 2. 3 § 258, 3. * §352, 1 (3). LXXV a Had you seen us, Mr. Harley, when we were turned out of South-hill, I am sure you would have wept at that sight. You remember old Trusty, my dog; I shall never forget it while I live (fut.); the poor creature (bite) was old and almost blind, and could scarce crawl after us to the door; he went, however, as far as the gooseberry-bush, which, as you may remember, stood on the left side of the yard; he was wont to bask in the sun there; when he had reached that spot, he stopped; we went on (continuer notre chemin) ; I called him ; he wagged his tail, but did not stir; I called again; he lay down; I whistled, and cried "Trusty"; ha gave a howl, and died! I could have lain down and died ( = should have Uked to lie down and die) too; but God gave me ^ strength to (de) live for my children. 1 §321. VOCABULARY FRENCH-ENGLISH a [a] S sg. pres. indie, avoir a [a] to, towards, at, for, in, into, around, by, with, from; — votre montre by your watch; — demain good-bye till to- morrow abondant [aboda] abundant abord: d'^ [daboir] at first, first (of all), at the outset abreuvei [abrcEve] to water, fill, soak accent [aksa] m. accent, tone accepter [aksepte] to accept accident [aksida] m. accident, incident accompagner [akopajie] to ac- company, go with accord [akoir] m. agreement; Stre d' — to agree accourir [akuriir] § 164 to run or hasten up; run or hasten to one's aid accourut [akury] 3 sg. past d^. accourir accueil [akoeij] m. welcome achat [aja] m. purchase acheter [ajte] § 158 to buy, pur- chase acti-f [aktif] -ve active, energetic action [aksjo] /. action actuellement [aktqelma] now, at this very time AdSle [add] /. Adile adieu [adj03 m. good-bye, fare- well 481 admettre [admstr] § 198 to admi< afiectueu-x [afEktq0] -se affec- tionate, kindly afin de [afeda] + infin. in order to afin que [afeka] in order that, that (takes subjunctive) Afrique [afrik] /. Africa age [a:5} m. age, century, time; en — de of an age to; quel — a-t-il ? how old is he? kge [aise] aged, old agent [asa] m. agent; — de police poHceman agir Casijr] to act, operate, work, move, manage; il s'agit de it is a question of agreable [agreabl] agreeable, pleasant agricole [agrikol] agricultural ai [e] 1 sg. pres. ind. avoir aider [ede] to aid, help, assist aie £e2 1 sg. pres. subj. and 2 sg. impve. avoir ailleurs [ajceir] elsewhere; d' — moreover, besides, furthermore aimable [smabl] kind, amiable, nice aimer [sme] to love, like; — mietix to prefer ainsi [esi] thus, so; — que as, just as; pour — dire so to say air [s:r] m. air, atmosphere; air, look, appearance; 4 1' — , en 1' — in the air; le grand — the open air; en plein — in the open air; avoir I' — de to seem to 482 VOCABaLART aise Ce:z] /. gladness; ease, con- venience; k ton — comfort- ably, at your ease, just as you like, suit yourself aisement [szemaj easily ait [e] S sg. pres. subj. avoir ajouter [asute] to add algebra [alssibr] /. algebra Allah [alia] to. Allah Allemagne [almap] /. Germany allemand [ahna] adj. German; 1' — m. German (language); un Allemand a German aller [ale] § 160 to go, be {of health) ; f- infin. to go to, go and; y — de bon coeur to go at (a thing) with spirit; s'en — to go away, depart, set out; allez-vous-en 1 go away! qu'elle s'en aille ! let her go (away) ! aliens ! come ! cour- age! up! arise! — a la ren- contre de to go to meet; — chercher to go for, go and get; — trouver to go and find, go to (meet) ; — to fit {of garments) alors [aloir] then, so Alpes [alp] /. pi. Alps Alsace [alzas] /. Alsace ambition [abisj3] /. ambition dme [a;m]/. soul, heart amener [amne] § 158 to bring, lead americain [amerikS] Ajnerican; im Americain an American Amerique [amerik]/. America ami [ami] m. friend; mon — my good fellow, my boy amie [ami] /. friend, loved one amour [amu ;r] m. in sing, and f. in pi. love, affection; un — de petite chevre a dear little goat amusant [amyza] amusing amuser [amyze] to amuse; s' — to amuse or enjoy oneself, play, have a good time an [a] m. year; avoir quarante — s to be forty years old or forty years of age; le jour de I'an New Year's day ancien [asJE] ancient, old; former; un — an ancient ana [am] to. ass, donkey anecdote [anegdot] /. anecdote anglais [agle] adj. English; 1' — TO. EngUsh {language); un An- glais an Enghshman Angleterre [agbtsir] /. England animal [animal] to. animal, beast annee [ane]/. year, twelvemonth; 1' — derniere last year anniversaire [anivErssir] to. an- niversary, birthday antichambre [atiSa:br] /. ante- chamber aoiit [u] TO. August apercevoir [apsrsevwasr] § 213 to perceive, see, observe, notice; s' — to perceive, observe aperfoit [apErswa] S sg. pres. iiv- die. apercevoir aperfu [apersy] p. part, apercevoir apersut [apErsy] 3 sg. p. def. apercevoir appel [apsl] to. call appelar [aple] § 158 to call; call in, summon; name; faire — to send for; s' — to be called or named; comment s'appalle- t-il? what is his name? il s'appelle Jean Bart his name is Jean Bart appetit [apeti] m. appetite; bon — I wish you a good appetite apporter [aporte] to bring (to, k) apprendre [apraidr] § 202 to learn; teach appreter [aprste] to prepare; s' — to prepare, get ready approche [apro$] /. approach approcfaer [aproje] tr. and intr. to approach, draw near, bring up; FRENCH-ENGLISH 483 — de to approach, draw near; s' — to approach, draw near (to, de) apres [aprs] prep, after, next (to); adv. afterwards, after apres-demain [apredme] the day after to-morrow apres-midi [apremidi] to. or f. afternoon arabe [arab] Arabian; un Arabe (an) Arabian, Arab Arable [arabij /. Arabia arbre [arbr] m. tree arc Hark] m. arch, bow Arc de Triomphe [arkdetriSif] name of an arch in Paris architecture [arSitsktyir] /. ar- chitecture argent [arsa] to. silver, money argument Qargyma] m. argu- ment arithmetlque [aritmetik] /. arith- metic Aries Carl] /. city in the south of France, famous for Roman re- mains aiTeter [arste] to stop, delay, stay, check, arrest; s' — to stop, pause, give heed (to, k); du monde arrSte people stand- ing arrivee farive]/. arrival arriver [arive] to arrive (at, &, dans, sur); come, come to, come up; happen, occur; les voilJ qui arrivent see them com- ing (there) articuler [artikyle] to articulate, utter as [a] S sg. pres. indie, avoir Asie [azi]/. Asia assassiner [asasine] to assassi- nate, murder asseoir [[aswair] § 215 to seat; s' — to sit down, seat oneself, be seated assez [ase] enough, suflBciently; ■ pretty, rather, quite, very; — bon good enough assiette [asjst] /. plate assis [asi] p. part, s'asseoir seated, sitting associe [asosje] to. partner assurer [asyre] to assure attendre [ataidr] § 210 to wait; wait for, expect; s' — a to expect attenti-f iatatif] -ve attentive attention [atasj3] /. attention; faire — to pay attention attentivement Catativma] atten- tively au [o] contr. o/ & -|- le auberge [obers] /. inn aubergiste [obErsist] to. inn- keeper aucun [okcS] any, no; ne . . . — no, none, no one au-dessus Codsy] above; — de above Auguste Cogyst] to. Augustus aujourd'hui [osurdqi] to-day, now; — en huit a week from to-day aupres de [oprcde] into the pres- ence of, to aural [ore] 1 sg. fut. avoir auraient ^ors] 3 pi. condl. avoir aussi [osi] too, also, likewise; as (in comparison); — bien be- sides; — bien que as well as aussitfit [ositoj immediately, forthwith, at once autant [ota], • — de as or so much, as or so many; d' — plus the more so; bien — quite as much autobus [otobys] m. motor car, auto car (public) automne [oton] m. autumn; en — in autumn auto (mobile) [otomobiQ to. or f. automobile, motor car, auto car iM VOCABULAKT autour de [otuirda] prep, around, round autre [otr] other; les — s others, the others, other people; d' — s others; I'un et 1'— both; les uns les — s one another, both, all; nous — s Franjais we Frenchmen; bien — chose something very different autrefois [otrafwa] formerly, once Autriche [otriS]/. Austria aux [o] contr. of k + les avancer [avase] § 156 to advance, forward; s' — to advance, move forward; avance advanced; proficient avant [ava] before; en — for- ward; la tete en — head first, head foremost; — ■ de before avant-hier [ava(t)iE:r] the day before yesterday avant que [avaka] conj. + subj. before avec [avEk] with; — le temps qu'il fait in such weather as this avenue [avny] /. avenue avez [ave] S pi. pres. indie. avoir Avignon [aviji5] m. eity in the south of France, famous for medieval remains avis [avi] m. opinion, notice avoir [avwair] § 154 to have; ob- tain, receive, get; y — impers., il y a there is, there are; il y avait there was, etc.; il y a huit jours a week ago; il y eut there was, etc.; il eut le moulin he obtained or received the mill; cet enfant a quelque chose there is something the matter with that child; qu'est-ce que vous avez? what is the matter with you? il a dix ans he is ten years old or ten years of age; vous n'avez qu'a parler you have only to speak; — raison to be (in the) right; en — a to be angry with avril [avril] m. April ayez [eje] 2 pi. impve. avoir ayons [ejS] 1 pi. pres. subj. avoir B bah ! [ba] pooh ! pshaw ! bain [be] m. bath baisser [bsse] to lower, let down, hang (down); — la tete bow down, hang one's head; se — to stoop down, stoop balle [bal] /. ball {for playing) Balzac, Honore de [onore da bal- zak] great French novelist b. 1799, d. 1850 bander [bade] to bind up banque Cbaik]/. bank {fin.) banquier [bakje] m. banker Bart, Jean [sa ba;r] famous French seaman, b. at Dunkirk 1651, d. 1702 bas Cba] -se low; li over there, yonder; tout — in an undertone, to oneself, softly, silently; au — at the bottom; en — below, at the bottom, down (below), downstairs; d'en — from down below bas Dba] m. stocking baseball [besbal] m. baseball bassin Qjase] m. basin, pool Bastille [bastiij] /. Bastille {slate prison in Paris, captured and destroyed by the populace, July U, 1789) bataille [bataij]/. battle bateau [bato] m. boat; se pro- mener en — to go for a boat- ride, row, sail {in a boat) batir [T)ati!r] to build FRENCH -ENGLISH 485 bfiton Cbat3] m. stick; stroke {in learning to write); coup de — blow with a stick beau, bel, belle, p2. beaux, belles [bo, bel, bsl, bo, bel] beautiful, handsome, fine; au — milieu in the very midst; il fait — (temps) it is fine; avoir — to be in vain beaucoup (de) [bokudg] much, a great deal, very much, many, very many, a great many Beaumarchais, Pierre [pJEir bo- marje] celebrated French play- wright, b. 17SS, d. 1799 beaute [bo:te]/. beauty becher [beje] to dig, delve bel, belle Cbel] see beau benir [beniir] § 163 to bless berger [berje] m. shepherd; chien de — shepherd's dog besoin CbazwE^ m. need, neces- sity; avoir — de to need, be in need of; vous avez — que je vous aide you need my help; aussi bien nous fera-t-il — then besides we shall need him bete [bE!t]/. beast, brute, animal bete [be it] stupid beurre Qjoeir] m. butter bibliotheque [tibhotEik]/. library bicyclette [bisikkt] /. bicycle bien [bjs] well, very, indeed, really, I am sure, surely, of course, quite; — plus much more; j'ai — le temps I have plenty of time; Stre — to be well, be well off, be comfort- able, be happy; — que {+ svbj., though, although; ou — or indeed, or on the contrary; — de (du, des) much, a great deal of bien Cbjei] m. good biens Cbje] m. pi. estate, prop- erty, goods, wealth, possessions; bientot Q)jetoJ soon, shortly, presently bijou [bisu] m. jewel billet [bije] m. note, letter; promissory note; ticket; — d'entree ticket (of admission); — de banque, bank bill, bank note blanc [bla(iS)] blanche white; le — n. m. the white blanchir [blaSiir] to become white, make white, wash, launder ble [Tale] m. wheat, wheat field blesser [blese] to wound, hurt blessure [blssyir]/. wound, hurt bleu [bl0] blue Blois [blwa] m. town southwest oj Paris, with famous castle boeuf [boef] m. ox; beef boire [TDwair] § 181 to drink; donner pour — to give a gra- tuity or tip (colloq.) bois [Tswa] m. wood(s), forest boite [bwait] /. box bon [b3] -ne good; kind; moins — worse, not so good; sentir — to smell sweet bonbon [b5b3] m. bonbon, candy bonjour [bosuir] m. good morn- ing, good day bonne [bon] /. maid, servant, nursery maid bonte |TD3te] /. goodness, kind- bord [boir] m. shore, bank, mar- gin, edge; hoaxd (nav.); k — de on board of Bordeaux [TDordo] m. important seaport on the Garonne, and a centre of wine trade borner [borne] to hmit; se — to be Umited botte [bot] /. boot (riding) bottine [botin] /. high shoe (for men or women, particularly tht laUer'i 486 VOCABULARY bouche [buiS] /. mouth; i la — in one's mouth boulangei [Tjulase] m. baker bouquiniste [bukinist] m. second- hand book dealer bourgeois [burswa] m. middle- class person bout [bu3 m. end, tip; edge, ex- tremity; au — de at the end of boutique [butik]/. shop, store branche [braiS]/. branch bras [bra] m. arm brave [brajv] brave, gallant; good, kind, honest, worthy- brigand [briga] m. brigand, thief brin Q)rs] m. blade, sprig brosse Obras] /. brush brosser [brose] to brush bruit [brqi] m. noise, sound; fame, reputation; faire tant de — to attract so much attention brQlant [bryla] burning hot brfller [bryle] to bum brusque [brysk] blunt bureau [byro] m. office but [byt or by] object, end, goal; arriver k son — to attain his ob- ject fa [sa] {for cela) that S'a ete [sa ete] for f a or ce a ete fa [sa] here; — et 13. here and there, up and down, hither and thither cabinet [kabine] m. cabinet; office, private office cachet [kaSe] to hide, conceal; se — to hide oneself cadeau [kado] m. present, gift cafe [Tiafe] m. coffee; coffee-house, restaurant, caf6 cahier [kaje] m. notebook, ex- ercise book caillou [kaju] m. pebble, stone caissier QiEsje] m. cashier calmer [talme] to calm camarade [kamarad] m. or f. comrade, playmate, chum campagne [kapaji] /. country, fields; 3. la — in the country Canada [kanada] to. Canada canadien [kanadjg] Canadian capitaine [kapitsn] m. captain car [kar] for (conj.) caravane [karavan] /. caravan caresse [kares] /. caress; faire nulle — s a to overwhelm (one) with kindness caresser [karese] to caress, stroke carte [kart]/. card, ticket; map cas [ka] m. case casser [kaise] to break cathedrale [katedral] /. cathe- dral catholique [katolik] catholic cause [koiz] /. cause; a — de because of causer [koze] to cause; chat, talk; — une impression to make an impression ce [s9] pron. it, this, that; c'est pourquoi that is why; c'est nous it is we; ce sont eux it is they; ce qui, ce que that which, which, what ce, cet, cette, ces [sa, set, set, se] adj. this, that; ce . . . -Ik that (emphatic) ceci [s9si] pron. this cela [sala] pron. that; — s'entend that is evident; of course celebre [sekbr] celebrated, fa- mous celebrer [selebre] § 158 to cele- brate celle [seI] see celui celui, celle, ceux, celles [salqi, seI, s0, seI] this or that, this or that one; the one, he, him; — qui the one who, he or him who FRENCH-ENGLISH 487 celui-ci [salqisi], celle-ci, ceux-ci, celles-ci pron. this, this man, this one, the latter, he (too) celui-l&, etc. [salqila] pron. that, that man, that one, the former, he cent [sa] (a) hundred centime [satim] m. the hundredth 'part of a franc cependant [s3pada] yet, never- theless; stiU, however, in the meantime, meanwhile cerise [sariiz]/. cherry cerisier Csarizje] m. cherry tree certain [sErtsj certain cesser [sEse] to cease, leave oS (de) ceux [s0] see celui cbacua [Jakoe] -pron. each, each one, every one cbaise [Ssiz]/. chair chaleur [Salceir] /. heat chambre [Jaibr] /. room, bed- room; Chambre des deputes House of Parliament, Congress chameau Qamo] m. camel cbamp [$5] m. field, farm Champs-Elysees [Sazelize] m. pi. name of a celebrated promenade in Paris changement CSSsma] m. change changer [Sase] § 156 to change, alter, transform; se — to change or transform oneself, change (intr.) chanson [Sas3] /. song chant [Sa] TO. singing, song; crow- ing {of a cock) chanter [Sate] to sing; chant, in- tone, play Chantilly [Satiji] town famous for its forests and magnificent chd- teau chapeau CSapo] m. hat chaque [Sak] each, every Charlemagne [Sarlamaji] Char- lemagne, Charles the Great (the great Emperor of the West, 74^-814) charmant [Sarma] charming charmer [Jarme] to charm, de- light; charme de charmed with, delighted with Chartres [Jartr] /. city southwest of Paris, with famous cathedral chasse [Sas] /. chase, hunt, hunt- ing, himting party chasser [Sase] to chase, hunt, drive away chiteau [Sato] to. castle, palace, country mansion chaud [So] warm, hot chaud [So] TO. heat, warmth; il fait — it is warm, h ot (o/ weather, etc.); avoir — to be warm, hot {of living beings) chaussures [Sosysr] /. pi. shoes, boots chef [Ssf] TO. chief, commander; — d'escadre rear admiral chemin [Seme] to. way, road; grand — main road, highway; — de fer railway; — faisant on the way; en — • on the way chemise [Samiiz]/. shirt cher [Ssir] chdre dear; beloved; payer — pay dear(ly) for, pay too much for chercher [Jerje] to seek, search, look for; aller — to go for, go and get; — a to seek to, try to cheval [Saval] m. horse; k — on horseback; monter i — ride (on) horseback cheveu [S9V0] to. (a) hair; cheveux pi. hair ch6vre [Sejvt] /. goat chez [Se] to, at, in, into (the house, shop, office, etc., of); with; aller — le roi to go to the king's (palace, court, etc.); ils itaient — eux they were at home; — moi at my house, at 488 VOCABULARY home; — vous at your house, at home, with you chien [Sje] m. dog; — de berger shepherd's dog Chine [Sin]/. China choisir [Swaziir] to choose chose [So!z] /. thing, affair, mat- ter; quelque — m. pron. some- thing; quelque — d'extraordi- naire something extraordinary or unusual; elle a quelque — there is something the matter with her; bien autre — some- thing very different chou [Su] m. cabbage -ci [si] see celui ciel pi. cieux [sjeI, si0] to. heaven, heavens, sky cigare [sigair] m. cigar cigarette [sigaret] /. cigarette cinq [se:k] five cinquante [sekait] fifty cinquieme [sekjsm] fifth cite [site] /. city, heart of city civil [sivil] civil, civihan clair [klsir] clear, bright, plain classe [klais] /. class, recitation, lesson, classroom; manquer la — to stay away from school, play truant; faire la — to give a lesson {to a class); teach (a class) ; la — est tenninee class is over or dismissed cloche [kbS]/. beU coeur [kcEir] m. heart, heartiness, courage, energy coin [kwe] m. comer colere [kok'.r] /. anger; se met- tre en — to get angry, be angry combien [kSbje] how much? how many? at what price? how much, how many; — 6tes- vous? how many are there of you? — avez-vous paye? how much or what did you pay (for)? comedie [komedi]/. comedy, play conune [kom] as, like, such as; as it were, as if; as well as; now; how ! — voici, — suit as follows; — il faut in fine style, exactly right, as it should be commencement [komasma] m. beginning, commencement commencer [komase] § 156 to begin, commence (to, k, de) comment [koma] how; how? how! what! — cela? how is that? commode [komod] comfortable, convenient compagne [kSpaji] /. companion; wtfe, mate compagnie [kSpajii] /. company compagnon [k3paji3] m. com- panion; • — de voyage travel- ing companion comparaison [k3parez3] /. com- parison comparer [k3pare] to compare compartiment [k3partima] m. compartment compassion [k3pasi3] /. compas- sion, pity compatriote [k3patriot] m., f. fellow countryman or woman complet [k3pk] m. suit (0/ clothes); complement; €tre au — to be full completer [koplete] to complete compliment [kSphma] m. com- pliment comprendre [k3pra!dr] § 202 to xmderstand, comprehend; in- clude; faire — to explain compter [k3te] to count, reckon; intend, think, hope; be of im- portance concert [k3ss!r] m. concert Concorde [k3kord] /. concord; place de la Concorde name of a square in Paris FRENCH-ENGLISH 489 conducteur [kodyktoesr] m. con- ductor conduire Dtodqiir] § 185 to con- duct, lead, guide, drive, take, convey confiance [ksfjais] /. confidence, trust conge DiSse] m. holiday; donner — a to give a holiday to connaissance [konesais] /. ac- quaintance; faire — avec to become acquainted with connait [kons] 3 sg. pres. indie. connaitre connaitre Dionsitr] § 188 to know, be acquainted with, understand conseil [kaseij] m. counsel, advice conserver [kossrve] to preserve, save, keep conte [kSit] m. story, tale; fairs un — to tell a story contenir QiSteniir] § 177 to con- tain content QcSta] adj. content, satis- fied, pleased, gratified, happy contentement [TcDtatma] m. con- tentment, satisfaction center PiSte] to relate, tell continuer [tStinqe] to continue (to, de), keep on, pursue contraire DcStrsir] to. contrary; au — on the contrary centre [k5tr] against, from, at convenable [ksvanabl] suitable convenir [kSvaniir] § 178 to suit, become, be fitting or appro- priate copie [kopi]/. copy; exercise corps [kojr] m. body, form corriger Dsorise] to correct Corse [kors]/. Corsica c8te Dcote] m. side, way; d'un — on one side; de I'autre — on the other side; de ce — on this side; de — to one side, aside; du — de in the direction of, towards; de son — on his part, he too; k — de beside coucher [kuje] intr. to lie, lie down; tr. to put to bed, lay down; se — to go to bed, retire (to rest); set (of the sun); Stre couche to be lying down coucher [kuje] m. setting; — du soleil sunset couloir [kulwasr] m. passage, corridor coup [ku] TO. blow, stroke; drink; — de poing a blow with the fist; — de pied a kick; d'un seul — at a single stroke; tout a — all at once; — de dent bite; — de biton blow with a stick couper [kupe] to cut cour Qkusr] /. court; courtiers; yard, courtyard; faire la — to pay court; gens de la — courtiers couramment [kurama] fluently courber [kurbe] to bend, bow courir [kuriir] § 164 to run (about); hasten; hunt after court [kuir] short (adj.); short (adv.) court DiU!r] 3 sg. pres. indie. courii courtisan [kurtiza] m. courtier couru [kury] p. part, courir cousin, -e Ckuzg, kuzin] cousin couteau [kuto] m. knife cofiter [kute] to cost coutume [kutym] /. custom, habit couturiere [kutyrJEir] /. dress- maker couvert [kuvsir] p. part, couvrir covered; cloudy, overcast; with one's hat on couvrir [kuvriir] § 176 to cover; se — to cover oneself, ba covered 490 VOCABULABT craie [krs]/. chalk craindre [krgidr] § 190 to fear, be afraid of crainte [krsit]/. fear cravate [kravatj /. necktie crayon [krejo] m. pencil creature Pcreatyir]/. creature crier [krie] to cry (out), shout, yell, scream, call (out), exclaim croire [krwair] § 191 to believe; think; se — to believe or think oneself; faire — i to make (one) beheve in; je crois bien! I should think so! croupe [krup3 /. back, rump croyez [krwaje] 2 pi. pres. indie. croire cruel [krysl] -le cruel eras [kry] 1 sg. past def. croire cuiller [kqijsir]/. spoon cuir [kqi'.r] m. leather cuisine [kqizin]/. kitchen, cooking cuisiniere [knizinJEir]/. cook curiosite [Tiyrjozite] /. curiosity dame [dam]/, lady Danemark [danmark] m. Den- mark dangereu-x [da3r0] -se dangerous dans [da] in, within, to, into, at, on, among, between; — le temps at the time danser [dase] to dance date [dat] /. date; de longue — long before datte [dat] /. date (fruit) Daudet, Alphonse [alfgz dode] French novelist, b. at Nlmes, 1840, d. 1897 davantage [davatais] more de [da] of, from, out of, for, with, in, on, by, at, to; — + infin. to, at, for, in, etc.; — ce que because debout [dabu] adv. upright, stand- ing decembre [desaibr] m. Decem- ber decider [deside] to decide, deter- mine; se — to decide, resolve, make up one's mind decouvrir [dekuvrisr] § 176 to discover; se — to uncover one- self, take off the hat dehors [daoir] outside, outdoors deja [desa] already; deji! so soon! dejeuner [desoene] m. breakfast; lunch; — du matin or premier — , petit — breakfast {i.e., the first meal of the day) demain [damg] m. to-morrow; a — ■ I shall see you to-morrow until to-morrow demander [damade] to ask, ask for; — ■ a to ask of or from (indir. ohj.), ask; — a. + infin. to ask to; se — to ask oneself, wonder demeurer [damoere] to live, dwell, reside; remain, be demi [dami] half; a — half demi-heure [damioeir] /. half an hour demontrer [demStre] to show, prove denier [danje] m. denarius (obs.), penny; (pi.) money dent [da] /. tooth; coup de — bite depart [depair] m. departure depScher: se — [sa depsje] to make haste, hurry depenser [depose] to spend, ex- pend depouiller [depuje] to strip, de- spoil, deprive depuis [dapqi] since; from; — deux ans for two years back, for the last two years; — que FRENCH-ENGLISH 491 since; — quand? since when? how long? depute Cdepyte] m. deputy, mem- ber of parhament, congressman deranger [derase] § 156 to de- range; se — to trouble oneself demi-er [demjej -ere latter, last, final derriere Qdsrjsir] behind (prep.); behind, at the back (adv.); de — hind (adj.) des [de] contr. of de + les des [dsj from (dating from), not later than; — demain begin- ning to-morrow; — que as soon as, from the very moment that; — le meme jour on the (very same) day; - — le point du jour at daybreak desagreable [dezagreablj dis- agreeable, unpleasant descendre [desaidr] § 210 to de- scend, come or go down, aUght, get off; go down (stairs), put up at desert [dezsir] m. desert desir [deziir] m. desire, longing desirer [dezisre] to desire, wish dessert [dessir] m. dessert destination [dEstinosjo] /. des- tination destruction [dgstryksjo] /. de- struction deux [d0] two; tous (or toutes) — both (of them) deuxieme Cd0ziEm] second devant [dava] prep, before, in front of, ahead of; adv. before, ahead, in advance devenir [davniir] § 178 to be- come; become of devint [dave] S sg. past def. de- venir devoir [davwairj m. duty; exer- cise (lesson); rendre leurs — s k to pay their respects to devoir [devwair] § 214 to owe; be one's duty to, ought, be to, have to, be obhged to, must; ■ h infin. to be one's duty to, ought, be to, have to, be obhged to, must devrais [davre] see devoir ought dictee [dikte]/. dictation Dieu Cdi0] m. God; ah ! men — I oh! dear me! difference [diferais] /. difference different [diferfl] different, divers, various difacile [difisil] difficult, hard difficulte [diflkylte] /. difficulty dimanche [dimarS] m. Sunday; tous les — s every Sunday diner [dine] to dine diner [dine] m. dinner; k — to or at dinner dire [di:r] § 193 to say, tell, re- cite; c'est a — that is (to say); vouloir — to mean directement [dirEkt(9)ma] di- rectly disait [dizs] S sg. impf. indie. dire discuter [diskyte] to discuss distinctement [distgkt(s)ma] dis- tinctly distribuer [distribqe] to distrib- ute, deal out, portion out dit [di] S sg. pres. indie, 3 sg. past def., and p. part, dire dix [dis] ten dix-huit [dizqit] eighteen dix-neuf [diznoef] nineteen dix-neuvieme [diznoevJEm] nine- teenth dix-sept [dissEt] seventeen doigt [dwa] m. finger; toe dois [dwa] 1 and 2 sg. pres. indie. devoir dollar [dolair] m. dollar domestique [domEstik] m. or f. servant 492 VOCABULART donunage £dama:33 i^- damage, pity done [d3(!k)Jthen, therefore, con- sequently donner [done] to give; bear {of trees); — k souper to give a supper; se — to give to each other dont [d5] of whom, of (from, etc.) which, whose, with which, etc., whence dormir [dormiir] § 166 to sleep douloureusement [dulur0zma] sadly doute [dut] m. doubt; sans — no doubt, doubtless, of course dou-x [du] -ce sweet; soft, gentle, kindly douze [duiz] twelve droit [drwa] straight, right; up- right, erect droite [drwat]/. right hand, right, right side; k — , de — to or on the right (hand) du [dy] contr. oj de + le ducat [dyka] m. ducat (a goU coin worth 10 or 12 francs) Dumas, Alexandre [alsgzadr dyma] French dramatist and novelist, b. 1803, d. 1870 duquel [dyksl] cordr. of de -}- lequel durer [dyre] to last, continue, endure E eau [o] /. water ecarter [ekarte] to take away; s' — de to go away from, ram- ble, stray echange QeSSss] m. exchange; en — de in exchange for €chapper [ejape] to escape; s' — to escape eclat [ekla] m. burst, outburst ecole [ekol] /. school; maison d' — schoolhouse ecolier [ekolje] m. schoolboy, pupil ecouter [ekute] to listen, listen to, hear eerier: s' — [[sekrie] to cry out, exclaim ecrire [ekriir] § 194 to write ecrit [ekri] p. part, ecrire edifice [edifis] m. edifice, build- , ing fidouard [edwair] Edward education [edykosjo] /. educa- tion, training, upbringing effet [efs] m. effect; en ■ — in effect, indeed, in fact effort [efoir] m. effort, endeavor; force, might; tenter un demiei — to make a final effort egal [egal] equal egarer: s' — [segare] to lose one's way eglise Ceghiz] /. church Egypte [esipt] /. Egypt eh ! [e] ah ! well ! — bien ! well . well then ! well now ! eleve Celeiv] m. orrf. pupil, scholar elever [elve] § 158 to raise, raise up, lift up, exalt; rear, bring up; s' — to rise, exalt oneself, be lifted up, be exalted eUe [el] she, it, her eloigne [elwajie] distant eloigner: s' — [selwajie] to go away embarras [abara] m. embarrass- ment embrasure [abrazyir] /. embra- sure, recess {of window, etc.) empgcher [apsSe] to hinder, pre- vent (from, de) employe [aplwaje] m. employee, official employer [aplwaje] to employ, FRENCH-ENGLISH 493 emporter [aporte] to carry away, carry off, take away empressement CSprEsma] m. ea- gerness en [a] prep, in, into; at; of; as a, like a; en + pres. part, in, while, whilst, by {or untrans- lated); — route on the way; — argent made of silver; — quoi? of what (material) ? en [a] pron. and adv. of (from, out of, for, by, etc.) it or them; of him, of her, some of it, some of them; some, any enchanter QaSate] to enchant, charm, delight; enchante de- lighted encore [akoir] yet, still, again, more, still more, moreover, be- sides, also, now, only; — un another, one more; — si even if encre [a-.kr] /. ink; k V — with ink encrier [akrie] m. inkstand encyclopedia Qasiklopedi] /. en- cyclopedia endormir: s' — [sadormiir] § 166 to go to sleep, fall asleep; en- dormi asleep endroit [adrwa] m. place, spot enfant [afa] to. or f. child, son, daughter; boy, girl, offspring enfin [afs] at last, finally, in fine, in short ennuyeu-x [annii0] -se tiresome, annoying enseigner [asejie] to teach ensemble [asaibl] together, all together ensuite [asqit] afterwards, then, thereupon, after that entendre [ataidr] § 210 to hear; cela s'entend that is evident; of course enti-er [atje] -ere entire, whole; tout — wholly entre [ajtr] between, among, amongst entree [atre] /. entrance, begin- ning; entree (a term in cook- ery); billet (carte) d' — ticket (of admission) entrer [atre] to enter, go in, come in; — dans to enter enumerer [enymere] § 158 to enumerate envers [avE;r] towards envie [avi] /. envy, desire, incli- nation; avoir — de to feel like, wish or desire to environ [aviroj about, nearly envoyer favwaje] § 157 to send epargner [eparpe] to save, econo- mize epi [epi] to. ear (of wheat) gpingle [epeigl] /. pin epoque [epok] /. epoch, period, time epouser [epuze] to marry {trans.), take in marriage, wed escadre C^skadr] /. squadron, fleet; chef d' — rear-admiral Espagne [sspaji]/. Spain espagnol [espajiol] Spanish esperance Qesperais]/. hope esperer Cespere] § 158 to hope, hope for, expect esprit [sspri] m. spirit, mind, wit, intelligence; Saint-Esprit Holy Ghost essayer [eseje] § 157 to try, at- tempt; try on est [s] 3 sg. pres. indie, etre; ce que? is it (the case) that? (o statement prefixed by est-ce que ? becomes interrogative) ; n'est-ce pas? lit. is it not (so)? {variously rendered to suit the context) est [est] TO. east et [e] and etat [eta] m. state; condition; 494 VOCABtTLAHT homme d'Etat statesman; en — de in a condition to Etats-Unis [etazynij m. pi. United States 6te [ete] m. summer; en — in summer gtes [st] $ pi. pres. indie. Stre etoile [etwal] /. star etrang-er [etrase] -ere m. or f. stranger, foreigner; adj. foreign etre [eitr] § 154 to be; — a to belong to; — de to belong; en ■ — a to be at a point; be busy at; nous sommes cinq there are five of us etudier [etydje] to study efimes [ym] 1 pi. past def. avoir Europe [cerap] /. Europe europeen [cerapeg] -ne European eus [y3 1 sg. past def. avoir eflt [y] 3 sg. impf. subj. avoir eux [0] they, them eux-memes [0 m£!m] they them- selves, themselves evenement [evsnma] m. event evidemment [evidama] evidently excellent [eksela] excellent excepte [eksepte] except exciter [eksite] to excite excursion [ekskyrsjs] /. excur- sion, trip excuser [ekskyze] to excuse exemple [egzapl] m. example, pattern; copy; par — for in- stance, for example; you don't say so! dear me! exercice [egzersis] to. exercise expliquer [ekspUke] to explain exprimer [eksprime] to express fafade [fasad] /. front, facade face [fas]/, face; en — opposite, on the other side; en — de opposite to, facing before, face to face with, in the presence of ficher [farje] to vex, displease; fiche sorry, angry; se — to get angry facile [fasil] easy facilement [fasilma] easily fason [fas5] /. fashion, way, manner; outline, sketch; de — 3. ce que in such a way or manner that; de la meme — in the same way facteur [faktceir] m. postman, letter carrier faible [fsibl] weak, feeble faiblesse [fEbks]/. weakness faim [fg] /. hunger; avoir — to be hungry faire [fsir] § 195 to do, make, act, cause (+ infin. to do or be done), produce, occasion, give, form; say, reply, exclaim, cry, remark; — — to have made, cause to be made; — vivre to keep alive, support, — le tour de to go round; — plaisir to give pleasure; — peur a to frighten; — attention to pay attention; — sortir to put out, expel; — la cour to pay court; — la classe to give a lesson, teach; cela ne fait rien that makes no differ- ence; — fete a to welcome, hail with joy; — voir to show; — mal k to pain, hurt; — un pas to take a step; fais done, do (so) then, do (it your own way) then, all right; — une question to ask a question; il fait beau (chaud, etc.) it is fine (hot, etc.) faire: se — [so feir] §195 to make oneself, render oneseH, make to or for oneself; be done; become; take place; be; il se FRENCH-ENGLISH 495 faisait un grand tapage there was a great uproar; se — 4 to adapt oneself to fais [fe] 1 sg. pres. indie, faire faisons Cfaza] 1 pi. pres. indie. faire faites [fet] 3 pi. pres. indie, and impve. faire fallait [fale] S sg. impf. indie. falloir falloir [falwa;r] § 218 impers. vb. to be necessary, have to; il faut + infin. one (ete.) must, one has to; il fallait que it was necessary that (he, etc.), he was obHged to or had to; il lui faut he needs or must have; il faut manger one must eat; il avait fallu he had been obliged fameu-x Pam0] -se famous, cele- brated famille [famij]/. family fatigant [[fatiga] tiresome fatigue [fatige] tired fatiguer [fatige] to fatigue, weary, tire; se — to fatigue oneself, get tired faudra [fodra] S sg. fut. falloir faut [fo] 3 sg. pres. indie, falloir faute [fo!t]/. fault, naistake fau-x [fo] -sse false, deceitful faux-col [fo kol] m. collar felicitation [felisitosja] /. con- gratulation feliciter [felisite] to congratulate fenune [fam] /. woman, wife fenetre [fansitr] /. window fer [feir] to. iron; en — iron (adj.), of iron; chemin de — railway; — a cheval horseshoe ferai [fare] 1 sg. fut. faire. ferme [fgrm] firm(ly), hard farmer [ferme] to shut (up), close; lock ferrant [fera] that shoes horses; marecbal — blacksmith, horse- shoer fete [fsit] /. hohday, festival; festivity, feast, merrymaking; Stre en — to be in festivity, hold a celebration; jour de — hohday feuille [foeij] /. leaf, sheet (of paper) fgvrier [fevrie] m. February fi-er [fjsir] -ere proud fier [fje]: se — [saf je] a to trust, have confidence in fierement [fjerma] proudly figure [figyir] /. figure, face, countenance fiUe [fiij]/. girl, daughter; jeune — girl, young lady fillette [fiJEt] /. Uttle girl flls [fis] TO. son fin [fg] /. end; a la — finally, at last finir [finiir] to finish, conclude, end; il finit par lui demander he asked him finally; c'est fini it's all over fis [fi] 1 sg. p. def. faire flatter [flate] to flatter; se — to flatter oneself, hope fleur [flceir] /. flower; en — in flower, blooming fleuve [floeiv] m. river (flowing into the sea) foi [fwa] /. faith; ma — I faith ! fois [fwa] /. time (repeated occa- sion) ; tant de — so many times, so often; une — , deux — once, twice; encore une — once more folle[fol]/. o/fou fond [f3] m. bottom, depth, abyss; crown (of hat) ; au — de at or in the bottom of, at the back of, in the depth (s) of fonder [f3de] to found font [f3] 3 pi. pres. indie, faire Fontainebleau [f Stsnblo] toivn near 496 VOCABULABY Melun, famoiis fo-r its chdteau and picturesque forests football [futbal] m. football f oret [fore] /. forest f onne [farm] /. form, shape former [forme] to form fort [fo:r] adj. strong, powerful; big, thick; clever fort [fo!r] adv. much, very, very much; loud, loudly; m'a — servi has been of great service to me fortune [fortyn] /. fortune, good luck; chercher — to seek one's fortune fou, fol, folle [fu, fol, fol] mad, foolish, crazy foule [full]/, crowd fourchette [furjEt] /. fork fourmi [furmi]/. ant foyer [fwaje] m. hearth franc [fra] m. franc (a coin worth normally about 20 cents) France [frais]/. France France, Anatole [anatolfrais] ■prominent French man of letters, b. 18U frangais [frass] adj. French; un — Frenchman; le — French (the language) ; en — in French; parler — to speak French Franfois [fraswa] m. Francis; — I^'' [fraswa prgmje] Francis the First (king of France, b. 1494, d. 1547) Franklin, Benjamin [besame frakle] American statesman and philosopher, b. 1706, d. 1790 frapper [frape] to strike, knock, rap Frederic le Grand [frederik le gra] Frederick the Great, (king of Prussia, b. 1712, d. 1786) frere [fre-.r] m. brother froid [frwa] adj. cold; — m. cold frotter [frote] to rub fruit [frqi] m. fruit fruitier [frqitje] fruit-bearing; arbre — fruit tree fimier [fyme] to smoke gages [ga:3] m. pi. wages gagner [gape], to gain, win, earn, obtain; reach; seize galerie [galri] /. gallery galop [galo] m. gallop gant [ga] m. glove garpon [gars3] m. boy, waiter garde [gard] m. guard, keeper garder [garde] to keep, guard, preserve, have in store gare [ga:r] /. station gauche [go: J] adj. left gauche [goij] /. left hand, left, left side; a (la) — , de — to or on the left (hand) general [seneral] general; m. general; en — in general, gen- erally gens [5a] m. or f. pi. people; — de la cotir courtiers gentil [sati] pretty, nice, well- behaved gentilhoimne [satijom] m. noble- man Gennaine [sermzn]/. Germaine glace [glas] /. ice; ice cream; mirror glisser [glise] to slip, slide gloire [glwair] /. glory gothique [gotik] gothic grain [gre] m. grain, com grammaire [grams ir] /. graromar grand [gra] great, large, tail, big, grand; long grand'chose [grajoiz] /. much grandeur [gradoeir] /. greatness, size grand'mere [gramsir] /. grand- mother FRENCH-ENGLISH 497 grand-pere [grapEir^ to. grand- father gras [gra] -se fat gravement [gravma] gravely, seriously grlmper [^rspe] to climb gris [gri] gray, dark-colored gros [gro] -se large, big, great; heavy guSre [gEir] but little, not much; ne . . . — hardly ... at all guerir [geriir] to cure guerre Ggsir] /. war [h aspirate is indicated thiis: *h] habile Cabilll able, clever babiller [abije] to dress; s' — to dress habit [abi] to. garment, dress, apparel, garb; coat; pi. clothes, apparel, costume habiter [abite] to inhabit, live in habituer C^bitqe] to accustom; habituate; s' — to accustom oneself, get used (to, &) 'halles [aQ /. pi. market 'haricot [aiiko] to., kidney bean; — s verts string beans 'basard [aza:r] to. chance; par — by chance, perchance 'hater: se — [sa ate] to hasten, hurry 'haut [o] high, tall; loud 'haut [o] TO. height; top, upper part, summit; au — at the top; en — upstairs 'haut [o] <^'»- loud helasi [elais] alas! Henri [ari] m. Henry; — IV [arikatr] Henry the Fourth {king of France, b. 15B3, d. 1610) herbe [erb] /. grass, herb(s) heure [ce;r] /. hour; time; quelle — est-il? what time is it? a quelle — ? at what time? at what hour? k neuf — s at nine o'clock; tout a 1' — not long ago, just now, a little while ago, directly; de bonne — early, in good time heureusement [cer0:zma] happily, luckily, fortunately heureu-x [oer0] -se happy, for- tunate hier [JEir] yesterday; — soir yesterday evening histoire [istwair]/. history, story historique [istorik] historical hiver [ivsir] to. winter; en — in winter homme [om] m. man; — d'Etat statesman honneur [onoeir] to. honor 'honte [3!t]/. shame; avoir — to be ashamed b6pital [opital] to. hospital bdtel CotEl] TO. hotel hotel de ville [otEldavil] to. town haU H6tel-Dieu [oteldj^] to. hospital Hugo, Victor [viktoir ygo] French miter, h. 1802, d. 1885 'huit Cqit] eight; — jours a week ici [isi] here; ici-bas here below idee [ide] /. idea ignorant [ijiora] ignorant ignorer [ijiore] to be ignorant of, not to know il [il] he, it; — en vint plusieurs there' came several il y a [ilja] see avoir there is, there are, ago lie [ill] /. island; — de la Cite island in the Seine, in the heart of Paris 498 VOCABULARY ils [il] they importance CeportaisJ /. impor- tance important [gporta] important importer [gparte] to be of conse- quence; n'importe no matter; n'importe quel autre any other impossible [gposibl] impossible impression [cpresjo]/. impression incendier [gsadje] to set on fire, bum incliner [Eldine] to incline, bend; s' — to bow Indes [sid] /. pi. India indiquer [edike] to indicate, point out individu [Edividy] m. individual, fellow industriel '^[edystriEin -le indus- trial, manufacturing influent [sflya] influential insecte [gssktj to. insect instant [esta] m. instant, mo- ment; a 1' — immediately instrument [gstryma] m. instru- ment intelligent [EtElisa] intelligent intention [gtasjs] /. intention; avoir 1' — to intend interessant [SterEsa] interesting interieur [Eterjoeir] 7n. interior, inside introduire [gtrodqiir] § 185 to introduce inviter [gvite] to invite, beg irai [ire] 1 sg. fut. aller Italie [itali]/. Italy italien [italjg] Italian jamais [sams] ever, never; ne ... — never jambe [saib]/. leg Janvier [savje] m. January Japon [3ap33 to. Japan japonais [sapone] Japanese jardin [sardgj to. garden je [38] I Jean [sa] John Jeanne [3 a in] Joan, Jane Jericho [seriko] Jericho Jerusalem [jeryzakm] Jerusalem Jesus-Christ [sezykri] Jesus Christ Jeter [sate] § 158 to throw, cast, utter; se — to fall upon, rush jeu [30] TO. play, game, motion jeudi [30di] to. Thursday jeune [seen] young Joffre, Cesaire- Joseph [sezsir SozEf 3ofr] Marshall of France, the victor of the Marne, b. 1862 joli [soli] pretty, nice, fine jouer [swe] to play jouet [swe] m. toy jouir [swiir] to enjoy; — de to enjoy jour [3u:r] m. day, Hght; — de fete hoUday; le — de Pan New Year's day; faire — to be daylight journal [sumal] to. newspaper joumee [sume] /. day; toute la — ■ all day long joyeu-x [5waj0] -se joyous, glad, merry juif [sqif] TO. Jew juillet [sqijs] to. July juin [sqg or swe] to. June jusque (jusqu'a) [3ysk(a)] to, even, as far as, until; jusqu'a ce que tiU; jusqu'ici till now; la tiU then juste [zyst] just, exactly kilo(gramme) [kilo(gram)] m. kilogram {ahout 2^ Vbs. avoir- dupois) FRENCH-ENGLISH 499 IS [la] there; celui-la that one, the former U-bas Qaba] yonder, over there labourer [labure] to plow, dig laboureur [laburoeir] m. husband- man, plowman, farmer lac Oak] m. lake laisser Qsse] to leave, bequeath, let, let have; — tomber to let fall, drop lait [1e] m. milk laitue Dety] /. lettuce langue [laig] /. tongue, language lapin Daps] m. rabbit large [lars] wide, broad latin [late] Latin laver [lave] to wash; se — to wash oneself le, la, 1', les [la, la, 1, le] the le, la, 1', les [la, la, 1, le] him, her, it, them lejon [l9s3]/. lesson lecture [Isktyir] /. reading leg-er [lese] -ere Ugbt, shght legume [legym] m. vegetable lendemain QadmE] m. next day, day after, the morrow lentement [latama] slowly lequel, laquelle [laksl, laksl] who, whom, which Lesage, Alain-Rene [alerane lasais] famous French novelist, author of 'Gil Bias,' b. 1668, d. 1747 lettre Qetr] /. letter leur Qoeir] yoss. their; le — theirs leur [Iceir] pers. to them, them lever [lave] § 158 to raise; se — to rise lever [lave] m. rising; — du soleil sunrise levite Qevit] m. Levite libra [libr] free lieu [li0] m. place; au — de in- stead of; avoir — to take place ligne [hp]/. line Lille [hi] /. town in the northeast of France lire [Uir] § 197 to read lit [h] m. bed livre [hivr] m. book loi [Iwa] /. law loin [Iws] far, far off; de — in the distance; plus — farther off, farther on Loire [Iwair] /. river flowing west through center of France long [l3]-ue long; le — de along; tout au — at full length longtemps [lota] long, a long while lorsque [lorska] when Louis-Philippe [Iwi filip] king of France from 1830 to 1848 Louis XIV [Iwi katorz] king of France from 1643 to 1716 Louis XV [Iwi kgiz] king of France from 1715 to 1774 Lotiis XVI [Iwi SE!z] king o] France from 1774 to 1793 Louise [Iwiiz] Louise, Louisa loup [lu] m. wolf lourdement [lurd(a)ma] heavily Louvre [luivr] m. great museum of works of art and antiquities in Paris lui [Iqi] him, to him, to her, it, himself; he; • meme himself; a — seul by himself, alone lundi [Icedi] m. Monday lune [lyn] /. moon; clair de — moonhght lut [ly] 3 sg. p. def. lire lutter Qyte] to struggle, wrestle Lyon [Ijo] m. Lyons city on the Rhdne, a center of silk trade M madame [madam] /. madam, Mrs. 500 VOCABTJLART Madeleine [madlein]/. Magdalen {also name of a church in Paris) mademoiselle [madmwazEl] /. miss magasin [magazf] m. shop, store magnifique [mapifik]] magnifi- cent, splendid mai [ms] m. May main [mg] /. hand; a la — in his (your, etc.) hand maintenant [mEt(8)na] now mais [me] but, well; — non not at all maison [mez3] /. house, home; k la — at home maitre [meitr] m. master mal [mal] m. evil, ill; faire — i to hurt, be sore, ache; - — aux dents toothache mal [mal] badly, ill, wrong malade [malad] sick, ill, sore; le — the sick one, the patient maladresse [maladrss] /. clumsi- ness malgre [malgre] in spite of malheuT [maloeir] m. misfortune, unhappiness malheureusement []malcer0!zma3 unhappily malheureu-x [maloer0] -se un- fortunate, unhappy; m. poor creature manger [maise] § 156 to eat, wear away; — dans to eat out of marchand [marja] m. merchant, shopkeeper marche [marj] /. march, walk, walking, progress, speed marche [marje] m. market; (ft) bon — cheap marcher [marje] to march, walk, go mardi [mardi] m. Tuesday marechal ferrant [marejal fsra] blacksmith, horseshoer mari [mari] m. husband Marie [mari] /. Maiy marin [marg] m. sailor, seaman mars [mars] m. March Marseille [marseij] /. Mar- seilles {important French seaport on the Mediterranean) matelot [matlo] m. sailor mathematiques [matematik] /. pi. mathematics matin [mats] m. morning; le — in the morning matinee [matine] /. morning {when duration is indicated) Maupassant, Guy de [gi da mopasa] /amoMS French writer oj novels and short stories, 6. 1860, d. 1893 Matuice [moris] m. Maurice mauvais [move] bad, ill, evil, poor; faire — to be bad weather me [ma] me, to me, for me mecontent [mekSta] dissatisfied, mecontentement [mekStatma] m. dissatisfaction mefiance [mefjais] /. mistrust, distrust mefier: se — [samefje] to mis- trust, distrust meilleur [msjceir] better, best membre [ma:br] m. member m€me [msim] same, even, self, very; de — the same; de — que as well as menacer [manase] § 156 to men- ace, threaten mener [mane] § 158 to lead, con- duct, take, drive mer [msir] /. sea; en — at sea merci [mersi] m. thanks, thank you mercredi [merkradi] m. Wednes- day mere [meir]/. mother PKENCH-ENGLISH 501 messieurs [mesi0] pi. of monsieur mettre [miitr] § 198 to put, place, put on; le — a la porte to turn him out of doors; — de cote to lay aside; se — a to set oneself, begin; se — a table to sit down to dinner, etc.; se — en colere to get angry; s'y — to turn to, buckle to meurs [mceir] 1 sg. pres. indie. mourir Mexique [meksik] m. Mexico midi [midi] m. noon; south mien [mjg]] mine; le — mine miette [mjst]/. crumb mieux [mj0] better milieu [mili0] m. middle, midst; au — at the middle; aubeau — in the very midst militaire [militsir] miUtary, sol- dier mille [[ mil ] a thousand million [miljo] to. million minuit [minqi] m. midnight minute [minyt] /. minute miserable [mizerabl] miserable, wretched, unfortunate misere [mizeir]/. misery, trouble, distress, poverty mit [mi] S sg. p. def, mettre modeme [modem] modem modeste [modsst] modest modiste [modist] /. milliner moi [mwa] me, to me; I; mSme (I) myself moins [mwe] less, least, fewer; pour le — at the least; du — at least mois [mwa] to. month moisson [mwas5] /. harvest moitie [mwatje] /. half; i — half Moliere, Jean-Baptiste Poquelin [sabatist pokle molJEir] the greatest of French dramatists, b. 1622, d. 1673 moUe [mol]/. o/mou moment [mama] m. moment, time; du — oft since; au — oft when, at the moment when mon, ma, mes [m3, ma, me] my monde [moid] m. world, people; tout le — everybody monnaie [mans] /. coin, money, change monsieur [masj0] m. sir, gentle- man, the gentleman, Mr. montagne [mstaji] /. mountain montagneu-z [m5taji0] -se moun- tainous Monte-Cristo [mota-kristo] " U Comte de Monte-Cristo," fam- ous novel of Alexandre Dumas monter [mate] to mount, go up, ascend, rise, get into {of ve- hicles) montre [mSitr] /. watch Montreal [moreal] m. Montreal montrer [mStre] to show; se — to show oneself monture [motyir] /. beast {for riding) monument [monyma] to. monu- ment, building (of interest) morale [moral] /. moral morceau [morso] to. bit, piece mort [mo!r]/. death mort [mo:r] p. part, mourii dead; le — the dead one mot [mo] TO. word mou, mol, molle [mu, mol, mol] soft mouchoir [mujwair] to. hand- kerchief mourii [murisr] § 174 to die, perish; il est mort he died; — de faim to die of hunger, starve (to death), be very hungry; — de soif to be very thirsty mouton [mut3] to. sheep; mutton 502 VOCABULABY moyen [mwaje] m. means, way; le — de le faire? how shall we doit? muet Cmqs] -te mute, dumb mur [my.r] m. wall mflr [my;r] ripe mflrir [myriir] to ripen musee [myze] m. museum fflusique [myzik] /. music, band {military) N naissance [nssais]/. birth naitre [nsitr] § 200 to be bom; il est ne he was bom Napoleon [napDleS] Napoleon Bonaparte {born 1769 in Corsica, became Emperor of the French 1804: died in St. Helena, 1821) narration [narasjo] /. narration, relating national [nasjonal] national nature [naty:r]/. nature naturel [natyrsl] -le natural Navarre [navair] /. ancient king- dom in the south of France ne [ng] no, not; ne . . . pas no, not; — . . . ni . . , ni neither . . . nor; • — ... rien nothing; ■ — ... que only {untranslated after comparatives) ne Cne] p. part, naitre necessaire [necese:r] necessary neige [neis] /. snow neiger [nsise] to snow n'est-ce pas? [nespa] isn't it so? don't you? weren't you? shall we not? etc., etc. nettoyer [netwaje] § 157 to clean neuf [noef] nine neu-f [ncef] -ve new aez [ne] m. nose; se rire au — to laugh at oneself; faire (en- voyer) tm pied de — k to put one's fingers to one's nose, make grimaces at, laugh at ni [ni], neither, nor; ne . . . — ... — neither . . . nor nid [ni] m. nest Nimes [nim] /. Nlmes {tovm in the south of France, famous for Roman remains) Noel [noel] m. or f. Christmas; le jour de — Christmas day noir [nwa:r] black, dark; faire — to be dark noisette [nwazct] /. hazelnut nom [n5] m. name nombre [n3:br] m. number nombreu-x [n3br0] -se numer- ous nommer [nome] to name, call, appoint; se — to be named or called non [no] no, not; ni moi — plus nor I either; — pas que not that nord [no:r] m. north Normandie [normadi] /. Nor- mandy nos [no] pi. of notre notre, nos [notr, no] our n6tre: le — [lanoitr] ours Notre-Dame [notradam] /. cathe- dral church of Paris nourrir [nuriir] to nourish, feed, bring up nous [nu] we, us, to us nouve-au, -1, -lie [nuvo, nuvd, nuvd] new; de — again Nouvelle-Orleans [nuvslorlea] /. New Orleans nouvelles [nuvEl] /. pi. news novembre [novaibr] m. November nu [ny] naked, bare nuage [nqais] m. cloud nuit [nqi] /. night; cette — last night; faire — to be dark nul [nyl] -le no, no one numero [nymero] m. number FRENCH-ENGLISH 603 obelisque [obelisk] m. obelisk objecter [obsskte] to object objet [obse] m. object, article, thing obliger [oblise] § 156 to force obstacle [opstakl] m. obstacle obtenir [optaniir] § 177 to obtain occuper [okype] to occupy octobre [oktobr] m. October ceil, pi. yeux [oe:j, j0] m. eye oiseau [wazo] m. bird on [3] one, they, we, you, people, some one oncle [Sikl] m. uncle ont [3] S pi. pres. indie, avoir onze [3:z] eleven; le — the eleventh; les — [le 5;z] the eleven opinion [opinjs] /. opinion or [o:r] m. gold; d' — gold (en) or [o!r] now, but; ■ — fa come now oralement [oralma] orally ordinaire [ordineir] ordinary; d' — usually ordinairement [ordinEima] ordi- narily ordonner [ordone] to order, pre- scribe, command ordre [ordr] m. order oreille [orssj]/. ear origine [orisin] /. origin orthographe [ortograf] /. orthog- raphy, spelling 6ter [ote] to take off, take out, remove ou [u] or; — ... — either . . . or; — bien or oft [u] where, when, in which, on which; d' — whence, from which, on which onblier [ublije] to forget ouest [wEst] TO. west Oui [wi] yes outre [utrj beyond; en — in ad- dition; passer — to pass by without noticing ouvert [uvEir] p. part, ouvrir open ouvre [u!vrj 3 sg. pre^. indie. ouvrir ouvrir [uvriir] [^ 176 to open; s' — to open page [pais] to. page (attendant); f. page (leaf) pain [ps] m. bread paire [.psirjf. pair palais [pale] to. palace, building; — de justice courthouse pilir [paUir] to grow pale papier [papje] m. paper par [par] by, through; — o& by what place, by which, through which; — exemple for example, (interj.) dear me I — dela beyond; —- — Ik by that place, over there paragraphe [paragraf] to. para- graph pare [park] m. park, grounds parce que [parska] because par-ci par-ll. [parsiparla] here and there par-dessus [pardesy] above, higher than, over; • — (le) bord overboard; (as noure) overcoat pardon [pard3] m. pardon; ex- cuse me, I beg your pardon parent [para] to. parent, relative Paris [pari] to. capital city o/ France, situated on the banks of the Seine parisien [parizje] Parisian parler [parle] to speak, talk; — franf ais to speak French panni [parmi] amongst part [pa:r] /. part, share; de sa — from him; nulla — nowhere 504 VOCABULARY participe [partisip] m. participle partie [parti] /. part, game, party partir [partiir] § 166 to leave, depart, go away, be off, start; k — de from, beginning with partout [partu] everywhere pas [pa] TO, step, pace, footstep pas [pa] no, not; ne . . . — no, not; — im (ne) not one; — de no, not, none; non — not; n'est ce — ? shall we not? etc. passage [pasais] to. passage passe [pase] m. (the) past passe [pase] past, gone, over, last passer [pose] to pass, pass on, go, go by, put on; spend (time) — devant to pass, go past; — chez to call on; se - — to take place, happen; se — de to do without patiner [patine] to skate patrie [patri] /. native land patte [pat] /. paw, foot; — s de derriere hind feet; — s de devant fore feet pauvre [poivr] poor, paltry payer [peje] § 157 to pay, pay for pays [pei] m. country, locality paysage [peizais] to. landscape paysan [peiza] to. peasant pSche [pEiS] /. fishing peigne [psji] to. comb peine [pein] /. pain, difficulty, trouble, sorrow; k — hardly; ce n'est pas la — it is not worth while; faire de la — k to pain, hurt feelings peinture [petyir]/. paint, painting pencher [paje] to incline, bend pendant [pada] during; — que whilst pendre [paidr] § 210 to hang penser [pose] to think; vous pensez si imagine whether; — k to think of; — de to have an opinion of; je pense bien I should think so perdre [perdr] § 210 to lose, ruin pere [psir] m. father perle [psrl] /. pearl pennettre [permetr] § 198 to per- mit; se — to take the hberty; pennis permitted personnage [personals] m. per- sonage, character personne [person] /. person; pi. people personne [person] m. anybody, nobody; ne . . . — not any one, no one, nobody petit [psti] small, little, short; TO. Uttle one, young one petit-fils [patifis] w. grandson petits pois [p(8)tipwa] to. pi. green peas peu [p0] to. httle; (also as ad- verb) little; — a — little by little; dis-moi un — tell me now; si — de chose so httle peuple [pcepl] to. people, nation peur [poeir] /. fear; lui faire — to frighten him; avoir — to be afraid; avoir grand' — to be in great fear; de — que . . . ne for fear lest peut [p0] S sg. pres. indie, pouvoir peut-etre (que) [p0te:tr (ka)] per- photographie [fotografi] /. photo- graph phrase [fraiz] /. phrase, sentence piece [pJEs] /. room; play (the- atrical) pied [pje] m. foot; k — on foot; coup de — kick pierre [pJE:r]/. stone Pierre [pjeir] to. Peter pipe [pip] /. pipe pis [pi] worse pitie [pitje] /. pity; avoir — de to have pity on FRENCH-ENGLISH 50S place [plas]/. place, post, square, seat, room, position plafond [plafs] m. ceiling plaie [pis]/, wound plaindre [pleidr] § 190 to pity; se — to complain plaine [pkin]/. plain plaire [pkir] § 201 to please; s'il vous plait if you please; plait-il? what did you say? plaisanter [pkzate] to joke, jest plaisir [pleziir] m. pleasure; faire — to give pleasure plancher [plaije] m. floor plein [pie] full; en — ^ air in the open air pleurer [plcere] to weep plettvoir [ploevwair] § 220 to rain plu [ply] p. part, pleuvoir pluie [plqi]/. rain plume [plym] /. feather, pen plupart [pljrpair] /. greater part, majority pluriel fplyrJEl] m. plural plus [ply] more; — de more, no more; le — the more, the most; — de (loith numerals) more than; ne . . . — no more, no longer; d'autant — que the more so as; de — additional; D'etre — que to be no longer anything but; ne . . . pas non — not . . . either plusieurs [plyz joe ir] several, many plutdt [ply to] rather poche [poS] /. pocket , poids [pwa] m. weight point [pwg] m. point; etre sur le — de to be at the point of; — du jour daybreak point [pwe] no, not; ne . . . — de not any, no poire [pwair]/. pear poirier [pwarje] m. pear tree pois [pwa] m. pea police Ijjolisl /. pohce Pologne [poloji] /. Poland pomme [pom] /. apple; — de terre potato pommier [pomje] m. apple tree pont [p3] m. bridge Pont-Neuf [ponoef] m. bridge over the Seine in Paris porte [port]/, door, gate; — k — next door porte-plume [port plym] m. pen- holder porter [porte] to bear, carry, take, wear, put; se — (bien) to be (well); bien portant in good health, well; comment vous portez-vous? how are you? portiere [portje:r] /. coach door, window {of car) poser [poize] to place, lay, set; — une question to ask a question posseder [posede] § 158 to pos- sess, own possible [posibl] possible; faire son — to do his best poste [post] /. post (office) potage [potais] to. soup poulet [pule] TO. chicken poupee [pupe]/. doll pour [pur] for, in order to, to; — que in order that; — ainsi dire so to speak pourquoi [purkwa] why; c'est — therefore, so, hence, that is why pourrai [pure] 1 sg. fut. pouvoir pourtant [purta] however, still pouvoir [puvwair] § 221 to be able, can, may; il se peut it may be; il ne se peut rien nothing can be; on pourrait dire one might say prairie [preri] /. meadow precieu-x [presj0] -se precious, valuable precipiter: se — [sapresipite] to rush, dart, hasten 506 VOCABULARY precis [presi] precise, exact; k una heure — a at one o'clock precisely prgferar [prefere] § 158 to prefer premi-er [pramjej -era first, former; marcher la — to walk ahead prendre [praidr] § 202 to take, catch, assume, seize, suppose, reckon; — un billet to buy a ticket (railroad) preparer [prepare] to prepare; se — to be prepared, get ready pres [prej near by; — da near, nearly; a peu — almost, nearly present [preza] m. present; k — now presenter [prezate] to present, introduce; sa — to present one- seK president [prezidaj m. president prasqua [presk] nearly, hardly, almost prat [pre] ready preter [prcte] to lend pretre [praitr] m. priest preuva [prceiv]/. proof prier [prije] to pray, pray to, beg, ask; je vous an prie I beg of you prince [pre is] m. prince, king printamps [preta] m. spring; au — in spring pris [pri] 1 sg. p. def. and p. pari. prendre prise [priiz] /. taking, capture prison [priz5] /. prison prii [pri] m. price; prize procbain [proSS] next; to. neigh- bor, fellow creature produira [prodijiir] § 185 to pro- duce professaur [profesoesr] to. pro- fessor, teacher profession [profEsjS]/. profession, calling profiter [profite] to profit, avail oneself projat [prose] to. project, plan promenade [promnad] /. walk, walking, drive; — en bateau, a row, sail; aller i la — to go for a walk promener [promne] § 168 to carry about, drive about; sa — k pied (en voiture, en bateau, k cheval etc.) to take a walk (go for a drive, go for a sail, ride, etc.); se — i. bicyclatta to ride a bicycle prononcer [pronSise] to pronounce prononciation [pron5sjasj3] /. pronunciation proposer [propoze] to propose propre [propr] clean; own protestant [protests] to. Protes- tant Provence [provais] /. a province in the south of France proverbe [proverb] to. proverb prudence [prydais]/. prudence prudent [pryda] prudent Prusse [prys] /. Prussia (a state in Germany) pu [py] P- part, pouvoir puis [pqi] 1 sg. pres. indie, pou- voir puis [pqi] then puits [pqi] TO. well punir [pyni;r] to punish pupitre [pypitr] to. desk pur [pyir] pure put [py] 3 sg.p. def. pouveir quand [ka] when; depuis — ? how long? quant k [kata] as to, as for quarante [karait] forty quart [ka;r] to. quarter quatorza [katorz] fourteen FHENCH-ENGLISH S07 quatre [katr] four quatre-vingts [katrave] eighty; quatre-vingt-dix-sept ninety- seven que [ka] ■pron. whom, which, that, what; qu'est-ce qui? what? qu'est-ce — c'est — ? what is ? ce ^ that which, what, which; qu'est-ce qu'il y a? what is there? qu'as-tu? what is the matter with you? c'est la — it is there that, that is where que D^a] conj. that {used as a sub- stitute for other conjunctions like tandis que, lorsque, quand, si, efc.); when, than, as, till, let {with subjunctive) que [ko] od'"- how, how many, how much, what (a), than; ne . . . — only, but; ne . . . rien — nothing but; qu'elle est jolie ! how pretty she is ! quel [kel] -le what, which; who quelconque QielkSik] whatever quelque [kslka] some, few; — chose something quelquefois [kelkafwa] sometimes quelqu'un, quelques-tms [kslkoe, kslkazde] some one, some question [T££stj3]/. question qui [ki] who, which, that, whom; 4 — whose; ce — what quinze [kgiz] fifteen; — jours a fortnight quitter pdte] to quit, leave, lay aside quoi Qtwa] what; k — ■ bon what use; en — ? of what (material) ? quoique Ptwaka] although raconter [rakote] to relate, tell raisin [rezsj m. grape(s) laison frszo] /. reason, sense; avoir — to be (in the) right ramasser [ramasej to pick up ramener [ramne] § 158 to bring back, bring home again rapidement [rapidma] rapidly, quickly rappeler: se — [sa raple] § 158 to remember rapporter [raporte] to bring back rare [rair] rare, scanty, infrequent rarement [rarma] rarely, seldom, not often recevoir [rasavwair] § 213 to re- ceive reciter [resite] to recite reconunencer [rakamase] § 156 to begin again, do again reconnaitre [rakouEitr] § 188 to recognize, acknowledge refut [rasy] S sg. p. def. recevoil regarder [ragardej to look at, look regie [rsiglj /. rule, ruler regne [rcji] m. reign regner [rejie] § 158 to reign, rule regret [ragrs] m. regret regretter [ragrete] to regret rejoindre [raswsidr] § 190 to re- joio, meet with, catch up to relever [ralve] § 158 to heighten, raise, lift up religieu-x [rah3i0] -se religious religion [ralisjS] /. religion remarquer [ramarke] to remark, notice remercier [ramsrsje] to thank remettre [rametr] § 198 to restore, put off, put back, put on again; se — to recover, begin again; remis recovered; se — en route to set out again remonter [ramote] to moimt again, wind {watch). remplir [rapliir] to fill remuer [ramqe] to move, stir rencontre [rakSitr] /. meeting: aller k leur — to go to meet them 508 VOCABULARY rencontrer [rakstre] to meet rendre [ra.'dr] § 210 to render, give back, make; se — to go, proceed; surrender rentrer [ratre] to return, return home renverser [ravsrse]] to overturn, upset repas [rapa] m. meal repeter [repete] § 158 to repeat repliquer [replike] to reply repondre [rep3idr] § 210 to an- swer reponse [repSis]/. reply repos [rgpo] m. repose, peace, rest reposer [rapoze] to repose, rest; se — to rest reprendre [rapraidr] § 202 to take again, reply representer [raprezate] to repre- sent, stand for republique [repyblik] /. republic respecter [rsspckte] to respect ressembler [rasable]: — & to resemble restaurant [rsstora] m. restau- rant raster Cr8ste] to remain, stay; en — Ik to stop there, get no further retard [ratatr] m. delay; etre en — to be late retarder [ratarde] to delay, be slow, be behind retirer [ratire] to pull out; se — to retire retour [ratu:r] m. return; Itre de — to have returned, be back retourner [raturne] to go back, return, turn up, turn over; se — to turn round retraite [ratrst] /. retreat, retire- ment, departure reussir [reysiir] to succeed rSve [reiv] to. dream reveiller [reveje] to waken; se — < to wake(,n) (up) reveler [revele] § 158 to reveal revenir [ravniir] § 178 to come back; revenu (having) returned rever [rsve] to dream revoir [ravwair] § 224 to see again; an — good-bye revolution [revolysjs] /. revolu- tion revolver [revolve ir] to. revolver ricaner [rikane] to sneer riche [rij] rich ridicule [ridikyl] to. ridicule; tourner en — to ridicule rien [rje] anything, nothing; ne ... — not anything, nothing; je n'en sals — I do not know; cela ne fait — that doesn't matter rire [riir] § 204 to laugh, smile rire[ri;r] to. laughter riviere [rivjeir] /. river {flowing into another larger river) robe [rob] /. robe, dress, frock, gown Robert [robeir] to. Robert rocher [roje] m. rock roi [rwa] to. king roman [roma] to. novel Rome [rom] /. Rome rose [ro!z]/. rose Rouen [rwa] to. cdty on the Seine northwest of Paris rouge [ruis] red rouge-gorge [ruisgors] to. robin rouleau [rulo] to. roll, roller rouler [rule] to roll route [rut] /. route, way, course; en — on the way; etre en — to be on the way, be off royal [rwajal] royal ™e [ry] /. street ruine [njin] /. ruin miner [rqine] to ruin, destroj' Russie [rysi]/. Russia FRENCH-ENGLISH 509 sable [sQibl] m. sand sac [sak] m. sack, bag, satchel sage [saisj wise, well-behaved, good saint [ss] sacred, holy; m. saint Sainte-Chapelle [sEtaSapsl] /. o church in Paris Saint Louis [selwi] Louis IX (king of France from 1226 to 1270) sais [se] 1 sg. pres. indie, savoir saisir [ssziir] to seize saison [sezo] /. season sait [se] 3 sg. pres. indie, savoir salade [salad] /. salad sale [sal] dirty salle [sal] /. hall, room, theater; — de classe classroom; — k manger dining room salon [sal3] m. drawing-room, parlor saluer [salqe] to salute, bow to, bow Samaritain [samarite] m. Samar- itan {biblical character; a mer- ciful man) samedi [samdi] m. Saturday sang [sa] m. blood sans [sa] without, were it not for; — que without sante [sate]/, health sapristi ! [sapristi] my goodness I sauter [sote] to leap, jump sauver [sove] to save savoir [savwa:r] § 222 to know, know how; — le franpais to know French; aucun homme ne saurait no man can Savon [sav5] m. soap scene [ssm] /. scene saence [sjajs] /. science, knowl- 66 [sa] oneself, to oneself, him- self, herself, etc. sec, seche [ssk, seJ] dry second [sago] second seconde [sago id] /. second section [ssksjo] /. section, para- graph Seine [ssin] /. river on which Paris is situated seize [ssiz] sixteen seizieme [sezJEm] sixteenth semaine [samen] /. week sembler [sasble] to seem sens [sa:s] m. sense, direction, way sentir [satiir] § 166 to feel, smell; — bon to smell sweet; se — to feel oneself, feel sept [set] seven septembre [septa ibr] m. Septem- ber septieme [sstjsm] seventh serai [sare] 1 sg. fut. 6tre servi [ssrvi] p. part, servir ready {of meals) serviette [sErvJEt]/. towel, napkin servir [sErviir] § 166 to serve, be of service, be of use; — k quelque chose to be of some use; se — de to use seul [soel] alone, single seulement [soelma] only, but, even, merely si [si] if, whether si [si] so, however; — rapide que however swift Sicile [sisU] /. Sicily {an island and province of Italy) siecle [sJEkl] m. century sien [sjg] his, hers, its; les — s his own sifler [sifle] to whistle, hiss, sing sifflet [sifls] TO. whistle signe [sip] m. sign; faire — to beckon signifier [sijiifje] to mean silence [silo is] m. silence singulier [ssgylje] m. singular 510 VOCABULARY sire [siir] m. sire, your majesty six [sis] six sixieme [sizjem] sixth soeur [scEir] /. sister soi Hswa] oneself, himself soie Cswa] /. silk soif [swaf] /. thirst; avoir — to be thirsty soigner [swajie] to care for soin [swsj TO. care; avoir (pren- dre) — to take care soir [swair] m. evening; le — in the evening; hier — last even- ing soiree [sware]/. evening sols [swa] 1 sg. pres. subj. and S sg. impve. Stre soixante [swasait] sixty; dix seventy soixante-quinze [swazQitkeiz] seventy-five sol [sol] m. soil, ground soldat [solda] m. soldier soleil [sole;]] m. sun somme [som] /. sum sommeil [some;]] m. sleep sommes [som] 1 pi. pres. ind. etre sommet [some] m. summit, top son [s5] TO. sound son, sa, ses [s5, sa, se] his, her, its songe [so 13] TO. dream songer [sose] § 156 to think sonner [sone] to sound, ring, strike (clock) sorte [sort] /. sort; de — que so that sortir [sortiir] § 166 to come out, go out, stick out, arise; faire — to put out, force out sot [so] -te foohsh, stupid sou [su] TO. sou, halfpenny, cent souSrant [sufra] poorly, not well soulager [sulase] § 156 to relieve Soulier [sulje] to. (low) shoe soupe [sup] /. soup sous [au] under, in the reign of, in souvenir [suvnisr] m. recollection, remembrance souvenir: se — [sasuvniir] § 178 to remember; je me souviens (de), 11 me souvient (de) I re- member souvent [suva] often soyez [swaje] S pi. pres. svbj. ana impve. etre soyons [swaj3] 1 pi. pres. subj. and impve. 6tre sport [spoir] m. sport statue [staty] /. statue Strasbourg [strazbuir] to. Stras- burg stylo (graphe) [stilo(graf)] to. fountain pen sud [syd] m. south suis [sqi] 1 sg. pres. indie. 6tre, and suivre Suisse [sqis] /. Switzerland suite [sqit] /. continuation; tout de — immediately suivant [sqiva] prep, according to, following; adj. following; noun le (la) suivant (-e) the next (boy, girl) suivre [sqi:vr] § 206 to follow; — des yeux to look after, watch sujet [syss] m. subject, cause sur [s3t] on, upon, over, about sfir [syir] sure, certain surtout [syrtu] above all, espe- cially, particularly sus [sy] 1 sg. p. def. savoir syllabe [sila:b] /. syllable Syrie [sLri]/. Syria table [tabl] /. table tableau [tablo] to. picture, black- board; — noir blackboard tacher [taije] to try, endeavor taire: se — [sa teir] § 201 to be silent, become silent FBENCH-ENGLISH 511 tandis que [tadi(s)ka] whilst tant [taj so, so many, so much; — de fois so often; — que as much as, as long as; — mieux so much the better; — pis so much the worse tante [tait] /. aunt tard [tair] late; plus — later (on) tasse [ta!s]/. cup titer [ta:te] to feel taxi(metre) [taksi(mEtr)] m. taxi- cab (= meter for indicating •price of ' run ' of a cab) te [tg] thee, to thee, you, to you tel [tel] -le such, like, so; iin — such a one tenement [telma] so, so much temps [ta] m. time, weather; avec le — , k — in time; de — en — from time to time; dans le — que whilst; en meme — at the same time; par le — qu'il fait in such weather as it is; faire beau — ■ to be fine weather; mauvais — bad weather; quel — fait-il? what sort of weather is it? tendresse [tadrss] /. affection tenir [taniir] § 177 to hold, have, hold on, hold out, keep, resist; be anxious, insist on; be con- tained in, find room in; il ne tiendra qu'a vous que it will be your own fault if; — bon to stand fast; tiens ! tenez ! now then! here! look! indeed! se — to hold oneself, stay, stand tennis [tsnis] m. tennis tenter [taite] to attempt, tempt terre [teirj/. earth, ground, land; par — , k — on the ground; la Terre sainte the Holy Laud terrible [tsribl] terrible tite [teit]/. head texte [tskst] m. text the [te] m. tea theatre [teaitr] m. theater theiere [tejsir]/. teapot Thomas [tama] m. Thomas tien [tje] thine, yours tiens! [tjg] {1 sg. pres. indie, and 2 sg. impve. of tenir) hallo! in- deed! is that so! tiers [tJEir] to. third part tins [te] 1 sg. p. def, tenir tirer [tire] to draw, pull, deduce, take, shoot toi [twa] thee, thou, you toilette [twakt] /. toilet, dress; faire sa — to dress tomber [t5be] to fall; faire — to knock down ton, ta, tes [t3, ta, te] thy, your ton [t3] TO. tone, voice tort [to:r] to. wrong; avoir — to be (in the) wrong t6t [to] soon; plus — sooner toucher [tuje] to touch; — a to be near, approach; n'y touchez pas do not touch it, hands off toujours [tusuir] always, still, at all events; disait — kept saying; pour — for ever tour [tu!r] /. tower Touraine [turen] /. province in the center of France, in which. Tours is situated toumer [tume] to turn Tours [tur] to. city southwest of Paris, on the Loire river, the seat of a famous cathedral tout, toute, tous, toutes [tu, tut, tu(s), tut] all, any, every, everything; quite; — le monde everybody; — le jour, toute la joumee the whole day; tous les jours every day; tous or toutes (les) deux both; toutes les annees every year; — a fait altogether; — a I'heure a little while ago; directly; — de suite at once; — ce que all that, 512 VOCABULAKT whatever; — de mSme all the same; — 4 coup suddenly; rien du — nothing at all; le — the whole; pas du — not at all traduction [tradyksj5] /. transla- tion traduire [tradqisr] § 185 to trans- late train [tre] m. train; en — de busy at trait [tre] m. trait, feature, action trailer [trste] to treat, entertain; — de to call tramway [tramwej m. tramway, street car tranquille [^trakil] quiet, calm, easy in mind, at peace; soyez — don't be uneasy, don't worry, be quiet tranquillement [trakilma] calmly travail [travaCOj] fn,- work, labor travailler [travaje] to work travers [traveir] m. breadth; k — through, across; en — de across traverser [traverse] to traverse, cross, go through; — en cou- rant to run across treize [trsiz] thirteen trembler [treble] to tremble trente [trait] thirty tres [trs] very, very much tresor [trezoir] m. treasure triomphe [trisf] m. triumph triste [trist] sad trois [trwa] three troisieme [trwazjem] third tromper [trSpe] to deceive; se — to be mistaken trop [tro] too, too much, too many trot [tro] m. trot trouver [truve] to find, think; aller — to go to (see, meet) ; se — to find oneself, be, feel, be situated tu [ty] thou, you tuer [tqe] to kill Tuileries [tqilri] /. pi. Tuileries (once a royal palace in Paris; now only the gardens remain) tulipe [tylip] /. tulip U un, une [oe, yn] one, a, an; 1' — ■ one; 1' — (et) I'autre both; les uns les autres one another utile [ytil] viseful utilite [ytUite] /. utiUty, use va [va] 3 sg. pres. indie, and 2 sg. impve. aller vacances [vakais] /. pi. hoUdays vache [vaS] /. cow vain [ve] vain; en — in vain vais [ve] / sg. pres. indie, aller vaisseau [veso] m. ship vaisselle [vssel]/. dishes valet [vale] m. servant valeur [valair] /. value vallee [vale] /. valley valoir [valwair] § 223 to be worth; — rnieux to be better; — la peine to be worth the trouble or worth while varier [varje] to vary vas [va] S sg. pres. indie, aller vaudrai [vodre] 1 sg. fut. valoir vaut [vo] 3 sg. pres. indie, valoir vendre [vSidr] § 210 to sell vendredi [vaidrgdi] m. Friday; Vendredi saint Good Friday venir [v9ni:r] § 178 to come; vint k passer happened to go by; — de to have just; on venait de lui donner they had just given him; il venait voir he came to see; lui — a I'esprit to occur to him; il vint a nous he came to us; viens veis moi come to mo FRENCH-ENGLISH 513 vent [va] m. wind; il fait du — it is windy Verrai [vsre] 1 sg. fut. voir verre [ve;r] m. glass vers [vEir] towards, to, about Versailles [versasj^ tn. city aboitt twelve miles southwest of Paris. It contains the great ch&teau which was the chief residence of Louis XIV. verser [vsrsej to pour (out) vert [vEir] green vertu [vsrtyj /. virtue veston [vesta] m. sack coat veuillez [voeje] impve. of vouloir be so good as, please veut [v0] S sg. pres. ind. vouloir veux [v0] 1 sg. pres. ind. vouloir viande [vjaid]/. meat vide [vidj empty vie [vi] /. life, living vieil CvJEij] see vieux vieillard [vJEJair] to. old man viendrai [vJEdre] 1 sg. fut. venir viens [vjs] 1 sg. pres. ind. and 2 sg. impve. venir vieux, vieil, vieille [yi0, vJEij, vJE!]] old, aged; un vieux an old man, old fellow vigne [viji] /. vine(s) vignoble [vijiobl] m. vineyard vigoureu-x []vigur0] -se vigorous vilain [vile] ugly, nasty village [vilars] m. village ville [vil] /. town, city; en — downtown, in town vin [ve] m. wine vingt [ve] twenty (for numerals between vingt and trente, see Lesson XXXV) Vint [ve] 3 sg. p. def. venir vis [vi] 1 sg. p. def. voir visite [vizit] /. visit visiter [vizite] to visit, see in detail, inspect vite [vit] quick, quickly, fast vivre [viivr] § 211 to live; faire — to maintain; vive ! long live! hurrah for! voici [vwasi] see here, here is, here are; nous — ! here we are ! voiia [vwala] behold, there is, there are, that is, there we are! — que behold, lo; — ce que c'est that's how things go; en — un that's one; la — ! here (there) it is! nous — Iherewearel voir [vwair] § 224 to see; faire — to show; se — to be seen voisin [vwazg] neighboring; m. neighbor Toiture [vwatyir]/. carriage, car; en — in a carriage ; se promener en — to take a drive voix [vwa]/. voice voler [vole] to fly voler [vole] to steal, rob voleur [voloejr] to. thief, robber; au — 1 stop thief! volontiers [volstje] wilhngly, gladly Voltaire [voltEir] famous French philosopher, writer and leader of social progress, b. 1694, d. 1778 volume [volym] m. volume vont [v3] 3 pi. pres. indie, aller votre, vos [votr, vo] your v6tre [voitr] yours voudrai [vudre] 1 sg. fut. vouloir vouloir [vulwair] § 225 to will, wish, want; en — a to be angry with; je voudrais (bien) I should like; — dire to mean; aurait voulu would have liked vous [vu] you, to you, yourself, yourselves voyage [vwajais] to. journey, voyage; bon — ! a pleasant journey! compagnon de — fellow traveler voyager [vwajase] § 156 to travel voyageur [vwajasceirjTO. travelei 514 VOCABTJLAKY vrai [vte] true, real Y ma] Probab y "i J ^^^^^^ ^ (^^e) some ^ue'gf/.Sr^^ew yeicD0].^.o/«Ueyes VOCABULARY ENGLISH-FRENCH [h aspirate is indicated thus: 'h] a, an un, m., une, /.; — franc — dozen un franc la douzaine; — franc — day un franc par jour abandon abandonner abbess abbesse, /. ability capacite, /., talent, to. able : be — • pouvoir, savoir about de, autour de, environ, sur; — three o'clock vers (les) trois heures; — it en; be — s'agir de, etre sur le point de; he has this good thing — him il a cela de bon; set — se mettre k above au-dessus de abroad k I'dtranger absence absence, /. absent absent abtindant abondant accept accepter accession accession, /. accident accident, m. accidental accidentel, par accident accompany accompagner according to selon, d'aprfes account : on — of S, cause de; en ache : have head — avoir mal II la tgte; my head — s j'ai mal k la tSte acquaintance connaissance, /. acquainted: be — with connaltre; become — ■ with faire connais- sance avec, faire la connaissance de acquire acqu6rir across de I'autre c6t6 de, en face de act agir, se conduire action action, /., trait, m. actor acteur, to., com^dien, to. add aj outer address adresser adjective adjectif, to. admire admirer admit admettre adorn faire I'omement de advance avancer advice avis, to., conseU, to. advise conseiUer, recommander affair affaire, /. affection affection, /. afraid : be — (of) avoir peur (de), craindre; — of effray^ de; be much — avoir grand'peur, avoir bien peur Africa Afrique, /. after prep, and adv. apres; ten minutes — five cinq heures dix (minutes) after conj. apres que afternoon apres-midi, to. and f. afterwards ensuite, puis, apres, plus tard again encore, encore une fois, de nouveau against centre age dge, to.; be twenty years of — avoir vingt ans ago il y a ahead : walk — marcher le pre- mier 515 516 VOCABULAKT aid aider, secourir air air, m. Ajaccio Ajaccio alas ! hglas! all tout {pi. tous); — that (which) tout ce qui; not at — pas du tout; — passions toutes lea passions allow laisser, permettre almost presque alone seul; let — laisser tran- quiUe along par; as they went — che- min faisant aloud k haute voix already d6}k Alsace Alsace, /. also aussi althoxigh bien que, quoique always toujours ambassador ambassadeur, m. ambition ambition, /. America Am6rique /. American americain amiable aimable among, amongst parmi, entre, chez amuse amuser; — oneself, s'a- muser ancestors ancStres, m. pi.; aieux, m. pi. ancient ancien, antique and et; go • — ■ visit aller visiter, aUer voir angry : — at, — with fdch^ de (contre) ; be — , get — se facher animal animal, m., bete, /. another im autre, encore un; not — ne . . . pas (point) d'autre answer n. r^ponse, /. answer v. r^pondre ant fourmi, /. antechamber antichambre, /. antiquity antiquity, /. anxious : be — tenir k any de + def. art.; de; en; au- cun, quelconque, tout; I haven't — je n'en ai pas; have you — 7 en avez-vous ? don't give him — ne lui en donnez pas; — thing (with neg.) rien; — one {with neg.) personne anybody, anyone quelqu'un, on; not^. . . — ne . . . personne, ne . . . aucun anyone see anybody anything quelque chose, m.; not ... — ne . . . rien; — good quelque chose de bon; not . . . — good ne . . . rien de bon anywhere : not ... — ne . . . nuUe part apiece chacun, la piSce appear paraitre, apparaltre, sem- bler, comparaltre appetite appetit, m. applaud applaudir k apple pomme, /. apple tree pommier, m. appoint nommer approach n. approche, /. approach v. approcher de, s'appro cher de approbation approbation, /. approve trouver bon April avril, m. Arab Arabe, m. are see be ; here is {or are) voici; there is {or are) voUi argument argument, m. Ariosto Arioste (1') arise s'61ever, nattre arithmetic arithm^tique, /. arm bras, m. army arm^e, /. around autour de; she looks — her elle regarde autour d'eUe; go — the city faire le tour de la ville arouse exciter arrange arranger arrest arreter arrival arriv6e, /. ENGLISH-FRENCH 517 amve amver art art, m. article article, m., objet, to.; — of dress article de toilette artist artiste, m. as comme; aussi, si; pendant que, en; — ... — aussi . . . que; not — ... — pas aussi . . . que, pas si . . . que; not so . . . — pas aussi . . . que, pas si . . . que, moins . . . que; — much money — autant d'argent que; — long — tant que; — soon — ■ aussitot que; — if comme si; — well — aussi bien que; — to quant k ascend monter (sur) ashamed : be — , feel — avoir honte ask demander, prier; — for de- mander; — him for it le lui demander; — oneself se de- mander asleep endormi; be — toe en- dormi, donnir; we have been — nous avons donni; fall — s'endormir assail assaillir assist aider associate s'associer (avec) assure assurer astonish Stonner astonishment gtonnement, m. at k, chez, de; — (the house, shop, office, etc., of) chez; — the doctor's chez le docteur; — my father's chez mon pfere; — home chez moi, chez toi, etc.; — my house chez moi; — otir house chez nous; — daybreak des le point du jour attach attacher attack attaquer attention attention, /.; pay — , give — faire attention attract attirer auburn ch&tain audience assistance, /., assistants, TO. pi. August aolit, m. Augustus Auguste, to. author auteur, to. autumn automne, to.; in — en automne avenue avenue, /. avidity avidity, /. avoid ^viter await attendre awake intr. se r^veiUer away : go — partir, s'en aller; take — 6ter; far — loin, loin d'ici; run — se sauver axe 'hache, /. B back dos, m. back: be — toe de retour; give — rendre; come — revenir; go — retourner; bring — ramener bad mauvais, m^chant, peu loyal badly mal; hurt (very) — faire (beaucoup de) mal S, Bseda BSde, m. bag sac, m. bake cuire ball (Jor playing) balle, /.; play — jouer k la baUe ball {dance) bal, to. banish bannir bank {of stream) bord, to.; on the — au bord bank {financial) banque, /.; — bill (note) billet (to.) de banque banker banquier, to. banking house maison (/.) de ' banque barefoot nu-pieds, les pieds nus bareheaded d^couvert, la t^te nue bargain march^, m. bask se chauffer basket panier, to. Bastille Bastille, /. 518 VOCABtJIiARY battle bataille, /. be §tre; y avoir; — {of health) se porter, aller; — about to aller, gtre sur le point de, de- voir; — bom naitre; — {of weather) faire; — {of age) avoir; — {of time) y avoir; — afraid avoir peur; here is (are) voici; there is (are) yoilk, il y a; is he finishing? finit-il? is he not? etc. n'est-ce pas? how are you? comment vous por- tez-vous ? comment allez-vous ? comment 5a va-t-il? comment 5a va? I am well je me porte bien, 9a va bien, etc.; I am to do it je dois le faire; I am going to do it je vais le faire; it is fine il fait beau; is it? vraiment? he is ten years old il a dix ans; a house to — sold mie maison ^ vendre bean 'haricot, m.; string — s 'hari- cots verts bear n. ours, to. bear v. {of fruit trees) donner beard barbe, /. beast animal, m., bete, /.; {for riding) monture, /. beat battre beautiful beau, joU beauty beauts, /. because parce que become devenir, se faire; — {suit) seoir; what has — of her? qu'est^elle devenue? bed : go to — se coucher; be in — Stre au lit, etre eouch^ bedroom chambre (/.) k coucher before prep, devant {of place); avant {of time); avant de -|- infin.; — the judge par devant le juge before conj. avant que beg prier, demander, mendier; I — yoiir pardon pardon beggar mendiant, m. begin commencer, se mettre k; — again recommencer beginning commencement, m. behave se comporter, se conduire behead d^capiter behind derriere beUeve croire; it is believed on croit bell cloche, /.; little — {spherical) grelot; put the — on attacher le grelot k belong: — to etre k (de), appar- tenir k below : here — ici-bas bend courber benefactor bienfaiteur, m. beside k c6te de besides d'ailleurs, de plus best adj. le meiUeur best adv. le mieux; to do his — faire son possible better adj. meUleur better od». mieux; be — , be worth more valoir mieux; be — {of health) se porter mieux, aller mieux; Uke — , prefer aimer mieux between entre bicycle bicyolette /.; on a — k bicyclette bid : — good-bye to dire adieu (au rqvoir) k big grand, gros bind up bander bird oiseau, to. birthday fete, /., aimiversaire (to.) de ma (sa) naissance bite mordre bitterly amferement black noir blackboard tableau noir, to. blacksmith forgeron, mar6chal ferrant, m. blade brin to. blind aveugle ENGLISH-FRENCH 519 blond blond blow n. coup, m.; — with a stick coup de bdton blue bleu blunt brusque blush rougir board bord, m.; on — of a bord de boat bateau, m., canot, m.; go for a • — ride faire une prome- nade (se promener) en bateau (canot) body corps, m. boil bouillir bold Tiardi book livre, m. bom : be — naltre; he was — il est ne Boston Boston, m. both tous (les) deux, I'lm et I'autre; — ... and et . . . et bother ! interj. peste de! bother v. ennuyer, embeter bottom fond, m.; at the — of au fond de bow : — to saluer box botte, /. boy enfant, gargon, m.; my — mon enfant, m. branch branche, /. brave courageux, brave bread pain, m. break casser, rompre; — out 6clater; — one's arm se casser le bras; — off casser, 6ter; — up se dissoudre, se lever breakfast dejeuner, m. breathe respirer brick brique, /.; — house maison if.) en briques bridge pont, m. bring apporter; (carry) trans- porter; (lead) amener; — back ramener; — down descendre; — up (rear) Clever; — up ramener k la surface broad large brother frfere, m. brush n. brosse, /. brush V. brosser build batir, construire building Edifice, m., bitiment, m., monument, m. bim brioche, /. burn brtller burst 6clat, m. bury enterrer, ensevelir business commerce, m., affaires, /. pL; on — pour affaires; go into ■ — • se mettre dans les af- faires, se mettre en commerce busy occup6 (de); be — doing anything, be — at anything gtre en train de faire quelque chose, etre k faire quelque chose but mais; nothing — ne . . . rien . . . que butter beurre, m. buy acheter by par, de, sur, &,, en; — rubbing en frottant; — the way k pro- pos; go — passer; — sight de vue; taller — an inch plus grand d'un pouce; six feet — seven six pieds sur sept; — my watch k ma montre; — what he says k ce qu'il dit; loved — aim6 de cabbage chou, m. Ceedmon Cedmon cage cage, /. Cain Cain call appeler; faire venir; — a meeting convoquer une assem- ble; be — ed s'appeler camel chameau, m. can pouvoir, savoir; he — not il ne pent pas, il ne salt pas; it can't be cela ne se peut pas; see also could 520 VOCABULARY Canada Canada, m.; in or to — au Canada cane canne, /. camion shot coup (m.) de ca- non, m. capital adj. capital; n. chef-lieu, m. captain capitaine, m. capture prise, /. car tramway, m., wagon m., voiture, /. (both for railways); motor — auto(mobile), m. andf. caravan caravane, /. card carte, /. care : — for soigner; take — of avoir soin de, soigner; take — prendre garde, avoir soin, faire attention careful : be — ! attention! prenez carefully soigneusement careless negligent carnival camaval, m. carpenter charpentier, m., menui- sier, m. carriage voiture, /. carry porter; — off emporter; — the day I'emporter case cas, m.; in — (that) au cas que cat chat, m. catch attraper, prendre; — (a) cold s'enrhumer cathedral cathedrals, /. catholic catholique cattle b6tail, m. s., bestiaux, m. pi. cause n. cause, /. cause V. causer; exciter; — to faire cavalry cavalerie, /. cease cesser; without ceasing sans cesse ceiling plafond, to. celebrate c616brer celebrated c616bre celebration fSte, /. cent sou, m. centime centime, m, centiury sitele, m. certain certain, sdr chair chaise, /. chalk craie, /. chance 'hasard, m. change n. monnaie, /. change v. changer (de) chapter chapitre, to. charge charge, /. charitable charitable charm charmer, enchanter charming charmant, ravissant charmingly k ravir chase chasser, poursuivre chat causer cheap (k) bon march6, pas cher, pen cotiteux; — er a meHleui marche, moins cher cherry cerise, /. chicken poulet, m. chief chef, m. child enfant, to. andf. chimney chemin^e, /. China Chine, /. chopper bAcheron, to. Christian chr^tien Christopher Ghristophe chum camarade, to. and f. church 6glise, /.; at (to) — & r^ghse city ville, /.; in the — !l la ville, en ville city hall hotel (to.) de ville clad see clothe claimant pr^tendant, to. class classe, /. classroom classe, /. clean nettoyer clearly clairement clever habile, fort, intelligent cleverly habilement climb grimper, monter clock (town) horloge, /., (in rooms] pendule /. close fermer, clore ENGLISH-FRENCH 521 clothe vStir, habiller clothes vltements, m. pi., habits, m. pi. clumsy: be so — as to avoir la maladresse de; — fellow mala- droit, m. coat habit, to., (sack) veston, to. cock coq, TO. coffee caf6, to. cold adj. froid; n. froid, to.; be — (of living beings) avoir froid; be (get) — (of weather) fairs froid; I have — hands, my hands are — j'ai froid aux mains; catch (a) — s'enrhumer collar (man's) col, to.; faux-col, m. college college, to. colossal colossal Columbus Colomb PiolS] comb peigne, to. come venir, aniver; — again revenir; — back, — home re- venir; — to see, — and see venir voir; — down descendre; — up monter, arriver; — in entrer, rentrer; — out sortir; — ! voyons! aliens! comfortable commode; be — faire bon, 6tre bien coming arrivfe, /. command commander commandment commandement, m.; the Ten Commandments les dix commandements, le decalogue commence commencer commit commettre companion compagnon, to., com- pagne, /., camarade, to. and /.; traveling — compagnon de voyage company compagnie, /., soci6t€, /. compartment compartiment, to. compassion compassion, /. complain se plaindre complete complet complicated compliqud compliment compliment, to. comprise comprendre comrade camarade, to. andf. conceal cacher concert concert, to. conclude conclure condemn condamner condition condition, /., 6tat, to. confess avouer confidence confiance, /. confound confondre congratulate f^liciter (de or sur) conquer conqu^rir, vaincre conscience conscience, /. consecrate benir consent consentir consider consid^rer, regarder construct construire contain contenir continually sans cesse continue continuer contract contrat, to. contrary : on the — au contraire convenient commode, utile cook cuisinier, to., cuisinifere, /. cool frais; it is — (of loeather) il fait frais coolly tranquillement copper (coin) sou, to. copy exemplaire, to., copie, /. coral corail, to. corkscrew tire-bouchon, to. comer coin, m. cost coAter costs frais, to. pi. could past of can ; we — have written nous aurions pu 6crire; I — not do so je ne pourrais pas le faire; he — do that when be was here U pouvait faire cela quand il ^tait ici; I • — je pourrais, je pouvais; I — have j'aurais pu count compter country pays, m.; (native land) 522 VOCABULAEY patrie, /.; (as opposed to town) campagne, /.; in the — ^ la campagne county town chef-lieu, m. couple couple, m. and f. courage courage, m.; take — prendre (avoir) courage coitft cour, /. courtier courtisan, m. cousin cousin, m.; cousine, /. cover oouvrir; — ^ed with cou- vert de cow vache, /. cravat cravate, /. crawl se trainer create creer creature creature, /., etre, m., b^te, /. crime crime, m. criminal criminel, m. critic critique, m. Croesus Cresus crops r^colte, /. cross adj. m^chant cross V. traverser crowd foule, /. crown couronne, /. cry pleurer, crier; — out crier, s'ecrier cup tasse, /., coupe, /. cupboard armoire, /. cure gu6rir curiosity curiosity, /. curse maudire custom coutume, /. cut couper; have one's hair — se faire couper les cheveux daily tous les jours, par jour dance danser danger danger, m. dangerous dangereux dark noir; be — faire noir, faire obscur date (iirne) date, /. date (fruit) datte, /. daughter fille, /. day jour, m., joum^e, /.; every — tous les jours, chaque jour; in those — s k cette ^poque; what — • of the month is it to- day? quel jour du mois sommes- nous aujourd'hui? etc.; the — • after le lendemain (de); the — after to-morrow apres-demain; the — before yesterday avant- hier; all — (long) toute la journee, tout le jour; from — to — de jour en jour; be — (daylight) faire jour daybreak point (m.) du jour; at (since) — d6s le point du jour dead mort deaf sourd deaf-mute sourd-muet deal : a great — , a good — beau- coup dear cher; not so — pas si cher, moins cher death mort, /.; be at the point of — etre sur le point de mourir; put to — mettre a mort debt dette, /. deceive tromper December d^cembre, m. declare declarer defect d^faut, m. dejection abattement, m. delay diff^rer delight : — ^ in se plaire & deUghted enchants, charm^ delightful charmant deliverance dflivrance, /. delve bgcher, creuser deny nier depart s'en aller, partir depend : — on d^pendre de describe d^crire deserve m^riter desire disirer, vouloir desk pupitre, m. ENGLISH-FRENCH 523 despair d&esp6rer dessert dessert, m. destination destination, /. destroy d6truire, perdre determine determiner, r&oudre, decider, avoir I'id^e devour d^vorijr dial cadran, m. diameter diametre, m. did see do die mourir; — away se mourir difference difference, /.; that makes no — ■ cela ne fait rien different different difficult difficile difficulty difficulte, /., peine, /. dig creuser, becher diminish diminuer dine diner dining room salle (/.) k manger dinner diner, m. direct adj. droit disagreeable d^sagr^able disappear disparaltre discover d&ouvrir discuss discuter discussion discussion, /. dishes vaisselle, /. disobliging d&obligeant disperse se disperser, se s^parer displease deplaire (a) dispute se disputer distinction distinction, /. distinguished distingu^, c61Sbre distract distraire distrust se defier de, se mffier de dive plonger 'iivide diviser; partager do faire; — {of health) se porter, etc.; — without se passer de; — you like? aimez-vous? [em- phatic auxiliary) ; I — not do it je ne le fais pas; — not do so ne le faites pas; he does not speak U ne parle pas; he works, does he not? il travaille, n'est-ce pas? — not (don't) speak ne parlez pas; I — not non, mon- sieur; I did oui, monsieur; did he speak? a-t-il parl6? be done se faire doctor m^decin, m., docteur, m. doctrine doctrine, /. dog chien, m. doll poup^e, /. dollar dollar, m., piastre, /.; a — a dozen un dollar la douzaine don't, doesn't see do door porte, /.; neid: — k c6te doubt n. doute, m.; no — sans doute doubt V. douter down : — stairs en bas; come — , go — (stairs) descendre, aller en bas; bring — descendre; town en viUe; bent — courb^; sit — s'asseoir; lie — se coucher dramatic dramatique draw tirer; tracer; — near s'approcher (de) drawing dessin, m. drawing-room salon, m. dream n. songe, m., rfeve, m. dream v. r^ver, songer, faire des songes dress n. robe, /.; toilette, /. dress v. habiUer; se mettre; s'habiUer; be — ed fitre mis drink boire drive n.: go for a — , be out for a ■ — se promener en voiture (auto) drive v. conduire, mener, mou- "voir, chasser; — away chasser drop laisser tomber drown se noyer dry sec ducat ducat, m. duke due, m. dumb muet dupe dupe, /. during pendant 524 VOCABULARY duty devoir, m. dwell demeurer £ each chaque, tout each one chacun each other reflex, pron. pi. nous, vous, se; indef. Fun I'autre, les uns les autres eagerly avec empressement ear oreille, /.; — ache mal aux oreilles; — (of wheat) ^pi, m. earUer plus t6t, de meilleure heure early de bonne heure earn gagner earth terre, /. easily facilement, ais^ment easy facile eat manger; — grass paltre economical (of persons) ^conome educated instruit education Education, (of persons) instruction, /.; receive a good — faire de bonnes 6tudes Edward fidouard effort effort, m. eight 'huit eighty quatre-vingt(s) either ou; nor ... — ni . . . non plus; he hasn't any — il n'en a pas non plus eldest alne elect 61ire elephant fl^phant, m. eleven onze else autre; autre chose; not... anything — , nothing — ne . . . rien autre elsewhere autre part, ailleurs embrasure embrasure, /. emperor empereur, m. employ : admit into his — admet- tre chez lui empty vide enclose clore, enclore enclosed ci-inclus encourage encourager end n. fin, /., bout, m.; come to a bad — finir mal end V. finir, se terminer enemy ennemi, m. engage s'engager England Angleterre, /. English anglais; —man Anglais, m.; — (the langiuige) I'anglais, anglais, m. enjoy jouir de; — oneself s'amu- ser enough assez (de); not — pas assez; kind — assez bon; be — to sufEre pour enter entrer (dans) enterprise entreprise, /. entrance entree, /. equal : be — • (to) 6galer equivalent Equivalent, m. error erreur, /. escape 6viter, 6chapper, s'Eohap- per, s'enfuir; have a narrow — I'Echapper belle especially surtout estate propriStE, /., biens, m. pi., domaine, m. Europe Europe, /. European europ6en even mSme; — if, — though quand mfime evening soir, m., soiree, /.; in the — le soir; last — , yester- day — hier (au) soir ever jamais every tout, chaque; — Sunday tous les dimanehes; — otbei day tous les deux jours everybody tout le monde, m. everyone chacun everything tout, toute chose; — that tout ce qui (que) everywhere partout evil mal; doing mal faire, m. ENGLISH-FRENCH 525 exactly exactement, pr6cis6ment, (with time) precis examine examiner, visiter example exemple, m.; for — par exemple excavation excavation, /., fouille, /. excite exciter; 6mouvoir exclaim s'6crier excuse excuser; — me pardon exercise devoir, m., exercice, m. exhibit exposer expect attendre, s'attendre, comp- ter, esp^rer expense d^pense, /., d^pens, m. pi. explain expliquer eye oeil, to., yeux, pi. fa^de facade, /. face figure, /., visage, to.; shut the door in one's — fermer la porte au nez k quelqu'un fact fait, TO.; in — en eflet fail faiUir; to — in manquer k, de fairy f6e, /.; — story conte de ffe(s) faithfixl fidele fall tomber; — due dchoir; — out se trouiller; — asleep s'endormir false faux familiarity familiarity, /. familiarly familiferement family famille, /. famous fameux, cfl&bre far adv. loin; — from loin que, loin de; be — from il s'en faut de beaucoup; — away loin, loin d'ici; as — '■ as jusqu'S,; how — is it? combien y a-t-il? farmer paysan, m., fermier, to., cultivateur, to. farmhouse fenne, /. farm servant valet (to.) de ferme farther plus loin; — off plus loin; — on plus loin fashion mode, /. fast vite fastidious difScile fate destin, to., sort, m. father pere, to. favor faveur, /. favorite favori, to. fear n. crainte, /., peur, /.; for — that de crainte que; for — > of de crainte de fear v. craindre, avoir peur feast festin, to., banquet, to. February f^vrier, to. feed nourrir feel tdter; sentir; — hungry sentir la faim, avoir faim feeling sentiment, to. fell abattre fellow gargon, m., individu to. type, TO.; good — ■ brave homme; my good — mon ami; the brave little — s les petits bonshom- mes; the clumsy — le maladroit fence cl6ture, /. festival, festivity fete, /. fetch aller chercher few peu, peu de, quelques; a — quelques-uns; but — ne . . . guere, ne . . . que peu fewer moins de field champ, m. fifteen quinze fifteenth quinziSme, quinze fifth cinqui^me, cinq fifty ciuquante fight combattre, se battre fill remplir finally enfin, S, la fin; — do finii par faire find trouver; — out dScouvrir; be found se trouver fine beau, brave; it is — (weather) il fait beau (temps) 526 VOOABULABT fine-looking beau, 61€gant finger doigt, m. finish finir fire feu, to.; set — to mettre le feu k first adj. premier; for the — time pour la premiere fois first adv. d'abord; at — d'abord fish V. pecher fishing pSche, /. fit aller a; my suit — s me well men complet me va bien fitting convenable five cinq flattering flatteur flee fuir, s'enfuir fleet flotte, /. floor plancher m., (hardwood) parquet, to. Florida Floride, /. flower fleur, /.; in — en fleurs fluently couramment fly voler; — away s'envoler foggy : be — faire du brouillard folded crois6 follow suivre following suivant; the — - day le jour suivant, le lendemain folly folie, /., sottise, /. fond : be — of aimer food nourriture, /. foolish fou, sot, bete foot pied, TO.; on — -a pied; tread under — fouler aux pieds for prep, pour, pendant, de, cen- tre, par; — a moment un moment; — (during) pendant; set out — • partir pour; — {since) depuis; — a long time, — a week depuis longtemps, depuis une semaine; — me pour moi; — it en; trade — 6ch anger pour (centre); I am sorry — it j'en suis fdch6 for conj. car forbid d^fendre force n. force, /. force V. forcer; I was — d j'ai dfl foreign, foreigner stranger; in — countries k 1' stranger forest foret, /. forget oublier fork fourchette, /. form former former : the — celui-ci, celui-lS, formerly autrefois fortnight quinzaine, /., quinze jours, TO. pi. fortunate heureux fortime fortune, /.; good — bon- heur, TO.; make one's — faire fortune forty quarante; about — qua- rantaine, /. four quatre fourteenth quatorzieme, quatorze fourth quatrieme, quatre; — part le quart fox renard, to. franc franc, m. France France, /.; in — , to — en France Frederick the Great Fr6d&ic le Grand free Hbre freeze geler French adj. fran^ais; — (the fan- jMo^e) lefran^ais, frangais; - — man Frangais, to.; — teacher professeur (m.) de frangais; — history histoire (/.) de France; — grammar grammaire fran- 5aise Friday vendredi, m. friend ami, m.; amie, /. friendly aimable friendship amiti^, /. frighten effrayer, faire peur k; get (be) — ed avoir peur; be very much — ed etre tres (bien) effray6, avoir trfes (bien, grand') peur ENGLISH-FRENCH 527 frog grenouille, /. from de, de dessus, ^, k partir de, dans, d'apres, depuis; — day to day de jour en jour; — it en; — nature d'apres nature; drink — a glass boire dans un verre; take — the table pren- dre sur la table; — me de ma part front : in — of devant fruit fruit, to. frying pan po^le, /. fulfill accomplir full plein furnish foumir furthermore d'ailleurs gallery galerie, /. garden jardin, m. Gascon Gascon, m. gate porte, /. gather cueiUir gay gai general g(5n^ral, m. generally en gen&al, g6n6ral6- ment, ordinairement generous g6n6reux gentleman monsieur, to.; gentle- men messieurs George George (s) German aUemand get prendre; avoir; obtenir; go and — aller chercher, aller trouver; — up, rise se lever; — up on monter sur; — (be- come) devenir; — made, have made faire faire; — ■ married se marier; — angry se fScher; — on avancer; — - to arriver k; — out descendre; — in monter ghost revenant, to. girl (jeune) fille, /., enfant, /. give donner; — away donner; — back rendre; — too much for payer trop cher glad: — at, — of content de, charm6 de gladly volontiers, avec plaisir glass verre, to. glory gloire, /. glove gant, to. go aller, marcher; se rendre; — away s'en aller, partir; — in, into entrer dans; — out sortir; — with accompagner, aller avec; — by, — past passer (devant); — up (stairs) aUer en haut, monter; — down (stairs) aller en bas, descendre; — and see aller voir; — around the city faire le tour de la vOle; — to bed se coucher; — for a row, sail, etc. se pro- mener en bateau; — (out) for a walk aller se promener (k pied), aJler faire une promenade (4 pied); — for a drive se prome- ner en voiture; — for a ride se promener k cheval; — for, — after, — and get aller chercher; — back (again) retoumer; — downtown aUer en ville; — home aUer chez soi, rentrer; — on continuer (a), aller en; — to sleep s'endormir; — to France aller en France, partir pour la France; — there ! vas- y, allez-y ! goat chevre, /. God Dieu; gods dieux, m. pi. gold or, to.; adj. (of gold) d'or, en or golden d'or good bon, brave, sage, juste; my — fellow mon ami, to.; be so — as to, be — enough to voulez-vous bien, ayez la bont6 de, veuillez good bien, to.; do — faire du bien good-bye adieu, au revoir goodness bont6, /. 528 VOCABXJLAET goods marchandises, /. pi. gooseberry bush groseillier, m. grace grS,ce, /. grain grain, m. grammar grammaire, /. grandfather grand-pere, m., aieul, m. grandmother grand'mfere, /. grape (s) raisin (s), m. grass herbe, /. gravely gravement great grand, gros; — deal beau- coup Great Britain Grande-Bretagne, /. Greek grec green vert; — peas petits pois, m. pi. grind moudre ground terre, /.; (up) on the — ^ terre, par terre grow croitre; — larger grandir grudge : have a — en vouloir k guard garde, m. gun fusU, m. H hair cheveux, m. pi. half adj. demi; — past eight huit heures et demie; — an hour una demi-heure half n. moitiS/.; by — de la moiti^ half adv. k demi hand main, /.; shake — s with donner la main k; on the right — a, droits; on the left — h gauche; — {of a clock) ai- guille, /. hang pendre happen arriver; venir k, avoir lieu happily heureusement happy heureux, content hard difficile; work — travailler ferme hardly k peine harm faire mal k harp 'harpe, /. harvest moisson, /. hasten se hiter, se dfip^cher; into the presence of accourir aupres de hat chapeau, m.; have — (s) on 6tre couvert(s); have — (s) ofE etre d§couvert(s) hate 'hair hatred 'haine, /. hatter chapelier, m. have avoir; obtenir; — (as aux- iliary) avoir, etre; I — to be there il faut que j'y sois; — him go faites-le partir; — {caitse to be) faire; I am having a house built je fais b&tir une maison; — done faire faire; — one's hair cut se faire couper les cheveux; — just venir de; — to do with avoir affaire k; he has spoken, has he not? il a parl6, n'est-oe pas? — to ^tre oblige de; — on porter Havre le Havre hay foin, m. hazelnut noisette, /. he il, lui; ce; — who celui qui; — himself lui-meme head tite, /.; maltre, m. headache : have — avoir mal k la tete heal gu^rir health santi, /. hear entendre; — from recevoir des nouveUes de; I — from him je re^ois de ses nouvelles; — of entendre parler de heart cceur, m. heat chaleur, /. heavy lourd Helena : St. — Sainte-H61&ie help aider, secourir hen poule, /. hence aussi, done Henry Henri, m. ENGLISH-FRENCH 529 her adj. son, sa, ses; lui . . . le (k eUe) her pers. pron. la, elle; to — lui, k eUe; — own le sien, k eUe here ici, ci, y; — below ici-bas; — is, — are voici hero 'hfiros, m. heroine heroine, /. hers le sien, a elle herself se, elle-meme hide cacher high 'haut; — price grand prix, m., tant hill colline, /. him le, lui; to — ,for — lui; — who celui qui himself se, soi, lui, lui-m6me; to — en lui-meme; he — lui-mtoe hinder empgcher his adj. son, sa, ses; lui . . . le (a, lui) his pron. le sien, k lui; — own le sien historical historique history histoire, /. hither : — and thither 5^ et ]k hold tenir; — out tendre hole trou, m. holiday jour (m.) de fgte; — s vacances, /. pi. holy benit; saint home : (at) — chez moi, chez toi, etc., k la maison; go — aller chez moi, chez toi, etc., aUer k la maison, rentrer honest honn^te, loyal, probe honesty loyaut^, /., probity, /. honor n. honneur, m. honor v. honorer hope esp^rer, compter horse cheval, m. horseback : on — k cheval; ride — monter k cheval horseshoe fer (m.) k cheval hot chaud, br layonne nuillm ~^.. I j-'Mun I ;5gzTeFs^ SNarbonne ,-4 Golfe du Lion :'..m' - ZKUSr ^'""■^ MEP MEDITERRANEE.